Etap PowerStation® 4.0-User Guide-Dr Tarek Nagla

December 2001
Operation Technology, Inc.

Certification No. A3147
Registered to ISO 9001
Volume I - User Interface
Volume II - Analysis Modules
User Guide
PowerStation
4.0

Copyright 2001
All Rights Reserved

This manual has copyrights by Operation Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. Under the copyright
laws, this manual may not be copied, in whole or in part, without the written consent of Operation
Technology, Inc. The Licensee may copy portions of this documentation only for the exclusive use of
Licensee. Any reproduction shall include the copyright notice. This exception does not allow copies to
be made for other persons or entities, whether or not sold. Under this law, copying includes translating
into another language.

Certain names and/or logos used in this document may constitute trademarks, service marks, or trade
names of Operation Technology, Inc. or other entities.

Access, Excel, ODBC, SQL Server, Windows NT, Windows 2000, Windows Me, Windows 98,
Windows XP, and Microsoft Word are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
AutoCad is a registered trademark of Autodesk.
Oracle is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation.
PowerPlot is a registered trademark of Jackson & Associates.
Crystal Reports is a registered trademark of Seagate Software.
MATLAB and Simulink are registered trademarks of MathWorks
Screen shot(s) reprinted by permission from Microsoft Corporation.

Operation Technology, Inc. believes that the information contained herein is accurate as of its publication
date, and such information is subject to change without notice. This information is provided as is
without warranty of any kind, either expressed or implied, including but not limited to the implied
warranties of merchantability, fitness for a particular purpose, or non-infringement. Operation
Technology, Inc. assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions in this publication or any other
documents referenced in this publication.

Southern California

(949) 462-0100 Sales
(949) 462-0200 Fax
(949) 462-0400 User Support

Volume I User Interface Table of Contents

Volume I
User Interface
Table of Contents

Chapter 1 Product Description
1.1 Specification........................................................................................................................... 4
1.2 Capabilities........................................................................................................................... 18
1.3 ODBC (Open Database Connectivity) ................................................................................. 19
1.4 File Structure........................................................................................................................ 20
1.5 Libraries ............................................................................................................................... 23
1.6 INI File................................................................................................................................. 24
1.7 Help...................................................................................................................................... 40

Chapter 2 Setup
2.1 System Requirements............................................................................................................. 3
2.2 Installing ETAP PowerStation ............................................................................................... 4
2.3 Configuring ODBC.............................................................................................................. 14
2.4 Running PowerStation ......................................................................................................... 15
2.5 PowerStation Licensing ....................................................................................................... 16
2.6 License Manager Server....................................................................................................... 17
2.7 ETAP License Manager Installation .................................................................................... 18
2.8 ETAP License Manager Verification................................................................................... 23
2.9 Installation Maintenance (Uninstall).................................................................................... 25
2.10 Removing ETAP License Manager ..................................................................................... 27
2.11 Installing PowerPlot 2.5....................................................................................................... 29
2.12 System Optimization............................................................................................................ 31

Chapter 3 Overview
3.1 One-Line Diagram ................................................................................................................. 7
3.2 Underground Raceway Systems (UGS)................................................................................. 8
3.3 Ground Grid Systems............................................................................................................. 9
3.4 Panel Systems ...................................................................................................................... 10
3.5 Dumpster.............................................................................................................................. 11
3.6 Library.................................................................................................................................. 13
3.7 Cable Systems ...................................................................................................................... 15
Operation Technology, Inc. ETAP PowerStation 4.0
I - i

3.8 3-D Database........................................................................................................................ 16
3.9 Project View......................................................................................................................... 24
3.10 Project Toolbar..................................................................................................................... 25
3.11 Mode Toolbar....................................................................................................................... 26
3.12 Configuration Toolbar.......................................................................................................... 29
3.13 PSMS Toolbar...................................................................................................................... 30
3.14 Study Case Toolbar .............................................................................................................. 31
3.15 Message Log ........................................................................................................................ 32
3.16 Tutorial................................................................................................................................. 33

Chapter 4 User Access Management
4.1 Access Levels......................................................................................................................... 4
4.2 User Management ................................................................................................................ 11
4.3 Creating A New Project File................................................................................................ 15
4.4 Opening An Existing Project File ........................................................................................ 16

Chapter 5 Menu Bars
5.1 Start-Up Menu Bar................................................................................................................. 3
5.2 One-Line Diagram Menu Bar ................................................................................................ 4
5.3 Project View Menu Bar........................................................................................................ 47
5.4 Underground Raceway System Menu Bar ........................................................................... 49
5.5 Dumpster Menu Bar............................................................................................................. 53

Chapter 6 One-Line Diagram GUI
6.1 Edit A One-Line Diagram...................................................................................................... 4
6.2 Display Options.................................................................................................................... 23
6.3 Default Display Options....................................................................................................... 29
6.4 Annotation Font ................................................................................................................... 31
6.5 Result Annotation ................................................................................................................ 32

Chapter 7 Printing and Plotting
7.1 Schedule Report Manager ...................................................................................................... 4
7.2 Library Report Manager......................................................................................................... 5
7.3 Printing One-Line Diagrams .................................................................................................. 8
7.4 Print Options ........................................................................................................................ 16
7.5 Text Output Reports............................................................................................................. 20
7.6 Crystal Reports..................................................................................................................... 26
7.7 Plots...................................................................................................................................... 31

Chapter 8 AC Elements
8.1 Bus ......................................................................................................................................... 3
8.2 Transformer, 2-Winding ...................................................................................................... 13
8.3 Transformer, 3- Winding ..................................................................................................... 33
8.4 Cable .................................................................................................................................... 51
8.5 Transmission Line................................................................................................................ 77
8.6 Reactor ................................................................................................................................. 91
8.7 Impedance ............................................................................................................................ 99
I - ii
8.8 Power Grid ......................................................................................................................... 107
8.9 Generator............................................................................................................................ 119
8.10 Induction Machine ............................................................................................................. 142
8.11 Synchronous Motor............................................................................................................ 168
8.12 Lumped Load ..................................................................................................................... 197
8.13 Motor Operated Valve........................................................................................................ 209
8.14 Static Load ......................................................................................................................... 231
8.15 Capacitor ............................................................................................................................ 250
8.16 Power Panel........................................................................................................................ 267
8.17 Harmonic Filter .................................................................................................................. 268
8.18 Remote Connector.............................................................................................................. 279
8.19 Phase Adapter .................................................................................................................... 281
8.20 AC Composite Motors ....................................................................................................... 286
8.21 DC Composite Motors ....................................................................................................... 287
8.22 Composite Networks.......................................................................................................... 288
8.23 Fuse .................................................................................................................................... 293
8.24 Contactor............................................................................................................................ 303
8.25 HV Circuit Breaker ............................................................................................................ 311
8.26 LV Circuit Breaker............................................................................................................. 322
8.27 Switch................................................................................................................................. 332
8.28 Double-Throw Switch........................................................................................................ 340
8.29 Ground Grid ....................................................................................................................... 348

Chapter 9 Instrumentation Elements
9.1 Current Transformer............................................................................................................... 3
9.2 Potential Transformer............................................................................................................. 8
9.3 Voltmeter ............................................................................................................................. 13
9.4 Ammeter............................................................................................................................... 17
9.5 Multimeter............................................................................................................................ 21
9.6 Over Current Relay .............................................................................................................. 27
9.7 Voltage Relay....................................................................................................................... 33
9.8 Frequency Relay .................................................................................................................. 39
9.9 Reverse Power Relay ........................................................................................................... 45
9.10 Solid State Trip Relay.......................................................................................................... 51
9.11 Motor Relay ......................................................................................................................... 56

Chapter 10 AC-DC Elements
10.1 UPS (Uninterruptible Power Supply)..................................................................................... 3
10.2 VFD (Variable Frequency Drive) ........................................................................................ 18
10.3 Charger................................................................................................................................. 26
10.4 Inverter ................................................................................................................................. 39

Chapter 11 DC Elements
11.1 DC Bus................................................................................................................................... 3
11.2 DC Cable................................................................................................................................ 9
11.3 DC Impedance...................................................................................................................... 31
11.4 DC Converter ....................................................................................................................... 36
11.5 Battery.................................................................................................................................. 43
11.6 DC Motor ............................................................................................................................. 51
I - iii
11.7 DC Static Load..................................................................................................................... 61
11.8 DC Lumped Load................................................................................................................. 69
11.9 DC Elementary Diagram...................................................................................................... 78
11.10 DC Composite Motor........................................................................................................... 85
11.11 DC Circuit Breaker .............................................................................................................. 86
11.12 DC Fuse................................................................................................................................ 92
11.13 DC Single-Throw Switch..................................................................................................... 98
11.14 DC Double-Throw Switch ................................................................................................. 104

Chapter 12 Engineering Libraries
12.1 Library Utility Tools .............................................................................................................. 4
12.2 Convert ETAP DOS Libraries ............................................................................................... 7
12.3 Library Data Acess................................................................................................................. 8
12.4 Cable .................................................................................................................................... 10
12.5 Cable Fire Coating ............................................................................................................... 17
12.6 Cable Fire Stop..................................................................................................................... 20
12.7 Cable Fire Wrap................................................................................................................... 23
12.8 Motor Nameplate ................................................................................................................. 26
12.9 Motor Circuit (CKT) Model................................................................................................. 31
12.10 Motor Characteristic Model ................................................................................................. 35
12.11 Motor Load Model ............................................................................................................... 38
12.12 Overload Heater Library ...................................................................................................... 40
12.13 Overload Heater Library Editor ........................................................................................... 41
12.14 LV Circuit Breaker............................................................................................................... 42
12.15 HV Circuit Breaker .............................................................................................................. 46
12.16 Fuse ...................................................................................................................................... 50
12.17 Battery.................................................................................................................................. 53
12.18 Harmonic Library................................................................................................................. 57
12.19 Interrupting Cost Library ..................................................................................................... 60
12.20 Reliability Library................................................................................................................ 63

I - iv

Volume II
Analysis Modules
Table of Contents

Chapter 13 Short-Circuit Analysis
13.1 ANSI Short-Circuit Toolbar................................................................................................... 3
13.2 IEC Short-Circuit Toolbar...................................................................................................... 7
13.3 Study Case Editor................................................................................................................. 10
13.4 Display Options.................................................................................................................... 20
13.5 ANSI/IEEE Calculation Methods ........................................................................................ 26
13.6 IEC Calculation Methods..................................................................................................... 36
13.7 Arc Flash Analysis Method.................................................................................................. 42
13.8 AC-DC Converter Models ................................................................................................... 43
13.9 Required Data ...................................................................................................................... 44
13.10 Output Reports ..................................................................................................................... 48
13.11 Alert View............................................................................................................................ 57

Chapter 14 PowerPlot Interface
14.1 PowerStation-PowerPlot Data Link ....................................................................................... 4
14.2 Project Files............................................................................................................................ 6
14.3 Data Transfer to PowerPlot .................................................................................................... 7
14.4 Relay Coordination Mode.................................................................................................... 10

Chapter 15 Load Flow Analysis
15.1 Load Flow Toolbar................................................................................................................. 3
15.2 Study Case Editor................................................................................................................... 6
15.3 Display Options.................................................................................................................... 14
15.4 Calculation Methods ............................................................................................................ 20
15.5 Required Data ...................................................................................................................... 24
15.6 Output Reports ..................................................................................................................... 27
15.7 Alert View............................................................................................................................ 40

II - i
Volume II Analysis Modules Table of Contents

Chapter 16 Motor Starting Analysis
16.1 Motor Starting Toolbar .......................................................................................................... 3
16.3 Display Options.................................................................................................................... 19
16.5 Required Data ...................................................................................................................... 27
16.6 Output Reports ..................................................................................................................... 30
16.7 One-Line Diagram Displayed Results ................................................................................. 38
16.8 Plots...................................................................................................................................... 39

Chapter 17 Transient Stability Analysis
17.1 Transient Stability Toolbar .................................................................................................... 3
17.3 Display Options.................................................................................................................... 16
17.5 Required Data ...................................................................................................................... 28
17.6 Output Reports ..................................................................................................................... 34
17.8 Plots...................................................................................................................................... 43

Chapter 18 Generator Start-Up
18.2 Calculation Methods .............................................................................................................. 6
18.3 Output Reports ..................................................................................................................... 11

Chapter 19 Dynamic Models
19.1 Induction Machine ................................................................................................................. 3
19.2 Synchronous Machine.......................................................................................................... 10
19.3 Power Grid ........................................................................................................................... 20
19.4 Excitation System ................................................................................................................ 21
19.5 Governor-Turbine ................................................................................................................ 72
19.6 Power System Stabilizer (PSS) ......................................................................................... 134

Chapter 20 User Defined Dynamic Models
20.1 UDM Template File ............................................................................................................... 3
20.2 Select UDM Models............................................................................................................... 7
20.3 Compile UDM Equation File............................................................................................... 11
20.4 System Variable Name......................................................................................................... 13
20.5 Test Model ........................................................................................................................... 19

II - ii

Chapter 21 Harmonic Analysis
21.1 Study Toolbar......................................................................................................................... 5
21.3 Display Options.................................................................................................................... 16
21.5 Required Data ...................................................................................................................... 28
21.6 Output Reports ..................................................................................................................... 33
21.8 Plots...................................................................................................................................... 47

Chapter 22 Optimal Power Flow
22.1 Study Toolbar......................................................................................................................... 4
22.3 Display Options.................................................................................................................... 26
22.5 Required Data ...................................................................................................................... 33
22.6 Output Reports ..................................................................................................................... 36

Chapter 23 Reliabitliy Analysis
23.1 Study Toolbar......................................................................................................................... 4
23.3 Display Options.................................................................................................................... 12
23.4 Method and Calculation Methods ........................................................................................ 17
23.5 Required Data ...................................................................................................................... 22
23.6 Output Reports ..................................................................................................................... 25
23.7 Plots...................................................................................................................................... 36

Chapter 24 DC Short-Circuit Analysis
24.1 Study Toolbar......................................................................................................................... 4
24.3 Display Options...................................................................................................................... 8
24.5 Required Data ...................................................................................................................... 16
24.6 Output Reports ..................................................................................................................... 20

Chapter 25 DC Load Flow Analysis
25.1 Study Toolbar......................................................................................................................... 4
25.3 Display Options...................................................................................................................... 9
25.5 Required Data ...................................................................................................................... 18
25.6 Output Reports ..................................................................................................................... 22

II - iii

Chapter 26 Battery Sizing and Discharge
26.1 Study Toolbar......................................................................................................................... 4
26.3 Display Options.................................................................................................................... 14
26.5 Required Data ...................................................................................................................... 31
26.6 Output Reports ..................................................................................................................... 34

Chapter 27 Underground Raceway Systems
27.1 Underground Raceway Systems GUI .................................................................................... 4
27.2 Study Toolbar......................................................................................................................... 9
27.4 Display Options for UGS..................................................................................................... 14
27.5 Edit a UGS ........................................................................................................................... 17
27.6 Underground System Editor................................................................................................. 24
27.7 Raceway Editor .................................................................................................................... 26
27.8 External Heat Source............................................................................................................ 30
27.10 Required Data ...................................................................................................................... 36
27.11 Output Reports ..................................................................................................................... 38
27.13 Underground Systems Tutorial ............................................................................................ 42

Chapter 28 Ground Grid Systems
28.1 Ground Grid Systems Presentation ........................................................................................ 4
28.2 FEM Editor Toolbar............................................................................................................... 6
28.3 IEEE Edit Toolbar.................................................................................................................. 8
28.4 Ground Grid Study Method Toolbar...................................................................................... 9
28.5 Edit a GGS ........................................................................................................................... 12
28.7 Ground Short-Ciruit Current Values.................................................................................... 17
28.8 Soil Editor ............................................................................................................................ 20
28.9 IEEE Group Editor............................................................................................................... 22
28.10 FEM Group Editor ............................................................................................................... 26
28.11 Conductor/Rod Editor (FEM) .............................................................................................. 28
28.13 Required Data ...................................................................................................................... 33
28.15 Plot Selection ....................................................................................................................... 43
II - iv

Chapter 29 Panel Systems
29.1 Graphic User Interface (GUI) ................................................................................................ 4
29.2 Panel Editor - Info Page ......................................................................................................... 8
29.3 Panel Editor - Rating Page ................................................................................................... 12
29.4 Panel Editor - Schedule Page ............................................................................................... 17
29.5 Panel Editor - Summary Page .............................................................................................. 29
29.6 Panel Editor - Remarks Page................................................................................................ 32
29.7 Panel Editor - Comment Page.............................................................................................. 34
29.8 Panel Calculations................................................................................................................ 35
29.9 Panels in System Studies...................................................................................................... 46
29.10 Panel Reports ....................................................................................................................... 47
II - v

ETAP

PowerStation
4.0
User Guide
Copyright 2001
All Rights Reserved

This manual has copyrights by Operation Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. Under the
copyright laws, this manual may not be copied, in whole or in part, without the written consent of
Operation Technology, Inc. The Licensee may copy portions of this documentation only for the
exclusive use of Licensee. Any reproduction shall include the copyright notice. This exception
does not allow copies to be made for other persons or entities, whether or not sold. Under this
law, copying includes translating into another language.

Certain names and/or logos used in this document may constitute trademarks, service marks, or
trade names of Operation Technology, Inc. or other entities.

Access, Excel, ODBC, SQL Server, Windows NT, Windows 2000, Windows Me, Windows
98, Windows XP, and Microsoft Word are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.

Operation Technology, Inc. believes that the information contained herein is accurate as of its
publication date, and such information is subject to change without notice. This information is
provided as is without warranty of any kind, either expressed or implied, including but not
limited to the implied warranties of merchantability, fitness for a particular purpose, or non-
infringement. Operation Technology, Inc. assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions in
this publication or any other documents referenced in this publication.

Southern California

(949) 462-0100 Sales
(949) 462-0400 Fax

Chapter 1

Product Description

ETAP PowerStation is a fully graphical electrical transient analyzer program that can run under the
Microsoft
Windows
98, NT, 4.0, 2000, Me, and XP environments. The Windows NT, 4.0 and 2000
platforms provide the highest performance level for demanding applications, such as large network
analysis requiring intensive computation and online monitoring and control applications.

Windows NT, 4.0, and 2000 also provide the highest levels of reliability, protection, and security of
critical applications. Large PowerStation projects (approximately 500 buses and larger) should be built
and maintained via Windows NT, 4.0, or 2000. The Windows 98 and Me platforms provide excellent
performance for analysis of small and medium size systems (a few hundred buses) and support a variety
of other popular applications.

Operation Technology, Inc. 1-1 ETAP PowerStation 4.0
Product Description Introduction

PowerStation allows you to work directly with graphical one-line diagrams and underground cable
raceway systems. The program has been designed according to three key concepts:

Virtual Reality Operation
The program operation resembles real electrical system operation as closely as
possible. For example, when you open or close a circuit breaker, place an element out
of service, or change the operating status of motors, the de-energized elements and
sub-systems are indicated on the one-line diagram in gray. PowerStation incorporates
new concepts for determining protective device coordination directly from the one-
line diagram.
Total Integration of Data
PowerStation combines the electrical, logical, mechanical, and physical attributes of system elements in
the same database. For example, a cable not only contains data representing its electrical properties and
physical dimensions, but also information indicating the raceways through which it is routed. Thus, the
data for a single cable can be used for load flow or short-circuit analyses (which require electrical
parameters and connections) as well as cable ampacity derating calculations (which require physical
routing data). This integration of the data provides consistency throughout the system and eliminates
multiple data entry for the same element.
Simplicity in Data Entry
PowerStation keeps track of the detailed data for each electrical apparatus. Data editors can speed up the
data entry process by requiring the minimum data for a particular study. In order to achieve this, we have
structured the property editors in the most logical manner for entering data for different types of analysis
or design.

PowerStations one-line diagram supports a number of features to assist you in
constructing networks of varying complexities. For example, each element can
individually have varying orientations, sizes, and display symbols (IEC or ANSI).
The one-line diagram also allows you to place multiple protective devices
between a circuit branch and a bus.

PowerStation provides you with a variety of options for presenting or viewing your electrical system.
These views are called presentations. The location, size, orientation, and symbol of each element can be
different in each presentation. Additionally, protective devices and relays can be displayed (visible) or
hidden (invisible) for any particular presentation. For example, one presentation can be a relay view
where all protective devices are displayed. Another presentation may show a one-line diagram with some
circuit breakers shown and the rest hidden (a layout best suited for load flow results).

Among PowerStations most powerful features are the composite network and motor elements.
Composite elements allow you to graphically nest network elements within themselves to an arbitrary
depth. For example, a composite network can contain other composite networks, providing the capability
to construct complex electrical networks while still maintaining a clean, uncluttered diagram that displays
what you want to emphasize - yet the next level of system detail is within easy reach of your mouse. The
power is at your fingertips.

We consider PowerStation to be the foremost-integrated database for electrical systems, allowing you to
have multiple presentations of a system for different analysis or design purposes.
Product Description Specification
1.1 Specification
Modeling
Virtual Reality Operation
Total Integration of Data (Electrical, Logical, Mechanical, & Physical Attributes)
Looped & Radial Systems
Unlimited Isolated Sub-Systems
No System Connection Limitations
Multiple Loading Conditions
Multi-level Nesting of Sub-systems
Advanced Sparse Matrix Techniques
User Access Control & Data Validation
Asynchronous Calculations, Allow Multiple Modules to Calculate Simultaneously
Database Transitioning, Reduces the Risk of Database Loss During a Power Outage
True 32-bit Programming Designed for Windows NT 4.0 - Tested for Windows 98/NT/2000/Me
Features
Five Levels of Automatic Error Checking
Dynamic Help Line & Error Messaging
Message Logger to Track Program Usage & Access
Multiple User Access Levels
ODBC (Open Database Connectivity) - Use Microsoft Access, SQL, Oracle, etc.
Manages Maintenance Data via Info, Remarks, & Comment Pages
Merge Independent PowerStation Project Files
Convert Project Files between Databases such as MS Access, SQL, and Oracle
Integrated 1-Phase, 3-Phase, & DC Systems
Integrated One-Line Diagram & Underground Raceway Systems
Integrated One-Line Diagram & Device Coordination Program
Common Database for all Studies
Simplicity in Data Entry
Multiple Sub-systems & Swing Machines
User-Controlled Auto Save & Transaction
User-Controlled Default Settings for all Components
Typical Data for Motors, Generators, Transformers, Reactors, Governors, & Exciters
Individual LTC Time Delays (Initial & Operating)
No Voltage Limitations
Unlimited Protective & Metering Device Connections to Branches & Loads
Unlimited Load Connections to a Single Bus
Any System Frequency
English & Metric Unit Systems
25 Character Component IDs
Raw Manufacturer Data Entry
Individual & Global Load Demand & Diversity Factors
Temperature Sensitive Cable Resistance for all Studies
Element Navigator
Lumped Loading
Equipment Cables for Loads, Eliminating Requirement for Terminal Buses
Edited By & Checked By Data Stamping
Date Stamping of all Data Changes
Intelligent Editors with User-Defined Data Fields
Analysis-Dependent Data Entry Requirements
Multiple-User Network Support
Compatible Database with PowerStation Management System (PSMS) for Real-time Monitoring,
Simulation, and Supervisory Control
One-Line Diagrams
Unlimited One-Line Diagram Presentations
Single-phase system (2 and 3 wires)
Panel Systems
Unlimited Status Configurations / Scenarios (Switching Devices, Motors, Loads, etc.)
Multiple Engineering Properties (Base & Revision Data)
Three-Dimensional (3-D) Database
Ground Grid Systems
Multiple Loading Categories (Conditions) with Individual Percent Loading
Unlimited One-Line Diagram Nesting for Sub-Systems, MCCs, etc.
Simultaneous View of One-Line Diagram Presentations
Simultaneous View of System Configurations
Simultaneous View of Different Study Results
Phase Adapters
Automatic Bus Insertion
Find Elements from Editors or the Project Window
Grouping / Ungrouping of Elements
Change Size, Symbol, & Orientation of Elements, Individually and Globally
Active X (Programmable Objects)
Graphically Fault / Clear Fault from Buses
Selectable Zoom-to-Fit
State-of-the-Art Built-in Graphic User Interface
Drag & Drop, Cut & Paste, Zooming, etc.
Built-in PowerStation CAD System
XML Data Exchange
Export One-Line Diagrams to 3
rd
Party CAD Systems
Import OLE Objects (Text, Pictures, Spreadsheets, GIS Maps, etc.)
Import ETAP DOS Project Files
Import ASCII Project Files
Execute External Programs
Customizable Graphical Display of Results Annotations
Customizable Graphical Display of Nameplate Data Annotations
Interchangeable ANSI & IEC Element Symbols
Multiple Sizing & Rotation of Element Symbols
Multi-Color Symbols & Annotations
Supports True Type Fonts
Hide & Show Protective Devices per Presentation
Remote Connectors
Graphical Operation (Open/Close) of Switching Devices in Edit or Study Modes
Display of Fixed Tap & Load Tap Changer (LTC) Positions on the One-Line Diagram
Direct Device Coordination from the One-Line Diagram
Comprehensive Printing/Plotting Capabilities
Individual & Global Section of Elements, Objects, & Composites
Schedule Manager for System Components
Customizable Output Reports (Crystal Reports)
ASCII Output Reports
Output Report Manager for both ASCII Files & Crystal Reports
Access Database Output Reports
Crystal Reports for all Library Data
Comprehensive Summary Reports
Customizable Output Plots
Report Status of Loads & Protective Devices for all Configurations
System Dumpster with Unlimited Cells for Storage & Retrieval of Deleted Components
Resizable, Floating/Attachable Toolbars for each Study
Underground Raceway Systems
Graphical User Interface
Multiple Duct Banks, Direct Buried, & External Heat Sources
Non-Uniform Placement of Ducts & Direct Buried Conduits
Transient Cable Temperature Plotting
External Heat Sources
Grounded / Ungrounded Shielding
One-Line Diagram Database Integration
ODBC
(Open Database Connectivity)

Utilize any Database for which an ODBC Driver Exists (MS Access, Oracle, & SQL Server)
Access the Database from 3rd Party Database Managers
Integrate Other Project Data into the Same Database
3D-Database
Within each project, PowerStation provides three major system components. These system components
are organized in an orthogonal fashion (independent from each other) to provide you with the ultimate
power and flexibility when developing PowerStation projects.

Graphical Display of One-Line Diagrams (Presentation)
Engineering Properties (Data Revisions)
Operating Status (Configuration Status)
Convert to EMF and WMF files
Export PowerStation one-line diagrams to Enhanced MetaFiles (EMF) and Windows MetaFiles (WMF).
EMF and WMF files can be imported into AutoCAD
, Microsoft Word
, etc.
Printing / Plotting of One-Line Diagram
The following options are available for each presentation including composite motors and composite
networks

Print Options
Printer Setup
Zoom Level for Print Size
Print Coordinates & Scrolling
Customizable Print Preview
Batch Printing
OLE Client
OLE is a program-integration technology used to share information between programs. Many Windows
programs including Microsoft Office are OLE capable. Within PowerStation, you can insert OLE objects
such as bitmaps, text, spreadsheets, tables, and metafiles onto your one-line diagrams.
Active Error Viewer
PowerStation provides five levels of error checking. The active error viewer appears when you attempt to
run a study with missing or inappropriate data. Double-click on each individual error message to locate
and open the component editor associated with the cause of the error message.
Application Message Logging
Track PowerStation usage and access by using the application message logger. It keeps track of who
opens a project, which level of access they have, and how long they were in the project.
Output Report Manager
Provides text reports and Crystal Reports for different studies with the following subsections:

Complete Report
Input Data
Results
Summary Reports
Customizable Subsections
Schedule Report Manager
When using Crystal Reports, it can provide different schedules such as bus, branch, load, and cable with
the following options.

Base and Revision Data
Energized / De-energized Elements
Elements in the Dumpster
Crystal Reports
Crystal Reports are full-color, printable reports for a variety of PowerStation analyses. Each Crystal
Report is pre-configured for commonly requested output formats. The Crystal Reports browser/printer is
available within PowerStation. Users can create and modify existing Crystal Reports using a Crystal
Reports editor.
Annotation Display Options
With independent display options for each PowerStation mode (Edit, Load Flow, Short-Circuit, etc.), you
can display certain types of information in one mode and other types of information when in another
mode.

Display ID, Rating, kV, Ampacity, & Impedance of Elements
Display Delta-Wye Connection and Tap Setting of Transformers
Display Winding Connection of Generators & Motors
Display Conductor Size, Type, & Length of Cables
User-Selectable Fonts for Different Groups of Annotations (Size, Bold, Font Type, etc.)
Set Default Positions of Annotations for each Element
Independently Rotate each Annotation
Option to Display Different Sets of Study Results Including Units (A, kW+jkVar, kVA, etc.)

AC Elements, One-Line Diagram
Bus / Node

Transformer, 2-Winding
Cable
Transmission Line
Reactor, Current-Limiting
Impedance

Power Grid (Utility System)
Synchronous Generator
Induction Motor / Generator
Synchronous Motor
Motor Operated Valve (MOV)
Static Load
Lumped Load
Capacitor
Panel Systems
Harmonic Filter
Remote Connector
Phase Adapter

Fuse
Circuit Breaker, High Voltage
Circuit Breaker, Low Voltage
Contactor
Switch, Single-Throw
Switch, Double-Throw

Ground Grid Systems

Instrumentation Elements, One-Line Diagram
Current Transformer (CT)
Potential (Voltage) Transformer (PT)

Voltmeter
Ammeter
Multi-Meter
Voltage Relay
Reverse Power Relay
Frequency Relay
Motor Relay
Solid State Trip Relay
Overcurrent Relay
Nested Sub-Systems, One-Line Diagram
AC Composite Motor
DC Composite Motor
Composite Network
DC Elements, One-Line Diagram
Bus / Node

Cable
Impedance

DC-DC Converter
Battery

Motor
Lumped Load
Static Load
Elementary Diagram
Circuit Breaker
Fuse
Switch, Single-Throw
Switch, Double-Throw

AC-DC Elements, One-Line Diagram
Charger
Inverter
UPS
VFD

Elements, Underground Raceway System
Cable, One-Line
Cable, Equipment
Cable, UGS
External Heath Source
Duct Bank Raceway
Direct Buried Raceway
Conduit (Duct Bank)
Location (Direct Buried)
Libraries
Cable (NEC, ICEA, and Manufacturer Published Data)
Cable Fire Coating (Manufacturer Published Data)
Cable Fire Stop (Manufacturer Published Data)
Cable Fire Wrap (Manufacturer Published Data)
Motor Nameplate
Motor Circuit Model (Single and Double Cage Motors)
Motor Characteristic Model
Motor Load Model
LV Circuit Breaker (Manufacturer Published Data)
HV Circuit Breaker (Manufacturer Published Data)
Fuse (Manufacturer Published Data)
Harmonic (IEEE and Manufacturer Published Data)
Motor Overload Heater (Manufacturer Published Data)
Battery
Reliability Index Library
Interruption Cost Library
50,000+ Device Time-Current Characteristic Curves
Merge Data from Different Libraries
Export Library Data to MS Access File with Report Manager & Crystal Reports
Transformer Typical Data
Typical impedance data and X/R ratio based on transformer BIL level, MVA, and kV rating
Base Modules
ICEA P-55-440 cable tray ampacity calculator (Stolpe Method)
Load Flow Analysis
Newton-Raphson, Fast Decoupled, & Accelerated Gauss Seidel
New double-precision Newton-Raphson method with current injection
Advanced Solution Techniques for Fast Convergence
Voltage Drop Calculations
Load Forecasting
New Alert View to display critical and marginal limit violations
Bus/Transformer/Cable Overload Warning
Option to Select any Loading Category
Global & Individual Bus Diversity Factors
Individual Demand Factors for Continuous, Intermittent, & Spare Operating Conditions
Option to Update the Database from Load Flow Solutions
Lumped Loads
Phase-shifting transformer
Power Factor Correction
Automatically Adjust Transformer Tap & LTC/Regulator Settings
Generator Governor/Exciter Control Settings
New summary output report on bus loadings and overload conditions
Short-Circuit Analysis
Complete Compliance with ANSI/IEEE C37 Series
Complete Compliance with IEC 60056, 60282, 61363, 60781, 60909, 60947
IEEE Standard 141 & 399, UL 489
New Arc Flash analysis program (NFPA 70E-2000) for determining incident energy and flash
protective boundary (ANSI and IEC)
Extensive Manufacturer Data for Fuses, LV & HV Breakers
Automatic Crest & Interrupting Duty Comparison
Automatic Peak & Breaking Duty Comparison
New Alert View to display critical and marginal limit violations
3-Phase, Line-Line, Line-Ground, & Line-Line-Ground Faults
Cycle to 30 Cycle Faults Including 2, 3, 5, & 8 Cycle Breakers
Breaking Duty as a Function of Breaker Time Delay
Interrupting Duty as a Function of Breaker Cycle Time
Fault Impedance (Z1 & Z0)
User-Definable Voltage C Factor for IEC Analysis
Complete Grounding Modeling for Motors, Generators and Transformers
CB Duty calculation based on the maximum-through fault current (ANSI)
Phase-shifting transformer for ANSI unbalanced faults
Check Making & Breaking Capabilities of Protective Devices Against Fault Currents
Cable Temperature Adjustment
User-Selected Bus Faulting
Report Fault Current Contributions (Ia & 3 I0) & Voltage Profiles (Va, Vb, & Vc)
User-Selected Fault Current Contribution Level Reporting
Option to Include Motor Delays
Option to Include Feeder & Overload Heater Elements
Option to Set Pre-Fault Voltages (Fixed Values or Load Flow Results)
Option to Use Different X/R Methods & C Factors
Option to Consider Motor Contributions Based on Loading Categories
Updates Directly to Device Coordination
Motor Starting Analysis
Dynamic Motor Acceleration
Static Motor Starting
Multi-Motor Starting, Stopping, & Restarting in a Single Run
Group Starting/Acceleration of Motors & Loads using Starting Categories
Option to Select any Loading Category for Pre-Start Condition
Option to Accelerate Motors & Loads by Load Transition (Loading Categories)
Option to use Global or Individual LTC Time Delays
Dynamic Simulation of LTCs and Regulators
Induction/Synchronous Motor/Generator Dynamic Models
Single-Cage, Single-Cage with Deep-Bars, Double-Cage, & Double-Cage with Independent Circuits
Start Motors, Loads, Capacitors, MOV, etc.
Comprehensive MOV Closing & Opening Operation
Motor Load Modeling
Consider Various Starting Devices Including Autotransformer, Resistor, Reactor, & Capacitor
Time-Slider Toolbar for Continuous Display of Results on the One-Line Diagram
User-Customizable Plots with Option to Overlay
Harmonic Analysis
IEEE 519a
Harmonic Load Flow
Harmonic Resonance & Frequency Scan
Model Harmonic Sources
Filter Overloading
Filter Design
User-Definable Frequency Range (0 to 3000 Hz)
Generator & Transformer Saturation
Harmonic Distortion Limits
Total Root Mean Square Value (RMS)
Total Arithmetic Summation Value (ASUM)
Total Harmonic Distortion (THD)
Telephone Influence Factor (TIF)
I*T Index (I*T)
Customizable output reports using Crystal Reports format
Graphical Display of Harmonic Characteristics for Components
Harmonic-Slider Toolbar for Display of Harmonics on the One-Line Diagram
Frequency-Slider Toolbar for Display of Frequency Scan Results on the One-Line Diagram

Transient Stability Analysis
Simulate any Combination of System Disturbances & Operations
Induction/Synchronous Motor/Generator Dynamic Models
Frequency Dependent Machine Models
Frequency Dependent Network Models
Extensive Dynamic Machine Models
IEEE & Selected Manufacturer Exciter, Governor, & Power System Stabilizer Models for Generator
Remote voltage control bus for all exciters
Synchronous motor exciter/AVR system
User-defined Dynamic Models (UDM) interface for:
Exciter/AVR
Governor - Turbine
Power System Stabilizer
Complete integration with User-Defined Dynamic Models for the Generator Start-Up Analysis
Unlimited Time Events & Actions
Segment (fractional) faults for cables and transmission lines
Time-Slider Toolbar for Continuous Display of Results on the One-Line Diagram
Automatic CB operation based on instantaneous relay settings
Overcurrent (50)
Voltage (59/27)
Frequency (81)
Directional Overcurrent (67)
Reverse Power (32)
Motor Overcurrent (50M)
Solid State Trip (SST)
New plots for machine terminal impedance (for out-of-step relay setting)
New plots for branch flows (MW, Mvar, MVA, and Amps)
MOV Starting
Motor Acceleration
Motor Load Modeling
Loss of excitation action
Critical Fault Clearing Time and System Islanding Time
Fast Bus Transfer Studies
Impact Loading & Generator Rejection
User-Defined Dynamic Modeling
Build your own governor/turbine, exciter/AVR, and Power System Stabilizer control block diagrams
for Transient Stability analysis
Large selection of control blocks and elementary functions
Stand-alone test model performance including isolated step response
Complete integration with Generator Start-Up analysis
Run-time compile within ETAP PowerStation
Utilize models within the Transient Stability Program
Select user-built models within generator editors
Utilizes block diagrams generated by Simulink
Implement system-wide operations such as load shedding, fast bus transfer, islanding, etc.
Requires Transient Stability Analysis
Generator Start-Up Analysis
Start Generators from a Cold State
Connect Motors and Loads at any Desired Frequency and Voltage
Generator and Motor Frequency Dependent Models
Frequency Dependent Models for Network Components
Requires Transient Stability Analysis and User-Defined Dynamic Modeling

Neher-McGrath Method
Steady-State Cable Temperature Analysis
Transient Cable Temperature Analysis
Cable Ampacity Optimization Uniform Ampacity
Cable Ampacity Optimization Uniform Temperature
Cable Sizing
Options to keep Cable Size & Loading Fixed
Ground Grid Systems
Analysis includes four different methods
IEEE 80 - 1986
IEEE 80 2000
IEEE 665 1995
Finite Element
Graphic user interface for conductors and rods
Graphic Soil View
Handles irregular configurations of any shape
Allows a two-layer soil model in addition to the surface material
Unlimited conductors and rods
Conductor segments can be oriented in any possible 3-D direction
Complete integration with one-line diagram for elements placed on the grid and short-circuit values
Calculates tolerable step and touch potentials
Compares calculated step and touch potentials with tolerable limits
Optimizes number of conductors with fixed rods
Optimizes number of conductors and rods based on cost
Calculate the maximum allowable current for conductors
Compares allowable currents against fault currents
Calculates ground system resistance
Calculates ground potential rise (GPR)
User-expandable conductor library
Tabulates absolute, step, and touch potentials throughout the grid
3-D plot of grid configuration showing conductors and rods
3-D plots of absolute, step, and touch potentials
Panel Systems
3-phase 3-wire and 4-wire panels
1-phase 2-wire and 3-wire panels
Graphic user interface
Unlimited circuits with or without external connections
Unlimited sub-panel connections
External (graphical) load and branch connections
Spreadsheet load modeling
Column and standard layouts
ANSI and IEC standard panels
Extensive switching device libraries
Comprehensive circuit feeder/cable libraries
User-configurable defaults and layouts
Dynamic sub-panel and main-panel systems updates
User selectable load types (LCL, NCL, warehouse, receptacle, hospitals, etc.)
User modifiable demand and diversity factors (NEC and others)
Ten loading categories per circuit
Customizable panel system3vs using Crystal Reports format
Intelligent panel calculations
Detailed panel loading summary
Optimal Power Flow
Comprehensive Objectives & Constraints
Determine all Control Settings
Ensure all Controls are within Limits
Ensure all Bus & Branch Constraints are met
Ensure all Objectives are met
Minimize System Operating Cost
Maximize System Performance
Minimize Real & Reactive Power Losses & Circulating Reactive Power
Minimize Real Power Exchange with Other Systems (Utilities or Power Grids)
Maximize Voltage Security Index
Maximize Branch Loading Security Index
Minimize Series & Shunt Compensation
Minimize Load Shedding
Minimize Control Movements / Actions
Minimize Generation Fuel Cost
Generator fuel cost minimization
Utility electricity cost minimization
Advanced Load Forecasting
DC Load Flow & DC Short-Circuit Analysis
IEEE 308, 446, 485, 946 Standards
DC Short-Circuit
DC Load Flow
Battery Sizing & Voltage Drop
DC-DC Converter Elements
Battery Charger, Inverter, & UPS Elements
DC Battery Discharge Analysis
Calculate battery discharge using an existing battery or using a battery that is automatically sized by
ETAP
Battery discharge using DC Load Flow method or load summation method
Generate plots and reports using Crystal Reports
Use different diversity and correction factors such as, temperature, aging, initial capacity, and initial
conditions
Plots for battery duty cycle, voltage, capacity, current, power and characteristics
Plots for branch flow, bus voltage, and bus loading
Reliability Analysis
Analysis includes protective device effects on fault isolation and load restoration such as replacement
and alternative supply
Radial, looped, and multiple isolated system configurations
Model each component with its own reliability characteristics
Implements the user-defined parameters and settings
Calculate load point and bus reliability indices:
Average Failure Rate []
Average Outage Duration [r]
Annual Outage Duration []
Calculate system reliability indices:
System Average Interruption Frequency Index [SAIFI]
System Average Interruption Duration Index [SAIDI]
Customer Average Interruption Duration Index [CAIDI]
Average Service Availability Index [ASAI]
Average Service Unavailability Index [ASUI]
Calculate reliability cost/worth indices for load points, buses, and system:
Expected Energy Not Supplied [EENS]
Expected Interruption Cost [ECOST]
Interrupted Energy Assessment Rate [IEAR]
Rank element contributions to the cost/worth indices
Sensitivity analyses for EENSs and ECOSTs:
Element contributions to the EENS and their rankings
Element contributions to the ECOST and their rankings
PowerPlot Device Coordination
Operates as Stand-Alone or Directly Interfaced with One-Line Diagrams
Unlimited Scenarios
100,000+ Curves
Transformer Inrush & Damage Curves
Cable Damage, Motor Starting, & Recloser Curves
Intermediate Time-Dial Settings
Log-Log / Plain Paper
Verified Database
Product Description Capabilities

1.2 Capabilities
PowerStation provides the following program capabilities:
Elements
Buses Unlimited *
Load Terminal Nodes Unlimited
Branches Unlimited
Equipment / Feeder Cables Unlimited
Transformers with Tap Setting Unlimited
Motors, Loads, MOVs, Capacitors, Filters, etc Unlimited
Nested Composite Networks Unlimited
Nested Composite Motors Unlimited
Presentations / Configurations / Data Revisions
One-Line Diagram Unlimited
Underground Raceway System Unlimited
Configuration Status Unlimited
Data Revisions (Base & Revision Data) 16
Loading Categories
Each Motor, MOV, Load, etc. 10
Study Cases
Short-Circuit, Load Flow, Transient Stability, etc. Unlimited
Short-Circuit Program (AC & DC)
Faulted Buses Unlimited
Motor Starting Program
Motors Started Simultaneously Unlimited
Starting Categories 10
Time Events 15
Transient Stability Program
Dynamically Modeled Machines Unlimited
Time Events Unlimited
DC System
Duty Cycle Categories 5
Libraries
Headers and Records Unlimited

* Maximum number of energized buses during calculations is license dependent. For example, 100, 500,
2,000, or 20,000 buses.
Product Description ODBC
1.3 ODBC (Open Database Connectivity)
PowerStation organizes and accesses its database using the latest industry standard - Microsoft ODBC

(Open Database Connectivity) - allowing PowerStation to use any database for which an ODBC driver is
available. ODBC drivers are readily available for Microsoft Access
, Microsoft SQL Server
, and
Oracle
, among others. Thus, data can be integrated into the PowerStation database using commercially
available DBMS (DataBase Management System).

ODBC is the database connectivity component of Microsoft Windows
Open Services Architecture

(WOSA) and is based on a Call Level Interface specification, which was developed by a consortium of
over 40 companies (members of the SQL Access Group and others). ODBC provides a single system
level interface for connecting front-end applications (like ETAP PowerStation) with back-end services
(such as DBMS).

PowerStation does not access the various different databases through each databases native protocol or
Application Program Interface (API). Instead, PowerStation accesses all database activities through
ODBC API. Database vendors, such as Microsoft, Oracle

Corporation, etc., provide the execution
components for ODBC (ODBC drivers), allowing PowerStation to directly communicate with many
DBMS.

Sitting between PowerStation and the DBMS is the ODBC Driver Manager. The ODBC Driver
Manager allows you to configure various data sources (databases or database descriptions) for
PowerStation (or other applications) to work with. This configuration provides several benefits to the
PowerStation user. It allows you to work with any of several DBMS, which you may already be
familiar with or already use in your facility. Additionally, you may use your existing DBMS to
interrogate or browse the database of a PowerStation project.

ODBC enables you to access your PowerStation databases via third-party software such as Microsoft
Access. This helps you to manage your data and provides a simple method of transferring the data from
PowerStation into other media. You may also insert additional fields (along with values provided by
PowerStation) into the PowerStation database tables. Certain limitations seen by various third-party
programs, such as Microsoft Access, may exist. For example, Microsoft Access only allows 256 columns
per table. Inserting further columns may cause conflicts. Integration of the PowerStation database at this
level provides you with enhanced opportunities to integrate PowerStation, and its engineering analysis
capabilities, into other programming or database systems, which you may already employ.

The PowerStation database tables can be added to an existing database in a future release of
PowerStation. For example, you will be able to integrate PowerStation into your electrical project
database.

This release of PowerStation has been tested with Microsoft Access, Microsoft SQL Server, and
Oracle DBMS. Additionally, PowerStation provides all database components you require, allowing you
to directly construct and edit Microsoft Access databases for use with PowerStation.

Product Description File Structure

1.4 File Structure
Project Database
Each PowerStation project that you construct builds a new database, which contains all PowerStation
tables. In addition to the actual DBMS database constructed (e.g., projectname.MDB for MS Access),
PowerStation creates a project control file named projectname.OTI. The project control file is an OTI-
proprietary file, which contains relevant project control information, including all user information.

For MS Access, each PowerStation project contains two basic files:

projectname.OTI
projectname.MDB

In addition, there may be two other files associated with your project:

Projectname.LDB Present only when using early versions of MS Access (pre-8.0 or Office 97) or
while the project is opened via A MS Access or PowerStation.
projectname.PSO Present when you have placed OLE objects in your PowerStation Project

Note that the .MDB & .LDB extensions will be different if you are using SQL Server or Oracle DBMS.

The PowerStation project can be copied and renamed outside of PowerStation if it does not require a
password. To do this, make copies of all four files (if your project has them): *.OTI, *.MDB, *.LDB,
*.PSO. Then rename all four files to the new name. The first time this new project is opened,
PowerStation will update the internal name of the project to its new name. An easy way of copying a
project file is within PowerStation.

WARNING: If you delete any of these files after PowerStation has created them, you may not be able to
open and retrieve your project database.

A bus property table for the Microsoft Access database is shown below. In this table, the first row
represents the bus default properties (IID=32). The next four rows represent four buses that exist in this
project.


A BusProps Table as seen from Microsoft Access

For MS Access, PowerStation copies a pre-built database with default values when you create a new
project file. PowerStation uses a template database named DEFAULTE.MDB for the English unit
system or DEFAULTM.MDB for the Metric unit system. In contrast, PowerStation executes a series of
SQL statements that inserts and populates all required tables when you are using SQL Server or Oracle.
Modifying the PowerStation Database
When viewing the PowerStation database via a DBMS (such as Microsoft Access), it is very important
that certain fields in the database not be changed. General rules for modifying the PowerStation project
database are given below.

You cannot change any database field labeled IID, Revision, Issue, ID (Name), or any field, which
contains Check, Alter, or Rev as part of its name.
NEVER alter any field whose type is BLOB (binary large object), Stream, or OLE Object.
Modifying any of these fields may invalidate your database and cause you to lose the valuable time
spent constructing the database.
You may change the engineering data and comments of elements in the database. However, many
engineering data fields are related by the engineering logic built into PowerStation editors. For
example, for a motor the fields HP, FLA, PF, Eff, and kVA are related. Changing only one of these
fields may cause problems in PowerStations editors because it calculates some fields based on values
in other fields.
You cannot add or delete records in any table from MS Access, Oracle, or SQL Server.
Records with an IID equal to 32 contain the default values for that element. You should change these
default values directly from PowerStation and not from the 3
rd
party software.

There is no guarantee that Operation Technology, Inc. can help you reconstruct your database if you have
modified some of the aforementioned fields.
Inserting Additional Columns in the PowerStation Database
General guidelines for inserting additional columns/fields into the PowerStation project database are
given below.

Construct the database using PowerStation.
Add all system elements using PowerStations graphical one-line diagram and underground raceway
system design tools. PowerStation internally allocates the correct database identifiers (IIDs) for all
components. IIDs CANNOT be changed or allocated by the user.
Add any new column you may want to embed in PowerStations tables. PowerStation will NOT
directly utilize the columns nor assign default values to them. PowerStation will not remove the
additional columns.

Adding Elements and Data to a PowerStation Project Database
This section explains how to modify data for existing elements in a PowerStation project file or transfer
data from a 3
rd
party software such as Microsoft Access, Excel, etc.

Open a PowerStation project file or create a new one.
Add and place the new elements (buses, transformers, motors, etc.) graphically to the one-line
diagram.
Save your PowerStation project and exit PowerStation.
Open your PowerStation database from the 3
rd
party software. For example, with Microsoft Access,
projectname.mdb (where project name is the name of your project file).
For each existing field in PowerStation, you can copy the contents of that field from your existing
database into the appropriate field of the PowerStation record. This can be accomplished by copying
and pasting individual fields or columns. For large databases, SQL commands can be used to do this
programmatically.
Save your project database from the 3
rd
party software.
Start PowerStation; load your project and check the changed data.

These precautions must be followed while conducting this procedure:

The structure of your database and the PowerStation database do not need to match. However,
corresponding fields must be the same type. PowerStation stores data in one of three types of fields,
which are double, character, or OLE Stream [BLOB]. All numerical data (including integer, float, or
double) are stored in double fields. Textual data are stored in character fields. This restriction is due to
limitations imposed by some databases that PowerStation must support through ODBC.

PowerStation sometimes splits an equipment record across two or more tables. The table names of these
records are related and easily identified. For example, static loads appear in two tables named StaticLoad
and StaticLoadH1. The records in the StaticLoad and StaticLoadH1 tables are associated by the element
IID and ID (name) fields.

Do not modify the contents of tables whose names are suffixed with "_R". These tables are used for
revisioning and, therefore, their contents should not be altered.

Product Description Libraries

1.5 Libraries
PowerStation libraries use Microsofts compound storage file structure. The internals of these files may
be viewed using any DOC file viewer (DOC files, in this context, refer to compound storage files, NOT
Microsoft Word Doc files). It is not intended for you to view or alter the libraries in any way other than
through the use of PowerStation because the internal storage of these structures is in binary format.

PowerStation library files (or portions thereof) may be exported. Refer to the Engineering Libraries
section for details.

Example of a PowerStation library structure:

PowerStation
Libraries
Cable Size
Cable Size
Cable Size
Cable Size
Cable Header
Cable Header
Cable Header
Cable Header
Cable Library
Cable Fire Protection
Motor Nameplate
Motor Model
Motor Characteristics
Motor Load
LV Circuit Breaker
HV Circuit Breaker
Fuse
Model
Model
Model
Model
ANSI
IEC
MFR
MFR
MFR

Product Description INI File

1.6 INI Files
PowerStation contains initialization files (INI files) that are used to set various defaults and parameters
for the local PC. These changes can be as simple as selected a favorite word processor, or as varied as
changing the coloration and thickness of lines in the one-line diagrams.

PowerStation automatically maintains a PSGRID.INI and an ETAPS.INI file in your Windows
directory. Normally, you do NOT need to make any entries in this file. However, you may want to
manipulate the following fields to customize PowerStations behavior.

There are four sections in the ETAPS.INI file [ETAP PowerStation], [AppVariables], [Colors] and
[Recent File List]. You may make entries in three of these sections [ETAP PowerStation],
[AppVariables], and [Colors]. The allowable entries below are listed by section.

Default values for the indicated entries are shown below. You will NOT find all of these entries in your
INI file since PowerStation automatically uses the default values without making an entry in the INI file.
1.6.1 PSGRID.INI
This initialization file referred to Ground Grid Systems. If a Ground Grid is created within ETAP
PowerStation, the PSGRID.INI file will be automatically created.

The first entry in the INI file is:
[Grid]
Initialized=1
If this entry is set to 1, then PowerStation recognizes that Ground Grid Systems have been activated on
the local PC.
FEM Timeout=1800
FEM Timeout indicates the maximum time allowed (in seconds) for a FEM calculation to be completed.
Minimum allowable time is 0. Maximum allowable time is 86400 (twenty four hours). The default setting
allows 30 minutes.
IEEE Timeout=60
IEEE Timeout indicates the maximum time allowed (in seconds) for an IEEE calculation to be completed.
Minimum allowable time is 0. Maximum allowable time is 86400 (twenty four hours). The default setting
allows 60 seconds.

1.6.2 ETAPS.INI
[ETAP PowerStation]
AllowProjectRename=1
A default value of 1 indicates automatic renaming of project files when they are copied outside of
PowerStation.

AutoRecover=1
This entry creates a temporary entry in each subsequent project database that is opened by this local PC.
This entry tells PowerStation that there is an unregistered One-Line-Element. This allows PowerStation
to deal with the element. Setting this value to 0 will cause PowerStation to report the error and shut down
the application rather than dealing with the unregistered One-Line-Element.
ConversionY=40
ConversionX=20
Above are the conversion default factors for setting element layout in a one-line diagram when converting
ETAP DOS database files into PowerStation. Reducing the Conversion Y value results in closer bus
distance vertically. Reducing the Conversion X value results in closer bus distances horizontally.
CurrentAnnotation orientation=345
DCCzNetPins=4
Controls the number of pins initially assigned to a new-style composite network when the network is
newly created. Valid values are 4-20.
DrawDown=1
DrawLeftRight=1
DrawArrow=1
These values indicate the default values for the position of the branch flows (power and current) and
arrows on the one-line diagram.DSN Version=2

PowerStation maintains and updates the ODBC System Data Source Name version for 'otiaccess'
automatically. This value will be set to 2 during the installation of PowerStation. Setting this value to 0
will cause PowerStation to create an ODBC System Data Source 'otiaccess' during startup. Setting the
value to 1 will cause PowerStation to reconfigure the ODBC System Data Source 'otiaccess'.
DumpOLx=15
DumpOLy=15
DumpOLMaxX=3000
When a database audit is performed, PowerStation may recover orphaned database items to a Dumpster
cell. The recovered one-line diagram elements are placed in rows with DumpOLx distance apart up to a
maximum width of DumpOLMaxX with DumpOLy distance between the rows, i.e., DumpOLx controls
the X-interval, DumpOLy controls the Y-interval, and DumpOLMaxX is the maximum X of successive
elements recovered to the Dumpster. For example, given the default values (above), PowerStation would
place the first element at X=15, Y=15; the second at X=30, Y=15, etc., until the 3000 logical units is
encountered. At that point, the next elements would be placed at X=15, Y=30, next at X=30, Y=30, etc.

DumpUGSx=20
DumpUGSy=20
DumpUGSMaxX=3000
When a database audit is performed, PowerStation may recover orphaned database items to a Dumpster
cell. The recovered UGS elements are placed in rows with DumpUGSx distance apart up to a maximum
width of DumpUGSMaxX with DumpUGSy distance between the rows, i.e., DumpUGSx controls the X-
interval, DumpUGSy controls the Y-interval, and DumpUGSMaxX is the maximum X of successive
elements recovered to the Dumpster. For example, given the default values (above), PowerStation would
place the first element at X=20, Y=20; the second at X=40, Y=20, etc., until the 3000 logical units is
encountered. At that point, the next elements would be placed at X=20, Y=40, next at X=40, Y=40, etc.
EstimateAtFixedAmp=1
This entry decides how to interpolate points from battery characteristic curves for battery sizing and
discharge calculations. If this entry is set to 1, the interpolation will be done at a fixed amp value;
otherwise, it is done at fixed AH or Time depending the value of UseAH_AmpCurve entry also in the
INI file.
Initialized=1
If this entry is set to 1, then PowerStation has been activated on the local PC.
LoadBusKVMatch=40
LoadBusKVMatch is the percent deviation allowed between load voltages and the bus kV to which the
load is attached. The allowable range is 1 to 99.
MaxBusAngMismatch=1
This entry defines the maximum angle mismatch at a bus. When transformer angle shift is considered in a
calculation, it can cause angle mismatch in a looped system if angle shifts of transformers involved in a
loop are not compatible, which will cause circulating power flow in the loop. ETAP PowerStation
identifies such a situation and informs the user before a system study. The value defined by this entry is
used as the threshold for checking bus angle mismatch. The allowable range is 0 to 360.
MaxBusIniAngDiff=10
This entry defines the maximum difference between the bus initial voltage angle from the Bus Editor and
the angle calculated with consideration of transformer angle shift, for determining the initial voltage angle
used in load flow calculation. In load flow calculation, if the Apply XFMR angle shift option is
checked and the bus voltage is used as the initial value, ETAP PowerStation calculates bus voltage angle
considering transformer angle shift. The calculated bus angle is referenced at the angle of first swing
machine. Then this calculated voltage angle is compared with the bus initial voltage angle displayed in
the Bus Editor. If the difference between the two angles is smaller than the MaxBusIniAngDiff value, the
angle from the Bus Editor is used as the initial bus voltage angle in the calculation; otherwise, the
calculated angle is used as the initial bus voltage angle.
MaxIterForAmpCalc=200
This is the default value for the maximum number of iterations for the Underground Raceway System
(UGS) for Uniform-Temperature and Uniform-Ampacity calculations.

MaxIterForCableSizeCalc=1000
This is the default value for the maximum number of iterations for the Underground System (UGS) for
Cable Sizing calculations.
MaxIterForTempCalc=50
This is the default value for the maximum number of iterations for the Underground Raceway System
(UGS) for Steady-State and Transient Temperature calculations.
Max Open LightRS=10
Max Open HeavyRS=10
These values indicate the default number of database handlers kept open at any time by PowerStation in
the current session. The default values should be sufficient for most cases involving ODBC drivers for
Microsoft Access and Microsoft SQL Server.

Due to the limitation imposed on the Microsoft ODBC Driver for Oracle (driver version 2.00.006325),
Oracle users may need to reduce the aforementioned values to 5 (set Max Open LightRS=5 and Max
Open HeavyRS=5).
MaxTransientStep=5000
This is the default value for the maximum number of steps for the Underground System (UGS) for the
Transient Temperature calculations.
MinOLVScale=1
Some video cards may have difficulties drawing PowerStations one-line diagrams at their minimum
scaling factors. These difficulties may even cause application errors on some computers. If you
experience these difficulties, try setting the MinOLVScale to a higher number. Allowable values are 0
through 16. A value of 16 effectively disables scaling and zooming on the one-line diagrams.
MsgLogInitialSize=12
OLDSpaceManagerCols =10
OLDSpaceManagerRows=10
CxSpaceManagerCols=10
CxSpaceManagerRows=10
These entries dimension the internal space manager used by the one-line diagram views or composite
network views to speed up redrawing. The columns and rows define the internal resolution for the space
manager. Higher values of columns and rows result in faster redrawing, but requires additional memory.
Additional memory is allocated on the basis of Rows * Columns.
ReloadLastProject=0
When set to 1, PowerStation will automatically load the last project that was open.
Save Initial Bus Updates=0
The initial bus updates obtained from Load Flow calculations are not written to the database by default.
Setting this value to 1 will cause PowerStation to write the values to the project database when it is saved.

Scrub Database=0
Do not Scrub Database Automatically. When set to 0, PowerStation will not automatically scrub the
database during startup.
Scrub Database=1
Scrub Database Automatically during startup.

The Scrub Database function uses the Compact Database utility provided by Microsoft Access. As you
change data in a database, the database file can become fragmented and use more disk space than is
necessary. Additionally, items deleted, from your one-line diagram and Dumpster, are retained within the
database file until the database is Scrubbed. The Compact Database utility will compact your database
to defragment existing data and remove deleted data from the database file. Compacted databases are
usually smaller and often run faster.

The Scrub Database function is only available for Microsoft Access 7.0 and higher databases.
PowerStation will automatically scrub the database when converting 1.4.1 project files to 2.0 project files.
SerializeAudit=1
This entry verifies all elements in the serialized stream and reports errors on unexpected elements found
in the stream. Setting this value to 0 will cause PowerStation to skip the verification process.
Time-outs
The following entries are calculation time-out defaults in seconds:
CDTimeOut=60
HATimeOut=60
LFTimeOut=60
MSTimeOut=600
OPFTimeOut=600
RATimeOut=60
SCTimeOut=60
TSTimeOut=600
VoltageAnnotation orientation=15
These values determine the slope for display of annotation results for bus voltages and short-circuit
currents. Some video cards may not be able to draw the rotated annotations used by PowerStation. In
that case, set the orientation entries to 0.
UseAH_AmpCurve=1
This entry decides the type of battery characteristic curves used for battery sizing and discharge
calculations. The battery characteristic curves entered in the Battery Library describe the relationship
between the discharging current and the time of the discharging with respect to a certain cell voltage,
referred to as the Time-Amp curve. If this entry is set to 1, the Time-Amp curve is converted to an AH-
Amp curve and then used in the calculation; otherwise the Time-Amp curve is used in the calculation.

UTAmpAccelFactor=0.7
This parameter is used in the Uniform-Temperature Ampacity calculation in the Underground Raceway
System (UGS). The allowable range is 0.0 to 2.0. The value can be set higher than the default setting of
0.7 to speed up the calculation; however, the calculation may diverge.
VLCLimit=0.8
This entry is used to control converting of a constant kVA load to a constant Z load for Transient Stability
calculations. If the connected bus voltage is below this value, a load type conversion will occur for all
applicable loads (constant kVA and constant Z). VLCLimit is in per unit. Its typical value is 0.8. The
allowable range is 0 to 2.0.

To avoid a sudden jump during the load type conversion, a 5% of voltage margin is added to make an
undetermined region of VLCLimit +/- 0.05, which means if the connected bus voltage drops below
VLCLimit - 0.05, a constant kVA load is to convert to constant Z load. On the other hand, if the
connected bus voltage recovers about VLCLimit + 0.05, the load is to converted back to constant kVA
load.
SQL_TextSize 79152
Sets the maximum length of a binary stream that can be written to SQL Server. If you get SQL Server
errors when writing a large project to SQL Server, you may need to increase the size of this variable.
UpdateConnections=0
If set to 1, PowerStation will automatically update all connections for elements in the Project database
whenever the project database is saved.

Message Log
The following entries are related to the PowerStation message log.
Max Display Msgs=255
PowerStations message log, displayed within PowerStation, shows up to 255 messages. The maximum
value that can be entered is 16384.
MsgLogInitialSize=12
This entry sets the initial height of the log window displayed at the bottom of the screen in logical units.
PowerStation will save the height of the log window into this entry during the shutdown process.
MsgLog Size=128
PowerStation maintains a text message log on disk that records all messages sent to the message log. This
file is named ~msglog.tmp. PowerStation maintains the last completed messages up to the maximum
file size as set by this INI file entry. The size of the message log files is in kilobytes, i.e., 128 is 128 kb.
Setting MsgLogSize=0 will disable message text logging. The maximum size the message.log file can be
set to is 1024 kb.
Pen Sizes for Printing
The following entries are related to the pen size for printing buses and nodes.

Print Bus As Line=
Windows 98 is more limited than Windows NT/2000 when it comes to graphic displays and printing.
Bus sizes can vary depending on the individual printer and other circumstances. Additionally, some
printers have a difficult time when printing buses from PowerStations one-line diagram. You should not
normally change this entry unless there are printing difficulties. The following entries are allowed:
Print Node As Line=n
PowerStation prints the node as a line drawn with a logical printer pen of size n. The length of the line
drawn is equal to the symbol size of the node. You can overwrite the pen size by using the Print
NodePenx entry. For example, if n=2 and Print NodePen2=1, PowerStation would use a logical pen size
of 1 to draw all nodes.
Print Bus As Line=-1
Print using the screen routines.
Print Bus As Line=0
Print using a logical printer pen of the individual bus symbol sizes (1-5) to print the buses. The size of
the logical printer pen is relative to the individual bus symbol size. You can overwrite the pen size by
using the Print BusPenx entry. For example, if Print BusPen3=2, PowerStation would use a logical pen
size of 2 to draw all buses of symbol size 3. All other buses will be printed the same size as their symbol
size.
Print Bus As Line=n
Where n can be equal to 1 through 5. PowerStation uses a logical printer pen of size n to print all buses,
regardless of bus symbol size. You can overwrite the pen size by using the Print BusPen entry. For
example, if n=2 and Print BusPen2=1, PowerStation would use a logical pen size of 1 to draw all buses.

The same rules stated above apply for bus sizes when creating metafiles. For example, if Print Bus As
Line=0 and Meta BusPen3=2, PowerStation would use a logical pen size of 2 to draw all buses of symbol
size 3 in the metafile. All other buses will be drawn the same size as their symbol size.
Print Node As Line=
The Win98 printer drivers for some printers and/or plotters may be incapable of drawing PowerStation
nodes. When this happens, PowerStation provides for a user-entered value in the INI file that instructs
PowerStation to draw the node as a bus. The following entries are valid:
Print Node As Line=-1
PowerStation ignores the entry and prints nodes as nodes.
Print Node As Line=0
PowerStation prints the node as a line with the width of a single pixel (very thin line). The length of the
line is equal to the symbol size of the node. You can overwrite the pen size by using the Print NodePenx
entry. For example, if Print NodePen3=2, PowerStation would use a logical pen size of 2 to draw all
nodes of symbol size 3. All other nodes will be printed the same size as their symbol size.

The same rules stated above apply for node sizes when creating metafiles. For example, if Print Node As
Line=0 and Meta NodePen3=2, PowerStation would use a logical pen size of 2 to draw all nodes of
symbol size 3 in the metafile. All other nodes will be drawn the same size as their symbol size.
The following entries are use to overwrite bus and node pen sizes for printing.

Print BusPen1=1
Print BusPen2=2
Print BusPen3=3
Print BusPen4=4
Print BusPen5=5
Print NodePen1=1
Print NodePen2=2
Print NodePen3=3
Print NodePen4=4
Print NodePen5=5

Each of these entries may assume valid values of 1 through 5. A value of 1 disables the functionality.
If, for example, Print BusPen3=1, PowerStation would use a logical pen size of 1 to draw all buses of
symbol size 3 when printing.

The following entries are used to overwrite bus and node pen sizes for creating metafiles.
Meta BusPen1=1
Meta BusPen2=1
Meta BusPen 3=1
Meta BusPen4=1
Meta BusPen5=1

Meta BusPen1=0
Draw the bus as a single line of pixels.
Meta BusPen1=n
Draw the bus with a logical pen size equal to n (1 to 5).
Meta NodePen1=2
Meta NodePen2=2
Meta NodePen3=2
Meta NodePen4=2
Meta NodePen5=2


Meta NodePen1=-1
PowerStation treats the Meta NodePen(n) as if its setting were 1.
Meta NodePen1=n
PowerStation draws an ellipse of logical width and height equal to n (1 to 5). Using an odd value may
result in a node that appears directly to the left of the connectors. You must adjust the node location in
the resulting metafile.
Converting to a Metafile
The following entry is used when converting a PowerStation one-line diagram to an enhanced metafile
(.emf), or Windows metafile (.wmf).

This entry is allowed for Win95 & Win98 (Windows NT does not require this entry and ignores it). Note
that the Meta BusPen and Meta NodePen entries work in connection with the Print Bus As Line entry and
follow the same procedure as outlined in Print Bus As Line.
Print Gray Line=1
Some printers cannot print a gray line. Setting this value to 0 will cause the printer to print a black line
instead of a gray line for de-energized connectors.

[AppVariables]
DCSC LFPrecision=.0001
This is the default precision for load flow resolutions in DC Short Circuit. Valid range is .0000001 to 0.1.
DefaultStandard=English
PowerStation uses English units as a default for all new projects created. This may be changed to metric
by replacing English with Metric.
LastLibrarySubDir=C:\etaps\powerstn\lib
PowerStation stores the location of the library file associated with a project.
LastProject=C:\etaps\powerstn\example\example.oti
PowerStation stores the name of the last project opened.
LastSubDir=C:\etaps\powerstn\example
PowerStation stores the location of the last project opened.
Project Default Path=C:\etaps\powerstn
PowerStation will use its own directory as the default project path unless this entry is placed into the
ETAPS.INI file. The PowerStation default path is C:\etaps\powerstn if PowerStation is installed using
default settings. For example, if you set: Project Default Path=D:\temp\testproj, then a new PowerStation
project named userproj will have a folder created with the name of the project. PowerStation will store
all associated project files, output reports, plots, etc. in the subdirectory shown: Project Default
Path=D:\temp\testproj\userproj

License Manager Server
Two options are available for licensing ETAP PowerStation. The primary option utilizes Microsoft Name
Pipes (text names for PCs). The secondary option is direct TCP/IP communication where the Name Pipe
service is not available, for example, Novell networks.

The Named Pipe License Manager is named ETAPSLM.exe.
The TCP/IP License Manager is named ETAPSLMT.exe.
ETAPSLMT and ETAPSLM cannot run simultaneously on the same License Manager Server.
LM Port=
LM Port=<Communication Port>
<Communication Port> specifies the port number that PowerStation uses to communicate with the
TCP/IP server. If this entry does not exist, the port number defaults to 6260. However, this can be
configured by modifying the following registry entry:
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Operation Technology, Inc.\LM\Port
LM Server=
LM Server=<Server Name>
This entry identifies the location of the License Manager Server where the ETAP License Manager and
network hardware key are installed. Default <Server Name> is blank. This entry is required if you are
using a network hardware key for simultaneous usage of PowerStation, i.e., this entry is not required if
you have a stand-alone license.

When LM Server=<Server Name> is available, PowerStation will ignore the values of <TCP/IP Server
Name>, <Servers IP Address>, and <Communication Port>. In such a case, Named Pipes are used for
communications.

When <Server Name> does not exist, PowerStation will find the value of <TCP/IP Server Name> and try
to connect to it. If <TCP/IP Server name> is also missing, PowerStation seeks to connect to the server
with IP Address found in <Servers IP Address>. In the event when none of <Server Name>, <TCP/IP
Server Name>, and <Servers IP Address> exist, PowerStation will try local license authentication.

LM Server IP=
LM Server IP=<Servers IP Address>
<Servers IP Address> allows the user to enter the License Manager Servers IP address when <TCP/IP
Server Name> is not available. This entry can only be made if the Server is using a fixed IP address.
LM TCP Server=
LM TCP Server=<TCP/IP Server Name>
<TCP/IP Server Name> indicates the License Manager Servers TCP/IP address. The name is resolved to
an IP address using any available Domain Name Service (DNS) or the HOSTS file can be used to point to
a fixed IP address.

Examples of different License Manager Server INI setups:
CD Key=XXX-YYY-ZZZ
PowerStation automatically creates this entry when you enter the CD key provided with your
PowerStation CD-ROM. This sequence of letters and numbers needs to match with your companys
specific license. This sequence changes with each major release.
LM Server=lm
LM TCP Server=tcplm.oti.com
LM Server IP=10.10.10.191
LM Port=5000
Specifies that the host lm will be used as License Manager through Named Pipes. All TCP/IP entries are
ignored.
Specifies that the host with IP address 10.10.10.191 will be used as License Manager through TCP/IP via
default port number 6260.
LM TCP Server=tcplm.oti.com
LM Port=5000
Specifies that the host tcplm.oti.com will be used as License Manager through TCP/IP via port number
5000.
PDE Export Key=NYZ-Z2K-ZP3
PowerStation automatically creates this entry when you enter the Data Exchange Export CD key provided
with your PowerStation CD-ROM. This sequence is only provided if you have licensed this specific
module.
PDE Import Key=P6O-THG-BJU
PowerStation automatically creates this entry when you enter the Data Exchange Import CD key provided
with your PowerStation CD-ROM. This sequence is only provided if you have licensed this specific
module.
ReportProcessor=C:\program files\Microsoft Office\Office\Winword.exe
PowerStation uses Notepad by default to view the output report of calculations. You can change this
entry to use your preferred viewer. In most cases, you must enter the fully qualified path and application
name as shown above for Microsoft Word.
%N=String
Enter a customized macro (string) to be used within the PowerStation INI file. You can set up to 10
macros (%0, %1%9).


The following is a list of macros available to be used within the PowerStation INI file:

%o ODBC connect string including the path and name of the project source database
%p Fully qualified path (path+project name) of the currently open PowerStation Project
%d Path of the currently open PowerStation Project

Note that macros can only be used for arguments for the Tool entry. In all cases, the trailing \ is not
provided by macro expansion. Expansion does wrap the appropriate phrases in "" to allow for long
filenames and spaces, etc.

PowerStation provides a mechanism allowing you to define external programs (external tools) in the
ETAPS.INI file. PowerStation lists external programs on its Tools menu bar allowing you to launch and
execute the external programs. You may define up to 20 external programs (menu entries).

You can define each external programs menu entry in PowerStation, the name and location where the
program resides, and arguments to be passed. Overall, this mechanism provides a flexible interface to
external programs from PowerStation.

Tool1=text|path|argument1|argument2|argument3|argument4
Tool1 Up to 20 external tools (Tool1, Tool2, Tool20)
text Text to be displayed in PowerStation submenu Tools
path Fully qualified path (path + program name) of the external program
argument Arguments to be passed to the external program

For example, enter the following line to start Microsoft Word from PowerStation:

Tool1=MS Word| C:\program files\Microsoft Office\Office\Winword.exe

Enter the following line to launch PDConfig as an external tool within PowerStation:

Tool2=Configuration Report|C:\ETAPS\PowerStn\PDConfig.exe|%o|C:\etaps\powerstn\target.mdb

PDConfig is an external program that creates an MS Access database that contains the status of all
protective devices, motors, and loads for each Configuration Status you have defined. In this example,
PDConfig.exe requires an argument for the PowerStation project file (including ODBC connect string)
and an argument for the target file where the results are saved. Macros may be used to simplify the
entries.

Tool2=Config Tables|C:\ETAPS\PowerStn\PDConfig.exe|%o|%d\Target.mdb

Oracle database users have three additional entries in the INI file. These entries store the name, user ID,
and password of the associated Oracle database.

ORACLE Database=MyOracleDB
Name of the Oracle database (default 2: for local Oracle)

ORACLE UserID=MyOracleID
Oracle user ID (default SCOTT for local Oracle)

ORACLE UserPassword=MyPassword
Oracle user valid password (default TIGER for local Oracle)
[Settings]
PreviewPages=1
This entry specifies selects the Print Preview default display. If the setting equals 1, then Print Preview
will default the display to one page at a time. If the setting equals 2, then the Print Preview will default
the display to two pages at a time.
[Colors]
PowerStation provides the user with the ability to extensively customize the colors, which PowerStation
uses to draw elements and lines. You are not required to enter any of the following customization entries.
PowerStation is fully equipped with default values. You may, however, customize your installation to
use the colors of your choice by entering new values for any of the INI entries listed below. To designate
color selection, PowerStation uses the RGB (Red-Green-Blue) scheme used by MS Windows. Each of
the primary colors (Red, Green, Blue) may be designated as a value between 0-255, with 0 meaning no
value and 255 meaning maximum value.

To designate a color (for example LightGray, which has Red=192, Green=192, and Blue=192), enter
the following:

color = RedValue + (256*GreenValue) + 65536*BlueValue
Our example color LightGray becomes 192 +(256*192) + (65536*192) = 12632256

The following are some commonly used colors:
Black=RGB(0,0,0)=0
Blue =RGB(0,0,255)= 16711680
DarkBlue= RGB(0,0,128)=8388608
Green= RGB(0,255,0)=65280
DarkGreen= RGB(0,128,0)=32768
Red= RGB(255,0,0)=255
MediumRed=RGB(192,0,0)=192
DarkRed= RGB(128,0,0)=123
LightGray= RGB(192,192,192)= 12632256
Cyan= RGB(0,255,255)=16776705
Dark Cyan = RGB(0, 128, 128) = 8421376
Dark Yellow = RGB(128, 128, 0) = 32896
Magenta=RGB(255,0,255)=16711935
White=RGB(255,255,255)=16777215


The following entries set the color of the connection between elements of the specified phase type.

Color L1=8421376
Phase type L1 two-wire

Color L2=8421376

Color LL=8421376
Phase type LL two-wire

Color SP2A=8421376
Single-phase two-wire phase A

Color SP2AB=8421376
Single-phase two-wire phase AB

Color SP2B=8421376
Single-phase two-wire phase B

Color SP2BC=8421376
Single-phase two-wire phase BC

Color SP2CA=8421376
Single-phase two-wire phase CA

Color SP2C=8421376
Single-phase two-wire phase C

Color SP2U=8421376
Single-phase two-wire, specific phase unknown

Color SP2W=8421376
Single-phase two-wire

Color SP3A=65280
Single-phase three-wire phase A

Color SP3AB=65280
Single-phase three-wire phase AB

Color SP3B=65280
Single-phase three-wire phase B

Color SP3BC=65280
Single-phase three-wire phase BC

Color SP3C=65280
Single-phase three-wire phase C

Color SP3CA=65280
Single-phase three-wire phase CA

Color SP3U=65280
Single-phase two-wire, specific phase unknown

Color SP3W=65280
Single-phase three-wire

Color Unknown=32896
Phase-type unknown

Default Color Values for ETAP PowerStation are listed below:

Alarm Color=255
Red

AC Elements=0
Three-phase (Black)

AC Faulted Bus=192
MediumRed

AC Not Hot=12632256
LightGray

AC Pins=255
Red

AC Selected=255
Red

Ackd Alarm Color=65280
Green

DC Elements=16711680
DC connections (Blue)

DC Faulted Bus=
MediumRed

DC Not Hot=12632256
LightGray

DC Pins=16776705
Cyan

DC Selected=255
Red

Neutral Not Hot=12632256
LightGray

Neutral Pins=65280
Green
Neutral Selected=255
Red

Other Elements=65280
Green

Warning Color=16711935
Magenta

[PenStyles]
The following entries will change the pen or line style used to show connections between elements of the
specified phase type. Allowable styles are: Dash, Solid, DashDot, DashDotDot, DashDotDotDot,
DashDashDot, DashDashDotDot, DashDashDotDotDot.

Pen 3Phase=Solid
Three-phase connections

Pen LL=Dash
Phase type LL two-wire

Pen L1=Dash

Pen L2=Dash

Pen DC=Solid
DC connections

Pen SP2A=DashDot
Single-phase two-wire phase A

Pen SP2AB=DashDashDot
Single-phase two-wire phase AB

Pen SP2B=DashDotDot
Single-phase two-wire phase B

Pen SP2BC=DashDashDotDot
Single-phase two-wire phase BC

Pen SP2C=DashDotDotDot
Single-phase two-wire phase C

Pen SP2CA=DashDashDotDotDot
Single-phase two-wire phase CA

Pen SP2U=Dash
Single-phase two-wire phase unknown

Pen SP2W=Dash
Single-phase two-wire

Pen SP3A=DashDot
Single-phase three-wire phase A

Pen SP3AB=DashDashDot
Single-phase three-wire phase AB

Pen SP3B=DashDotDot
Single-phase three-wire phase B

Pen SP3BC=DashDashDotDot
Single-phase three-wire phase BC

Pen SP3C=DashDotDotDot
Single-phase three-wire phase C

Pen SP3CA=DashDashDotDotDot
Single-phase three-wire phase CA

Pen SP3W=Solid
Three-phase three-wire

Pen SP3U=Solid
Single-phase two-wire phase unknown

Pen Unknown=Solid
Phase-type unknown

[Recent File List]
PowerStation stores the last nine PowerStation project names and locations for easy access directly from
the File Menu inside PowerStation.

File1=C:\etaps\powerstn\example\example.oti
File2= C:\etaps\powerstn\sample\sample.oti
File3= C:\etaps\powerstn\userproj\userproj.oti
File4= C:\temp\example\example.oti
File5= D:\powerstn\example\example.oti
File6= D:\powerstn\sample\sample.oti
File7= D:\powerstn\userproj\userproj.oti
File8=D:\temp\projfile\sample\sample.oti
File9= D:\temp\projfile\example\example.oti
Product Description Help

1.7 Help
The complete contents of this User Guide are included in the online Help file. There are several methods
for displaying Help contents in the PowerStation program.

Help Search
Help for all Editors
Help Line
Function Key <F1> Help
Help from the Project Toolbar
Help Search
Click on Help on the PowerStation menu bar to conduct your Help search by using the Index or by doing
a word search. The Help Search Editor contains Contents, Index, and Search pages. The Contents
page allows you to browse the help file Chapter-by-Chapter, just like the PowerStation User Guide.

From the Index page you can view the Help index and display the contents of any item listed. To
facilitate your search, type in the first few letters of the word or subject you are looking for. The index
listing highlights the index item closest to what you have entered.

The Search page enables you to look for words and phrases in Help Topics instead of searching for
information by category. In this page you can type or select the word(s) to define your search.

Help for Editors
Help buttons are provided for all editors. Click on the Help button to display the description for all pages
of the selected editor.

Help Line
Help lines for all entry fields are available in PowerStation. To view the Help line, click in any entry
field. Its description will be displayed at the bottom of your screen. For example, the above image has
the Bus Minimum Load Diversity Factor field selected.
Function Key <F1> Help
Press <F1> to display Help in the currently active window. For example, open the Bus Editor and select
the Load page, then press <F1>. The Load page Help screen will be displayed.
Help on the Project Toolbar
Click on the Help button located on the Project Toolbar to display Help screens. The Help button is
indicated by a question mark. Click once on the Help button. A question mark (?) will appear beside the
cursor. Move the cursor to any item that you need more information on, and then click again. The Help
screen for that item will be displayed.


ETAP

PowerStation
4.0
User Guide
Copyright 2001
All Rights Reserved





Southern California

(949) 462-0100 Sales
(949) 462-0400 Fax

Chapter 2

Setup

This chapter describes how to install ETAP for stand-alone and network licenses.

System Requirements for ETAP include minimum and recommended settings.
Installing ETAP PowerStation provides a step-by-step procedure for installing PowerStation,
PowerPlot, and the License Manager.
Configuring ODBC provides detailed instructions on the successful installation of SQL Server and
Oracle drivers. SQL Server and Oracle require an advanced knowledge of Windows networking,
application installation, and a licensed copy of SQL Server or Oracle.
Running PowerStation illustrates how to start the program after successful installation.
PowerStation Licensing details different forms of PowerStation Licensing, what they are used for,
how they operate, and which operating systems are required.
License Manager Server describes the setup of a Network PowerStation Key.
ETAP License Manager Installation describes the installation of the ETAP License Manager for
network licensing of PowerStation.
ETAP License Manager Verification shows how to verify the ETAP License Manager installation.
Installation Maintenance (Uninstall) describes how to remove or modify the currently installed
version of PowerStation.
Removing ETAP License Manager describes how to uninstall the ETAP License Manager.
Installation of PowerPlot describes how to install the ETAP-PowerPlot relay coordination software.
System Optimization describes the computer hardware, virtual memory file size, and ODBC DSN
buffer size requirements to increase the speed of PowerStation operation.
Setup System Requirements
2.1 System Requirements
2.1.1 Minimum Hardware Requirements
Your computer must meet the following minimum hardware requirements to run PowerStation 4.0:

Intel Pentium II
128 MB of RAM
500 MB available hard disk space
1024 x 768 resolution
Parallel Port - Stand Alone Licensing only
CD ROM Drive Stand Alone Licensing only

Recommended PC Configuration
Intel Pentium IV or higher
512 MB of RAM
2 GB hard disk
21" monitor with 1024x768 resolution
Parallel Port - Stand Alone Licensing only
Microsoft
Windows
2000 Professional or XP Professional

Internet Explorer 5.0 or higher

2.1.2 Minimum Operating System & Software Requirements
Your computer must meet the following Operating System and software requirements to use
PowerStation 4.0:

Microsoft
Windows

98

SE (Second Edition)
NT 4.0 (Service Pack 6 or higher)
2000 (Service Pack 2)
Me
XP
Internet Explorer 5.0 or higher

Setup Installing ETAP PowerStation
2.2 Installing ETAP PowerStation
This section describes the installation procedure for Windows 98 SE/Me/NT/2000/XP of PowerStation
using a Microsoft Access, SQL Server, or Oracle database. PowerStation provides all the necessary tools
to build and maintain the Microsoft Access databases used for your PowerStation projects. Other
database formats such as Microsoft SQL Server and Oracle require a separate license from the appropriate
software developer/distributor.
2.2.1 ETAP PowerStation 4.0
This installation procedure assumes that your CD-ROM drive is designated as the D: drive. If this is not
the case, replace the letter D with the letter corresponding to the drive where your CD-ROM is located.

The same procedure is used to install ETAP PowerStation regardless of the licensing method (Stand
Alone or Network.)

To install PowerStation, close all applications and insert the PowerStation CD into your CD-ROM
drive. Make sure that the PowerStation 4.0 is selected from the ETAPInstaller program and press
INSTALL

Operation Technology, Inc. 2-3

Another method for installing PowerStation without using the ETAPInstaller program is to click on the
Windows Toolbar Start button. Select Run; type: D:\SETUP.

ETAP PowerStation 4.0
PowerStation installation will begin with the self-configuration of the Windows Installer Service as
shown in the following Dialog Box

On Windows 98, Windows NT 4.0 and Windows Me workstations, the InstallShield Wizard requires
a system reboot before the installation can continue. When prompted, press RESTART to reboot the
target computer.

The installation will then continue with this Welcome Dialog Box

2.2.2 MDAC
PowerStation may require the installation of Microsoft Data Access Components 2.5 Service Pack2
(MDAC 2.5 SP2) and Microsoft Data Access Components 2.6 Service Pack1 (MDAC 2.6 SP1). The
setup program may skip the installation of MDAC 2.5 SP2 and MDAC 2.6 SP1 if the components are
already installed on the computer or if the specific operating system does not require them.

PowerStation automatically starts the installation of MDAC 2.5 SP2 if it is required.

PowerStation also starts the installation of MDAC 2.6 SP1 if necessary

2.2.3 Detection of Installed Versions Of PowerStation
The PowerStation 4.0 Setup program can detect the following versions of ETAP PowerStation installed
on the target computer:

ETAP PowerStation 2.0.8
ETAP 3.0 Demo

The PowerStation 4.0 Setup program WILL NOT detect and process pre-released (Beta) versions of
PowerStation 4.0. These versions will have to be manually un-installed by using the Windows
Add/Remove Programs feature, before installing PowerStation 4.0.

By default, Setup marks previous installations of PowerStation for removal. You may de-select any
version of PowerStation you want to retain. Otherwise, the previous installations will be removed before
the actual PowerStation 4.0 installation begins. It is recommended to select the Remove option during
this part of the installation, to completely remove previous versions of the ETAP PowerStation program
from the target computer. Library files from PowerStation 3.0.1 and 3.0.2 will not be deleted.

2.2.4 ETAP PowerStation 4.0 License Agreement
The PowerStation installation continues once MDAC drivers are successfully installed. The installation
and use of ETAP PowerStation is governed by the terms and conditions of the ETAP PowerStation
License Grant and Agreement. These terms must be accepted before the installation can continue.

The InstallShield setup program also displays hardware and software requirements as well as other
useful information. Click Next to continue with the installation.

Setup requests the name of a destination folder on your hard drive where you would like
PowerStation to be installed. The default destination folder is C:\ETAP 400\PowerStation. To
install the program in a different location, click on the Browse button and select or type a new
destination folder.

Following is an example of typical folders created by PowerStation:

2.2.5 ETAP PowerStation 4.0 Setup Type
The PowerStation 4.0 InstallShield Wizard allows the user to select from three different types of
installations that could be performed on the target computer.

Typical
This is the standard (normal) installation of PowerStation. Select this option in most circumstances.
Compact
The Compact installation does not install the Library, Help, Documentation, and Example files. This
installation should be used only when very limited disk space is available.
Custom
This installation enables you to select the files you want to install onto your computer. For example, this
installation can be used to install only the ETAP License Manager 5.2.3 to your License Manager
Server. For details, see the ETAP License Manager section.

The installation program adds a PowerStation 4.0 shortcut to the Program Folder. By default, the
Setup program will create a Program Folder PowerStation 4.0, which could be renamed by the user.

Setup reviews the selected components prior to installing them.

Select Next to begin the installation of ETAP PowerStation 4.0.

2.2.6 PowerStation Library File
If the installation directory chosen during the installation process of PowerStation contains a
PowerStation library with the name etaplib4.lib, the installation program will preserve the existing
PowerStation library.

The installation program renames the existing PowerStation library to OldETAP4.lib before installing
the new library etaplib4.lib. If an OldETAP4.lib already exists on the target computer, the installation
program directs you to make a backup copy of the old file or move the old file into a different subfolder.
Otherwise, the installation program will overwrite the current OldETAP4.lib by renaming the existing
etaplib4.lib to OldETAP4.lib.

2.2.7 Data Source Name Registration
The installation program automatically sets up and registers the ODBC Data Source Names (DSNs)
otiaccess, otisql, otireport, and oracle.
2.2.8 Registering Active X Components
The Setup program automatically registers the following ActiveX components required for running with
PowerStation 4.0:

PVCombo.OCX
PVDateEdit.OCX
PVDT40.OCX
PVDT80.OCX
PVList.OCX
PVMask.OCX
PVNum.OCX
PVTimeOCX

The ActiveX components are copied into folder PVDT40 under the installation location.
2.2.9 Installation Completion
When the PowerStation installation is completed, a program folder is created that includes a PowerStation
Program shortcut. For your convenient access, the Setup program also creates a PowerStation Program
shortcut on your desktop.

Upon completion, you need to restart your computer by selecting Yes, I want to restart my computer now
and then selecting Finish.

After System reboot, the PowerStation Setup program automatically prepares configuration
information for the Maintenance mode.

Setup Configuring ODBC
2.3 Configuring ODBC
A System Data Source Name (DSN) (versus a User DSN) gives any user logged into the computer access
to this driver, i.e., this driver is available to any person using this computer. By default, the PowerStation
setup program will configure and register all four system DSNs necessary to run PowerStation with
Microsoft Access (DSN "otiaccess" and otireport), SQL Server (DSN "otisql"), and Oracle (DSN "
otioracle") databases.
2.3.1 SQL Server Database
SQL Server requires a custom installation with information specific to your network and the SQL Server
setup. PowerStation requires you to already have SQL Server 6.5 or higher installed on your network.

Select ODBC Data Source (or ODBC 32-bit Administrator) from the Control Panel.

There are four fields to complete. These are the Data Source Name, Server, Language Name, and
Generate Stored Procedure for Prepared Statement fields. All other fields may use the default values
supplied by ODBC.

Data Source Name is otisql in all lower case letters.
Server: Specify the name of the server you will be using. Consult your network administrator or
SQL Server administrator for this information.
Language Name: (Default) unless your SQL Server administrator specifies otherwise.
Generate Stored Procedure for Prepared Statement: PowerStation runs at least four times faster if
selected.

SQL Server may require some system-dependent installation procedures. Contact your network
administrator or Operation Technology, Inc. for technical assistance.
2.3.2 Oracle Database
PowerStation requires the Microsoft
ODBC Driver for Oracle
(version 2.00.006325), or Microsoft

ODBC for Oracle (version 2.573.4403.00) to work with Oracle databases. The Microsoft ODBC Driver
for Oracle will be copied onto your system and registered by default.

There are four fields to complete. They are the Data Source Name, DBQ, UserID, and User Password
fields. All other fields may use the default values supplied by ODBC.

Data Source Name is otioracle in all lower case letters.
DBQ: Specify the name of the Oracle database you will be connecting to. Consult your network or
Oracle administrator for this information.
UserID: This is your Oracle Logon ID. Consult your Oracle administrator for this information.
User Password: This is the password associated with your Oracle UserID. Consult your Oracle
administrator for this information.
Setup Running PowerStation
2.4 Running PowerStation
After PowerStation is installed and ODBC is installed and configured, you are ready to run PowerStation.
Place the OTI parallel printer port module (ETAP Security Hardware Key) directly onto your printer port
if you are using Stand Alone licensing. If you have a printer, connect your printer cable to the other side
of the module.

After you install PowerStation, you must restart (reboot) your computer prior to running PowerStation.
The restart is necessary so Windows can load the drivers associated with the printer port module provided
with PowerStation. If the computer is not restarted, PowerStation will not be able to read your printer
port module on the back of the computer or server.

If you are using a Network Key (one printer port module for your entire Local Area Network), refer to
the ETAP License Manager section, which pertains to the PowerStation License Manager setup
procedure.

To run PowerStation, click on the Start button, select Programs, then select the ETAP PowerStation 4.0
folder, and click on PowerStation 4.0.

The first time PowerStation is run, it requires you to type the CD-Key code (in XXX-XXX-XXX format)
that comes with your PowerStation CD (PowerStation version 4.0. and higher).

Setup PowerStation Licensing
2.5 PowerStation Licensing
2.5.1 Security Hardware Key
ETAP PowerStation uses two different types of hardware keys to license the use of the software:

Stand-Alone Hardware Key Placed and resides on the back of your computer
Network Hardware Key Placed and resides on a License Manager Server

The two types of hardware keys look similar; however, the Network Hardware Key will have a small
sticker that says Network on it.
2.5.2 Stand-Alone Version of PowerStation Licensing
A Stand-Alone Hardware Key is placed directly on the parallel port of the computer (Windows
98/Me/NT/2000/XP) that will be running the software. No installation is required other than
PowerStation itself; licensing for the computer will be done automatically by the Stand-Alone Hardware
Key and software installed by the PowerStation setup program.
2.5.3 Network Version of PowerStation Licensing
A Network Hardware Key requires a Windows NT/2000/XP Workstation or Server. Place the Network
Hardware Key on the back of the computer/server designated to license PowerStation. This will be the
permanent location of the key, and as such should not be removed once it is operational. (The computers
obtaining permission to run PowerStation may be Windows 98/Me/NT/2000/XP.)

Installation on Windows NT/2000/XP requires that the installation be performed by a user account with
Windows NT Administrative privileges. The network installation can be done either with the License
Manager 5.2.3 Setup program provided on the PowerStation 4.0 CD-ROM, or can be launched from the
ETAPInstaller Program, or can be installed manually. In each case, the steps to be performed are the
same.
Setup License Manager Server
2.6 License Manager Server
For the purpose of running PowerStation, the computer containing the Network Hardware Key is called
the License Manager Server. The License Manager Server needs to be ON and RUNNING to issue
authorization to run PowerStation. Each computer, running PowerStation (Windows
98/Me/NT/2000/XP), requests authorization from the License Manager Server via your LAN or WAN. If
the License Manager Server does not issue the requested authorization, PowerStation will NOT run.

The License Manager Server does not require the actual PowerStation software to be installed.
2.6.1 ETAP License Manager 5.2.3
The ETAP License Manager is a Windows NT/2000/XP Workstation or Server program that assists the
Network Hardware Key in licensing the use of PowerStation. The Network Hardware Key provides
licensing of up to 254 simultaneous users of PowerStation via a local area network (LAN) and/or a wide
area network (WAN). The ETAP License Manager manages the administration of simultaneous
PowerStation users as set forth in the terms of your ETAP license agreement.

Proper operation of PowerStation requires the installation of the ETAP License Manager on the License
Manager Server and the modification of the ETAPS.INI file on each PowerStation users computer.

The Network Hardware Key and the ETAP License Manager use minimal processor time and do not
require more than 10MB of free disk space for proper operation. If the machine will also be used to run
PowerStation, make sure the machine meets the PowerStation minimum hardware requirements.

Setup ETAP License Manager Installation
2.7 ETAP License Manager Installation
ETAP PowerStation 4.0 or higher will use this method of installation. Earlier versions will use the
manual installation method described in detail in the following section. On the PowerStation CD, a
separate setup program is provided to install the ETAP License Manager. To install the License
Manager on Windows NT/2000/XP (WorkStation or Server), insert the PowerStation CD into your CD-
ROM drive and select ETAP License Manager 5.2.3 from the ETAP Installer Program, then press
INSTALL.

Another way to install the ETAP License Manager without the ETAPInstaller Program is to select
RUN from the START Menu, then Select Setup.exe in the folder LMSETUP on your PowerStation
CD.
Select OK; the ETAP License Manager installation procedure will begin.

PowerStation 4.0 CD includes two versions of the ETAP License Manager. Both versions are identical
with respect to functionality. The default ETAP License Manager utilizes the Windows NT/2000/XP
Named Pipes protocol commonly used in Microsoft network while the other ETAP License Manager
uses TCP/IP. Utilize the TCP/IP protocol if your network is Novell or if you do not use Named Pipes
services.
The ETAP License Manager 5.2.3 Setup program lets you select which License Manager you want to
install. However, it will copy both License Managers to Windows System folders in case you need to
change to the other License Manager later.

In order for the ETAP License Manager to work properly, Setup requires a system restart at the end of
the installation procedure.

Note that the ETAP License Manager setup program requires Windows NT/2000/XP to run. It does
NOT run on Windows 98/Me.

2.7.1 Manual ETAP License Manager Installation
Installation on Windows NT/2000/XP requires that the installation be performed by a user account with
Windows NT Administrative privileges. Use the manual installation only if the ETAP License Manager
Installation program did not successfully install the ETAP License Manager.

Note that you should substitute your Windows NT directory name (usually WINNT) whenever you see
'WINNT' in this document.

1. Logon with ADMINISTRATOR Privileges to the License Manager Server.
2. Copy, from the PowerStation CD, the entire contents of the directory
POWERSTN/ETAPKEY/WINNT/ into the WINNT/SYSTEM32/DRIVERS sub-directory.

This copy includes the following files:

DS1410D.SYS
DOWNTVDD.DLL
ETAPKEY.EXE
READKEY.TXT

3. Copy the two files ETAPSLM.EXE and /ETAPSLMT.EXE from the PowerStation CD folder
ETAP 400/PowerStation/LicMgr into the WINNT/SYSTEM32/DRIVERS sub-directory.
4. From the WINNT/SYSTEM32/DRIVERS sub-directory, run the file ETAPKEY.EXE.
5. Select Install ETAP Key from the ETAPKEY menu. Exit from ETAPKEY.

6. Go to the WINNT/SYSTEM32/DRIVERS sub-directory from an MS-DOS prompt.
7. If you have an earlier version of the ETAP License Manager installed on the License Manager
Server, continue with 8a; otherwise skip to 8b.
8. a. Type: etapslm remove (Removes ETAP License Manager), or etapslmt remove (for TCP/IP)
You should see a message that says: ETAPS Lic Mgr removed.
b. Type: etapslm install (Installs ETAP License Manager), or etapslmt install (for TCP/IP)
You should see a message that says: ETAPS Lic Mgr installed.
9. Reboot the License Manager Server.
2.7.2 PowerStation Installation for Network Licensing
For each computer (Windows 98/Me/NT/2000/XP) that runs PowerStation, install PowerStation using the
Typical installation option. See the Installing ETAP section for details.

To run PowerStation, each user MUST be a registered user on the License Manager Server. As a
minimum, each user must be a member of the Users group on the License Manager Server. If you use
Domain administration as provided by the Windows NT Server, it is sufficient to add the Domain Users
group to the License Manager Servers User Manager / Policies / User Rights / Access.

In addition, one modification needs to be made locally in order to receive permission to operate
PowerStation. This modification is done by updating the ETAPS.INI file, by specifying the location of
the Network License.
2.7.3 Updating ETAPS.INI File
Each computer, obtaining permission to operate PowerStation from the License Manager Server, must
update the INI file to indicate the location of the License Manager Server.

Run PowerStation once. The program will issue the following message:

Click on OK to close PowerStation. This procedure creates the ETAPS.INI file.
License Manager using Name Pipes
When License Manager using Name Pipes is installed, update the ETAPS.INI by the following steps:

Edit the C:\WINNT\ETAPS.INI (NT/2000) or C:\WINDOWS\ETAPS.INI (Windows 98/Me/XP)
file using Notepad or a similar text editor.
Modify the line that says: LM Server=
Insert the name of the License Manager Server. For example: LM Server=CpuName
This procedure will tell PowerStation where the ETAP License Manager is located.
If you are running PowerStation directly on the License Manager Server, you need to modify this line
by typing a period after the equal sign: LM Server=.
License Manager using TCP/IP
When License Manger using TCP/IP is installed, update the ETAPS.INI by the following steps:

Edit the C:\WINNT\ETAPS.INI (NT/2000) or C:\WINDOWS\ETAPS.INI (Windows 98/Me/XP)
file using Notepad or a similar text editor.
Delete the line that says: LM Server=
Add the line LM TCP Server=
Insert the name of License Manager Server with domain information.
For example: LM TCP Server= tcplm.oti.com
If you would like to use IP address instead, add the line LM Server IP=
Insert the IP address of the License Manager Server.
For example: LM Server IP=10.10.10.191
After the TCP Server or IP is set, you may configure to use a specific port by adding the line
LM Port=
Insert the port that you would like to use. For example LM Port=5000.
Please note that you have to change the port that the License Manager Server is using in order for this
setting to work.

Setup ETAP License Manager Verification
2.8 ETAP License Manager Verification
2.8.1 Verifying ETAP License Manager Installation
After rebooting the License Manager Server, go to START/ SETTINGS/CONTROL PANEL /DEVICES
to verify that the ETAP License Manager is running. Find the entry DS1410D in the Device list box.
The entry should show Started Automatic. If you cannot find DS1410D, you have not copied the files
from the PowerStation CD correctly or you have not run ETAPKEY.EXE properly.

Go to START/SETTINGS/CONTROL PANEL/SERVICES. Find the entry for ETAPS Lic Mgr in the
Service list box. If you cannot find ETAPS Lic Mgr, you have not installed ETAPSLM.EXE properly.
The ETAPS Lic Mgr entry should be Started or blank. If the status is blank, highlight the ETAPS Lic
Mgr entry and Start it.
2.8.2 Verifying ETAP License Manager Operation
Go to START/PROGRAMS/ADMINISTRATIVE TOOLS/EVENT VIEWER to view the ETAP License
Manager output. Select Application from the Log menu to view the applications log. ETAP License
Manager logs all licensing events to the applications log.

When the ETAP License Manager starts, you will see three events in the log identified as Source ETAPS
LMService. The ETAP License Manager uses this source when it writes event information to the
applications log.

Select the first ETAP License Manager event. Double-click on the event to view the event detail
dialog. The message references error: 0. The error reference is not important. However, the message
following the error reference - ETAPS License Manager starting.... is important. The description
will read something like this:

The description for Event ID (0) in Source (Etaps LMService) could not be found. It contains the
following insertion string(s):

Etaps LMService error: 0, ETAPS License Manager starting

Close the event detail dialog and double-click the next ETAPS LMService message. You should see
a message indicating: ETAPSLM has detected a valid ETAP PowerStation security key.
Close the event detail dialog again and double-click the third ETAPS LMService message. You
should see a message indication similar to:

Key SN: 3087007744-345610626 Licensed to: Operation Technology, Inc. Version: 020000 Users: 5.
(Of course, your serial number, the licensee, version, and number of users will be specific to your
Network Hardware Key.)

You have now verified your ETAP License Manager is correctly installed and running properly. The
latest issue of ETAP License Manager is version 5.2.3.102601 and is intended to work with
PowerStation Rel 1.4.0 (Build 052197) or later (including PowerStation 2.0 and 3.0). PowerStation 4.0
and later requires version 5.2.3.102601. You can check your version of the ETAP License Manager by
viewing Properties in the file WINNT/SYSTEM32/DRIVERS/ETAPSLM.EXE. File version is displayed
at the top of the Version sheet. The build is listed under Item Name: Special Build Description.
Setup ETAP License Manager Verification
2.8.3 Network License Manager Troubleshooting
If you get a message stating Could not find the Security Key, or Failed to Receive Authorization, verify
that the following statements are true:

The latest ETAP License Manager is installed.
Network Hardware Key is installed on the License Manager Server.
The License Manager Server is turned on.
The License Manager Server does have user permissions set correctly.
For Name Pipes:
LM Server= is in the ETAPS.INI file on the local computer and it has been modified to include
the location of the License Manager Server.
For TCP/IP:
LM TCP Server=
LM Server IP=
LM Port=
One of the above three lines is added to the ETAPS.INI file on the local computer and it has been
modified to include the location of the License Manager Server.
The local computer and the License Manager Server are connected to the network.

If PowerStation is still not running, contact Operation Technology, Inc. technical support at:

(949) 462-0400 or support@etap.com

Setup Installation Maintenance (Uninstall)
2.9 Installation Maintenance (Uninstall)
Go to Start/Settings/Control Panel/Add Remove Programs. Locate PowerStation 4.0 in the list
of the installed programs.
Click on the Add/Remove button.
Select the type of maintenance installation you want.

Modify
This is the default setting in the maintenance installation of PowerStation. Select this option to install
additional components or change the components you have selected in the previous installation.

Repair
The Repair installation re-installs the selected components of the previous installation. Both Repair
and Modify options will require that the PowerStation CD-ROM be inserted during the maintenance
installation.
Remove
This option lets you remove all PowerStation files you have installed onto your computer. Select OK
when asked whether you want to remove PowerStation 4.0 completely.
Setup Installation Maintenance (Uninstall)

Note that during the uninstall process you may be asked to remove the files installed as shared
files. Generally, it is recommended NOT to remove those files so possible disruption of other
applications is avoided.

Click on Finish after uninstall is completed.

Setup Removing ETAP License Manager
2.10 Removing ETAP License Manager
There may be instances when you want to remove the ETAP License Manager from your system. For
example, if you wish to install a new version of the ETAP License Manager, you need to remove the
previous one first. The following procedure will remove the ETAP License Manager from your
Services list.
2.10.1 Removing ETAP License Manager
Go to START/Settings/Control Panel/Add Remove Programs. Locate ETAP License Manager
5.2 in the list of the installed programs (5.2 is the version of ETAP License Manager installed on your
system).
Click on the Add/Remove button.
Note that during the uninstall process you may be asked to remove the files installed as shared files.
Generally, it is recommended NOT to remove those files to avoid possible disruption of other
applications.

To complete the uninstall, you will be asked to reboot the system

Setup Removing ETAP License Manager
2.10.2 Removing ETAP License Manager Manually
Logon to the computer designated as your License Manager Server. Use an account that has
Administrator privileges.
Ensure that no other users are currently using PowerStation; otherwise you may disrupt their activities
when you remove ETAP License Manager.
Go to START/Settings/Control Panel/Services. Locate Etaps Lic Mgr in the Services list and
check its status. If its status is Started, select Etaps Lic Mgr in the Services list and (with it
highlighted) select the Stop button with your mouse. In a few moments, Etaps Lic Mgr status will
change from Started to blank. Select Close and exit.
Locate the directory in which you had previously installed ETAPSLM.exe (usually
Winnt\System32\Drivers).
Open a DOS command prompt and change directory to C:\Winnt\System32\Drivers.
Issue the following command on the DOS prompt line:
Etapslm remove
You should receive the msg Etaps Lic Mgr removed.

The ETAP License Manager is now removed from your system.

Setup Installing PowerPlot 2.5
2.11 Installing PowerPlot 2.5
To install PowerPlot 2.5, close all applications and insert the PowerStation CD into your CD-ROM drive.
Make sure that the PowerPlot 2.5 is selected from the ETAPInstaller program and press INSTALL.

If you are installing PowerPlot in Windows NT, you need to have administrator privilege.

Choose the location where PowerPlot will be installed on your computer. If you are unsure of where to
install the program, keep the default setting and click on OK.

Setup Installing PowerPlot 2.5
Press OK when the installation is completed.

For NT/2000/XP operating systems you need to restart your computer. For details regarding
PowerPlot Interface with PowerStation see the PowerPlot Interface chapter.

Setup System Optimization
2.12 System Optimization
If PowerStation takes a long time to load or save a project file (more than several minutes), you can
modify your system settings to optimize the speed of PowerStation.

There are several system attributes that control the speed at which PowerStation loads and processes a
project database.
2.12.1 CPU Speed of the Computer
We recommend high-speed Pentium III or faster processors.
2.12.2 Size of RAM in the Computer
We recommend a minimum of 128 MB of RAM. For very large network databases within PowerStation,
512 MB of RAM is recommended.
2.12.3 Virtual Memory File Size of the Operating System
This can be changed from the System icon in the Control Panel folder. We recommend 200 MB of virtual
memory.

Note that your Virtual Memory file is stored on your hard disk. Therefore, if you increase the size of this
file, it will use a proportional amount of space on your hard disk. You should consult your system
administrator before changing this setting.

Click on the Start button in the lower left-hand corner of your screen.
Select the Settings folder.
Select the Control Panel folder. This will open a window in which you will find the System icon.

The System Icon is Located in the Control Panel

Double-click on this icon to open the System Properties dialog.
Click on the Performance tab.

Performance Tab in the System Properties Dialog Box

To change the size of your virtual memory, click on the Virtual Memory button.

Virtual Memory Settings

To set the size of your Virtual Memory, you will need to first look at how much hard disk space is
available.
If you have enough space, change the Initial Size and Maximum Size to 200 MB.
Click OK.
This will return you to the System Properties dialog box, where you click OK and are prompted to
restart your system. Once your system restarts, the virtual memory will be changed.
2.12.4 ODBC DSN Buffer Size
The Data Source Name (DSN) Buffer Size is the internal buffer, in kilobytes, that is used to transfer data
to and from PowerStation to the associated project database. The Microsoft Access default is 512;
however, PowerStation's otiaccess and otireport driver is defaulted to 4096. 4096 or larger should be
used for all Microsoft Access PowerStation databases.

Click on the Start button in the lower left-hand corner of your screen.
Select the Settings folder.
Select the Control Panel folder. This will open a window in which you will find the ODBC icon.
Double-click on this icon to open the ODBC Data Source Administrator.

ODBC Data Source Administrator

Click on the System DSN tab.
Select otiaccess and click on the Configure button. If the entry otiaccess is not present, run
PowerStation once and it will place it there. If otiaccess is still not present after running
PowerStation, then you need to add it in manually. Click on Add, type in otiaccess as the Data
Source Name, click on Options, and change the buffer size to 4096. Click on OK. (See instructions
below for details on changing the buffer size.)


ODBC Microsoft Access 97 Setup

Click on the Options button. This will expand the ODBC Microsoft Access 97 Setup dialog box to show
the advanced options.

Advanced Options View of the ODBC Microsoft Access 97 Setup

The buffer size defaults to 512. Change this number to 4096 and select OK. This will return you to
the ODBC Data Source Administrator. Select OK.

2.12.5 ODBC DSN Page Timeout
The Data Source Name (DSN) Page Timeout specifies the period of time, in tenths of a second that an
unused page of data remains in the buffer before being removed. The Microsoft Access default is 5, or
0.5 seconds. PowerStation projects are optimized for a setting of 5 when using Microsoft Access as the
project database.


ETAP

PowerStation
4.0
User Guide
Copyright 2001
All Rights Reserved





Southern California

(949) 462-0100 Sales
(949) 462-0400 Fax

Chapter 3

Overview

PowerStation organizes your work on a project basis. Each project provides all the necessary tools and
support for modeling and analyzing an electrical power system. A project consists of an electrical system
that requires a unique set of electrical components and interconnections. In PowerStation, each project
provides a set of users, user access controls, and a separate database in which its elements and
connectivity data are stored.

Overview Introduction

Access to an existing project file is through a special project file with an .oti extension. The program
database is stored through ODBC into a database file such as Microsoft Access (*.mdb). These files
work together to provide access control and storage for each project and are named exactly like your
project. PowerStation places all output reports from your program into the same sub-directory where the
database resides.

With PowerStation you can graphically build one-line diagrams and underground raceway systems and
perform load flow, short-circuit, motor starting, transient stability, protective device coordination, and
cable derating studies of your electrical system.

The engineering properties of each circuit element can be edited directly from the one-line diagram and/or
underground raceway system. Calculation results are displayed on the one-line diagram for your
convenience.

One of the powerful features of PowerStation is the data integration of cables. A cable not only contains
data representing its electrical properties but it also contains the physical routing information to indicate
the raceways through which it is routed.

PowerStation also contains built-in libraries that are easily accessible from project files. In addition, you
can add to the existing library data or create new libraries.

This Chapter includes the following sections:

One-Line Diagram
Underground Raceway System (UGS)
Ground Grid Systems
Panel Systems
Dumpster
Library
Cable System
3-D Database
Project View
Project Toolbar
Mode Toolbar
Configuration Toolbar
PSMS Toolbar
Study Case Toolbar
Message Log

In the next three pages maps are provided to describe the general structure and user interface of
PowerStation. These maps include:

ETAPmap Edit Mode
ETAPmap Study Mode
ETAPmap Motor Starting

Overview ETAP Map Edit Mode

PSMS
Online
Monitoring,
Simulation,
Playback &
Supervisory
Control
AC Elements
(Edit Toolbar)
Drag & drop AC
elements
Instruments
(Edit Toolbar)
Drag & drop PT, CT,
Relays, & Meters.
Schedule Report
Manager
Print Bus, Branch, &
Load Schedules using
Crystal Reports
Display
Options

Options to display
annotations of
elements on the
One-Line Diagram
for Edit Mode.
Base & Revision
Data Indicator
MSG Logger

View the latest messages related
to PowerStation Projects.
Can be expanded or reduced.
Project View
Create new
and manipulate
one-line diagrams
Presentations,
U/G Cable Raceways,
Ground Grid Systems,
Configurations,
and Study Cases;
access Dumpster,
Libraries and all
elements.
Help Line

Displays the
description
for every
entry field.
One-Line Diagram

In Edit Mode
Nested
Composite Network
Dumpster
Can have
unlimited cells
DC Elements
(Edit Toolbar)
Drag & drop DC elements
including UPS, VFD,
Charger, & Inverter.
Select Mode

Edit Mode: Drag/Drop & Connect Elements
Study Mode: Load Flow, Short-Circuit, etc.
Menu Bar

Files, Printing, Conversions, Project Standards, Settings & Options, Edit Libraries,
Set Defaults, Select Annotation Fonts, Print Libraries, Base & Revision Data, etc.
Project Toolbar

Files, Printing, Cut, Copy, Paste, Zooming, Grid, Continuity Check, Calculator & Help
Select Status Configuration

Unlimited Configurations to Save
Status of Switching Devices/Loads
Overview ETAP Map - Study Mode

Overview ETAP Map Motor Starting

Motor Starting Study
The Study Toolbar changes
according to the selected
Study Mode.
Nested Networks

Open Composite Motors
or Networks to see the
results in various units.
Time Slider

diffe es.
Display study results on the one-line diagram at
rent simulation tim
Motor Starting Study Case Toolbar

Select & edit Motor Starting Study Cases, set output report file name, & select
formats to view Crystal Reports or text reports of motor starting results.
Run
Dynamic
Acceleration
or
Static Starting
studies
Display Options

Results & Info
annotations
Get
Online
or
Archived
data
Overview One-Line Diagram
3.1 One-Line Diagram
PowerStation provides a fully graphical editor to construct your one-line diagram. From the One-Line
Diagram Edit Toolbar, you can graphically add, delete, move, or connect elements; zoom in or out;
display grid on or off; change element size, orientation, symbol, or visibility; enter properties; set
operating status; etc.

You can use composite networks
and motors with unlimited nesting
capabilities to create uncluttered
and easy to follow one-line
diagrams. Composite networks
allow up to 20 connections from
outside the network, making them
very flexible so they can be used
in a variety of configurations.

Note that the nesting capabilities
of a one-line diagram do not
affect the calculation results in
any way. Calculation programs
consider all one-line diagram
components nested to any level.

Overview Underground Raceway System
3.2 Underground Raceway System (UGS)
PowerStation provides a fully graphical U/G Raceway System (Underground Raceway System). Each
PowerStation project supports a unique U/G raceway system with multiple views of the U/G system.
Each view is conceptually a cross-section of desired raceways and heat sources that are in the same
vicinity.

The figure above shows how to access the U/G Raceway System. Use the U/G Raceway System Edit
Toolbar to add raceways (duct bank and/or direct buried), conduits for duct bank raceways, and locations
for direct buried raceways, external heat sources, and cables to the U/G raceway system. From U/G
raceway system presentations you can graphically arrange raceways, conduits, cables, and external heat
sources to represent cable routing and provide a physical environment to conduct cable ampacity derating
studies. These studies include cable temperature calculation, ampacity optimization, cable sizing, and
transient cable temperature calculation.

Underground Raceway System

Overview Ground Grid Systems
3.3 Ground Grid Systems
The safety of people who work and live around electric power installations is of great concern. The
proper design of a grounding system is a key element to improve safety conditions and to protect the lives
of all individuals who are in close proximity of electrical power systems. During unbalanced faults, the
ground potential rise of a grounded structure presents a risk of electrocution to anyone who comes in
contact with the grounded structure. PowerStation provides a three dimensional, fully graphical tool, that
allows for the design of a proper ground grid system, which adheres to IEEE or FEM standards.

Ground Grid

To begin working with the Ground Grid Systems, one must first insert a ground grid on the One-Line
Diagram. To do so, the Ground Grid button located on the AC Edit tool bar must be selected. By double
clicking on the ground grid itself from the One-Line Diagram, and after choosing which the standard
(IEEE or FEM) to be used for the design, the Ground Grid Editor screen can be accessed. A few of the
many useful design features built into the Ground Grid Systems module are: calculation of safe step and
touch potentials for any type of ground grid shape, 3D graphic profiles and tabular results of the step and
touch voltage values, optimum numbers of parallel ground conductors and rods, ground resistance and
ground potential rise, cost of conductors and rods used, account for soil type and configuration.

Ground Grid Systems Screen
Overview Panel Systems
3.4 Panel Systems
PowerStation allows for the modeling of electrical panels used in electrical power systems, directly on the
One-Line Diagram. The number of panels that can be represented is unlimited, since PowerStation
supports the nesting of panels. Therefore, a panel can be connected to a sub-panel, and in turn, a sub-
panel can be connected to yet another downstream panel elsewhere in the circuit. Each panel can be
modeled as either a 3 phase or a single-phase panel. The 3 phase panels could be either 3 wire or 4 wire
configurations, while single-phase panels can be 2 or 3 wire configurations. Internally, each panel is
comprised of protective devices and a collection of circuits that supply system loads.

Panel
Systems

Panels are added to the One-Line Diagram by clicking on the Panel Systems button located in the AC Edit
Tool bar, and dropping the panel anywhere on the One-Line Diagram. Once added to the diagram, double
clicking on the panel symbol will open the Panel Editor, and allow for panel and circuit information to be
specified. The user can customize useful information such as Panel ID, Phase Connections, Panel Rating,
Number of Circuits, Circuit schedule, and Load Summary.

Overview Dumpster
3.5 Dumpster
The system Dumpster consists of a number of Cells that contain elements that you have deleted or copied
from the one-line diagram or underground raceway systems. When you initially cut an element or group
of elements from the one-line diagram or underground raceway system, PowerStation places these in a
Dumpster Cell. These Cells are kept within the Dumpster until you explicitly purge them from the
Dumpster. When a Cell is purged from the Dumpster, PowerStation automatically deletes all elements in
the Cell from the projects database. While an element or group of elements are inside a Dumpster Cell,
you may move or paste copies of the contents of the Cell back into the one-line diagram or underground
raceway system. Thus, the Dumpster provides a convenient holding location for elements while you are
actively constructing a one-line diagram or underground raceway system. The Dumpster presentation can
be activated only from the Project View.

What Happens to IDs When Elements are Copied or Cut into the Dumpster?

Elements that are placed in the Dumpster using the Copy command will have new IDs.
Elements that are Cut into the Dumpster will retain their original IDs.
IDs of the elements Purged from the Dumpster are reusable.
What Happens to IDs When Elements are Pasted or Moved From the Dumpster?

Elements that are pasted from the Dumpster will have new IDs.
Elements that are moved from the Dumpster will retain their original IDs.
Purging Elements from a Project
When you a Dumpster Cell, elements within that Cell are removed from the project database
completely (permanently).
All the Dumpster Cells (entries) may be removed from the project using Purge All.
Editing Within the Dumpster
You CANNOT copy, size, rotate, or change symbols of elements inside the Dumpster.
Elements may be relocated inside the Dumpster.
You can hide or show protective devices (PDs) inside the Dumpster.
Status of PDs and loads CANNOT be changed inside the Dumpster.
Navigators within the editors are NOT functional for elements in the Dumpster.
Elements CANNOT be reconnected inside the Dumpster.

Overview Dumpster
Controlled Dumpster
The controlled dumpster is a mechanism for locking information into the dumpster and is used only when
the PowerStation project is passwords-enabled.

When PowerStation cuts any elements from a UGS or one-line diagram, the dumpster cell to which the
elements are assigned is designated as a controlled dumpster cell. When the dumpster cell is designated
as a controlled dumpster, the designation has NO meaning unless the project is passwords enabled.

When passwords are enabled, the controlled dumpster is treated as a special entity with the following
attributes:

1. The controlled dumpster is displayed as a controlled dumpster by displaying the designation (C) or
(CC) on its title (in the Dumpster list window).

The designation C (Controlled Dumpster Cell) is used to indicate that this is a controlled
dumpster cell which is not checked. These cells cannot be purged until they are checked.
The designation CC (Checked Controlled Dumpster Cell) is used to indicate that this is a
controlled dumpster cell and it has been checked by a checker. A user with Project or Base
Editor permissions can purge these cells.

2. The background of a (C) controlled dumpster is painted the color of INI values, ControlUGSColor or
ControlOLVColor. The background is painted in the specified color only when the project setting has
Project/Options/Display changed data in RED selected or the project user is a Checker.

3. When moving a cell from a controlled dumpster to the one-line diagram or UGS, two
behaviors are exhibited:

If the controlled dumpster cell is a (C) dumpster, the elements are simply moved as normal, i.e.,
no special action is taken to flag elements checked or unchecked. The dumpster cell is then
destroyed as normal.
If the controlled dumpster cell is a (CC) dumpster, the elements are moved as normal but, in
addition, all property values are forced dirty and are flagged as unchecked (will show red in the
editors). This is, for all purposes, identical to dropping a new element on the one-line diagram or
UGS. The dumpster cell is then destroyed as normal.

4. When in checker mode, the controlled dumpster cells appear in the checkers list and can be
checked as any other element can be checked. The act of checking a controlled dumpster
changes its designation from (C) to (CC). This also sets the dumpster background color to
normal.

5. A Project Editor (or Base Editor) cannot purge a controlled dumpster with designation (C).
The Project Editor can purge a controlled dumpster with designation (CC). The checker
must check a controlled dumpster cell before it can be purged.

Overview Library
3.6 Library
PowerStation provides the library structure for the following circuit elements: cable, cable fire protection,
motor (nameplate, model, characteristic, load), low voltage circuit breaker, high voltage circuit breaker,
fuse, overload heater, harmonic, and battery. The PowerStation library file is named etaplib.lib and is
located in the Lib folder in PowerSTN directory. Using Library Quick Pick you can view and retrieve
library data from the element editors in your project.

To edit or add library data, double-click on the Libraries folder in Project View to expand the folder.
Then double-click on the library of your choice to open its editor. From a library editor you can add, edit,
copy, and delete library data. The Library menu on the menu bar offers another method to access and edit
library data. You can create an unlimited number of library headers and data entries for each library.

Overview Library
You can also create new libraries by right clicking on the Library folder in Project View and selecting
Create. Use the right-click menu options to locate and open other PowerStation library files, or Save,
Save As, or Purge the library in current use.

To convert ETAP DOS library files, select the Convert ETAP DOS Lib command from the Library
Menu on the menu bar, select the library type to be converted, and then locate and convert the ETAP
DOS library file.

Each PowerStation project file can be attached (associated with) one library only. To attach a project file
to a different library, use the Open Library command from the Project View (right-click on Libraries) or
Library icon on the Project Menu Bar.

There are a number of libraries available for many devices in PowerStation. Each library is customized
for the specific device it pertains to. Details regarding each library can be found in the library section
from the list below:

Battery
Cable
Cable Fire Protection
Fuse
Harmonic
Interruption Cost
Induction Motor Nameplate
Induction Motor Model
Induction Motor Characteristic
Induction Motor Load
Low Voltage Circuit Breaker
High Voltage Circuit Breaker
Overload Heater
Reliability

Overview Cable Systems
3.7 Cable Systems
Data integration between the One-Line Diagram and U/G Raceway System includes electrical
properties, routing, and physical attributes of cable. For example, a cable contains data representing its
electrical properties and bus connections that are used for Load Flow studies, and it also contains the
physical data and routing information associated with the raceways through which it is routed.

Cables in PowerStation are categorized in three groups (One-Line, Equipment, and UGS).
One-Line Cable
One-Line cables, cables that are placed in the one-line diagram, appear as a graphical element in the
one-line diagram or Dumpster presentations. This is a cable that you add to the one-line diagram as a
branch to connect buses. To route a one-line cable through a raceway, click on the Existing Cable icon on
the Edit Toolbar in an underground raceway presentation, select a cable from the drop-down list, and then
drop it inside a raceway conduit or location. You can also route a one-line cable through a raceway from
the Cable Editor, Routing page. Note that this action will attach (assign) the cable to the raceway but will
not place it in a specific conduit or location.
Equipment Cable
Equipment Cable, a cable that is placed in an editor as a feeder for a load, is attached to equipment
such as motors and static loads as a feeder cable, but does not appear graphically as a branch element on
the one-line diagram. This is a cable that you add to equipment from the property editors (Cable/Vd
page) of static load and motors. To route an equipment cable through a raceway, click on the Existing
Cable icon on the Edit Toolbar in an underground raceway presentation, select a cable from the drop-
down list, and then drop it inside a raceway conduit or location. You can also route an equipment cable
through a raceway from the Cable Editor, Routing page. Note that this action will attach (assign) the
cable to the raceway but will not place it in a specific conduit or location.
UGS Cable
UGS cables, cables that are placed only in underground raceways, are used exclusively within the
underground raceway system. This is a cable that is routed through an underground duct bank or direct
buried raceway, but does not exist in the one-line diagram or as an equipment cable. Raceway cables can
be graphically placed in raceway conduits or locations by clicking on the New Cable icon on the Edit
Toolbar in underground raceway presentations. Raceway cables can be graphically dragged to a one-line
diagram to make it into a one-line cable. However, a raceway cable cannot become an equipment cable.
Overview 3-D Database
3.8 3-D Database
PowerStation organizes an electrical system into a single project. Within the project, PowerStation
provides three major system components.

Presentation
Unlimited, independent graphical presentations of the one-line diagram to represent the one-line
diagrams for any propose such as impedance diagram, study results, plot plan, etc.
Configuration
Unlimited, independent system configurations to keep track of the status of switching devices (open
and closed), motors and loads (continuous, intermittent, and Spare), MOVs (open, closed, throttling,
and spare).
Revision Data
Base data & up to 15 Revision data to keep track of changes and modifications of the engineering
properties (nameplate, settings, etc.) of elements.

These three system components are organized in an orthogonal fashion to provide you with great power
and flexibility in constructing and manipulating your PowerStation project. Using the concept of
Presentation, Status Configuration, and Revision Data, you can create numerous combinations of
networks of diverse configurations and varying engineering properties that allow you to fully investigate
and study the behavior and characteristics of the electrical networks using one database. This means that
there is no need to copy your database for different system configurations, What If studies, etc.

PowerStation uses a 3-D database concept to implement Presentations, Configurations, and Base &
Revision Data. The use of this multi-dimensional database concept allows you to independently select a
particular Presentation, Configuration Status, or Revision Data within the same project database. These
selections can be used in conjunction with multiple loading categories and multiple study cases to quickly
and efficiently perform system design and analysis without the possibility of data discrepancies caused by
multiple copies of a single project file being used to account for various system changes.
3.8.1 Presentations
When a new project is created, a one-line diagram presentation will be created and displayed on your
screen. This is where you build a one-line diagram presentation of your electrical system. PowerStation
allows you to create as many presentations of a one-line diagram as you wish. This powerful feature
provides you with the ability to customize each one-line diagram presentation with different graphical
representations, as shown below. One presentation may have some or all protective devices visible, while
another presentation may have a completely different layout which is best suited for displaying load flow
results, and so on.

Two Presentations of a One-Line Diagram
Customized Features of Presentations
One-line diagram presentations have many independent features such as:

Graphical Location of elements and connectors
Size of the elements (five sizes)
Symbols (ANSI & IEC standard symbols for AC & DC elements)
Element Grouping including connectors
Element Orientation (0, 90, 180, & 270 degrees)
Annotation Orientation (-90, -45, 0, 45 & 90 degrees)
Visibility Options (hide & show) for switching & protective devices
Display Options of Annotations (results, AC, AC-DC, & DC elements)
Display Options for each operating Mode (Edit, Load Flow, Short-Circuit, etc.)
Grid display option and its size
Continuity Check option (on or off)
Status Configuration association
Print Options (print size, centering, printer type, paper size, etc.)

Additionally, each presentation remembers (stores) the last configuration, operating mode, zoom ratio,
view location, print setup, etc.

Element Addition to a Presentation
When you add an element to one presentation, the same element with the same engineering properties
will automatically be added to all other presentations.

What happens when you modify engineering properties of an element in one presentation?
Modification of the engineering properties of an element in one presentation will be reflected in all
presentations. Remember that all presentations share a common database.
Create New Presentations
You can create new one-line diagram presentations only from the Project View Dialog Box. To do this,
right-click on the One-Line Diagrams under Presentations.

The new presentation will be assigned OLV1. OLV (One-Line View) is the default name, which is
appended with a unique number when a new one is created. To change the default name, double click on
the Default One-Line Diagram from this Project View.
Change Presentation Name
The presentation names can be changed at any time by double clicking on the One-Line Diagram
(background) in Edit mode.

Change Presentation Name from OLV Pres1 to XYZ
3.8.2 Status Configuration
PowerStation provides the configuration capability allowing you to configure the operating status of the
various electrical elements that you use to construct the one-line diagram in your project. Electrical
components such as circuit breakers, fuses, and switches can have open or closed status. Loads and
motors may be operating continuously, intermittently, or can be spare. The following comments help
define the operation of the configuration concept:

When you attach a configuration to a one-line diagram presentation, all elements in that presentation
assume the predefined status as they have been saved under that configuration.
Each configuration is independent of the others since the status of elements can be set independently
for each configuration.
Any configuration can be attached to any one-line diagram presentation. Conversely, any or all one-
line diagram presentations can be attached to the same configuration at the same time.
You can create as many configurations as you desire.
To attach or associate a configuration to a presentation, activate the presentation, open the
Configuration drop down list from the Mode & Configuration Toolbar, and select a configuration
status.

Switching Status Configuration from Normal to Stage 1

Using status configuration capabilities, you no longer need to keep several copies of one project to
perform electrical system studies for different configurations. In addition, when you modify engineering
properties or add new elements to the one-line diagram, the changes will be automatically saved for all
configurations.
Changing Status of Devices
The status of switching devices (fuse, contactor, HV circuit breaker, LV circuit breaker, switch, double-
throw switch, and panels main disconnect) can be changed from their editors or from the right-click
menu, as shown below.

Status Change of a Switching Device for Configuration Normal

The status of load devices (synchronous motor, induction motor, lumped load, MOV, static load,
capacitor, and filter) can be changed from their editors, as shown below.

Status Change of Load Devices for Configuration Stage1
Create New Status Configurations
You can create new configurations only from the Project View. To do this, right-click on Status under
Configurations and select Create New. The status of the elements for the newly-created configuration is
shown in the Dialog Box.

Create a new Status Configuration XYZ

The following Status Configurations are reserved for PSMS and cannot be renamed or purged. These
configurations are active when PSMS is online.

OnLine Online Monitoring Mode
Playback Playback Mode
Advisory Advisory Control Mode
Supervisory Supervisory Control Mode

Duplicate Status Configurations
To create a new configuration, which has the same element status as an existing configuration, from the
Project View, right-click on an exiting configuration and select Duplicate.

Duplicating Configuration Stage 1 to XYZ
3.8.3 Revision Data
Revision Data is the third orthogonal system component that is provided by PowerStation. The
engineering data associated with the elements in your project are stored in the project database.
PowerStation provides ready access to 16 different revisions of the engineering data associated with each
element. PowerStation establishes revision level 0 of the data as Base Data. You may use Revision 1-15
at any time to vary engineering parameters associated with any or all of the elements on the one-line
diagram without impacting, or changing, the Base Data. PowerStation constrains your project to the use
of one revision at a time, and you must be in Base Data in order to add or delete system elements or make
connectivity changes to your one-line diagram.

The primary use for the Revision Data is to enable you to run What if studies for an electrical system
where you can readily vary the engineering data of the networks components and compare the results
with the Base Data or other Revisions. For example, you can change the impedance of a transformer in a
Revision (keeping the Base Data untouched) and compare the short-circuit results with the Base Data.

Other applications of Revision Data is for future modifications of the system without changing your
Base Data, e.g., add a new substation to an existing system and keep all new modifications in a Revision
Data. In this case, the Base Data represents the actual existing system and a Revision Data represents the
future modifications. To do this, you first need to add the new elements for the substation to the Base
Data and flag them as Out of Service so they will not affect the study results of the existing system. In
Revision Data, set the flag to In Service and enter all other required properties. When the new substation
is commissioned, merge the Revision Data to Base Data to save that particular modification.

You can change the names of any Revision Data from the Project Menu Bar (Revision Data under
Settings)

Changing Names of Revision Data
PowerStation provides a number of Revision Data utilities that allow you to readily switch, merge, and
purge Revision Data. For example, different Revisions can be merged together to form a new Revision to
study the effect of all changes and modifications at the same time.

Revision Data is integrated with user access control to restrict user access from manipulation of Base
Data, i.e., only users with access levels Project Editor or Base Editor can manipulate Base Data. This
user access restriction provides peace-of-mind in knowing that specific sections of the project can only be
altered by those authorized to make these kinds of changes.

PowerStation keeps track of delta differences between a Revision and the Base Data, i.e., the delta is zero
when you activate a Revision for the first time. When you are in a particular Revision Data and you
change a single property of an element, that element (with its new engineering properties) is saved for this
Revision. In this case, the delta between this Revision and Base Data is one element only. Any
subsequent change in the properties of this element in the Base Data will not affect this Revision.
However, any changes to the Base Data for other elements that have not been altered in this Revision will
be used when you run studies with this Revision Data active.

PowerStation provides a method to flag the delta difference between any Revision and Base Data. These
flags are shown in green in the Project View. In the example shown below, Gen3 is flagged as an
element that has parameters different from the Base Data. Also note that the Cable components is
flagged green with integer 2 printed next to it, meaning that there are two cables in this Revision that are
different from the Base Data.

Note that:

An element CANNOT exist in a Revision without existing in the Base Data.
You CANNOT purge the Base Data.
You can merge a Revision into Base Data or into other Revision Data.
When you merge the Base Date into a Revision, that Revision is deleted, i.e., there is no delta
difference between that Revision and the Base Data.
You CANNOT save or close a project while you are in a Revision level of data.
Overview Project View
3.9 Project View
PowerStation provides a special view of your project called the Project View. The Project View is a
graphical tree representation that includes Presentations, Configurations, Study Cases, Libraries, and
Components associated with your project. The Project tree can be expanded to display these items.
Clicking on a "+" symbol (inside a square) increases the tree expansion, showing more details. Clicking
on a "" symbol (inside a square) decreases the tree expansion, showing fewer details. Selecting an item
by right clicking on it will display a context menu that allows you to perform some actions on the selected
item.

User ID and Access
One-Line Diagram Presentations
Right-Click to Create New
presentations
UGS presentations are created only from the Project View
Dumpster can be accessed only from the Project View
Status Configuration
(Rightclick to Rename, Purge, or Duplicate)
Project Filename
Right-click to create new Study Cases

Right-click to Open, Save, Save As,
Create, and Purge Libraries
Right-click to View, Copy/Merge, and
Purge Motor Nameplate Library

Right-click to Find an element or edit its properties.
You can find elements in the last active one-line
diagram presentation, or in any desired presentation.
Overview Project Toolbar
3.10 Project Toolbar

The Project Toolbar contains icons that allow you to perform shortcuts of many commonly used functions
in PowerStation. All of these functions are described in detail in different sections such as One-Line
Diagram Menu Bar and One-Line Diagram Presentation, both of which explain the graphical user
interface of the one-line diagram.

Create Create a new project file
Open Open an existing project file
Save Save the project file
Print Print the one-line diagram or U/G raceway system
Cut Cut the selected elements from the one-line diagram or
U/G raceway system to the Dumpster
Copy Copy the selected elements from the one-line diagram or
U/G raceway system to the Dumpster
Paste Paste elements from a Dumpster Cell to the one-line diagram or
U/G raceway system
Zoom In Magnify the one-line diagram or U/G raceway system
Zoom Out Reduce the one-line diagram or U/G raceway system
Zoom to Fit Page Re-size the one-line diagram to fit the window
Show Grid Lines Display the grid lines on the one-line diagram
Check Continuity Check the system continuity for non-energized elements
Power Calculator Activate Power Calculator
Help Point to a specific area to learn more about PowerStation
Power Calculator
The Power Calculator relates Mw, Mvar, Mva, kV, Amp, and PF together for three-phase systems and
displays them in either kVA or Mva units. You have an option to keep one of the four variables (Mva,
Mw, Mvar, or PF) fixed and calculate the rest.

Overview Mode Toolbar
3.11 Mode Toolbar
PowerStation consists of the One-Line Diagram (AC and DC Power System) and the Underground
Raceway System. In general, PowerStation has three modes of operation; Edit, AC Study, and DC
Study. The AC Study mode consists of Load Flow, Short-Circuit, Motor Starting, Transient Stability,
and Relay Coordination analysis.

Mode Toolbar Indicating Motor Starting Mode
Edit Mode
Edit mode enables you to build your one-line diagram, change system connections, edit engineering
properties, save your project, and generate schedule reports in Crystal Reports formats. The Edit
Toolbars for AC Elements, DC Elements, and Instrumentation Elements will be displayed to the right of
the screen when this mode is activated by pressing the pencil icon.

Mode Toolbar Indicating Motor Starting Mode

This mode provides a wide variety of tasks including:

Drag & Drop Elements
Connect Elements
Change IDs
Cut, Copy, & Paste Elements
Move From Dumpster
Insert OLE Objects
Cut, Copy & OLE Objects
Merge PowerStation Projects
Hide/Show Groups of Protective Devices
Rotate Elements
Size Elements
Change Symbols
Edit Properties
Run Schedule Report Manager

AC, DC, and Instrumentation Edit Toolbars
Study Mode
Study modes enable you to create and modify study cases, perform system analysis, view alarm/alert
conditions and view output reports and plots. When a study mode is active (selected), the Study Toolbar
for the selected study is displayed on the right of the screen. By clicking on the buttons on the Study
Toolbar, you can run studies, transfer data, and change display options. The available study modes and
associated Study Toolbars are shown below.

Load Flow
Short-Circuit
ANSI Short-Circuit Duty
ANSI 30 Cycle Faults
ANSI Unbalanced Faults
IEC Short-Circuit Duty
IEC 909 Short-Circuit
IEC Unbalanced Faults
IEC 363 Short-Circuit
Motor Stating
Dynamic Acceleration
Static Starting
Harmonics
Harmonic Load Flow
Harmonic Frequency Scan
Transient Stability
Transient Stability
Generator Start-Up
Relay (Device) Coordination
Optimal Power Flow
Reliability Assessment
DC Load Flow
DC Short-Circuit
Battery
Battery Sizing
Battery Discharge

In addition to the Study Toolbar, a Study Case Toolbar is displayed automatically when one of the study
modes becomes active. The Study Case Toolbar allows you to control and manage the solution
parameters and output reports.

3.11.2 Underground Cable Raceway Systems (UGS)
When working with the Underground Cable Raceway presentations, the Mode Toolbar changes as shown
below.

Edit Mode
Edit mode enables you to build your underground raceway system, change system
configurations, edit engineering properties, and save your project. This mode allows for a
wide variety of tasks including Drag & Drop Elements, Copy, Cut, Paste, Size, and Edit
Properties.

Note that elements can be added directly to the system from the UGS Edit Toolbar.
Study Mode
The study mode enables you to create and modify solution parameters (Study Cases), perform steady-
state and transient temperature calculations, optimize cable ampacities, size cables, and view output
reports and plots.

Study Toolbar for Underground Cable Raceway Systems
3.11.3 Ground Grid Systems (GGS)
When working with the Ground Grid presentation, the Mode Toolbar change as shown below.

Edit Mode
Edit mode enables you to build your ground grid based on the
IEEE (regular shapes) or Finite Element Method (Irregular shapes).

Study Mode
The study mode enables you to create and modify solution parameters
(Study Cases), perform calculations, optimize number of conductors,
optimize number of conductors and rods, and view output reports and
plots.

Edit and Study Toolbar for
Ground Grid Systems
Overview Configuration Toolbar
3.12 Configuration Toolbar
From this drop down list you can activate any one of the existing status configurations and change the
status of switching devices (open / close), loads (continuous / intermittent / spare), and MOVs (open /
closed / throttling / spare) to the pre-saved settings. Note that when you change the status of any device,
it is changed for the active configuration only and does not effect other configurations.

You can create new configurations only from the Project View. To do this, right-click on Status under
Configurations and select Create New. The status of elements for the newly created configuration is a
duplicate of the default Configuration. To create a new configuration, which has the same element status
as an existing configuration, from the Project View, right-click on the exiting configuration and select
Duplicate.

Overview PSMS Toolbar
3.13 PSMS Toolbar
PSMS mode is operational only for PowerStation Management System (PSMS). PSMS is an online
extension to ETAP
PowerStation

power system analysis software. By combining Window NT

client-
server modular architecture with state-of-the-art remote monitoring, simulator, and supervisory control
applications, PSMS can interface with any combination of computer workstations, data storage devices
(historians), IEDs, and other SCADA systems.

PSMS enables you to connect your existing power system to PowerStation; collect, monitor, and log live
data; set alarms; simulate system responses; execute control actions; run What if" studies; and view
output reports and plots.

While monitoring and logging in the background, you can simulate Load Flow, Short-Circuit, Motor
Starting, Transient Stability, Optimal Power Flow or Operation of the system with data that reflects the
current status and loading of the system. Previously stored system configuration data, and loading can
also be used for simulations.
Monitoring Mode
Takes the active one-line diagram (presentation) into online monitoring mode. PSMS monitoring is a
sophisticated modern alternative to traditional monitoring systems. In monitor mode, PSMS acquires
real-time data from the electrical system via the monitoring devices, processes the data (using State
Estimator and Load Distributor), resets the alarms, stores all parameters, and finally graphically displays
the data on the graphic one-line diagram.
Playback Mode
In playback mode, PSMS retrieves data from the historian and displays it on the one-line diagram.
Control Mode
This mode allows the user to open or close circuit breakers and receive status confirmations.
Advisory Mode and Supervisory Control
PSMS Optimal Load Management (OLM) program is the most powerful tool for power system control,
planning, design, and operation. OLM allows for optimization of the system through utilization of
available controls including:

Generator voltage/var Control
Generator MW Control
Transformer LTC Control
Shunt Compensation Control
Series Compensation Control
Switching Capacitor Control
Load Shed Control

Contact Operation Technology, Inc. for a complete product description of PSMS.
Overview Study Case Toolbar
3.14 Study Case Toolbar
This toolbar is displayed automatically when you are in one of the study modes. The Study Case Toolbar
allows you to control and manage the study solution parameters and output reports.

Study Case
The Study Case drop-down list lets you select a previously created study case name and display it. The
solution parameters specified in the displayed study case are used when you run a new study. To create a
new study case, select Study Cases from the Project View and right-click on the desired study case type
such as load flow, short-circuit, motor starting, transient stability, and U/G raceway systems.
Edit Study Case
Click on the Edit Study Case icon to edit the selected study case. Study Case Editors include Load Flow,
Short-Circuit, Motor Starting, Transient Stability, and U/G Raceway System.
Output Report
The Output Report drop-down list lets you select a previously created output report and display it.
When you run a study, the displayed file name will be used for the output report and plot. To create a
new file name for your reports, select Prompt from the Output Report drop-down list and perform a
study. PowerStation will prompt you to enter a new file name for the output report and plots.
List Output Reports
Click on this icon to list all PowerStation output reports. From this drop-down list, you can preview all
previously created output reports, which can be in the form of Crystal Reports or text reports.
Report Format
From this drop-down list, select a report format you want to use for your output report. These formats
include standard text format and Crystal Reports formats.
Alert View (AC Load Flow and AC Short Circuit)
After running the AC Load Flow or AC Short Circuit analysis, this report format identifies buses and
cables in the system that are either faulted, at critical or marginal levels, by using a color coded display
method for each affected element. Alert View will also output this information on a printed report.
View Report Manager
Click on the View Report Manager icon to display the contents of the current output file. If TextRept
(text report) is selected as the report format, the output report will be displayed in Microsoft Word
,
WordPad
, Notepad
, or any program you have selected in the PowerStation INI file to view text files. If
one of the Crystal Reports formats is selected, then the PowerStation Report Viewer allows you to browse
and print your customized report. Text reports generated by PowerStation are 132 characters wide and 66
lines per page. See Printing and Plotting for details on how to format text reports for 8 1/2 by 11 papers.

Overview Message Log
3.15 Message Log
PowerStation uses the message log to record certain activities when you are working with your
PowerStation project. For example, PowerStation records an entry whenever you open or close a project.
In addition, PowerStation records entries when you delete OLE objects or update OLE links and
whenever some internal errors are encountered. The greatest use of the message log is reserved for the
on-line operations of PowerStation (PowerStation Management System).

The display size of the message log can be changed by pulling the top end up or down. For most
applications you can minimize the display size of the message log to zero.

The operation of the message log is completely transparent to you, the user. PowerStation automatically
tends it. You may, however, customize the log by setting the maximum number of entries that
PowerStation will display in the message log at any given time. Additionally, you may set the size of the
text logs generated by PowerStation. To customize the message log, see Section 1.6, INI File. The
default entries for Slog Size and Max Display Mugs are:

Slog Size=128
Max Display Mugs=255

Overview Tutorial

3.16 Tutorial
This tutorial provides a brief overview of the basic operation of the PowerStation program. Once you
finish this tutorial, you will be familiar with some the key features and capabilities of the program and the
various options available for performing power system analysis.
Starting PowerStation

Start the ETAP PowerStation program by double-clicking on the icon.

Opening the Example Project File
Follow these simple steps to open the EXAMPLE project file:

Enter your User Name in the Logon Editor and select the Project Editor option in the Select
Access Level Editor.

As previously mentioned, PowerStation organizes all work as projects. Each project provides all the
necessary tools and support for modeling and analyzing an electrical power system. Projects consist of
electrical systems that require unique electrical components and interconnections. The Example project
includes a one-line diagram of an electrical system. Notice the toolbars on the top and the right-hand side
of the one-line diagram.

One-line Diagram and Editors
PowerStation provides a fully graphical user interface for constructing your one-line diagram. Here you
can graphically add, delete, relocate, and connect elements, zoom in or out, display grid off or on, change
element size, change element orientation, change symbols, hide or show protective devices, enter
properties, set operating status, etc.
Overview Tutorial

PowerStations One-Line Diagram is a one-line representation of a power system. The one-line diagram
is the starting point for all studies. You can graphically construct your electrical system by connecting the
buses, branches, motors, generators, and protective devices in any order from the One-Line Diagram Edit
Toolbar. You can connect the elements to the buses graphically or from their editors. You can double-
click on elements to open their editors and edit the engineering properties, which include ratings, settings,
loading, connections, etc.
Overview Tutorial

Editors

Double-click on the Power Grid (Utility) symbol on the One-Line Diagram and view the Utility
Editor. This is where you enter data for the utility machine model.

Select different pages of this editor and look at the type of information that you can provide to
model a utility machine.

Click on OK and close the editor.

Double-click on other elements and explore their editors. Each available element has a
customized editor.
Overview Tutorial

Double-click on the synchronous motor Syn1 and view its editor. This is where you enter data
used for synchronous motor models

Editors are designed so that you can enter a minimum amount of information and be able to run different
studies. Voltage and HP data are all you need to perform most studies. If you are interested in
modeling a motor dynamically for motor acceleration or transient stability studies, you need to enter more
detailed information such as the motor model, inertia, and load model.

To illustrate this point a simple exercise is included at the end of this tutorial.

Overview Tutorial

Composite Networks
You may consider a composite network to be an aggregate of all components in a sub-system since it can
contain buses, branches, loads, sources, and even other composite networks or composite motors. You
can nest your subsystems to an unlimited number of layers. This allows you to construct systems and nest
elements by their voltage levels, by physical layout, by the geometrical requirements of elements, by
study requirements, by relays and control device requirements, by logical layout of elements, etc. You
have full control as to how the system should be nested.
Double-click on the composite network Sub3 Net. The Sub3 Net view, which is a one-line
diagram nested inside the main one-line diagram, appears.

To change the number of pins, right-click on Sub3 Net and select Pins.

Overview Tutorial

Composite networks can have 4, 8, 12, 16, or 20 external connection points (pins). These are the
top pin (~Top1); left pins (~Left1 to ~Left9), right pins (~Rt1 to ~Rt9), and the bottom pin
(~Bot1). Right-click on the background of the composite network Sub3Net to hide or show
unconnected pins.

Composite Network Sub3 Net with 8 Pins

The pins for the composite motors can be connected to any bus, branch, load, or protective device. Once
a pin is connected internally or externally to an element, it becomes a proxy for that element and all
connection rules for the element apply to the connected pin. To illustrate this, both AC & DC elements
are added to Sub3 Net and are displayed here.

The number of levels that you can nest composite networks inside of other composite networks is
unlimited. There is no limitation on the number of elements that you can include inside a composite
network. The user interface characteristics of composite networks are the same as the One-Line Diagram
where you can include both AC and DC elements.
Overview Tutorial

Composite Motors

Double-click on the composite motor Comp Mtr1. The Comp Mtr1 view, which is a one-line
diagram nested inside the main one-line diagram, appears.
1
2

Composite motors are used as a tool to group motors in the system. The elements that you can include
inside a composite motor are:

AC Composite Motor
Induction Motor
Synchronous Motor
Lumped Load
Static Load
MOV
Composite Motor
Circuit Breaker (LV & HV)
Fuse
Contactor
Switch
Instrument Transformers
Relays

DC Composite Motor
DC Motor
DC Lumped Load
DC Static Load
DC Elementary Diagram
DC Composite Motor
DC Circuit Breaker
DC Fuse

The number of levels that you can nest composite motors inside composite motors is unlimited.

Overview Tutorial

One-Line Diagram Menu Bar

The One-Line Diagram Menu Bar contains a comprehensive collection of menu options. This menu bar
is displayed when a one-line diagram is active. The One-Line Diagram menu bar contains a list of menu
options which, when an option is selected, activates a drop-down list of commands. Some of the menu
options also activate an additional list of menus (an arrow pointing to the right denotes an additional
menu). For example, select Project, Settings, and Data Type.

Project Toolbar

in PowerStation.

Mode Toolbar

In general, PowerStation has three modes of operation; Edit, AC Study, and DC Study. The AC Study
mode consists of Load Flow, Short-Circuit, Motor Starting, Harmonics, Transient Stability, Relay
Coordination, Optimal Load Flow, and Reliability Analysis. The DC Study mode consists of DC Load
Flow, DC Short-Circuit, and Battery Sizing analysis.
Overview Tutorial

Edit Mode
Edit mode enables you to build your one-line diagram, change system connections, edit engineering
properties, save your project, and generate schedule reports in Crystal Reports formats. The Edit
Toolbars for both AC and DC elements will be displayed to the right of the screen when this mode is
active.

To add elements to the one-line view:

Click on any of the elements on the right-hand side toolbar. The cursor symbol changes to
the symbol shape.

Move the cursor to any location on the one-line view.

Click again and the element is added to the one-line view.

To connect elements in the one-line view:

For practice, add a bus and a transformer to the one-line view.

Move your cursor to the top pin of the transformer close enough that a red square appears.

Left-click, hold, and drag the cursor to the bus close enough that the bus becomes red.

Release the mouse button, and the connection is completed.
Overview Tutorial

Study Modes
Study modes enable you to create and modify study cases, perform system analysis, and view output
reports and plots. When a study mode is active (selected), the Study Toolbar for the selected study is
displayed on the right side of the screen.

By clicking on the buttons on the Study Toolbar, you can run studies, transfer data, and change display
options. As an example, Load Flow Analysis Mode is described in this document.

Load Flow Analysis Mode
Go to Load Flow Mode by clicking on the Load Flow Analysis button on the Mode Toolbar.

Note that the right-hand side tool is now changed to the Load Flow Toolbar. Also, the Study
Case Toolbar appears on the top toolbar.

Click on the Run Load Flow icon on the Load Flow Toolbar.
Study results will be displayed on the one-line diagram.

Review the calculation results and familiarize yourself with the type of
Run Load Flow
Display Options
Report Manger
Alert
information displayed on your one-line diagram.

Click on the Display Options and explore the variety of options available for the displayed
results.

Click on the Alert to display Critical and Marginal limit violations for the selected output report.

Click on the Report Manager to view and/or print any part of the output report.

Overview Tutorial

Click on the Edit Study Case button on the Study Case Toolbar and study the solution parameters
and alert settings available for Load Flow Analysis.

Overview Tutorial

After you run load flow, results are displayed on the One-Line Diagram.

Operating
Bus Voltage
Capacity
Exceeded
Motor
Terminal
Voltage
Marginal
UnderVoltage Bus
(Color defined by user)

Overview Tutorial

Exercise
Let us do an exercise to get the feel of how the program works. For this exercise, we will add a new 13.2
kV induction motor to the system and run a Load Flow study. This exercise also shows the minimum
data required to perform studies for a motor.
Steps:

1. Click on the Edit Mode button of the Mode Toolbar.

Edit
2. Add an induction motor to the One-Line Diagram.

3. Connect the motor to the bus Sub2B.

4. Double-click on the motor and open its editor.

5. Go to the Nameplate page. Note that the motor voltage is automatically set to 13.2 kV since it was
connected to a 13.8 kV bus. You can change the voltage if you wish.

Overview Tutorial

6. Enter 2000 for HP and click on any other field. The program automatically enters typical nameplate
data for the specified motor size. Click on OK.

7. Switch to Load Flow Mode.

8. Run load flow.
Note that the Study Case (solution parameters) for this run is LF 100A and
the output report filename is LF100rpt.
Load Flow Analysis
Run Load Flow

Overview Tutorial

9. Look at the results displayed before and after Mtr2 is added. Use the Display Options to change
display

Load Flow Results Before Motor Addition

Load Flow Results After Motor Addition

ETAP

PowerStation
4.0
User Guide
Copyright 2001
All Rights Reserved





Southern California

(949) 462-0100 Sales
(949) 462-0400 Fax

Chapter 4

User Access Management

PowerStation relies on two tiers of user access control to provide program security. The first level is
provided by the operating system under which PowerStation is running (Windows 98, NT, 2000, Me, or
XP). In the case of Windows NT, 2000, or XP, the user must be an authorized user as determined by the
operating system administrator. When using Windows 98 or Me, the user must have logged on the PC
with a valid user ID if one is required by the operating system.

PowerStation provides the second level of access control by assigning one or more of the nine access
level permissions available in PowerStation to an authorized user for each individual project. These
access levels are:

Off-Line
(PowerStation)
On-Line
(PSMS)
Administrator X X
Project Editor X X
Base Editor X -
Revision Editor X -
Checker X -
Browser X -
Librarian X -
Controller - X
Operator - X

Users may be assigned one, all, or any combination of access level permissions, but each user must have
at least one access level permission to open a project. The level of access and responsibility are different
for each permission. A user may access a project under only one permission level at a time.

If a password is not required for a project, PowerStation will automatically default to the highest assigned
permission level for that user and open the project. While passwords are recommended for optimal
security, they are not required.

The Administrator is responsible for assigning and maintaining the status of the other users and their
permissions and passwords only. As an administrator, you do not have access to the project one-line
diagram, underground system, or editors. The first level of authority on a given project is Project Editor,
which has access to all functions except disabling accounts and changing passwords.

It should be noted that Project Editors and Base Editors CANNOT be Checkers for the same engineering
(equipment) data that they have added or modified. You can have access to the same project as a Checker
(if Checker access level permission has been assigned to you), but you cannot check the same data that
you have modified.

The PowerStation libraries, which are stored in Microsoft compound files, are opened in Read Only mode
for all access levels except Project Editor and Librarian. Project Editor and Librarian can open the
libraries in Read/Write mode. Consequently, only one user can access a library at any given time.
Changes made to the PowerStation libraries are not permanent until the user saves the entire library,
either explicitly or when prompted while quitting the program.

PowerStation project data are stored via ODBC (in non-exclusive mode) and CANNOT have multiple
readers or writers at the same time. PowerStation data is structured in such a way that transactioning
support by the database is not required.

This chapter consists of the following sections:

Access Levels
User Management
Creating A New Project File
Opening An Existing Project File
User Access Management Access Levels
4.1 Access Levels
When a PowerStation project file is created or opened, there are several functions that can be done with
each device or the entire project. The use of these functions varies for different access levels. These
functions can be categorized in two groups:

Group 1 Changes Group 2 Changes
Move Elements Add (Drop) Elements
Change Element Sizes Cut (Delete) Elements to Dumpster
Change Element Symbols Copy Elements to Dumpster
Change Element Annotation Orientation Paste Elements from Dumpster
Edit Engineering Properties Move Elements from Dumpster
Change Operating Status Connect Elements
Hide or Show Protection Devices Purge Elements from Dumpster
Autoroute Connections Re-sizing Elements (UGS)
Change Bus to Node Symbols or the reverse Merge Data Revisions to Base Data
Purge Data Revisions
Merge Data Revisions to other Revisions
4.1.1 Administrator
The Administrator access level is only for user management and cannot access projects for editing. This
means that an Administrator can access any project file for administration purposes, but not for editing
the project. The Administrator is responsible for establishing and maintaining all user access control on a
specific project basis. The Administrator can:

Add, modify, or delete user accounts and passwords
Add, modify, or delete user access levels

The Administrator cannot delete himself/herself or a user while he/she has a project open and running.
Once assigned, only the Default Administrator, Admin, may delete a user from the Administrator
permission. Also note that if two or more administrators have been assigned to a project, one can delete
the other.

Every project must have at least one user with Administrator access. There is a permanent administrator
with the user ID Admin that cannot be deleted from the project. When you create a new project, the
password for Admin is defaulted to password. Note that if a project requires a password and Admin is
the only administrator, if you change the password for Admin and forget the password, you cannot add,
delete, or modify user access levels for this project, i.e., you cannot open this project; there is no back
door around this. We recommend that either you do not require a password, do not change the Admin
password, or that you have multiple Administrators and record your password.
4.1.2 Project Editor
Project Editor is the highest access level to project files. When a new project file is created, PowerStation
will automatically log you in as a Project Editor.

In the on-line mode (PowerStation Management System, PSMS) the Project Editor constructs the project
database, creates and audits field equipment software interfaces, and can upload the database to the PSMS
Server. The Project Editor can perform any function involved with the engineering, installation, or
operation of PSMS, including taking the system off-line and performing control operations (if equipped.)
Project Editor is the highest access level to project files.

Can Change CANNOT Change
User Access Management X
Project Data / Defaults X
Base Data X
Revision Data X
Group 1 Changes X
Group 2 Changes X
Configuration Status X
Library Data X
Library Path X
4.1.3 Base Editor
Base Editor access is more restrictive than Project Editor access. The Base Editor cannot change the
library data nor access the User Access Management functions.

Base Data X
Revision Data X
Group 1 Changes X
Group 2 Changes X
Library Data X
Library Path X
4.1.4 Revision Editor
Revision Editor access is more restrictive than the Base Editor. The Revision Editor can change Revision
Data only, i.e., the Revision Editor cannot change Base Data.

Base Data X
Revision Data X
Group 1 Changes X
Group 2 Changes X
Library Data & Path X

Note that you need to access a project as a Project Editor or Base Editor in order to add or rearrange the
one-line diagram or the underground raceway systems. Revision Data reflects the difference (delta)
between the engineering properties in the Base and Revision Data. Therefore, if a new substation needs
to be added and studied for future installation, you need to add it to the system as a Base Editor. The
elements in this substation can be flagged Out of Service for the Base Data so they would not change the
results of the existing system.
4.1.5 Checker
Checker access level is provided for verification of the engineering properties for both Base and Revision
Data.

Can Check CANNOT Change
Base Data Yes X
Revision Data Yes X
Group 1 Changes X
Group 2 Changes X
Library Data X
Library Path X

When you logon as a Checker, you are provided with a Checker dialog box (as shown below) to verify
changes to the engineering properties.

Checker dialog box for Cable 11 before and after it is checked by a user

Edited By
Displayed here are the user name (ID) and the date that the properties of the selected element(s) were last
changed. In this case, the last user who has modified Cable11 is OTI on 4-17-2000. Note that OTI might
have changed one or a number of properties of Cable11.
Checked By
After you click on the Check button, your user name (ID) and the date are stamped as the checker for this
element and displayed here. In this case the user name is MyName, who has checked this element on 4-
20-2000.
Filter By
Use this command to select the elements you wish to check from the pop-up list provided by
PowerStation.
Element Type
Select from the list box which elements you want to view for checking. This list includes:

Entire System
All Generators & Loads
All Branches
All Protective Devices
All Meters
All DC Elements
Dumpster
Individual AC Elements
Individual AC-DC Elements
Individual DC Elements
Individual UGS Elements
Composite Motors
Composite Networks
Skip Checked Elements
Use this command if you do not want to view elements that have already been checked.
Date
Use this command to display a range of dates when changes have taken place. You can change the dates
by clicking on Select Dates and entering new dates, as shown below:

Display Editors
Use this command to display the editors for the elements that you are checking. From the editor, you see
any change or modification of individual fields displayed in red.
Check/Uncheck Data

When you click on the Check button, the color changes to blue and a red check mark appears in the
corner. If you click again, it will uncheck the selected element.
Check All
Press this button to check all unchecked elements. PowerStation requests confirmation for this command.

Controlled Dumpster
The controlled dumpster is a mechanism for locking information into the dumpster and is used only when
the PowerStation project is passwords-enabled.

When PowerStation cuts any elements from a UGS or OLV, the dumpster cell to which the elements are
assigned is designated as a controlled dumpster cell. When the dumpster cell is designated as a controlled
dumpster, the designation has NO meaning unless the project is passwords enabled.

When passwords are enabled, the controlled dumpster is treated as a special entity with the following
attributes:

1. The controlled dumpster is displayed as a controlled dumpster by displaying the designation (C) or
(CC) on its title (in the Dumpster list window).

The designation C (Controlled Dumpster Cell) is used to indicate that this is a controlled
dumpster cell which is not checked. These cells cannot be purged until they are checked.
The designation CC (Checked Controlled Dumpster Cell) is used to indicate that this is a
controlled dumpster cell and it has been checked by a checker. A user with Project or Base Editor
permissions can purge these cells.

2. The background of a (C) controlled dumpster is painted the color of INI values, ControlUGSColor or
ControlOLVColor. The background is painted in the specified color only when the project setting has
Project/Options/Display changed data in RED selected or the project user is a Checker.

3. When moving a cell from a controlled dumpster to the one-line diagram or UGS, two
behaviors are exhibited:

If the controlled dumpster cell is a (C) dumpster, the elements are simply moved as normal, i.e., no
special action is taken to flag elements checked or unchecked. The dumpster cell is then destroyed
as normal.
If the controlled dumpster cell is a (CC) dumpster, the elements are moved as normal but, in
addition, all property values are forced dirty and are flagged as unchecked (will show red in the
editors). This is, for all purposes, identical to dropping a new element on the one-line diagram or
UGS. The dumpster cell is then destroyed as normal.

4. When in checker mode, the controlled dumpster cells appear in the checkers list and can be
checked as any other element can be checked. The act of checking a controlled dumpster
changes its designation from (C) to (CC). This also sets the dumpster background color to
normal.

5. A Project Editor (or Base Editor) cannot purge a controlled dumpster with designation (C).
The Project Editor can purge a controlled dumpster with designation (CC). The checker
must check a controlled dumpster cell before it can be purged.
4.1.6 Browser
Browser access level does not allow any modification of the project or library data. With this access level
you can view the one-line diagram and underground raceway systems, browse the editors and libraries,
and print.
Base Data X
Revision Data X
Group 1 Changes X
Group 2 Changes X
Library Data X
Library Path X
4.1.7 Librarian
The Librarian can browse the project file and modify the library data.

Base Data X
Revision Data X
Group 1 Changes X
Group 2 Changes X
Library Data X
Library Path X
4.1.8 Operator
Operator access level is used for on-line mode. Operator access level allows the user to acknowledge
alarms, playback system actions, and run simulation studies (predicting system response to operator
actions) based on the latest system or stored data.
4.1.9 Controller
Controller access level is used for on-line mode. Controller access level gives the user the authority to
control, take elements out of service, set operating limits, set alarm levels, and set PSMS to supervisory
control, in addition to the permissions that an operator has.

The Controller can perform operations for monitoring and control of the electric system. The Controller
is restricted from reloading the PSMS Server database. The Controller can take the PSMS system off-
line, save the console database, perform electric system control operations, and pin protective devices and
meters.

User Access Management User Management
4.2 User Management
The User Manager dialog box will come up when you logon as an Administrator.

As an Administrator you can add, modify, and delete user accounts, but cannot access the project itself.
To access the project, you must close the User Manager dialog box and re-open the project with another
access level. There is a permanent administrator with the user ID Admin that cannot be deleted from the
project. When you create a new project, the password for Admin is defaulted to password.
4.2.1 Change Password
Click on this button to change the password of a user. Passwords can be up to 12 characters long.

4.2.2 Disable Password
Click on this button to enable, disable, or change the password requirements for this project.

Project files can be set up with or without user password requirements. Passwords are recommended for
optimal security. If a password is required, every user must enter their user name and password before
accessing the project. If a user forgets their name or password, the project administrator must reset the
passwords. If a password is not required for a project, PowerStation will automatically add the user name
to the user list for the project and default to the highest assigned permission level (Project Editor) and
open the project.

Every project must have at least one user with Administrator access. There is a permanent administrator
with a user ID Admin that cannot be deleted from the project. When you create a new project, the default
password for Admin is password. Logon as Admin to open the User Manager dialog box to disable or
enable the password requirement at any time.
4.2.3 User Information
The User Information dialog box allows you to add new users or modify existing users (full name and
password), and assign various combinations of access level permissions. This dialog box is similar to the
one that you get when you create a new project, except here the Administrator can delete users and
disable user accounts.

User Name
The logon user name is displayed here. The user name cannot be changed from here.
Full Name
Enter or modify the full name of the user here. This information will not be printed in any report and is
only available to the project administrator for identification of users.

Description
This field is used to describe the type of user for further identification by the project administrator and
will not be printed in any report. For projects that do not require a password, the default for this field is
Instant User.
Access Level Permission
Select one or all access levels permitted for this user.
OK
Saves the information on the page to the access list.
Delete
This button is active when you bring up the User Information dialog box from the User Manager dialog
box. The Delete button is used to delete a selected user from the user list.
4.2.4 Add User
The Add User dialog box is similar to the User Information dialog box except you can enter the user
name and password.
4.2.5 ODBC Parameters

Driver Options
Buffer Size
The Buffer Size is the internal buffer, in kilobytes, that is used to transfer data to and from PowerStation
to the associated project database. The PowerStation project default for the Buffer Size is 4096.
Page Timeout
The Page Timeout specifies the period of time, in tenths of a second that an unused page of data remains
in the buffer before being removed. The PowerStation project default for the Page Timeout is 600.
Database
The User ID and Password are associated with the database itself. When you open the database using a
third party database manager (such as Microsoft Access), the database will require the User ID and
Password to open it. This User ID and Password are not to be confused with the PowerStation logon and
password, which enable you to open and edit the PowerStation project.
User ID
This is where you input the third party database managers User ID.
Password
Enter the third party database managers password to authorize the proper access level to the project.
Oracle Database
The Connect String (DBQ) must be entered here in order to associate this PowerStation project database
with your Oracle file server system. The default DBQ is setup for a personal Oracle database. If the
Oracle database is different, then the correct DBQ and User ID must be specified here. Contact your
database administrator for these parameters.

User Access Management Creating A New Project File
4.3 Creating A New Project File
To create a new project, click on New Project in the File menu or the first button on the Project Toolbar.

Project File
Name
Enter a new name for the Project File Name, up to 30 characters. PowerStation prevents you from
entering illegal characters for the project name.
Directory
PowerStation automatically sets up a subdirectory in the PowerStation directory for your new project. If
you want to place your project in a different subdirectory, click on Browse to select a directory.
Unit System
Select English or Metric as the default unit system for your project. Note that after a project is created
you can change the defaults at any time. However, after a project is created, you must change the defaults
for each element individually.
Password
Project files can be set up with or without passwords, but passwords are recommended for optimal
security. If a password is required, every user must enter his/her user name and password before
accessing the project. If a password is not required for a project, PowerStation will automatically add the
user name to the user list for that project and default to the highest assigned permission level (Project
Editor) and open the project. If you store project files locally on your computer and you can control
access to your computer and project files, you do not need to use the password requirement.
ODBC
Driver
Select MS Access, Oracle, or SQL Server from the list box. Note that the ODBC driver must be
installed in your computer with the Data Source set to otiaccess.
4-14 ETAP PowerStation 4.
See Section 4.2.4, Advanced ODBC Parameters.
Advanced Parameters
Operation Technology, Inc. 0
User Access Management Opening An Existing Project File
4.4 Opening An Existing Project File
To open an existing project file, click on Open in the File menu or click on the second button on the
Project Toolbar, and then select a file with an .OTI extension from the Open dialog box.

4.4.1 Logon
The Logon dialog box is then provided to enter your user name and password, if a password is required.
The user name which you used to logon to Windows (NT, 2000, 95, or 98) is placed here as the default.
If you have changed your user name for this project, you will need to use that name to log on to this
project.

User Access Management Opening An Existing Project File
If this project does not require a password and this is the first time you are accessing this project, you will
be logged in automatically as a Project Editor and will be added to the project user list as an Instant User.
If your user name is listed in the project user list (because you have opened this project before or the
administrator has added your name to the user list), then you will be logged in with the highest access
level available to you, i.e., Project Editor, Base Editor, Revision Editor, Checker, etc.
Project File
Name
This is the file name for the file you are currently working on.
Compact Database
The Compact Database feature will optimize the database, removing discarded information and all
elements deleted from the Dumpster, as well as other data that is no longer being used by PowerStation.

When deleting or updating a Microsoft Access database, the database will become fragmented and may
not grow in proportion with your project size. This feature is used to de-fragment and compact the
database. In most cases the size of the database is reduced. It will not remove columns of information
added to the PowerStation database through a third party database manager such as Microsoft Access.

You may also compact a Microsoft Access database by selecting Control Panel/ODBC, which runs the
ODBC Data Source Administrator dialog. For more details, see Chapter 2, Section 3, Configuring
ODBC. When you select the Compact Database command, the ODBC Data Source Administrator
automatically compacts your Microsoft Access database when the project is closed.

If this project requires a password, PowerStation prompts you to open the project file with one of the
access levels available to you. Only those access levels assigned to you are available for selection; all
others are grayed out. Select a desired access level (except Administrator) in the Select Access Level
dialog box. Click on OK. The project file will then be opened. Note that if you have only one access
level permission, PowerStation does not prompt you for access level selection and automatically logs you
in with that access level.

ETAP

PowerStation
4.0
User Guide
Copyright 2001
All Rights Reserved





Southern California

(949) 462-0100 Sales
(949) 462-0400 Fax

Chapter 5

Menu Bars

Menu bars contain a list of menu options which, when an option is selected, activates a drop-down list of
commands. Some of the menu options also activate an additional list of menus (the arrow pointing to the
right denotes an additional menu). For example, select Project, Settings, and Data Type.

The contents of the menu bars change depending on the type of window or view that is active. Five
different types of menu bars exist in PowerStation, as listed below:

Start-Up Menu Bar
One-Line Diagram Menu Bar
Project View Menu Bar
U/G Raceway System Menu Bar
Dumpster Menu Bar

Menu Bars Start-Up Menu Bar
5.1 Start-Up Menu Bar

The Start-Up Menu Bar is displayed when you start PowerStation and have not yet opened a project file.
This menu bar contains a limited number of menu options.

The Start-Up Menu Bar offers the following menus:

File Open a new or existing project file
View Show or hide Help Line
Help PowerStation Help
Macros For use only on PSMS software
5.1.1 File Menu

Select the File Menu option from the Start-Up Menu Bar to create new project files, open existing
project files, or exit PowerStation.

The File Menu on the Start-Up Menu Bar offers the following commands:

New Project Creates a new project file
Open Project Opens an existing project file
Exit Exits PowerStation
5.1.2 View Menu

Select the View Menu option from the Start-Up Menu Bar to show or hide the Help Line at the bottom
of your screen where the help message, error message, and Revision Data are displayed.
5.1.3 Macros Menu
This function is strictly reserved for use on the PSMS software. Since PSMS and PowerStation share
menu bars, the Macros option also appears on the PowerStation software menu bars.

Menu Bars One-Line Diagram Menu Bar
5.2 One-Line Diagram Menu Bar
The One-Line Diagram Menu Bar is displayed when a One-Line Diagram presentation is active. The
One-Line Diagram Menu Bar contains a comprehensive collection of menu options.

This menu bar is displayed when a one-line diagram is active and offers the following menu items:

File Menu File management and conversions
Edit Menu Cut, copy, and paste
View Menu Display different toolbars
Project Menu Project standards and settings
Library Menu Library access and management
Defaults Menu Fonts and default settings of elements
Tools Menu Global sizing/symbols and element grouping
Rev Control Menu Base and Revision Data control
Window Menu Window management
Macros For use only on PSMS software.
Help Menu Help access
5.2.1 File Menu
The File Menu option on the One-Line Diagram Menu Bar provides commands to open/close project
files, log off/on users, save/copy project files, print/print preview one-line diagrams, convert one-line
diagrams to WMF/EMF files, convert ETAP DOS or CSV files to PowerStation files, and export to and
import from the clipboard.

The File Menu for One-Line Diagram offers the following commands:

New Project Create a new project file
Open Project Open an existing project file
Close Project Close an opened project
Log Off Log off or onto an open project as a different user or change access levels
Save Project Save the project file
Copy Project To Save an open project to a specified file name and continue to function
within the original project
Save Library Save Library file
Print Setup Select a page layout as well as a printer and printer connection
Print Preview Display the one-line diagram on-screen as it will appear when printed
Print Print the one-line diagram
Batch Print Print all or any number of views that belong to a presentation at once.
Views consist of the main one-line diagram and nested composite
networks and composite motors
Export Metafile Convert the one-line diagram into a WMF or EMF file
Export to Clipboard Export selected one-line diagram to the clipboard (merge files)
Import ETAP DOS File Convert an ETAP DOS file into a PowerStation project file
Import CSV File Convert a comma separated file into a PowerStation project file
Export XML File Export project database via XML format
Import XML File Import project database via XML format
Import from Clipboard Import selected one-line diagram from the clipboard (merge files)
Create Tag File For online PSMS applications
Audit Tag File For online PSMS applications
Update Tag File For online PSMS applications
Exit Exit PowerStation
New Project
To start a new project, click on File and select New Project. This opens the Create New Project File
dialog box, as shown below.

Create New Project File Dialog Box

From the dialog box, enter a Project File Name with a maximum of 32 characters that is suitable for your
project. For more information about this dialog box see Create a New Project File.

User Information Dialog Box

For the purpose of this manual, name the new project Test and click on OK. This will open the User
Information dialog box. For more details on User Information see User Access Manager.

When you create a new project, PowerStation automatically gives you all access level privileges. If you
click on OK and PowerStation logs you on as a Project Editor, i.e., you have full access to all editors
including Base Data, Revision Data, Libraries, etc. Administrative functions such as adding and deleting
users to the project are not available to a Project Editor. To access these functions, you must log on as
Administrator.

For projects on which security is not an issue, or if you are a single user of PowerStation, we recommend
that you do not require a password for projects and that you give yourself full access privileges. You can
change the password requirement at any time.

If you forget your User Name or your password, log on as Admin. Type password as the password. We
recommend that you do not change the password for Admin unless you record it for later use. If you
forget your User Name or your password, this may be the only way you can access this project.

Enter your User Name (maximum 20 characters) in the User Name field. User Name is a mandatory
field. For the purpose of this manual, enter OTI, and then click on OK. PowerStation will create a one-
line diagram presentation named OLV1. You can start adding elements and editing the one-line diagram.
Remember, each time a new project is created; the presentation displayed in the window will be named
OLV1 (OLV1 is the default name for the one-line diagram presentation). You can change the name of
the one-line diagram presentation at any time.

Project View and One-Line Diagram Presentation OLV1
Open Project
You can open an existing project file (previously saved) by clicking on Open Project in the File menu.
You can also select Open Projects from the menu generated by right-clicking on the project name in the
Project View.

If you are editing a project and you want to open a previously saved project, you will be prompted to save
the current project.

In order to open a previously saved project while you are editing a project, the currently opened project
must be in Edit or Study mode. Note that you CANNOT save or close a project when you are in Revision
Data, i.e., you must first change to Base Data.

Included in the PowerStation installation program is a file named Example.OTI. To open this file, click
on Open Project from the File Menu on the menu bar. This will open the Open Project File dialog box,
as shown here. Locate the folder in the ETAPS\PowerStn directory called Example. The file
Example.OTI is located in this folder. Select the file and click on Open, as shown below. This will open
the Example project file.

The Example file contains a sample project complete with a one-line diagram and sample values entered
into the component editors. Performing the actions described in the remainder of the manual will help
you to become familiar with PowerStation.
Open Project File Dialog Box
The following options allow you to specify which file to open:
Look in
Select a network, drive, and directory, where the PowerStation project file that you want to open is
located.
File Name
Type or select the file name you want to open. This box lists files with the extension you select in the
List Files of Type box.
Files of Type
ETAP PowerStation project files have an .OTI extension.
Close Project
A project can be closed when you are in Edit or Study mode. However, you CANNOT close a project file
when you are in Revision Data, i.e., project must be in Base Data. It is recommended that you save the
project prior to closing it. Closing a project can be done by clicking on Close Project in the File Menu or
on Close in the pop-up menu generated by right-clicking on the project name in the Project View.

Before a project file is closed, you are promoted to save the project file.

If you click on Yes, all data is saved when the project is closed.
Save Project
A project can be saved only when you are in Edit mode or a Study mode. If you have logged on as a
Project Editor or Base Editor, you CANNOT save a project while the project is in a revision level of data.
Saving a project can be done by clicking on Save Project in the File Menu or on Save in the menu
generated by right-clicking on the project name in the Project View.

You can schedule a project to save for any pre-defined time interval. This may be done from the Project
Options dialog box, as shown below. To open the Project Options dialog box, click on Project in the
menu bar and click on Options or click on Options from the menu generated by right-clicking on the
project name in the Project View.

Click on AutoSave and enter a time interval (maximum 999 minutes). The number 30 has been entered
here as an example. Your current project will be saved automatically every 30 minutes from this point
on.

If, however, you have selected Prompt before auto saving project in this dialog box, PowerStation will
request your confirmation before saving the project. The Prompt box is required if you want to save the
connections between elements in your database.

When AutoSave is active, the following prompt box appears:

The AutoSave prompt allows you to:

Change the scheduled AutoSave time period
Disable AutoSave
Save element connections into the project database

Copy Project To
This command makes a copy of the project file but does not open that copy. The copied file does not
contain the passwords and user information of the original project file. A copy of the project file can be
made only when you are in Edit mode or a Study mode. You CANNOT make a copy of your project
when you are not in Base Data, i.e., while the project is in a revision level of data. You may copy a
project file to a new project file name or to a previously saved project file name. In order to copy the
project file to a new one, click on Copy Project To from the File menu, as shown below:

From this dialog box, select a directory for the new file name. Enter the new name, Example-1, (or a
previously saved project file name) for the new File Name, and click on Save. A message will confirm
that the copy has been successfully saved. The new project file name will be saved as Example-1.oti.

Note that PowerStation uses file transitioning for saving project files. When you copy projects,
PowerStation prompts you with the following dialog box for saving the project file before copying.

If you press No, the last saved project file will be copied. If press Yes, the project file will be first saved
and then copied to a new name.
Print Setup, Print Preview, Print, & Batch Print
PowerStation allows you to preview and print/plot one-line diagrams, underground raceway systems, text
output reports, motor starting plots, transient stability plots, and cable temperature plots. For more details
on Print Setup, Print Preview, Print, Batch Print, and Plot capabilities, see the Chapter on Printing and
Plotting.
Print Setup
Every one-line diagram view, including composite networks and composite motors, has their own
individual print setup and print options. This menu bar item brings up the Print Setup dialog box for the
active view.

Print Preview
The Print Preview dialog allows you to change the printer setup, options, print size (zooming), and print
adjustment (moving up, down, left, & right). Note that all settings are only associated with the displayed
view and are saved for that view.

Print
This item will display the Print dialog box for the active view. From this dialog box, you can change the
print Setup and options.

Batch Print
Batch printing allows you to print all views associated with one presentation. Each one-line diagram
(including composite networks & motors) will be printed based on the last saved print setup, options, and
zooming. You can globally select or deselect all composite networks, composite AC motors, and
composite DC motors.

Export to Metafile
PowerStation can convert the contents of one-line diagrams into disk-based Enhanced Metafiles (EMF
format) or 16-bit Windows Metafiles (WMF format). To convert a one-line diagram into a metafile,
select the Export to Metafile option.

A Windows Metafile (WMF) consists of device-independent drawing instructions that help Windows to
recreate the drawing element and display it on any display device such as AutoCAD
. The Enhanced
Metafile format (EMF) improves the drawing scalability and accuracy by adding more extensive
information into the metafile header along with new drawing instructions. EMF files can be used for
programs such as Microsoft
Word.
Metafile Options
Select the metafile format (EMF, WMF, or both). You must specify at least one format for the
conversion to work. The default setting is Enhanced Metafile format only.
Element Range
You can convert all elements in the one-line diagram (including OLE objects) or only elements that you
have selected. The default setting is All Elements.
Convert Viewable Area Only
Convert only the area of the one line diagram that can be seen in the one-line view.

ETAP will ask you to specify the path location where the metafile is on your system.

Import WMF files into AutoCAD
AutoCAD can only support the Windows metafiles format. To create an AutoCAD drawing from a WMF
metafile converted from PowerStation as explained above, make sure that both options Wire Frame and
Wide Line in the AutoCAD menu File/Options/WMF Options are unchecked. To import the metafile into
AutoCAD, select the File/Import menu item and browse or type the name of the WMF metafile complete
with path location. Note that the resolution of the WMF files gets better as you zoom in the one-line
diagram.
Export/Import XML Files
This Function allows the exporting and importing of project database files via XML Format. In order to
perform the transfer of files in this format, it is necessary to utilize a PDE key and security code. Please
contact OTI to obtain further information concerning this process.
Import ETAP DOS Files
PowerStation provides a tool to convert and insert ETAP DOS files or comma-separated files (CSV) into
the PowerStation project currently open. The conversion can be initiated from the File Menu or from the
Project View by right clicking on the project name. When you choose to convert ETAP DOS files, the
Select ETAP DOS Project File to Convert dialog box will be displayed, which lists all the ETAP DOS
project files with a .gen extension, as shown below. You can type a file name in the File Name field and
then click on the Open button or double-click on a file name in the list to start the conversion.

After selecting the DOS file for conversion, a dialog box such as the one shown below will be displayed,
allowing you to specify options for bus coordinates and motor models.

Bus Coordinates
There are two options: using the existing X and Y coordinates assigned in ETAP DOS files or letting
PowerStation automatically assign new X and Y coordinates. In the current version of PowerStation,
only the first option is available.

Note that if you have never produced a one-line diagram from the DOS version of ETAP, the X and Y
coordinates for buses and branches are set equal to one (1). In order for the ETAP DOS program to
assign the coordinates for all the buses, you need to open the file from ETAP DOS, access the Overall
One-Line module from the Analysis menu, press F3 to enter the Graphical Bus Editor, then press F9 to
save the X and Y coordinates assigned by the ETAP DOS program.
Design Class for Motor Models
Enter a Design Class from one of the existing Design Classes for motor models. You can select from:

HV-HS-HT
HV-HS-LT
HV-LS-HT
HV-LS-LT
LV-HS-HT
LV-HS-LT
LV-LS-HT
LV-LS-LT

Note that the existing Motor Model Library of PowerStation includes Low Voltage, High Voltage, Low
Speed, High Speed, Low Torque, and High Torque models.

The conversion from ETAP DOS files to a PowerStation project consists of two steps:

Conversion from ETAP DOS files to comma separated files
Conversion from the comma separated files to PowerStation project files

In the first step of conversion, the program checks for errors in the ETAP DOS files that may obstruct the
second step of conversion. If any errors are detected, they are printed in a file named ETAP2CSV.ERR,
which is located in the directory where the ETAP DOS files are placed. A message box, as shown below,
will be posted to review the error file first. If you click on the Yes button, the error file will automatically
be opened for you to view. If you click on the No button, the conversion process will proceed with the
second step, but there may be errors that will halt the conversion or cause invalid results. It is strongly
suggested that you review the error message file first.

If no error is detected in the first step, the conversion from comma-separated files to PowerStation
continues, creating elements and converting engineering properties in the process. If the ETAP DOS file
contains both Bus Editor data and Load Schedule data, there are two sources for motor and static load
data and they may not be in agreement with each other. In this case, the conversion program will open a
dialog box, as shown below, allowing you to specify the source for motor and static load data.

The default option is to convert load data from the Load Schedule, because it contains more detailed data.
If you select this option, each motor and static load will be converted to PowerStation. If there is only
one motor or a static load connected to a bus, a load will be created and connected to the bus. Otherwise,
a composite motor will be created and all the loads will be contained in the composite motor.

When the Load Schedule option is selected, although motors and static loads in the Bus Editor may be in
conflict with the Load Schedule data, they are disregarded. Note that a motor in the Bus Editor, in most
cases an equivalent motor for a group of motors in the Load Schedule, and the dynamic model and load
model entered in the Machine Editor may not be valid for any of the motors in the group. This model
information is not converted. If motors in the Load Schedule do not have dynamic motors and load
models, you will need to enter the dynamic motor and load model information for each motor. Dynamic
models are required for dynamic motor acceleration studies.

If the second option is selected, a motor will be created for each motor in the Bus Editor, the typical
nameplate data will be used, and the dynamic motor and load models (specified from the Machine Editor)
will be converted. The percent loading of each motor will be set to match the total bus motor load
according to its rating. If the bus motor loading is nonzero, but there is no machine number for motors
connected to this bus, a motor will be created in PowerStation using typical data to match the bus motor
loading. If there is a static load in the ETAP DOS Bus Editor, a static load will also be created to match
the bus static load.
Import CSV Files
CSV project files are comma-separated files. Contact OTI to provide you with the complete format of the
CSV file. Once you choose to convert CSV files, the Select CSG Files to Convert dialog box will be
displayed which lists all the files with a .csg extension, as shown below. You can type a file name in the
File Name field and then click on the Open button, or double-click on a file name in the list to start the
conversion.

Merging PowerStation Projects
Individual project files within PowerStation can be merged together. The process involves the following
steps.

1) Open a PowerStation project file.
2) Export (temporarily save) the project file or a portion thereof to the clipboard.
3) Close the first project file and open the next project file.
4) Import (merge) the temporarily saved project file into the second project file.
Export to Clipboard
Exporting to the clipboard is used as a method to temporarily save an entire one-line diagram or a portion
of it for merging into other project files or the same project file.

PowerStation only exports the active status and revision data (engineering properties). Before you select
the elements from the one-line diagram, choose the configuration status and revision data that you wish to
have associated with the exported one-line diagram, highlight all of the elements you wish to export to the
clipboard, and then click on Export to clipboard in the File Menu.

The exported elements into the clipboard include elements inside of composite networks and composite
motors, as well as their properties and status.
Import from Clipboard
Importing from the clipboard is used as a method to merge PowerStation project files. Before Importing
from clipboard can be done, the Export action into the clipboard procedure must be finished. To import
the content of the clipboard, open the PowerStation project file you wish to have the exported elements
imported into, and then click on the Import from clipboard. The imported elements include elements
inside of composite networks and composite motors.

The imported elements can now be utilized just like any other elements. PowerStation checks for the
uniqueness of elements ID. If an element with the same ID exists, the ID of the importing element will
be appended with -1 or other integers to make it unique.

Exit
Using this command will save and close your PowerStation project file and close the PowerStation
program.
5.2.2 Edit Menu

The Edit option on the One-Line Diagram Menu Bar offers the following commands:

Cut Dumpster Deletes selected element(s) from the one-line diagram and moves it to
the Dumpster
Copy Dumpster Copies selected element(s) from the one-line diagram to the Dumpster
Paste Dumpster Pastes selected cell from the Dumpster into the one-line diagram
Move From Dumpster Moves selected cell from the Dumpster into the one-line diagram
DeSelect All Deselects all elements in the one-line diagram
Cut OLE Deletes selected OLE object(s) from the one-line diagram to the
Clipboard
Copy OLE Copies selected OLE object(s) from the one-line diagram to the
Clipboard
Clear OLE Deletes selected OLE object(s) from the one-line diagram
Paste OLE Pastes object(s) from the Clipboard into the one-line diagram
Paste Special OLE Moves selected cell from the Dumpster into the OLV
Insert New Object OLE Inserts new OLE object(s) in the one-line diagram
Links OLE Edit any linked OLE objects on the one-line diagram
Object OLE Place holder for OLE object verbs

Cut
The Cut command on the Edit Menu will delete selected elements from the one-line diagram and place
them in the Dumpster. You can cut elements in Edit Mode only. You can also cut selected elements by
clicking the right mouse button and selecting the Cut command from the pop-up menu. Another way to
cut an element or a group of elements is to select the elements and click on the Cut button from the
toolbar or press the Delete key. To select a group of elements, click and hold the left mouse button down
while dragging the pointer across the elements you want to select. When you cut an element or a group of
elements, they are deleted from the one-line diagram and placed into the Dumpster.
Copy
The Copy command from the Edit Menu will copy selected elements from the one-line diagram and place
them in a Dumpster cell. You can also copy an element or a group of selected elements by clicking the
right mouse button and selecting the Copy command from the pop-up menu. Another way to copy an
element or a group of elements is to select the elements and click the Copy button on the toolbar. To
select elements, press and hold the left mouse button down while dragging the pointer across the elements
you want to select.

You can copy elements in Edit Mode only. When you copy an element or a group of elements, they are
copied into the Dumpster with new ID Names while all other data and properties are preserved.
Paste
To paste an element or a group of elements from a Dumpster Cell, select a cell from the Dumpster and
activate the view (one-line diagram or U/G raceway) you want the element to be pasted into. Then select
the Paste command from the Edit Menu or click on the Paste button on the toolbar. You can also right-
click the mouse and select the Paste command from the pop-up menu.

If more than one element is pasted, the pasted one-line diagram will be grouped to facilitate dragging the
one-line diagram to the desired location. To ungroup the one line diagram, right-click on the pasted
elements and select ungroup from the menu.

You can paste elements in Edit Mode only. When an element is pasted from the Dumpster, PowerStation
assigns a new ID to it while all other data and properties are preserved.
Move From
This command will move the contents of a Dumpster cell and place them in the one-line diagram. Note
that when you move elements from the Dumpster into the one-line diagram, the element IDs do not get
changed as the elements are deleted from the Dumpster.

You can move elements in Edit Mode only. The Move From command is available from the Edit Menu
and also from the pop-up menu generated when you right-click the mouse on the one-line diagram or U/G
raceway system. The Move From Dumpster command moves the active Dumpster cell.

Cut (OLE)
This command removes the selected OLE object from your one-line diagram and places it on the
Clipboard. This command is available only in Edit mode and only if you have selected an OLE object.
Copy (OLE)
This command copies the selected OLE object on your one-line diagram and to the Clipboard. This
command is available if you have selected an OLE object on your one-line diagram.
Clear (OLE)
This command deletes all selected OLE objects on your one-line diagram. None of the OLE objects are
placed on the Clipboard. This command is available only in Edit mode and only when you have selected
at least one OLE object on your one-line diagram.
Paste (OLE)
This command pastes an OLE object from the Clipboard on to your one-line. The OLE object is always
pasted in its embedded form (the object is always embedded into PowerStation). An embedded object is
always completely inserted into PowerStation. The embedded object can be edited only from within
PowerStation and is completely contained within PowerStation. This command is available only in the
Edit mode and only when there is an OLE object on the Clipboard.
Paste Special (OLE)
This command pastes an OLE object from the Clipboard on to your one-line. Unlike Paste, however, you
may select any specific format of the OLE object to paste on to the one-line diagram. This command runs
the OLE Paste Special dialog.

The OLE Paste Special dialog lets you select the format (Link, metafile, bitmap, object, or iconic) of the
OLE object to be pasted on to the one-line diagram. The selection is, of course, limited to the formats
supported by the OLE object on the clipboard (in the example shown above, the OLE object is a bitmap).

If a linked format is available, PowerStation inserts a linked object on to the one-line diagram. In contrast
to an embedded object, a linked OLE object does not live within PowerStation, PowerStation contains
only a reference to the object. This allows the linked object to be updated when the original object is
changed. On the other hand, editing the object from within PowerStation is the only way to change an
embedded object.

Some formats, for example, metafile, bitmap, etc., are static objects and may not be editable after they are
inserted into PowerStation. This command is available only in Edit mode and only when there is an OLE
object on the Clipboard.

Insert New Object (OLE)
This command inserts an OLE object on to the one-line diagram. This command runs the OLE Insert
Object dialog.

The OLE Insert Object dialog displays a list of all OLE objects registered on your computer. You may
select any object from the list and specify whether to create a new object or use an object that resides in a
file (for example - a MS Word document). Additionally, you may specify whether to have the object
display an icon for itself in place of its normal visual appearance.

The following one-line diagram includes a Microsoft Excel chart, Microsoft Word document (legend),
and a WordPad text OLE objects.

After you have selected an OLE object to insert, PowerStation checks the Registry to determine if the
selected object is a programmable object. If so, PowerStation will automatically recommend that you
NOT insert a programmable object into PowerStation. Inserting a programmable OLE object into
PowerStation may lead to unpredictable results.

This command is only available in Edit mode.

Document Object (OLE)

This command is a place-holder for the selected OLE object in which the OLE object will place its OLE
verbs. An OLE object must be selected for this function to become active. The specific contents of this
menu location will vary depending upon which verbs are supported by the selected OLE object.

Typically, OLE objects support such verbs as Open, Edit, Replace, etc. When you select one of these
verbs, PowerStation will execute the verb for the selected OLE object. In the example shown above, an
Excel worksheet displays two verbs Edit and Open. This command is only available in Edit mode.
Edit OLE Object Properties
You can use the right-click and select Properties to change the OLE object to an icon or scale it.

5.2.3 View Menu

The View Menu on the One-Line Diagram Menu Bar provides commands for zooming and displaying
toolbars, time-sliders, etc.

The following commands are available from the View Menu:

Zoom In Show more detail in the one-line diagram
Zoom Out Show less detail in the one-line diagram
Zoom to Fit Re-size the one-line diagram to best fit the window
Project Toolbar Show or hide the Project Toolbar
Mode/Status Toolbar Show or hide the Mode Toolbar
Configuration Toolbar Show or hide the Configuration Toolbar
Study Case Toolbar Show or hide the Study Case Toolbar
AC Edit Toolbar Show or hide the AC Edit Toolbar
DC Edit Toolbar Show or hide the DC Edit Toolbar
On-Line Toolbar Show or hide the On-Line Toolbar (PSMS)
Supervisory Control Toolbar Show or hide the Supervisory Control Toolbar (PSMS)
Load Flow Toolbar Show or hide the Load Flow Toolbar
Short Circuit Toolbar Show or hide the Short-Circuit Toolbar
Motor Starting Toolbar Show or hide the Motor Starting Toolbar
Harmonic Analysis Toolbar Show or hide the Harmonic Analysis Toolbar
Transient Stability Toolbar Show or hide the Transient Stability Toolbar
Optimal Power Flow Toolbar Show or hide the Optimal Power Flow Toolbar
Relay Coordination Toolbar Show or hide the Relay Coordination Toolbar
Reliability Analysis Toolbar Show or hide the Reliability Analysis Toolbar
Motor Starting Time-Slider Show or hide the Motor Starting Time-Slider
Transient Stability Time-
Slider
Show or hide the Transient Stability Time-Slider
Harmonic Order-Slider Show or hide the Harmonic Order-Slider
Harmonic Frequency-Slider Show or hide the Harmonic Frequency-Slider
Battery Discharge Slider Show or hide the Battery Discharge Slider
Playback Status Function valid for PSMS software only
DC Load Flow Toolbar Show or hide the DC Load Flow Toolbar
DC SC Toolbar Show or hide the DC SC Toolbar
Battery Sizing Toolbar Show or hide the Battery Sizing Toolbar
Help Line Show or hide the Help Line
Grid Show or hide the grid lines in the one-line diagram
Continuity Check Activate or de-activate Continuity Check


Zoom In

Select the Zoom In command from the View Menu or click on the Zoom In button to enlarge your one-
line diagram. A magnifying glass appears and can be placed directly over the element(s), which you
would like to enlarge. Clicking the left mouse button will activate the enlargement. All elements in the
window are enlarged and the screen is now centered on the location of the magnifying glass. The
magnifying glass will disappear. Double-clicking on the Zoom In button allows you to enlarge the
project many times. Pressing Escape stops the Zoom In function, making the magnifying glass
disappears.
Zoom Out

Select the Zoom Out command from the View Menu or click on the Zoom Out button to reduce the size
of the one-line diagram. All elements in the active window are automatically reduced by one
magnification level.

Zoom To Fit

Select the Zoom to Fit command from the View Menu or click on the Zoom to Fit button to resize
selected elements of the one-line diagram to fit within the window; i.e., you can rubber-band an area of
the one-line diagram or select elements by holding down the Control button and clicking on the
element(s), then zoom to fit. If no element is selected, the entire one-line diagram will be resized, and all
the elements within the project will be shown in the window. The elements may be enlarged or reduced,
depending on the number of elements and their placement. If all the elements will not fit within the
window, the window will be set to maximum reduction with the view located to the windows upper left-
hand corner.
Toolbars
The Toolbar commands from the View Menu allow you to choose which toolbars, time-sliders, or
Frequency Sliders are shown and which ones are hidden. If the toolbar is available AND it has a check
mark in front of it, the toolbar is active and available to use. When the check mark is removed (by
selecting the toolbar from the list), the toolbar will not be visible or available for use. Toolbars that are
shown in gray are not available in the current mode of operation, i.e., if you are in Short-Circuit mode
then the Short-Circuit Toolbar will be active and all other toolbars will be inactive. Toolbars that are
active and available may be moved from their attached location using the mouse. Select the toolbar by
clicking and holding the left mouse button down on an area of the toolbar that does not contain an icon.
The toolbar may then be dragged to a new location.
Help Line
The Help Line is located at the bottom of the screen. The Help Line may be hidden from view if you
uncheck this option. The three parts of the Help Line are:

Help Message Displays a brief description regarding most functions and properties. Each time you
click on a button, select a function, or edit a property, the Help Line displays a brief
description for it.
Error Message Displays the last active error message. PowerStation includes a number of error-
checking modules. When you run studies, an output error report is generated if data
inconsistencies are found. From this report, if you double- click on an error message,
PowerStation brings up the editor for the element, which generates the error and
displays the error message in the Help Line.
Revision Data The active Revision Data is displayed here for your reference.
Grid
Select the Grid command from the View Menu or click on the Grid button to display grid lines on the
one-line diagram. The grid is zoom-dependent and will be enlarged or reduced proportionately with the
elements when they are enlarged or reduced. The grid size can be changed from Edit Display Options.

Continuity Check

The Continuity Check can be activated or de-activated from the View Menu or by clicking on the
Continuity Check button for individual presentations. If the Continuity Check is on, PowerStation
determines which element in a presentation is energized. An energized element is an element, which is
connected by an uninterrupted path to a swing source (generator or utility). Elements, which are not
energized, are displayed in gray on your screen.

Out of Service elements are displayed in gray if the Continuity Check is on, otherwise only their
annotations are displayed in gray. Motors and loads with Spare status are always shown with gray
annotations.

PowerStation determines whether every branch in your system is energized or hot. An energized branch
has an uninterrupted path from an energized bus to another bus. A branch that is not connected to one
energized bus is considered de-energized. A branch is considered hot if it has one uninterrupted path to
an energized bus but its other terminal is not connected to another bus. When you run studies only
energized buses, branches, and loads are considered. De-energized elements, along with their
connections, can be printed in gray, black, or not printed at all. You can choose to print de-energized
elements from Print Options.
5.2.4 Project Menu

The options available in Project Menu are used to set parameters and options that affect the whole project.
This includes information such as system frequency, unit system, and names of loading categories, etc. It
is highly recommended that you review and modify this information before you create your one-line
diagram. The Project Menu for the One-Line Diagram and Project View Menu Bars offers the
following commands:

Information Provides a dialog box to enter general project information
Standards Provides a dialog box to select project standards
Settings Provides a list of project settings
Options Provides a dialog box to specify project options
PowerPlot Path Provides a dialog box to specify the location of the PowerPlot program
Information

With the exception of Comments, all project information is printed as part of the header for the output
reports. The Study Case ID and 2nd line of the remarks are obtained from the Study Case Editor. An
example of an output report header is shown below.

Project: Tutorial Example Page: 14
Location: Lake Forest, California Date: Feb. 1, 98
Contract: 12345678 SN: 85OTI30125
Engineer: Operation Technology, Inc. Study Case: 100 A File: Test
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
This info is printed on top of every output report, 1
st
remark line (120 characters)
2nd line of remarks (entered from Study Case Editor; specific to that particular study case)

Any information specified in these fields is for project identification only and is not crucial to performing
any type of analysis. The Remarks 1st Line field is common to all studies and is printed on all output
reports.
Standards
When you select Standards, the following display box is provided:

Standard
Set the project Standard as either ANSI or IEC. Setting the project Standard will determine some of the
project defaults. Depending on whether you select ANSI or IEC Standard, PowerStation uses different
element symbols by changing the Edit Toolbar and sets the defaults for some properties and studies, such
as the short-circuit method. Note that after you change the standard, the new standard is used as the
default for any new element that you add to the one-line diagram.

However, you can change the symbols of individual elements or groups of elements from ANSI to IEC or
from IEC to ANSI by right-clicking on the one-line diagram. You can also reset the short-circuit study
method (ANSI or IEC Standards) for any study case. The study method can be changed in the Study
Case dialog box.
Frequency
Here you can enter the electrical system frequency in Hertz (Hz). Acceptable values are from 1 to 999
Hz. The system frequency is used when you run transient stability and harmonic studies. The system
frequency is also used to correct the line and cable reactances and susceptances when these values are
obtained from the libraries. For example, if the system frequency is set to 50 Hz and the frequency of the
cable library is 60 Hz, the cable positive and zero sequence reactances are multiplied by 5/6 and
susceptances are multiplied by 6/5. It is important that you set the system frequency correctly prior to
entering data into PowerStation.
Unit System (English, Metric)
The unit system entered here determines the display attributes used for underground cable systems but
will not change the defaults for the one-line elements. The defaults for the system elements are set when
you create a new project. That is why PowerStation asks you to select a unit system at the time you are
creating a new project file. Note that you can edit the defaults for any element to meet your specific
requirements.
Date Format
You can use any one of the following formats for printing the date on the output report header:

USA mm-dd-yyyy 11-23-1996
Europe dd-mm-yyyy 23-11-1996
Japan, China yyyy-mm-dd 1996-11-23
Literal mm dd, yyyy Nov 23, 1996
Settings

The Project Settings menu option allows you to select one of the following commands from a submenu
to modify:

Revision Data
Loading Categories
Duty Cycle Categories
Starting Categories
Load Priority
Data Type
User-Defined Fields
Cable Ampacity MF
Panel Code Factors

Revision Data
By selecting Revision Data, you may assign names (up to 12 characters) to each revision level of Data,
except for the Base Data. You may assign customized names to any revision level at any time when
running the project.

Loading Categories
By selecting Loading Category, you can customize the name of any of the 10 loading categories provided
by PowerStation. You can change these names at any time when running the project. Each name may be
up to 12 characters.

When you run load flow or motor starting, PowerStation uses the percent loading of the specified loading
category to calculate the operating power factor and efficiency of motors and static loads from the values
of power factor and efficiency specified at 100%, 75%, and 50% loading. This is accomplished by using
a curve fitting technique with a maximum of 100% for power factor and efficiency. The calculated power
factor and efficiency are then used to calculate the operating kW and kvar loading, as well as the feeder
losses, if an equipment cable with a non-zero length is specified for the load.

Duty Cycle Categories
Here you can modify (change) the names of duty cycles. PowerStation provides five duty cycles for DC
loads for the purpose of battery sizing.

Starting Categories
Motor starting categories provide PowerStation with various percent loading at the starting time of
motors. From this dialog box you can customize the name of each starting category for your reference.
Each name may be up to 12 characters.

Starting Categories are a useful tool for group (gang) starting or acceleration of motors. They are also
used for setting the starting and final loading of each individual motor under different starting conditions.
When a motor is started, the general practice is to reduce the load on that motor until it reaches the final
speed and then increase the load to the required operating level. Starting and final percent loading
provides modeling of this adjustment in the motor load. These values are entered as a percent of the
motor full load current in the motor editors.

Load Priority
Motor and load priorities provide you with various options from which motors can be prioritized. From
this dialog box, you can customize the name of each of the 10 load priorities. Each name may be up to 12
characters.

From the Motor or Static Load Editor, you can select and assign a Load Priority to the motor or static
load.
Data Type
There are a total of 10 Data Types. The name of each type can be customized from this dialog box. Each
name may be up to 12 characters.

This field provides a convenient way to track data entry for motors and static loads. Select one of the data
types (such as estimate, typical, vendor, final, etc.) from the list box and as the data is updated, this field
can be changed to reflect the source of the latest data.

User-Defined Fields
These fields are provided for various elements and can be custom named using up to 12 characters.

User-Defined Fields are available for motor and static loads in the Remarks page of their respective
editors.
Cable Ampacity App. MF
Cable Ampacity Application Multiplication Factors are provided for a number of typical applications of
motors, loads, etc.

From this dialog box you can change the MF for the typical application and for an additional 4 user-
defined applications. From the Ampacity page of the Motor, Static Load, and Cable editors, you can
select one of these applications for cable ampacity and/or voltage drop calculations.
Panel Code Factors
The Panel Code Factors are used to specify the continuous code demand load, connected non-continuous
code demand load, and the total connected code demand load parameters.

The Panel Code Factors dialog box includes 14 fixed load type devices, and 10 user defined load type
devices that could be customized according to specific user applications. For more details concerning the
calculation of the parameters shown in the dialog box, please see Chapter (29), Power Panel Systems.
Options
The Project Options dialog box allows you to select options specific to your project.

AutoSave
AutoSave will save your project automatically every X minutes, where X is the number of minutes you
have specified in this dialog box. The AutoSave default time is 30 minutes and can be changed at any
time.
Prompt Before Saving Project
Selecting this option initiates a message that asks for confirmation before saving your project.
Reload Last Project
If you select this option, PowerStation automatically reloads the last project opened whenever
PowerStation is started.
Confirm Before Saving Editor Changes
This option will display a message asking for confirmation before saving editor changes when you
navigate inside the editors.

Display Changed Data in Red
Changed or modified data appears in red typeface in the property editors if this option is selected. After a
user (with Checker access level) checks (validates) the data, the data is then displayed in black typeface.
Save Project
PowerStation will prompt you before saving the project if you have checked the Prompt before saving
project option from the Project Option dialog box.

From this prompt dialog box, you can set the time interval for autosaving, disable/enable autosaving, and
decide if you want to be prompted before PowerStation saves your project.

Saving connections for external use means that the bus connections for branches, loads, and sources will
be written in the property tables along with the other properties of the elements. If you do not check this
option, the property tables of the elements will not include the bus connections, or they may indicate the
wrong bus connections if you change the connections from the one-line diagram and do not save them
into the property tables again. Note that the bus connection information in the property tables is for
external use and is not read or used by PowerStation.
PowerPlot Path
You can specify the PowerPlot project file that you want to integrate and interface with a PowerStation
project.

PowerPlot Path
Path
Enter the path for the PowerPlot program. For example, C:\PowerPlot v.2.5. Browse can be used to find
the PowerPlot directory.
PowerPlot Project
Name
Enter up to thirty alphanumeric characters for the PowerPlot Project Name. The program will create a
PowerPlot project file by this name and will add the time-current curves that you wish to save to the
indicated project file. This project file, that has the extension of .plt, will be located in the path specified
in this editor.
Path
Enter the path for the PowerPlot project file. You can also browse to find your PowerPlot project
directory. The Program by default assigns the PowerPlot project path. However, the PowerPlot path can
be selected to be on any location on your system.
Update Short-Circuit Values
Select this option to automatically transfer the following data to the PowerPlot program:

Momentary Symmetrical Fault Currents for balanced faults (ANSI)
Phase a Symmetrical Fault Currents for unbalanced (L-G) faults (ANSI)
Peak Currents (Ip) for balanced faults (IEC)
Phase a Symmetrical Fault Currents for unbalanced (L-G) faults (IEC)
System voltage levels

Note that if a device is not connected to a faulted bus there will be no transfer of short-circuit current
value to that device.

When this option is selected and you edit any of the protective devices in the Relay Coordination (RC)
mode, nominal bus voltages and fault currents of the last saved short-circuit results will be transferred to
the PowerPlot database and will be displayed in the device editors.

Note that the selection of this option does not automatically update short-circuit currents and bus voltages
for protective devices which already exist in PowerPlot. To update all devices, click on the Update
PowerPlot with SC kA Bus kV button on the Relay Coordination Toolbar.

The following data, if applicable, also transfers to PowerPlot every time you open an existing curve or
create a new curve:

Current transformer ratings
Trip device types
Relay types
Transformer data
Cable data
Motor data
5.2.5 Library Menu

The Library Menu for the One-Line Diagram Menu Bar offers the following commands:

Cable Open the Cable Library
Cable Fire Protection Open the Cable Fire Protection Libraries
Motor Nameplate Open the Model Nameplate Library
Motor CKT Model Open the Motor Model Library
Motor Characteristic Model Open the Motor Characteristic Library
Motor Load Model Open the Motor Load Library
Fuse Open the Fuse Library
High Voltage Circuit Breaker Open the High Voltage Circuit Breaker Library
Low Voltage Circuit Breaker Open the Low Voltage Circuit Breaker Library
Battery Open the Battery Library
Harmonic Open the Harmonic Model Library
Overload Heater Open the Overload Heater Library
Interruption Cost Open Interruption Cost Library
Reliability Open Reliability Library
Convert ETAP DOS Lib Convert ETAP DOS libraries
Open Open a new PowerStation library
Save Save a PowerStation library
Save As Save a PowerStation library as a new library
Create Create a PowerStation library
Purge Purge a PowerStation library
Export Export library data for printing. Library data is printed using
Crystal Reports formats.

For more information see Chapter 12, Libraries.
5.2.6 Defaults Menu

Annotation fonts, default display options, and default properties of elements can be set from this menu
item. It is advisable to go though your options for each relevant editor in the defaults section before
creating your one-line diagram and underground raceway system.

PowerStation maintains default values for each element in the project database. As each new element is
created, PowerStation initializes the element with these default values. You may modify the default
properties of any element through the Defaults Menu. PowerStation will then use the modified values to
initialize each new element.

The Defaults Menu for One-Line Diagram offers the following commands:

Fonts Annotation fonts for element information and study results Section 6.4)
Display Options Edit Defaults Display Options (Section 6.3)
One-Line Diagram Edit the default name of a One-Line Diagram
Bus Edit defaults for Bus properties
Branch Edit defaults for Cable, Impedance, Reactor, Transmission Line,
Transformer, and 3-W transformer properties
Load/Motor Edit defaults for Ind. Machine, Synch. Motor, Lump Load, Static
Load, Capacitor, and MOV properties
Source Edit defaults for Utility and Synch. Generator properties
Panel Edit defaults for panel schedule, load information, panel information.
Phase Adapter Edit defaults for the phase adapter, load connected to Phase Adapter
Switching Device Edit defaults for Fuse, HV Circuit Breaker, LV Circuit Breaker,
Contactor, SPST Switch, SPDT Switch, and Overcurrent Relay properties
Meter Edit defaults for Ammeter, Voltmeter, and Multi-Meter properties
Relays Edit defaults for Relay properties
Instrument
Transformer
Edit defaults for Current Transformer (CT) and Potential Transformer
(PT) properties
Composite Network Edit the default name of a Composite Network
Composite Motor Edit the default name of a Composite Motor
AC-DC Interface Edit defaults for AC-DC Interface elements
DC Component Edit defaults for DC Components

5.2.7 Tools Menu
This menu is provided to control and change the one-line diagram graphics in a global manner.

Size
This command will globally change the size of the selected elements in the one-line diagram. Global size
change can also be done using the right-click pop-up menu.
Symbols
This command will globally change the symbols of the selected elements in the one-line diagram to ANSI
or to IEC symbols.
Orientation
This command will change the orientation of a selected element in the one-line diagram to 0, 90, 180, or
270 degrees.
Group
This command will group the selected elements in the one-line diagram into one group. Grouped
elements can be selected by selecting any one of the elements in the group. Note that each element can
belong to one group only. To add elements to an existing group, click on a member of the group in the
one-line diagram, then select the other elements by holding down the Control key and clicking the left
mouse button, then clicking on the Group command. Grouping can also be done using the right-click
pop-up menu.
Ungroup
This command will ungroup the selected elements in the one-line diagram. Ungrouping can also be done
using the right-click pop-up menu.
Use Default Annot. Position
This command will set the position of the annotations of the selected elements in the one-line diagram to
their default position. This command can also be done using the right-click pop-up menu. Note that you
can set the default annotation position of each element by selecting the element and using the right-click
pop-up menu.
5.2.8 RevControl Menu
This menu item allows you to switch between different Revision Data and to manage them. PowerStation
provides 16 different levels of engineering properties (Base Data plus 15 Revision Data) for each element.
Base Data is the default data supplied by PowerStation. If you wish to modify your project data but do
not wish to modify the Base Data, you may activate a revision.

While in a Revision Data level, you cannot save the project. To save the project, switch to Base Data.
You can rename the revisions from the Project Menu\Settings\Revision Data.

Activate Activate Base or a Revision Data
Merge to Merge data to another revision
Purge Purge a revision

Activate

This option is provided to activate Base Data or any one of the 15 Revision Data. Once a revision
level is selected (activated), any subsequent modification of engineering properties made from the
property editors will be reflected in that revision level only.

Base Data is the default data supplied by PowerStation. If you wish to modify your project data but do
not wish to modify the Base Data, you may activate a revision.
Base Data
You can activate Base Data with any access level; however, you can change the engineering properties of
the elements only if you log on as a Project or Base Editor. You may save the project when Base Data is
active. Base Data is the default data supplied by PowerStation and cannot be purged.
Revision Data
When you log on as Revision Editor, you need to activate one of the Revision Data in order to change the
engineering properties and run What If studies. To save your changes, you must first switch the Base
Data since you CANNOT save the project while in a revision level. You can rename the revisions (all 15
Revision Data) from the Project Menu\Settings\Revision Data.
Merge To

You may merge any Revision Data level, including the Base Data, to any Revision Data level. Merging
to a Revision Data level will combine all data in the active Revision Data with the selected Revision Data
level.

When you merge from an active Revision Data to another Revision Data (Revision Data 1 to Revision
Data 2, for example), the new Revision Data 2 will now consist of elements that existed in both
Revisions. Revision Data will overwrite engineering properties of elements that are common to both
Revision Data 1 and 2. You cannot merge a revision into itself.
Merging to Base Data
With Project Editor or Base Editor access level, you can merge any Revision Data to the Base Data. No
other access levels can modify the Base Data.
Purge

You CANNOT purge the Base Data; however, you may purge Revision Data levels. Purging any
Revision Data will delete all changes that exist in that Revision Data from the project permanently.
Purging a Revision Data is equivalent to merging the Base Data into the Revision Data. Be certain you
do not need the Revision Data before proceeding.
5.2.9 Window Menu

The Window menu offers the following commands, which enable you to arrange multiple views of
multiple projects in the application window:

Cascade Arrange windows in an overlapped fashion
Tile Arrange windows in non-overlapped tiles
Arrange Icons Arrange the icons of closed windows
1, 2, 3, ... Activates specified window
Cascade
Use this command to arrange multiple opened windows in an overlapped fashion.
Tile
Use this command to vertically arrange multiple opened windows in a non-overlapped (side-by-side)
fashion.
Arrange Icons
Use this command to arrange the icons for minimized windows at the bottom of the main window. If
there is an open project window at the bottom of the main window, then some or all of the icons may not
be visible because they are underneath this project window.
1, 2, 3, ...
PowerStation displays a list of currently open project windows at the bottom of the Window menu. A
checkmark appears in front of the project name of the active window. Choose a project from this list to
make its window active.
5.2.10 Help Menu

This option enables you to learn about functions and concepts in PowerStation. The Help shortcut button
creates a question mark that can be used to point to an area for which you have a question or would like
more details on. This includes being able to select keywords in the Project Menu Bar. The entire
contents of this User Guide are included in the Help file.

The Help Menu offers the following commands, which provide assistance for this application:

Help Search Offers you an index to topics on which you can get help
About ETAP PowerStation Displays the version number of PowerStation

Help Search
Use this command to display the opening screen of Help. From this screen, you can jump to step-by-step
instructions for using PowerStation and various types of reference information. Once you open Help, you
can click on the Contents button to return to the opening screen. You can also use Index to search for
information on a specific topic.
About PowerStation

Use this command to display the copyright notice, version number of your copy of ETAP PowerStation,
and important information about contacting OTI.
Menu Bars Project View Menu Bar
5.3 Project View Menu Bar
The Project View Menu Bar is displayed when the Project View is active.

The Project View Menu Bar contains a comprehensive collection of menu options, which are almost the
same as those for the One-Line Diagram Menu Bar. The items that are different in this menu bar are
Change Password in the File Menu and Display Options in the Defaults Menu. This menu bar offers the
following menus:

File Menu File management and conversions
RevControl Menu Base and Revision Data control

Note that most of the menu commands for the Project View Menu Bar are the same as those for the One-
Line Diagram Menu Bar. Menu items that are not common with the One-line diagram Menu Bar are
explained here. For details on common commands, refer to Section 5.2.
5.3.1 File Menu
The File Menu option from the Project View Menu Bar provides commands to open/close project files,
logoff/on users, save/copy project files, and convert ETAP DOS or CSV files to PowerStation files.

Menu Bars Project View Menu Bar
The File Menu for the Project View Menu Bar offers the following commands:

Close Project Close an opened project
Copy Project To Save an opened project to a specified file name and continue to function
within the original project
Convert to Metafile Convert the one-line diagram into WMF or EMF files
Convert ETAP DOS File Convert an ETAP DOS file into a PowerStation project file
Convert from CSV File Convert a comma separated file into a PowerStation project file
Change Password Change the password for the project file
Log Off Logoff and on to an opened project file as a different user or change
access levels
Change Password

If the password option for a project in enabled, each user can change their password by using this
command from the File Menu on the Project View Menu Bar. The password requirement for a project is
enabled or disabled from the User Manager dialog box when you logon as an Administrator.

Menu Bars UGS Menu Bar
5.4 Underground Raceway System Menu Bar
The Underground Raceway System (UGS) Menu Bar is displayed when an U/G raceway presentation is
active.

The UGS Menu Bar contains a comprehensive collection of menus that are listed here:

File Menu File management and printing
Edit Menu Cut, copy, and paste
RevControl Menu Base and Revision Data control

Note that many of the menu commands for the UGS Menu Bar are the same as those for the One-Line
Diagram Menu Bar. Menu items that are not common with the One-line diagram Menu Bar are
explained here. For details on common commands, refer to Section 5.2.
5.4.1 File Menu

The File Menu for Underground Raceway System offers the following commands:

Log Off Logoff and logon as a different user or change access levels
Copy Project To Save an opened project to a specified file name and continue to function within
the original project
Save Library Save the Library file
Page Setup Select a page layout as well as a printer and printer connection
Print Preview Display the one-line diagram on the screen as it would appear printed
Print Print the one-line diagram

5.4.2 Edit Menu

The Edit Menu for Underground Raceway System offers the following commands:

Cut Delete selected element(s) in the UGS and move it to the Dumpster
Copy Copy selected element(s) in the UGS to the Dumpster
Paste Paste selected element(s) from the Dumpster into the UGS
DeSelect All Deselect all elements in the UGS
5.4.3 View Menu

The View Menu for Underground Raceway System offers the following commands:

Zoom In Show more detail
Zoom Out Show less detail
Zoom to Fit Re-sizes objects to best fit the window
Project Toolbar Show or hide the Project Toolbar
Mode Toolbar Show or hide the Mode Toolbar
Study Case Toolbar Show or hide the Study Case Toolbar
Edit Toolbar Show or hide the Edit Toolbar
Analysis Toolbar Show or hide the Analysis Toolbar
Help Line Show or hide the Help Line

5.4.4 Library Menu

The Library Menu for Underground Raceway System offers the following commands:

Cable Library Open the Cable Library
Cable Fire Protection Open the Cable Fire Protection Libraries
Convert DOS Lib Convert ETAP DOS Libraries
Open Open a new PowerStation Library
Save Save a PowerStation library
Save As Save a PowerStation library as a new library
Create Create a PowerStation library
Purge Purge a PowerStation library
Export Export library data for printing purposes. Crystal Reports formats are used
for viewing and printing library data.
5.4.5 Defaults Menu

PowerStation maintains default values for each element in the project database. As each new element is
created, PowerStation initializes the element with these default values. You may modify the default
properties of any element through the Defaults Menu. PowerStation will then use the modified values to
initialize each new element.

To save time in data entering, it is advisable to go though the defaults for each element before creating
your one-line diagram and underground raceway system.

The Defaults Menu for Underground Raceway System offers the following commands:

Display Options Select defaults for Display Options
Cable Cable Editor defaults
Heat Source External Heat Source Editor defaults
Direct Buried Raceway Direct Buried Raceway Editor defaults
Duct Bank Raceway Duct Bank Raceway Editor defaults
Conduit (duct bank) Conduit Editor defaults
Location (direct buried) Location Editor defaults
U/G System Underground Raceway System Editor defaults

Menu Bars Dumpster Menu Bar
5.5 Dumpster Menu Bar
The Dumpster Menu Bar is displayed when the System Dumpster is active. This menu bar contains the
three menus listed below:

Edit Purge or Purge All elements from the Dumpster
Window Window management
Help Help access

Note that the Window and Help Menu items for the Project View Menu Bar are the same as those for the
One-Line Diagram Menu Bar. Menu items that are not common with the one-line diagram menu bar
are explained here. For details on common commands, refer to Section 5.2.
5.5.1 Edit Menu
Purge
This option deletes the selected cell from the Dumpster permanently. All elements in the selected
Dumpster Cell will be erased from the database and cannot be recovered.
Purge All
This option deletes all cells in the system Dumpster from the Dumpster permanently. All elements in all
Dumpster Cells will be erased from the database and cannot be recovered.

ETAP

PowerStation
4.0
User Guide
Copyright 2001
All Rights Reserved





Southern California

(949) 462-0100 Sales
(949) 462-0400 Fax

Chapter 6

One-Line Diagram GUI

PowerStation provides a fully Graphical User Interface (GUI) for constructing your one-line diagram.
Here you can graphically add, delete, relocate, connect elements, zoom in or out, display grid off or on,
change element size, change element orientation, change symbols, hide or show protective devices, enter
properties, set operating status, etc.

One-Line Diagram GUI Introduction

When you create a new one-line diagram presentation, you will be placed in Edit mode with the
configuration status set to default, which is called Normal. The grid and Continuity Check are also
switched off. When you open (activate) an existing one-line diagram presentation, it opens with the
attributes, which were saved last, i.e., mode (Edit, Load Flow, Short-Circuit, Motor Starting, etc.),
configuration status, display options, view size, and view location.

When you create a new project, a one-line diagram presentation is automatically created with an ID
(name) equal to the ID of the default one-line diagram, appended with a unique number. To create a new
one-line diagram presentation in an existing project, right-click on One-Line Diagrams in the Project
View, as shown below.

The ID (name) of a one-line diagram presentation can be changed either from the Project View (expand
the presentations tree, right-click on One-Line Diagram, and select properties), or by double-clicking in
the background of the one-line diagram presentation.

PowerStations one-line diagram is a one-line representation of a balanced three-phase system. The one-
line diagram is the starting point for all studies. You can graphically construct your electrical system by
connecting the buses, branches, motors, generators, and protective devices in any order from the One-
Line Diagram Edit Toolbar. You can connect the elements to the buses graphically or from their editors.
You can double-click on elements to open their editors and edit the engineering properties, which include
ratings, settings, loading, connection, etc. The defaults for each element can be modified before placing
elements in the one-line diagram to minimize the data entry.
One-Line Diagram GUI Edit
6.1 Edit A One-Line Diagram
In this section, some of the most common functions of the graphical user interface for the one-line
diagram are explained. The detailed instructions provided here will assist you in creating and editing
your one-line diagram presentation.
6.1.1 Mouse And Keyboard Functions
Key
A key on the keyboard is represented by its name enclosed in a pair of triangular brackets. For example,
the Control key is represented by <Ctrl>.
Click
Place the mouse cursor on an object or button, and then click the left mouse button. Click is used to
select an element in the one-line diagram, add elements from the toolbars, etc.
Right-Click
Place the mouse cursor on the object, and then click the right mouse button. For example, right-
clicking on an element in the one-line diagram brings up a menu.
Double-Click
Place the mouse cursor on an object or button, and then click the left mouse button twice rapidly. For
example, a double-click on an element inside a one-line diagram brings up the property editor for that
element. For composite networks and motors, double-clicking brings up the nested one-line diagram for
that composite element.
<Ctrl> + Click
Place the mouse cursor on the object, then, while pressing the <Ctrl> key down, click the left mouse
button. Use <Ctrl> + click to select or deselect one-line diagram elements.
<Shift> + <Ctrl> + Click
Place the mouse cursor on a cable; then, while pressing the <Shift> and <Ctrl> keys down, click the
left mouse button to drag a cable from the one-line diagram to a UGS (U/G Raceway System) or vice
versa. Use <Shift> + <Ctrl> + click to place one-line cables in conduits or locations in the underground
raceways.
Drag
Place the mouse cursor on an element, click and hold the left button down, drag the mouse to the
required position while keeping the left button down, then release the left button to place the element.
Rubber-Band
The mouse cursor should not be on any element; click and hold the left button down. Drag the mouse
to the required position while keeping the left button down, and then release the left button. You will see
a rectangle marked with dotted lines indicating the area that you have selected. This is used for selecting
a group of elements.
6.1.2 Add Elements
Every element in PowerStation requires a unique ID. PowerStation includes a Name Manager class,
which insures that the ID of all elements, presentations, configuration status, study cases, underground
raceway systems, etc. are unique. When you add a new element, the Name Manager automatically
assigns an ID to it by appending a number to the default ID of that element.

Bus ID = (Default ID) + (A Unique Number) = Bus + 1 = Bus1

When you add an element, it is initialized with the default values. You can modify the default values for
each element by either selecting Defaults from the menu bar or from the components list in the Project
View.
Add One Element
Click on an element symbol on the Edit Toolbar, then drag the cursor to the one-line diagram and click to
drop it.
Add Multiple Elements
Double-click on an element on the Edit Toolbar to add multiple copies of the same element to the one-line
diagram.

To add an element to your one-line diagram, click on any button on the Edit Toolbar, which changes the
cursor shape to the elements picture. Now you can drag and drop that element in any position on the
one-line diagram by clicking the mouse. After dropping the element, the cursor goes back to its original
arrow shape. If you double-click on the Edit Toolbar, you can drop multiple copies of the same element
in the one-line diagram.

Rules
Elements can be added only in Edit mode, i.e., they CANNOT be added in any study mode.
Elements can be added when Base Data is active, i.e., they CANNOT be added when any Revision
Data is active.
6.1.3 Select & Deselect Elements
Click on an element to select it. Click anywhere in the one-line diagram or underground raceway system
to deselect the element. Use <Ctrl>+Click to select or deselect any element.

To select an element, click the left mouse button while the cursor (arrow shape) is on top of the element.
When an element is selected, it is shown in red. To select multiple elements, you either press
<Ctrl>+click to add or delete elements to the selected group, or rubber-band a group of elements.
To rubber-band a group of elements, click the left mouse button where there is no element and drag the
mouse. It will show you a dotted rectangle. When the mouse is released, all elements completely inside
the rectangle will turn red.

To select a group of elements, rubber-band the elements or the whole one-line diagram. <Ctrl>+Click to
select other elements or deselect elements from the rubber-banded group.

When an element is selected, its color is shown in red. Deselected AC elements are displayed in black
and DC elements in blue.
6.1.4 Element & Connector Colors
You can customize the colors of all elements and connectors by setting their colors in the INI file. The
following default colors are used for different operating modes:

Mode Element
Continuity
Check Condition Color Comment
All AC Device On Energized Black
All AC Device On De-Energized Gray
All AC Device Off Any Black
Including motors,
loads, and branch
ckts.

All DC On Energized Blue
All DC On De-Energized Gray
All DC Off Any Blue
Including motors,
loads, and branch
ckts.

All 3 Bus On Energized Black Solid Line
All 3 Bus On De-Energized Gray Solid Line
All 3 Bus Off Any Black Solid Line

All 1 Branch On Energized Green Dotted Line
All 1 Branch On De-Energized Gray Solid Line
All 1 Branch Off Any Black Solid Line

All 1, 3 Wire
Branch
On Energized Bright Green Dotted Line
All 1, 3 Wire
Branch
On De-Energized Gray Solid Line
All 1, 3 Wire
Branch
Off Any Black Solid Line

Run Studies Bus On/Off Error Magenta Base Kv Problem
Load Flow Bus On/Off Alarm Red Critical Limits,
Overload
Load Flow Bus On/Off Warning Magenta Marginal Limits
Short Circuit Bus On/Off Fault Dark Red Faulted Bus
Short Circuit PD On/Off Alarm Red Overstressed

6.1.5 Relocate Elements
To drag an element or group of elements, first select the elements that you want to move. Selected
elements are shown in blue. Move the cursor on top of the selected elements, click and hold the left
mouse button, place them in the desired position, and release the button.
Relocate a Single Element
Select an element and move the cursor on top of it; the cursor becomes a move symbol. Drag the element
to a new position and release the left button.
Relocate a Group of Elements
Select the elements that you want to relocate, move the cursor on top of the selected elements so it
becomes a move symbol, and then drag the selected elements to a new position.
6.1.6 Connect Elements
Each element has one or more (up to 20) pins. A pin is a graphical tool (represented by a small, red
square indicating the connection point) to connect elements together. The following is a list of elements
and their pins:

Sources (synchronous generator, power grid, and battery) have one pin.

Loads (synchronous motors, induction machines, DC motors, static loads, MOVs, capacitors, filters,
etc.) have one pin.
Branches (two-winding transformers, lines, cables, impedances, reactors, etc.), protective devices
(high & low voltage circuit breakers, fuses), and relays have two pins.
Three-winding, potential, and current transformers have three pins.
Switching devices have two pins.
Double-throw switches have three pins.
Overcurrent relays and ammeters have two pins.
Voltmeters, voltage relays, and frequency relays have one pin.
Composite motors have one pin.
Composite networks have up to 20 (4, 8,12,16, & 20) pins.
Converters (DC converters, chargers, inverters) have two pins.
Buses are considered to be one long pin (continuous pins along their length).
Connect Element to Bus
Place the cursor over the pin of an element (pin appears in red). Click and drag the mouse to a bus.
When the bus turns red, release the left button.
Drag an element and place its pin on a bus.
Drop a new element with its pin on top of a bus.
Buses are considered to be one long pin. Connections are always made from elements to buses.
Relays cannot be connected to buses.
Only one pin of an element can be connected to the same bus.
Connect Element to Element
You can graphically connect elements by moving the cursor to the end of an element until the connection
pin is highlighted red. Click and drag the mouse to a bus or protective device and release the mouse
button when the bus or the connecting pin is also red.

Place the cursor on the pin of an element. Click and drag the mouse to the element you want to
connect. When the latter elements pin turns red, release the left button.

Drag & drop a protective device with its pin placed on top of the pin of any branch or load element.
Drag & drop a protective device onto a connection.
Branches CANNOT be connected to each other; PowerStation automatically inserts a bus between
them.

Branches CANNOT be connected to loads, utilities, composite motors, and composite networks.

Relays can only be connected to current transformers (CT) or other relays.
You CANNOT directly connect two buses with a connector or current transformer.

The Remote Connector
Two sections, section 1 and section 2, form the Remote Connector element. The Remote Connector
makes it possible to connect elements together which are located in completely separate areas of the
project, without the need to run a long, continuous branch circuit cable connector between them. Please
see the figure below.

The Remote Connector Find Feature
The Find Other End feature associated with the Remote Connector allows the user to quickly locate all
elements connected to either section 1 or section 2 of the Remote Connector. Right click on either section
of the Remote Connector, and select Find Other End from the menu. The Program will automatically
locate the other section of the Remote Connector, regardless of its location in the One-Line Diagram.

Insert Protective Devices (PD)
You can insert protective devices in any connector path by dragging and dropping it on top of the
connector. There is no limit to the number of protective devices that can be inserted and connected
together. If a connector is horizontal, the orientation of the protective device is automatically changed to
180 degrees and inserted in the connector path.

In this example, a circuit breaker and fuse are inserted between Bus1 and T1.

6.1.7 Cut, Copy & Paste
Cut (Delete)
Elements, along with their connectors, can be cut (deleted) from the one-line diagram and placed in the
Dumpster. There are four methods to cut selected elements.

Select Cut from the right-click menu

Click on Edit on the menu bar and select Cut
Click on the Cut button in the Project Toolbar
Press the Delete key on your keyboard

Cutting a transformer using the right-click menu

Rules
Elements can be cut in Edit mode only when Base Data is active.

Elements have to be selected before cutting.
To cut a connection, the connection has to be selected (click on it).
When a protective device in a connecting path is cut, the connector remains intact.
Hidden protective devices become visible when a connector is cut.
Section 1 and section 2 of the Remote Connector must be cut at the same time.

When an element or group of elements is placed in the Dumpster, PowerStation forms a new Dumpster
Cell to hold them. PowerStation assigns the name of the Dumpster Cell. When you cut an element or a
group of elements, they are deleted from the one-line diagram and placed in the Dumpster with the same
ID. The connections, properties, and status of the deleted elements are preserved.
Copy
Elements, along with their connectors, can be copied into the Dumpster by one of three methods:

Right-click on an element and select Copy
Click on Edit in the Menu bar, and select Copy
Click on the Copy button on the Project Toolbar

Rules
Elements can be copied in Edit mode only when Base Data is active
Elements CANNOT be copied in a Revision Data
You CANNOT copy a connector with hidden protective devices
Section 1 and section 2 of the Remote Connector must be copied at the same time.

When an element or group of elements is placed in the Dumpster, PowerStation forms a new Dumpster
Cell to hold them. PowerStation assigns the name of the Dumpster Cell. When you copy an element or
group of elements, they get copied into the Dumpster with new IDs. The connections, properties, and
status of the duplicated elements in the Dumpster are preserved.

Paste
Use the Paste command to copy the selected cell from the Dumpster into the one-line diagram. Elements
can be pasted from the Dumpster by three methods:

Right-click on the one-line diagram and select Paste at the cursor location
Click on Edit in the menu bar and select Paste at the cursor location
Click on the Paste button on the Project Toolbar to paste at the top left corner of the one-line diagram

Rules
Paste can be done only in Edit mode when the Base Data is active.
Paste CANNOT be done if there are no Cells (element groups) in the Dumpster.
Paste will copy the active Dumpster Cell into the one-line diagram. You can change the active Cell
by opening the Dumpster presentation (from the Project View) and clicking on the Cell ID. When
you cut or copy elements to the Dumpster, the newly created Dumpster Cell becomes the active Cell.
Dumpster Cells are not deleted after pasting.
You cannot copy part of a Dumpster Cell; the entire contents of a Cell are pasted.
You can paste the contents of any Dumpster Cell into any Composite Network. However, you cannot
paste Cells that contain buses and branches into Composite Motors.
Section 1 and section 2 of the Remote Connector must be pasted at the same time.

When you paste a Dumpster Cell, it gets copied into the one-line diagram with a new ID. The
connections, properties, and status of the pasted elements are preserved.
Move From Dumpster
Elements can be moved from the Dumpster into the one-line diagram with the same IDs by two methods:

Right-click on the one-line diagram and select Move From
Click on Edit on the Menu Bar and select Move From

Rules
Move From Dumpster can be done only in Edit mode when Base Data is active.
Move CANNOT be done if there are no Cells (element groups) in the Dumpster.
When you move a Dumpster Cell to the one-line diagram, the desired Cell needs to be active and it
gets deleted from the Dumpster after being moved.
You can move any Dumpster Cell you desire by making it active from the Dumpster presentation.
When you cut or copy elements to the Dumpster, the newly created Dumpster Cell becomes the active
Cell.
You cannot move part of a Dumpster Cell; the entire contents of a Cell are moved.
You can move any Dumpster Cell into any Composite Network. However, you cannot move Cells
that contain buses and branches into a Composite Motor.
Section 1 and section 2 of the Remote Connector must be moved from the dumpster at the same time.

When you move the contents of a Dumpster Cell into the one-line diagram, the IDs of the moved
elements, along with the connections, status, and properties are preserved.
6.1.8 Size, Symbol & Orientation
Element Size
When an element is added into the one-line diagram, its default size is 3. To change it to another size,
right-click on the element to bring up a menu. Use the Size command to select a size (1,2,3,4, or 5). The
drawing below shows a three-winding transformer that is changed from size 1 to size 5.

Element Symbol
There are two graphic symbols (ANSI & IEC) available for one-line diagram elements. The symbols for
some elements, such as buses, are the same for both standards. Symbols can be set for newly added
elements or changed for any existing element.
Symbol of New Elements
When you add elements to the one-line diagram, PowerStation uses the Project Standard for the ANSI or
IEC symbol of the new element. Note that the Edit Toolbar also reflects the selected Project Standard.
Change Symbol of Existing Elements
Right-click on an element to bring up the menu, use the Symbols command, and then select ANSI or IEC.

Element Rotation
To change the orientation of an element you need to right-click on the element to bring up a menu. Use
the Orientation command, then select one of the orientations (0, 90, 180, or 270).

Rules
When an element is added, its orientation is based on the system default as follows:
Buses are added at 0 degrees
Composite networks are added at 90 degrees and do not rotate
Protective devices are added or inserted based on the orientation of the connections
All other elements are added at 90 degrees
6.1.9 Protective Devices
Protective Device Status
Circuit breakers, fuses, relays, potential transformers, and current transformers are considered protective
devices. However, only switching devices (circuit breakers, switches, contactors, and fuses) have status
(open or closed). Note that when you change the status of a circuit breaker, you are changing it for the
active Configuration Status. When you switch to another configuration, the status may be different. This
statement is also true for the status of motors, MOVs, and loads.

Status can be changed by using the right-click menu or from the editor.

From the right-click menu
Right-click on a circuit breaker in the one-line diagram to open the menu, and use the Closed
command. The check mark () means the status of the circuit breaker is closed. If you click on it, the
check will disappear and the status of the circuit breaker will become Open. For a normally open
protective device, a NO (Normally Open) annotation is shown in the one-line diagram.
To close an open circuit breaker, use the Close command. The check will appear next to Closed in
the menu and NO will disappear from the one-line diagram.

From the Editor
To change the status of a circuit breaker from its editor, open its editor and click on Closed or Open in
Configuration Status.

Hide Protective Devices (PD)
Protective devices (circuit breakers, fuses, current transformers, switches, contactors, potential
transformers, meters, and relays) can be made invisible for each individual one-line diagram presentation.
For example, one presentation can be your relay view where all protective devices are displayed. Another
presentation can be for load flow studies where you may not want to show any protective devices.

Protective devices can be hidden (not visible in the one-line diagram) individually or in groups.
Hiding Protective Devices
Select a protective device from the one-line diagram and right-click on it to open the menu, and then click
on Visible. The protective device will become hidden and will be shown as a red diamond on the
connector when the connector is selected. The red diamond is an indicator for hidden elements and
appears whenever you click on the connector.

Select one or more protective devices, right-click on the background, then select Hide All PDs to hide all
selected protective devices.

Rules
A protective device with one end open (one pin not connected to any element) cannot be hidden.
You CANNOT copy a one-line diagram with hidden protective devices.
A potential transformer (PT) can be hidden only if both pins located on the primary (line) side of the
PT are connected to elements
If a one-line diagram with hidden protective devices is cut or deleted, the protective devices will be
visible in the Dumpster.
Protective devices CANNOT be hidden in the Dumpster.
Protective devices can be hidden or visible regardless of their status.

Showing Protective Devices
Select a connection with a hidden protective device. The hidden protective device will be shown as a red
diamond on the connector. Right-click on the hidden protective device (switch S1) to open the menu and
select Show PD.

After selecting one or more connectors with hidden protective devices, right-click anywhere on the one-
line diagram where there is no element, then click on Show All PDs.

Sometimes there are two or more hidden protective devices on one connection. If you decrease the length
of the connection, then the hidden protective devices are shown as two small, red diamonds next to each
other. In this case, if you repeat one of the above methods, it will make all the protective devices visible
on this connection. To avoid this, stretch the connection by separating the two elements connected to
these protective devices.

Rules on Show All PDs
On a connection with one or more hidden protective devices, there is no need to select or rubber-band
the connection. Place the cursor on the connection and right-click to open the menu, then click on
Show All PDs.
If there are any composite networks or motors within the rubber-banded area, the protective devices
inside of these composites will not be affected.
Hide or Show all PDs is specific to each one-line diagram presentation.
6.1.10 Nodes & Buses
The connecting point between two branches or a motor and branch requires a bus. If this bus is not an
MCC switchgear, or if you simply do not desire to emphasize the bus on your one-line diagram, change
the symbol of the bus from a bar shape to a dot shape. Note that nodes have separate annotation options
than buses, and power flows and current are not displayed into or out of nodes.

You can use the right-click menu to change a bus to a node or vice versa.

Right-click on a Bus to open the menu and use the Node command.
To change from Node to Bus, right-click on the node in the one-line diagram. Deselect Node to
change to Bus.

6.1.11 Group & Ungroup
To group elements; first select the elements, then use the Tools menu bar or right-click, and then select
group from the drop down list. To ungroup, click on any element in the group and ungroup.

6.1.12 Composite Networks
Among PowerStations most powerful features are the composite networks. Composite networks allow
you to graphically nest network elements within themselves to any arbitrary nesting depths, i.e., a
composite network can contain, within itself, other composite networks. This feature provides you with
the capability to construct complex electrical networks while still maintaining a clean, uncluttered
diagram that displays what you want to emphasize - yet the next level of details are within easy reach of
your mouse.
Composite Networks (PowerStation 2.0 and Prior Release)
These networks have only four pins for external and internal connections. Externally, these pins can only
be connected to buses. Internally, these pins can be connected to branches.
Old Composite Network Network1 with top pin connected to bus Sub3

You can replace the old composite networks with the new ones by following these steps:

Cut all the elements inside of the old composite network.
Add a new composite network in place of the old one.
Open the new composite network.
Move the elements from the Dumpster into the new composite network.
Composite Networks (PowerStation 3.0 and Newer Release)
Composite networks have up to 20 entry points (pins). These are top pin, left pins, right pins, and bottom
pin. Externally, these pins can only be connected to elements. Once a pin gets connected to an element,
it becomes a proxy for that element, i.e., you can connect the internal pin just like you were connecting
the element to other elements.

The external pins and internal pins are the same points. They represent the connecting points of the
composite network to the outside and inside.

The internal pin of the composite network is the starting point for the composite network internal
connection. This element graphically represents the connecting point of the composite network to the
outside system. This connecting point is not considered as an element for studies.

When you open a composite network for the first time, all pins are shown in their relative positions. You
can move these internal pins anywhere inside the composite network. If there is an external connection to
a pin, the ID of the connected element is displayed. If there is no external bus connection, the pins
indicate its position (Left1, Rt5, Bot, etc.). If there is an external connection, the ID of the externally
connected element is displayed.

A Composite Network with 12 pins

You can hide the uncounted internal pins by using the right-click menu and selecting Hide Unconnected
Pins.

You may place composite networks anywhere on a one-line diagram or within other composite networks.
These nested composite networks are part of the overall one-line diagram of the system. All studies that
are run include all the elements and connections nested within all composite networks and composite
motors.

Note that when you are working with a particular one-line diagram presentation, display attributes of
composite networks and composite motors are saved along with the one-line diagram presentations, i.e.,
composite networks are treated the same as the one-line diagram.

The ID (name) of a composite network can be changed by three methods:

<Ctrl>+double-click on the composite network symbol from the one-line diagram
Open the composite network and double-click on the background where no device exists
Double-click on it from the Project View (under Components, Networks Composite) to bring up the
Composite Network Editor.

You can change the ID to any unique 12-character name from the Composite Network Editor.

The following steps are used to move a subsystem (group of elements and connections) from the one-line
diagram to a composite network:
Select the desired elements including their connections using rubber band and <Ctrl>+click
Press Delete to cut the elements into a Dumpster Cell
Activate the composite network by double-clicking on it
Right-click inside the composite network and select Move From
6.1.13 Composite Motors (AC & DC)
Composite motors are used as a tool to group motors and loads in the system. The elements you can
include inside the AC Composite Motors are:

3 Induction Motors
3 Synchronous Motors
1 Induction Motors
Static Loads
MOV
3 Lumped Loads
1 Lumped Loads
Capacitors
Filters
Circuit Breakers
Contactors
Fuses
Switches, Single Pole Single Throw
Current Transformers
Potential Transformers
Voltmeters
Ammeters
Multi-meters
Overcurrent Relays
Frequency Relays
Voltage Relays
Composite Motors

The elements you can include inside the DC Composite Motors are:

DC Motors
DC Static Loads
DC Lumped Loads
DC Elementary Diagrams
DC Circuit Breakers
DC Fuses
DC Switches, Single Throw
DC Composite Motors

The number of levels that you can nest composite motors inside composite motors is unlimited.

Composite motors have 2 single pins that can be connected externally to buses only, i.e., directly
connected to buses or indirectly through protective devices. Internally, this pin looks and behaves like the
external bus. Other than this limitation and the types of elements that you can include inside a composite
motor, the user interface characteristics of composite motors are the same as composite networks.

Here is an example of composite motor Mtr C1, which is connected to bus MCC 1 inside the composite
network Sub2.

AC Composite Motor Mtr C1 with four motors, one static load, and one composite motor
One-Line Diagram Display Options
6.2 Display Options
PowerStation allows different display options for the one-line diagram in different modes. Here we
describe the display options for Edit mode. The display options for study modes are described in their
respective sections.
6.2.1 AC Page
This page includes options for displaying info annotations for AC elements.

Color
Select the color for information annotations to be displayed on the one-line diagram.
ID
Select the check boxes under this heading to display the ID of the selected AC elements on the one-line
diagram.
Rating
Select the check boxes under this heading to display the ratings of the selected AC elements on the one-
line diagram.

Device Type Rating
Generator kW / MW
Power Grid (Utility) MVAsc
Motor HP / kW
Load / Panel kVA / MVA
Transformer kVA / MVA
Branch, Impedance Base MVA
Branch, Reactor Continuous Amps
Cable / Line # of Cables - # of Conductor / Cable - Size
Bus kA Bracing
Node Bus Bracing (kA)
CB Rated Interrupting (kA)
Fuse Interrupting (ka)
Relay 50/51 for Overcurrent Relays
PT & CT Transformer Rated Turn Ratio
kV
Select the check boxes under this heading to display the rated or nominal voltages of the selected
elements on the one-line diagram.

For cables/lines, the kV check box is replaced by the button. Click on this button to display the
cable/line conductor type on the one-line diagram.
A
Select the check boxes under this heading to display the ampere ratings (continuous or full-load ampere)
of the selected elements on the one-line diagram.

For cables/lines, the Amp check box is replaced by the button. Click on this button to display the
cable/line length on the one-line diagram.
Z
Select the check boxes under this heading to display the rated impedance of the selected AC elements on
the one-line diagram.

Device Type Impedance
Generator Subtransient reactance Xd
Power Grid (Utility) Positive Sequence Impedance in % of 100 MVA (R + j X)
Motor % LRC
Transformer Positive Sequence Impedance (R + j X per unit length)
Branch, Impedance Impedance in ohms or %
Branch, Reactor Impedance in ohms
Cable / Line Positive Sequence Impedance (R + j X in ohms or per unit length)

D-Y
Select the check boxes under this heading to display the connection types of the selected elements on the
one-line diagram.

For transformers, the operating tap settings for primary, secondary, and tertiary windings are also
displayed. The operating tap setting consists of the fixed taps plus the tap position of the LTC.
Use Default Options
Click on this check box to use PowerStations default display options.
Grid Size
Enter the size of the one-line diagram grid.
22.1.1 AC-DC Page
This page includes options for displaying info annotations for AC-DC elements and composite networks.

Color
ID
Select the check boxes under this heading to display the IDs of the selected AC-DC elements on the one-
line diagram.
Rating
Select the check boxes under this heading to display the ratings of the selected AC-DC elements on the
one-line diagram.

Device Type Rating
Charger AC kVA & DC kW (or MVA / MW)
Inverter DC kW & AC kVA (or MW / MVA)
UPS kVA
VFD HP / kW
kV
Click on the check boxes under this heading to display the rated or nominal voltages of the selected
A
Click on the check boxes under this heading to display the ampere ratings of the selected elements on the
one-line diagram.

Device Type Amp
Charger AC FLA & DC FLA
Inverter DC FLA & AC FLA
UPS Input, output, & DC FLA
Composite Network
Click on this check box to display the composite network IDs on the one-line diagram, then select the
color in which the IDs will be displayed.
Use Default Options
6.2.2 DC Page
This page includes options for displaying info annotations for DC elements.

Color
ID
Select the check boxes under this heading to display the IDs of the selected DC elements on the one-line
diagram.
Rating
Select the check boxes under this heading to display the ratings of the selected DC elements on the one-
line diagram.

Device Type Rating
Battery Ampere Hour
Motor HP / kW
Load kW / MW
Elementary Diagram kW / MW
Converter kW / MW
Cable # of Cables - # of Conductor / Cable - Size

kV

For cables, the kV check box is replaced by the button. Click on this button to display the conductor
type on the one-line diagram.
A
Select the check boxes under this heading to display the ampere ratings of the selected elements on the
one-line diagram.

For cables, the Amp check box is replaced by the button. Click on this button to display the cable
length (one way) on the one-line diagram.
Z
Select the check boxes under this heading to display the impedance values of the cables and impedance
branches on the one-line diagram.
Composite Motor
Click on this check box to display the DC composite motor IDs on the one-line diagram, then select the
Use Default Options

One-Line Diagram Default Display Options
6.3 Default Display Options
PowerStation allows different display options for the one-line diagram in different modes. Here we
describe the display options for Edit mode. Display options for study modes are described in their
respective sections.

Color
ID
Select the check boxes under this heading to display the listed elements ID on the one-line diagram.
One-Line Diagram Default Display Options
Rating
Select the check boxes under this heading to display the listed elements ratings on the one-line diagram.

Device Type Displayed Rating
3-Winding Transformer rated kVA or MVA of primary, secondary, and tertiary
2-Winding Transformer rated kVA or MVA
Reactor impedance in ohm
Impedance R and X in percent or ohm
Cable and Transmission Line Click-on button to display the number of cables,
conductors per cable, and size
kV
Select the check boxes under this heading to display the listed elements voltages in kV on the one-line
diagram. For cables/lines the rating check box is replaced by button. Click-on this button to display
the cable/line conductor type on the one-line diagram.
A
Select the check boxes under this heading to display the listed elements ampere ratings on the one-line
diagram. For cables/lines the rating check box is replaced by button. Click-on this button to display
the cable/line length on the one-line diagram.
Z
Select the check boxes under this heading to display the listed elements impedance values on the one-line
diagram.
D-Y
Select the check boxes under this heading to display the listed elements connection type on the one-line
diagram.
Grid Size
Enter a size for the one-line diagram grid to be displayed. The default size is 16. Larger numbers will
produce larger areas inside each grid block.

One-Line Diagram Annotation Font
6.4 Annotation Font
From the One-Line Diagram toolbar, select Default, and then click on Fonts to arrive at the Annotation
Font dialog box. This dialog box allows for the customization of font type, style, and size of the text used
to ID and describe elements on the One-Line Diagram.

ID
Select the font type, style, and size to display all IDs selected in display options.
Ratings
Select the font type, style, and size to display all ratings selected in display options.
Voltage
Select the font type, style, and size to display all voltages selected in display options.
Impedance
Select the font type, style, and size to display all impedance selected in display options.
Current
Select the font type, style, and size to display all currents selected in display options.
Delta-Y
Select the font type, style, and size to display all connection types selected in display options.
Bus kV & A
Select the font type, style, and size to display study results selected in their respective display options
such as bus operating voltages for load flow studies and bus short-circuit currents for short-circuit
analysis
Branch
Select the font type, style, and size to display all branch flows selected in their respective display options.
One-Line Diagram Result Annotation

6.5 Result Annotation
In the PowerStation one-line diagram, the direction of the arrows for power flow results matches the
positive direction of the real power flows (kW). In the output reports, however, the printed power flow
values indicate flows from the From Bus to the To Bus.

For three-winding transformers, the arrow indicates the positive direction of the real power flow (kW),
i.e., positive kW can be going into or coming out from each winding. However, in the output reports the
printed power flow values indicate flows from the From Bus to the To Bus.

A three-winding transformer may be represented as a star or a delta circuit in the calculation modules.

In the ANSI Short-Circuit Device Duty calculation, a three-winding transformer is represented as a star
circuit. A center bus is added to the system that takes the transformer ID as its bus ID and the primary
winding kV as its nominal kV. In this case, the output report prints the short-circuit current contributions
between the three terminal buses and the center bus.

Contributions
=========================
From Bus To Bus
ID ID
------------ ------------
Bus P Total

XFMR 1 Bus P

Bus S XFMR 1
Bus T XFMR 1

For the above example, the following fault current contributions are printed for a fault at Bus P.

From Bus To Bus
ID ID
------------ ------------
Bus P Bus S

Bus P Bus T

Bus S Bus T

In all the other calculation modules, a three-winding transformer is represented as a delta circuit. The
printed power flows (or currents) are reported between two of the three terminal buses of the transformer.

ETAP

PowerStation
4.0
User Guide
Copyright 2001
All Rights Reserved





Southern California

(949) 462-0100 Sales
(949) 462-0400 Fax

Chapter 7

Printing and Plotting

PowerStation allows a variety of options for printing and/or plotting one-line diagrams, underground
raceway systems, output reports, plots, input data, and libraries.

Printing & Plotting Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following topics for printing and plotting:
Schedule Report Manager
Print project data (input data) directly from the database using Crystal Reports.
Library Report Manager
Select and print library data using Crystal Reports.
One-Line Diagram
Print or plot one-line diagrams using independent print setup, scale, and options for each one-line diagram
including composite networks and motors.
Underground Raceway System
Print or plot underground cable raceway systems.
Text Output Reports
Preview and print text output reports for different studies.
Crystal Reports
Preview and print output reports for different studies using Crystal Reports.
Plots
Preview and print plots generated by different studies.

Printing & Plotting Schedule Report Manager
7.1 Schedule Report Manager
The Schedule Report Manager is provided to preview and print the input data, as entered in the bus,
branch, and load editors, using the Crystal Reports formats.

To print the input data:

Go to Edit Mode
Click on the Report Manager icon on the toolbar on the right side.
Open the Crystal Reports format of your choice to preview and/or print.

The database used to generate these reports is your projects database.

The Report Manager provides a variety of options for printing input data:

Print from Base data or any revision level of data
Print Base + Revision or only Revision data (the differences with respect to the Base Data)
Include or exclude energized, de-energized, and dumpster elements in your print selection
Print elements from any configuration
Print with or without page breaks

Printing & Plotting Library Report Manager
7.2 Library Report Manager
Library data can be printed using the Crystal Reports formats.

To print any library data:

Go to Library on the menu bar
Select Export
From the Export Library Editor select all or a number of libraries
Use the Library Report Manager to open the format of your choice to preview and/or print
Print with or without page breaks

Library data is not stored in database format. The Export feature exports your selected library data to an
MS Access file named Libs.LB1. This file resides in the same directory as the project file being used.
The exported file is then used in Crystal Reports formats.

The Library Report Manager allows you to select your choice of report format.

Crystal Reports for Fuse Library Data
Crystal Reports for Cable Library Data
Printing & Plotting Printing One-Line Diagrams
7.3 Printing One-Line Diagrams
One-line diagrams can be printed (in black & white or color) on any printer or plotter supported by your
operating system. The zooming scale inside PowerStation (one-line diagram) is independent of the print
scale.

Note that every one-line diagram, including composite networks and composite motors, has an
independent print setup, print options, and print scale. This allows you to set the print zooming scale
independently and print each of the one-line diagrams to a different printer or plotter.

The Print button always prints the currently active view. You may have several views displayed on your
screen; however, only one view can be active at a time. The title bars of the active and inactive windows
are displayed in unique colors as specified in your Control Panel - Dialog. To activate a view, simply
click on any part of it.

Note that unless you have rubber-banded or selected a specific portion of your presentation, your entire
one-line diagram or underground raceway system will be printed.

To print a one-line diagram:

Go to the File menu
Select Print Preview
Make the desired adjustments
Click on Print

A variety of options are available for printing your one-line diagrams and underground raceway systems,
some of which are listed here:

Print all or a selected portion of your one-line diagram or underground raceway system
Preview and print only energized elements
OLE objects may be included or excluded in the printed one-line diagram
Print or exclude AC elements, DC elements, and/or AC-DC interface elements
Print in color or black and white
Print annotations such as element IDs and ratings
Print study results as displayed on your screen
Include or eliminate the header and/or footer from the printed one-line diagram or underground
raceway system (the capability to edit header and/or footer information is not currently available)

PowerStation includes tools with print functions for convenience, flexibility, and control, which include:

Select any printer or plotter supported by your operating system
Choose any paper size supported by your printer
Select Portrait or Landscape for paper orientation
Preview your diagram before printing
From Print Preview, center your one-line diagram or adjust it with respect to the page as you choose
From Print Preview, zoom in or out of the one-line diagram to increase or decrease the size of the
printed diagram
Batch print your selection of a one-line diagram and/or any composite network or composite motor
Print Preview adjustments are saved so you can easily reprint using your final print layout
Bus1
DS
NO
Gen1 S
Utility
R
Syn1
S SD
Main Bus
Sub2A
Sub2B
Sub 3
DS
15/10/5 MVA
T1
10 MVA
T2
-2.5% TapP
1.5 MVA
T4
CAP1
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun
Food
Gas
Mot el
Revised DCN # 99-1692 FSP KAG DSN
Revised DCN # 99-1456 DSN KAG JRB
Revised DCN # 98-1689 DSN KAG JRB
Revised DCN # 92-0035 JFD JRB JRB
One-Line Diagram
Legend

REVISION DESCRIPTION ENGR CHKD APPVD
Lake Forest, CA
E001-MAIN-0000315

DCSystem
Sub2A-N
Sub3 Net1
Printout of a One-Line Diagram with OLE Objects

T2
10 MVA
DS
-2.5% TapP
NO
Gen1
7.5 MW
S
Utility
2500 MVAsc
R
T1
SSD
15/10/5 MVA
CAP1
T4
DS 1.5 MVA
DCSystem
Sub2A-N
Syn1
1250 HP
Y
Bus1
Sub 3
Sub2B Sub2A
Main Bus
Sub3 Net1
450 kvar

3244
j1439
412
j2390
2832
-j950
3240
j1357
5302
-j60
6300
-j676
998
-j616
2466
j727
1808
j775
0
j446
658
j398
654
j375
97.7
%
99.61%
100%
10
1.
52
%
100%
7

Printout of a One-Line Diagram with Load Flow Results
7.3.1 Print Preview
Select this option to preview the print layout of the active one-line diagram. Note that all print layout
(print setup, options, zoom factors and position) entered here are for the selected one-line diagram only.
Other diagrams have their own layouts.

You can access Print Preview from the File menu on the menu bar.

The tools available in this option allow you to modify the layout of your one-line diagram prior to
printing. Print Preview adjustments and settings are saved once you print or close Print Preview. In
addition, Print Preview for every view is unique to that view. This means that you can have different
settings for different views and use the Batch Print option to print a number of views at once.

The Print Preview option is also available from the right-click menu on the one-line diagram or the right-
click menu from the Project View window in the one-line diagram and U/G Raceway views.


There are a variety of tools available to modify the print layout of your one-line diagram.

Print Options
Print Setup
Zoom In for Viewing
Zoom In
(Enlarge One-Line
Diagram)
Single/Two Page View
Fit to Page
Scroll Up
Next Page
Scroll Left
Close
Click on this button to save the settings and layout, close, and return to the one-line diagram.
Print
Click on this button to bring up the Print Dialog box to start a print job.
Print Setup
Click on this button to display the Print Setup dialog box, which contains options that allow you to select
the destination printer and its connection.
Print Options
Click on this button to display the Print Options dialog box.
Next/Previous Page
If the extent of a one-line diagram exceeds one page you can navigate through multiple pages using the
Next/Previous Page buttons.
Toggle Display
Click on this button to toggle between previewing one or two pages at once.
Zoom In/Out View
Zoom In/Out of the view to preview the details or overall layout of your one-line diagram prior to
printing. Zoom In/Out View does not affect the print results.
Fit to Page
Fit the extent of the one-line diagram into the selected page size and orientation.
Zoom In/Out
Zooms in/out of the one-line diagram so that the size of the diagram changes with respect to the page size.
Once you print or close Print Preview, all settings are saved for future printing. Zoom levels in the Print
Preview are independent of zoom levels in the one-line diagram. The default magnification level is 10
units. You can enter a specific magnification factor in the field provided.
Scroll
Scroll the one-line diagram to the right, left, top, and bottom with respect to the selected page size and
orientation. These scroll functions are provided for centering and/or adjusting the location of the one-line
diagram with respect to the selected paper size for this one-line diagram. Once you print or close Print
Preview, all settings are saved for future printing. Scrolling in the Print Preview is independent of
scrolling in the one-line diagram. The default scroll factor is 10 units. However, you can specify the
scroll length in the fields provided.
7.3.2 Print
Open the Print dialog box by selecting Print from the File menu on the menu bar or by right-clicking in
the one-line diagram, selecting Print Preview, and clicking on the Print button. The following options
allow you to specify how the document will be printed:


Printer
This is the active printer and printer connection. Click on the Setup button to change the printer and
printer connection.
Print Range
Entire diagram
Select this option to print the entire document.
Selected elements only
Select this option to print the currently selected items.
Pages
Select this option to print the range of pages you specify in the From and To boxes; for example, From: 1 To:
4; From: 3 To: 6.
Print Quality
Select the quality of printing. Generally, lower quality printing takes less time to produce.
Copies
Specify the number of copies you want to print.
Setup
Click on this button to display the Print Setup dialog box. The following options allow you to select the
destination printer and its connection.
7.3.3 Print Setup

Printer
Select the printer you want to use. You can choose the Default Printer or select one of the currently
installed printers from the Printer Name list. To install printers and configure printer ports, use the
Windows Control Panel folder.
Paper
Size
Select the paper size that the document is to be printed on.
Source
Specify the tray here if your printer offers multiple trays for paper sources.
Orientation
Choose Portrait or Landscape.

Print Preview With Printer Orientation in Landscape
Network
Click on this button to connect to a network location, assigning it a new drive letter.

Printing & Plotting Print Options
7.4 Print Options
Click on this button to display a dialog box where you can make additional printing choices.

Include
Select which of the following items to print.
AC Elements
Select this option to preview and print the AC elements in your one-line diagram.
DC Elements
Select this option to preview and print the DC elements in your one-line diagram.
AC-DC Interface Elements / Composite Networks
Select this option to preview and print the AC-DC interface elements in your one-line diagram. These
elements include UPS, VFD, inverter, and charger/converter. Composite networks, which can be AC or
DC, are included in this category.
OLE Objects
Select this option to preview and print OLE objects inserted in your one-line view.
Print
De-energized Elements
Select this option to preview and print the de-energized elements of your one-line diagram. De-energized
elements are displayed in gray on one-line diagram presentations if the Continuity Check is on. If not
selected, PowerStation will suppress the printing of any branch with de-energized elements in it in order
to display only the active electrical components in your system.
Unselected Elements
Select this option to preview and print selected and un-selected elements in your one-line diagram.
Print Header
Select this option to print the name of the one-line diagram presentation at the top of each page. The
capability to modify header information is currently not available.
Print Footer
Select this option to print the page number, time, date, and project file name at the bottom of each page.
The capability to modify footer information is currently not available.
7.4.1 Batch Print
Select this option to print any number of views at once. Views include any presentation and any number
of composite networks/motors that are nested in that presentation. Batch print allows you to print without
activating every view prior to printing. For best results, adjust each view in Print Preview, then make a
batch print. You can access Batch Print from the File menu on the menu bar.

7.4.2 Batch Print Options
The Batch Print Editor displays a nesting tree that shows all the composite networks and composite
motors included in your one-line diagram. Note that the nesting tree also shows the composite
network/motor path.

Here is where you select all or any number of views to be printed. You can make your selection by
clicking on the box provided for each view or clicking on the selection buttons. Selection buttons are
provided for global selection.
Select All Composite
Clicking on the Networks, AC Motors, and/or DC Motors buttons selects these views for printing.
De-Select All Composite
Clicking on the Networks, AC Motors, and/or DC Motors buttons de-selects these views for printing.
Save While Printing
Click on this check box to save any changes made to the Print Options while making a batch print.
7.4.3 Print Dialog Box
This dialog box appears after you press OK from Batch Print dialog box.

Print Range
You have options to print the entire one-line diagram, selected elements, or a range of pages. Note that
when you select a range of pages, the entire diagram is printed for the selected pages.
OK
Press OK to proceed with printing of the next one-line diagram.
OK ALL
Print all one-line diagrams in the batch without confirmation.

Printing & Plotting Text Output Reports
7.5 Text Output Reports
PowerStation provides you with the option to view and print the calculation results of your project or
study case in a text output report format.

To preview and print text reports you can select TextRept and click on the View Output Report icon on
any Study Case Toolbar.

Text output reports can be viewed by any word processor. Currently, by default, the output reports are
viewed by Notepad. The text output reports are 132 characters wide with 66 lines per page.

PowerStation text output reports have the following extensions:

cable derating = .cdr

harmonic analysis = .hlr
harmonic frequency scan = .fsr
harmonic load flow = .hlr
load flow = .lfr
motor starting = .msr
optimal load flow = .opr
short-circuit = .shr
transient stability = .tsr

Note: DC load flow, DC short-circuit, and battery sizing studies do not have text reports. Use Crystal
Reports output report formats for these studies.
7.5.1 View Output Reports
Output reports of the calculation programs can be viewed directly from PowerStation. You can view text
output reports by clicking on the View Output File button on the Study Case Toolbar. A list of all output
files in the project directory is provided. This list includes only the output reports associated with the
active study mode. To view any of the listed output reports, select the output report name, select
TextRept from the Report Format list box, and then click on the View Output File button from the Study
Case Toolbar or on the Study Toolbar.

To view a listing of all output reports that you have generated for a project, click on the List Output
Reports button. The List Output Report feature allows you to view output report files sorted by analysis
type. Select the output report of your choice for viewing.

You can also view the text reports by clicking on the Report Manager icon located on the study toolbars
and selecting TextRept.

You can view the text output reports via word processor applications by several methods, some of which
are described here.
Open from PowerStation
When you click on the View Output File button, PowerStation uses Notepad by default to view the output
report of calculation results. You can change the default viewer in the ETAPS.INI file to the viewer of
your preference (see PowerStation INI File).

ReportProcessor=Notepad

An example of specifying Microsoft Word to view the output reports would be to add the following
command to the [AppVariables] section of the ETAPS.INI file:

ReportProcessor=C:\Program Files\Microsoft Office\Office\Winword.exe /mpsreport

Note that the application path may be different for your computer.

The command /mpsreport is used to start the PSReport macro automatically within a Word document (for
more information see Microsoft Word Automated Formatting). If you are using the ReportA4 macro,
change this command to /mreportA4.

Common errors in linking PowerStation to a word processor are as follows:

The Report Processor command is not added to the [AppVariables] section of the ETAPS.INI file.
Type the word processor path accurately, including spaces. For instance, you must add a space
between winword.exe and /mpsreport, and there is a space between Program and Files.
You may be accessing a word processor via a network. Depending on the network configuration, the
linking may or may not be possible.
Open from Word Processor Application
Another method of opening an output report is to open the word processor application first, then find and
open the output report file you want to view.
Open from File Manager/Explorer
You can associate a file name extension with an application so the application starts automatically when
you open any file with that extension. To associate an output report file with a word processor
application, double-click on the file name in File Manager/Explorer and select an application from the list
in the Open With dialog box.
Format Text Output Reports
The output reports are 132 characters wide with 66 lines per page. For the correct formatting and
pagination of output reports, you MUST modify the default settings of your word processor application.
For Notepad, WordPad, and Microsoft Word applications we recommend the following format
parameters:

Notepad
To print output reports from Notepad on Letter size paper (8.5x11 inches), format the reports as follows:

Choose Select All from the Edit menu

Text Font: Courier or MS LineDraw
Text Size: 6 (enter 6 if it is not listed)
Page Margins: Top: 1.5"; Bottom: 3.6"; Left: 0.75"; Right: 0.25"
Remove header and footer information from the Page Setup Editor.
Make sure Word wrap in the Edit menu is not checked.
WordPad
To print output reports from WordPad on Letter size paper (8.5x11 inches), format the reports as follows:


Text Font: Courier New or MS LineDraw
Page Margins: Top: 1"; Bottom: 3.1"; Left: 0.25"; Right: 0.25"
Go to Options from the View menu. Click on the Word tab, and then click on the No Wrap check
box.
Microsoft Word
To print output reports from Microsoft Word on Letter size paper (8.5x11 inches), format the reports as
follows:


Page Margins: Top: 0.9; Bottom: 0.85; Left: 0.25; Right: 0.25
Format: From the Format menu, select the Paragraph option and set the Line Spacing to
Exactly, At: 10pt

To print output reports from Microsoft Word on A4 size paper (21x29.7 cm), format the reports as
follows:

Page Margins: Top: 1.9 cm; Bottom: 1.9 cm, Left: 0.6 cm; Right: 0.6 cm
Format: From the Format menu, select the Paragraph option and set the Line Spacing to
Exactly, At: 11pt
Microsoft Word Automated Formatting
You can also automate the format settings by using the macro capabilities of Microsoft Word.
PowerStation provides you with PSReport.dot and ReportA4 templates. Each of these templates contains
a Macro button, as shown here, which performs the formatting for Letter size paper and European A4 size
paper when you click on it. PSReport.dot and ReportA4.dot templates are located in the PowerSTN
directory.

There are three steps required to automate Microsoft Word Formatting:

1. Close ETAP PowerStation and other applications
2. Create a link from PowerStation to Microsoft Word
3. Add the formatting macro to the Microsoft Word template
Create a Link from PowerStation to Microsoft Word
An example of specifying Microsoft Word to view the output reports would be to add the following
command to the [AppVariables] section of the ETAPS.INI file:

ReportProcessor=C:\Program Files\Microsoft Office\Office\Winword.exe /mpsreport

Note that the application path may be different for your computer.
Add Formatting Macro to Microsoft Word Template
When you open a new document in Microsoft Word, the program uses the Normal.dot template format to
create the document. Therefore, it is convenient to include the output report formatting macro in your
Normal.dot template. To copy this macro from PSReport.dot to Normal.dot, you will need to take the
following actions (if you are choosing size A4 paper, replace PSReport.dot with ReportA4.dot in the
following instructions):

1. Open Microsoft Word
2. If you are using Word 7.0/97, from the Tools menu select Templates and Add-Ins For Word
6.0/95, from the File menu select the Templates... option.
3. From the Templates and Add-ins Editor, click on Organizer...
4. From the Macro Project Items page, open the PSReport.dot template and copy the PSReport macro
file to the Normal.dot template. To open PSReport.dot, click on either the Close File or Open File
button and locate the PSReport template in the ETAPS/PowerSTN directory.


5. From the Toolbars page, open to the PSReport template and copy the PSReport Toolbar to the
Normal.dot template.

6. Close the editor.
7. Double-click on the toolbar and select the PSReport Toolbar. Note that if you are using Word 7.0/97
this step is skipped.

8. Drag the new toolbar button to the desired location.

Note that Microsoft Word link cannot open a document, which is located in a path with a folder name that
contains spaces. For example, if the output report is located in C:\ETAPS\PowerSTN\Project Files, you
must remove the space between Project and Files in order to open the output report.

Common errors in the addition of the macro button are as follows:

Close all other applications that are using the Normal.dot file. For example, your e-mail system may
be using this file and should be closed.
You must have write access to modify Normal.dot. Make sure the Normal.dot file is not a Read-Only
file.
Microsoft Word is installed on a remote location and you are accessing it via a network. Depending
on the network configuration, access to the Normal.dot file may not be possible. In that case, you
must install Word in your local drive.

Depending on your Word settings, the program may prompt you to save the added macro to the
Normal.dot template. Click on OK to permanently save this macro.
Printing & Plotting Crystal Reports
7.6 Crystal Reports
In addition to the text output reports, PowerStation allows you to view and print the load flow, short-
circuit, motor starting, DC load flow, DC short-circuit, and battery sizing output reports using Crystal
Reports formats. Crystal Reports formats for other analysis results will be provided in future releases.

These reports can contain varying levels of detail, depending on your study case requirements. The report
header is printed on the top of each page of the output report and contains general information about the
project, which has been entered into the Project Information Editor. The report header also contains
specific information related to the study case.

To preview and print Crystal Reports output files, click on the Report Manager icon, included on all study
toolbars, then make your selection from the displayed report formats.

PowerStation uses the Crystal Reports program to generate output reports. Crystal Reports is a reporting
tool with superior capabilities and presentation-quality output. Crystal Reports is a Seagate Software
product. For more information go to: http://www.seagatesoftware.com

PowerStation provides you with a number of Crystal Reports formats for input data (device schedule),
library data, and output reports. However, what makes Crystal Reports so ideal is the fact that you can
customize the output reports. You can add or remove fields, change fonts and sizes, include your
company information and logo, add plots, export your reports to HTML format so you can publish your
reports on the World Wide Web, etc. Note that you must use your copy of Crystal Reports for any
modifications.
Output Report Access File
After you run a study, PowerStation generates an Access database file that contains data associated with
the study case, input, calculation results, and summary tables. Then Crystal Reports uses the data stored
in the Access database for producing output reports.

Presently, Crystal Reports output reports are provided for load flow, short-circuit, motor starting, DC load
flow, DC short-circuit, and battery sizing. The output reports for the remaining analysis modules are now
under development and will be provided in future releases.

The Access database for output reports has the following extensions and they are located in the same
directory as your PowerStation project files:

*.DB1 Battery Sizing Analysis
*.DL1 DC Load Flow Analysis
*.DS1 DC Short-Circuit Analysis
*.GR1 Ground Grid Systems
*.HA1 Harmonic Analysis
*.LF1 Load Flow Analysis
*.MS1 Motor Starting Analysis
*.PN1 Panel Analysis
*.RA1 Reliability Analysis

*.SA1 Short-Circuit Analysis,
ANSI, Device Duty
ANSI, Unbalanced Faults
ANSI, 30 Cycle, Balanced
*.SI1 Short-Circuit Analysis,
IEC (909), Device Duty
IEC, Unbalanced Faults
IEC (363), Transient

This means that when you run a study such as load flow with the output report name LFresult,
PowerStation generates two types of output reports:

LFresult.lfr which is a text output report (textrept)
LFresult.LF1 which is the Access database for Crystal Reports
Crystal Reports Formats
Crystal report formats have an extension of .RPT and are located in the ETAPS\Powerstn\Formats
directory.

Crystal Reports output formats are divided into four categories: Complete, Input, Results, and Summary;
therefore, the directory for each study is categorized accordingly.

For studies that presently do not include Crystal Reports formats, text report files (TextRept.rpt) are
available. Copies of report formats are also added directly to the study folder, which can be viewed from
the Study Case toolbar.

7.6.1 View Crystal Reports
Output reports of the calculation programs can be viewed directly from PowerStation. You can view
Crystal Reports output files by clicking on the Report Manager button on the Study Toolbar or on the
View Output File button on the Study Case Toolbar.
Report Manager
Click on the Report Manager button, which is provided for every study toolbar, to view the Report
Manager Editor.

The Report Manager Editor for the output reports consists of four tabs: Complete, Input, Results, and
Summary. Output report formats are sorted into these categories. To view an output report, select a
report format and click on the OK button.

The output filename, project name, and path are also displayed in this dialog box.

View Output File
Click on the View Output Report button on any study case toolbar to view Crystal Reports or text format
reports. A list of all output files in the project directory is provided. This list includes only the output
reports associated with the active study mode. To view any of the listed output reports in Crystal Reports
format, select the output report name, select any of the Crystal Reports formats from the Format list box,
and then click on the View Output File button on the Study Case Toolbar or the Study Toolbar.

Crystal Reports Viewer
The Crystal Reports Viewer allows you to view reports, navigate to different pages, and export to a
variety of formats.

Viewer Toolbar
The Crystal Reports Viewer Toolbar contains the following features: Navigate, Print, Export, and Zoom.
Navigate
To view all report pages, click on the navigation buttons to move forward or backwards.

Print
The Print option allows you to print all or a selected number of pages, specify the number of copies to be
printed, and the capability to collate them.
Export
You can export your reports to a number of popular spreadsheet and word processor formats, into PDF
format, HTML format, ODBC format, and a number of common data interchange formats as well. For
the best text format results we recommend the Rich Text (Exact) Format option.

Click on the Export button to view a list of all available formats.

Zoom
Use the Zoom command to zoom in and out on your report. You can view your report from 25% to 400%
of its actual size. The zooming capability is used for viewing only and does not affect the printed results.
Printing & Plotting Plots
7.7 Plots
The plot format is also available for viewing and printing. To preview and print plots, click on the Plot
icon on the Study Toolbar.

Plots which are generated, as a result of PowerStation calculation programs such as motor starting
analysis, transient stability analysis, and transient temperature of cables can be printed to any printer
supported by your Windows platform. To print a plot, display the Plot View, make formatting
modifications, if required, and print. To view plots from motor starting or cable derating studies, click on
the Plot button from the Study Toolbar.

To print a plot, the Plot View must be the active view in the window. You can have several plot views
displayed on your screen; however, only one view can be active at any time. The title bars of the active
and inactive windows are displayed in unique colors as specified in your Control Panel - Dialog folder.
To activate a view, click on any part of it.

The printed plot size is currently set to the size of the paper on which it is being printed.

Plot views can be divided into two portions. The upper portion is the plot generated using the axis limits
directly from the program parameters. The lower portion is designed to show a zoomed view of the upper
portion. You may display the zoom view by moving the cursor to the bottom edge of the view until the
Divide View cursor appears. Click and hold down the left mouse button, then drag the divider upwards
until the zoom view is displayed to your satisfaction. Now use the right button to rubber band the area of
the plot that you wish to zoom in on. The zoom view is then displayed in the lower section of the
window.

For printing plots with a split view, click on the view you want to print, make any necessary print
modifications, then print.

PowerStation offers a split-screen view of plots for motor starting, harmonics, and transient stability
studies where the lower screen is an enlarged (zoomed) view and can be sized to your specific needs.
Either view can be printed independently, but you cannot print both views simultaneously.

7.7.1 Modify Plot Parameters
Parameters such as plot line type, axis, legend, and text can be modified directly from the plot view. For
example, to modify plot line type, double click on the plot line and change the line type from the Plot
Parameter Editor.
Plot Parameters
Double-click on the plot line to open the Plot Parameters Editor. From this editor you can specify line
type, attributes, and curve fitting algorithm.

Line Attributes
Click on the LINE ATTRIBUTES button to modify line color, style, and width.

You can also display the plot data by clicking on the Data button. If you want to use the data for another
program, click on the Copy option on the menu bar and paste the data into the other application. Copied
data has a tab-separated format.

Text Parameters
To modify horizontal and vertical axis titles or the plot title, double-click on each cell to open the Text
Parameters Editor. From this editor you can change the text, font, color, size, and style of the selected
title.

Vertical & Horizontal Axis Parameters
To modify vertical and horizontal axis parameters, double-click on either axis to open the Axis Parameter
Editor. From this editor you can change the axis limits, interception point, line attributes, tick marks, grid
line, and scale type.

Axis Labels
To open this editor, double-click on the axis label of the horizontal or vertical axis. Here you can modify
the label position, format, text parameters, and precision.

Legend Parameters
Double-click on any displayed legend to open the Legend Parameters Editor. Here you can modify
legend parameters such as the legend rectangle size and color, text, text parameters, and border.


ETAP

PowerStation
4.0
User Guide
Copyright 2001
All Rights Reserved





Southern California

(949) 462-0100 Sales
(949) 462-0400 Fax

Chapter 8

AC Elements

This chapter addresses editors for all AC elements in the One-Line Diagram. Except for the element IDs,
bus connections, and status, all other data that appear in the editors are considered engineering properties,
which are subject to Base & Revision Data. The following table lists all the AC elements in PowerStation
as seen from the AC toolbar.

Bus
Pointer Bus / Node
Branches
Cable
Reactor, Current Limiting
Transmission Line
Impedance
Sources and Loads
Power Grid (Utility System)
Induction Machine
Lumped Load
Static Load
Panel Schedule
Remote Connector
Generator, Synchronous
Motor, Synchronous
Motor Operated Valve (MOV)
Capacitor
Harmonic Filter
Phase Adapter
Composites
Composite Motor Composite Network
Protective Devices
Fuse
High Voltage Breaker
Single Throw Switch
Instrumentation
Contactor
Double Throw Switch
Ground Grid
Settings and Reports
Display Options

Report Manager
AC Elements Bus

8.1 Bus
The properties associated with AC buses (nodes) of the electrical distribution system can be entered in
this data editor.

The PowerStation Bus Editor helps to model different types of buses in an electrical system. The data
entered in the Bus Editor is used when running all types of system studies. Note that specifying bus
generation or loading is not done from the Bus Editor. Generators, motors, and static loads are elements
and can be connected to any desired bus. From the Bus Editor, PowerStation can display all loads,
generators, and utilities that are directly connected to the bus. Note that protective devices are ignored
when PowerStation determines connections to buses.

A bus is defined as a point (node) where one or more branches are connected. A branch could be a cable,
transformer, etc. The minimum amount of data required to define a bus is the bus nominal kV which can
be entered in the Info Page of the Bus Editor. Once entered, this value is defined as a unique bus in the
system model, which can be connected, to other buses/nodes by placing branches between them.

Buses have two types of graphical presentation, i.e., Bus or Node. You can change a bus to a node vice
versa at any time. This option gives you the flexibility to display annotation of buses and nodes
differently.

The Bus Editor includes eight pages of properties.

Info Page
Load Page
Motor/Gen Page
Rating Page
Harmonic Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page

8.1.1 Info Page
Within the Info Page, specify the bus ID, In/Out of Service, Nominal kV, Initial/Operating Voltage
(Magnitude & Angle), Diversity Factors (Maximum & Minimum), FDR Tag, and Equipment Name and
Description.

AC Elements Bus

Info
ID
Unique ID with up to 25 alphanumeric characters.

PowerStation automatically assigns a unique ID to each bus. The assigned IDs consist of the default bus
ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of buses increase. The
default bus ID (Bus) can be changed from the Defaults Menu in the menu bar or from the Project View.

Recommendations for assigning buses are as follows:

Every piece of major equipment, such as switchgear, switchrack, and motor control centers (MCCs).
On the primary side of transformers when the primary line/cable feeder is more than:
250 feet for high voltage cables
100 feet for medium voltage cables
50 feet for low voltage cables
Utility and generator terminals when the cable is more than:
250 feet for high voltage cables
100 feet for medium voltage cables
50 feet for low voltage cables
Induction and synchronous motors do not need buses assigned at their terminals since motors can
include equipment cables.

Nominal kV
Enter the nominal voltage of the bus in kilovolts (kV). This is a required input entry, which is used by
PowerStation to convert the final bus voltages to the actual values for graphical display and output
reports, i.e., bus nominal kV is used as the base kV for the reported percent voltages.

Note that the nominal voltage and actual base voltage of a bus can be different values. Actual base
voltages of buses are calculated internally by PowerStation, starting from a swing bus. The rest of the
base values are calculated using the transformer turn ratios. A swing bus is defined as a bus that has a
power grid and/or generator (in swing mode) connected to it.
In/Out of Service
The operating condition of a bus can be selected by choosing either the In Service or Out of Service
option. The properties of an Out of Service bus can be edited like an In Service bus. However, an Out of
Service bus will not be included in any system studies. When Continuity Check is activated, an Out of
Service bus automatically becomes dimmed in the one-line diagram. All the loads and branches that are
energized solely through an Out of Service bus will also be de-energized and become dimmed.

Note that the In / Out of Service option is an engineering property which is independent of the
configuration status. Therefore, you can set a bus to be In Service for the Base Data and Out of Service in
a Revision Data.

AC Elements Bus

Initial Voltage
% V
Enter the magnitude of the bus voltage in percent of the bus nominal kV. This value is used as the initial
bus voltage for load flow studies including motor starting, harmonics and transient stability studies. For
unregulated buses which do not have any utility or generator connected to them, the operating voltage is
calculated during load flow analysis using the value entered here as a first guess or initial value. For
regulated buses, which have a utility or generator (in swing or voltage control mode) connected to them,
this value is not used. Voltage magnitude defaults to 100%.

If you select the Update Initial Bus Voltage option from the Load Flow Study Case Editor, this value
reflects the operating voltage of the bus after you run a load flow study.

For ANSI short-circuit studies, this value is used as the prefault bus voltage if you select the Vmag X
Nominal kV option from the Short-Circuit Study Case Editor, Standard Page.
Angle
Enter the phase angle of the bus voltage in degrees. For non-swing buses (buses which do not have any
utility or generator in swing mode connected to them), voltage angles are calculated during load flow
analysis using the values entered here as a first guess. This value is ignored for swing type buses. Voltage
Angle default is 0.0.
Operating Voltage
After you run load flow studies, the operating voltage magnitude and phase angle of the bus are displayed
here.
Connection
The phase connection for the bus can be defined by selecting 3 Phase, 1 Phase 2W, or 1 Phase 3W. The
default connection is 3 Phase and can be changed from the Defaults Menu in the menu bar or from the
Project View.

The phase connection must be specified before connecting the bus to any device. Once the bus is
connected to a device, the phase connection selections will become display only (gray). To change the
connection type, you need to disconnect the bus from all devices.
3 Phase
Select to define the bus as a three-phase bus. Three-phase and single-phase loads can be connected to this
bus. Single-phase branches must be connected through a phase adapter before connecting to a three-
phase bus.
1 Phase 2W
Select to define the bus as single-phase two-wire bus. Only single-phase devices can be connected to this
bus.
1 Phase 3W
Select to define the bus as single-phase three-wire bus. Only single-phase devices can be connected to
this bus.
AC Elements Bus

Load Diversity Factor
Minimum & Maximum
The minimum and maximum diversity factors (loading limits) of each individual bus may be specified as
a percentage of the bus loading. These values are used when the Minimum or Maximum Loading option
is selected from the Study Case Editor for load flow, motor starting, harmonic analysis, transient stability,
and optimal power flow studies. When the Minimum or Maximum Loading option is used for a study, all
motors and static loads directly connected to each bus will be multiplied by their diversity factors.
Equipment
FDR Tag
Enter the feeder tag in this field, up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
Name
Enter equipment name, up to 50 alphanumeric characters.
Description
Enter equipment description, up to 100 alphanumeric characters.
Classification
Zone
Enter the zone where the bus is located or click on the counter arrows to change the values.
Area
Enter the area where the bus is located or click on the counter arrows to change the values.
8.1.2 Load Page
The Load Page is used to display the total motor and static loads directly connected to a bus for each
loading category. The displayed kW and kvar indicate the algebraic sum of the operating load of all
motors and static loads, either directly connected to the bus, through composite networks, composite
motors, or Power Panels. These values are obtained from the actual loads connected to the bus.

AC Elements Bus

8.1.3 Motor/Gen Page
The Motor/Generator Page displays each individual induction motor, synchronous motor, and generator
directly connected to the bus you are editing. Note that motors shown in this page can be located inside a
composite motor, which is directly connected to the bus.

8.1.4 Rating Page
The Rating Page is used to enter the bus type, continuous amp rating, and short-circuit bracing of a bus.

Bus Type
Other, MCC, Switchgear, Switchboard, and Switchrack
The available bus types are MCC, Switchgear, Switchboard, and Switchrack. Use the bus type Other for
buses which do not have any ratings and/or are placed in the system for connecting two branches, such as
a cable and a transformer.
AC Elements Bus

Note that bus type is different than the bus symbol displayed graphically. A normal bus symbol is a bar
that can be stretched from both ends. You can change the bus to a node, which is displayed as a small
circle. Nodes are provided so you can place them at locations where you do not want to emphasize a bus
and do not want to display the current or power flow from or into it.
Continuous Amp
Enter the continuous amp rating of the selected bus.
Bracing
Symmetrical, Asymmetrical, Crest
When a symmetrical value for low voltage buses is entered, PowerStation calculates the asymmetrical
value based on the type of bus and NEMA & UL test power factors. Under ANSI fault analysis,
PowerStation compares the calculated asymmetrical fault currents with the asymmetrical bus bracing
entered in this page. For medium voltage buses under ANSI short-circuit analysis, bus bracing can be
entered as asymmetrical or crest (peak) value.
8.1.5 Harmonic Page
The Harmonic Page is used to specify the harmonic limit information on a bus.

Harmonic Limit
Category
From the dropdown list select the appropriate designation. Available choices are General, Special,
Designated, PCC, and Other. This field specifies the bus harmonic limit category.
VTHD Limit
Choose a value from the dropdown list or enter a value from 0 to 999 here. This field specifies the bus
voltage Total Harmonic Distortion limit. The specified value will be compared with the calculated
AC Elements Bus

VTHD from the Harmonic Load Flow calculation and any violation of this limit will result in a flag in the
output report.
VIHD Limit
Choose a value from the dropdown list or enter a value from 0 to 999 here. This field specifies the bus
voltage Individual Harmonic Distortion. The specified value will be compared with the calculated VIHD
from the Harmonic Load Flow calculation and any violation of this limit will result in a flag in the output
report.
8.1.6 Reliability Page

Reliability Parameters
A
It is defined as the Active failure rate in number of failures per year. The active failure rate is associated
with the component failure mode that causes the operation of the primary protection zone around the
failed component and can therefore cause the removal of the other healthy components and branches from
service. After the actively failed component is isolated, the protection breakers are reclosed. This leads to
service being restored to some or all of the load points. It should be noted, however, that the failed
component itself (and those components that are directly connected to this failed component) could be
restored to service only after repair or replacement.

Mean repair rate in number of repairs per year, calculated automatically based on MTTR
( = 8760/MTTR).
AC Elements Bus

MTTF
Mean Time To Failure in years calculated automatically based on
A
(MTTF = 1.0/
A
).
FOR

Forced Outage Rate (i.e., unavailability) calculated based on MTTR,
A
(FOR =
MTTR/(MTTR+8760/
A
).
MTTR
It is the Mean Time To Repair in hours. It is the expected time for a crew to repair a component outage
and/or restore the system to its normal operating state.
Replacement
Available
Check this box to enable r
P

r
P
Replacement time in hours for replacing a failed element by a spare.
Alternative Supply

Switching Time
Time in hours for isolating a failure. It is the period starting from the time a switching operation is
requested due to a forced outage until that the operation is completed.
Library
Library Button
Click on the Library button to bring up the Library Quick Pick Editor for reliability data.
Source
Displays the Source Name of the library data selected
Type
Displays the type name of the library data selected
Class
Displays the class of the library data selected
AC Elements Bus

8.1.7 Remarks Page

User-Defined Info
These fields allow you to keep track of extra data associated with this component. The names of the
User-Defined (UD) fields can be changed from the Settings option in the Project menu in the Menu bar.
UD Field 1 (Eq. Ref.)
This is a number field with the default name Eq. Ref. You can change the name of this field and enter the
equipment reference number or any other number here, up to five digits.
UD Field 2 (Last Maint.)
This is an alphanumeric field with the default name Last Maint. You can change the name of this field
and enter any extra data for this element here, up to 12 alphanumeric characters.
UD Field 3 (Next Maint.)
This is an alphanumeric field with the default name Next Maint. You can change the name of this field
UD Field 4 (Tests Req.)
This is an alphanumeric field with the default name Tests Req. You can change the name of this field and
enter any extra data for this element here, up to 12 alphanumeric characters.
UD Field A5
This is an alphanumeric field with the default name UD Field A5. You can change the name of this field
UD Field A6
AC Elements Bus

UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Enter the name or ID of a one-line drawing or diagram associated with this element, up to 50
alphanumeric characters. An example is the manufacturer diagram or specifications for this element.
Reference
Enter the name or ID of a reference drawing or document for this element, up to 50 alphanumeric
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Enter the manufacturers name for this element here, up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
Purchase Date
Enter the date of purchase for this element here, up to 8 alphanumeric characters.
8.1.8 Comments Page
Enter any extra data or comments regarding condition, maintenance, tests, or studies, associated with this
element. This field can be up to 64kb with a default size of 4kb. To increase the size of this field, refer to
the entries in the ETAPS.INI file.

When entering information in the page, use Ctrl+Enter to start a new paragraph. Standard keys such as
Ctrl+X, Ctrl+C, and Ctrl+V can be used to cut, copy, and paste information.

AC Elements Transformer, 2-Winding

8.2 Transformer, 2-Winding
The properties associated with 2-winding transformers of the electrical distribution system can be entered
in this editor.

The 2-Winding Transformer Editor includes the following eight pages of properties, as well as
information regarding the use of load tap changers (LTC).

Info Page
Rating Page
Tap Page
LTC Dialog Box
Harmonic Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
8.2.1 Info Page
Within the Info Page, specify the 2-winding transformer ID, In/Out of Service, Primary and Secondary
Buses, FDR Tag, Name, and manufacturers data.

Info
ID
Entering a unique ID with up to 25 alphanumeric characters.

PowerStation automatically assigns a unique ID to each transformer. The assigned IDs consist of the
default ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of transformers
increase. The default transformer ID (T) can be changed from the Defaults Menu in the menu bar or from
the Project View.

Primary & Secondary
Bus IDs for the connecting buses of a 2-winding transformer are designated as Primary and Secondary
buses. If the primary or secondary terminal of a transformer is not connected to any bus, a blank entry
will be shown for bus ID. To connect or reconnect a transformer to a bus, select a bus from the list box.
The one-line diagram will be updated to show the new connection after you click on OK.

For 3 Phase Transformers only 3 Phase buses will be displayed in the drop down lists. For 1 Phase
transformers only 1 Phase buses will be displayed. For the Primary field, only 1 Phase 2W will be
displayed. For the Secondary, if the transformer has center tap selected in the connection section, then
only 1 Phase 3W will be displayed in the drop down list, otherwise only 1 Phase 2W will be displayed.

Note that you can only connect to buses that reside in the same view where the transformer resides, i.e.,
you cannot connect to a bus that resides in the Dumpster or in another composite network.

If a transformer is connected to a bus through a number of protective devices, reconnection of the
transformer to a new bus from the editor will reconnect the last existing protective device to the new bus,
as shown below where T1 is reconnected from Bus10 to Bus4.

Next to the primary and secondary bus IDs, PowerStation displays the nominal kV of the buses for your
convenience.

Single Phase Transformers can also be connected to Phase Adapters. If the transformer is connected as
such, then the Phase Adapter ID will show in the Primary or Secondary field.


In/Out of Service
The operating condition of a transformer can be selected by choosing either the In Service or Out of
Service options. The properties of an Out of Service branch can be edited like an In Service branch;
however, an Out of Service branch will not be included in any system studies. When Continuity Check is
activated, an Out of Service branch automatically becomes dimmed in the one-line diagram. All the loads
and branches energized solely through an Out of Service branch will also be de-energized and become
dimmed.

configuration status. Therefore, you can set a branch to be In Service for the Base Data and Out of
Service in Revision Data.
Connection
The phase connection for a 2-Winding Transformer can be defined by selecting 3 Phase, 1 Phase with
center tap or without center tap. The default connection is 3 Phase and can be changed from the Defaults
Menu in the menu bar or from the Project View.

The phase connection must be specified before connecting the 2-Winding Transformer to any bus or
phase adapter. Once the transformer is connected, the phase connection selections will become display
only (gray). To change the connection type, you need to disconnect the transformer.
3 Phase
Select to define the transformer as three-phase. This transformer can only be connected to three-phase
buses.
1 Phase
Select to define the transformer as single-phase. This transformer can only be connected to single-phase
buses and phase adapter. In the adjacent field, it will display the input connection type. The primary side
of the Transformer is always 1 Phase 2 Wire.
Secondary Center Tap
Check to define the Secondary side of the transformer as single-phase 3 wire. By checking this field, the
transformer secondary winding will be grounded at the center. Only 1 Phase 3 Wire buses can be
connected to the secondary winding.


Type/Class
MFR
Enter the 2-winding transformer manufacturers name.
Type
Select the transformer type from the list box. The following transformer types are available:

Cast-Coil
Gas-Fill-Dry
Liquid-Fill
Non-Vent-Dry (non-vented dry type)
Sealed-Dry
Vent-Dry
Other
Class
Select the transformer class from the list box. The following transformer classes are available:

OA\FA
OA\FA\FA
OA\FA\FOA
OA\FOA\FOA
OW
OW\A
Other
Temp
Select the transformer operating temperature (in degrees C) from the list box. The following transformer
operating temperatures are available:

55
60
65
80
115
130
150

Other temperatures can be typed directly into the temperature box.
BIL
Select the transformer basic impulse level (BIL) in kV from the list box. The following transformer basic
impulse levels are available:

30
45
60
95
110
125
150
200
Equipment
FDR Tag
Name

Description
8.2.2 Rating Page
Within the Rating Page, specify the 2-winding transformer rating, impedance and its variation and the
tolerance data.

Rating
Prim & Sec kV
Enter primary and secondary voltage ratings of the 2-winding transformer in kilovolts. Note that when a
transformer is connected to a bus, the kV of the winding (if it is equal to zero) is set equal to the bus
nominal kV. PowerStation uses the voltage at the lowest-numbered swing system as the base voltage and
calculates the other base voltages using the transformer ratios. PowerStation will display an error message
when it detects inconsistent voltage bases in parallel or looped systems during system analysis.

If there are parallel transformers in a system that has different voltage ratios, change the voltage ratio of
one of the transformers to make their voltage ratios equal. At the same time, a fictitious tap setting is
required, using the new voltage ratio to correct its turn ratio. A logical choice would be the transformer
winding with the less common kV rating in the system. Note that circulating currents are expected in this
condition.

As an example, consider the two parallel transformers in the following diagram. To model the
transformers in PowerStation, set the tap of the second transformer in such a way that the resulting turn
ratio is equal to the other transformer. If one transformer is rated 13.8-4.16 kV and the second transformer
is rated 13.2-4.16 kV, then both transformer data should be entered as 13.8-4.16 kV (same turn ratios). In
order to correct for the second transformer turn ratio, simply specify a tap setting which is equal to the
actual kV rating divided by the new kV rating as shown below.

% Tap = [ ( 13.2/13.8 ) - 1.0] * 100 = -4.35 %

This transformer should be modeled with a negative tap setting of 4.35% on the primary side.

Remember that a positive tap setting tends to lower the operating voltage of the secondary bus, while a
negative tap raises it. In this case, the transformer turns ratio modeled in PowerStation is larger than the
actual turn ratio, without the introduced tap setting. As the secondary bus would operate at a voltage, use
a negative tap to raise the voltage at the secondary bus. Use this rule to determine whether the tap
correction should be positive or negative.

Note that if this transformer has an actual tap setting of 2.5%, this value should be added to the off-
nominal tap of -4.35%, i.e., -4.35% + 2.5% = -1.85%.
MVA Rating
This value is used as the base MVA for the transformer impedance. For example, the nameplate
transformer impedance given at the OA 55C rating should be specified as the MVA rating for a
transformer, which has OA 55C/FA 65C ratings.
Max MVA Capability
This value, if non-zero, is used to calculate the percent overload of the transformer. If the maximum
MVA capability of the transformer is greater than zero, the branch will be flagged on the overload
summary page of the load flow output report, i.e., PowerStation will ignore this value if it is set to zero
and this branch will not be included in the overload summary report. For a transformer with OA 55C/FA
65C ratings, the FA 65C rating should be used as the MVA capability if fans have been installed on the
transformer.

This value is also used as a base for the transformer flow constraint in the optimal power flow studies.
FLA
Display the primary winding and secondary winding full load amperes.
Connected Bus
Display the bus nominal kVs of the connected primary and secondary terminals.
Impedance
Positive and Zero Sequence Impedances
These are the positive and zero sequence impedances at the nominal tap setting, in percent, with the
transformer MVA and kV ratings as the base values. Note that these values correspond to the nominal
positive and zero impedances, which are subject to manufacturer tolerance limits and tap position.

PowerStation models the transformers in the system using the positive and zero sequence impedances.
PowerStation takes the voltage of the swing bus (a bus with a connected swing machine) as the base
voltage. It then calculates the system base voltages using the transformer turn ratio. If the transformer turn
ratio matches the ratio of the base kVs of the buses between which it is connected, but the actual numbers
are not the same (e.g., the primary bus base kV is 13.8 and the secondary bus is 4.349 kV, while the
transformer kV ratings are 13.2-4.16 kV), PowerStation adjusts the nameplate impedance to a new base
with the following formula:

Z
t,new
= Z
t, rated
* (Transformer Rated kV / Bus Base kV)
2

In some cases, when you have parallel transformers with different voltage ratings, introduce a fictitious
tap setting so that the calculated base voltage at the load side of the transformers will be the same value
(refer to 2-Winding Transformer kV rating).
X/R Ratio
Enter the transformer X/R ratio. This value is used in PowerStation to calculate the transformer winding
resistances and reactances from given percent impedances.
Typical Z & X/R and Typical X/R
Click on the appropriate button to obtain the typical 2-winding transformer impedance together with X/R
ration, or X/R ration only. The typical impedance and X/R ratio data for 2-winding transformers are
based on two sources: American National Standard C57.12.10 and Industrial Power System Handbook by
Beeman.

The Industrial Power System Handbook by Beeman (page 96) specifies typical data for transformers that
has rating not larger than 500 kVA and primary voltage not higher than 12.47 kV.

Typical Impedance for Transformer Less Than or equal to 500 kVA

Group 1 * Group2
+

Rating % Z X/R % Z X/R
kVA 5 2.3 0.88 2.8 0.77
5< kVA 25 2.3 1.13 2.3 1.00
25< kVA 50 2.6 1.69 2.4 1.54
50< kVA 100 2.6 1.92 3.7 2.92
100< kVA 167 4.0 3.45 3.7 3.60
167< kVA 500 4.8 4.70 5.2 5.10
* Group 1: Transformers with high voltage windings of less than or equal to 8.32 kV
+ Group 2: Transformers with high voltages of greater than 8.32 kV and less than or equal to 12.47 kV

American National Standard C57.12.10 specifies impedance values for transformers larger than 500 kVA.


Typical Impedance for Transformer More Than 500 kVA
Low Voltage Side 2.4 kV
High Voltage Side
Low Voltage Side
< 2.4 kV
Without LTC With LTC
kV 13.8 5.75 ** 5.5**
13.8 < kV 23 6.75 6.5 7.0
23 < kV 34.5 7.25 7.0 7.5
34.5 < kV 46 7.75 7.5 8.0
46 < kV 69 8.0 8.5
69 < kV 115 8.5 9.0
115 < kV 138 9.0 9.5
138 < kV 161 9.5 10.0
161 < kV (230) 10.0 10.5
** Self-cooled transformers with greater than 5000 kVA values are the same as those for 23 kV high
voltage.

Typical X/R Ratios for Transformer More Than 500 kVA
Rating X/R Rating X/R
MVA 1 5.790 8 < MVA 10 15.50
1 < MVA 2 7.098 10 < MVA 20 18.60
2 < MVA 3 10.67 20 < MVA 30 23.70
3 < MVA 4 11.41 30 < MVA 40 27.30
4 < MVA 5 12.14 40 < MVA 50 29.50
5 < MVA 6 12.85 50 < MVA 100 34.10
6 < MVA 7 13.55 100 < MVA 200 42.00
7 < MVA 8 14.23 200 < MVA 1000 50.00
Z Variation
Enter transformer impedance variations with respect to the tap settings. If these values are not zero, then
the final 2-winding transformer impedance will be calculated based on the nominal tap impedance values
(entered for Positive and Zero Sequence Impedances, %Z fields), transformer primary and secondary
winding tap positions (from both the fixed tap and the LTC tap settings), and impedance variation at 5%
tap and +5% tap. A linear interpolation is used to calculate the final transformer impedance.


% Variation @ -5% Tap
Enter transformer impedance variation at 5% tap position, in percent of the transformer impedance at
nominal tap position. This value is used to adjust the transformer impedance due to either the primary
and secondary winding tap changes.

Zt at 5% Tap = (Zt at Nominal Tap) * (100 + % Variation @ 5% Tap) / 100
% Variation @ +5% Tap
Enter transformer impedance variation at +5% tap position, in percent of the transformer impedance at

Zt at +5% Tap = (Zt at Nominal Tap) * (100 + % Variation @ +5% Tap) / 100
Z Tolerance
Enter the transformer impedance tolerance as a percentage of the nominal value. This value should be
zero for an existing transformer with a known impedance value. For a new transformer with a designated
impedance value this should be the impedance tolerance range specified by the manufacturer. The value
of the tolerance must be entered as a positive value and PowerStation will automatically use the positive
or negative value, which will result in the most conservative solution.

Tolerance
Negative Positive
Load Flow X
Short-Circuit X
Motor Starting X
Transient Stability X
Harmonics X
Optimal Power Flow X

For instance, if 7.5% tolerance is specified, PowerStation will use +7.5% tolerance for load flow, motor
starting, dynamic stability, and harmonic calculations, while using -7.5% for short-circuit calculations.

8.2.3 Tap Page
Within the Tap page, specify the transformer tap data for both fixed taps and LTC taps. Transformer
winding and grounding connections are also specified in this page.

% Tap / kV Tap
Enter the transformer tap setting in percent, while the button is set on % Tap, or click on the Tap button
for kV tap selection and enter the transformer tap setting in kV. Note that in either case, PowerStation
calculates the equivalent value for the other tap setting entry format.

PowerStation allows modeling of an off-load tap (fixed tap) changer on either side or both sides of
transformers. Standard off-load tap changer transformers typically have
5.0% settings available, with

two steps above and two steps below the nominal tap setting. For these transformers, the value of (n) may
be set at -5.0, -2.5, 0, 2.5, or 5.0.

For transformers without voltage taps or where the tap is set at nominal value (n = 0), the transformer is
treated as a simple circuit impedance. PowerStation uses the following Pi circuit representation to model
transformer tap settings:


where
Yt = 1 / Zt Transformer admittance in per unit
N = 1 + n / 100 Turn ratio in per unit
n = 100 ( N - 1 ) Tap setting in percent

Positive (+) tap setting on the primary side (P), decreases the voltage on the secondary side (Vs).
Negative (-) tap setting on the primary side (P), increases the voltage on the secondary side (Vs).

As this model indicates, placing +10% tap setting (n=+10%, or N=1.1) at the primary side is not
equivalent to -10% tap at the secondary side. PowerStation will correctly model a transformer with a tap
setting, as long as the tap setting is indicated in the proper field (corresponding to the winding that has the
tap changer). To increase the voltage at the other side of the transformer, use a negative tap value. Note,
however, that this will only work if current flows from the tap changer bus to the bus where the voltage is
being corrected.
Per Unit Turn Ratio
Display the transformer turn ratio in per unit, using the fixed tap setting.

Per Unit Turn Ratio = 1.0 - %Tap / 100
Connection
These entries specify the transformer connection, type, and current rating of the grounding device.
Grounding can be placed on either or both sides of Y-Y connected transformers. All transformers are
assumed to be Y-Y or Delta-Delta for Load Flow, Motor Starting, and Transient Stability Analysis if the
Apply XFMR Phase Shift is not checked in the Study Case Editor, i.e., no transformer phase shift will
occur as a result of a Delta-Y or Y-Delta connection.

Prim. / Sec. Buttons
The grounding connection of each winding can be selected by clicking on the connection buttons until the
desired connection is displayed. The available connections are Wye and Delta.
Grounding
Type
For Wye-connected windings, choose from the four grounding types provided in the list box:

Open Neutral is not connected to ground (ungrounded)
Solid Solidly grounded, no intentional impedance in the neutral grounding path
Resistor A resistor is used in the neutral grounding path
Reactor A reactor is used in the neutral grounding path
Amp
For resistor or reactor grounded windings, enter the resistor or reactor rating in amperes.

Amp Rating = (Line-to-Neutral Voltage) / (Resistor Ohmic Value)

Where the line-to-neutral voltage is the rated voltage of the transformer winding divided by 3. This entry
is skipped for Delta connected windings and for Wye solidly grounded with open-neutral.

Ohm
For windings that are resistor or reactor grounded, this field displays the resistance / reactance value of
the grounding resistor / reactor in ohms.
Auto LTC (Load Tap Changer)
You can have both fixed and LTC tap settings (off-load and manual on-load) on both transformer
windings. However, you cannot have LTC automatic actions on both windings of the transformers.
Prim.
Check this box to activate automatic control action of the Load Tap Changer (LTC) for the primary
winding, i.e., if checked LTC is in automatic mode, else it is in manual mode.
Sec.
Check this box to activate automatic control action of the Load Tap Changer (LTC) for the secondary
LTC Button
When the associated check box is selected, the LTC button is enabled. Click on this button to enter LTC
data.
LTC Tap Position
Operating
Here you can enter the LTC tap positions for the LTC manual mode or as the initial position for the LTC
automatic mode.

The LTC tap positions get updated from load flow studies providing the option for Update Transformer
LTCs is checked in the Load Flow Study Case Editor.

Note that, the tap settings entered here are added to the fixed tap setting for all studies. If LTC is in
automatic mode, this calculated value (fixed tap + LTC Tap Position) is used as the initial value.
On-Line Scanned
When in On-Line monitoring mode, PSMS will display the Scanned Tap Position value for this
transformer in this field.
Phase Shift
This section allows the user to specify phase-shift associated with the transformer. The phase-shift angle
is displayed in the Sec field, which is the secondary voltage angle with respect to primary voltage angle.
For example, a value of 30 indicates that the secondary voltage leads the primary voltage by 30 degree,
or equivalently it actually lags the primary voltage by 30 degrees.
Std Pos. Seq.
Check this radio button to specify positive sequence phase-shift, which means that when the primary and
secondary windings have different connection types (Delta-Y or Y-Delta), the high voltage side leads the
low voltage side by 30 degree. If the primary side has higher rated voltage, the Sec field displays 30
degrees; otherwise, the Sec field shows 30 degrees. When the primary and the secondary have the same
connection type, the phase-shift is zero.

Std Neg. Seq.
Check this radio button to specify negative sequence phase-shift, which is the opposite of the previous
case. When the primary and secondary windings have different connection types (Delta-Y or Y-Delta),
the high voltage side lags the low voltage side by 30 degree. If the primary side has higher rated voltage,
the Sec field displays 30 degrees; otherwise, the Sec field shows -30 degrees. When the primary and the
secondary have the same connection type, the phase-shift is zero.
Special
When this radio button is checked, the Sec. Field becomes enabled and you can specify the phase shift in
this edit box. Please note that the value your entered is the angle at which the secondary with respect to
the primary.
Sec.
When one of the first two options is selected, this field is for display only and it shows the angle at which
the secondary winding with respect the primary winding. When the third option is selected, you can enter
the phase-shift in the field.
8.2.4 LTC Dialog Box

Regulated Bus
Bus ID
Select the bus ID of an existing bus for which the LTC will be regulating or controlling the voltage. The
default bus is the secondary bus. Note: the load flow routine may not be able to regulate the voltages of
the buses that are not affected by the LTC action. In such cases, the LTC may reach its limit before the
desired voltage is reached for the controlled bus. Possible examples of this are when the regulated bus is
not downstream of the transformer, or there is a voltage-controlled bus in between the two components.
When this occurs, the LTC cannot control the voltage of the regulated bus.

Voltage Control
Voltage
Enter the desired voltage of the regulated bus in percent of the bus nominal voltage, i.e., the regulated bus
voltage. In the load flow type analysis; PowerStation will adjust the LTC setting until the voltage of the
regulated bus is within the upper or lower bands of the desired voltage.
Upper Band
Enter the upper band value above the desired voltage.
Lower Band
Enter the lower band value below the desired voltage.

The upper band and lower band together define the dead band for the LTC. As shown in the diagram,
when the voltage of the regulated bus falls within the dead band (gray area), the LTC will not move; if the
voltage of the regulated bus is higher than the (Desired Voltage + Upper Band) or less than (Desired
Voltage Lower Band), the LTC will make a step adjustment to control the bus voltage close to its
desired value.

In order for the LTC to work properly, PowerStation forces the sum of the upper and lower bands to be
larger than or equal to the LTC step.

Desired Voltage
Upper Band
Lower Band

Tap
% Tap / kV Tap
Enter the transformer LTC tap setting in percent while the button is set on % Tap, or click on the Tap
button for kV Tap selection and enter the transformer LTC tap setting in kV. Note that in either case
PowerStation calculates the equivalent value for the other tap setting entry format.
Min
Enter the lower limit (range) of the LTC tap setting in kV or % of the winding kV rating. If the % Tap is
selected, enter 10.0 for a 10% range (-15 for

15% range). If the kV Tap is selected, enter the kV
value of the lower range of the LTC setting.
Max
Enter the upper limit (range) of the LTC tap setting in kV or % of the winding kV rating. If the % Tap is
selected, enter 10.0 for a 10% range (15 for

15% range). If the kV Tap is selected, enter the kV value
of the upper range of the LTC setting.

Step
Enter the LTC step size in kV or % of the winding kV rating. If the % Tap is selected, enter 0.625 for a
10% range with 33 steps (sixteen steps on each side plus the nominal setting). If the kV Tap is
selected, enter the step size of the LTC in kV.
kV Tap
These three fields will display the corresponding kV values for LTC Min. tap, Max. Tap, and Step.
# of Taps
This value is automatically calculated and displayed according to the following formula:

# of Taps = 1 + ( %Max Tap - %Min Tap) / (%Step)

You can adjust this value to change Step:

%Step = (%Max Tap %Min Tap) / (# of Taps 1)
Time Delay
Initial
Enter the LTC initial time delay in seconds.
Operating
Enter the LTC operating time delay in seconds.
8.2.5 Harmonic Page
Transformer saturation can be modeled by a current harmonic source. To include the saturation effect, a
harmonic library needs to be defined here.


Type
Displays the harmonic source type.
Manufacturer
Displays the selected manufacturer names from the harmonic library.
Model
Displays the selected model names for the selected manufacturer from the harmonic
library.
Wave Form
Displays one cycle of the current waveform of the selected harmonic library in time domain.
Print (Wave Form)
Prints the harmonic waveform.
Spectrum
Displays the harmonic spectrum of the selected harmonic library.
Print (Spectrum)
Prints the harmonic spectrum.
Harmonic Library
Library
Click on the Library button to bring up the Harmonic Library Quick Pick Editor. Note that only current
harmonic sources can be added to transformers.

From the Harmonic Library Quick Pick Editor, pick a manufacturer name and a model name (Current
Source harmonic type).


A
It is the active failure rate in number of failures per year per unit length. The active failure rate is
associated with the component failure mode that causes the operation of the primary protection zone
around the failed component and can therefore cause the removal of the other healthy components and
branches from service. After the actively failed component is isolated and the protection breakers are
reclosed. This leads to service being restored to some or all of the load points. It should be noted,
however, that the failed component itself (and those components that are directly connected to this failed
component) could be restored to service only after repair or replacement.

P
It is the passive failure rate in number of failures per year. The passive failure rate is associated with the
component failure mode that does not cause the operation of protection breakers and therefore does not
have an impact on the remaining healthy components. Repairing or replacing the failed component will
restore service. Examples of passive failures include opening circuits and inadvertent opening of breakers.
Enter the total forced failure rate in f/yr per unit length. The passive failure rate is associated with the
have an impact on the remaining healthy components. Repairing or replacing the failed component
restores service. Examples are open circuits and inadvertent opening of breakers.

MTTR


It is the mean repair rate in number of repairs per year, calculated automatically based on MTTR ( =
8760/MTTR).

MTTF
It is the Mean Time To Failure in years calculated automatically based on
A
and
P
( MTTF =
1.0/(
A
+
P
) ).

FOR

It is the Forced Outage Rate (i.e., unavailability) calculated based on MTTR,
A
and
P
(FOR =
MTTR/(MTTR+8760/(
A
+
P
)).

Switching Time
Switching time is the time in hours for isolating a failure. It is the period starting from the time a
switching operation is requested due to a forced outage until that the operation is completed.

Available
P

r
P
It is the replacement time in hours for replacing a failed element by a spare one.

Library

8.2.7 Remarks Page

User-Defined Info

UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchase Date

8.2.8 Comments Page



8.3 Transformer, 3-Winding
The properties associated with 3-winding transformers of the electrical distribution system can be entered
in this editor. The 3-Winding Transformer Editor includes eight pages of properties, as well as
information regarding the use of load tap changers (LTC).

Info Page
Rating Page
Tap Page
LTC Dialog Box
Harmonic Page
Reliability
Remarks Page
Comment Page
8.3.1 Info Page
Within the Info Page, specify the 3-winding transformer ID, In/Out of Service, Primary, Secondary, and
Tertiary Buses, Feeder Tag, Name, Description, and Manufacturers data.

Info
ID

PowerStation automatically assigns a unique ID to each transformer. The assigned IDs consist of the
default transformer ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of
transformers increase. The default transformer ID (T) can be changed from the Defaults Menu in the
menu bar or from the Project View.

Primary, Secondary & Tertiary
Bus IDs for the connecting buses of a 3-winding transformer are designated as Primary, Secondary, and
Tertiary buses. If the primary, secondary, or tertiary terminal of a transformer is not connected to any bus,
a blank entry will be shown for bus ID. To connect or reconnect a transformer to a bus, select a bus from
the list box. The one-line diagram will be updated to show the new connection after you click on OK.
Note that you can only connect to buses that reside in the same view where the transformer resides, i.e.,

If a transformer is connected to a bus through a number of protective devices, reconnection of the
transformer to a new bus from the editor will reconnect the last existing protective device to the new bus,
as shown below where T2 is reconnected from Bus10 to Bus4.

Connection
Displays the transformer phase connection type. Currently 3 Winding Transformers are 3 Phase only.
In/Out of Service
The operating condition of a transformer can be selected by choosing either the In Service or Out of
dimmed.

Equipment
FDR Tag
Name

Description

Type/Class
MFR
Enter the 3-winding transformer manufacturer name.
Type
Select the transformer type from the list box. The following transformer types are available:

Cast-Coil
Gas-Fill-Dry
Liquid-Fill
Non-Vent-Dry (non-vented dry type)
Sealed-Dry
Vent-Dry
Other
Class
Select the transformer class from the list box. The following transformer classes are available:

OA\FA OW
OA\FA\FA OW\A
OA\FA\FOA Other
OA\FOA\FOA
Temp
Select the transformer operating temperature from the list box. The following transformer operating
temperatures are available:

55
60
65
80
115
130
150

Other temperatures can be typed directly into the temperature box.
BIL
Select the transformer basic impulse level (BIL) in kV from the list box. The following transformer basic
impulse levels are available:

30
45
60
95
110
125
150
200


8.3.2 Rating Page
Within the Rating Page, specify the 3-winding transformer ratings, impedance and its variation and the
tolerance data.

Rating
Prim - Sec - Ter kV Rating
Enter primary, secondary, and tertiary voltage ratings of the 3-winding transformer in kilovolts. Note that
when connecting a transformer to a bus, the kV of the winding (if it is equal to zero) is set equal to the bus
nominal kV. PowerStation uses the voltage at the lowest-numbered swing system as the base voltage and
calculates the other base voltages using the transformer ratios. PowerStation gives an error message when
it detects inconsistent voltage bases in parallel or looped systems during system analysis.
Prim - Sec - Ter MVA Rating
Enter primary, secondary, and tertiary MVA or kVA ratings of the 3-winding transformer. The MVA
rating of the primary winding is used as the base MVA for all transformer impedances. For example, for a
20/15/5 MVA transformer with an OA 55 / FA 65 C rating, the nameplate transformer impedances
should be entered in 20 MVA base (OA 55 C rating).
Max MVA Capability
These values, if non-zero, are used to calculate the percent overload of the transformer windings. If the
maximum MVA capability of the transformer is greater than zero, the branch will be listed on the
overload summary page of the load flow output report, i.e., PowerStation will ignore this value if it is set
to zero and this branch will not be included in the overload summary report. For a transformer with OA
55 / FA 65 C ratings, the FA 65 C rating should be used as the maximum MVA capability if fans have
been installed on the transformer.

This value is also used as a base for the transformer flow constraint in the optimal power flow studies.
FLA
Display the FLA of the primary, secondary, and tertiary windings in amperes.

Connected Bus
Display the nominal kVs of the connected buses to the primary, secondary,
and tertiary windings.
Impedance
Positive and Zero Sequence Impedances
For 3-winding transformers, specify three impedance values in percent on the primary winding MVA
base:

Zps = Leakage Z between the Primary and Secondary windings with the Tertiary winding open
circuited.
= Rps + j Xps = Rp + Rs + j ( Xp + Xs ) % (base MVA = MVAp)

Zpt = Leakage Z between the Primary and Tertiary windings with the Secondary winding open
circuited.
= Rpt + j Xpt = Rp + Rt + j ( Xp + Xt ) % (base MVA = MVAp)

Zst = Leakage Z between the Secondary and Tertiary windings with the Primary winding open
circuited.
= Rst + j Xst = Rs + Rt + j ( Xs + Xt ) % (base MVA = MVAp)

These are the nameplate impedances of the transformer; no further calculations are needed to extract the
impedances of the 3-winding representation, as PowerStation already does this internally. The following
example is provided to indicate how the impedance parameters of a three-winding transformer must be
entered in PowerStation.

30 / 25 / 5 MVA
230 / 13.8 / 4.16 kV

MVAp = 30 kVp = 230
MVAs = 25 kVs = 13.8
MVAt = 5 kVt = 4.16

Zps = 9.5 % MVAb = 30, X/R ps = 48.2
Zpt = 9.4 % MVAb = 30, X/R pt = 46.9
Zst = 18.1 % MVAb = 30, X/R st = 42.5


PowerStation models the transformers in the system using the positive and zero sequence impedances.
PowerStation takes the voltage of the swing bus (a bus with a connected swing machine) as the base
voltage. It then calculates the system base voltages using the transformer turn ratio. If the transformer turn
ratio matches the ratio of the base kVs of the buses between which it is connected, but the actual numbers
are not the same (e.g., the primary bus base kV is 13.8 and the secondary bus is 4.349 kV, while the
transformer kV ratings are 13.2-4.16 kV), PowerStation adjusts the nameplate impedance to a new base
with the following formula:

Z
t,new
= Z
t,rated
* (Transformer Rated kV / Bus Base kV)
2

In some cases, parallel transformers with different voltage ratings are present. If this happens, a fictitious
tap setting is required. To calculate this setting, refer to 2-Winding Transformer kV rating.

X/R Ratio
Enter the transformer X/R ratios. For 3-winding transformers, three X/R values are needed, corresponding
to the three winding impedances Zps, Zpt, and Zst.

X/R ps = Xps / Rps
X/R pt = Xpt / Rpt
X/R st = Xst / Rst

These ratios are used in PowerStation to calculate the transformer winding resistances and reactances
from given percent impedances.
Z Variation
Enter transformer impedance variations with respect to the tap settings. If these values are not zero, then
the final transformer impedance will be calculated based on the nominal tap impedance values (entered
for Positive and Zero Sequence Impedances, %Z fields), transformer primary, secondary, and tertiary
winding tap positions (from both the fixed tap and the LTC tap settings), and impedance variation at 5%
tap and +5% tap. A linear interpolation is used to calculate the final transformer impedance.

% Variation @ -5% Tap
Enter transformer impedance variation at 5% tap position, in percent of the transformer impedance at

Zt at 5% Tap = (Zt at Nominal Tap) * (100 + % Variation @ 5% Tap) / 100


% Variation @ +5% Tap
Enter transformer impedance variation at +5% tap position, in percent of the transformer impedance at

Zt at +5% Tap = (Zt at Nominal Tap) * (100 + % Variation @ +5% Tap) / 100
Z Tolerance
Enter the transformer impedance tolerance as a percentage of the nominal value. This value should be
zero for an existing transformer with a known impedance value. For a new transformer with a designated
impedance value this should be the impedance tolerance range specified by the manufacturer. The value
of the tolerance must be entered as a positive value and PowerStation will automatically use the positive
or negative value, which will result in the most conservative solution.

Tolerance
Negative Positive
Load Flow X
Short-Circuit X
Motor Starting X
Harmonics X
Optimal Power Flow X

For instance, if 7.5% tolerance is specified, PowerStation will use +7.5% tolerance for load flow, motor
starting, dynamic stability, and harmonic calculations, while using -7.5% for short-circuit calculations.
8.3.3 Tap Page
Within the Tap page, specify the 3-winding transformer tap data for both fixed tap and LTC tap.
Transformer winding and grounding connections are also specified in this page.


Fixed Taps
% Tap / kV Tap
Enter the transformer tap setting in percent while the button is set on % Tap, or click on the Tap button
for kV tap selection and enter the transformer tap setting in percent or kV. Note that in either case

PowerStation allows modeling a tap off-load (fixed tap) changer on all three sides of the transformer.
Standard off-load tap changer transformers typically have
5.0% settings available, with two steps above

and two steps below the nominal tap setting. For these transformers, the value of (n) may be set at -5.0, -
2.5, 0, 2.5, or 5.0.

For transformers without voltage taps or where the tap is set at a nominal value (n = 0), the transformer is
treated as a simple circuit impedance.

Placing a +10% tap setting (n=+10%, or N=1.1) at the primary side is not equivalent to -10% tap at the
secondary side. PowerStation will correctly model a transformer with a tap setting as long as the tap
setting is indicated in the proper field (corresponding to the winding that has the tap changer). To increase
the voltage at the other side of the transformer, use a negative tap value. Note: this will only work if
current flows from the tap changer bus to the bus where the voltage is being corrected.
Per Unit Turn Ratio
Display the transformer turn ratio in per unit, using the fixed tap setting.
Per Unit Turn Ratio = 1.0 - %Tap / 100
Connection
These entries specify the transformer connection, type, and rating of the grounding device in amperes.
Grounding can be placed on any transformer winding.
Prim. / Sec. / Ter. Buttons
The transformer grounding connection can be selected by clicking on the connection buttons until the
Grounding
Type
For Wye-connected windings, choose from these four grounding types provided in the list box:

Amp
For Wye-connected, resistor or reactor grounded windings, enter the resistor or reactor rating in amperes.

Where the line-to-neutral voltage is the rated voltage of the transformer winding divided by 3.

Ohm
Display the grounding resistor resistance / reactor reactance in ohms.

Auto LTC (Load Tap Changer)
You can have both fixed and LTC tap settings (off-load and manual on-load) on all transformer windings.
However, you cannot have LTC automatic actions on more than two windings of the three-winding
transformers.
Prim.
Check this box to activate automatic control action of the Load Tap Changer (LTC) for the primary

Sec.
Check this box to activate automatic control action of the Load Tap Changer (LTC) for the secondary
Ter.
Check this box to activate automatic control action of the Load Tap Changer (LTC) for the tertiary
LTC Button
When the associated check box is selected, the LTC button is enabled. Click on this button to enter LTC
data.
LTC Tap Position
Operating
Here you can enter the LTC tap positions for the LTC manual mode or as the initial position for the LTC
automatic mode.

The LTC tap positions get updated from load flow studies providing the option for Update Transformer
LTCs is checked in the Load Flow Study Case Editor.

Note that, the tap settings entered here are added to the fixed tap setting for all studies. If LTC is in
automatic mode, this calculated value (fixed tap + LTC Tap Position) is used as the initial value.
OnLine Scanned
If in the On-Line Monitoring mode, PSMS will display the scanned Tap Position in this field.
Phase Shift
This section allows the user to specify phase-shift associated with the transformer. Phase-shift for a
three-winding transformer can be uniquely defined by two values. ETAP PowerStation uses Sec. and Ter.
to describe phase-shift of a three-winding transformer. The value displayed in the Sec. field is the
secondary voltage angle with respect to primary voltage angle and the value displayed in the Ter. field is
the tertiary voltage angle with respect to primary voltage angle. For example, a value of 30 in the Ter.
field indicates that the tertiary voltage leads the primary voltage by 30 degree, or equivalently it actually

lags the primary voltage by 30 degrees. The phase-shift between the secondary and the tertiary windings
can be calculated from the values in the Sec. and Ter. fields.
Std Pos. Seq.
Check this radio button to specify positive sequence phase-shift, which means that when the primary and
secondary windings have different connection types (Delta-Y or Y-Delta), the high voltage side leads the
low voltage side by 30 degree. If the primary side has higher rated voltage, the Sec field displays 30
degrees; otherwise, the Sec field shows 30 degrees. When the primary and the secondary have the same
connection type, the phase-shift is zero. The same rules apply to the primary and tertiary windings and
the phase-shift value is displayed in the Ter field.
Std Neg. Seq.
Check this radio button to specify negative sequence phase-shift, which is the opposite of the previous
case. When the primary and secondary windings have different connection types (Delta-Y or Y-Delta),
the high voltage side lags the low voltage side by 30 degree. If the primary side has higher rated voltage,
the Sec. field displays 30 degrees; otherwise, the Sec. field shows -30 degrees. When the primary and the
secondary have the same connection type, the phase-shift is zero. The same rules apply to the primary and
tertiary windings and the phase-shift value is displayed in the Ter. field.
Special.
When this radio button is checked, the Sec. and Ter. fields become enabled and you can specify the
phase-shift in these two edit boxes.
Sec.
the secondary winding with respect the primary winding. When the third option is selected, you can enter
the phase-shift in the field.
Ter.
the tertiary winding with respect the primary winding. When the third option is selected, you can enter the
phase-shift in the field.

8.3.4 LTC Dialog Box

Regulated Bus
Bus ID
Select the bus ID of an existing bus for which the LTC will be regulating or controlling the voltage. The
default bus is the secondary bus. Note: the load flow routine may not be able to regulate the voltages of
the buses that are not affected by the LTC action. In such cases, the LTC may reach its limit before the
desired voltage is reached for the controlled bus. Possible examples of this are when the regulated bus is
not downstream of the transformer, or there is a voltage-controlled bus in between the two components.
When this occurs, the LTC cannot control the voltage of the regulated bus.

Voltage Control
Voltage
Enter the desired voltage of the regulated bus in percent of the bus nominal voltage, i.e., the regulated bus
voltage. In the load flow type analysis; PowerStation will adjust the LTC setting until the voltage of the
regulated bus is within the upper or lower bands of the desired voltage.

Upper Band
Enter the upper band value above the desired voltage.
Lower Band
Enter the lower band value below the desired voltage.

The upper band and lower band together define the dead band for the LTC. As shown in the diagram
below, when the voltage of the regulated bus falls within the dead band (gray area), the LTC will not
move; otherwise, if the voltage of the regulated bus is higher than the (Desired Voltage + Upper Band) or
less than (Desired Voltage Lower Band), the LTC will make a step adjustment to control the bus
voltage close to its desired value

Desired Voltage
Upper Band
Lower Band

Tap
% Tap / kV Tap
Enter the transformer LTC tap setting in percent while the button is set on % Tap, or click on the Tap
button for kV Tap selection and enter the transformer LTC tap setting in kV. Note that in either case
Min
Enter the lower limit (range) of the LTC tap setting in kV or % of the winding kV rating. If the % Tap is
selected, enter 10.0 for a 10% range (-15 for

15% range). If the kV Tap is selected, enter the kV
value of the lower range of the LTC setting.
Max
Enter the upper limit (range) of the LTC tap setting in kV or % of the winding kV rating. If the % Tap is
selected, enter 10.0 for a 10% range (15 for

15% range). If the kV Tap is selected, enter the kV value
of the upper range of the LTC setting.
Step
Enter the LTC step size in kV or % of the winding kV rating. If the % Tap is selected, enter 0.625 for a
10% range with 33 steps (sixteen steps on each side plus the nominal setting). If the kV Tap is
selected, enter the step size of the LTC in kV.
kV Tap
These three fields will display the corresponding kV values for LTC Min. tap, Max. tap, and Step.

# of Taps
This value is automatically calculated and displayed according to the following formula:

# of Taps = 1 + ( %Max Tap - %Min Tap) / (%Step)

You can adjust this value to change Step:

%Step = (%Max Tap %Min Tap) / (# of Taps 1)
Time Delay
Initial
Enter the LTC initial time delay in seconds.
Operating
Enter the LTC operating time delay in seconds.
8.3.5 Harmonic Page
Transformer saturation can be modeled by a current harmonic source. To include the saturation effect, a
harmonic library needs to be defined here.

Type
Manufacturer
Displays the selected manufacturer names from the harmonic library.
Model
Displays the selected model names for the selected manufacturer from the harmonic library.

Wave Form
Displays one cycle of the current waveform of the selected harmonic library in time domain.
Print (Wave Form)
Spectrum
Print (Spectrum)

Harmonic Library
Library
Click on the Library button to bring up the Harmonic Library Quick Pick Editor. Note that only current
harmonic sources can be added to transformers.

From the Harmonic Library Quick Pick Editor, pick a manufacturer name and a model name (Current


A
It is the active failure rate in number of failures per year. The active failure rate is associated with the
component failure mode that causes the operation of the primary protection zone around the failed
component and can therefore cause the removal of the other healthy components and branches from
service. After the actively failed component is isolated and the protection breakers are reclosed. This
leads to service being restored to some or all of the load points. It should be noted, however, that the
failed component itself (and those components that are directly connected to this failed component) could
be restored to service only after repair or replacement.

P

MTTR


8760/MTTR).

MTTF
A
and
P
( MTTF =
1.0/(
A
+
P
) ).

FOR

A
and
P
(FOR =
MTTR/(MTTR+8760/(
A
+
P
)).

Switching Time

Available
P

r
P

Library

8.3.7 Remarks Page

User-Defined Info

UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchase Date

8.3.8 Comment Page



AC Elements Cable

8.4 Cable
The properties associated with cables of the electrical distribution system one-line diagram can be entered
in this data editor.

PowerStation allows you to place cables in the one-line diagram to connect two elements (two buses, a
motor to a bus, or a static load to a bus) and place the same cable in a cable raceway. However, you can
add cables to the one-line diagram without placing them in a cable raceway, or add cables to the raceway
without adding them to the one-line diagram. To explain this further, here are the definitions of the four
types of cables in PowerStation.

1. One-Line Cable appears as a graphical element on the one-line diagram. This is a cable that you add
to the one-line diagram to connect buses, but has not been previously routed through any cable
raceway, i.e., does not exist in any raceway.
2. Equipment Cable can be attached to equipment such as motors and static loads, but do not appear
graphically as a separate element on the one-line diagram. This is a cable that you add to equipment
from the equipment editor, and has not been placed in any raceway.
3. Raceway Cable is used exclusively within the cable raceway system only. This is a cable, which is
routed through a raceway such as an underground cable system, but does not exist in the one-line
diagram or as an equipment cable.
4. Compound Cable represents a cable that is included in the cable raceway system as well as the one-
line diagram (either as a one-line or equipment cable). This cable is added to the one-line diagram as
a one-line or equipment cable, and then is placed inside a raceway (graphically or from Cable or
Raceway Editors). Or, conversely, the cable is added as a raceway cable, and then is placed in the
one-line diagram as a one-line cable.
Compound Cables
The following shows three different methods of changing a one-line or equipment cable to a compound
cable (routing an existing cable through a raceway):

From the underground raceway presentation, click on the Existing Cable button on the Edit Toolbar and
place the cable in the desired location. Then select the desired one-line or equipment cable from the
selection box provided.

From the Cable Editor, Routing Page, route the cable through any raceway that exists in the system.
These cables are attached or associated with the raceways without being placed in a specific location
inside the raceway. From the underground raceway system, you can then graphically move the cable to
the desired location.

To graphically place a one-line cable inside a cable raceway, select the cable from the one-line diagram
and press <Ctrl><Shift>+Click (holding the mouse button down). The cursor will now have an X over it
indicating that you can only drop it in an underground cable system. Hold the mouse button down until
you have moved the cursor from the one-line view to the UGS view, place the cursor on top of a conduit
or the desired location in a raceway, and then release the mouse button. Since an equipment cable is not
displayed graphically in the one-line diagram, you can only use the first two methods explained above for
routing an equipment cable.

Note: a raceway cable cannot be changed to an equipment cable. However, an equipment cable can be
changed to a compound cable.
AC Elements Cable

You can add a raceway cable to the one-line diagram and make it a compound cable in two ways:

1. First select the cable from the raceway and cut it to the Dumpster. Now you can add it back to the
same raceway as an existing cable while a copy of it stay in the Dumpster. To add this cable to the
one-line diagram, use the Move From Dumpster command.
2. Select the cable from the raceway and then press <Ctrl><Shift>+Click (holding the mouse button
down). The cursor will change to a cable shape with an X over it. Hold the mouse button down until
you have moved the cursor from the UGS view to the desired location on the one-line view, and then
release the mouse button.

The cable editor includes the following ten pages of properties.

Info Page
Impedance Page
Physical Page
Routing Page
Loading Page
Ampacity Page
Sizing Page
Reliability
Remarks Page
Comment Page
8.4.1 Info Page
Within the Info Page, specify the cable ID, From and To bus ID, In/Out of Service, Length, Size, number
of conductors per phase, and Library link.

AC Elements Cable

Cable Type
This information is displayed on top of every page of the Cable Editor to reflect the cable type and size
selected from the Cable Library. This is a partial list of the library header which includes the library
source name (ICEA, NEC), rated voltage (0.6, 5, 15 kV), voltage class (100%, 133%), # of conductors
per cable (1/C, 3/C), conductor type (CU, AL), insulation type (Rubber, XLPE), installation type
(Magnetic/Non-Mag.), and cable size (350 kcmil, 180 mm2). The unit for cable sizes will be in
AWG/kcmil for English unit cables and mm2 for Metric unit cables. Note that PowerStation provides list
of all available cable sizes from the selected library for quick selection.

If you change the cable size, all library data will be substituted from the cable library into the Cable
Editor. To indicate a conflict between the editor and library data, the color of Cable Type will change to
blue if you modify any data, which was substituted from the library.
Info
ID

PowerStation automatically assigns a unique ID to each cable. The assigned IDs consist of the default
cable ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of cables increase.
The default cable ID (Cable) can be changed from the Defaults Menu in the menu bar or from the Project
View.
From & To
Bus IDs for the connecting buses of a cable branch are designated as From and To buses. If a terminal of
a branch (From or To) is not connected to any bus, a blank entry will be shown for bus ID. To connect or
reconnect a branch to a bus, select a bus from the list box. The one-line diagram will be updated to show
the new connection after you click OK. Note: you can only connect to buses that reside in the same view
where the branch resides, i.e., you cannot connect to a bus that resides in the Dumpster or in another
composite network.

For 3 Phase Cables, only 3 Phase buses will be displayed in the drop down lists. For Single Phase Cables
only single phase buses will be displayed.

If a branch is connected to a bus through a number of protective devices, reconnection of the branch to a
new bus from the editor will reconnect the last existing protective device to the new bus, as shown here
where Branch X is reconnected from Bus10 to Bus4.

AC Elements Cable

Next to the From and To bus IDs, PowerStation displays the nominal kV of the buses for your
convenience.

Single Phase Cable can also be connected to Phase Adapters. If the Cable is connected as such, then the
Phase Adapter ID will show in the Primary or Secondary field.

In/Out of Service
The operating condition of a cable can be selected by choosing either the In Service or Out of Service
options. The properties of an Out of Service branch can be edited like an In Service branch. However, an
Out of Service branch will not be included in any system studies. When Continuity Check is activated, an
Out of Service branch automatically becomes dimmed in the one-line diagram. All the loads and branches
energized solely through an Out of Service branch will also be de-energized and become dimmed.

Note: the In / Out of Service option is an engineering property which is independent of the configuration
status. Therefore, you can set a branch to be In Service for the Base Data and Out of Service in the
Revision Data.
Connection
Cables can be defined as 3 Phase or 1 Phase cable by selecting any of the following selections:
3 Phase
Define the cable as a three-phase cable. This cable can be connected only to three-phase buses.
1 Phase
Define the cable as a single-phase cable.
Library
Library Button
To select cables from the Cable Library, click on the Library button and the Cable Library Quick Pick
will appear. From the Library Quick Pick select the Cable Library type and size at the same time. Note:
after the selected Cable Library type, size, and parameters are transferred to the Cable Editor, the cable
size can be changed directly from the Cable Editor and the cable parameters are refreshed from the
library. Therefore, the most important action is to select the correct Cable Library type from the Cable
Library Quick Pick. When data are transferred from the Cable Library, PowerStation automatically
corrects the cable reactances for the system frequency.
AC Elements Cable

Link to Library
A library link is also available in order to use Cable Library data instead of the stored cable impedance
and dimension parameters that are displayed in the Cable Editor. Note: Link to Library is only used at the
time of execution of studies. For example, when you run a load flow study, PowerStation uses the cable
library type and size as an identifier to extract data from the Cable Library. This option is provided so
that you can globally update the cable parameters by changing the library data only.
Equipment
FDR Tag
Name
Description
Units
Length
Enter the length of the cable and select the unit from the list box. The units of length available are: feet,
miles, meters, and kilometers. Note that every cable in the system can have a different unit.
Number Per Phase
Enter the number of conductors per phase, i.e. if 2-3/C cables or 6-1/C cables are used (6 conductors
total), then the number of conductors per phase is equal to two (2).
AC Elements Cable

8.4.2 Impedance Page

Impedance
Positive and Zero Sequence Resistances (R & R
0
)
Enter positive and zero sequence resistances at the base temperature, in ohms or ohms per unit length, per
conductor. This is for each conductor, not the total resistance per phase. PowerStation corrects these
resistances for different studies based on the specified temperature limits. The zero sequence resistance is
used only for unbalanced fault current calculations.
Positive and Zero Sequence Reactances (X & X
0
)
Enter positive and zero sequence reactances, in ohms or ohms per unit length, per conductor. This is for
each conductor, not the total reactance per phase. These reactances must be entered at the system
operating frequency specified for this data file. When data is recalled from English (60 Hz) or Metric (50
Hz) libraries, PowerStation automatically corrects for the system operating frequency. After this value is
entered here, PowerStation will not make any adjustment to this value. The zero sequence reactance is
used only for unbalanced fault current calculations.
AC Elements Cable

Positive and Zero Sequence Susceptances (Y & Y
0
)
Enter positive and zero sequence susceptances in siemens or siemens per unit length, for each conductor.
If the value of Y>0, the circuit element is treated as a pi equivalent, with one-half of the charging
susceptance connected to neutral at each end of the circuit. If Y=0, the cable is treated as a simple
impedance. This susceptance must be entered at the system operating frequency specified for this data
file. When data is recalled from English (60 Hz) or Metric (50 Hz) libraries, PowerStation automatically
corrects for the system operating frequency. After this value is entered here, PowerStation will not make
any adjustment to this value. The zero sequence susceptance is used only for unbalanced fault current
calculations.
Units
Select impedance units as ohms per unit length or ohms. With the selection of ohms per unit length, a
length should also be designated, including a unit from the list box. Units available are: feet, miles,
meters, and kilometers.

Cable Temperature
Base Temperature
Enter the conductor base temperature (in degrees Celsius) at which the cable resistances are entered.
Minimum & Maximum Temperature
Two conductor temperature limits (in degrees Celsius) may be entered for adjusting positive and zero
sequence resistances (R and R
0
) for different studies. The first limit is the minimum operating
temperature; the second limit is the maximum operating temperature. PowerStation will use the most
conservative temperature limit for each study type. For example:

Temperature Limit
Min Max
Load Flow X
Short-Circuit X
Motor Starting X

If this correction is not wanted, set both minimum and maximum temperature limits equal to the base
temperature. PowerStation uses the following equations for temperature corrections:

R = R ( 234.5 + Tc ) / ( 234.5 + Tb ) Copper Conductors
R = R ( 228.1 + Tc ) / ( 228.1 + Tb ) Aluminum Conductors

where:
R = Resistance at base temperature Tb
R = Resistance at operating temperature Tc
Tb = Conductor base temperature in C
Tc = Conductor temperature limit in C

If the conductor type is not known (no cable library is selected), PowerStation defaults to copper as a
conductor type.
AC Elements Cable

8.4.3 Physical Page

Dimensions
The physical properties of cables entered in this page are only used for calculating engineering data
needed for cable ampacity derating studies (U/G Raceway Systems). These parameters are not used for
load flow, short-circuit, or motor starting studies.
Rdc (25C)
DC resistance of the cable in micro ohm at 25 degrees C
Conductor Outside Diameter
Physical outside diameter of the conductor in inches or centimeters
Insulator Thickness
Thickness of conductor insulation in mil or mm
Sheath Thickness
Thickness of cable sheath or armor in mil or mm. This value becomes zero if the Sheath/Armor option is
set to None.
AC Elements Cable

Jacket Thickness
Thickness of outer cable jacket in mil or mm
Cable Outside Diameter
Overall cable outside diameter including the sheath, armor and/or jacket in inches or centimeters.
Conductor Construction
Conductor construction is used for determining ks and kp parameters which are used for calculating the ac
to dc ratio parameters. Several available choices of conductor construction are:

ConRnd Concentric Round None Coated None Treated
ConRnd-Coated Concentric Round Coated None Treated
ConRnd-Treated Concentric Round None Coated Treated
CmpRnd-Treated Compact Round None Coated Treated
CmpSgm Compact Segmental None Coated None Treated
CmpSgm-Coated Compact Segmental Coated None Treated
CmpSgm-Treated Compact Segmental None Coated Treated
CmpSct-Treated Compact Sector None Coated Treated

Coating is tin or alloy. The term Treated implies a completed conductor, which has been subjected to a
drying and impregnating process similar to that employed on paper power cables.
Shielding
Choose shielded or not shielded.
Sheath/Shield End Connection
Choose either the open or grounded option. Grounded option implies that the sheath and shield are
grounded at more than one location.
Sheath/Armor Type
Several choices of sheath/armor type are available.
Jacket Type
Several choices of jacket type are available.
AC Elements Cable

8.4.4 Routing Page
The Routing Page provides lists of routed raceways and available raceways. For both the routed and
available raceways, the cable ID and raceway type are shown.

This is a list of raceways through which this cable is routed. When you add a raceway to this list (by
using the insert or add buttons), the cable is placed in a container attached to the raceway without being
placed in any specific conduit or location.

AC Elements Cable

When you bring up the graphical editor for the underground systems, you will see the cables in a
container of cables assigned to this raceway but are not assigned to a specific conduit. This container is
attached to the raceway and will disappear when it is empty. You will need to graphically move the cable
from the unassigned cable container to the desired location.
This is a list of all existing available raceways in this project, i.e., raceways that this cable can be routed
through. Note that since you cannot route a cable twice through a raceway, this list does not include the
raceways listed under Routed Raceways.

Insert: Route this cable through the selected raceway from the available raceway list,
i.e., insert the selected raceway to the list of routed raceways.

Add: Route this cable through the selected raceway from the available raceway list,
i.e., add the selected raceway to the list of routed raceways.

Cut: Unroute this cable from the selected raceway.
8.4.5 Loading Page
The Loading Page provides information regarding cable loading (amp) and other parameters, which are
used in cable ampacity derating (Underground Raceway System).

AC Elements Cable

Transient Load Profile
The load profile provides up to 20 time and current entry fields for specifying the loading pattern of the
cable as a function of time.

# Time Current
1 0.0 230
2 3.5 560
3 7.3 400
4 0.0 0.0 (all data from this point are
ignored since time = 0.0)

In this example, the cable loading is changed from the steady-state (initial value) to 230 amperes at time
zero, to 560 amps at time 3.5 hours, and finally to 400 amps after 7.3 hours. The steady-state or initial
value can either be 230 amps (value entered at the first time slot) or it can be set equal to the cable
operating load. You can set the option for the initial/steady-state value from the Cable Derating Study
Case Editor.
Time Units
Select the time units for the load profile.
Operating Load
The operating load is specified in amps. This value is used for steady-state temperature calculation or as
the initial value of the cable load profile for the transient temperature calculation. The operating load can
be updated with the results from load flow studies. You can do this by selecting Update Cable Operating
Load option from the Load Flow Study Toolbar.

Load Variation
Load Factor
The load factor is the ratio of average load to peak load in percent. Use the following equation to
calculate the load factor:

Load Factor = 100 ( kWi x Ti ) / ( kWp x Tt ) %
= 100 E / ( kWi x Tt ) %

where
i = Interval of time when the load is non-zero
kWi = Load at interval i
Ti = Number of hours of interval i
kWp = Peak load
Tt = Ton + Toff
Ton = Total hours when the load is on
Toff = Total hours when the load is off
E = Energy (kWh) consumed by load over the interval

AC Elements Cable

If the cable carries load (current) at every interval, then the equation can be simplified to the percentage
of time that the cable will be carrying the current:

Load Factor = 100 Ton / Tt %
= 100 % (if it carries the load for 24 hours per day)
Projection MF
The Projection Multiplying Factor (MF) must be specified in percent. This value is used to indicate
future load projection (load reduction or growth). From the Cable Ampacity Derating Study Case, you
can select the option to use this Projection Multiplying Factor for cable temperature calculations.
Sheath/Armor Current
The sheath/armor current can be specified as a percent of cable load current. This value indicates the
amount of neutral or ground current that is carried by sheath or armor.
UGS Ampacity Options
These options are for ampacity and sizing calculations for the U/G raceway systems.
Fixed Current
If this box is checked, the cable current will remain unchanged for the ampacity calculations (Uniform
Temperature and Uniform Ampacity). Use this flag for cables that do not require ampacity optimization.
Fixed Size
If this box is checked, the cable size will remain fixed for the cable sizing calculations.
8.4.6 Ampacity Page

AC Elements Cable

Installation
Type
Five raceway installation types are available to choose from.

U/G Duct Bank
U/G Buried
A/G Tray
A/G Conduit
Air Drop

Each type uses a variety of conditions to determine its overall characteristics and determine the derated
ampacity of the cable installed under the specified raceway conditions.
Application MF
This Multiplication Factor (MF) is determined by the application type selected from the drop-down list
provided. You can modify the values of Application MF by selecting Project, Settings, and Cable
Ampacity MF from the Menu Bar. This Application MF is used to calculate the required cable ampacity
(MF times operating or full load current).
Ampacity
Ampacity ratings are displayed for easy comparison of base, derated and, required (I x MF) ampacities.
The method used here is based on a concept of a derating factor that is applied against a base ampacity to
calculate the derated ampacity.

Id = F x Ib
Base Ampacity (Ib)
The full rated current value in amperes for the chosen cable before any derating occurs. This is the
ampacity stated or specified by the manufacturer or other authoritative sources, such as NEC or ICEA.
Derated Ampacity (Id)
The modified base ampacity (maximum allowable current) in amperes for the chosen cable under the
specified installation conditions.

Overall Derating Factor (F)
Adjustment or correction factor which takes into account differences in the cables actual installation
conditions from the base conditions. This factor establishes a maximum feasible load capacity, which
results in no reduction of the cables expected life time. The overall derating factor is composed of
several components as listed on the following page.
AC Elements Cable

Fta = Derating factor for ambient temperature
Ftc = Derating factor for maximum allowable conductor temperature
Fth = Derating factor for underground soil thermal resistance
Fg = Derating factor for cable grouping
Fc = Derating factor for A/G tray covers
Fm = Derating factor for A/G tray maintained spacing
Fce = Cumulative effect factor for A/G trays
Fm = Derating factor for A/G conduit (NEC & diversity factor)
Ffc = Derating factor for A/G fire coating
Ffs = Derating factor for A/G fire stop
Ffw = Derating factor for A/G fire wrap
Allowable Ampacity
PowerStation provides a user-defined field to enter the maximum allowable ampacity for one-line and
raceway cables. This field is not provided for equipment cables. The maximum allowable ampacity is
used in the load flow output reports to indicate the percent of cable overloading. This value is also used
as a base for the cable flow constraint in the optimal power flow studies.
I x MF
Current is calculated by multiplying the operating current (or the full load current for equipment cables)
and the Application Multiplication Factor (App. MF) for the specified application type. This value is
displayed so it can be compared with the derated ampacity.
U/G Duct
Underground duct banks encased in concrete.
RHO
The thermal resistivity of the soil in degrees Celsius centimeters per Watt.
Ta
Ambient temperature in degrees Celsius, i.e., the temperature of the surrounding soil for underground
installations. Ambient soil temperature for the base ampacity is obtained from the library. Base ampacity
for U/G cables are usually given at 20 degrees Celsius.
Tc
Maximum allowable conductor temperature is in degrees Celsius. Conductor temperature for the base
ampacity is obtained from the library. This order is usually given at 90 degrees Celsius.
Grouping
Grouped cables operate at higher temperatures than isolated cables. To derate the ampacity, the number of
rows and columns of the duct bank must be specified to determine a cable grouping adjustment factor.

The cable ampacity adjustment factors are based on 7.5 inches center-to-center spacing. For more details
see the IEEE Brown Book.

AC Elements Cable

U/G Buried
Directly buried underground ducts.
RHO
The thermal resistivity of the soil is in degrees Celsius centimeters per Watt (C cm/W)
Ta
Ambient temperature is in degrees Celsius, i.e., the temperature of the surrounding soil where the cable is
installed. Ambient soil temperature for the base ampacity is obtained from the library. Base ampacity for
U/G cables are usually given at 20 degrees Celsius.
Tc
ampacity is obtained from the library. The value is usually specified at 90 degrees Celsius.
Grouping
Grouped cables operate at higher temperatures than isolated cables. To derate the cable ampacity, the
number of rows and columns of the cable locations must be specified to determine a cable grouping
adjustment factor. The cable ampacity adjustment factors are based on a 7.5 inch center-to-center
spacing. For more details see the IEEE Brown Book.
A/G Trays
Above ground cable trays. The free air base ampacity from the libraries are used for cables installed in
trays.
Ta
Ambient air (atmospheric) temperature is in degrees Celsius, i.e., the temperature of the air surrounding
the area where the tray is installed. Ambient air temperature for the base ampacity is obtained from the
library. The value is usually specified at 40 degrees Celsius.
Tc
Maximum allowable conductor temperature in degrees Celsius. Conductor temperature for the base
ampacity is 90 degrees Celsius.
Tray
NEC
If chosen, NEC methods of calculating derating factors for cable trays will be used. NEC does not
provide ampacity derating due to bottom cover or correction of the ampacity multiplying factors due to
the cumulative effects of combinations of tray covers and fire proofing. In general, cable sizes of 2/0
AWG and smaller are installed in cable trays in a randomly filled manner, with a maximum of two cables
high.

Base ampacity of randomly filled trays are based on installations at a uniform depth up to the maximum
of 30% fill for 3 or 4-inch tray depths. The method applied here corresponds to a maximum fill condition
and does not consider fill conditions exceeding the nominal depths.
AC Elements Cable

ICEA
If chosen, an ICEA P-54-440 method of calculating derating factors for cable trays will be used. The
actual values of tray depth, width, and % fill entries will be taken into account.
Top Cover
Select top cover if there is a removable top cover on the cable tray.
Bottom Cover
Select bottom cover if there is a bottom cover on the cable tray, whether it is removable or solid, of more
than 6 feet.

Maintained Spacing
If cable spacing is maintained within the tray, then the effects of top cover, bottom cover and fire wrap
are ignored. For 3-phase cables larger than 2/0 AWG in a single layer, the arrangement requires spacing
of 1/4 of overall effective diameter of the grouped circuit.
Cumulative Effect
Cumulative effect applies correction factors for combinations of barriers, fire coatings, and covers on
cable trays.
Grouping
The following items are displayed only when ICEA method is selected under the Tray section.
Height
Height of cable tray specified in inches or centimeters
Width
Width of cable tray specified in inches or centimeters
% Fill
The total amount of cable tray cross-sectional area used by cables placed in the tray
Depth
Depth of cable mess calculated in inches or centimeters using (Height x %Fill)/100. If the calculated
depth is smaller than the cable diameter, an * sign will show up on the right of Depth and above
Derated, and the cable diameter will be treated as the depth for derating calculation.
Fire Protection
Fire protection provides optional libraries from which to choose various fire protection devices. Each of
the three libraries may be selected individually to best describe the fire protection associated with the
cable tray. The fire protection data is used to further derate cables based on the fire protection material
specifications selected from PowerStation library. The ampacity correction factors applied for fire
protection is based on 10 CFR 50, Appendix R for Fire Wrap, Fire Stop, and Fire Coating.
AC Elements Cable

Fire Coating
The Fire Coating Library provides a selection of configurations. Each configuration has an ampacity
correction factor (ACF) associated with it, which is applied against the base ampacity. For maintained
spacing trays, if the fire retardant coating results in a reduction of the spacing between adjacent cables or
groups to less than the required values, the cable shall be considered to be non-maintained spacing. On
the other hand, if remaining space in a randomly filled tray is used up by cable coating and no other cable
can be installed in the tray; credit may be taken for reduction in cable % fill below nominal value.

Fire Stop
The Fire Stop Library provides a selection of configurations with ampacity correction factors for cables in
tray routed through fire stops.
Fire Wrap
The Fire Wrap Library provides a selection of configurations. Each fire barrier configuration has an
ampacity correction factor (ACF) associated with it. This ACF must be applied whenever the raceway is
wrapped for a length exceeding 6 feet and whenever the raceway has multiple, wrapped segments whose
combined length exceeds 6 feet and which are spaced less than 10 feet apart.
A/G Conduit
Ta
Ambient air (atmospheric) temperature is in degrees Celsius. It is the temperature of the air surrounding
the area where the tray is to be installed. Ambient air temperature for the base ampacity is obtained from
the library. The value is usually specified at 40 degrees Celsius.
Tc
Ampacity Adjustment
NEC (No Grouping Effect)
NEC standards do not provide for grouping effects of cables, i.e., number of rows and columns. If the
check box is not selected, grouping effects of number of rows and columns will be considered.
AC Elements Cable

50% and No Load Diversity
The level of load diversity used in calculating correction factors can be chosen as either 50% or none.
Grouping
number of rows and columns of conduit installed next to each other, as well as the total number of
conductors per location (this conduit), can be specified to determine a cable grouping adjustment factor.
# of conductors per location = (# of conductors per cable) x (# of cables per location)

Number of Conductors
Ampacity Correction Factor
50 % Load Diversity
4 through 6 80 %
7 through 9 70 %
10 through 24 70 %
25 through 42 60 %
43 and above 50 %

No Load Diversity
4 through 6 80 %
7 through 9 70 %
10 through 20 50 %
21 through 30 45 %
31 through 40 40 %
41 through 60 35 %
Fire Protection
Fire protection provides optional libraries to choose various fire protection method. Each of the three
libraries may be selected individually to best describe the fire protection associated with the conduit. The
fire protection data is used to further derate the cable ampacities based on the fire protection material
Fire Coating
The Fire Coating Library provides a selection of configurations from which to choose. Each configuration
has an ampacity correction factor (ACF) associated with it, which is applied against the base ampacity.
Fire retardant coating is not a standard procedure for A/G conduits.
Fire Stop
The Fire Stop Library provides a selection of configurations with ampacity correction factors for conduits
routed through fire stops. Note: there may not be any reason to derate the cable for fire stops since typical
fire stops are constructed with expanded foam depth of 4 inches or less. This is considered to be
insufficient to cause an increase in cable temperature.
AC Elements Cable

Fire Wrap
ampacity correction factor (ACF) associated with it which must be applied whenever the raceway is
Air Drop
Cables suspended without the use of trays or conduits. No cable grouping for air drop cables are
considered.
Ta
Ambient air (atmospheric) temperature. The temperature of the air surrounding the area where the tray is
to be installed is in degrees Celsius. Ambient air temperature for the base ampacity is 40 degrees Celsius.
For cables in direct sun, the air temperature may be increased by a typical value of 15 degrees Celsius.
Tc
Fire Protection
Fire Protection provides optional libraries to choose various fire protection devices. Each of the three
libraries may be selected individually to best describe the fire protection associated with the airdrop
cables. The fire protection data is used to further derate the cable based on the fire protection
specifications selected from PowerStation library is based on 10 CFR 50, Appendix R for Fire Wrap, Fire
Stop, and Fire Coating.
Fire Coating
correction factor (ACF) associated with it, which is applied against the base ampacity.
Fire Stop
The Fire Stop Library provides a selection of configurations with ampacity correction factors for cables
routed through fire stops.
Fire Wrap
ampacity correction factor (ACF) associated with it. The ACF must be applied whenever the cable is
AC Elements Cable

8.4.7 Sizing Page

Requirements
You can select one or both requirements for determining the recommended size of cable.
Ampacity
If ampacity is selected as one of the requirements, sizing will be based on the cable installation and
ambient conditions specified in the Ampacity Page.
Voltage Drop (Vd)
If you select Vd, PowerStation will size the cable based on the percent voltage drop value you enter here.
Voltage drop is in percent of nominal kV of the bus connected to the cable. If the nominal voltages of the
From Bus and To Bus are different, nominal kV of the From Bus is selected. The following table
shows the methods used for calculating the voltage drop for different types of load currents flowing
through the cable.

Load Type Calculation Method
Motors Constant Power
Static Load Constant Impedance
Bus Constant Current
Circuit Breaker Constant Current
Fuse Constant Current
Transformer Constant Current
Generator Constant Current
MOV Constant Impedance
AC Elements Cable

Results
Using the selected cable type from the library, PowerStation recommends an optimal cable size along
with the number of conductors per phase that meets the specified requirements. Additionally,
PowerStation provides one cable size smaller than the optimal size for your selection. Note that the
required ampacity and percent voltage drop are displayed for your reference.

Cable Loading
Operating Current
The operating load current specified for this cable in the Loading Page will be used if this option is
selected.
Full Load Amps of Element
The continuous current rating (rated current or FLA) of the selected element will be used for sizing
requirements. For motor equipment cables, the motor ID is displayed here and the FLA of the motor is
used.
Other
Use this option to enter any value for the cable current.
Options
Use Available Cable Sizes Only
Use only cable sizes which are flagged as Available in the Cable Library for the specified cable type
(cable library header).
Use All Cable Sizes From Library
Use all cable sizes, which exist, in the cable library for the specified cable type (cable library header).
Use Project Multiplying Factor
If you select this option, the cable load current will be multiplied by the Projection Multiplying Factor as
specified for this cable in the Loading Page.

Use Application Multiplying Factor (Equipment Cables)
If you select this option, the cable load current will be multiplied by the Application Multiplying Factor
(AMF) as specified for the motor or static load in the Cable/Vd Page of the equipment.
Use Motor Service Factor (Motor Equipment Cables)
If you select this option, the cable load current will be multiplied by the motor Service Factor (SF) as
specified for the motor in the Nameplate Page.
AC Elements Cable


A

branches from service. After the actively failed component is isolated, and the protection breakers are
P
It is Enter the passive failure rate in number of failures per year f/yr per unit length. The passive failure
rate is associated with the component failure mode that does not cause the operation of protection
breakers and therefore does not have an impact on the remaining healthy components. Repairing or
replacing the failed component will restores service. Examples of passive failures include opening circuits
and inadvertent opening of breakers.
Unit
Select the length unit for failure rate length unit from the list box. The units of length available are: feet,
miles, meters, and kilometers.
MTTR
It is Enter the Mean Time To Repair in hours. It is the expected time for a crew to repair a component
outage and/or restore the system to its normal operating state.
AC Elements Cable

Calculate and display the mean repair rate in number of repairs per year, calculated automatically based
on MTTR ( = 8760/MTTR) in Repair/yr.
MTTF
Calculate and display the Mean Time To Failure in years calculated automatically based on
A
and
P
of (
MTTF = 1.0/(
A
+
P
) in yr for unit length automatically).
FOR

Calculate and display the Forced Outage Rate (i.e., unavailability), calculated based on MTTR,
A
and
P

(FOR = MTTR/(MTTR+8760/(
A
+
P
)) for unit length automatically.
Switching Time
Enter the Switching time (the time in hours for isolating a failure) in hr. It is the period starting from the
time a switching operation is required requested due to a forced outage until that the switching operation
is performed completed.
Replacement
Available
P
Alternative Supply
r
P
It is the replacement time in hours by for replacing a failed element by a spare one.
Library

8.4.9 Remarks Page

AC Elements Cable

User-Defined Info
UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchase Date
AC Elements Cable

8.4.10 Comments Page

AC Elements Transmission Line

8.5 Transmission Line
The properties associated with transmission lines of the electrical distribution system can be entered in
this editor.

The Transmission Line Editor includes seven pages of properties plus two additional characteristics
pages.

Info Page
Configuration Page
Grounding Page
Impedance Page
Reliability
Remarks Page
Comment Page
8.5.1 Info Page
Within the Info Page, specify the transmission line ID, From and To bus ID and kV, In/Out of Service,
Feeder Tag, Name, Description, and Length.

Line Type
Transmission line type is not active for this release.
Info
ID
Enter a unique ID with up to 25 alphanumeric characters. PowerStation automatically assigns a unique
ID to each transmission line. The assigned IDs consist of the default line ID plus an integer, starting with
the number one and increasing as the number of lines increase. The default line ID (Line) can be changed
from the Defaults Menu in the menu bar or from the Project View.

From & To
Bus IDs for the connecting buses of a transmission line are designated as From and To buses. If a terminal
of a branch, From or To, is not connected to any bus, a blank entry will be shown for bus ID. To connect
or reconnect a branch to a bus, select a bus from the list box. The one-line diagram will be updated to
show the new connection after you click on OK. Note that you can only connect to buses that reside in
the same view where the branch resides, i.e., you cannot connect to a bus that resides in the Dumpster or
in another composite network.

For 3 Phase Transmission Lines, only 3 Phase buses will be displayed in the drop down lists. For Single
Transmission Lines only single-phase buses will be displayed.

new bus from the editors will reconnect the last existing protective device to the new bus, as shown below

Single Phase Transmission lines can also be connected to Phase Adapters. If the Cable is connected as
such, then the Phase Adapter ID will show in the Primary or Secondary field.

convenience.
In/Out of Service
Operating condition of a transmission line can be selected by choosing either the In Service or Out of
dimmed.


Connection
Transmission Lines can be defined as 3 Phase or 1 Phase lines by selecting any of the following
selections:
3 Phase
Define the line as a three-phase line. This line can be connected only to three-phase buses.
1 Phase
Define the line as a single-phase line.
Equipment
FDR Tag
Name
Description
Length
Enter the length of the transmission line and select the unit from the list box. The units of length
available are: feet, miles, meters, and kilometers.
8.5.2 Configuration Page


Configuration Type
Several types of physical configurations are available for transmission lines in order to accommodate
most setups. Available options for transmission line placement are:

Horizontal
Vertical
Triangular
Parallel
Spacing
Specify the distance between the phase conductors as three sets of pairs of conductors ( AB, BC, CA) in
feet or meters. This provides the ability to configure the wires to almost any shape. For parallel circuit,
you need to specify the distance between two circuits. PowerStation treats the triangular and parallel
configurations symmetrically; that is, AB = BC and CA<(AB+BC).
Characteristics
Click on the Characteristics button to provide a dialog box where you can enter the number of conductors,
conductor type, transmission line resistance, GMR (geometric mean radius), and diameter. The line
resistance can be entered in either ohms or ohms/unit length. Unit length includes feet, miles, meters, and
kilometers. The base temperature for the resistance is specified in the Impedance Page of this editor.
Characteristics of Phase Conductors
The number of bundled conductors can be specified here. The maximum number of conductors is set to 4
in PowerStation.

Conductor Type
Conductor type (material). PowerStation uses Aluminum/ACSR as the default material for phase
conductors.

Resistance
Enter resistance of the phase conductor in ohms per unit length, per conductor. The base temperature of
the resistance is specified in the Impedance Page of this editor.

GMR
Specify conductor Geometric Mean Radius in inches or cm. GMR must be less than or equal to the
conductor radius. For bundled conductors, PowerStation calculates the equivalent GMR using the
following formulas:

Two bundled conductors:
GMR RMR S = *

Three bundled conductors:
GMR GMR S S = * *
3

Four bundled conductors:
GMR GMR S S S = * * * * 2
4

Where GMR is for a single conductor and S is the separation between bundled conductors in inches or
cm.
Diameter (d)
Specify conductor diameter in inches or cm. For bundled conductors, PowerStation calculates the
equivalent diameter of the bundled conductors (d) by using following the formulas:

= d d * S

= d d S * *
3
S


= d d S S S * * * * 2
4

where d is a single conductor diameter in inches and S is the separation between conductors in inches or
cm.
8.5.3 Grounding Page

Grounding
Number of Ground Wires
The number of ground wires to be used can be specified here. The maximum number of grounding wires
is set to 3 in PowerStation.
Earth Resistivity
Specify the earth resistivity in ohms/meter3. PowerStation uses an average value of 100 ohms/meter3 as
the default value.
G-G Spacing
The distance between ground wires in feet or meters. This field is active if you have more than one
ground wire.

C-G Spacing
The distance between the ground wires and a phase conductor closest to the ground wire, in feet or
meters. The value of C-G can be negative if ground wires are located under the phase conductors.
Height
Enter the height of the transmission line from the earth in feet or meters.
Characteristics
Click on the Characteristics button to provide a dialog box where you can enter the number of ground
wires and specification of grounding wire resistance, GMR (geometric mean radius), and diameter. The
ground wire resistance can be entered in either ohms or ohms/unit length. Unit length includes feet,
miles, meters, and kilometers. The base temperature for this resistance is specified in the Impedance Page
of this editor.

Characteristics of Ground Wire
The number of bundled ground wires can be specified here. The maximum number of bundled wires is set
to 4 in PowerStation. Note that if you have two ground wires and each has two wires bundled together,
you will have a total of four wires.

Separation
Specify the distance between conductors in inches or cm. This field is active if you have more than two
bundled wires.
Resistance
Enter the resistance of the ground wires in ohms per unit length, per conductor. The base temperature of
the ground wire is the same as the phase conductor, as specified in the Impedance Page.

Layout
Some configurations (two-dimensional cross-section) of three-phase conductors and two grounding wires
with respect to the earth are illustrated below.

GMR
Specify the conductor Geometric Mean Radius in inches or cm. GMR must be less than or equal to the
conductor radius. For bundled conductors, PowerStation calculates the equivalent GMR using the
following formulas:

GMR GMR S = *

GMR GMR S S = * *
3

GMR GMR S S S = * * * * 2
3

where GMR is for a single conductor and S is the separation between bundled ground wires in inches.
Diameter (d)
Specify the conductor diameter in inches or cm. For bundled conductors, PowerStation calculates the
equivalent diameter of the bundled wires (d) by using the following formulas:

Two bundled wires:
= d d * S

Three bundled wires:
= d d S * *
3
S


Four bundled wires:
= d d S S * * * * 2
3
S

where d is a single wire diameter in inches or cm and S is the separation between wires in inches or cm.

Impedance (per phase)
Positive and Zero Sequence Resistances (R & R
0
)
PowerStation automatically calculates the positive and zero sequence resistances in ohms or ohms per
unit length, per phase, at a base temperature according to the specified configuration and grounding
information of a transmission line. PowerStation corrects these resistances for different studies based on
the specified temperature limits. The user can also specify positive and zero sequence resistances in ohms
or ohms per unit length, per phase, at a base temperature specified for this data file. The zero sequence
resistance is used only for unbalanced fault current calculations.
Positive and Zero Sequence Reactances (X & X
0
)
PowerStation automatically calculates the positive and zero sequence reactances in ohms or ohms per unit
length, per phase, according to the specified configuration and grounding information of a transmission
line. When data is recalled from English (60 Hz) or Metric (50 Hz) libraries, PowerStation corrects these
reactances for the system operating frequency. The user can also specify positive and zero sequence
reactances in ohms or ohms per unit length, per phase, at the system operating frequency specified for this
data file. The zero sequence reactance is used only for unbalanced fault current calculations.

Positive and Zero Sequence Susceptances (Y & Y
0
)
PowerStation automatically calculates the positive and zero sequence susceptances in siemens or siemens
per unit length, per phase, according to the specified configuration and grounding information of a
transmission line. If the value of Y>0, the transmission line is treated as a model, with one half (1/2) of
the charging susceptance connected to neutral at each end of the line. If Y=0, the transmission line is
treated as an external impedance. When data is recalled from English (60 Hz) or Metric (50 Hz) libraries,
PowerStation corrects these susceptances for the system operating frequency. The user can also specify
positive and zero sequence susceptances in siemens or siemens per unit length, per phase, at the system
operating frequency specified for this data file. The zero sequence susceptance is used only for
unbalanced fault current calculations.
Units
Select impedance units as ohms per unit length or ohms. Select a unit for unit length from the list box.
Units available are: feet, miles, meters, and kilometers. If you select ohms, the impedances calculated or
entered represent the total impedance of the line. PowerStation uses ohms per mile as the unit of
impedance calculation.
Temperature
Base Temperature
Enter the conductor base temperature (in degrees Celsius) at which the phase conductor and ground wire
resistances are entered.
Two conductor temperature limits (in degrees Celsius) may be entered for adjusting positive and zero
sequence resistances (R and R0) for different studies. The first limit is the minimum operating
temperature; the second limit is the maximum operating temperature. PowerStation will use the most
conservative temperature limit for each study type. For example:

Temperature Limit
Min. Max.
Load Flow X
Short-Circuit X
Motor Starting X



where:
Tb = Conductor base temperature in C
Tc = Conductor temperature limit in C


A

branches from service. After the actively failed component is isolated, and the protection breakers are
P
It is the passive failure rate in number of failures per year per unit length. The passive failure rate is
associated with the component failure mode that does not cause the operation of protection breakers and
therefore does not have an impact on the remaining healthy components. Repairing or replacing the failed
component will restores service. Examples of passive failures include opening circuits and inadvertent
opening of breakers.
Unit
Select the length unit for failure rate length unit from the list box. The units of length available are: feet,
miles, meters, and kilometers.
MTTR

Calculate and display the mean repair rate in number of repairs per year, calculated automatically based
on MTTR ( = 8760/MTTR) in Repair/yr automatically.

MTTF
Calculate and display the Mean Time To Failure in years calculated automatically based on
A
and
P
of (
MTTF = 1.0/(
A
+
P
) in yr for unit length automatically).
FOR

Calculate and display the Forced Outage Rate (i.e., unavailability) of calculated based on MTTR,
A
and
P
(FOR = MTTR/(MTTR+8760/(
A
+
P
)) for unit length automatically.
Switching Time
It is the period starting from the time a switching operation is required requested due to a forced outage
until that the switching operation is performed completed.
Replacement
Available
P
Alternative Supply
r
P
It is the replacement time in hours by for replacing a failed element by a spare one.
Library
8.5.6 Remarks Page

User-Defined Info

UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7

Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchase Date

8.5.7 Comments Page


AC Elements Reactor

8.6 Reactor
The properties associated with current-limiting reactors of the electrical distribution systems can be
entered in this editor.

The Reactor Editor contains five pages of properties.

Info Page
Rating Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page

Info
ID

PowerStation automatically assigns a unique ID to each current-limiting reactor. The assigned IDs
consist of the default reactor ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the
number of reactors increase. The default reactor ID (X) can be changed from the Defaults Menu in the
From & To
Bus IDs for the connecting buses of a reactor branch are designated as From and To buses. If a terminal
of a branch (From or To) is not connected to any bus, a blank entry will be shown for bus ID. To connect
or reconnect a branch to a bus, select a bus from the list box. The one-line diagram will be updated to
show the new connection after you click on OK. Note that you can only connect to buses that reside in
the same view where the branch resides, i.e., you cannot connect to a bus that resides in the Dumpster or
in another composite network.

AC Elements Reactor

new bus from the editor will reconnect the last existing protective device to the new bus, as shown below

For 3 Phase Reactors, only 3 Phase buses will be displayed in the drop down lists. For single-phase
Reactors only single-phase buses will be displayed.

convenience.

Single-phase reactor can also be connected to Phase Adapters. If the Reactor is connected as such, then
the Phase Adapter ID is displayed in the Primary or Secondary field.

In/Out of Service
Operating condition of a reactor branch can be selected by choosing either the In Service or Out of
dimmed.

Connection
Reactors can be defined as 3 Phase or 1 Phase by selecting any of the following selections:
3 Phase
Define the reactor as a 3 Phase. This reactor can be connected only to 3 phase buses.
AC Elements Reactor

1 Phase
Define the reactor as single-phase.
Equipment
FDR Tag
Name
Description
8.6.1 Rating Page

Rating
Amps
Enter the continuous current rating of the current-limiting reactor in amperes.

This value is also used as a base for the reactor flow constraint in the optimal power flow studies.
kV
Enter the rated voltage of the current-limiting reactor in kV.
AC Elements Reactor

Impedance
Positive and Zero Sequence Impedance (Z and Z
0
)
Enter the positive and zero sequence impedance in ohms. The zero sequence impedance is used only for
unbalanced fault current calculations. PowerStation will make no adjustments to this value other than
tolerance correction.
Positive and Zero Sequence X/R
Enter the positive and zero sequence X/R of the reactor. This value is used for calculating the resistance
and reactance of the current-limiting reactor.
Typical X/R Button
Use typical X/R.
Tolerance
This is the tolerance of the nominal value of the positive and zero sequence reactance, in percent. This
value should be zero for an existing reactor with a known reactance. For a new reactor with a design
impedance value, this should be the tolerance range for the reactance specified by the manufacturer.
PowerStation will automatically select the positive or negative tolerance value, which will result in the
most conservative solution. A negative value is used for short-circuit studies and a positive value for all
other studies.

AC Elements Reactor

A
branches from service. After the actively failed component is isolated and the protection breakers are
P
MTTR

8760/MTTR).
MTTF
A
and
P
( MTTF =
1.0/(
A
+
P
) ).
FOR

A
and
P
(FOR =
MTTR/(MTTR+8760/(
A
+
P
)).
Switching Time
Replacement
Available
P
AC Elements Reactor

Alternative Supply
r
P
Library
Library
8.6.3 Remarks Page

User-Defined Info
AC Elements Reactor

UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchase Date
AC Elements Reactor

8.6.4 Comments Page


AC Elements Impedance

8.7 Impedance
The properties associated with impedances of your electrical distribution system can be entered in this
editor. Impedance branches are used to specify circuit elements in per unit values. Impedance branches
can be used to represent lines and current-limiting reactors.

The Impedance Editor contains five pages of properties.

Info Page
Rating Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
8.7.1 Info Page

Info
ID

PowerStation automatically assigns a unique ID to each impedance branch. The assigned IDs consist of
the default impedance ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of
impedances increase. The default impedance ID (Z) can be changed from the Defaults Menu in the menu
bar or from the Project View.

From & To
Bus IDs for the connecting buses of an impedance branch are designated as From and To buses. If a
terminal of a branch, From or To, is not connected to any bus, a blank entry will be shown for bus ID. To
connect or reconnect a branch to a bus, select a bus from the list box. The one-line diagram will be
updated to show the new connection after you click on OK. Note that you can only connect to buses that
reside in the same view where the branch resides, i.e., you cannot connect to a bus that resides in the
Dumpster or in another composite network.


convenience.
Connection
Select the connection type of the impedance.
3 Phase
Select to setup impedance as three-phase.
1 Phase
Select to setup impedance as single-phase
In/Out of Service
Operating conditions of an impedance branch can be selected by choosing either the In Service or Out of
Service options. The properties of an Out of Service branch can be edited like an In Service branch.
However, an Out of Service branch will not be included in any system studies. When Continuity Check is
dimmed.


Equipment
FDR Tag
Name
Description
8.7.2 Rating Page
Impedance
Positive and Zero Sequence Resistances (R and R
0
)
Enter the positive and zero sequence resistances as a percentage of the circuit element on the specified
base MVA or in ohms. The zero sequence resistance is used only for unbalanced fault current
calculations. Note that when these values are specified, PowerStation will use the nominal kVs of the
connected buses as the base; however, this voltage value may be edited in the Impedance Editor.
PowerStation will, when needed, convert these values to coincide with the base voltages it has calculated
internally. PowerStation uses the transformer turn ratios for determining the base voltages in its load
flow, short-circuit, harmonics, motor starting, and transient stability analyses.

Positive and Zero Sequence Reactances (X and X
0
)
Enter the positive and zero sequence reactances as a percentage of the circuit element on the specified
base MVA. The zero sequence reactance is used only for unbalanced fault current calculations. Note that
when these values are specified, PowerStation will use the nominal kVs of the connected buses as the
base, however, this voltage value may be edited in the Impedance Editor. PowerStation will, when
needed, convert these values to coincide with the base voltages it has calculated internally. PowerStation
uses the transformer turns ratios for determining the base voltages in its load flow, short-circuit,
harmonics, motor starting, and transient stability analyses.

Positive and Zero Sequence Susceptance (Y and Y
0
)
Enter the positive and zero sequence charging (capacitive) susceptances as a percentage of the circuit
element on the specified base MVA. The zero sequence reactance is used only for unbalanced fault
current calculations. If Y>0, the circuit element is treated as a pi equivalent, with one-half of the charging
susceptance connected to neutral at the end of the circuit. If Y=0, the circuit element is treated as a simple
impedance. These susceptances must be entered at the system operating frequency which is specified for
this data file.
Units
Percent/Ohms and Bank kV/MVA
This function toggles between percent and ohmic units for impedance values. Upon selection of the
percent unit, the impedance values must be entered in a percent value with the base kV and MVA as
specified in this editor. If ohmic unit is selected, resistance, reactance, and susceptance must be entered
in actual ohms for the impedance branch.

A
service. After the actively failed component is isolated, the protection breakers are reclosed. This leads to
service being restored to some or all of the load points. It should be noted, however, that the failed
component itself (and those components that are directly connected to this failed component) could be
restored to service only after repair or replacement.

P
It is the passive failure rate in number of failures per year.
MTTR

8760/MTTR).
MTTF
A
and
P
( MTTF =
1.0/(
A
+
P
) ).
FOR
A
and
P
(FOR =
MTTR/(MTTR+8760/(
A
+
P
)).
Switching Time
Replacement
Available
P

r
P
Alternative Supply
Switching Time
Time in hours for isolating a failure. It is the period starting from the time a switching operation is
requested due to a forced outage until that the operation is completed.
Library
Library Button
Source
Displays the Source Name of the library data selected

Type
Displays the type name of the library data selected
Class
Displays the class of the library data selected
8.7.4 Remarks Page

User-Defined Info

UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.

Manufacturer
Name
Purchase Date

8.7.5 Comments Page


AC Elements Power Grid

8.8 Power Grid
Enter properties associated with power grids (utility systems) in this editor. A power grid is represented
with its Thevenins equivalent, a constant voltage source behind a short-circuit impedance. The default
mode of operating for a power grid is swing type.

The Power Grid Editor includes seven pages of properties.

Info Page
Rating Page
Harmonic Page
Reliability Page
Energy Cost Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
8.8.1 Info Page
Within the Info Page, specify the utility ID, connected Bus ID, In/Out of Service, Equipment Name and
Description, and the power grid Type.

Info
ID

PowerStation automatically assigns a unique ID to each power grid. The assigned IDs consist of the
default power grid ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of
power grids increase. The default power grid ID (PG) can be changed from the Defaults Menu in the

Bus
This is the ID of the connecting bus for the power grid. If the terminal is not connected to any bus, a blank
entry will be shown for the bus ID. To connect or reconnect a power grid to a bus, select a bus from the
list box. The one-line diagram will be updated to show the new connection after you click on OK.

Note that you can only connect to buses that reside in the same view where the power grid resides, i.e.,

If a power grid is connected to a bus through a number of protective devices, reconnection of the power
grid to a new bus from the editor will reconnect the last existing protective device to the new bus, as
shown below where Gen1 is reconnected from Bus10 to Bus4.

Next to the bus ID, PowerStation displays the nominal kV of the bus for your convenience.
In/Out of Service
Operating condition of a bus can be selected by choosing either the In Service or Out of Service options.
The properties of an Out of Service bus can be edited like an In Service bus; however, an Out of Service
bus will not be included in any system studies. When Continuity Check is activated, an Out of Service
bus automatically becomes dimmed in the one-line diagram. All the loads and branches energized solely
through an Out of Service bus will also be de-energized and become dimmed.

configuration status. Therefore, you can set a bus to be In Service for the base data and Out of Service in
revision data.
Equipment
FDR Tag
Name
Description
Mode
The power grid mode of operation and its ratings are displayed on the top of the editor for your reference.

Swing
For load flow studies, a swing power grid will take up the slack of the power flows in the system, i.e., the
voltage magnitude and angle of the power grid terminals will remain at the specified operating values.

For motor acceleration and transient stability studies, an initial load flow study is conducted to determine
initial conditions. For the initial load flow, a swing power grid is represented as an infinite source. At
time 0+, the power grid is modeled as a voltage source behind its short-circuit impedance.

For transient stability studies, one of the swing machines (power grids or generators) is selected as the
reference machine for the entire system.

There must be at least one swing machine (power grid or synchronous generator) connected to any
isolated subsystem in the one-line diagram. You can have multiple swing machines connected to any bus
in the system.

Any element that is connected to a swing machine is displayed as an energized element in the one-line
diagram and will be included in for studies. Also, the rated voltage (kV) of a swing machine is used as
the base kV of the connected bus. The base kVs of the rest of the system are then calculated using
transformer turn ratios. For transient stability studies, a swing power grid becomes the reference machine
for the system, i.e., the angle of the internal voltage source of the power grid is set to zero and the voltage
angle of all of the synchronous machines in the system will be relative to this reference machine.
Voltage Control
A power grid can be selected as a voltage control (regulated) system, which means that the power grid
will adjust its Mvar output to control the voltage. Therefore, the terminal voltage magnitude, operating
real power (MW), and minimum and maximum allowable reactive power supply (Max Q and Min Q)
must be entered for voltage control power grids. A voltage control power grid means that the power grid
is base loaded (fixed MW) with an Automatic Voltage Regulator (AVR) controlling the terminal voltage
to a constant value. During load flow studies, if the calculated Mvar falls outside the Mvar capability
limits (Max Q or Min Q limit), the value of the Mvar will be set equal to the limit and the power grid
mode is changed to Mvar control.
Mvar Control
With this option you can specify the amount of fixed MW and Mvar generation in the Rating Page of the
Power grid Editor. An Mvar control power grid means that the power grid is base loaded (fixed MW)
with a fixed Mvar generation (no AVR action).

8.8.2 Rating Page

Nominal kV
Enter the nominal voltage of the power grid in kilovolts (kV). This entry is used by PowerStation to
convert the utility short-circuit MVA to percent short-circuit. This value is also used as the power grid
base kV. Base voltages are calculated by PowerStation beginning with the swing systems (swing power
grids and/or swing generators) and continuing for the rest of the system using the rated kV of the
transformer windings.
Design Setting
% V (Voltage Magnitude)
Enter the magnitude of the power grid voltage as a percentage of the power grid nominal kV. This %
operating voltage is used as the control (regulated) value for swing and voltage control modes. For Mvar
control power grids, this value is used as an initial operating voltage.
Vangle (Voltage Angle)
Enter the angle of the power grid voltage in degrees. This value is used as a reference angle for power
grids in swing mode. For Mvar control power grids, this value is used as an initial operating voltage
angle.
MW/kW
Enter the megawatt/kilowatt generation (real power supply) from the power grid. This field is provided
for voltage controlled and Mvar controlled power grids. This value will be held fixed for load flow
solutions.

Mvar/kvar
Enter the megavar generation (reactive power supply) from the power grid. This field is provided for
Mvar controlled power grid types only. This value will be held fixed for load flow solutions.
Max & Min Q (Maximum & Minimum Mvar/kvar)
These entries specify the maximum and minimum limits for reactive power generation. These limits are
required for voltage regulated power grid types only and should be obtained from the capability curve
(Mvar vs. MW), i.e., the Max and Min Mvar limits should correspond to the specified MW generation. If
the value of the calculated Mvar falls outside this range, the value is fixed at the limit and the power grid
type is changed to Mvar control.
Operating
Based on the latest load flow run, the operating voltage magnitude, voltage angle, MW and Mvar are
displayed here.
Connection
The connection of the power grid can be selected by clicking on the connection buttons until the desired
connection is displayed. The available connections are Wye and Delta.
SC Rating
MVAsc
Specify the short-circuit MVA for three-phase and single-phase (line-to-ground) faults. As you enter or
modify MVAsc or X/R, PowerStation recalculates the corresponding short-circuit impedance values.

The short-circuit MVA for three-phase and single-phase (line-to-ground) fault currents are calculated
from the following equations:

MVA
3P
= 3 * kV * I
3P

MVA
1P
= 3 * kV * I
1P

Where I
3P
and I
1P
are three-phase and single-phase short-circuit currents (kAsc). These values are
calculated and displayed.
X/R
Enter the X/R ratios for the positive and zero sequence impedances.
SC Imp (100 MVA base)
Specify short-circuit impedance (resistance and reactance) in percent on a 100 MVA base. Short-circuit
impedance values include positive, negative, and zero sequences. As you enter or modify short-circuit
impedance values, PowerStation recalculates the corresponding MVAsc and X/R for three-phase and
single-phase faults.

8.8.3 Harmonic Page
The Harmonic page contains the information to model the power grid as a harmonic source in harmonic
studies.

Power Grid (Utility) can be modeled as a voltage harmonic source if it contains significant voltage
harmonic distortion. To model a Power Grid as a voltage harmonic source, a harmonic library needs to be
defined here.
Harmonic Library
Library
Click on Library button to bring up Harmonic Library Quick Pick editor. Note that only voltage
harmonic source can be added to power grids.

From the Harmonic Library Quick Pick Editor, select a manufacturer name and a model name (Voltage

Type
Manufacturer
Displays Manufacturer name of the selected harmonic library.
Model
Displays the model name of the selected harmonic library.
Wave Form
Displays one cycle of the voltage or current waveform of the selected harmonic library in time domain.
Print (Wave Form)
Spectrum
Print (Spectrum)


A
service. After the actively failed component is isolated, and the protection breakers are reclosed. This
MTTR

8760/MTTR).
MTTF
A
( MTTF = 1.0/
A
).
FOR
A
(FOR =
MTTR/(MTTR+8760/
A
).
Switching Time
Enter the switching time (or the time for isolating failure) in hr. It is the period from the time a switch
operation is required due to a forced outage until that switching operation is performed.
Available
P

rP
Library

8.8.5 Energy Cost Page
The Energy Cost page contains the information on energy cost (electricity price) from power grid, which
is used in optimal power flow, and the energy cost related calculation.

Model Type
Model for power grid energy cost curve. Since most utilities bill customers in a fixed price for segment
of electricity usage, a Piecewise model is provided.
Min MW
Enter the minimum MW imported from the power grid. Note that this number can be negative, in which
case, the system is exporting power into the power grid.
Max MW
Enter the maximum MW imported from the power grid.
Model Parameter
Enter and change points in the list to specify an energy cost curve. The data points are specified in pairs:
a MW value and the price of per MW up to this value. For the example shown in the graph, from 0 MW
up to 1,000 MW, the price is $50 per MW.
Add
Click on this button to add a blank new data point pair at the end of list.

Insert
Click on this button to insert a blank new point pair before the highlighted data point pair.
Delete
Click on this button to delete the highlighted data point pair.
Price Curve
Displays the curve from the data points entered.
Print
Click on this button to print a hard copy of the price curve.
8.8.6 Remarks Page

User-Defined Info
This is an alphanumeric field with the default name Last Maint. You can

UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchase Date

8.8.7 Comments Page


AC Elements Generator

8.9 Generator
The properties associated with synchronous generators of the electrical distribution system can be entered
in this editor. Synchronous generator kV rating, MW rating, and operating mode are displayed on top of
each page for your information.

The Synchronous Generator Editor includes eleven pages of properties.

Info Page
Rating Page
Impedance/Model Page
Exciter Page
Governor Page
PSS Page
Harmonic Page
Reliability Page
Fuel Cost Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
8.9.1 Info Page
Within the Info Page, specify the synchronous generator ID, connected Bus ID, In/Out of Service,
Equipment Name and Description, and synchronous generator type.

Info
ID


PowerStation automatically assigns a unique ID to each synchronous generator. The assigned generator
IDs consist of the default generator ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the
number of generators increase. The default generator ID (Bus) can be changed from the Defaults Menu in
the menu bar or from the Project View.
Bus
This is the ID of the connecting bus for the synchronous generator. If the terminal is not connected to any
bus, a blank entry will be shown for the bus ID. To connect or reconnect a synchronous generator to a
bus, select a bus from the list box. The one-line diagram will be updated to show the new connection
after you click on OK. Note that you can only connect to buses that reside in the same view where the
synchronous generator resides, i.e., you cannot connect to a bus that resides in the Dumpster or in another
composite network.

If a synchronous generator is connected to a bus through a number of protective devices, reconnection of
the synchronous generator to a new bus from the editor, will reconnect the last existing protective device
to the new bus, as shown below, where Gen1 is reconnected from Bus10 to Bus4.

In/Out of Service
Operating conditions of a bus can be selected by choosing either the In Service or Out of Service options.
The properties of an Out of Service bus can be edited like an In Service bus; however, an Out of Service
bus will not be included in any system studies. When Continuity Check is activated, an Out of Service
bus automatically becomes dimmed in the one-line diagram. All the loads and branches energized solely
through an Out of Service bus will also be de-energized and become dimmed.

configuration status. Therefore, you can set a bus to be In Service for the Base Data and Out of Service in
Revision Data.
Equipment
FDR Tag
Name

Description

Mode
The generator mode of operation and its ratings are displayed on the top of the editor for your reference.
Swing
For load flow studies, a swing generator will take up the slack of the power flows in the system, i.e., the
voltage magnitude and angle of the generator terminals will remain at the specified operating values.

For motor acceleration studies, an initial load flow study is conducted to determine initial conditions. For
the initial load flow, a swing generator is represented as an infinite source. At time 0+, the generator is
modeled as a voltage source behind its direct-axis transient impedance.

For transient stability studies, all generators are modeled dynamically from time 0+. One of the swing
machines (power grids or generators) is selected as the reference machine for the entire system.

There must be at least one swing machine (power grid or synchronous generator) connected to any
isolated subsystem in the one-line diagram. You can have multiple swing machines connected to any bus
in the system.

Any element that is connected to a swing machine is displayed as an energized element in the one-line
diagram and will be included in studies. Also, the rated voltage (kV) of a swing generator is used as the
base kV of the bus that the generator is connected to. The base kVs of the rest of the system are then
calculated using transformer turn ratios. For transient stability studies, a swing generator becomes the
reference machine for the system, i.e., the angle of the internal voltage source of the generator is set to
zero and the voltage angle of all of the synchronous machines in the system will be relative to this
reference machine.
Voltage Control
A generator can be selected as a voltage control (regulated) system, which means that the generator will
adjust its var output to control the voltage. Therefore, the generators terminal voltage magnitude,
operating real power (MW), and minimum and maximum allowable reactive power supply (Max Q and
Min Q) must be entered for voltage control generators. A voltage control generator means that the
generator is base loaded (droop mode with fixed MW) with an Automatic Voltage Regulator (AVR)
controlling the field excitation for a constant voltage operation. During load flow studies, if the
calculated generator Mvar falls outside the generator Mvar capability limits (Max Q or Min Q limit), the
value of the Mvar will be set equal to the limit and the generator mode is changed to Mvar control.

Mvar Control
With this option you can specify the amount of fixed MW and Mvar generation in the Rating Page of the
Synchronous Generator Editor. An Mvar control generator means that the generator is base loaded (droop
mode with fixed MW) with a fixed field excitation (no AVR action).
SC Designation
The short-circuit designation of the generator is used for ANSI/IEEE and IEC Standard
requirements.

Gen. Type
The generator type is used only for determining the generator reactance for ANSI/IEEE short-circuit
calculations as shown in the following table.

Gen. Type Cycle Xsc 1 -4 Cycle Xsc 30 Cycle Xsc
Turbo X X X
Hydro X X X
Hydro
Without Damper Winding

0.75 X

0.75 X

X
IEC Exciter Type
The IEC Exciter type is used for determining the
max
factor for generators in the calculation of steady-
state short-circuit currents per IEC Standard 909.
max
is proportional to
fmax
, which takes different values
based on exciter types as shown in the following table.

IEC Exciter Type
fmax

Turbine 130% 1.3
Turbine 160% 1.6
Salient-pole 160% 1.6
Salient-pole 200% 2.0
Terminal Fed N/A

For generator exciter types specified as the terminal fed type, there is no generator contribution to the
steady-state short-circuit current.
8.9.2 Rating Page


Rating
kW / MW
Enter the rated real power of the synchronous generator in MW or kW. Choose from the two options by
clicking on the MW/kW button.
kV
Enter the rated voltage of the synchronous generator in kV. This entry is used by PowerStation to convert
the ohmic values of the circuit elements to per unit values for calculations. This value is also used to
convert the final synchronous generator voltage to the actual values for output reports. Base voltages are
calculated by PowerStation, beginning with the swing systems (swing power grids and/or swing
generators) and continuing for the rest of the system using the rated kV of the transformer windings.
% PF
Enter the rated power factor of the synchronous generator in percent.
KVA / MVA
Enter the rated power of the synchronous generator in kVA or MVA.
% Eff
Enter the rated efficiency of the synchronous generator in percent.
Poles
Enter the number of poles for the synchronous generator.
FLA
The generator full load current is calculated and displayed here in amperes.
RPM
PowerStation displays the rated RPM (synchronous speed) of the synchronous generator based on the
system frequency and the number of poles entered (Ws=120 freq/pole).
Design Setting
% V (Voltage Magnitude)
Enter the voltage magnitude setting of the regulated bus at the synchronous generator terminal as a
percentage of the bus nominal kV. This % operating voltage is used as the control (regulated) value for
swing and voltage control modes. For Mvar controlled power grids, this value is used as an initial
operating voltage.
Vangle (Voltage Angle)
Enter the voltage angle setting for the swing bus at the synchronous generator terminal in degrees. This
value is used as a reference angle for generators in swing mode. For Mvar control generators, this value
is used as an initial operating voltage angle.
MW
Enter the operating megawatt generation (real power supply) of the synchronous generator. This field is
provided for voltage controlled and Mvar controlled synchronous generator types. This value will be held
fixed for load flow solutions.

Mvar
Enter the megavar generation (reactive power supply) of the synchronous generator. This field is
provided for Mvar controlled synchronous generator types only. This value will be held fixed for load
flow solutions.
var Limits
Min & Max Q (Minimum & Maximum Mvar/kvar)
These entries specify the minimum and maximum limits for reactive power generation. These limits are
required for voltage controlled synchronous generator types only and should be obtained from the
generator capability curve (Mvar vs. MW), i.e., the Max and Min Mvar limits should correspond to the
specified MW generation. If the value of the calculated Mvar falls outside this range, the value is fixed at
the limit and the generator type is changed to Mvar control.
Operating
The results of the latest load flow run are displayed here.
8.9.3 Impedance / Model Page

Short-Circuit Z (Impedance)
Xd
Direct-axis subtransient reactance in percent (machine base)
Xd
Direct-axis transient reactance in percent (machine base). It is used for 30 cycle fault analysis and motor
starting studies

X/R
Armature X/R ratio (X/Ra). For ANSI short-circuit studies, this value is used for both cycle and 1-4
cycle networks
Xo
Zero sequence reactance in percent (machine base). This value is used for unbalanced faults under ANSI
short-circuit studies

Harmonic Z
X2
Negative sequence reactance in percent (machine base), this value is used for harmonic analysis only and
is not used for short-circuit studies.
Grounding
These entries specify the synchronous generator grounding connections, type, and rating.
Connection
The generator grounding connection can be selected by clicking on the connection buttons until the
Type
For Wye-connected windings, choose from the four grounding types provided in the list box:

Amp
For resistor or reactor grounded generators, enter the resistor or reactor rating in amperes


where the line-to-neutral voltage is the bus nominal voltage of the machine divided by 3 .
Dynamic Model
Select equivalent, transient, or subtransient model type for the synchronous generator. All of the
parameters listed under Dynamic Model are used only for Transient Stability studies. Full descriptions of
these variables are found in Chapter 10, Dynamic Models.
Model Type
Equivalent A model uses an internal voltage source behind the armature resistance
and quadrature-axis reactance.
Transient A more comprehensive model than Equivalent model,
including machines saliency.
Subtransient A comprehensive representation of general type synchronous machine,
including both transient and subtransient parameters.

Machine Type
Round-Rotor For machines that are made of round-rotor.
Salient-Pole For machines that are made of salient-pole.
Xd
Direct-axis synchronous reactance in percent (machine base)

XL
Armature leakage reactance in percent (machine base)
Xq
Quadrature-axis synchronous reactance in percent (machine base)
Xq
Quadrature-axis transient synchronous reactance in percent (machine base)
Xq
Quadrature-axis subtransient synchronous reactance in percent (machine base)
Tdo
Direct-axis transient open-circuit time constant in seconds
Tdo
Direct-axis subtransient open circuit-time constant in seconds
Tqo
Quadrature-axis transient open-circuit time constant in seconds
Tqo
Quadrature-axis subtransient open-circuit time constant in seconds
Sbreak
Per unit of terminal voltage at which the generator saturation curve skews from the air-gap line
S100
Saturation factor at 100% terminal voltage
S120

Saturation factors S100 and S120 are calculated from the following equations:

S100 = I
f100
/ I
f

S120 = I
f120
/ 1.2I
f

where:

I
f
= Field current corresponding to 100% terminal voltage on the air gap line (no saturation)
I
f100
= Field current corresponding to 100% terminal voltage on the open circuit saturation curve

I
f120

Damping
Shaft mechanical damping term in percent MW change due to 1 Hz deviation in speed ( % MW / Hz).
Typical values range from 2% (short shaft) to 10% (long shaft).
H
Total inertia of the generator shaft including the prime mover & coupling gear in MW-Sec/MVA. The
inertia constant H is related to the shaft moment of inertia, square of generator synchronous speed in
RPM, and the generator rated MVA.

H = 2.31 * 10
-10
* WR
2
* RPM
2
/ MVA (for WR
2
= Moment of inertia in lb-ft
2
)
or
H = 5.48 * 10
-9
* WR
2
* RPM
2
/ MVA (for WR
2
= Moment of inertia in kg-m
2
)
8.9.4 Exciter Page
This help section is concerned with the representation of the excitation systems and automatic voltage
regulators (AVR) for synchronous generators.


The excitation and AVR systems for synchronous generators can be sophisticated. Complete modeling of
these systems is usually necessary for Transient Stability studies. The equivalent transfer functions used
for the excitation and AVR systems and their variable/parameter names are either provided by exciter
manufactures or in accordance with the IEEE recommended types as found from the following references:

IEEE Working Group Report, "Computer Representation of Excitation Systems", IEEE Transaction on
Power Apparatus and Systems, Vol. PAS-87, No. 6, June 1968, pp.1460/1464

IEEE Committee Report, "Excitation System Models for Power System Stability Studies", IEEE
Transactions on Power Apparatus and Systems, Vol. PAS-100, No. 2, February 1981, pp.494/509

IEEE Std 421.5-1992, IEEE Recommended Practice for Excitation System Models for Power System
Stability Studies, IEEE Power Engineering Society, 1992

In general, exciter manufacturers should be contacted to determine the applicability of the IEEE-type
representations to their excitation systems.
Excitation/AVR Type
You can specify the excitation/AVR type by selecting one of the following models from the list box.
Refer to the chapter on Dynamic Models for details.

Type Description
1 = Continuously Acting Regulator With Rotating Exciter System
2 = Rotating Rectifier Exciter With Static Regulator System
3 = Static System With Terminal Potential and Current Supplies
1S = Controlled Rectifier System with Terminal Voltage
DC1 = DC Commutator Exciter with Continuous Voltage Regulation
DC2 = DC Commutator Exciter with Continuous Voltage Regulation and Supplies from
Terminal Voltage
DC3 = DC Commutator Exciter with Non-Continuous Voltage Regulation
ST1 = Potential-Source Controlled-Rectifier Exciter
ST2 = Static System with Terminal Potential and Current Supplies
ST3 = Compound Source-Controlled Rectifier Exciter
AC1 = Alternator-Rectifier Exciter System with Non-Controlled Rectifiers and
Field Current Feedback
AC2 = High-Initial-Response Alternator-Rectifier Exciter System with Non-Controlled
Rectifiers and Field Current Feedback
AC3 = Field-Controlled Alternator-Rectifier Exciter
AC4 = High-Initial-Response Alternator-Supplied Controlled Rectifier Exciter
AC5A = Simplified Rotating Rectifier Exciter
AC8B = IEEE Type AC8B
SR8F = Basler SR8F and SR125A Exciter
HPC = HPC 840 AVR/Exciter Model
JEUM = Jeumont Industrie Excitation / AVR System
ST1D = Static System with Terminal Potential & Current Supplies
AC1A = IEEE Type AC1A
Fixed = Constant Excitation (i.e., no regulator action). This can be used for generators with
constant excitation or when the machine voltage regulator is operating under PF or Mvar
control.
UDM = User Defined Dynamic Model

Some exciter types require that you select a control bus from the dropdown list that appears when they are
specified.
Sample Data
The Sample Data button can be used for each type of exciter to provide a set of sample data for the
selected exciter and AVR type.
Compile UDM
PowerStation allows you to model your own Exciter through UDM (User Defined Models). If you
selected any of the UDM models, this button will appear. By pressing this button, you will be taken to
the UDM Compiler Editor.

You will compile your model and come back to this window. PowerStation will use this Exciter model
for its calculations.

See the chapter on User Defined Dynamic Models, Chapter 20, for more information.
8.9.5 Governor Page
This section describes the representation of speed governing and engine control systems for synchronous
generators. Majority of models provided here are consistent with the IEEE committee report for
governors and turbines, "Dynamic Models for Steam and Hydro Turbines in Power System Studies,"
IEEE Transaction on Power Apparatus and System, Vol PAS-92, July/Dec 1973, pp.1904-1915. Other
models are vendor specific.
Governor/Turbine Type
You can specify the governor/turbine type by selecting one of the following models from the list box.
Refer to the chapter on Dynamic Models for details.


Type Description
ST = Steam-Turbine Governor System
ST1 = Single-Reheat Steam Turbine
ST2 = Tandem-Compound, Single-Reheat Steam Turbine
ST3 = Tandem-Compound, Double-Reheat Steam Turbine
STM = IEEE General Steam-Turbine Representation
GT = Gas-Turbine Governor System
GTF = Gas Turbine including Fuel System
GP = General Purpose Governor-Turbine System
DT = Diesel Engine Governor
505 = Woodward 505E PID Governor for Extraction Steam Turbine
UG8 = Woodward Governor
2301 = Woodward 2301A Governor for Diesel Unit
GTH = GE Heavy Duty Gas Turbine Model
GTS = GE Simplified Single Shaft Gas Turbine Model
MARS = Solar Turbine MARS Governor Set
GHH = GHH Brosig Steam Turbine Governor
DDEC = Detroit Diesel DDEC Governor Turbine
HYDR = Woodward Hydraulic Governor & Turbine
SGT = IEEE Gas-Turbine
PL-A = Power Logic Governor & Turbine Model A
ST60 = Solar Taurus 60 Solonox Gas Fuel Turbine-Governor
ST70 = Solar Taurus 70 Solonox Gas Fuel Turbine-Governor
GT-2 = Gas-Turbine Governor System
GT-3 = Gas-Turbine Governor System (Non wind-up limit)
CT251 = Combustion Turbine Governor Model
None = No Governor action, i.e., the mechanical power (Pm) is kept constant throughout
the time simulation studies.
Mode
Droop or isoch mode of operation.
LS GP#
From the dropdown list
Sample Data
The Sample Data button can be used for each type of exciter to provide a set of sample data for the
selected governor/turbine type.
Compile UDM




8.9.6 PSS Page
Power system stabilizer (PSS) is an auxiliary device installed on synchronous generator and tuned to help
with system stability.

PowerStation provides two standard IEEE type models:

IEEE Type 1 PSS (PSS1A)

Sample Data
The Sample Data button can be used for each type of PSS to provide a set of sample data for the selected
stabilizer type.
Compile UDM



8.9.7 Harmonic Page
The Harmonic page contains the information to model the synchronous generator as a harmonic source in
harmonic studies.

Harmonic Library
Synchronous Generator can be modeled as a voltage harmonic source if it contains significant voltage
harmonic distortion. To model a Synchronous Generator as a voltage harmonic source, a harmonic
library needs to be defined here.
Library
Click on the Library button to bring up Harmonic Library Quick Pick Editor. Note that only voltage
harmonic source can be added to generators.


From the Harmonic Library Quick Pick Editor, select a manufacturer name and a model name (Voltage

Type
Manufacturer
Model
Wave Form
Print (Wave Form)
Spectrum
Print (Spectrum)



A
service. After the actively failed component is isolated, and the protection breakers are reclosed. This
MTTR
Enter the Mean Time To Repair in hours. It is the expected time for a crew to repair a component outage

8760/MTTR).
MTTF
A
( MTTF = 1.0/
A
).

FOR

A
(FOR =
MTTR/(MTTR+8760/
A
).
Switching Time
Replacement
Available
P

Alternative Supply
r
P
Library
Library
8.9.9 Fuel Cost Page
The Fuel Cost page contains the information on generator fuel cost, which is used in optimal power flow
and the energy cost related calculation.


Model Type
Model for power grid energy cost curve. Four models are available:

Piecewise Linear
Piecewise Quadratic
Quadratic plus Exp.
V Curve
Piecewise Liner
For this model, data points for series of MW values and the fuel cost for generating the corresponding
MW are specified in pairs.

Piecewise Quadratic
For this model, data points for series of MW values and the incremental fuel cost for generating the
corresponding MW are specified in pairs. Note that for Piecewise Quadratic curve, fuel cost at 0 MW
needs to be specified, which is entered into Initial Cost field.

Piecewise plus Exp.
This model is defined by an equation in a form of: C0 + C1*MW + C2*MW
2
+ C2*MW
3
*e
k
.


V Curve
For this model, a desired MW generation point MidPoint is entered in MW and the slope of fuel cost
curve is entered in Weight.

Min MW
Enter the minimum MW imported from the generator.
Max MW
Enter the maximum MW imported from the generator.
Model Parameter
Enter and change model parameters based on the selected model type.
Add
Click on this button to add a blank new data point pair at the end of model parameter list. Available with
the Piecewise Linear and Piecewise Quadratic models.
Insert
Click on this button to insert a blank new point pair before the highlighted data point pair. Available with
the Piecewise Linear and Piecewise Quadratic models.
Delete
Click on this button to delete the highlighted data point pair. Available with the Piecewise Linear and
Piecewise Quadratic models.

Cost Curve
Displays the curve from the data points entered.
Print
Click on this button to print a hard copy of the cost curve.
8.9.10 Remarks Page

User-Defined Info


UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchase Date

8.9.11 Comment Page


AC Elements Induction Machine

8.10 Induction Machine
The properties associated with induction machines of the electrical distribution system can be entered in
this editor.

The Induction Machine Editor includes ten pages of properties.

Info Page Nameplate Page Model Page
Start Dev. Page Start Cat. Page Cable/Vd Page
Cable Amp Page Reliability Page Remarks Page
Comment Page
8.10.1 Info Page
Within the Info Page, specify the induction machine ID, connected Bus, In/Out of Service, Equipment
FDR (feeder) Tag, Name, Description, load Priority, Data Type, Configuration Status, Quantity of
induction machines, Phase Connection, and Demand Factor.

Info
ID
Enter a unique ID with up to 25 alphanumeric characters.

PowerStation automatically assigns a unique ID to each induction machine. The assigned IDs consist of
the default induction machine ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the
number of induction machines increase. The default induction machine ID (Mtr) can be changed from the
Defaults Menu in the menu bar or from the Project View.
Operation Technology, Inc. 8-141 PowerStation 4.0

Bus
This is the ID of the connecting bus for the induction machine. If the terminal is not connected to any bus,
a blank entry will be shown for the bus ID. To connect or reconnect an induction machine to a bus, select
a bus from the list box. The one-line diagram will be updated to show the new connection after you click
on OK. Note that you can only connect to buses that reside in the same view where the induction
machine resides, i.e., you cannot connect to a bus that resides in the Dumpster or in another composite
network.

If an induction machine is connected to a bus through a number of protective devices, reconnection of the
induction machine to a new bus in this editor will reconnect the last existing protective device to the new
bus, as shown below where Mtr3 is reconnected from Bus10 to Bus4.

In/Out of Service
The operating condition of an induction machine can be selected by choosing either the In Service or Out
of Service options. The properties of an Out of Service machine can be edited like an In Service machine;
however, an Out of Service machine will not be included in any system studies. When the continuity
check is activated, an Out of Service machine automatically becomes dimmed in the one-line diagram.

Configuration
Select the operating status of the induction machine(s) for the selected configuration status from the list
box. Options for operating status include:

Continuous - Continuously operating load

Intermittent - Intermittently operating load
Spare - Spare load (no short-circuit contribution)

Depending on the demand factor specified for each operating status, the actual loading of the machine is
determined for load flow and machine starting studies.


Note that status is not a part of the machine engineering properties. For this reason, the name of the
configuration status is shown, indicating the machine status under the specific configuration, i.e., you can
have a different operating status under each configuration. In the following example, status of a machine
is shown to be Continuous under Normal configuration and Spare under Emergency configuration.

Connection
Phase
This is the phase connection of the induction machine. Select the phase connection type from the list box.
Options for phase connection include:

3 Phase Three-phase machine
1 Phase Single-phase machine connected between phase A, B or C.
Single-phase machine connected line-to-line between phases AB , BC or CA
Quantity
Enter the quantity (number) of induction machines for this machine ID. This allows you to group
identical machines together without a need for graphical presentation in the one-line diagram.
Equipment
FDR Tag
Name
Description
Data Type
This field provides a convenient way to track data entry. Select one of the data types (such as estimate,
typical, vendor, final, etc.) from the list box. As the data is updated, this field can be changed to reflect the
source of the latest data. There are a total of ten load types and you can change their name from the
Project Menu under Settings and Data Type.
Priority
Select the load priority of this machine from the list box. This field can be used for load priority,
operating priority, load-shedding priority, etc. Ten different priorities are provided to select from.
Priorities may be chosen from the Project Menu under Settings and Load Priority.
App. Type
Select the application type for this induction machine, i.e., motor or generator type.

Demand factor
Modify the demand factors for Continuous, Intermittent, and Spare status in the provided entry fields.
Demand factor is the amount of time the induction machine is actually operating. Demand factor affects
the following calculations:

Operating kW = Rated kVA * PF * % Loading * Demand Factor
Operating kvar = Rated kVA * RF * % Loading * Demand Factor

Where the PF & RF (power factor and reactive factor) are calculated based on the specified % loading
from the power factors specified at 100%, 75%, and 50% loading.

Demand factors for Continuous, Intermittent, and Spare status have a range from 0% to 100%. Since
demand factors are a part of engineering properties, PowerStation uses the same factors for all
configurations.
8.10.2 Nameplate Page
In this page, you can specify the machine nameplate data (ratings). Select Machine Library data, specify
% loading, and display machine loading and feeder losses for all loading categories.

Ratings
HP/kW

Enter the machine output (shaft) rating in horsepower (HP) or kW. You can choose from these two
options by clicking on the HP/kW button. PowerStation uses the following equations for the nameplate
parameters:

Rated kVA = HP * 0.7457 / ( PF * Eff ) Rating in HP
= kW / ( PF * Eff ) Rating in kW

Full-Load Amp = Rated kVA / (3 * kV ) 3-phase machines
= Rated kVA / kV Single phase machines

where the PF and Eff are at full load condition ( 100% loading).
MVA/kVA

You can choose from these two options by clicking on the MVA/kVA button to display the machine
rating in MVA or kVA and the machine operating load and feeder losses in (MW + j Mvar) or
(kW + j kvar).
kV
Enter the rated voltage of the machine in kV. This is a line-to-line voltage for three-phase machines.
FLA
This is the rated full load current of the machine in amperes. This is the current the machine would pull
from the system when it is fully loaded, i.e., when the system is operating at the rated HP (or kW), rated
kV, and rated frequency. When you modify FLA, the machine efficiency at 100% loading is recalculated.
PowerStation limits the entry of FLA in such a way that the efficiency at 100% loading cannot exceed
100% or be below 10%.
% PF
Enter the machine power factor in percent at 100%, 75%, and 50% loading. The power factor at 100%
loading is the rated power factor and is used for calculating the rated values, i.e., when you change the
power factor at 100% loading, the machine full load current is recalculated. All three values of the power
factors are used for determining the operating power factor of the machine under different percent
loading, i.e., when you change any one of the power factors, the operating load and feeder losses for all
loading categories are recalculated.

The sign of a power factor determines whether it is lagging or leading. Since induction machines always
take reactive power (kvars) from the system, they have a lagging power factor, which must be entered as a
positive value.
% Eff
This is the efficiency of the machine, in percent, at 100%, 75%, and 50% loading. Efficiency cannot
exceed 100%. The efficiency at 100% loading is the rated efficiency and is used for calculating the rated
values, i.e., when you change the efficiency at 100% loading, the machine full load current is
recalculated. All three values of the efficiencies are used for determining the machine efficiency under
different percent loading, i.e., when you change the value of any one of the efficiencies, the operating
load and feeder losses for all loading categories are recalculated.
SF
Service factor is the permissible power loading in per unit. Service factor is not used for calculation of
loading or feeder losses. PowerStation gives you the option to use the service factor for voltage drop
calculations of the machine feeder.

Poles
Enter the number of poles. As the number of poles is changed, the synchronous speed of the machine is
recalculated and displayed in RPM (revolutions per minute).

RPM = 120 * Freq. / Poles

Library
Access Motor Nameplate Library data by clicking on the Library button and opening the Library Quick
Pick - Motor. Motor Nameplate data can be obtained and substituted from the library by highlighting and
double-clicking on the selection. Library data includes motor ratings such as HP/kW, kV, FLA, PF, Eff,
& Pole (transferred to the Nameplate Page) and motor parameters such as LRC, LR PF, X, X, X, X2,
X0, X/R, & Td (transferred to the Model Page).
Loading
This section is used to assign a percent loading to each one of the ten loading categories for this machine,
i.e., each machine can be set to have a different operating loading (generator) level for each loading
category. To edit the values of the percent loading, click on any one of the edit fields under the %
Loading column. Note that you can select any of these loading categories when conducting load flow and
motor starting studies.

PowerStation uses the specified percent loading of each loading category to calculate the operating power
factor and efficiency from the values specified at 100%, 75%, and 50% loading. This is accomplished by
using a curve fitting technique with a maximum of 100% for power factor and efficiency. The calculated
power factor and efficiency are then used to calculate and display the operating kW and kvar loading, as
well as the feeder losses, if an equipment cable with a non-zero length is specified for this load. Note that
although the demand factor is used for calculating the operating load and feeder losses, the value of the
demand factor is not used in determining the operating power factor and efficiency.

To edit the loading category names, select Loading Category from the Project Menu.
Operating Load

Operating Load can be updated from the Load Flow Study Case Editor. The operating load option is
available if your ETAP key has the online (PowerStation Management System) feature.

When the operating load box is checked in the load flow study case editor, the calculation results are
updated to sources, loads, and buses, so that they can be utilized as input for later studies. If your ETAP
key does not have the online feature, you can see the operating P and Q data in the element editor;
however, this data cannot be used in a later study.
8.10.3 Model Page

Locked-Rotor
% LRC
This is the machine locked-rotor current (at motor rated kV) in percent of the rated full load current of the
motor.
% PF
Enter the locked-rotor power factor in percent.
ANSI Short-Circuit Z
Std MF / Xsc
If you select Std MF, PowerStation uses the following ANSI Multiplying Factors for calculating the
positive sequence short-circuit impedances. If you select the Xsc option, you can directly enter the short-
circuit impedances in percent with motor ratings as the base. Note that the IEC short-circuit method does
not use these impedances.


Xsc Xsc
Motor Size RPM Cycle Network 1.5-4 Cycle Network
> 1000 HP 1800 1.0 / LRC 1.5 / LRC
> 250 HP 3600 1.0 / LRC 1.5 / LRC
50 HP other 1.2 / LRC 3.0 / LRC
< 50 HP 1.67 / LRC Infinity
Z Parameters
X0
Zero sequence reactance in percent (machine base); used for calculating short-circuit currents for
unbalanced faults.

X2
Negative sequence reactance in percent (machine base); used for harmonic analysis.
X
Motor steady-state reactance in percent (machine base).
X/R
Induction motors X/R ratio (Xsc/Ra)
Td
Induction motor transient time constant in seconds. This value is used in the IEC 363 method.

Td = X / (2 f Rr) (Rr = rotor resistance)
Grounding
These entries specify grounding connection, type, and rating of the motor.
Connection
The motor grounding connection can be selected by clicking on the connection buttons until the desired
Type
For Wye-connected motors, choose from these four grounding types provided in the list box:

Resistor A resistor is used in the neutral grounding path.)
Amp Rating
For resistor or reactor grounded motors, enter the resistor or reactor rating in amperes.
where the line-to-neutral voltage is the rated voltage of the machine divided by 3.

Model

CKT Model Library
Access Motor Model Library data by selecting CKT model and clicking on the Lib button to open the
Library Quick-Pick - Motor Model. Motor model data from the library can be obtained and transferred to
the Motor Editor by selecting the Model Type (Single1, Single2, DBL1, or DBL2) and then highlighting a
Design Class and model ID. Motor model is used for dynamic motor starting and transient stability
analysis.

After you select a new model, if you click on OK to leave the Motor Editor, select another editor page, or
navigate to another motor, PowerStation prompts you with the following message to update (modify)
some of the nameplate parameters which do not match the calculated values using the selected model.

Characteristic Model Library
Access library data for torque-slip characteristic curve by selecting the characteristic model and clicking
on the Lib button to open the Library Quick Pick - Characteristic. Motor Characteristic Library data (slip,
torque, current, and power factor) can be selected by highlighting a Design Class and selecting a Model
ID. When you select Characteristic Library data, unlike the Motor CKT Model Library data, the library
data is not transferred to the Machine Editor, .i.e., a reference to the selected library design class and
model ID is kept with the machine. The characteristic data is obtained from the library when you run
motor starting studies. Note that the characteristic data is not considered a dynamic model for
transient stability studies.


After you select new Characteristic Library data, if you click on OK to leave the Motor Editor, select
another editor page, or navigate to another motor, PowerStation prompts you with the message shown
above to update (modify) some of the nameplate parameters which do not match the values from the
selected library.
Print
Prints the torque, current & power factor characteristic curves of the machine for the selected model
(CKT or characteristic).
8.10.4 Start Dev. Page

Starting Device
Type
Select the starting device type from the list box. PowerStation provides the following starting device
types:

None No starting device (across -the-line)
Auto Xfmr Auto-transformer
Resistor Series resistor
Reactor Series reactor
Capacitor, Bus Shunt capacitor connected to a motor bus
Capacitor, Terminal Shunt capacitor connected to the motor terminal

Tap
For reduced voltage starters, enter the percent tap for auto-transformers, resistors, and reactor types.
kvar
For switched capacitor type applications, enter the capacitor size in kvar. Note that the capacitor is
assumed to have a rated voltage equal to the bus nominal kV.
Switching Off
When a motor that uses a starting device reaches a certain speed, the starting device is removed and the
motor is placed directly on-line. Depending on what option you select, enter the switching time for
PowerStation to remove the starting device in either percent of the synchronous speed or actual time in
seconds. Time is measured from the instant the motor is accelerated.

In the static motor starting calculation, if the switch-off time specified for a starting device is larger than
the acceleration time specified for the motor, the switch-off time will be set equal to the acceleration time.
This means that for static motor starting, a starting device is switched off either at the switch-off time or
the acceleration time, whichever is smaller.
However, for the dynamic motor acceleration calculation, since the acceleration time is unknown before
the calculation, a starting device is switched off at the time specified by the user, regardless of whether it
is larger or smaller than the acceleration time.
Load Torque
This is the mechanical load connected to the motor shaft. The mechanical load is modeled as a third order
polynomial of the motor speed.
T = A
0
+ A
1
+ A
2
2
+ A
3
3

Motor Load Library
Access Motor Load Library data by clicking on the Library button and opening the library quick pick.
Motor Load Library data can be obtained by highlighting and double-clicking on the selection.
Print
Prints the motor and load torque/slip characteristic curves of the machine.

Inertia
H
Enter the total inertia of the motor shaft including the load and coupling gear in MW-Sec/MVA. The
inertia constant H is related to the shaft moment of inertia, square of motor synchronous speed in RPM,
and the motor rated MVA.

H = 2.31 * 10
-10
* WR
2
* RPM
2
/ MVA (WR
2
2
)
or
H = 5.48 * 10
-9
* WR
2
* RPM
2
/ MVA (WR
2
2
)

As you enter H, PowerStation calculates the moment of inertia WR
2
.
WR2
Enter WR2 for the motor, coupling gear, and load in lb-ft2 or kg-m2 based on the system unit. As you
enter WR2, PowerStation calculates the inertia constant H.
Acceleration Time
Enter No Load and Full Load motor acceleration time in seconds. These values along with the motor
percent loading are used to calculate the acceleration time for static motor stating, i.e., the motor will
carry the full LRC for the entire acceleration time. For dynamic motor starting, the motor model, load
model, and inertia are used to dynamically accelerate the motor.

8.10.5 Start Cat Page
Select motor starting categories by clicking on the boxes provided. Selecting motor starting categories
tells PowerStation which motor(s) to include in that starting category. The starting categories can be
easily selected from the Motor Starting Study Case Editor. The starting categories can be edited from
Project Menu, under Settings and Starting Categories.

Starting and Final % Loading
When a motor is started, the general practice is to reduce the load on that motor until it reaches the final
speed and then increase the load to the required operating level. Starting and final percent loading
provides modeling of this adjustment in the motor load. These values should be entered as a percent of
the motor full load current.

The % loading for the first starting category is used for transient stability studies.
Load Change Time
The beginning and ending of the load change time for each motor starting category can be specified here.


8.10.6 Cable/Vd Page
This page is used to display voltage drops and to add, delete, or edit the equipment cable and overload
heater associated with this motor.

Cable
This section provides capabilities for adding, deleting, or editing the equipment cable for this motor.
Partial cable information such as the cable ID, Type, #/Phase, Size, Length, and unit are provided here for
editing and displaying.
Cable ID
To add a cable to a motor, select and retrieve a cable from the Cable Library on this page.
Editor
This button will bring up the equipment Cable Editor.
Library
To add an equipment cable to a motor, select and retrieve a cable from the Cable Library.
Size Cable
For automatic sizing of the equipment cable, click on this button to bring up the Sizing Page of the
equipment Cable Editor.
Delete Cable
Click on this button to delete the equipment cable associated with this load.

Overload Heater
Library
Select an overload heater manufacturer and model from the Quick Pick Editor.

R
Enter the resistance of the overload heater in ohms or modify the value obtained from the library.
Voltage Drop
The total voltage drop (Vd) across the equipment cable and overload heater along with motor terminal
voltage (Vt) and starting voltage (Vst) are calculated and displayed here for all loading categories. Vd, Vt,
and Vst are displayed in percent values with a base kV equal to the bus nominal kV.
Vst
Vst represents the motor terminal voltage during starting conditions with the bus voltage fixed, i.e., it
includes voltage drop across the equipment cable only.
Vbus
The operating voltage of the connected bus (the bus which this load is connected to, if any) is displayed
here for reference.
Vd Calculation
Use App MF
By selecting this option, the cable ampacity Application Multiplying Factor (App MF) is used for voltage
drop calculations.
Use SF
By selecting this option, the motor Service Factor (SF) is used for voltage drop calculations.

8.10.7 Cable Amp Page

Installation Type

U/G Duct Bank
U/G Direct Buried
A/G Tray
A/G Conduit
Air Drop

Cable Application MF
Ampacity

Id = F Ib

Base Ampacity (Ib)

several components as listed below.

Allowable Ampacity
used in the load flow output reports to indicate the percent of cable overloading.
I x MF
U/G Duct
RHO
The thermal resistivity of the soil in degrees Celsius centimeters per Watt (C cm/W).
Ta
for UG systems are usually given at 20 degrees Celsius.
Tc

Grouping
number of rows and columns of the duct bank must be specified to determine a cable grouping adjustment
factor.

U/G Buried
RHO
The thermal resistivity of the soil is in degrees Celsius centimeters per Watt.
Ta
installed. Ambient soil temperature for the base ampacity is obtained from the library. The value is
usually specified at 20 degrees Celsius.
Tc
Grouping
A/G Trays
trays.
Ta
Tc
Tray Specification
NEC
the cumulative effects of combinations of tray covers and fireproofing.

Top Cover
Bottom Cover
than 6 feet.
Maintained Spacing
Cumulative Effect
cable trays.
Grouping
In general, cable sizes of 2/0 AWG and smaller are installed in cable trays in a randomly filled manner,
with a maximum of two cables high. Base ampacity of randomly filled trays are based on installations at a
uniform depth up to the maximum of 30% fill for 3 or 4-inch tray depths. The method applied here
corresponds to a maximum fill condition and does not consider fill conditions exceeding the nominal
depths. Therefore, the actual values of tray depth, width, and % fill entries are for display only.

Depth Depth of cable tray specified in inches or centimeters
Width Width of cable tray specified in inches or centimeters
% fill The total amount of cable tray cross-sectional area used by cables placed in the tray
Fire Protection
Fire Coating
can be installed in the tray, credit may be taken for reduction in cable % fill below nominal value.


Fire Stop
Fire Wrap
A/G Conduit
Above ground cable conduit
Ta
Ambient air (atmospheric) temperature is in degrees Celsius. The temperature of the air surrounding the
area where the tray is to be installed. Ambient air temperature for the base ampacity is obtained from the
Tc
Ampacity Adjustment
Grouping



for 50 % Load Diversity
4 through 6 80 %
7 through 9 70 %
10 through 24 70 %
25 through 42 60 %
43 and above 50 %

for No Load Diversity
4 through 6 80 %
7 through 9 70 %
10 through 20 50 %
21 through 30 45 %
31 through 40 40 %
41 through 60 35 %

Fire Protection
Fire Coating
Fire Stop
Fire Wrap
Air Drop
considered.
Ta

Tc
Fire Protection
libraries may be selected individually to best describe the fire protection associated with the air drop
Fire Coating
Fire Stop
Fire Wrap


A
failed component itself (and those components that are directly connected to this failed component) can

MTTR

8760/MTTR).

MTTF
A
( MTTF = 1.0/
A
).
FOR

A
(FOR =
MTTR/(MTTR+8760/
A
).

Switching Time
Replacement

Available
P

r
P
Library

Interruption Cost
Load Sector
Select the load sector name (or customer type) for the load. In the reliability calculation, the user sector
information is used to get interruption cost from the Reliability Cost library to calculate Expected
Interruption Cost.

8.10.9 Remarks Page

User-Defined Info
UD Field A5

UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchase Date

8.10.10 Comment Page


AC Elements Synchronous Motor
8.11 Synchronous Motor
The properties associated with synchronous motors of the electrical distribution system can be entered in
this editor.

The Synchronous Motor Editor includes ten pages of properties.

Info Page Nameplate Page Model Page
LR Model Page Start Dev. Page Start Cat. Page
Cable/Vd Page Cable Amp Page Reliability Page
Remarks Page Comment Page
8.11.1 Info Page
Within the Info Page, specify the synchronous motor ID, connected Bus ID, In/Out of Service, Equipment
FDR (feeder) Tag, load Priority, Name, Description, Data type, Configuration Status, Quantity or number
of synchronous motors, Phase Connection, and Demand Factor.

Info
ID

PowerStation automatically assigns a unique ID to each synchronous motor. The assigned IDs consist of
the default synchronous motor ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the
number of synchronous motors increase. The default synchronous motor ID (Syn) can be changed from
the Defaults Menu in the menu bar or from the Project View.
Bus
This is the ID of the connecting bus for the synchronous motor. If the terminal is not connected to any
bus, a blank entry will be shown for the bus ID. To connect or reconnect a synchronous motor to a bus,
select a bus from the list box. The one-line diagram will be updated to show the new connection after you
click on OK. Note that you can only connect to buses that reside in the same view where the synchronous
motor resides, i.e., you cannot connect to a bus that resides in the Dumpster or in another composite
network.

If a synchronous motor is connected to a bus through a number of protective devices, reconnection of the
synchronous motor to a new bus from this editor will reconnect the last existing protective device to the
new bus, as shown below where Syn3 is reconnected from Bus10 to Bus4.

In/Out of Service
The operating condition of a synchronous motor can be selected by choosing either the In Service or Out
of Service options. The properties of an Out of Service motor can be edited like an In Service breaker.
However, an Out of Service motor will not be included in any system studies. When Continuity Check is
activated, an Out of Service motor automatically becomes dimmed in the one-line diagram.

Configuration
Select the operating status of the synchronous motor(s) for the selected configuration status from the list
box.
Continuous Continuously operating load
Intermittent Intermittently operating load
Spare Spare load (no short-circuit contribution)

Depending on the demand factor specified for each operating status, the actual loading of the motor is
determined for load flow and motor starting studies.

Note that status is not a part of the motor engineering properties. For this reason, the name of the
configuration status is shown, indicating the motor status under the specific configuration, i.e., you can
have a different operating status under each configuration. In the following example, status of a motor is
shown to be Continuous under Normal configuration and Spare under Emergency configuration.

Equipment
FDR Tag
Name
Description
Priority
Select the load priority of this motor from the list box. This field can be used for load priority, operating
priority, load-shedding priority, etc. Ten different priorities are provided to select from. Names of the
priorities can be specified from the Project Menu under Settings and Load Priority.
Data Type
typical, vendor, final, etc.) from the list box. As the data is updated, this field can be changed to reflect
the source of the latest data. There are a total of ten load types and you can change their name from the
App. Type
Select the application type for this synchronous motor.
Connection
Phase
This is the phase connection of this synchronous motor. Select the phase connection type from the list
box. Options for phase connection include:

1 Phase Single-phase machine connected between phase A, B, or C.
Single-phase machine connected line-to-line between phases AB, BC, or CA
Quantity
Enter the quantity (number) of synchronous motors for this motor ID. This allows you to group identical
motors together without the need for graphical representation on the one-line diagram.
Demand Factor
Demand factor is the amount of time the load is actually operating. Demand factor affects the following
calculations:

Operating kW = Rated kVA * PF * % Loading * Demand Factor
Operating kvar = Rated kVA * RF * % Loading * Demand Factor

Where the PF & RF (power factor and reactive factor) are calculated based on the specified % Loading
from the power factors specified at 100%, 75%, and 50% loading.

configurations.
In this page you can specify the motor nameplate data (ratings), select Motor Library data, specify %
loading, and display motor loading and feeder losses for all loading categories.

Ratings
HP/kW

Enter the motor output (shaft) rating in horsepower (HP) or kW. You can choose from these two options
by clicking on the HP/kW button. PowerStation uses the following equations for the nameplate
parameters:


Full-Load Amp = Rated kVA / (3 * kV ) 3-phase motors
= Rated kVA / kV Single phase motors

where the PF and Eff are at the full load condition (100% loading).

MVA/kVA

You can choose from these two options by clicking on the MVA/kVA button to display the motor rating
in MVA or kVA, and the motor operating load and feeder losses in (MW + j Mvar) or (kW + j kvar).
kV
Enter the rated voltage of the motor in kV. This is a line-to-line voltage for three-phase motors.
FLA
This is the rated full load current of the motor in amperes. This is the current the motor would pull from
the system when it is fully loaded, i.e., operating at the rated HP (or kW), rated kV, and rated frequency.
When you modify FLA, the motor efficiency at 100% loading is recalculated. PowerStation limits the
entry of FLA so that the efficiency at 100% loading cannot exceed 100% or be below 10%.
% PF
Enter the motor power factor, in percent, at 100%, 75%, and 50% loading. The power factor at 100%
loading is the rated power factor and is used for calculating the rated values, i.e., when you change the
power factor at 100% loading, the motor full load current is recalculated. All three values of the power
factors are used for determining the operating power factor of the motor under different percent loading,
i.e., when you change any one of the power factors, the operating load and feeder losses for all loading
categories are recalculated.

The sign of a power factor determines whether it is lagging or leading. The values of power factor can
range from -0.01% to -100% for synchronous motors operating at leading power factors (over excited)
and range from +0.01% to +100% for lagging power factor (under excited) operations. The following V-
curve indicates a synchronous motor with a rated (100% loading) power factor of 80% leading (-80%).

% Eff
This is the efficiency of the motor, in percent, at 100%, 75%, and 50% loading. Efficiency cannot exceed
100%. The efficiency at 100% loading is the rated efficiency and is used for calculating the rated values,
i.e., when you change the efficiency at 100% loading, the motor full load current is recalculated. All
three values of the efficiencies are used for determining the motor efficiency under different percent
loading, i.e., when you change the value of any one of the efficiencies, the operating load and feeder
losses for all loading categories are recalculated.

SF
Service factor is the permissible power loading in per unit. Service factor is not used for calculation of
loading or feeder losses. PowerStation gives you option to use the service factor for voltage drop
calculations of the motor feeder.
Poles
Enter the number of poles. As the number of poles is changed, the synchronous speed of the motor is


Library (Motor Nameplate)
Access Motor Nameplate Library data by clicking on the Library button and opening the Library Quick
Pick - Motor. Motor nameplate data can be obtained and substituted from the library by highlighting and
double-clicking on the selection. Library data include motor ratings such as HP/kW, kV, FLA, PF, Eff, &
Pole (transferred to the Nameplate Page) and motor parameters such as LRC, LR PF, X, X, X, X2, X0,
X/R, & Td (transferred to the Model Page).
Loading
This section is used to assign a percent loading to each one of the ten loading categories for this motor,
i.e., each motor can be set to have a different operating loading level for each loading category. To edit
the values of percent loading, click on any one of the edit fields under the % Loading column. Note that
you can select any of these loading categories when conducting load flow and motor starting studies.

factor and efficiency from the values of power factor and efficiency specified at 100%, 75%, and 50%
loading. This is accomplished by using a curve fitting technique with a maximum of 100% for power
factor and efficiency. The calculated power factor and efficiency are then used to calculate and display
the operating kW and kvar loading as well as the feeder losses if an equipment cable with a non-zero
length is specified for this load. Note that although the demand factor is used for calculating the
operating load and feeder losses, the value of the demand factor is not used in determining the operating
power factor and efficiency.

To edit the loading category names, select Loading Category from the Project Menu on the menu bar.
Operating Load
available if your ETAP key has the online (PowerStation Management System) feature. When the
operating load box is checked in the load flow study case editor, the calculation results are updated to
sources, loads, and buses, so that they can be utilized as input for later studies. If your ETAP key does not
have the online feature, you can see the operating P and Q data in the element editor; however, this data
cannot be used in a later study.
8.11.3 Model Page
This page includes the synchronous machine impedances and time constants.

Short-Circuit Z (Impedance)
Xd
Direct-axis subtransient reactance in percent (machine base); this reactance is used for ANSI short-circuit
studies.
X/R
Armature X/R ratio (X/Ra). For ANSI short-circuit studies, this value is used for both cycle and 1-4
cycle networks.
X0
Zero sequence reactance in percent (machine base); this value is used for unbalanced faults under ANSI
short-circuit studies.
Harmonic Z
X2
Negative sequence reactance in percent (machine base); this value is used for harmonic analysis only and
is not used for short-circuit studies.
Dynamic Model
Select equivalent, transient, or subtransient model type for the synchronous machines. Except for Xd,
Tdo, which are also shared by IEC 363 Short-Circuit calculation, all of the parameters listed under
Dynamic Model are used only for Transient Stability studies. Full descriptions of these variables are
found in Chapter 13, Dynamic Models.

Model Type
Equivalent: A model uses an internal voltage source behind the armature resistance and quadrature-axis
reactance.
Transient: A more comprehensive model than Equivalent model, including machines saliency.
Subtransient: A comprehensive representation of general type synchronous machine, including both
transient and subtransient parameters.
Machine Type
Round-Rotor For machines that are made of round-rotor
Salient-Pole For machines that are made of salient-pole
Xd
Direct-axis synchronous reactance in percent (machine base)
Xd
Direct-axis transient synchronous reactance in percent (machine base); used for both motor starting and
transient stability studies.
Xl
Armature leakage reactance in percent (machine base)
Xq
Quadrature-axis synchronous reactance in percent (machine base)
Xq
Quadrature-axis transient synchronous reactance in percent (machine base)
Xq
Quadrature-axis subtransient synchronous reactance in percent (machine base)
Tdo
Direct-axis transient open-circuit time constant in seconds
Tdo
Direct-axis subtransient open-circuit time constant in seconds
Tqo
Quadrature-axis transient open-circuit time constant in seconds; this parameter is not used for the
equivalent model.
Tqo
Quadrature-axis subtransient open-circuit time constant in seconds; this parameter is not used for the
equivalent model.
S100
S120

Saturation factors S100 and S120 are calculated from the following equations:

S100 = I
f100
/ I
f

S120 = I
f120
/ 1.2 I
f

where:

I
f
I
f100
I
f120
Damping
Shaft mechanical damping term, in percent, MW change due to 1 Hz deviation in speed ( % MW / Hz).
Typical values range from 2% (short shaft) to 10% (long shaft).
A Note on the Synchronous Motor Excitation System
The excitation voltages for synchronous motors are assumed as constants for motors operating within the
speed range of 50% to 110% of the synchronous speed. During the transient, if a motor's speed goes out
of this range, the frequency relay should trip off the contactor to disconnect the motor from the system
and shut down the excitation system simultaneously. Correspondingly, the program sets the excitation
voltage to zero if this condition occurs.

8.11.4 LR Model Page

Locked-Rotor
% LRC
This is the locked-rotor current in percent of the rated full load current of the motor, as specified in the
Nameplate Page.
% PF
Grounding
These entries specify grounding connection, type, and rating of the motor.
Connection
The motor grounding connection can be selected by clicking on the connection buttons until the desired
Type
For Wye-connected motors, choose from the four grounding types provided in the list box:

Open- Neutral is not connected to ground (ungrounded)
Solid- Solidly grounded, no intentional impedance in the neutral grounding path
Resistor- A resistor is used in the neutral grounding path
Reactor- A reactor is used in the neutral grounding path
Amp
For resistor or reactor grounded motors, enter the resistor or reactor rating in amperes.


Where the line-to-neutral voltage is the bus nominal voltage of the motor divided by (3)1/2.
LR Model (Starting)
The locked-rotor (LR) model is used only for the purpose of starting (accelerating) synchronous motors.
This model is not used for transient stability studies.

LR Model Library
Access Motor Model Library data by selecting the CKT model and clicking on the Lib button to open the
Library Quick-Pick - Motor Model. Motor locked-rotor model data from the library can be obtained and
transferred to the Motor Editor by selecting the Model Type (Single1, Single2, DBL1, or DBL2) and then
highlighting a design class and a model ID. The LR Model is only used for the dynamic starting of a
synchronous motor.

After you select a new model, if you click on OK to leave the Motor Editor, select another editor page, or
navigate to another motor, PowerStation prompts you with the following message to update (modify)
some of the nameplate parameters which do not match the calculated values using the selected model.

Characteristic Library
Access library data for torque-slip characteristic curve by selecting the characteristic model and clicking
on the Lib button to open the Library Quick Pick - Characteristic. Motor Characteristic Library data (slip,
torque, current, and power factor) can be selected by highlighting a Design Class and selecting a model
ID. When you select Characteristic Library data, unlike the Motor Model Library data, the library data is
not transferred to the Motor Editor, .i.e., only a reference to the selected library design class and model ID
is kept with the motor. The characteristic data is obtained from the library when you run dynamic motor
starting studies.

After you select new Characteristic Library data, if you click on OK to leave the Motor Editor, select
another editor page, or navigate to another motor, PowerStation prompts you with the message shown
above to update (modify) some of the nameplate parameters which do not match the values from the
selected library.
Print
Prints the torque, current & power factor characteristic curves of the machine for the selected model
(CKT or characteristic).

8.11.5 Start Dev. Page

Starting Device
Type
Select the starting device type from the list box. PowerStation provides the following starting device
types:

None No starting device (across-the-line)
Auto Xfmr Auto-transformer
Resistor Series resistor
Reactor Series reactor
Capacitor, Bus Shunt capacitor connected to a motor bus
Capacitor, Terminal Shunt capacitor connected to the motor terminal
Tap
For reduced voltage starters, enter the percent tap for auto-transformer, resistor, and reactor types.
Kvar
For switched capacitor type applications, enter the capacitor size in kvar. Note that the capacitor is
assumed to have a rated voltage equal to the bus nominal kV.
Switching Off
When a motor that uses a starting device reaches a certain speed, the starting device is removed and the
motor is placed directly on-line. Depending on what option you select, enter the switching time for
PowerStation to remove the starting device in either percent of the synchronous speed or actual time in
seconds. Time is measured from the instant the motor is accelerated.

In the static motor starting calculation, if the switch-off time specified for a starting device is larger than
the acceleration time specified for the motor, the switch-off time will be set equal to the acceleration time.
This means that for static motor starting, a starting device is switched off either at the switch-off time or
the acceleration time, whichever is smaller.

However, for the dynamic motor acceleration calculation, since the acceleration time is unknown before
the calculation, a starting device is switched off at the time specified by the user, regardless of whether it
is larger or smaller than the acceleration time.
Load Torque
This is the mechanical load connected to the motor shaft. The mechanical load is modeled as a third order
polynominal of the motor speed.

T = A
0
+ A
1
+ A
2
2
+ A
3
3

Motor Load Library
Access Motor Load Library data by clicking on the Library button and opening the Library Quick Pick.
Motor Load Library data can be obtained by highlighting and double-clicking on the selection.
Print
Prints the motor and load torque/slip characteristic curves of the machine.
Inertia
H
Total inertia of the motor shaft including the load & coupling gear in MW-Sec/MVA. The inertia
constant H is related to the shaft moment of inertia, square of motor synchronous speed in RPM, and the
motor rated MVA.

H = 2.31 * 10
-10
* WR
2
* RPM
2
/ MVA ( WR
2
2
)
or
H = 5.48 * 10
-9
* WR
2
* RPM
2
/ MVA (WR
2
2
)

as you enter H, PowerStation calculates the moment of inertia WR
2
.
WR2
Enter WR2 for the motor, coupling gear, and load in lb-ft
2
or kg-m
2
based on the system unit. As you
enter WR2, PowerStation calculates the inertia constant H.

Acceleration Time
Enter No Load and Full Load motor acceleration time in seconds. These values, with the motor percent
loading, are used to calculate the acceleration time for static motor starting, i.e., the motor will carry the
full LRC for the entire acceleration time. For dynamic motor starting, the motor model, load model, and
inertia are used to dynamically accelerate the motor.
Select synchronous motor starting categories by clicking on the boxes provided. Selecting synchronous
motor starting categories tells PowerStation which synchronous motor(s) to include in that starting
category. The starting categories can be easily selected from the Synchronous Motor Starting Study Case
Editor. The starting categories can be edited from the Project Menu, under Settings and Starting
Categories.

Starting and Final % Loading
When a synchronous motor is started, the general practice is to reduce the load on that synchronous motor
until it reaches the final speed and then increase the load to the required operating level. Starting and
final percent loading provides modeling of this adjustment in the synchronous motor load. These values
should be entered in percent of the motor full load current.
Load Change Time
The beginning and ending of the load change time for each motor starting category can be specified here.

heater associated with this motor.

Equipment Cable
This section provides capabilities for adding, deleting or editing the equipment cable for this motor.
Cable ID
Cable Editor
This button brings up the equipment Cable Editor.
Cable Library
Sizing
equipment cable Editor.
Delete
Overload Heater
Library
Select an overload heater manufacturer and model from the Quick Pick Editor.

R
Enter the resistance of the overload heater in ohms or modify the value obtained from the library.
Voltage Drop
Vst
Vbus
The operating voltage of the connected bus (the bus this load is connected to, if any) is displayed here for
reference.
Vd Calculation
Use App MF
drop calculations.
Use SF
By selecting this option, the motor Service Factor (SF) is used for voltage drop calculations.
8.11.8 Cable Amp Page

Installation
U/G Duct Bank
U/G Direct Buried
A/G Tray
A/G Conduit
Air Drop

Application MF
Ampacity

Id = F x Ib
Base Ampacity (Ib)

conditions from the base conditions. This factor establishes a maximum feasible load capacity which

Ffw= Derating factor for A/G fire wrap
Allowable Ampacity
I x MF
U/G Duct
RHO
Ta
Tc

Grouping
factor.

U/G Buried
RHO
Ta
Tc
Grouping
A/G Trays
trays.
Ta
Tc
Tray Specification
NEC

Top Cover
Bottom Cover
than 6 feet.
Maintained Spacing
Cumulative Effect
cable trays.
Grouping
with a maximum of two cables high. Base ampacity of randomly-filled trays are based on installations at a
uniform depth up to the maximum of 30% fill for 3 or 4 inch tray depths. The method applied here

Fire Protection
Fire Coating
correction factor (ACF) associated with it which is applied against the base ampacity. For maintained

Fire Stop
Fire Wrap
A/G Conduit
Above ground cable conduit.
Ta
Tc
Ampacity Adjustment
Grouping


4 through 6 80 %
7 through 9 70 %
10 through 24 70 %
25 through 42 60 %
43 and above 50 %

4 through 6 80 %
7 through 9 70 %
10 through 20 50 %
21 through 30 45 %
31 through 40 40 %
41 through 60 35 %
Fire Protection
Fire Coating
has an ampacity correction factor (ACF) associated with it which is applied against the base ampacity.
Fire Stop
Fire Wrap
Air Drop
Cables suspended without the use of trays or conduits. No cable grouping for air drop cables is
considered.
Ta
Tc
Fire Protection
Fire Coating
Fire Stop
Fire Wrap

A

MTTR

8760/MTTR).

MTTF
A
( MTTF = 1.0/
A
).
FOR

A
(FOR =
MTTR/(MTTR+8760/
A
).

Switching Time
Replacement
Available
P

r
P
Library

Interruption Cost
Load Sector
Interruption Cost.
8.11.10 Remarks Page

User-Defined Info
UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchase Date


AC Elements Lumped Load
8.12 Lumped Load
The properties associated with lumped loads can be entered in this editor. The Lumped Load Editor
includes six pages of properties.

Info Page
Nameplate Page
Short-Circuit Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
8.12.1 Info Page

Info
ID

PowerStation automatically assigns a unique ID to each lumped load. The assigned IDs consist of the
default lumped load ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of
lumped loads increase. The default lumped load ID (Lump) can be changed from the Defaults Menu in
Bus
This is the ID of the connecting bus for the lumped load. If the terminal is not connected to any bus, a
blank entry will be shown for the bus ID. To connect or reconnect a lumped load to a bus, select a bus
from the list box. The one-line diagram will be updated to show the new connection after you click on
OK. Note that you can only connect to buses that reside in the same view where the lumped load resides,
i.e., you cannot connect to a bus that resides in the Dumpster or in another composite network.


In/Out of Service
The operating condition of a lumped load can be selected by choosing either the In Service or Out of
Service options. The properties of an Out of Service load can be edited like an In Service branch;
however, an Out of Service load will not be included in any system studies. When Continuity Check is
activated, an Out of Service load automatically becomes dimmed in the one-line diagram.

Configuration
Select the operating status of the lumped load for the selected configuration status from the list box.

Spare Spare load

Depending on the demand factor specified for each operating status, the actual loading of the lumped load
is determined for load flow and motor starting studies.

Note that status is not a part of the lumped load engineering properties. For this reason, the name of the
configuration status is shown above the status of the lumped load to indicate that this is the lumped load
status under the specific configuration, i.e., you can have different operating status under different
configurations. In the following example, status of a lumped load is shown to be Continuous under
Normal configuration and Spare under Emergency configuration.

Equipment
FDR Tag
Name
Description
Priority
Select the load priority of this lumped load from the list box. This field can be used for load priority,
operating priority, load-shedding priority, etc. Ten different priorities are provided to select from. Names
of the priorities can be specified from the Project Menu under Settings and Load Priority.

Data Type
This field provides a convenient way to track data entry. Select one of the data types (such as Estimate,
Typical, Vendor, Final, etc.) from the list box. As the data is updated, this field can be changed to reflect
the source of the latest data. There are a total of ten load types, which can be specified from the Project
Menu under Settings and Data Type.
Connection
Phase
This is the phase connection of this lumped load. Select the phase connection type from the list box.

Single-phase machine connected line-to-line between phases AB, BC or CA
Demand Factor
Modify the demand factors for the continuous, intermittent, and spare status in the provided entry fields.
calculations:

Operating kW = Rated kW * % Loading * Demand Factor
Operating kvar = Rated kvar * % Loading * Demand Factor

Demand factors for continuous, intermittent, and spare status have a range from 0% to 100%. Since
configurations.

Ratings
Click on the MVA/kVA button to choose from MVA and kVA units for entering and displaying
MVA/kVA, MW/kW, and Mvar/kvar data.

PowerStation uses the following equations to calculate kVA, kW, kvar, PF, Amps, and kV when one of
the variables is changed:

kVA kW k = +
2 2
var

PF kW kVA =

Negative PF means leading PF

Amps kVA kV = 1000 3 * / ( * )

Three-Phase
Amps kVA kV = 1000 * /

Single-Phase
kV
Enter the rated voltage of the lumped load in kV.
Amps
Enter the lumped load rated current in amperes.
%PF
This is the power factor of the lumped load in percent with a range from -100% to +100%. The sign of the
power factor determines whether it is a lagging or leading power factor, e.g., +80% indicates lagging and
-80% indicates leading.
Motor/Static load
Select the percent motor and static loading of the lumped load by shifting the slider position.
Loading
This section is used to assign a percent loading to each one of the ten loading categories for this lumped
load, i.e., each lumped load can be set to have a different operating loading level for each loading
Loading column. Note that you can select any of these loading categories when conducting load flow and
motor starting studies.

Operating Load

available if your ETAP key has the online (PowerStation Management System) feature. When the
operating load box is checked in the load flow study case editor, the calculation results are updated to
sources, loads, and buses, so that they can be utilized as input for later studies. If your ETAP key does not
have the online feature, you can see the operating P and Q data in the element editor; however, this data
cannot be used in a later study.
8.12.3 Short-Circuit Page
Enter the short-circuit parameters for the motor load portion of the lumped load here. Note that all data in
this page is based on the motor percentage of the total lumped load rating.

Short-Circuit Contribution
LRC
This is the locked-rotor current in percent of the motor load share of the lumped load current. For
example, a lumped load with 120 amperes at 80% motor loading will have a motor current of 96 amperes;
therefore, at 600% LRC, the actual LRC will be 576 amperes (600% * 96 A).

Short-circuit contribution levels are defined individually for ANSI and IEC methods.

ANSI method short-circuit contributions are categorized per the following table:

Short-Circuit
Contribution
Low Voltage
( 600 Volts)
High Voltage
( > 600 Volts)
High Large (100 < HP < 250) Large ( HP > 1000)
Medium Medium (50 HP 100) Medium (250 HP 1000)
Low Small ( HP < 50) Small (HP < 250)

IEC method short-circuit contribution are categorized per the following table.

Short-Circuit Contribution HP Speed
High Large High RPM
Medium Medium Intermittent RPM
Low Small Low RPM
Grounding
These entries specify grounding connection, type, and rating of the lumped motor.
Connection
The grounding connection can be selected by clicking on the connection buttons until the desired
Type
For Wye-connected lumped motors, choose from these four grounding types provided in the list box:

Amp Rating
For resistor or reactor grounded lumped motor, enter the resistor or reactor rating in amperes.


where the line-to-neutral voltage is the bus nominal voltage of the motor divided by 3.
X/R Ratio
X/R
Lumped motors X/R ratio (Xsc/Ra)
Typical
If Typical is selected, typical X/R value will be substituted in the X/R field.
ANSI Short-Circuit
Std MF / Xsc
If you select Std MF, PowerStation uses the following ANSI Multiplying Factors for calculating the
positive sequence short-circuit impedances. If you select the Xsc option, you can directly enter the short-
circuit impedances in percent with motor ratings as the base. Note that the IEC short-circuit method does
not use these impedances.
IEC Short-Circuit
X
Motor subtransient reactance in percent (machine base)
m
m factor
X
Motor transient reactance in percent (machine base); used in the short-circuit calculations, IEC 363
method.
X
Motor steady-state reactance in percent (machine base); used in the short-circuit calculations, IEC 363
method.
Td'
Motor transient time constant in seconds; this value is used in the IEC 363 method.

Td' = X / (2 f Rr) (Rr = rotor resistance)

A

MTTR

8760/MTTR).

MTTF
A
( MTTF = 1.0/
A
).

FOR

A
(FOR =
MTTR/(MTTR+8760/
A
).

Switching Time

Available
P

r
P

Library

No of Loads
It is the number of loads (customers) represented by a lump load. This number is used to calculate number
of customer interrupted under a fault.

Interruption Cost
Load Sector
Interruption Cost.
8.12.5 Remarks Page

User-Defined Info
UD Field A5
UD Field A6

UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchase Date
8.12.6 Comment Page


AC Elements Motor Operated Valve
8.13 Motor Operated Valve
The properties associated with a motor operated valve (MOV) can be entered in this editor.

The MOV Editor includes nine pages of properties.

Info Page
Nameplate Page
Loading Page
Start Cat Page
Cable/Vd Page
Cable Ampacity Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page

8.13.1 Info Page

Info
ID

PowerStation automatically assigns a unique ID to each MOV. The assigned IDs consist of the default
MOV ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of MOVs increase.
The default MOV ID (MOV) can be changed from the Defaults Menu in the menu bar or from the Project
View.
Bus
This is the ID of the connecting bus for the MOV. Connection for MOV is identical to that of induction
motors. If the terminal is not connected to any bus, a blank entry will be shown for the bus ID. To
connect or reconnect an MOV to a bus, select a bus from the list box. The one-line diagram will be
reside in the same view where the MOV resides, i.e., you cannot connect to a bus that resides in the

In/Out of Service
The operating condition of a MOV can be selected by choosing either the In Service or Out of Service
options. The properties of an Out of Service load can be edited like an In Service load; however, an Out
of Service load will not be included in any system studies. When Continuity Check is activated, an Out of
Service load automatically becomes dimmed in the one-line diagram.

Configuration
Initial Status
Select the initial status of the MOV for the selected configuration from the list box.

Open MOV is initially in open position
Close MOV is initially in close position
Throttle Throttle or jog control (provides flow control to achieve a desired valve position)
Spare Spare load

Depending on the demand factor specified for each operating status, the actual loading of the MOV is

Note that status is not a part of the MOV engineering properties. For this reason, the name of the
configuration status is shown, indicating the MOV status under a specific configuration, i.e., you can have
a different operating status under each configuration. In the following example, the status of an MOV is
shown to be continuous under Normal configuration and Spare under Emergency configuration.

Equipment
FDR Tag
Name
Description

Priority
Select the load priority of this MOV from the list box. This field can be used for load priority, operating
priority, load-shedding priority, etc. Ten different priorities are provided to select from. Priorities may be
chosen from the Project Menu under Settings and Load Priority.
Data Type
typical, vendor, final, etc.) from the list box. As the data is updated, this field can be changed to reflect the
source of the latest data. There are a total of ten load types where you can change their name from the
Connection
Phase
This is the phase connection of this MOV. Select the phase connection type from the list box. Options for
phase connection include:

Quantity
Enter the quantity (number) of MOVs for this MOV ID. This allows you to group identical MOVs
together without the need for graphical representation in the one-line diagram.
Demand Factor
Modify the demand factors for continuous, intermittent, and spare status in the entry fields. Demand
factor is the amount of time the load is actually operating. Demand factor affects these calculations:

Operating kW = kVA * PF * % Loading * Demand Factor
Operating kvar = kVA * RF * % Loading * Demand Factor

kVA, PF, and RF are the normal operating values.

HP/kW

Enter the MOV rating in horsepower (HP) or kW. You can choose from these two options by clicking on
the HP/kW button. PowerStation uses the following equations for the nameplate parameters:


Full-Load Amp = Rated kVA / (3 * kV ) 3-phase motors
= Rated kVA / kV Single phase motors

where the PF and Eff are at full load condition (100% loading).

kV
Enter the rated voltage of the MOV in kV. This is the line-to-line voltage for three-phase motors.
FLA
This is the rated full load current of the MOV in amperes. This is the current, which the MOV would pull
from the system when it is fully loaded, i.e., when the system is operating at the rated HP (or kW), rated
kV, and rated frequency. When you modify FLA, the efficiency at 100% loading is recalculated.
PowerStation limits the entry of FLA in such a way that the efficiency at 100% loading cannot exceed
100% or be below 10%.
% PF
Enter the MOV rated power factor in percent at full loading.
% Eff
This is the efficiency of the MOV in percent at full loading.
Poles
Enter the number of poles. As the number of poles is changed, the synchronous speed of the MOV is

Rated T
Enter the MOV rated torque (optional) in lb.-ft. or N-M.

Library
Access Motor Library data by clicking on the Library button and opening the Library Quick Pick -
Motor. MOV nameplate data can be obtained and substituted from the library by highlighting and double-
clicking on the selection. Library data includes MOV ratings such as HP/kW, kV, FLA, PF, Eff, & Pole
(transferred to the Nameplate Page).
Hammer Blow
Check this box if the MOV is provided with the hammer blow feature. If hammer blow feature is
unchecked, the full speed stage (no load) stage is skipped (t
nl
= 0.)
Micro Switch
Check this box if a micro switch is used to control the operation of the MOV. The limit switch controls
the MOV by interrupting power to the motor contactor when the valve actuator has completed its preset
number of revolutions. If the micro switch feature is selected, the stall stage is skipped. For each
operating stage, the corresponding current, PF, and time should be specified.
Characteristics
% Current / Current
Toggle between %Current (percent of the rated current) or Current (in amperes). You can choose from
these two options by clicking on this button. Enter the corresponding value for each specified operating
stage.
% PF
Enter the MOV power factor in percent for the specified operating stage.
Time
Enter the time duration in seconds for the specified operating stage.

The characteristics of the MOV are defined in terms of the various operating stages of the valve. The
following operating stages are provided based on the MOVs initial status (open, close, throttle, and
spare) and selected features (micro switch and/or hammer blow).

Start
Full Speed
Travel
Seated or Unseated
Stall
MOVs which are initially in the Open status travel the following stages based on the selected features.
Note that without the hammer blow feature the no-load time (tnl) is set to zero value. Also, if micro
switch is used, the stall time (tsl) stage is set to a zero value.

The following stages are provided for an MOV which is initially in the Closed status. Note that without
the hammer blow feature the no-load time (tnl) is set to a zero value. Also, if a micro switch is used, the
stall time (tsl) stage is set to a zero value.

For MOVs with throttle control, only the travel stage is displayed.

8.13.3 Loading Page
This section is used to assign a percent loading to each one of the ten loading categories for this MOV,
the values of the percent loading, click on any one of the edit fields under the % Loading column. Note
that you can select any of these loading categories when conducting load flow and motor starting studies.

PowerStation allows you to specify which MOV are included in a given starting category. The starting
categories can be easily selected from the Motor Starting Study Case Editor. The starting categories can
be edited from the Project Menu under Settings and Starting Categories.

%Voltage Limit
Enter the MOV voltage limit for normal operation, in percent of the MOV rated kV.
Cable
This section provides capabilities for adding, deleting or editing the equipment cable for this motor.

ID
Editor
This button will bring up the equipment Cable Editor.
Library
Size Cable
Delete Cable
Overload Heater
Enter the resistance of the overload heater in ohms. The Library button for selecting and retrieving
overload heaters from the Overload Heater Library is not active for this version.
Voltage Drop

Vst
Vbus
here for reference.
Vd Calculation
Use App MF
drop calculations.
8.13.6 Cable/Amp Page

Installation

U/G Duct Bank
U/G Direct Buried
A/G Tray
A/G Conduit
Air Drop

Application MF
Ampacity

Id = F Ib
Base Ampacity (Ib)

Allowable Ampacity
I x MF
U/G Duct
RHO

Ta
Tc
Grouping
factor.

U/G Buried
RHO
Ta
Tc
Grouping
A/G Trays
trays.

Ta
Tc

Tray Specification
NEC
the cumulative effects of combinations of tray covers and fire proofing.
Top Cover
Bottom Cover
than 6 feet.
Maintained Spacing
Cumulative Effect
cable trays.
Grouping

Fire Protection
Fire Coating

Fire Stop
Fire Wrap
A/G Conduit
Ta
Tc
Ampacity Adjustment
Grouping


4 through 6 80 %
7 through 9 70 %
10 through 24 70 %
25 through 42 60 %
43 and above 50 %

4 through 6 80 %
7 through 9 70 %
10 through 20 50 %
21 through 30 45 %
31 through 40 40 %
41 through 60 35 %

Fire Protection
Fire Coating
Fire Stop
Fire Wrap
Air Drop
considered.
Ta

Tc
Fire Protection
Fire Coating
Fire Stop
Fire Wrap

A

MTTR


8760/MTTR).

MTTF
A
( MTTF = 1.0/
A
).

FOR

A
(FOR =
MTTR/(MTTR+8760/
A
).

Switching Time
Replacement

Available
P

r
P
Library

Interruption Cost
Load Sector
Interruption Cost.
8.13.8 Remarks Page

User-Defined Info

UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchase Date
8.13.9 Comment Page


AC Elements Static Load
8.14 Static Load
The properties associated with static loads of the electrical distribution system can be entered in this
editor.

The Static Load Editor includes eight pages of properties.

Info Page
Loading Page
Cable/Vd Page
Cable Amp Page
Harmonic Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
8.14.1 Info Page
Within the Info Page, specify the static load ID, connected Bus ID, In/Out of Service, Equipment FDR
(feeder) Tag, load Priority, Name and Description, Data Type, Configuration Status, Quantity or number
of static loads, Phase connection, and Demand Factor.

Info
ID

PowerStation automatically assigns a unique ID to each static load. The assigned IDs consist of the
default static load ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of static
loads increase. The default static load ID (Load) can be changed from the Defaults Menu in the menu bar
or from the Project View.

Bus
This is the ID of the connecting bus for the static load. If the terminal is not connected to any bus, a blank
entry will be shown for the bus ID. To connect or reconnect a static load to a bus, select a bus from the
list box. The one-line diagram will be updated to show the new connection after you click on OK. Note
that you can only connect to buses that reside in the same view where the static load resides, i.e., you
cannot connect to a bus that resides in the Dumpster or in another composite network.

If a static load is connected to a bus through a number of protective devices, reconnection of the static
load to a new bus from this editor will reconnect the last existing protective device to the new bus, as
shown below where Load1 is reconnected from Bus10 to Bus4.

In/Out of Service
The operating condition of a static load can be selected by choosing either the In Service or Out of
Service options. The properties of an Out of Service load can be edited like an In Service load. However,
an Out of Service load will not be included in any system studies. When Continuity Check is activated, an
Out of Service load automatically becomes dimmed in the one-line diagram.

Configuration
Select the operating status of the static load for the selected configuration status from the list box. Options
for operating status include:

Spare Spare load

Note that status is not a part of the static load engineering properties. For this reason, the name of the
configuration status is shown above the status of the static load to indicate that this is the static load status
under the specific configuration, i.e., you can have different operating status under different
configurations. In the following example, status of a static load is shown to be Continuous under Normal
configuration and Spare under Emergency configuration.

Equipment
FDR Tag
Name
Description
Data Type
the source of the latest data. There are a total of ten load types which can be specified from the Project
Priority
Select the load priority of the static load from the list box. This field can be used for load priority,
Connection
Phase
This is the phase connection of the static load. Select the phase connection type from the list box. Options
for phase connection include:

Quantity
Enter the quantity (number) of static loads for this element. This allows you to group identical loads
together without a need for graphical presentation in the one-line diagram.
Demand Factor
calculations:


Demand factors for continuous, intermittent, and spare status have a range from 0% to 100%. Since
configurations.
8.14.2 Loading Page

Ratings
kV
Enter the rated voltage of the static load in kV. If this static load is a three-phase load, kV is the line-to-
line voltage. For single-phase loads, kV load rated voltage must be consistent with the way this load is
connected to the system, i.e., if the bus nominal kV is 4.16 and this load is connected between phase A
and neutral, then the rated voltage of the load must be in the neighborhood of 2.4 kV (4.16/1.73). If the
bus nominal kV is 4.16 and this load is connected between phase A and phase B, then the rated voltage of
the load must be in the neighborhood of 4.16 kV.
MVA/kVA Button
Click on the MVA/kVA button to choose from MVA and kVA units for entering and displaying
MVA/kVA, MW/kW, and Mvar/kvar data.

PowerStation uses the following equations to calculate kVA, kW, kvar, PF, Amps, and kV when one of
the variables is changed:

kVA kW = +
2 2
kvar

PF kW kVA =
MVA/kVA
Enter the rated apparent power of the static load in MVA or kVA.
MW/kW
Enter the rated real power of the static load in MW or kW.
Mvar/kvar
Enter the rated reactive power of the static load in Mvar or kvar. To specify a capacitor, enter 0.0 for
MW and a negative value for the Mvar field.
%PF
This is the power factor of the static load in percent with a range from -100% to +100%. The sign of the
power factor determines whether it is a lagging or leading power factor, e.g., +80% indicates lagging and
-80% indicates leading.
Amps
Enter the static load rated current in amperes.

Calculator
PowerStation Power Calculator is set up to calculate complex power, power factor, and current. The
following equations are used to calculate these variables:

kVA kW = +
2 2
kvar

PF kW kVA =


Amps kVA kV = 1000 3 * / ( * )
Three-Phase

Amps kVA kV = 1000 * /
Single-Phase

To use the calculator, select the variable units as kVA or MVA, and change one of the variables. For
example, if kW is changed and the value of the kvar is changed, new values of kVA, %PF, and Amp (if
kV is specified) will be calculated. If the value of PF is changed, new values of kvar and kVA are
calculated.
Loading
This section is used to assign a percent loading to each of the ten loading categories for this static load,
i.e., each static load can have a different operating loading level for each loading category. To edit the
values of percent loading, click on any one of the edit fields under the % Loading column. Note that you
can select any of these loading categories when conducting load flow and motor starting studies.

factor and efficiency from the values of power factor and efficiency specified at 100%, 75%, and 50%
loading. This is accomplished by using a curve fitting technique with a maximum of 100% for power
factor and efficiency. The calculated power factor and efficiency are then used to calculate and display
the operating kW and kvar loading as well as the feeder losses, if an equipment cable with a non-zero
length is specified for this load. Note that although the demand factor is used for calculating the
operating load and feeder losses, the value of the demand factor is not used in determining the operating
power factor and efficiency.
heater associated with this static load.

Cable
This section provides capabilities for adding, deleting or editing the equipment cable for this load. Partial
cable information such as the cable ID, Type, #/Phase, Size, Length, and Unit are provided here for
Cable ID
To add a cable to a static load, select and retrieve the cable from the Cable Library on this page.
Cable Editor
This button brings up the equipment cable Editor.
Cable Library
To add an equipment cable to a static load, select and retrieve a cable from the Cable Library.
Size Cable
Delete Cable
Overload Heater
Enter the resistance of the overload heater in ohms. The Library button for selecting and retrieving
overload heaters from the Overload Heater Library is not active for this version.
Voltage Drop
The total voltage drop (Vd) across the equipment cable and overload heater along with static load
terminal voltage (Vt), are calculated and displayed here for all loading categories. Both Vd and Vt are
displayed in percent values with a base kV equal to the bus nominal kV.
Vbus
here for reference.
Vd Calculation
By selecting this option, the Application Multiplying Factor (App MF) for cable ampacity is used for
voltage drop calculations.
8.14.4 Amp Page

Installation

U/G Duct Bank
U/G Direct Buried
A/G Tray
A/G Conduit
Air Drop

Application MF
Ampacity

Id = F Ib

Base Ampacity (Ib)
results in no reduction of the cables expected lifetime. The overall derating factor is composed of several
components as listed below.

Allowable Ampacity
I x MF
U/G Duct
RHO
Ta
Tc

Grouping
factor.

U/G Buried
RHO
Ta
Tc
Grouping
A/G Trays
Above ground cable trays. The free air base ampacity from the libraries is used for cables installed in
trays.
Ta
Tc
Tray Specification
NEC

Top Cover
Bottom Cover
than 6 feet.
Maintained Spacing
Cumulative Effect
cable trays.
Grouping

Fire Protection
Fire Coating

Fire Stop
Fire Wrap
A/G Conduit
Ta
Tc
Ampacity Adjustment
Grouping


4 through 6 80 %
7 through 9 70 %
10 through 24 70 %
25 through 42 60 %
43 and above 50 %

4 through 6 80 %
7 through 9 70 %
10 through 20 50 %
21 through 30 45 %
31 through 40 40 %
41 through 60 35 %
Fire Protection
Fire Coating
Fire Stop
Fire Wrap
Air Drop
considered.
Ta
Tc
Fire Protection
libraries may be selected individually to best describe the fire protection associated with the airdrop
Fire Coating
Fire Stop
Fire Wrap
8.14.5 Harmonic Page
Static Load can be modeled as either a harmonic voltage source or a harmonic current source.

Harmonic Library
Library
Click on Library button to bring up Harmonic Library Quick Pick editor.

From the Harmonic Library Quick Pick editor, specify a harmonic type: Current Source or Voltage
Source, a manufacturer name and a model name.
Type
Displays the selected harmonic source type.
Manufacturer
Model
Wave Form
Print (Wave Form)
Print harmonic waveform.
Spectrum
Print (Spectrum)
Print harmonic spectrum.



A

MTTR

8760/MTTR).

MTTF
A
( MTTF = 1.0/
A
).

FOR

A
(FOR =
MTTR/(MTTR+8760/
A
).

Switching Time
Replacement
Available
P

r
P

Library

Interruption Cost
Load Sector
Interruption Cost.
8.14.7 Remarks Page

User-Defined Info

UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchase Date
8.14.8 Comment Page


AC Elements Capacitor

8.15 Capacitor
The properties associated with a shunt capacitor can be entered in this editor.

The Capacitor Editor includes seven pages of properties.

Info Page
Rating Page
Cable/Vd Page
Cable Amp Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
8.15.1 Info Page
Within the Info Page, specify the capacitor ID, connected Bus ID, In/Out of Service, Equipment FDR
(feeder) Tag, load Priority, Name and Description, Data Type, Configuration Status, Phase connection,
and Demand Factor.

Info
ID

PowerStation automatically assigns a unique ID to each capacitor. The assigned IDs consist of the default
capacitor ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of capacitors
increase. The default capacitor ID (CAP) can be changed from the Defaults Menu in the menu bar or
from the Project View.
Bus
This is the ID of the connecting bus for the capacitor. Connection for capacitors is identical to that of
static loads. If the terminal is not connected to any bus, a blank entry will be shown for the bus ID. To
connect or reconnect a capacitor to a bus, select a bus from the list box. The one-line diagram will be
updated to show the new connection after you click on OK.

Note that you can only connect to buses that reside in the same view where the capacitor resides, i.e., you

In/Out of Service
The operating condition of a capacitor can be selected by choosing either the In Service or Out of Service
options. The properties of an Out of Service capacitor can be edited like an In Service capacitor;
however, an Out of Service capacitor will not be included in any system studies. When Continuity Check
is activated, an Out of Service capacitor automatically becomes dimmed in the one-line diagram.

Configuration
Select the operating status of the capacitor for the selected configuration status from the list box.

Spare Spare load

Depending on the demand factor specified for each operating status, the actual loading of the capacitor is

Note that status is not a part of the capacitor engineering properties. For this reason, the name of the
configuration status is shown above the status of the capacitor to indicate that this is the device status
under the specific configuration, i.e., you can have different operating status under different
configurations. In the following example, status of a capacitor is shown to be Continuous under Normal
configuration and Spare under Emergency configuration.

Equipment
FDR Tag
Name
Description

Data Type
Priority
Select the load priority of the capacitor from the list box. This field can be used for load priority,
Connection
Phase
This is the phase connection of the capacitor. Select the phase connection type from the list box. Options
for phase connection include:

Demand factor
calculations:


Demand factors for continuous, intermittent and spare status have a range from 0% to 100%. Since
configurations.
8.15.2 Rating Page

Rating
kV
Enter the rated voltage of the capacitor in kV. If this capacitor load is a three-phase load, kV is the line-
to-line voltage. For a single-phase capacitor, kV rated voltage must be consistent with the way this
capacitor is connected to the system, i.e., if the bus nominal kV is 4.16 and this capacitor is connected
between phase A and neutral, then the rated voltage of the capacitor must be in the neighborhood of 2.4
kV (4.16/1.73). If the bus nominal kV is 4.16 and this capacitor is connected between phase A and phase
B (AB), then the rated voltage of the capacitor must be in the neighborhood of 4.16 kV.
Max. kV
Enter the maximum rated voltage of the capacitor in kV.
kvar/bank
Enter the capacitor reactive power per bank. This reactive power is the capacitive var to the system.
# of Banks
Enter the number of capacitor banks. PowerStation automatically calculates the total kvar based on the
kvar/bank and # of banks.

Mvar = (Mvar/Bank) (# of Banks)
kvar = (kvar/Bank)(# of Banks)
Mvar/kvar Button
Click on the Mvar/kvar button to choose from Mvar and kvar units for entering and displaying
Mvar/kvar data.

PowerStation calculates and displays the amps and capacitor reactance as well as the capacitor size in
microfarads. The following equations are used to calculate these variables:

kV
kvar
Amps
=
3
Three-Phase
kV
Amps
kvar
=

Single-Phase

kvar
10
2
3
kV
Xc =

Ohms

f Xc
microfarad
2
10
6
=

Loading
This section is used to assign a percent loading to each of the ten loading categories for the capacitor, i.e.,
each capacitor can have a different operating loading level for each loading category. To edit the values of
the percent loading, click on any one of the edit fields under the % Loading column. Note that you can
select any of these loading categories when conducting load flow and motor starting studies.
This page is used to display voltage drops and to add, delete, or edit the equipment cable associated with
this capacitor.

Cable
This section provides capabilities for adding, deleting or editing the equipment cable for this capacitor.
Partial cable information such as the cable ID, Type, #/Phase, Size, Length, and Unit are provided here
for editing and displaying.
Cable ID
To add a cable to a capacitor, select and retrieve a cable from the Cable Library on this page.
Cable Editor
This button brings up the equipment Cable Editor.
Cable Library
To add an equipment cable to a capacitor, select and retrieve a cable from the Cable Library.
Size Cable
Delete Cable
Click on this button to delete the equipment cable associated with this capacitor.
Voltage Drop
The total voltage drop (Vd) across the equipment cable, along with capacitor terminal voltage (Vt) are
calculated and displayed here for all loading categories. Both Vd and Vt are displayed in percent values
with a base kV equal to the rated kV of the capacitor.
Vbus
The operating voltage of the connected bus (the bus which this capacitor is connected to, if any) is
displayed here for reference.
Vd Calculation
By selecting this option, the Application Multiplying Factor (App MF) for cable ampacity is used for
voltage drop calculations.
8.15.4 Cable/Amp Page

Installation

U/G Duct Bank
U/G Direct Buried
A/G Tray
A/G Conduit
Air Drop

Application MF
Ampacity

Id = F x Ib
Base Ampacity (Ib)

Allowable Ampacity
I x MF
U/G Duct
RHO
The thermal resistivity of the soil in degrees Celsius centimeters per Watt (C cm/W)
Ta
Tc
Grouping
factor.

U/G Buried
RHO
Ta
Tc
Grouping
A/G Trays
trays.
Ta
Tc
Tray Specification
NEC
the cumulative effects of combinations of tray covers and fire proofing.
Top Cover
Bottom Cover
than 6 feet.
Maintained Spacing
Cumulative Effect
cable trays.
Grouping
Fire Protection
Fire Coating

Fire Stop
Fire Wrap
A/G Conduit
Ta
Tc
Ampacity Adjustment
Grouping


4 through 6 80 %
7 through 9 70 %
10 through 24 70 %
25 through 42 60 %
43 and above 50 %

4 through 6 80 %
7 through 9 70 %
10 through 20 50 %
21 through 30 45 %
31 through 40 40 %
41 through 60 35 %
Fire Protection
Fire Coating
Fire Stop
Fire Wrap
Air Drop
Cables suspended without the use of trays or conduits. No cable grouping for air drop cables is
considered.
Ta
Tc
Fire Protection
Fire Coating
Fire Stop
Fire Wrap

A
MTTR

8760/MTTR).

MTTF
A
( MTTF = 1.0/
A
).
FOR
A
(FOR =
MTTR/(MTTR+8760/
A
).

Switching Time
Replacement
Available
P

r
P
Library

Interruption Cost
Load Sector Select the load sector name (or customer type) for the load. In the reliability calculation, the
user sector information is used to get interruption cost from the Reliability Cost library to calculate
Expected Interruption Cost.
8.15.6 Remarks Page

User-Defined Info
UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
and enter any extra data for this element here, up to 18 alphanumeric

Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchase Date

AC Elements Power Panel
8.16 Power Panel

The properties associated with panel schedule of the electrical distribution system can be entered in this
editor. Every panel and sub-panel can have unlimited circuits. Each circuit can be comprised of a load,
protective device, and / or a feeder. Circuits are displayed in the panel editor in standard or column
layout.

ETAPS Power Panel provides spreadsheet and graphical representations of the
panel loads. The graphical panel provides a quick review of loads via the one line
diagram.

The Panel Schedule Editor contains six pages of properties.

Info Page, Rating Page, Schedule Page, Summary Page, Remarks Page, and
Comment Page.

Within the Schedule Page, there are five tabs: Description Tab, Rating Tab,
Loading Tab, Protective Device Tab, and Feeder Tab

For details on Panel Schedule, refer to Chapter 29 of the ETAP PowerStation User Guide.

AC Elements Harmonic Filter
8.17 Harmonic Filter

The Harmonic Filter Editor contains five pages of properties as well as a Filter Sizing editor.

Info Page
Parameter Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Filter Sizing
8.17.1 Info Page
Within the Info Page, specify the harmonic filter ID, connected Bus ID, In/Out of Service, Equipment
FDR (feeder) Tag, load Priority, Name and Description, Data Type, Configuration Status, and Phase
connection.

Info
ID

PowerStation automatically assigns a unique ID to each harmonic filter. The assigned IDs consist of the
default filter ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of filters
increase. The default filter ID (HF) can be changed from the Defaults Menu in the menu bar or from the
Project View.
Bus
This is the ID of the connecting bus for the harmonic filter. If the terminal is not connected to any bus, a
blank entry will be shown for the bus ID. To connect or reconnect a harmonic filter to a bus, select a bus
OK. Note that you can only connect to buses that reside in the same view where the static load resides,
i.e., you cannot connect to a bus that resides in the Dumpster or in another composite network.

If a harmonic filter is connected to a bus through a number of protective devices, reconnection of the
harmonic filter to a new bus from this editor will reconnect the last existing protective device to the new
bus, as shown below where Load1 is reconnected from Bus10 to Bus4.

In/Out of Service
The operating condition of a harmonic filter can be selected by choosing either the In Service or Out of
Service options. The properties of an Out of Service filter can be edited like an In Service filter.
However, an Out of Service filter will not be included in any system studies. When Continuity Check is
activated, an Out of Service filter automatically becomes dimmed in the one-line diagram.

configuration status. Therefore, you can set a filter to be In Service for the Base Data and Out of Service
in Revision Data.
Configuration
Select the operating status of the harmonic filter for the selected configuration status from the list box.
Options for operating status include:

Spare Spare load

Depending on the demand factor specified for each operating status, the actual loading of the filter is
determined for load flow, motor starting, and transient stability studies.

Note that status is not a part of the harmonic filter engineering properties. For this reason, the name of the
configuration status is shown above the status of the harmonic filter to indicate that this is the harmonic
filter status under the specific configuration, i.e., you can have different operating status under different
configurations. In the following example, status of a harmonic filter is shown to be Continuous under
Normal configuration and Spare under Emergency configuration.


Equipment
FDR Tag
Name
Description
Data Type
Priority
Select the load priority of the static load from the list box. This field can be used for load priority,
Connection
Grounding
Specify the grounding connection type of harmonic filter. Y grounded connected filters are considered as
solidly grounded.
8.17.2 Parameter Page
Within the Parameter Page, specify the filter type and its parameters. For the Single-Tuned filter, you
also can use the filter sizing facility to automatically size the filter.
Filter Type
Choose a pre-defined filter type from the dropdown list. Four types of filter structures are available.
By-Pass
A filter type that has by-pass frequency characteristic.
High-Pass (Damped)
A filter type that has high-pass with damped frequency characteristic.
High-Pass (Undamped)
High-pass undamped filter. A filter type that has high-pass with undamped frequency characteristic
Single-Tuned
A filter type that has a single tuned frequency point.

Capacitor C1
kvar
3-phase kvar for capacitor C1.
Rated kV
Rated kV in rms for capacitors C1.
Max. kV
Maximum kV in peak for capacitor C1.
Capacitor C2
kvar
3-phase kvar for capacitor C2.
Rated kV
Rated kV in rms for capacitors C2.
Max. kV
Maximum kV in peak for capacitor C2.
Inductor L1
XL1
X
L1
in ohms for inductor L1.
Q Factor
Q factor (X
L1
/ R
L1
) for inductor L1.
Max. I
Maximum I in rms for inductor L1.

Inductor L2
XL2
X
L2
in ohms for inductor L2.
Q Factor
Q factor (X
L2
/ R
L2
) for inductor L2.
Max. I
Maximum I in rms for inductor L2.
Resistor R
External resistance of the filter in ohms.

Sizing Button
When single-tuned is specified as the filter type, click on this button to activate the Harmonic Filter
Sizing editor (see to the Harmonic Filter Sizing section).

A
MTTR

8760/MTTR).
MTTF
A
( MTTF = 1.0/
A
).
FOR

A
(FOR =
MTTR/(MTTR+8760/
A
).
Switching Time
Replacement
Available
P

r
P

Library

Interruption Cost
Load Sector
Interruption Cost.
8.17.4 Remarks Page

User-Defined Info
UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchase Date
8.17.5 Comment Page

8.17.6 Harmonic Filter Sizing Editor

Harmonic Info
Harmonic Order
Specify a harmonic order for sizing the filter.

Harmonic Current
Provide harmonic current for the specified harmonic order in amps.
Include Filter Overloading
Click on this check box to include filter overloading checking. Filter ratings that will be checked are the
capacitor maximum peak voltage and inductance maximum rms current.
Sizing Option
Define filter sizing criteria.
PF Correction
Size the filter based on the power factor correction criteria.
Minimize Initial Cost
Size the filter based on minimal initial cost.
Minimize Operating Cost
Size the filter based on minimal operating cost.
Initial Installation Cost
Specify initial installation costs for the capacitor and inductor.
Capacitor
Enter the unit cost in $/kvar for the capacitor.
Inductor
Enter the unit cost in $/kvar for the inductor.
Operating Cost
Specify the operating cost for the capacitor.
Capacitor Lost Factor
Enter the capacitor loss factor in percent of the capacitor total rating.
PF Correction
Specify system operating conditions. These values are used only if PF Correction is selected as sizing
option.
Existing PF
Enter the existing PF in percent for the load connected to the filter terminal bus.
Desired PF
Enter the desired PF in percent after the filter is installed on the filter terminal bus.
Load MVA
Total load MVA on the filter terminal bus.

Size Filter Button
Click on this button to size the filter based on the selections and data entered.
Substitute Button
Click on this button to substitute the calculated parameters (results) back to the Harmonic Filter
Parameter page.
Result
Display results from the sizing calculation.
3-Phase kvar
Filter 3-phase capacitor kvar.
Xl
Impedance of X
L1
in ohm/phase.
Vc
Computed capacitor peak kV (ASUM) using the sized filter parameters.
IL
Computed inductor current (rms amps) using the sized filter parameters.
AC Elements Remote Connector
8.18 Remote Connector
The Remote Connector is a tool that allows two or more distinct elements to be connected to each other,
while located in separate areas of the One-Line Diagram. The Remote Connector Editor contains one
page of information.

Info Page

Section 8.17.3 illustrates how the Remote Connector is used in the One-Line Diagram.
8.18.1 Info Page
The Info Page displays the Remote Connector ID, Protective Devices and Elements connected to Side 1
and Side 2 of the Remote Connector.

Remote Connector
ID
ID to each Remote Connector. The assigned IDs consist of the default Remote Connector ID plus an
integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of connectors increase. The default
Remote Connector ID (CL) can be changed from the Defaults Menu in the menu bar or from the Project
View.
Side Connection (Side 1 and Side 2)
Displays the IDs of the Protective Device and Element connected to each side of the Remote Connector.
Protective Device
Displays the ID of the Protective Device connected to each side of the Remote Connector.
Element
Displays the ID of the Element connected to each Side of the Remote Connector.
AC Elements Remote Connector
8.18.2 Editing the Remote Connector
Although the Remote Connector is a very simple tool to use, the following basic tips are helpful to
remember:
The Remote Connector is composed of two sides, Side 1 and Side 2
Each side can be located in a different area of the One-Line Diagram
When one side is deleted, the other end of the Remote Connector is also deleted, and cannot be
recovered from the system Dumpster.
Right click on either Side 1 or Side 2 of a Remote Connector and select Find Other End, to locate
the other side of the connector
Copying the Remote Connector to a Composite Network
The Remote Connector can be used inside Composite Networks. To copy one side of the Remote
Connector to a Composite Network, follow these steps:
Select the Remote Connector from the Toolbar, and place it in the One-Line Diagram
Double click on the Composite Network you wish to copy one side of the Remote Connector to.
The Composite Network window must be open.
Press and hold the <Ctrl> and <Shift> keys, click on one side of the Remote Connector, and drag
it to its new location inside the Composite Network. Release the keys and buttons to place the
connector.
Add Elements to each side of the connector.
8.18.3 Remote Connector in the One-Line Diagram

AC Elements Phase Adapter
8.19 Phase Adapter
The Phase Adapter is a tool that allows a 1-phase element to be connected to a 3-phase bus. The Phase
Adapter Editor contains two pages of information.

Info Page
Load Page

The 1-phase Secondary Side of the Phase Adapter cannot be directly connected to a 1-phase load. It must
first be connected to a transformer. The figure in section 8.18.4 illustrates how a Phase Adapter is used in
the One-Line Diagram.
8.19.1 Info Page
Within the Info Page, specify the Phase Adapter ID, In/Out of Service, 3-Phase Primary Side Bus ID,
Phase Connection, 1-Phase Secondary Side Element ID, 1-Phase Feeder Name/Description,
Configuration and Status.

Info
ID
ID to each Phase Adapter. The assigned IDs consist of the default Phase Adapter ID plus an integer,
starting with the number one and increasing as the number of adapters increases. The default Phase
Adapter ID (PA) can be changed from the Defaults Menu in the menu bar or from the Project View.

In/Out of Service
The operating condition of a Phase Adapter can be selected by choosing the In Service or Out of Service
option. The properties of an Out of Service Adapter can be edited like an In Service Adapter. However,
an Out of Service Adapter will not be included in any system studies. When Continuity Check is
activated, an Out of Service Adapter, and all elements down stream from it are automatically dimmed in
the One-Line diagram.

configuration status. Therefore, an adapter can be set to be In Service for the Base Data and Out of
3-Phase Primary Side
Bus ID
Displays the ID and the voltage of the 3-Phase Bus that the Primary Side of the Phase Adapter is
connected to.
Phase Connection
Allows for the selection of a specific phase for the 1-Phase output from the Phase Adapter to the load.
The choices are: Phase A, B, C, AB, AC, BC. Each of these selections is uniquely color-coded.
1-Phase Secondary Side
Element ID
Displays the ID of the element connected to the 1-Phase Secondary Side of the Phase Adapter.
1-Phase Feeder
Name
Allows the user to provide a customized name to the Phase Adapter, which differs from the ID.
Description
Allows the user to provide a unique description for the Phase Adapter.
Configuration
Normal
Select the operating status of the Phase Adapter from the list below:

Close Provides a continuous connection between the 3-Phase bus and the 1-Phase Load.
Open Provides no connection between the 3-Phase bus and the 1-Phase Load.

Note that Status is not a part of the Phase Adapters engineering properties. For this reason, the name of
the configuration is shown above the actual status of the Phase Adapter to indicate that this is the Phase
Adapter status under the specific configuration.

8.19.2 Load Page
The Load page displays information about the characteristics of the load connected to the Phase Adapter.

Within the Load Page, the following information is displayed: Phase Adapter Primary 3-phase voltage,
Total Connected Load kW and kvar, Total Operating Load kW and kvar. The Loading Category can be
chosen from the Loading Category list box.

3-Phase Voltage
Displays the 3-phase voltage level of the bus that the Phase Adapter Primary Side is connected to.
Total Connected Load
Constant Power and Constant Impedance
Displays the constant power and constant impedance values in kW and kvar of the total amount of load
that is connected to the Phase Adapter.
Total Operating Load
Constant Power and Constant Impedance
Displays the constant power and constant impedance values in kW and kvar of the total operating load
amount that is connected to the Phase Adapter.

Loading Category
Allows the user to select the Loading Category condition for the Total Operating load connected
to the Phase Adapter.
8.19.3 The Phase Adapter in the One-Line Diagram

8.19.4 Single-Phase Feeder in System Studies
This section describes how the single-phase feeders are considered in system studies. In the current
version of PowerStation, the downstream elements from a single-phase feeder are not considered in
details in a system study. Instead, all the loads connected downstream from the single-phase feeder are
summed up to the single-phase feeder.
Load Flow Type System Studies And Reliability Study
The load flow type system studies are the ones that require to perform load flow calculations, including
load flow, motor starting, harmonic load flow, transient stability, optimal power flow. In these studies as
well as reliability study, the downstream loads connected to a single-phase feeder are aggregated to get
the total load. And this single-phase feeder is considered as a single load in the system studies.

Radial System
In order to sum up load for a top panel, in the current version of PowerStation, It is required that the
system powered by a single-phase feeder must be a radial system. It is not allowed for downstream
elements from a single-phase feeder to form any loops. Furthermore, the single-phase feeder must be the
only source for all the downstream elements. Before carrying out a system study, PowerStation checks if
loops are involved in any single-phase feeders. If a loop is detected, an error message will be displayed
and the calculation is stopped.
Top Panel Load
The load aggregated to a single-phase feeder includes all downstream loads. Since downstream
connections may involve any elements except three-winding transformers, utilities, and generators, it can
form a full radial system. In summing up the load for the single-phase feeder, PowerStation considers all
the loads connected. Because no load flow calculations are conducted, the load summation does not
include losses on the branches and equipment cables.

The aggregated load values are displayed in the Single-Phase Feeder Editor. Depending on the study case
options, appropriate load diversity factors can also be applied.
Short-Circuit Type System Studies
In the current version of PowerStation, it is assumed that single-phase feeders do not make any short-
circuit contributions to any fault occurred in the system.

AC Elements AC Composite Motors
8.20 AC Composite Motors
AC Composite motors are used as a tool to group motors and loads in the system. The elements that can
be included inside an AC composite motor are:

Induction Motors
Synchronous Motors
Static Loads
Lumped Loads
MOVs
Capacitors & Filters
Circuit Breakers (LV & HV), Contactors, Fuses, & ST Switches
Instrument Transformers (Current & Potential)
Relays (Over Current, Frequency, Voltage, Power, Solid State Trip & Motor)
AC Composite Motors

The number of levels that you can nest composite motors inside composite motors is unlimited. Other
than the limitation on the types of elements that you can include inside a composite motor, the user
interface characteristics of composite motors are the same as the one-line diagram.

To change the ID (name) of a composite motor, <Ctrl>+double-click on the composite motor, or open the
composite motor and double-click on the background where there are no elements

To open a composite motor, double-click on that composite motor.

AC Elements DC Composite Motors
8.21 DC Composite Motors
DC Composite motors are used as a tool to group DC motors and loads. The elements that you can
include inside a DC composite motor are:

DC Motors
DC Loads (Static, Lumped, & Elementary Diagram)
Circuit Breakers, Fuses, & ST Switches
DC Composite Motors


To change the ID (name) of a composite motor, <Ctrl>+double-click on the composite motor, or open the
composite motor and double-click on the background where there are no elements.

To open a composite motor, double-click on that composite motor.

AC Elements Composite Networks
8.22 Composite Networks
You may consider a composite network an aggregation of all components in a subsystem since it can
contain buses, branches, loads, sources, and even other composite networks or composite motors. You
can nest your subsystems to an unlimited number of layers. This allows you to construct systems and nest
them by their order of importance, by physical layout, by the geometrical requirements of elements, by
study requirements, by relays and control device requirements, by logical layout of elements, etc. You
have full control as to how the system should be nested.

You may place composite networks anywhere on a one-line diagram or within other composite networks.
These nested composite networks are part of the overall one-line diagram of the system. All studies that
are run include all the elements and connections nested within all composite networks and composite
motors.
8.22.1 Old Composite Networks (PowerStation 2.0.8)
Composite networks in PowerStation 2.0.8 and earlier versions have four entry points (pins). These are
top pin, left pin, right pin, and bottom pin. Externally, these pins can only be connected to buses (directly
or through protective devices). They represent the connecting points of the composite network to the
outside. Internally, these pins cannot be directly connected to buses, i.e., they can be connected to
branches, motors, fuses, etc.

Top
Pin
Left
Pin
Bottom
Pin
Right
Pin

The bus-like element seen in the old composite network is the starting point for the composite network
(internal pin). This element graphically represents the connecting point of the composite network to the
outside system. This connecting point is not considered as a bus for the studies.

When you open an old composite network for the first time, all four pins are shown in their relative
positions. You can move these internal pins anywhere inside the composite network. If there is an
external connection to a pin, the ID of the connected bus is displayed. If there is no external bus
connection, the pins indicate No Ext Bus. If there is an external bus connection, the bus ID is displayed.

Old Composite Network Network1 with top pin connected to bus Sub3
8.22.2 New Composite Networks
These composite networks are available in PowerStation 3.0 or later versions. The new composite
networks can have up to 20 pins. The default number of pins is 4 and can be change from the right mouse
click as shown below.

Changing Number of Pins from 4 to 20

You can hide the unconnected pins inside a composite motor by using the right mouse click as shown
below.

Hiding Unconnected Pins
The pins for the new composite motors can be connected to any bus, branch, load, or protective device.
Once a pin is connected internally or externally to an element, it becomes a proxy for that element and all
connection rules for the element apply to the connected pin.

Composite Network Connections

PowerStation does not automatically convert the old composite networks to the new type. This can be
done by first cutting all elements from the old composite network, and then use the Move From
Dumpster command to place them in a new composite network.

The number of levels that you can nest composite networks inside composite networks is unlimited.
There is no limitation on the elements that you can include inside a composite network, i.e., the user
interface characteristics of composite networks are the same as the one-line diagram where you can
include both AC and DC elements.


Composite Network Sub3 Net1 Connected to Bus Sub 3
Note that when you are working with a particular one-line diagram presentation, display attributes of
composite networks and composite motors are saved along with the one-line diagram presentations, i.e.,
composite networks are treated the same as the one-line diagram.

To change the ID (name) of a composite network, you can:

1) <Ctrl>+double-click on the composite network symbol from the one-line diagram
2) Open the composite network and double-click on the background where no device exists
3) Double-click on the composite network from the Project View
(under Components, Networks Composite)

You can change the ID to any unique 25-character name.

The following steps are used to move a subsystem (group of elements and connections) from the one-line
diagram to a composite network:

1) Select the desired elements, including their connections, by rubber-banding, and <Ctrl>+click.
2) Press Delete to cut the elements into a Dumpster Cell.
3) Activate the composite network by double-clicking on it.
4) Right-click inside the composite network and select Move From.
Adding A Composite Network
Add a composite network to the one-line diagram. The ID will automatically default to Network1. To
change the ID, press <Ctrl>+double-click. To construct a one-line diagram inside this composite
network, double-click on the composite network to bring up a composite network View, which is just like
another one-line diagram. Therefore, the steps required for constructing a composite network are the
same as those for constructing the main one-line diagram.

When you open the composite network and it is not connected to any bus in the system, you get a view
that indicates there is no external bus connection. When you open the composite network and it is
connected to a bus, you get a view that indicates the connecting bus for the composite network.

The bus-like element seen in the composite network is the starting point for the composite network. This
element graphically represents the connecting point of the composite network to the outside system. This
connecting point is not considered as a bus for studies.
In order to move elements from one view to another (for example, from OLV1 to Network1), first select
the desired elements, including their connections, from OLV1. Select Delete to cut the elements into the
Dumpster, activate the view you want the elements to be moved into Network1, then click on Move
From.
AC Elements Fuse
8.23 Fuse
The properties associated with fuses of the electrical distribution system can be entered in this editor.
Fuse protection devices are available for a full range of voltages.

The Fuse Editor contains five pages of properties.

Info Page
Rating Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page

8.23.1 Info Page

Info
ID

PowerStation automatically assigns a unique ID to each fuse. The assigned IDs consist of the default fuse
ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of fuses increase. The
default fuse ID (Fuse) can be changed from the Defaults Menu in the menu bar or from the Project View.
AC Elements Fuse
From & To
Bus IDs for the connecting buses of a fuse are designated as From and To buses. If a terminal of a fuse
From or To is not connected to any bus, a blank entry will be shown for bus ID. If a terminal of a fuse is
connected to a branch, directly or indirectly, the ID of the branch will be displayed for the terminal
connection. To connect or reconnect a fuse to a bus, select a bus from the list box. The one-line diagram
will be updated to show the new connection after you click on OK. Note that you can only connect a fuse
to buses that reside in the same view where the fuse resides, i.e., you cannot connect to a bus that resides
in the Dumpster or in another composite network.

If a fuse is connected to a bus through a number of protective devices, reconnection of the fuse to a new
bus from this editor will reconnect the last existing protective device to the new bus, as shown below
where Fuse1 is reconnected from Bus10 to Bus4.

convenience.
In/Out of Service
Operating conditions of a fuse can be selected by choosing either the In Service or Out of Service options.
The properties of an Out of Service branch can be edited like an In Service branch; however, an Out of
Service branch will not be included in any system studies. When Continuity Check is activated, an Out of
Service branch automatically becomes dimmed in the one-line diagram. All the loads and branches

Configuration
You can change the status of a fuse (for the selected configuration) by clicking on the Close or Open
options. Once a configuration status is selected for a one-line presentation, any subsequent manipulation
of the status of an element (circuit breaker, fuse, motor, or static load) will be saved under the specified
configuration.

Note that status is not a part of the engineering properties. For this reason, the name of the configuration
status is shown above the status of the fuse to indicate that this is the fuse status under the specific
configuration, i.e., you can have different operating status under different configurations. In the
following example, status of a fuse is shown to be closed under Normal configuration and open under
Open Tie configuration.
AC Elements Fuse

Equipment
FDR Tag

Name
Description
Online Data
The data here are associated with the online (real-time) operation of PowerStation (PSMS).
Scanned Status
Displays the scanned status (open or closed) of the switching device.
Pin
Click on this button to pin the switching device to either closed or open status. This option is provided to
overwrite the actual status received from the real-time system.
Control
Click on this button to control the status (open or closed) of the device. PSMS will request confirmation.
AC Elements Fuse
8.23.2 Rating Page

Standard
Specify either the ANSI or IEC standard for this element.
Library Info
To access ANSI standard library data, click on the ANSI option and then click on the Library button. Use
the same procedure for accessing IEC standard library data. As you change the standard from ANSI to
IEC, the data fields change accordingly.

To select a fuse from the Fuse Library, click on the Library button and the Library Quick Pick - Fuse will
appear. From the Library Quick Pick, select a fuse by highlighting the manufacturer name and
model/class ID. Then click on the OK button to retrieve the selected data from the library and transfer it
to the editor. Note that upon selection of library data, the manufacturer name and model ID are displayed
in black at the lower right corner of the editor. Should any changes be made in the retrieved library data,
manufacturer name and model ID will be displayed in blue to indicate that the library data has been
modified.
AC Elements Fuse
Rating, ANSI Standard
Click on ANSI to enter the fuse ratings according to the ANSI standards.
Rated Amp
Enter the current rating of the fuse in amperes or select the rating from the list box.
Rated kV
Enter the rated voltage of the fuse in kV or select the rating from the list box.
Interrupting
Enter the rated interrupting capability of the fuse in symmetrical rms kA or select the rating from the list
box.
Test PF
Enter the power factor of test equipment on which the rating of the fuse has been established.

Rating, IEC Standard
Click on IEC to enter the fuse ratings according to the IEC standards.
Rated Amps
Enter the rated normal current in amperes or select the rating from the list box.
Rated kV
AC Breaking
Enter the rated breaking capacity of the fuse in kA or select the rating from the list box.
AC Elements Fuse
TRV
Enter the transient recovery voltage of the fuse in kV.


A

around the failed component and can therefore cause the removal of other healthy components and
branches from service. After the actively failed component is isolated, the protection breakers are
component) can be restored to service only after repair or replacement.

AC Elements Fuse
P
component will restore service. Examples of passive failures include opening circuits and inadvertent
MTTR

8760/MTTR).
MTTF
A
and
P
( MTTF =
1.0/(
A
+
P
) ).
FOR

A
and
P
(FOR =
MTTR/(MTTR+8760/(
A
+
P
)).
Alternative Supply
Switching Time
Replacement
Available
P

r
P
Library

AC Elements Fuse
8.23.4 Remarks Page

User-Defined Info
UD Field A5
AC Elements Fuse
UD Field A6
UD Field A7

Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchase Date
AC Elements Fuse
8.23.5 Comment Page


AC Elements Contactor
8.24 Contactor
The properties associated with a contactor of the electrical distribution system can be entered in this
editor. The Contactor Editor contains four pages of properties.

Info Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
8.24.1 Info Page

Info
ID

PowerStation automatically assigns a unique ID to each contactor. The assigned IDs consist of the
default contactor ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of
contactors increase. The default contactor ID (CONT) can be changed from the Defaults Menu in the
From & To
Bus IDs for the connecting buses of a contactor are designated as From and To buses. If a terminal of a
contactor (From or To) is not connected to any bus, a blank entry will be shown for bus ID. If a terminal
of a contactor is connected to a branch (directly or indirectly), the ID of the branch will be displayed for
the terminal connection. To connect or reconnect a contactor to a bus, select a bus from the list box. The
one-line diagram will be updated to show the new connection after you click on OK. Note that you can
only connect to buses that reside in the same view where the branch resides, i.e., you cannot connect to a
bus that resides in the Dumpster or in another composite network.

If a contactor is connected to a bus from this editor through a number of other protective devices,
reconnection of the contactor to a new bus will reconnect the last existing protective device to the new
bus, as shown below where CONT3 is reconnected from Bus10 to Bus2.

In/Out of Service
The operating condition of a contactor can be selected by choosing either the In Service or Out of Service
options. The properties of an Out of Service contactor can be edited like an In Service contactor;
however, an Out of Service contactor will not be included in any system studies. When Continuity Check
is activated, an Out of Service contactor automatically becomes dimmed in the one-line diagram. All the
loads and branches energized solely through an Out of Service breaker will also be de-energized and
become dimmed.

Configuration Status
You can change the status of a contactor (for the selected configuration) by clicking on the Close or Open
of the status of an element (contactor, fuse, motor, or static load) will be saved under the specified
configuration.

status is shown above the status of the contactor to indicate that this is the contactor status under the
specific configuration, i.e., you can have different operating status under different configurations. In the
following example, status of a contactor is shown to be closed under Configuration Status Normal and
open under Configuration Status Open Tie.


Rating
kV
Enter the rated voltage of the contactor in kV or select the rating from the list box.

Cont. Amps
Enter the rated continuous current of the contactor in amperes or select the rating from the list box.
Equipment
FDR Tag
Name
Description
Online Data
Scanned Status
Pin
Control


A


P
MTTR

8760/MTTR).
MTTF
A
and
P
( MTTF =
1.0/(
A
+
P
) ).
FOR

A
and
P
(FOR =
MTTR/(MTTR+8760/(
A
+
P
)).
Alternative Supply
Switching Time
Replacement
Available
P

r
P
Library

8.24.3 Remarks Page

User-Defined Info

UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchase Date
8.24.4 Comment Page


AC Elements Circuit Breaker, HV
8.25 HV Circuit Breaker
The properties associated with high voltage circuit breakers of the electrical power system can be entered
in this editor. High voltage circuit breakers include all breakers above 1000V.

The High Voltage Circuit Breaker Editor contains five pages of properties.

Info Page
Rating Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page

8.25.1 Info Page

Info
ID

PowerStation automatically assigns a unique ID to each circuit breaker. The assigned IDs consist of the
default circuit breaker ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of
circuit breakers increase. The default circuit breaker ID (CB) can be changed from the Defaults Menu in
From & To
Bus IDs for the connecting buses of a high voltage circuit breaker are designated as From and To buses. If
a terminal of a breaker (From or To) is not connected to any bus, a blank entry will be shown for bus ID.
If a terminal of a breaker is connected to a branch, directly or indirectly, the ID of the branch will be
displayed for the terminal connection. To connect or reconnect a breaker to a bus, select a bus from the
that you can only connect to buses that reside in the same view where the circuit breaker resides, i.e., you

If a breaker is connected to a bus through a number of other protective devices, reconnection of the
breaker to a new bus from this editor will reconnect the last existing protective device to the new bus, as
shown below where CB3 is reconnected from Bus10 to Bus4.

convenience.
In/Out of Service
The operating condition of a circuit breaker can be selected by choosing either the In Service or Out of
Service options. The properties of an Out of Service breaker can be edited like an In Service breaker.
However, an Out of Service breaker will not be included in any system studies. When Continuity Check
is activated, an Out of Service breaker automatically becomes dimmed in the one-line diagram. All the
loads and branches energized solely through an Out of Service breaker will also be de-energized and
become dimmed.

Configuration
You can change the status of a circuit breaker (for the selected configuration) by clicking on the Close or
Open options. Once a configuration status is selected for a one-line presentation, any subsequent
manipulation of the status of an element (circuit breaker, fuse, motor, or static load) will be saved under
the specified configuration.

status is shown above the status of the circuit breaker to indicate that this is the breaker status under the
following example, status of a circuit breaker is shown to be closed under Normal configuration and open
under Open Tie configuration.

Equipment
FDR Tag
Name
Description
Online Data
Scanned Status
Pin
Control
8.25.2 Rating Page

Standard
Click on either the ANSI or IEC option to select that standard.

Library Info
To access ANSI standard library data, click on the ANSI selection and then click on the Library button.
Use the same procedure for accessing IEC standard library data. As you change the standard from ANSI
to IEC, the data fields change accordingly.

To select a circuit breaker from the High Voltage Circuit Breaker Library, click on the Library button and
the Library Quick Pick - HV Circuit Breaker will appear. From the Library Quick Pick, select a circuit
breaker by highlighting the manufacturer name and model/class ID. Then click on the OK button to
retrieve the selected data from the library and transfer it to the editor. Note that upon selection of library
data, the manufacturer name and model number are displayed in the fields directly below the Library
button.

Should any changes be made in the retrieved library data, the library manufacturer name and model ID
will be displayed in blue to indicate that the library data has been modified.
Click on ANSI to enter high voltage circuit breaker ratings according to the ANSI standards.
Max kV
Enter the rated maximum kV of the high voltage circuit breaker in rms kV or select the rating from the list
box.
Continuous Amp
Enter the continuous current rating of the high voltage circuit breaker in amperes or select the rating from
the list box.
Standard
Select the high voltage circuit breaker type as Symmetrical or Total rated from the list box.
Sym Rated AC high voltage circuit breaker rated on a symmetrical current basis
Tot Rated AC high voltage circuit breaker rated on a total current basis
Cycle
Select the rated interrupting time for AC high voltage circuit breakers in cycles from the list box.

CB Cycle Description
2 2-cycle ac high voltage circuit breakers with 1.5-cycle Minimum Contact Parting Time
3 3-cycle ac high voltage circuit breakers with 2-cycle Minimum Contact Parting Time

Rated Interrupting
Enter the rated short-circuit current (rated interrupting capability) at the rated maximum kV in rms kA or
select the rating from the list box.
Maximum Interrupting
Enter the maximum symmetrical interrupting capability in rms kA or select the rating from the list box.

The interrupting capability of the circuit breaker is calculated by PowerStation as:

(Rated Short-Circuit Current) X (Rated Maximum kV) / (Bus Nominal kV)

The limit for this calculated interrupting capability is the rated maximum interrupting capability of the
circuit breaker. This value is then used to compare with the calculated short-circuit duty of the breaker.
Note that the value of the prefault voltage is not used in determining the interrupting capability, i.e., if Vf
= 105 percent, the short-circuit duty is increased by 5 percent; however the interrupting capability is not
decreased by 5 percent.
C & L RMS
Enter the closing and latching capability of the high voltage circuit breaker in asymmetrical rms kA. This
value is equal to 1.6 times the maximum interrupting capability.
C & L Crest
Enter the closing and latching capability of the high voltage circuit breaker in crest kA. This value is
equal to 2.7 times the maximum interrupting capability.

TRV
Clicking on the TRV button will open the Transient Recovery Voltage Editor. The following variables
can be entered in this editor:

T1 Enter the rated delay time of transient recovery voltage in micro-seconds.
T2 Enter the rated time to peak value in micro-seconds.
R Enter the rate of rise of the transient recovery voltage in kV/micro-seconds.
Click on IEC to enter the ratings of the high voltage circuit breaker according to the IEC standards.
Rated Amps
Enter the rated normal current of the circuit breaker in amperes or select the rating from the list box.

Rated kV
Enter the rated voltage of the circuit breaker in kV or select the rating from the list box.
FPC Factor
Select the first-pole-to-clear factor of the circuit breaker from the list box.
Min Delay
Enter the minimum time delay, including the circuit breaker and relays, in seconds, or select the rating
from the list box.
Making
Enter the rated making capacity of the circuit breaker in peak kA or select the rating from the list box.
The rated making capacity for a circuit breaker is determined by evaluating the maximum possible peak
value of the short-circuit current at the point of application of the circuit breaker.
TRV
Enter the transient recovery voltage of the circuit breaker in kV.
AC Breaking
Enter the AC component of the rated short-circuit breaking current in kA or select the rating from the list
box.


A

reclosed. This leads to service being restored to some or all of the load points.
It should be noted, however, that the failed component itself (and those components that are directly
connected to this failed component) can be restored to service only after repair or replacement.

P
MTTR

8760/MTTR).
MTTF
A
and
P
( MTTF =
1.0/(
A
+
P
) ).
FOR

A
and
P
(FOR =
MTTR/(MTTR+8760/(
A
+
P
)).
Alternative Supply
Switching Time
Replacement
Available
P

r
P
Library
8.25.4 Remarks Page

User-Defined Info
UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchase Date
8.25.5 Comment Page


AC Elements Circuit Breaker, LV
8.26 LV Circuit Breaker
The properties associated with low voltage circuit breakers of the electrical distribution system can be
entered in this editor. Low voltage circuit breakers include power, molded, and insulated case breakers
up to 1000V.

The Low Voltage Circuit Breaker Editor contains five pages of properties.

Info Page
Rating Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
8.26.1 Info Page

Info
ID

PowerStation automatically assigns a unique ID to each circuit breaker. The assigned IDs consist of the
default circuit breaker ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of
circuit breakers increase. The default circuit breaker ID (CB) can be changed from the Defaults Menu in
From & To
Bus IDs for the connecting buses of a low voltage circuit breaker are designated as From and To buses. If
a terminal of a breaker (From or To) is not connected to any bus, a blank entry will be shown for bus ID.
If a terminal of a breaker is connected to a branch (directly or indirectly), the ID of the branch will be
displayed for the terminal connection. To connect or reconnect a breaker to a bus, select a bus from the
that you can only connect to buses that reside in the same view where the circuit breaker resides, i.e., you

If a breaker is connected to a bus through a number of protective devices, reconnection of the breaker to a
new bus from this editor will reconnect the last existing protective device to the new bus, as shown below
where CB2 is reconnected from Bus10 to Bus4.

convenience.
In/Out of Service
Operating condition of a circuit breaker can be selected by choosing either the In Service or Out of
Service options. The properties of an Out of Service breaker can be edited like an In Service breaker.
However, an Out of Service breaker will not be included in any system studies. When Continuity Check
is activated, an Out of Service breaker automatically becomes dimmed in the one-line diagram. All the
loads and branches energized solely through an Out of Service branch will also be de-energized and
become dimmed.

Configuration
You can change the status of a circuit breaker (for the selected configuration) by clicking on the Close or
Open options. Once a configuration status is selected for a one-line presentation, any subsequent

status is shown above the status of the circuit breaker to indicate that this is the breaker status under the
following example, status of a circuit breaker is shown to be closed under Normal configuration and open
under Open Tie configuration.

Equipment
FDR Tag
Name
Description
Online Data
Scanned Status
Pin
Control
8.26.2 Rating Page

Standard

Library Info

To select a circuit breaker from the Low Voltage Circuit Breaker Library click on the Library button and
the Library Quick Pick - LV Circuit Breaker will appear. From the Library Quick Pick, select a circuit
breaker by highlighting the manufacturer name and model/class ID. Then click on the OK button to
retrieve the selected data from the library and transfer it to the editor.


Note that upon selection of library data, the manufacturer name and model number are displayed directly
below the Library button. Should any changes be made in the retrieved library data, the library
manufacturer name and model ID will be displayed in blue to indicate that the substituted library data has
been modified.
Trip Device
Select the trip device from the dropdown box.
Click on ANSI to enter the ratings for this circuit breaker in accordance with the ANSI/IEEE standards.
Type
Select the low voltage circuit breaker type from the list box. The available circuit breaker types are:

Molded Case
Power CB
Insulated Case
Continuous Amp
Enter the continuous current rating of the low voltage circuit breaker in amperes or select the rating from
the list box.
Rated kV
Enter the rated voltage of the low voltage circuit breaker in kV or select the rating from the list box.
Fused
For power and insulated case circuit breakers, select fused or unfused by clicking on the provided
selection box. The value of Test PF will change appropriately for fused or unfused type breakers.

Interrupting
Enter the rated interrupting capability in rms kA, or select the rating from the list box.
Test PF
This is the power factor of test equipment on which the rating of the circuit breaker has been established.
Based on the type and rating of the low voltage circuit breaker, PowerStation displays the applicable
ANSI/IEEE test power factor.
Click on IEC to enter the ratings for this circuit breaker in accordance with the IEC standards.
Type
Select the low voltage circuit breaker type from the list box. The available types are:

Molded Case
Power CB
Insulated Case
Rated Amps
Enter the rated normal current of the low voltage circuit breaker in amperes or select the rating from the
list box.
Rated kV
Min. Delay
from the list box.
AC Breaking
Enter the rated breaking capacity of the low voltage circuit breaker in kA or select the rating from the list
box.
Making
Enter the rated making capacity of the low voltage circuit breaker in peak kA or select the rating from the
list box. The rated making capacity for a circuit breaker is determined by evaluation of the maximum
possible peak value of the short-circuit current at the point of application of the circuit breaker.


A


P
MTTR

8760/MTTR).
MTTF
A
and
P
( MTTF =
1.0/(
A
+
P
) ).
FOR

A
and
P
(FOR =
MTTR/(MTTR+8760/(
A
+
P
)).
Alternative Supply
Switching Time
Replacement
Available
P

r
P
Library
8.26.4 Remarks Page

User-Defined Info
UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchase Date
8.26.5 Comment Page

AC Elements Switch, Single Throw
8.27 Switch
The properties associated with a single-throw switch of the electrical distribution system can be entered in
this editor.

The Single-throw Switch Editor contains four pages of properties.

Info Page
Remarks Page
Reliability Page
Comment Page
8.27.1 Info Page

Info
ID

PowerStation automatically assigns a unique ID to each switch. The assigned IDs consist of the default
switch ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of switches increase.
The default switch ID (SW) can be changed from the Defaults Menu in the menu bar or from the Project
View.
From & To
Bus IDs for the connecting buses of a switch are designated as From and To buses. If a terminal of a
switch (From or To) is not connected to any bus, a blank entry will be shown for bus ID. If a terminal of
a switch is connected to a branch (directly or indirectly), the ID of the branch will be displayed for the
terminal connection. To connect or reconnect a switch to a bus, select a bus from the list box. The one-
line diagram will be updated to show the new connection after you click on OK. Note that you can only
connect to buses that reside in the same view where the switch resides, i.e., you cannot connect to a bus
that resides in the Dumpster or in another composite network.

If a switch is connected to a bus through a number of other protective devices, reconnection of the switch
to a new bus from this editor will reconnect the last existing protective device to the new bus, as shown
below where SPST10 is reconnected from Bus10 to Bus2.

convenience.
In/Out of Service
The operating condition of a switch can be selected by choosing either the In Service or Out of Service
options. The properties of an Out of Service switch can be edited like an In Service switch; however, an
Out of Service switch will not be included in any system studies. When Continuity Check is activated, an
Out of Service switch automatically becomes dimmed in the one-line diagram. All the loads and branches

Configuration
You can change the status of a switch (for the selected configuration) by clicking on Closed or Open
of the status of an element (switch, fuse, motor, or static load) will be saved under the specified
configuration.

status is shown above the status of the switch to indicate that this is the switch status under the specific
configuration, i.e., you can have different operating status under different configurations.
In the following example, status of a switch is shown to be closed under Configuration Status Normal
and open under Configuration Status Open Tie.

Rating
kV
Enter the rated voltage of the switch in kV or select the rating from the list box.
Cont. Amp
Enter the rated continuous current of the switch in amperes or select the rating from the list box.
BIL
Enter the basic impulse level in kV.
Momentary
Enter the momentary (bracing) short-circuit rating of the switch in kA.
Equipment
FDR Tag
Name
Description
Online Data
Scanned Status
Pin
Control
8.27.2 Remarks Page

User-Defined Info
UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7

Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchase Date


A


P
MTTR

8760/MTTR).
MTTF
A
and
P
( MTTF =
1.0/(
A
+
P
) ).
FOR

A
and
P
(FOR =
MTTR/(MTTR+8760/(
A
+
P
)).
Alternative Supply
Switching Time
Replacement
Available
P

r
P
Library

8.27.4 Comment Page



AC Elements Switch, Double Throw
8.28 Double-Throw Switch
The properties associated with a single pole double-throw (DT) switch of the electrical distribution
system can be entered in this editor.

The Double-throw Switch Editor contains four pages of properties.

Info Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
8.28.1 Info Page

Info
ID

PowerStation automatically assigns a unique ID to each switch. The assigned IDs consist of the default
switch ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of switches increase.
The default switch ID (2SW) can be changed from the Defaults Menu in the menu bar or from the Project
View.

From & To
Bus IDs for the connecting buses of an SPDT switch are designated as From and To buses. If a terminal
of a switch (From or To) is not connected to any bus, a blank entry will be shown for bus ID. If a
terminal of a switch is connected to a branch (directly or indirectly), the ID of the branch will be
displayed for the terminal connection.

To connect or reconnect a switch to a bus, select a bus from the list box. The one-line diagram will be
reside in the same view where the switch resides, i.e., you cannot connect to a bus that resides in the

If an SPDT switch is connected to a bus through a number of other protective devices, reconnection of the
switch to a new bus from this editor will reconnect the last existing protective device to the new bus, as
shown below where SPDT10 is reconnected from Bus10 to Bus2.

Unlike SPST switch, the SPDT switch has to be connected to a bus before being connected to loads and
branch elements.

convenience.
In/Out of Service
The operating condition of a double-throw switch can be selected by choosing either the In Service or Out
of Service options. The properties of an Out of Service switch can be edited like an In Service switch;
however, an Out of Service switch will not be included in any system studies. When Continuity Check is
activated, an Out of Service switch automatically becomes dimmed in the one-line diagram. All the loads
dimmed


Configuration
Status is not a part of the engineering properties. For this reason, the name of the configuration status is
shown above the status of the switch to indicate that this is the switch status under the specific
following example, status of a switch is shown to be in position A under Configuration Status Switch A
and position B under Configuration Status Switch B.

Status
You can change the status of an SPDT switch (for the selected configuration) by clicking on the Position
A or Position B. Once a configuration status is selected for a one-line presentation, any subsequent
manipulation of the status of an element (switch, fuse, motor, or static load) will be saved under the
specified configuration.
Rating
kV
Enter the rated voltage of the SPDT switch in kV or select the rating from the list box.
Cont. Amps
Enter the rated continuous current of the SPDT switch in amperes or select the rating from the list box.
BIL
Enter the basic impulse level in kV.
Momentary
Enter the momentary (bracing) short-circuit rating of the switch in kA.
Equipment
FDR Tag

Name
Description
Online Data
Scanned Status
Displays the scanned status (Position A or Position B) of the switching device.

Pin
Click on this button to pin the switching device to either Position A or Position B status. This option is
provided to overwrite the actual status received from the real-time system.
Control
Click on this button to control the status (Position A or Position B) of the device. PSMS will request
confirmation.



A


P
MTTR

8760/MTTR).
MTTF
A
and
P
( MTTF =
1.0/(
A
+
P
) ).
FOR

A
and
P
(FOR =
MTTR/(MTTR+8760/(
A
+
P
)).
Alternative Supply
Switching Time
Replacement
Available
P

r
P

Library

8.28.3 Remarks Page

User-Defined Info

UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchase Date

8.28.4 Comment Page


AC Elements Ground Grid
8.29 Ground Grid

The properties associated with ground grid design of the electrical distribution system can be entered in
this editor. The ground grid system (GGS) has its own presentation composed of Top View, Soil View
and 3D View.

To create a GGS presentation, a ground grid must first be added to the One-Line Diagram. Click on the
Ground Grid component located on the AC toolbar, and drop the GGS symbol anywhere on the One-
Line Diagram.

Click and move cursor
on one-line diagram and
click to drop the grid

Right-click on any location inside the ground grid box, and select Properties to bring up the Grid Editor.
The Grid Editor dialog box is used to specify grid information, grid styles, equipment information, and to
view calculation results. Click on the Grid Presentation button to bring up a GGS presentation.

For details on Ground Grid Systems, refer to Chapter 28 of the ETAP PowerStation User Guide.

ETAP

PowerStation
4.0
User Guide
Copyright 2001
All Rights Reserved





Southern California

(949) 462-0100 Sales
(949) 462-0400 Fax

Chapter 9

Instrumentation Elements

This chapter addresses editors for all Instrumentation elements in the One-Line Diagram. Except for the
element IDs, bus connections, and status, all other data that appear in the editors are considered
engineering properties, which are subject to Base & Revision Data. The following table lists all the
Instrumentation elements in PowerStation as seen from the Instrumentation (Inst) Toolbar.

Transformers Current Transformer Potential Transformer
Meters
Voltmeter
Multimeter
Ammeter

Relays
Voltage Relay
Frequency Relay
Solid State Device
Power Relay
Motor Relay
OverCurrent Relay

AC Elements Current Transformer
9.1 Current Transformer
The properties associated with current transformers (CT) of the electrical distribution system can be
entered in this editor. The Current Transformer Editor contains three pages of properties.

Info Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
9.1.1 Info Page

Info
ID

PowerStation automatically assigns a unique ID to each current transformer. The assigned IDs consist of
the default current transformer ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the
number of current transformers increase. The default current transformer ID (CT) can be changed from
the Defaults Menu in the menu bar or from the Project View.
From & To
Bus IDs for the connecting buses of a current transformer are designated as From and To buses. If a
terminal of current transformer (From or To) is not connected to any bus, a blank entry will be shown for
bus ID. If a terminal of a current transformer is connected to a branch (directly or indirectly), the ID of
the branch will be displayed for the terminal connection. To connect or reconnect a current transformer to
a bus, select a bus from the list box. The one-line diagram will be updated to show the new connection
after you click on OK. Note that you can only connect to buses that reside in the same view where the
current transformer resides, i.e., you cannot connect to a bus that resides in the Dumpster or in another
composite network.

If a current transformer is connected to a bus through a number of other protective devices, reconnection
of the current transformer to a new bus from this editor will reconnect the last existing protective device
to the new bus, as shown below where CT2 is reconnected from Bus10 to Bus4.

convenience.
In/Out of Service
Operating condition of a current transformer can be selected by choosing either the In Service or Out of
activated, an Out of Service branch automatically becomes dimmed in the one-line diagram.

Equipment
FDR Tag
Name
Description
Rating
Enter the primary and secondary current ratings (turn ratio) for the current transformer in amperes.
9.1.2 Remarks Page

User-Defined Info
UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchase Date
9.1.3 Comment Page


AC Elements Potential Transformer
9.2 Potential Transformer
The properties associated with potential transformers (PT) of the electrical distribution system can be

The Potential Transformer Editor contains three pages of properties.

Info Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
9.1.1 Info Page

Info
ID

PowerStation automatically assigns a unique ID to each potential transformer. The assigned IDs consist
of the default potential transformer ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the
number of potential transformers increase. The default potential transformer ID (PT) can be changed
From & To
The primary terminal of the potential transformer has two pins as From and To which can be connected
directly to buses or in between branch elements. These primary pins are located on top of each other.

Also, if the primary terminal of a potential transformer is connected to a From bus, the ID of the To bus
will be hidden and visa versa. To connect or reconnect a potential transformer to a bus, select a bus from
Note that you can only connect to buses that reside in the same view where the branch resides, i.e., you

The secondary terminal of a PT has only one pin, which can be connected to voltmeters, multimeters,
frequency relays, and voltage relays.

In/Out of Service
The operating condition of a potential transformer can be selected by choosing either the In Service or
Out of Service options. The properties of an Out of Service potential transformer can be edited like an In
Service potential transformer; however, an Out of Service potential transformer will not be included in
any system studies. When Continuity Check is activated, an Out of Service potential transformer
automatically becomes dimmed in the one-line diagram.

Rating
Primary
Enter the primary rated voltage of the potential transformer in kV or select the rating from the list box.
Secondary
Enter the secondary rated voltage of the potential transformer in V or select the rating from the list box.
Connection
This is the type of connection of the potential transformer. Select the connection type from the list box.
L-G Line-to-ground connection
L-L Line-to-line connection
Ratio
This is the turn ratio of the potential transformer based on the primary and secondary voltages.
Equipment
FDR Tag
Name
Description
9.2.1 Remarks Page

User-Defined Info
UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchase Date
9.2.2 Comment Page

AC Elements Voltmeter
9.3 Voltmeter
The properties associated with voltmeters can be entered in this editor.

The Voltmeter Editor contains three pages of properties.

Info Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
9.0.1 Info Page

Info
ID

PowerStation automatically assigns a unique ID to each voltmeter. The assigned IDs consist of the
default voltmeter ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of
voltmeters increase. The default voltmeter ID (VM) can be changed from the Defaults Menu in the menu
PT
Voltmeters have one pin, which can be connected to a potential transformer (PT). A blank entry will be
shown for the PT if the terminal of the voltmeter is not directly connected to a PT. If the terminal of a
voltmeter is connected to a PT, the ID of the PT will be displayed for the terminal connection.
Ratio
This is the turn ratio of the potential transformer connected to the voltmeter.
In/Out of Service
The operating condition of a voltmeter can be selected by choosing either the In Service or Out of Service
option. The properties of an Out of Service voltmeter can be edited like an In Service voltmeter;
however, an Out of Service voltmeter will not be included in any system studies. When Continuity Check
is activated, an Out of Service voltmeter automatically becomes dimmed in the one-line diagram.

Voltage
Operating
This field displays the operating voltage in volts. This field is updated when used with the on-line
monitoring module.
Full Scale
Enter the full scale value of the meter. This is used for PSMS only.
Std. Deviation
Enter the standard deviation of the meter. This is used for PSMS only.
Online Data
Scanned
Displays the scanned value of the meter as it is obtained from the system.
Pinned
For PSMS, you can pin a value for the meter that may be different from the real-time data. This option is
provided to overwrite the actual scanned value for the system.
Equipment
FDR Tag
Name
Description
9.3.1 Remarks Page

User-Defined Info
UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchase Date
9.3.2 Comment Page

AC Elements Ammeter
9.4 Ammeter
The properties associated with ammeters can be entered in this editor.

The Ammeter Editor contains three pages of properties.

Info Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
9.0.1 Info Page

Info
ID

PowerStation automatically assigns a unique ID to each ammeter. The assigned IDs consist of the default
ammeter ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of ammeters
increase. The default ammeter ID (AM) can be changed from the Defaults Menu in the menu bar or from
the Project View.
CT
Ammeters have two pins, one of which can be connected to a current transformer (CT) and the other pin
can be connected to other relays and/or meters. A blank entry will be shown for the CT if the terminal of
the ammeter is not connected directly to a CT or indirectly through other relays and/or meters. If the
terminal of an ammeter is connected to a CT or to a relay, which is connected to a CT, the ID of the CT
will be displayed for the terminal connection.
Ratio
This is the turn ratio of the current transformer connected to the ammeter.
AC Elements Ammeter
In/Out of Service
The operating condition of an ammeter can be selected by choosing either the In Service or Out of Service
options. The properties of an Out of Service ammeter can be edited like an In Service ammeter; however,
an Out of Service ammeter will not be included in any system studies. When Continuity Check is
activated, an Out of Service ammeter automatically becomes dimmed in the one-line diagram.

Current
Operating
This field displays the operating current in amperes. This field is updated when it is used with the on-line
monitoring module.
Rating
Full Scale
Enter the full-scale value of the meter. This is used for PSMS only.
Std. Deviation
Online Data
Scanned
Pinned
Equipment
FDR Tag
Name
Description
AC Elements Ammeter
9.4.1 Remarks Page

User-Defined Info
UD Field A5
UD Field A6
AC Elements Ammeter
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchase Date
9.4.2 Comment Page


AC Elements Multimeter
9.5 Multimeter
The properties associated with multimeters of the electrical distribution system can be entered in this
editor. The Multimeter Editor includes three pages of properties.

Info Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
9.0.1 Info Page

Info
ID

PowerStation automatically assigns a unique ID to each multimeter. The assigned IDs consist of the
default multimeter ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of
multimeters increase. The default multimeter ID (MM) can be changed from the Defaults Menu in the

Multimeters have three connection pins: two current pins that can be connected to a current transformer
(CT) and relays/meters, and a voltage pin, which can be connected to a PT.
CT
A blank entry will be shown for the CT if the CT terminal of the multimeter is not directly connected to a
CT or indirectly through other relays and/or meters. If the CT terminal of a multimeter is connected to a
CT or to a relay/ammeter, which is connected to a CT, the ID of the CT will be displayed for the terminal
connection.
PT
A blank entry will be shown for the PT if the PT terminal of the multimeter (bottom pin) is not directly
connected to a PT. If the terminal of a multimeter is connected to a PT, the ID of the PT will be displayed
for the terminal connection.

Ratio
The turn ratio of the current and/or potential transformer connected to the multimeter is shown here.
In/Out of Service
The operating condition of a multimeter can be selected by choosing either the In Service or Out of
Service options. The properties of an Out of Service multimeter can be edited like an In Service
multimeter. However, an Out of Service multimeter will not be included in any system studies. When
the continuity check is activated, an Out of Service multimeter automatically becomes dimmed in the one-
line diagram.

configuration status. Therefore, you can set a branch to be In Service for the base data and Out of Service
in revision data.
Reverse Polarity
Check this box to reverse the voltage potential polarity.
Type
Voltage
Check this box to select a voltmeter function. A PT connection is required for this function.
Current
Check this box to select an ammeter function. A CT connection is required for this function.
kW/MW
Check this box to select a wattmeter function. Both CT and PT connection are required for this function.

Click on the kW/MW button to toggle between kilo and Mega units for watt and var values for entering
and displaying multimeter data.
kvar/Mvar
Check this box to select a varmeter function. Both CT and PT connection are required for this function.
PF
Check this box to meter power factor. A CT connection is required for this function.
Freq.
Check this box for frequency measurement.
Operating
Displays the operating/metered values for selected multimeter functions.
Full Scale
Enter the full-scale value of the meter. This is used for PSMS only.
Std. Deviation
Online Data
Scanned
Pinned
Equipment
FDR Tag
Name
Description
9.5.1 Remarks Page

User-Defined Info
UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchase Date
9.5.2 Comment Page


AC Elements Over Current Relay
9.6 Over Current Relay
The properties associated with over current relays of the electrical distribution system can be entered in
this editor. The Over Current Relay Editor includes four pages of properties.

Info Page
Setting Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
9.0.1 Info Page
Info
ID

PowerStation automatically assigns a unique ID to each over current relay. The assigned IDs consist of
the default over current relay ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the
number of over current relay increase. The default over current relay ID (OCR) can be changed from the
Defaults Menu in the menu bar or from the Project View.
CT
Over current relays have two pins, one of which can be connected to a current transformer (CT) and the
other pin can be connected to other current/power relays. A blank entry will be shown for the CT if the
terminal of the over current relay is not directly connected to a CT or indirectly through other relays. If
the terminal of an over current relay is connected to a CT or to a relay which is connected to a CT, the ID
of the CT will be displayed for the terminal connection.


Ratio
This field displays the relay connected CT ratio.

In/Out of Service
The operating condition of an over current relay can be selected by choosing either the In Service or Out
of Service options. The properties of an Out of Service relay can be edited like an In Service relay;
however, an Out of Service relay will not display results of any system studies. When Continuity Check
is activated, an Out of Service relay automatically becomes dimmed in the one-line diagram.

Note that the In/Out of Service option is an engineering property, which is independent of the
configuration status. Therefore, you can set a relay to be In Service for the Base Data and Out of Service
in Revision Data.
Interlock
Device
Set and display the over current control interlock data.
ID
Add
Click on this button to open the over current Interlock Editor to set parameters for a new over current
control interlock parameters, including Device type, device ID, and control Action.

Edit
Click on this button to open the over current Interlock Editor and edit the settings of an existing over
current control interlock.
Delete
Click on this button to delete the selected control interlock.
Equipment
FDR Tag
Name
Description
9.6.1 Setting Page

50 (For Transient Stability Analysis)
These settings are used as 50 relay settings for the transient stability analysis.
Instantaneous
Check this box for instantaneous relay action.
Setting
Enter the pickup current as Relay Amp. The primary current is calculated and displayed as Primary Amp.
Time Delay
Enter the intentional relay time delay in second.
67 (For Transient Stability Analysis)
These settings are used if the relay is used as a 67 relay for the transient stability analysis.
Directional
Check this box if the relay pickup current is directional.
Direction
Select the relay pickup current direction either in Forward or in Reverse. Based on the selected direction
and CT connection (polarity), tripping direction of the relay will be shown in an arrow on one-line
diagram.
9.6.2 Remarks Page

User-Defined Info
UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchase Date
9.6.3 Comment Page


AC Elements Voltage Relay

9.7 Voltage Relay
The properties associated with voltage relays are specified in Voltage Relay Editor.

Voltage relays can be used in transient stability study. According to the specified circuit breaker control
interlock functions and settings, transient stability program will check the monitored system quantities
and compare them with the relay settings. When the control conditions are met, the associated control
actions will be triggered.

Voltage relays should be connected to a bus via a potential transformer.

The Voltage Relay Editor contains four pages of information.

Info Page
Setting Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
9.0.1 Info Page


Info
ID

PowerStation automatically assigns a unique ID to each voltage relay. The assigned IDs consist of the
default voltage relay ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of
voltage relays increase. The default voltage relay ID (VR) can be changed from the Defaults Menu in the
PT
Display the connected PT ID.
In/Out of Service
The operating condition of a voltage relay can be selected by choosing either the In Service or Out of
Service options. The properties of an Out of Service relay can be edited like an In Service relay;

in Revision Data
Equipment
FDR Tag
Name
Description

9.7.1 Setting Page

OverVoltage (59) Control Interlock
Set and display the over-voltage control interlock data.
Add Button
Click on this button to open the Voltage Relay Control Interlock Editor to set parameters for a new over-
voltage control interlock parameters.
Edit Button
Click on this button to open the Voltage Relay Control Interlock Editor and edit the settings of an existing
over-voltage control interlock.
Delete Button
Click on this button to delete the highlighted over-voltage control interlock.
UnderVoltage (27) Control Interlock
Set and display the under-voltage control interlock data.
Add Button
Click on this button to open the Voltage Relay Control Interlock Editor to set parameters for a new under-
voltage control interlock parameters.
Edit Button
Click on this button to open the Voltage Relay Control Interlock Editor and edit the settings of an existing
under-voltage control interlock.
Delete Button
Click on this button to delete the highlighted under-voltage control interlock.

Setting
Settings of the under-voltage control interlock in percent of the selected Unit.
Unit
Unit of the setting in V% or V/Hz%.
Voltage Relay Control Interlock Editor

Setting
Settings of the overvoltage or undervoltage control interlock in percent of the selected Unit.
Unit
Unit for the relay setting in V% or V/Hz%.
Circuit Breaker ID
Select the ID of the circuit breaker to be controlled.
Action
Action type of the circuit breaker, Open or Close.
Time Delay
This is the time delay of the control action in seconds. The relay action will be reset if the operating
voltage falls within the limit during the time delay period.
9.7.2 Remarks Page


User-Defined Info
UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchase Date

9.7.3 Comment Page

AC Elements Frequency Relay

9.8 Frequency Relay
The properties associated with frequency relays are specified in Frequency Relay Editor.

Same as voltage relays, frequency relays can be used in transient stability study. According to the
specified circuit breaker control interlock functions and settings, transient stability program will check the
monitored system quantities and compare them with the relay settings. When the control conditions are
met, the associated control actions will be triggered.

Frequency relays should be connected to a bus via a potential transformer.

The Frequency Relay Editor contains four pages of information.

Info Page
Setting Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
9.0.1 Info Page


Info
ID

PowerStation automatically assigns a unique ID to each frequency relay. The assigned IDs consist of the
default frequency relay ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of
frequency relays increase. The default frequency relay ID (FR) can be changed from the Defaults Menu
in the menu bar or from the Project View.
PT
Display the connect PT ID.
In/Out of Service
The operating condition of a frequency relay can be selected by choosing either the In Service or Out of

in Revision Data.
Equipment
FDR Tag
Name
Description

9.8.1 Setting Page

OverFrequency Control Interlock
Set and display the over-frequency control interlock data.
Add Button
Click on this button to open the Frequency Relay Control Interlock Editor to set parameters for a new
over-frequency control interlock parameters.
Edit Button
Click on this button to open the Frequency Relay Control Interlock Editor and edit the properties of an
existing over-voltage control interlock
Delete Button
Click on this button to delete the highlighted over-frequency control interlock.
UnderFrequency Control Interlock
Set and display the under-frequency control interlock data.
Add Button
Click on this button to open the Frequency Relay Control Interlock Editor to set parameters for a new
under-frequency control interlock parameters.
Edit Button
Click on this button to open the Frequency Relay Control Interlock Editor and edit the settings of an
existing under-frequency control interlock.
Delete Button
Click on this button to delete the highlighted under- frequency control interlock.

Frequency Relay Control Interlock Editor

Setting
This is the setting of the under-frequency and over-frequency relay in percent of the selected Unit.
Unit
This is the unit for the relay setting in Hz or Hz/Sec.
Circuit Breaker ID
Select the ID of the circuit breaker to be controlled.
Action
Action type of the circuit breaker, Open or Close.
Time Delay
Time delay of the control action in seconds. The relay action will be reset if the operating voltage falls
within the limit during the time delay period.
9.8.2 Remarks Page


User-Defined Info
UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchase Date

9.8.3 Comment Page


AC Elements Reverse Power Relay

9.9 Reverse Power Relay
The properties associated with reverse power relays of the electrical distribution system can be entered in
this editor.

The Reverse Power Relay Editor includes four pages of properties.

Info Page
Setting Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
9.0.1 Info Page

Info
ID

PowerStation automatically assigns a unique ID to each reverse power relay. The assigned IDs consist of
the default reverse power relay ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the
number of reverse power relay increase. The default reverse power relay ID (Relay32) can be changed

CT
Reverse power relays have two pins, one of which can be connected to a current transformer (CT) and the
terminal of the reverse power relay is not directly connected to a CT or indirectly through other relays. If
the terminal of a reverse power relay is connected to a CT or to a relay, which is connected to a CT, the
ID of the CT will be displayed for the terminal connection.

Ratio

In/Out of Service
The operating condition of a reverse power current relay can be selected by choosing either the In Service
or Out of Service options. The properties of an Out of Service relay can be edited like an In Service
relay; however, an Out of Service relay will not display results of any system studies. When Continuity
Check is activated, an Out of Service relay automatically becomes dimmed in the one-line diagram.

in Revision Data.
Control Interlock
Device
Set and display the reverse power control interlock data.
ID
Add
Click on this button to open the reverse power Interlock Editor to set parameters for a new reverse power


Edit
Click on this button to open the reverse power Interlock Editor and edit the settings of an existing reverse
power control interlock.
Delete
Equipment
FDR Tag
Name
Description
9.9.1 Setting Page

Setting
Real Power
Check this box if real power is used as trip setting. Pickup power base in MW is entered in the field next.

Reactive Power
Check this box if reactive power is used as trip setting. Pickup power base in Mvar is entered in the field
next.

Over Power
Pickup
Enter the setting for over power trip. If the measured power exceeds this value, the relay will trip. The
setting is entered in percentage of the pickup power base.
Time Delay
Enter the intentional relay time delay for over power trip in second.

Under Power
Pickup
Enter the setting for under power trip. If the measured power drops below this value, the relay will trip.
The setting is entered in percentage of the pickup power base.
Time Delay
Enter the intentional relay time delay for under power trip in second.
9.9.2 Remarks Page


User-Defined Info
UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchase Date

9.9.3 Comment Page

AC Elements Solid State Trip Relay

9.10 Solid State Trip Relay
The properties associated with solid state trip relays of the electrical distribution system can be entered in
this editor.

The Solid State Trip Relay Editor includes four pages of properties.

Info Page
Setting Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
9.0.1 Info Page

Info
ID

PowerStation automatically assigns a unique ID to each solid state trip relay. The assigned IDs consist of
the default solid state trip relay ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the
number of solid state trip relay increase. The default solid state trip relay ID (MVSST) can be changed

CT
Solid state trip relays have two pins, one of which can be connected to a current transformer (CT) and the
terminal of the solid state trip relay is not directly connected to a CT or indirectly through other relays. If
the terminal of a solid state trip relay is connected to a CT or to a relay, which is connected to a CT, the
ID of the CT will be displayed for the terminal connection.

Ratio
In/Out of Service
The operating condition of a solid state trip relay can be selected by choosing either the In Service or Out
of Service options. The properties of an Out of Service relay can be edited like an In Service relay;

in Revision Data.
Control Interlock
Device
Set and display the solid state trip control interlock data.
ID
Add
Click on this button to open the solid state trip Interlock Editor to set parameters for a new solid state trip


Edit
Click on this button to open the solid state trip Interlock Editor and edit the settings of an existing solid
state trip control interlock.
Delete
Equipment
FDR Tag
Name
Description
9.10.1 Setting Page

Setting
Instantaneous
Setting
Enter the pickup current as Relay Amp. The primary current is calculated and display as Primary Amp.
Time Delay

9.10.2 Remarks Page

User-Defined Info
UD Field A5
UD Field A6

UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchase Date
9.10.3 Comment Page


AC Elements Motor Relay

9.11 Motor Relay
The properties associated with motor relays of the electrical distribution system can be entered in this
editor.

The Motor Relay Editor includes four pages of properties.

Info Page
Setting Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
9.0.1 Info Page

Info
ID

PowerStation automatically assigns a unique ID to each motor relay. The assigned IDs consist of the
default motor relay ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of
motor relay increase. The default motor relay ID (MTTR) can be changed from the Defaults Menu in the

CT
Motor relays have two pins, one of which can be connected to a current transformer (CT) and the other
pin can be connected to other current/power relays. A blank entry will be shown for the CT if the
terminal of the motor relay is not directly connected to a CT or indirectly through other relays. If the
terminal of a motor relay is connected to a CT or to a relay, which is connected to a CT, the ID of the CT
will be displayed for the terminal connection.

Ratio

In/Out of Service
The operating condition of a motor relay can be selected by choosing either the In Service or Out of

in Revision Data.
Control Interlock
Device
Set and display the motor control interlock data.
ID
Add
Click on this button to open the motor Interlock Editor to set parameters for a new motor control interlock
parameters, including Device type, device ID, and control Action.


Edit
Click on this button to open the motor Interlock Editor and edit the settings of an existing motor control
interlock.
Delete
Equipment
FDR Tag
Name
Description
9.11.1 Setting Page

Setting
Instantaneous
Setting
Enter the pickup current as Relay Amp. The primary current is calculated and display as Primary Amp.
Time Delay


9.11.2 Remarks Page

User-Defined Info

UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchase Date

9.11.3 Comment Page

ETAP

PowerStation
4.0
User Guide
Copyright 2001
All Rights Reserved





Southern California

(949) 462-0100 Sales
(949) 462-0400 Fax

Chapter 10

AC-DC Elements

Editors are available for each element type in the one-line diagram and in the underground raceway
system. Except for the element IDs, bus connections, and status, all other data that appear in the editors
are considered engineering properties.
One-Line Diagram Element Editors
Each element available on the One-Line Diagram Toolbar has a customized editor. This chapter
addresses the AC-DC element editors.

AC-DC Elements
UPS (Uninterruptible Power Supply)
VFD (Variable Frequency Drive)
Charger
Inverter

AC-DC Elements UPS

10.1 UPS (Uninterruptible Power Supply)
The properties associated with UPSs (Uninterruptible Power Supply) of the electrical system can be
entered in this editor. A UPS consists of two AC terminals (input & output) and one DC terminal. The
DC terminal is located on the side and can be connected to a DC bus (node).

The UPS Editor contains the following nine pages of information.

Info Page
Rating Page
Loading Page
SC Imp Page
Duty Cycle Page
Harmonic Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
10.1.1 Info Page
Within the Info page, specify the UPS ID, connected Bus, In/Out of Service, Equipment FDR Tag, Name,
Description, Data Type, load Priority, Configuration Status, AC Connections, and Demand Factor.

AC-DC Elements UPS

Info
ID
Enter a unique alphanumeric ID with a maximum of 25 characters. PowerStation automatically assigns a
unique ID to each UPS. The default IDs consist of the word Ups plus an integer, starting with the number
one and increasing as the number of UPS increases.

The default ID (UPS) for UPS elements can be changed from the Defaults menu in the menu bar or from
the Project View.
In Bus and DC Bus
These are the IDs of the connecting buses for the UPS. If the terminal is not connected to any bus, a blank
entry will be shown for the bus ID. To connect or reconnect a UPS to a bus, select a bus from the list
box. The one-line diagram will be updated to show the new connection after you click on OK. Note that
you can connect the terminals of the UPS to AC & DC buses that reside in the same view where it
resides, or you can connect to buses that reside in other views by connecting the external and internal pins
of the composite networks. You cannot connect to buses that reside in the Dumpster.

If a UPS is connected to a bus through a number of protective devices, reconnection of the UPS to a new
bus in this editor will reconnect the last existing protective device to the new bus, as shown below where
Ups1 is reconnected from Bus10 to Bus4.

Next to the bus ID, PowerStation displays the nominal kV in AC terminal buses and nominal V in DC
terminal buses for your convenience.
In/Out of Service
Operating conditions of a UPS can be selected by choosing either the In Service or Out of Service option.
The properties of an Out of Service UPS can be edited like an In Service UPS; however, an Out of
Service UPS will not be included in any system studies. When Continuity Check is activated, an Out of
Service UPS automatically becomes dimmed in the one-line diagram.

Note that the In/Out of Service option is an engineering property and is independent of the configuration
status. Therefore, you can set a UPS to be In Service for the Base Data and Out of Service in Revision
Data.
AC-DC Elements UPS

Configuration
Select the operating status of the UPS(s) for the selected configuration status from the list box. Options


Depending on the demand factor specified for each operating status, the actual loading of the UPS is
determined for load flow studies.

Note that status is not a part of the UPS engineering properties. For this reason, the name of the
configuration status is shown, indicating the UPS status under the specific configuration, i.e., you can
have a different operating status under each configuration. In the following example, status of a UPS is

Equipment
FDR Tag
Name
Description
Data Type
the source of the latest data. There are a total of 10 load types and you can change their name from the
Project menu under Settings and Data Type.
Priority
Select the load priority of this UPS from the list box. This field can be used for load priority, operating
priority, load shedding priority, etc. Ten different priorities are provided to select from. Priority names
can be changed from the Project menu under Settings and Load Priority.
AC Connection
3-Phase
For this release of PowerStation, the connection type for the AC input is set to 3-Phase.
AC-DC Elements UPS

1-Phase
For this release of PowerStation, there is no output form the UPS model. Therefore, the connection pin
on the output side is disabled.
Demand Factor
The Demand factor is the amount of time the UPS is actually operating. The Demand factor affects the
calculation of UPS loads for different loading categories.

Load kW = Rated kW * % Loading * Demand Factor

The Demand factors for Continuous, Intermittent, and Spare status have a range from 0% to 100%. Since
configurations.
10.1.2 Ratings Page
In this page, you can specify the UPS ratings and select the UPS operating mode and type.

AC Rating
kW
Enter the kW rating of the UPS (output power at full load). Click on the kW/MW button to choose either
kW or MW units for entering and displaying output power ratings of the UPS. When the kW rating is
modified, the rated power factor (including the operating load and losses for all loading categories) is
recalculated in order to keep the rated kVA fixed. PowerStation limits the entry of kW/MW in such a way
that the power factor cannot exceed 100% or be below 1%.
kVA
Enter the rated output kVA (or MVA) of the UPS. When the kVA rating is modified, the rated kW and
full load current of the UPS are recalculated.
AC-DC Elements UPS

kV
Enter the rated AC output voltage of the UPS in kV.
FLA
The rated AC output full load current of the UPS in amperes is displayed here.
% Eff
Enter the rated efficiency of the UPS in percent. When the efficiency is modified, the full load currents
for the AC input and DC sides are recalculated. Efficiency cannot exceed 100% or be below 10%. It
defaults to 90%.
% PF
Enter the rated power factor of the UPS output power. When the power factor is modified, the rated kW
is recalculated. Power factor cannot exceed 100%. It defaults to 85%.
Input
kV
Enter the rated AC input voltage of the UPS in kV. The rated AC input full load current is calculated
based on this value.
FLA
The rated AC input full load current of the UPS in amperes is displayed here.
DC Rating
V
Enter the rated DC input voltage of the UPS in volts. The rated DC full load current is calculated based
on this value.
FLA
The rated DC full load current of the UPS in amperes is displayed here.
Imax
Enter the maximum DC output current of the UPS in percentage of the rated DC full load current. The
UPS becomes a constant current source when the DC load current exceeds the Imax in DC load flow
studies. PowerStation uses Imax as the constant current source value. Imax defaults to 150%.
Operating Mode
Constant Vdc
When you select this option, the rated DC voltage is used as the regulated voltage source of the UPS for
DC load flow studies. With this option, the firing angle is adjusted to keep the DC voltage constant.
Fixed Firing Angle
When you select this option, the DC voltage of the UPS (for DC load flow studies) is calculated using a
fixed value for the firing angle (Alpha) and the input bus voltage.
AC-DC Elements UPS

Vdc
This field displays the DC voltage source of the UPS in volts.
Alpha
Enter the fixed firing angle (Alpha) of the UPS in degrees for the calculation of the voltage source value.

This field allows you to enter a value between 0 and 90 degrees, which means the UPS can only transfer
power from its AC terminal to the DC terminal. The DC output voltage is proportional to cosine of alpha.
Options
Auction Diode
When the Auction Diode option is selected, the UPS is treated as a DC load in the DC system, i.e., DC
power can only flow into the UPS. In this case, the UPS will not provide power to the DC system for
load flow or short-circuit studies.

Without the auction diode, DC power can flow in or out of the UPS.
Bypass Switch
The Bypass Switch only affects AC short-circuit studies. When the Bypass Switch is selected, the UPS is
treated as a shorted branch crossed between AC input and output terminals. If Bypass Switch is not
selected, there is no short-circuit current contribution from the AC output side to the input side.
10.1.3 Loading Page
In this page, specify the percent output loading of the UPS for all loading categories. The kW and kvar
input load of the UPS based on the specified efficiency and power factor are calculated and displayed
here. Also, the DC operating load and losses in kW are displayed here.

AC-DC Elements UPS

Operating Load
AC Input
This area displays the updated AC input operating load of the UPS in kW/kvar or MW/Mvar when DC
load flow studies are run and Update Operating Load is checked in the DC Load Flow Study Case Editor.
These values will also get updated when the UPS output is connected to an AC system and AC load flow
studies are run with Update Operating Load selected in the AC Load Flow Study Case Editor.
AC Output
This area displays the updated AC output operating load of the UPS in kW/kvar or MW/Mvar when
Update Operating Load is checked in the DC Load Flow Study Case Editor, or when the UPS output is
connected to an AC system and the Update Operating Load option is selected in the AC Load Flow Study
Case Editor.
DC
This area displays the updated DC operating load of the UPS in kW or MW. It is updated when you run
DC load flow studies and the UPS does not have an auction diode and the Update Operating Load option
is checked in the DC Load Flow Study Case Editor.
Loading Category
This section is used to assign a percent loading to each one of the ten loading categories for AC loading
and DC loading of this UPS, i.e., each UPS can be set to have a different operating loading level for each
loading category. To edit the values of the percent loading, click on any one of the edit fields under the %
Loading column. Note that you can select any of these loading categories when conducting AC or DC
load flow studies. To edit the loading category names, select Loading Category from the Project menu.
10.1.4 SC Imp Page
Within the SC Imp page, specify the AC and DC short-circuit multiplication factors and the grounding
resistance of the UPS, and view calculated AC and DC short-circuit contribution currents.

AC-DC Elements UPS

SC Contribution to AC System
Kac
Enter the AC short-circuit multiplication factor in percent of the output FLA. PowerStation uses this
value to calculate short-circuit current contribution from the UPS to the AC output side. The AC
multiplication factor defaults to 150%.
Isc
The AC short-circuit current contribution from the UPS to the output side is calculated and displayed here
in amperes.
SC Contribution to DC System
Kdc
Enter the DC short-circuit multiplication factor in percent of DC FLA. PowerStation uses this value to
calculate short-circuit current contribution from the UPS in DC short-circuit studies. The DC
Isc
The DC short-circuit current contribution from the UPS is calculated and displayed here in amperes.
DC Grounding
Grounded
When you select the Grounded option, the UPS is grounded.
R
Enter the UPS grounding resistance in ohms. For a solidly grounded UPS, enter zero for the grounding
resistance.

AC-DC Elements UPS

10.1.5 Duty Cycle Page
Within the Duty Cycle page, specify the duty cycle category and load profile for each duty cycle.
PowerStation displays the load profile for random and non-random loads for viewing and printing. The
data in this page are used in battery sizing studies.

Duty Cycle
This section is used to specify load profile for each one of the five duty cycle categories.
Duty Cycle Category
Select a duty cycle category from the list box and view the load profile for it in this page. Each load can
have up to five duty cycle categories with independent load profiles. You can name the duty cycle
categories from the Project menu bar.
Load Profile
To add a load to the load profile, click on either the Ins or Add button, or press the Insert key to create a
row in the load profile table. Each row represents a segment of the load profile for this duty cycle.

To edit the load profile, click on the button under the Active column, and this segment of load will be
considered in studies. Click on the button under the Random column, and this segment of load will be
treated as a random load in studies. Click on the field under the Type column and pick one of the seven
types in the list box. Enter a load name, current in amperes, start time in seconds, and duration in seconds
for this segment of load. After the data of a row is entered, this segment of load curve will be drawn on
the Non-Random or Random window.

To delete a row of data, highlight the row by clicking the number of the row, then click on the Del button
or press the Delete key.

Click on either the <-Print or Print-> button, and the displayed load profile curve (random & non-
random) for the selected duty cycle will be printed out.

Note that you can select any of the duty cycle categories when conducting battery sizing studies. To edit
the loading category names, select Duty Cycle Category from the Project menu.
AC-DC Elements UPS

Within the Harmonic page, specify the harmonic source type of the UPS and view the harmonic source
waveform and frequency spectrum of the UPS.

Use Library Data
Get the harmonic source data of the UPS from the Harmonic Library.
Calculate Based on Parameters
Calculate the harmonic source data based on the parameters of the UPS.
Parameters
Enter the parameters of the UPS for the calculation of the harmonic source data.
Harmonic Library
Library Button
Click on the Library button to pick up the UPS harmonic source data including harmonic source type,
device type, and manufacture/model from the library.

AC-DC Elements UPS

Type
Display the UPS harmonic source type picked up from the Harmonic Library.
Manufacturer
Display the UPS device type picked up from the Harmonic Library.
Model
Display the UPS manufacturer/model picked up from the Harmonic Library.
Waveform
Display the harmonic source waveform of the UPS.
Spectrum
Display the harmonic frequency spectrum of the UPS.
Print Buttons
Click on either of the Print buttons to print out the waveform or frequency spectrum of the UPS.

AC-DC Elements UPS

10.1.7 Reliability

A
Active Failure Rate in number of failures per year. The Active Failure Rate is associated with the
component and can therefore cause the removal of other healthy components and branches from service.
It should be noted that the failed component itself (and those components that are directly connected to it)
could be restored to service only after repair or replacement of the failed component.

The Mean Repair Rate in number of repairs per year is automatically calculated and based on MTTR ( =
8760/MTTR).
FOR

A
(FOR =
MTTR/(MTTR+8760/
A
).
MTTF
The Mean Time To Failure in years is automatically calculated and based on
A
(MTTF = 1.0/
A
).
MTTR
The Mean Time To Repair in hours is the expected time necessary for a crew to repair a failed component
Alternative Supply
Switching Time
This is the time in hours necessary to isolate a failure. It is the period of time starting from the moment a
switching operation is requested until the operation is completed.
AC-DC Elements UPS

Replacement
Available
P

rP
It is the replacement time in hours needed to replace a failed component with a spare.
Library
Library
Interruption Cost
Load Sector
Select the Load Sector name for the load. The Load Sector information is used to obtain interruption cost
information from the Reliability Cost library in order to calculate Expected Interruption Costs.
10.1.8 Remarks Page

User-Defined Info
AC-DC Elements UPS

UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchasing Date

AC-DC Elements UPS

10.1.9 Comment Page


AC-DC Elements VFD
10.2 VFD (Variable Frequency Drive)
The properties associated with VFDs (Variable Frequency Drive) of the electrical system can be entered
in this editor.

The Variable Frequency Drive Editor contains the following five pages of information:

Info Page
Rating Page
Harmonic Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
10.2.1 Info Page
Within the Info page, specify the VFD ID, connected bus and load IDs, In/Out of Service, Equipment
FDR (feeder) Tag, Name, Description, Data Type, and load Priority.

Info
ID
unique ID to each VFD. The assigned IDs consist of the default ID plus an integer, starting with the
number one and increasing as the number of VFDs increases.

The default ID (VFD) for VFD elements can be changed from the Defaults menu in the menu bar or from
the Project View.
Input Bus and Load
These are the IDs of the connecting bus and load for the VFD. If the terminal is not connected to any bus
or load, a blank entry will be shown for the bus or load ID. To connect or reconnect a VFD to a bus,
click on OK.
AC-DC Elements VFD

Note that you can connect the terminals of the VFD to AC buses that reside in the same view where it
resides, or you can connect to buses that reside in other views by connecting the external and internal pins
of the composite networks. You cannot connect to buses that are in the Dumpster.

Note that the output terminal of a VFD can only be connected directly to induction motors, synchronous
motors, MOVs, static loads, and lumped loads. You cannot insert any switching devices between the
VFD and the connected load.

If a VFD is connected to a bus through a number of protective devices, reconnection of the VFD to a new
bus in this editor will reconnect the last existing protective device to the new bus, as shown below where
Vfd1 is reconnected from Bus10 to Bus4.

Next to the bus ID, PowerStation displays the nominal kV for your convenience.
In/Out of Service
Operating conditions of a VFD can be selected by choosing either the In Service or Out of Service option.
The properties of an Out of Service UPS can be edited like an In Service VFD; however, an Out of
Service VFD will not be included in any system studies. When Continuity Check is activated, an Out of
Service VFD automatically becomes dimmed in the one-line diagram.

status. Therefore, you can set a VFD to be In Service for the Base Data and Out of Service in Revision
Data.
Equipment
FDR Tag
Name
Description
AC-DC Elements VFD
Data Type
Priority
Select the load priority of this VFD from the list box. This field can be used for load priority, operating
10.2.2 Rating Page
In this page, you can specify the VFD ratings and select the VFD bypass switch.

Rating
HP/kW
Enter the VFD rating in horsepower (HP) or kW. You can choose from these two options by clicking on
the HP/kW button.
kV
Enter the rated voltage of the VFD in kV.
% Eff
Enter the efficiency of the VFD in percent. Efficiency cannot exceed 100%. PowerStation uses this
value to calculate the losses of the VFD. Losses associated with VFDs are included as part of the
connected load.
AC-DC Elements VFD
Bypass Switch
The Bypass Switch only affects AC short-circuit studies. When Bypass Switch is selected, the VFD is
treated as a shorted branch (switch) crossed between input and output terminals. If Bypass Switch is not
selected, there is no short-circuit current contribution from the connected motor to the input side.
Within the Harmonic page, specify the harmonic source type of the VFD, and display the harmonic
source waveform and frequency spectrum of the UPS.

Use Library Data
Get the harmonic source data of the VFD from the Harmonic Library.
Calculate the harmonic source data based on the parameters of the VFD.
Parameters
Enter the parameters of the VFD for the calculation of the harmonic source data.
Harmonic Library
Library Button
Click on the Library button to pick up the VFD harmonic source data including harmonic source type,
device type, and manufacture/model.
AC-DC Elements VFD

Type
This area displays the VFD harmonic source type picked up from the Harmonic Library.
Manufacturer
This area displays the VFD device type picked up from the Harmonic Library.
Model
This area displays the VFD Manufacturer/model picked up from the Harmonic Library.
Waveform
This area displays the harmonic source waveform of the VFD.
Spectrum
This area displays the harmonic frequency spectrum of the VFD.
Print Buttons
Click on the Print buttons to print out the waveform or frequency spectrum of the VFD.

AC-DC Elements VFD
A
can be restored to service only after repair or replacement of the failed component.
P
Passive Failure Rate in number of failures per year. The Passive Failure Rate is associated with a
component failure mode that does not cause the operation of the primary protection zone around the failed
component, and therefore, does not have an impact on the remaining healthy components and branches of
the system. Repairing or replacing the failed component will restore service.

8760/MTTR).
FOR

A
(FOR =
MTTR/(MTTR+8760/
A
).
MTTF
A
(MTTF = 1.0/
A
).
MTTR
Alternative Supply
Switching Time
Replacement
Available
P
r
P

Library
Library

AC-DC Elements VFD
10.2.5 Remarks Page

User-Defined Info
UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
AC-DC Elements VFD
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchasing Date
10.2.6 Comment Page


AC-DC Elements Charger

10.3 Charger
The properties associated with DC chargers of the electrical system can be entered in this editor.

The Charger Editor contains the following eight pages of information:

Info Page
Rating Page
Loading Page
SC Page
Harmonic Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
10.3.1 Info Page
Within the Info page, specify the charger ID, connected bus, In/Out of Service, Equipment FDR (feeder)
Tag, Name, Description, Data Type, load Priority, Configuration Status, operating Type, and Demand
Factor.

Info
ID
unique ID to each charger. The default IDs consist of the word charger plus an integer, starting with the
number one and increasing as the number of chargers increases.

The default ID (Charger) for chargers can be changed from the Defaults menu in the menu bar or from
the Project View.


AC Bus and DC Bus
These are the IDs of the connecting buses for the charger. If the terminal is not connected to any bus, a
blank entry will be shown for the bus ID. To connect or reconnect a charger to a bus, select a bus from

Note that you can connect the terminals of the charger to AC & DC buses that reside in the same view
where it resides, or you can connect to buses that reside in other views by connecting the external and
internal pins of the composite networks. You cannot connect to buses that are in the Dumpster.

If a charger is connected to a bus through a number of protective devices, reconnection of the charger to a
new bus in this editor will reconnect the last existing protective device to the new bus, as shown below
where Charger1 is reconnected from Bus10 to Bus4.

Next to the bus ID, PowerStation displays the nominal kV of the AC terminal bus and nominal V of the
DC terminal bus for your convenience.
In/Out of Service
Operating conditions of a charger can be selected by choosing either the In Service or Out of Service
option. The properties of an Out of Service charger can be edited like an In Service charger; however, an
Out of Service charger will not be included in any system studies. When Continuity Check is activated,
an Out of Service charger automatically becomes dimmed in the one-line diagram.

status. Therefore, you can set a charger to be In Service for the Base Data and Out of Service in Revision
Data.
Configuration
Select the operating status of the charger(s) for the selected configuration status from the list box.


Depending on the demand factor specified for each operating status, the actual loading of the charger is
determined for AC load flow studies.

Note that status is not a part of the charger engineering properties. For this reason, the name of the
configuration status is shown, indicating the charger status under the specific configuration, i.e., you can
have a different operating status under each configuration. In the following example, status of a charger

Connection
3-Phase
For this release of Power Station the 3-phase connection type cannot be selected by the user, but it used
by PowerStation to model the device.
1-Phase
For this release of Power Station the 1-phase connection type cannot be selected by the user.
Equipment
FDR Tag
Name
Description
Data Type
Priority
Select the load priority of this charger from the list box. This field can be used for load priority, operating
Type
Select operating type as charger or converter.

Demand Factor
Demand factor is the amount of time the charger is actually operating. Demand factors affect the
calculation of the charger load.

Load kW = Rated kVA * PF * % Loading * Demand Factor
Load kvar = Rated kVA * RF * % Loading * Demand Factor

Where the PF & RF are rated power factor and reactive factor of the charger.

configurations.
10.3.2 Rating Page
In this page, you can specify the charger ratings and DC voltage limits, and select the charger operating
mode.

AC Rating
kVA
Enter the kVA rating of the charger. Click on the kVA/MVA button to choose from kVA and MVA units
for entering and displaying kW/MW and kvar/Mvar data of the charger. When the value of the kVA is
modified, the rated DC power, rated DC full load current, rated AC full load current and the operating
load and losses for all loading categories of the charger are recalculated.
kV
Enter the rated AC voltage of the charger in kV. The rated AC full load current is calculated based on
this value.

FLA
Enter the rated AC full load current of the charger in amperes. When the rated AC full load current is
modified, the rated kVA, rated efficiency and the operating load and losses for all loading categories of
the charger are recalculated. PowerStation limits the entry of rated AC full load current in such a way
that the rated efficiency cannot exceed 100% or be below 10%.
% Eff
Enter the rated efficiency of the charger in percent. When the efficiency is modified, the rated kVA, rated
AC full load current, and the operating load and losses for all loading categories of the charger are
recalculated. Efficiency cannot exceed 100% or be below 10%. It defaults to 90%.
% PF
Enter the rated power factor of the charger in percent. When the power factor is modified, the rated kVA,
rated AC full load current, rated firing angle, and the operating load and losses for all loading categories
of the charger are recalculated. Power factor cannot exceed 100%. It defaults to 85%.
Alpha
The rated firing angle of the charger is calculated based on the rated power factor is displayed here in
degrees.
DC Rating
kW
Enter the DC kW rating of the charger. When the rated kW is modified, the rated kVA, rated AC full load
current, rated DC full load current, and the operating load and losses for all loading categories of the
charger are recalculated.
V
Enter the rated DC voltage of the charger in volts. The rated DC full load current is calculated.
FLA
Enter the rated DC full load current of the charger in amperes. When the rated DC full load current is
modified, the rated DC kW, rated kVA, rated AC full load current, and the operating load and losses for
all loading categories of the charger are recalculated.
Imax
Enter the maximum DC output current of the charger in percentage of the rated DC full load current. The
charger becomes a constant current source when DC load current exceeds the Imax in DC load flow
study. PowerStation uses Imax as the constant current source value. Imax defaults to 150%.
Operating Mode
Constant Voltage
When you select this option, a constant voltage is used as the voltage source value of the charger in DC
load flow studies. The constant voltage Vdc is calculated as follows:

Select Float: Vdc = V * %Vfloat / 100
Select Equalize: Vdc = V * %Veq / 100

Fixed Firing Angle
When you select this radio button, the voltage source value of the charger in DC load flow studies is
calculated using a fixed firing angle (Alpha) and the input bus voltage.
DC Voltage
Vdc
Displays the voltage source value of the charger in volts.
Max Limit
When Equalize is selected, the Max. Limit Equalize voltage threshold of the charger in percent or volts
can be entered. PowerStation limits the entry of Vequalize in such a way that Vequalize cannot exceed
the Max. Limit threshold.

When Float is selected, the Max. Limit Float voltage threshold of the charger in percent or volts can be
entered. PowerStation limits the entry of Vfloat in such a way that Vfloat cannot exceed the Max. Limit
threshold.
Min Limit
When Equalize is selected, the Min. Limit Equalize voltage threshold of the charger in percent or volts
can be entered. PowerStation limits the entry of Vequalize in such a way that Vequalize cannot be less
than the Min. Limit threshold.

When Float is selected, the Min. Limit Float voltage threshold of the charger in percent or volts can be
entered. PowerStation limits the entry of Vfloat in such a way that Vfloat cannot be less than the Min.
Limit threshold.
10.3.3 Loading Page
In this page, specify loading percent of the charger for all loading categories, and view updated AC and
DC operating load from DC load flow studies.


Loading Category
Loading Category
This section is used to assign a percent loading to each one of the ten loading categories for the loading of
this charger, i.e., each charger can be set to have a different operating loading level for each loading
Loading column. Note that you can select any of these loading categories when conducting AC load flow
studies. To edit the loading category names, select Loading Category from the Project menu.
Operating Load
AC
Updated AC operating load of the charger in kW/kvar or MW/Mvar is displayed here when Update
Operating Load is checked in the DC Load Flow Study Case Editor.
DC
Updated DC operating load of the charger in kW or MW is displayed here when Update Operating Load
is checked in the DC Load Flow Study Case Editor.
10.3.4 SC Page
Within the SC page, select the charger short-circuit model, specify AC system short-circuit capacity and
impedance of the charger, and the grounding data.

SC Contribution to DC System
Fixed SC Contribution
When you select the Fixed SC Contribution option, the charger is treated as an ideal constant current
source (K * FLAdc / 100) in DC short-circuit studies.

Based on AC System Z
When you select the Based on AC System Z option, the charger is treated as a constant voltage source in
DC short-circuit studies.
K
Enter the short-circuit multiplication factor in percent. PowerStation uses this value to calculate the
constant current source value for DC short-circuit studies. The multiplication factor defaults to 150%.
Isc (k*FLAdc)
The constant current source (short-circuit contribution) of the charger is calculated and displayed here in
amperes.
AC System Z
MVAsc
When you enter the AC system short-circuit capacity of the charger in MVA, the system short-circuit
impedance, including %R and %X in 100MVA base, are calculated.
X/R
Enter the X/R ratio of the system short-circuit impedance for calculation of the %R and %X.
% R
Enter the resistance R of the system short-circuit impedance in percent (100 MVA base). When R is
modified, the X/R ratio of the system short-circuit impedance is recalculated.
% X
Enter the reactance X of the system short-circuit impedance in percent (100MVA base). When X is
modified, the X/R ratio of the system short-circuit impedance and the system short-circuit capacity are
recalculated.
DC Grounding
Grounded
When you select the Grounded option, the charger is grounded.
Rg
Enter the grounding resistance of the charger in ohms.


Within the Harmonic page, specify the harmonic source type of the charger and view the harmonic source
waveform and frequency spectrum of the charger.

Use Library Data
Get harmonic source data of the charger from the Harmonic Library.
Calculate the harmonic source data based on the parameters of the charger.
Parameters
Enter the parameters of the charger for calculation of the harmonic source data.
Harmonic Library
Library Button
Click on the Library button to pick up the charger harmonic source data including harmonic source type,


Type
This area displays the charger harmonic source type picked up from the Harmonic Library.
Manufacturer
This area displays the charger device type picked up from the Harmonic Library.
Model
This area displays the charger manufacturer/model picked up from the Harmonic Library.
Waveform
Displays the harmonic source waveform of the charger.
Spectrum
Displays the harmonic frequency spectrum of the charger.
Print Buttons
Click on the Print buttons to print out the waveform or frequency spectrum of the charger.

A
can be restored to service only after repair or replacement of the failed component.

8760/MTTR).
FOR

The Forced Outage Rate (i.e., unavailability) calculated based on MTTR,
A
(FOR =
MTTR/(MTTR+8760/
A
).
MTTF
A
(MTTF = 1.0/
A
).
MTTR
Alternative Supply
Switching Time
Replacement
Available
P
r
P
Library
Library

Interruption Cost
Load Sector
Select the Load Sector name for the load. The Load Sector information is used to obtain interruption cost
information from the Reliability Cost library in order to calculate Expected Interruption Costs.


10.3.7 Remarks Page
User-Defined Info

UD Field A5
UD Field A6

UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchasing Date
10.3.8 Comment Page

AC-DC Elements Inverter

10.4 Inverter
The properties associated with inverters of the electrical system can be entered in this editor.

The DC Inverter Editor contains the following eight pages of information:

Info Page
Rating Page
Loading Page
Duty Cycle Page
Harmonic Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page

10.4.1 Info Page
Within the Info page, specify the ID, connected buses, In/Out of Service, Equipment FDR (feeder) Tag,
Name, Description, Data Type, Load Priority, and Status.

Info
ID
unique ID to each inverter. The default IDs consist of the word Inv plus an integer, starting with the
number one and increasing as the number of inverters increases.

The default ID (Inv) for inverters can be changed from the Defaults menu in the menu bar or from the
Project View.


DC Bus and AC Bus
These are the IDs of the connecting buses for the inverter. If the terminal is not connected to any bus, a
blank entry will be shown for the bus ID. To connect or reconnect an inverter to a bus, select a bus from

Note that you can connect the terminals of the inverter to AC & DC buses that reside in the same view
where it resides, or you can connect to buses that reside in other views by connecting the external and
internal pins of the composite networks. You cannot connect to buses that are in the Dumpster.

If an inverter is connected to a bus through a number of protective devices, reconnection of the inverter to
a new bus in this editor will reconnect the last existing protective device to the new bus, as shown below
where Inv1 is reconnected from DCBus10 to DCBus4.

Next to the bus ID, PowerStation displays the nominal voltage of DC terminal buses and nominal kV of
AC terminal bus for your convenience.
In/Out of Service
Operating conditions of an inverter can be selected by choosing either the In Service or Out of Service
option. The properties of an Out of Service inverter can be edited like an In Service inverter; however, an
Out of Service inverter will not be included in any system studies. When Continuity Check is activated,
an Out of Service inverter automatically becomes dimmed in the one-line diagram.

status. Therefore, you can set an inverter to be In Service for the Base Data and Out of Service in
Revision Data.
Configuration
Select the operating status of the inverter for the selected configuration status from the list box. Options


Depending on the demand factor specified for each operating status, the actual loading of the inverter is
determined for DC load flow studies.


Note that status is not a part of the inverter engineering properties. For this reason, the name of the
configuration status is shown, indicating the inverter status under the specific configuration, i.e., you can
have a different operating status under each configuration. In the following example, status of an inverter

Equipment
FDR Tag
Name
Description
Data Type
Priority
Select the load priority of this inverter from the list box. This field can be used for load priority,
operating priority, load shedding priority, etc. Ten different priorities are provided to select from.
Priority names can be changed from the Project menu under Settings and Load Priority.
Output Connection
Phase
Select the phase connection type of the inverter from the list box. If a single phase connection is set in
the AC terminal, the connection pin on the AC side is disabled.
Demand Factor
Demand factor is the amount of time the inverter is actually operating. Demand factor affects the
following calculations:



configurations.
10.4.2 Rating Page
In this page, you can specify the inverter ratings, select the AC Output Voltage model, and display the
AC short-circuit current of the inverter.

DC Rating
kW
Enter the kW rating of the inverter. Click on the kW/MW button to choose between kW and MW units
for entering rated DC power and displaying data for the inverter. When kW rating is modified, the rated
AC kVA, rated DC full load current, rated AC full load current, and the operating load and losses for all
loading categories of the inverter are recalculated.
FLA
Enter the rated DC full load current of the inverter in amperes. When the rated DC full load current is
modified, the rated DC power, rated efficiency, and the operating load and losses for all loading
categories of the inverter are recalculated. PowerStation limits the entry of rated DC full load current in
such a way that the rated efficiency cannot exceed 100% or be below 10%.
Imax
Enter the maximum DC input current of the inverter in percentage of the rated DC full load current. Imax
defaults to 150%.
Eff
Enter the rated efficiency of the inverter in percent. When the efficiency is modified, the rated DC
power, rated DC full load current, and the DC operating load and losses for all loading categories of the
inverter are recalculated. Efficiency cannot exceed 100% or be below 10%. It defaults to 90%.

V
Enter the rated DC voltage of the inverter in volts. The rated DC full load current is calculated from this
value.
Vmax
Enter the maximum DC voltage of the inverter in percent of the rated voltage. It defaults to 110%.
Vmin
Enter the minimum DC voltage of the inverter in percent of the rated voltage. It defaults to 90%.
AC Rating
kVA
Enter the rated AC kVA of the inverter. When the rated AC kVA is modified, the rated AC full load
current, rated DC power, rated DC full load current, and the operating load and losses for all loading
categories of the inverter are recalculated.
FLA
Enter the rated AC full load current of the inverter in amperes. When the rated AC full load current is
modified, the rated DC power, rated AC kVA, rated DC full load current, and the operating load and
losses for all loading categories of the inverter are recalculated.
kV
Enter the rated AC voltage of the inverter in volts. The rated AC full load current is calculated.
PF
Enter the rated power factor of the inverter in percent. When the power factor is modified, the rated DC
power, rated DC full load current, and the operating load and losses for all loading categories of the
inverter are recalculated. PowerStation limits the entry of power factor in such a way that it cannot
exceed Max. PF or be below Min. PF. It defaults to 85%.
Min. PF
Enter the minimum power factor in percent. It defaults to 80%.
Max. PF
Enter the maximum power factor in percent. It defaults to 100%.
SC Contribution to AC System
K
short-circuit current contribution from the inverter for AC short-circuit studies. The multiplication factor
defaults to 150%.
Isc
The short-circuit current contribution from the inverter (Isc = K * FLAac / 100) is calculated and
displayed here in amperes.

AC Output Voltage
Regulate Vac
When you select the Regulate Vac option, the AC output voltage can be regulated to a value other than
the rated AC voltage of the inverter. The regulated voltage is calculated as follows:

Vac = kV * % Adjustment / 100 in kV

otherwise, the AC output voltage is regulated at the rated value.
%
Enter the percentage value (% Adjustment) for the calculation of the regulated AC output voltage Vac.
Vac
The regulated AC output voltage of the inverter is calculated and displayed here in kV.
10.4.3 Loading Page
In this page, specify the loading percent of the inverter for all loading categories, and view updated DC
and AC operating load from AC load flow studies.

Loading Category
Loading Category
This section is used to assign a percent loading to each one of the ten loading categories for the loading of
this inverter, i.e., each inverter can be set to have a different operating loading level for each loading
Loading column. Note that you can select any of these loading categories when conducting AC load flow
studies.

To edit the loading category names, select Loading Category from the Project menu.

Operating Load
AC
This area displays the updated AC operating load of the inverter in kW/kvar or MW/Mvar when the
Update Operating Load is checked in the AC Load Flow Study Case Editor.
DC
This area displays the updated DC operating load of the inverter in kW or MW when Update Operating
Load is checked in the AC Load Flow Study Case Editor.

Duty Cycle
This section is used to specify load profile for each one of the five duty cycle categories
Duty Cycle Category
Load Profile





Within the Harmonic page, specify the harmonic source type of the inverter, and view the harmonic
source waveform and frequency spectrum of the inverter.

Use Library Data
Get the harmonic source data of the inverter from the Harmonic Library.
Calculate the harmonic source data based on the parameters of the inverter.
Voltage Regulation Parameters
Enter the parameters of the inverter for the calculation of the harmonic source data.
Harmonic Library
Library Button
Click on the Library button to pick up the inverter harmonic source data including harmonic source type,

Type
This area displays the inverter harmonic source type picked up from the Harmonic Library.
Manufacturer
This area displays the inverter device type picked up from the Harmonic Library.
Model
This area displays the inverter Manufacturer/model picked up from the Harmonic Library.
Waveform
This area displays the harmonic source waveform of the inverter.
Spectrum
This area displays the harmonic frequency spectrum of the inverter.
Print Buttons
Click on the Print buttons to print out the waveform or frequency spectrum of the inverter.



A
could be restored to service only after repair or replacement of the failed component.
P
Passive Failure Rate in number of failures per year. The Passive Failure Rate is associated with a
component failure mode that does not cause the operation of the primary protection zone around the failed
component, and therefore, does not have an impact on the remaining healthy components and branches of
the system. Repairing or replacing the failed component will restore service.

8760/MTTR).
FOR

A
(FOR =
MTTR/(MTTR+8760/
A
).
MTTF
A
(MTTF = 1.0/
A
).
MTTR

Alternative Supply
Switching Time
Replacement
Available
P
r
P

Library
Library

10.4.7 Remarks Page

User-Defined Info

UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchasing Date

10.4.8 Comment Page


ETAP

PowerStation
4.0
User Guide
Copyright 2001
All Rights Reserved





Southern California

(949) 462-0100 Sales
(949) 462-0400 Fax

Chapter 11

DC Elements

This chapter addresses editors for DC elements. Except for the elements ID, bus connections, and status,
all other data that appear in the editors are considered engineering properties.

Each element available on the One-Line Diagram Toolbar has a customized editor.
Bus
Branches
DC Cable
DC Impedance
DC Converter
Sources & Loads
Battery
DC Motor
DC Static Load
DC Lumped Load
DC Elementary Diagram
Composites
DC Composite Motor
Protective Devices
DC Circuit Breaker
DC Fuse
DC Switch, Single-Throw
DC Switch, Double-Throw
DC Elements DC Bus

11.1 DC Bus
The properties associated with DC buses (nodes) of the electrical system can be entered in this data
editor.

The DC Bus Editor helps to model different types of buses in an electrical system. The data entered in
the Bus Editor is used when running all types of system studies. DC Branches, batteries, converters,
motors, static loads, and DC sides of chargers, UPS, and inverters can be graphically connected to any
desired DC bus. From the Bus Editor, PowerStation displays all loads that are directly connected to the
bus. Note that protective devices are ignored when PowerStation determines the connections to buses.

A bus is defined as a point (node) where one or more branches are connected. A branch can be a cable,
impedance, converter, etc. The minimum amount of data required to define a bus is the bus nominal
voltage, which can be entered in the Info page of the DC Bus Editor.

Buses have two types of graphical presentation, i.e., Bus or Node. You can change a bus to a node or a
node to a bus at any time. This option gives you the flexibility to display the annotations of buses and
nodes differently.

The DC Bus Editor includes four pages of properties.

Info Page
Loading Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
11.1.1 Info Page
Within the Info page, specify the bus ID, In/Out of Service, Nominal kV, Initial/Operating Voltage
(Magnitude & Angle), Diversity Factors (Maximum & Minimum), FDR Tag, and Equipment Name and
Description.

DC Elements DC Bus

Info
ID
unique ID to each impedance branch element. The assigned IDs consist of the default ID dcZ plus an
integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of buses increases.

The default ID (dcBus) for the DC bus can be changed from the Defaults menu in the menu bar or from
the Project View by entering a new name with up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
Nominal V
Enter the nominal voltage of the bus in DC volts (V). This is a required input entry, which is used by
PowerStation to convert the final bus voltages to the percent values for graphical display and output
reports, i.e., bus Nominal V is used as the base voltage for the reported percent values.

Note that the nominal voltage and actual base voltage of a bus can be different values. PowerStation
calculates base voltages of buses internally.
In/Out of Service
The operating condition of a bus can be selected by choosing either the In Service or Out of Service
option. The properties of an Out of Service bus can be edited like an In Service bus; however, an Out of
Service bus will not be included in any system studies. When Continuity Check is activated, an Out of
Service bus automatically becomes dimmed in the one-line diagram. All the loads and branches that are
energized solely through an Out of Service bus will also be de-energized and become dimmed.
Initial Voltage
% V
Enter the initial bus voltage in percent of the bus nominal voltage. This value is used as the initial voltage
for load flow studies including short-circuit and battery sizing studies. For unregulated buses which do
not have any charger or UPS connected to them, the operating voltage is calculated during load flow
analysis using the value entered here as a first guess or initial value. For regulated buses, which have a
charger or UPS connected to them, this value is not used. Voltage defaults to 100%.

If you select the Update Bus Voltage option from the DC Load Flow Study Case Editor, this value
reflects the study result, i.e., it is updated with the operating voltage of the bus after you run a load flow
study.
Operating Voltage
After you run load flow studies, the operating voltage of the bus is displayed here. This value will not
change until you run a new load flow study, i.e., the operating voltage of the bus for the last load flow run
is displayed.
DC Elements DC Bus

Minimum & Maximum
The minimum and maximum diversity factors (loading limits) of each individual bus may be specified as
a percentage of the bus loading. These values are used when the Minimum or Maximum Loading option
is selected from the Study Case Editor for load flow studies. When the Minimum or Maximum Loading
option is used for a study, all loads directly connected to each bus will be multiplied by their diversity
factors.
Equipment
FDR Tag
Name
Description
11.1.2 Loading Page
The Loading page is used to display the total motor and static loads directly connected to a bus for each
loading category. The displayed kW indicate the algebraic sum of the operating load of all constant kVA
and constant Z loads, either directly connected to the bus, or through composite networks or composite
motors. These values are obtained from the actual loads connected to the bus.
DC Elements DC Bus

Total Bus Loading
Load Category
The Load Categories correspond to the individual load categories of the bus.
Constant KW
Total constant KW load (in kW) connected directly to the bus.
Constant R
Total constant resistance (impedance) load (in KW) connected directly to the bus.
11.1.3 Remarks Page
User-Defined Info
These fields allow you to keep track of additional data associated with this component. The names of the
User-Defined (UD) fields can be changed from the Settings option in the Project menu in the menu bar.

DC Elements DC Bus

UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchasing Date
DC Elements DC Bus

11.1.4 Comment Page
Enter any additional data or comments regarding condition, maintenance, tests, or studies, associated with
this element. This field can be up to 64kb with a default size of 4kb. To increase the size of this field,
refer to the entries in the ETAPS.INI file.

DC Elements DC Cable
11.2 DC Cable
The DC Cable Editor contains nine pages of properties.

Info Page
Impedance Page
Physical Page
Routing Page
Loading Page
Ampacity Page
Sizing Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
11.2.1 Info Page
Within the Info page, specify the cable ID, From and To bus ID, In/Out of Service, Length, Size, number
of conductors per phase, and library link.

Info
ID
unique ID to each cable. The assigned IDs consist of the default ID plus an integer, starting with the
number one and increasing as the number of cables increases.

The default ID (Cable) for cables can be changed from the Defaults menu in the menu bar or from the
Project View.
From and To
Bus IDs for the connecting buses of a cable branch are designated as From and To buses. If a terminal of
a branch (From or To) is not connected to any bus, a blank entry will be shown for bus ID. To connect or
reconnect a branch to a bus, select a bus from the list box. The one-line diagram will be updated to show
the new connection after you click on OK. Note that you can connect the terminals of the cable to DC
buses that reside in the same view where the element resides or can connect to buses that reside in other
views by connecting the external and internal pins of the composite networks. You cannot connect to a
bus that resides in the Dumpster.

where Branch X is reconnected from DCBus10 to DCBus4.

Next to the From and To bus IDs, PowerStation displays the nominal V of the buses for your
convenience.
In/Out of Service
The operating conditions of a cable can be selected by choosing either the In Service or Out of Service
option. The properties of an Out of Service cable can be edited like an In Service cable; however, an Out
of Service cable will not be included in any system studies. When Continuity Check is activated, an Out
of Service cable automatically becomes dimmed in the one-line diagram. All the loads and branches
energized solely through an Out of Service cable will also be de-energized and become dimmed.

Note: the In/Out of Service option is an engineering property and is independent of the configuration
status. Therefore, you can set a branch to be In Service for the Base Data and Out of Service in the
Revision Data.
Connection
In this section, the connection type is displayed. It has been added for future use. Currently it displays
DC for all DC Cables.
Library

To select cables from the Cable Library, click on the Library button and the Cable Library Quick Pick
will appear. From the Library Quick Pick select the Cable Library type and size at the same time. Note:
after the selected Cable Library type, size, and parameters are transferred to the Cable Editor, the cable
size can be changed directly from the Cable Editor, and the cable parameters are refreshed from the
library. Therefore, the most important action is to select the correct Cable Library type from the Cable
Library Quick Pick. When data are transferred from the Cable Library, PowerStation automatically
converts the cable reactance to inductance.
Equipment
FDR Tag
Name
Description
Units
Length
Enter the length of the cable and select the unit from the list box. The units of length available are: feet,
miles, meters, and kilometers. Note that every cable in the system can have a different unit.
# Per Phase
Enter the number of conductors per phase, i.e. if 2-2/C cables or 4-1/C cables are used (4 conductors
total), then the number of conductors per phase is equal to two (2).

Impedance (per Conductor)
R
Enter the cable resistance at the base temperature, in ohms or ohms per unit length, per conductor. This is
for each cable, not the total resistance. PowerStation corrects the cable resistance for different studies
based on the specified temperature limits, using the maximum temperature for DC load flow studies and
minimum temperature for DC short-circuit studies.
L
Enter the cable inductances, in henries or henries per unit length, per conductor. This is for each cable,
not the total inductance. When cable data is recalled (substituted) from cable libraries, PowerStation
automatically converts reactance to inductance based on library frequency. After this value is entered
here, PowerStation will not make any adjustment to this value.
Units
Z per
When you select Z per option, the cable impedance units are: R in ohms per unit length, and L is in
henries per unit length. A unit length should also be specified, including a unit from the list box. Units
available are: feet, miles, meters, and kilometers.
Z
When you select Z option, the cable impedance units are: R in ohms and L in henries.
Cable Temperature
Base
Enter the conductor base temperature (in degrees Celsius) at which the cable resistance is entered.
Two conductor temperature limits (in degrees Celsius) may be entered for adjusting the cable resistance
(R) for different studies. The first limit is the minimum operating temperature; the second limit is the
maximum operating temperature. PowerStation will use the most conservative temperature limit for each
study type. For example:

Temperature Limit
Min. Max.
Load Flow X
Short-Circuit X



where:
Tb = Base temperature in degrees Celsius
Tc = Operating temperature in degrees Celsius
11.2.3 Physical Page

Dimensions
The physical properties of cables entered in this page are used only for calculating engineering data
needed for cable temperature calculation (ampacity derating studies, U/G Raceway Systems). These
parameters are not used for load flow or short-circuit type studies.
Rdc
DC resistance of the cable in micro ohms at 25 degrees Celsius.
Cable OD
Overall cable outside diameter including the sheath/armor and/or jacket in inches or centimeters.
Conductor OD
Physical outside diameter of the conductor in inches or centimeters.
Insulation t
Thickness of conductor insulation in mil or mm.
Sheath t
Thickness of cable sheath or armor in mil or mm. This value becomes zero if the Sheath/Armor option is
set to None.
Jacket t
Thickness of outer cable jacket in mil or mm.

Conductor Construction
Conductor construction is used for determining ks and kp parameters, which are used for calculating the
AC to DC resistance ratio. For DC cables, this ration is not used for temperature calculations. Several
available choices of conductor construction are:


Shielding
Choose shielded or not shielded.
Sheath/Shield End Connection
Choose either the open or grounded option. The grounded option implies that the sheath and shield are
grounded at more than one location.
Sheath/Armor
Several choices of sheath/armor type are available.
Jacket Type
Several choices of jacket type are available.
11.2.4 Routing Page
The Routing page provides lists of routed raceways and available raceways. For both the routed and
available raceways, the cable ID and raceway type are shown.

This is a list of raceways through which this cable is routed. When you add a raceway to this list (by
using the Insert or Add buttons), the cable is placed in a container attached to the raceway without being
placed in any specific conduit or location.

When you bring up the graphical editor for the underground systems, you will see the cables in a
container of cables assigned to this raceway, but are not assigned to a specific conduit. This container is
attached to the raceway and will disappear when it is empty. You will need to graphically move the cable
from the unassigned cable container to the desired location.

This is a list of all existing available raceways in this project, i.e., raceways that this cable can be routed
through. Note that since you cannot route a cable twice through a raceway, this list does not include the
raceways listed under Routed Raceways.


Insert: Route this cable through the selected raceway from the available raceway list, i.e., insert the
selected raceway into the list of routed raceways.

Add: Route this cable through the selected raceway from the available raceway list, i.e., add the selected
raceway to the list of routed raceways.

Unroute: Unroutes this cable from the selected raceway.
11.2.5 Loading Page
The Loading page provides information regarding cable loading (amp) and other parameters, which are
used in cable ampacity derating calculations (Underground Raceway System).

Transient Load Profile
The load profile provides up to 20 time and current entry fields for specifying the loading pattern of the
cable as a function of time.

# Time Current
1 0.0 230
2 3.5 560
3 7.3 400
4 0.0 0.0
(all data from this point are ignored
since time = 0.0 )

In this example, the cable loading is changed from the steady-state (initial value) to 230 amps at time
zero, to 560 amps at time 3.5 hours, and finally to 400 amps after 7.3 hours. The steady-state or initial
value can either be 230 amps (value entered at the first time slot) or it can be set equal to the cable
operating load. You can set the option for the initial/steady-state value from the Cable Derating Study
Case Editor.
Time Units
Select the time units for the load profile.

Operating Load
The operating load is specified in amps. This value is used for steady-state temperature calculations or as
the initial value of the cable load profile for transient temperature calculations.
Load Variation
Load Factor
The load factor is the ratio of average load to peak load in percent. Use the following equation to
calculate the load factor:

Load Factor = 100 x ( kWi x Ti ) / ( kWp x Tt ) %
= 100 x E / ( kWi x Tt ) %

where i = Interval of time when the load is non-zero
kWi = Load at interval i
Ti = Number of hours of interval i
kWp = Peak load
Tt = Ton + Toff
Ton = Total hours when the load is on
Toff = Total hours when the load is off
E = Energy (kWh) consumed by load over the interval

If the cable carries load (current) at every interval, then the equation can be simplified to the percentage
of time that the cable will be carrying the current:

Load Factor = 100 x Ton / Tt %
= 100 % ( if it carries the load for 24 hours per day )
Projection MF
The Projection Multiplying Factor (MF) must be specified in percent. This value is used to indicate
future load projection load reduction or growth. From the Cable Ampacity Derating Study Case Editor,
you can select the option to use the projection multiplying factor for cable temperature calculations.
Sheath/Armor
Current
The sheath/armor current can be specified as a percent of cable load current. This value indicates the
amount of neutral or ground current that is carried by sheath or armor.
UGS Ampacity Calc Options
Fixed Current
Check this box to have the current of this cable fixed for ampacity optimization/calculation in U/G
Raceway Systems, i.e., ampacity calculations for both Uniform Ampacity & Uniform Temperature
conditions.
Fixed Size
Check this box to keep the size of this cable fixed for cable sizing calculations in U/G Raceway System.
11.2.6 Ampacity Page

Installation
Type

U/G Duct Bank
U/G Direct Buried
A/G Tray
A/G Conduit
Air Drop

U/G Duct
RHO
The thermal resistivity of the soil in degrees Celsius centimeters per Watt.
Ta

Tc
ampacity is obtained from the library. This value is usually given at 90 degrees Celsius.
Grouping
factor.

U/G Buried
RHO
The thermal resistivity of the soil is in degrees Celsius centimeters per Watt
Ta
Ambient temperature is in degrees Celsius, i.e., the temperature of the surrounding soil, where the cable is
Tc
Grouping
A/G Trays
Above ground cable trays. The free air base ampacity from the libraries is used for cables installed in
trays.
Ta
Tc
ampacity is obtained from the library. This value is usually given at 90 degrees Celsius.

Tray Specification
NEC
the cumulative effects of combinations of tray covers and fire proofing. In general, cable sizes of 2/0
AWG and smaller are installed in cable trays in a randomly filled manner, with a maximum of two cables
high.

Base ampacity of randomly filled trays are based on installations at a uniform depth up to the maximum
of 30% fill for 3 or 4-inch tray depths. The method applied here corresponds to a maximum fill condition
and does not consider fill conditions exceeding the nominal depths.
ICEA
If chosen, an ICEA P-54-440 method of calculating derating factors for cable trays will be used. The
actual values of tray depth, width, and % fill entries will be taken into account.
Top Cover
Bottom Cover
than 6 feet.
Maintained Spacing
If cable spacing is maintained within the tray, then the effects of top cover, bottom cover, and fire wrap
of 1/4 of the overall effective diameter of the grouped circuit.
Cumulative Effect
cable trays.
Grouping
with a maximum of two cables high. Base ampacity of randomly filled trays is based on installations at a
uniform depth up to the maximum of 30% fill for 3 or 4-inch tray depths. The method applied here

Height Height of cable tray specified in inches or centimeters
Fire Protection
specifications selected from the PowerStation library. The ampacity correction factors applied for fire
protection are based on 10 CFR 50, Appendix R for Fire Wrap, Fire Stop, and Fire Coating.
Fire Coating
can be installed in the tray; credit may be taken for reduction in cable % fill below nominal value.

Fire Stop
trays routed through fire stops.
Fire Wrap
A/G Conduit
Ta
Ambient air (atmospheric) temperature is in degrees Celsius. This is temperature of the air surrounding
the area where the tray is to be installed. Ambient air temperature for the base ampacity is obtained from
the library. The value is usually specified at 40 degrees Celsius.
Tc
Ampacity Adjustment
NEC w/o Grouping Effect (No Grouping Effect)
check box is not selected, the grouping effects of number of rows and columns will be considered.
NEC w/50% Load Diversity and NEC w/o Load Diversity
Grouping


4 through 6 80 %
7 through 9 70 %
10 through 24 70 %
25 through 42 60 %
43 and above 50 %


4 through 6 80 %
7 through 9 70 %
10 through 20 50 %
21 through 30 45 %
31 through 40 40 %
41 through 60 35 %
Fire Protection
Fire protection provides optional libraries from which to choose various fire protection methods. Each of
the three libraries can be selected individually to best describe the fire protection associated with the
conduit. The fire protection data is used to further derate the cable ampacities based on the fire protection
material specifications selected from the PowerStation library. The ampacity correction factors applied
for fire protection are based on 10 CFR 50, Appendix R for Fire Wrap, Fire Stop, and Fire Coating.
Fire Coating
The Fire Coating Library provides a selection of configurations from which to choose. Each
configuration has an ampacity correction factor (ACF) associated with it, which is applied against the
base ampacity. Fire retardant coating is not a standard procedure for A/G conduits.
Fire Stop
fire stops are constructed with an expanded foam depth of 4 inches or less. This is considered to be
Fire Wrap
Air Drop
Cables suspended without the use of trays or conduits. No cable grouping for airdrop cables is
considered.
Ta
Ambient air (atmospheric) temperature. This is temperature of the air surrounding the area where the tray
is to be installed in degrees Celsius. Ambient air temperature for the base ampacity is 40 degrees Celsius.
Tc
Fire Protection
Fire Protection provides optional libraries from which to choose various fire protection devices. Each of
the three libraries can be selected individually to best describe the fire protection associated with the
airdrop cables. The fire protection data is used to further derate the cable based on the fire protection
protection are based on 10 CFR 50, Appendix R for Fire Wrap, Fire Stop, and Fire Coating.
Fire Coating
Fire Stop
Fire Wrap
App MF
The Multiplication Factor (MF) is determined by the application type selected from the drop-down list.
You can modify the values of Application MF by selecting Project, Settings, and Cable Ampacity MF
from the menu bar. Application MF is used to calculate the required cable ampacity (MF times operating
or full load current).
Ampacity
Ampacity ratings are displayed for easy comparison of base, derated, and required (I x MF) ampacities.
The method used here is based on the concept of a derating factor that is applied against a base ampacity
to calculate the derated ampacity.

Id = F Ib
Base Ampacity (Ib)

Allowable
I x MF
and the application multiplication factor (App. MF) for the specified application type. This value is
results in no reduction of the cables expected lifetime. The overall derating factor is composed of several
components, as listed below:

11.2.7 Sizing Page

Requirements
You can select one or both requirements for determining the recommended size of cable.
Ampacity
If ampacity is selected as one of the requirements, sizing will be based on the cable installation and
ambient conditions specified in the Ampacity page.
Vd
If you select Vd, PowerStation will size the cable based on the percent voltage drop value you enter here.
Voltage drop is in percent of the nominal kV of the bus connected to the cable. If the nominal voltages of
the From bus and To bus are different, the nominal V of the From bus is selected. The following table
shows the methods used for calculating the voltage drop for different types of load currents flowing
through the cable:

Load Type Calculation Method
Motor Constant Power
Static Load Constant Impedance
Bus Constant Current
Circuit Breaker Constant Current
Fuse Constant Current
Result
Using the selected cable type from the library, PowerStation recommends an optimal cable size along
with the number of conductors per phase that meets the specified requirements. Additionally,
PowerStation provides one cable size smaller than the optimal size for your selection. Note that the
required ampacity and percent voltage drop are displayed for your reference.

Cable Loading
Operating Current
The operating load current specified for this cable in the Loading page will be used if this option is
selected.
Full Load Amps of Element
The continuous current rating (rated current or FLA) of the selected element will be used for sizing
requirements. For motor equipment cables, the motor ID is displayed here and the FLA of the motor is
used.
Other
Use this option to enter any value for the cable current.
Options
Use Available Cable Sizes Only
Use only cable sizes that are flagged as Available in the Cable Library for the specified cable type (cable
library header).
Use All Cable Sizes From Library
Use all cable sizes that exist in the Cable Library for the specified cable type (cable library header).
Use Load Projection Multiplying Factor
If you select this option, the cable load current will be multiplied by the Projection Multiplying Factor as
specified for this cable in the Loading page.
Use Application Multiplying Factor (Equipment Cables)
If you select this option, the cable load current will be multiplied by the Application Multiplying Factor
(AMF) as specified for the motor or static load in the Cable/Vd page of the equipment.
Use Motor Service Factor (Motor Equipment Cables)
If you select this option, the cable load current will be multiplied by the motor Service Factor (SF) as
specified for the motor in the Nameplate page.
11.2.8 Remarks Page

User-Defined Info
UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchasing Date
11.2.9 Comment Page


DC Elements DC Impedance

11.3 DC Impedance
The DC Impedance Editor has three pages of information.

Info Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
11.3.1 Info Page
Within the Info page, specify the cable ID, From and To bus ID, In/Out of Service, Equipment Name and
Description, and Impedance value including resistance and inductance.

Info
ID
unique ID to each impedance branch element. The assigned IDs consist of the default ID dcZ plus an
integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of impedances increases.
The default ID (dcZ) for the DC impedance can be changed from the Defaults menu in the menu bar or
In/Out of Service
Operating conditions of an impedance branch can be selected by choosing either the In Service or Out of
Service option. The properties of an Out of Service impedance can be edited like an In Service branch;
however, an Out of Service impedance will not be included in any system studies. When Continuity
Check is activated, an Out of Service branch automatically becomes dimmed in the one-line diagram. All
the loads and branches energized solely through an Out of Service impedance will also be de-energized
and become dimmed.

status. Therefore, you can set an impedance to be In Service for the Base Data and Out of Service in
Revision Data.
From and To
Bus IDs for the connecting buses of an impedance branch are designated as From and To buses. If a
terminal of an impedance, From or To, is not connected to any bus, a blank entry will be shown for bus
ID. To connect or reconnect an impedance to a bus, select a bus from the list box. The one-line diagram
will be updated to show the new connection after you click on OK. Note that you can connect the
terminals of the impedance to DC buses that reside in the same view where the it resides or can connect to
buses that reside in other views by connecting the external and internal pins of the composite networks.
You cannot connect to a bus that resides in the Dumpster.

If an impedance is connected to a bus through a number of protective devices, reconnection of the
impedance to a new bus from the editor will reconnect the last existing protective device to the new bus,
as shown here where DCImp1 is reconnected from DCBus10 to DCBus4.

convenience.
Equipment
FDR Tag
Name
Description
Impedance
Enter impedance R & L in ohms and henries.

11.3.2 Remarks Page

User-Defined Info

UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchasing Date

11.3.3 Comment Page



DC Elements DC Converter

11.4 DC Converter
The properties associated with DC converters of the electrical system can be entered in this editor. The
DC converter metafiles (ANSI & IEC) are shaped to distinguish the DC input side and the DC output
side.

The DC Converter Editor contains four pages of information.

Info Page
Rating Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page

11.4.1 Info Page
Within the Info page, specify the DC converter ID, Input and Output bus IDs, In/Out of Service, FDR
Tag, Name, Description, Data Type, and Priority.

Info
ID
unique ID to each DC converter. The assigned IDs consist of the default ID plus an integer, starting with
the number one and increasing as the number of DC converters increases.

The default ID (dcConv) for DC converters can be changed from the Defaults menu in the menu bar or
Input Bus and Output Bus
Bus IDs for the connecting buses of a DC converter are designated as Input and Output buses. If the
input or output terminal of a DC converter is not connected to any bus, a blank entry will be shown for
bus ID. To connect or reconnect a DC converter to a bus, select a bus from the list box. The one-line
diagram will be updated to show the new connection after you click on OK. Note that you can connect
the terminals of the converter to DC buses that reside in the same view where the it resides or can connect
to buses that reside in other views by connecting the external and internal pins of the composite networks.
You cannot connect to a bus that resides in the Dumpster.

If a DC converter is connected to a bus through a number of protective devices, reconnection of the DC
converter to a new bus from the editor will reconnect the last existing protective device to the new bus, as
shown below where dcConv1 is reconnected from dcBus10 to dcBus4.

In/Out of Service
Operating conditions of a DC converter can be selected by choosing either the In Service or Out of
Service option. The properties of an Out of Service DC converter can be edited like an In Service DC
converter; however, an Out of Service DC converter will not be included in any system studies. When
Continuity Check is activated, an Out of Service DC converter automatically becomes dimmed in the one-
line diagram. All the loads and branches energized solely through an Out of Service DC converter will
also be de-energized and become dimmed.

status. Therefore, you can set a converter to be In Service for the Base Data and Out of Service in
Revision Data.
Equipment
FDR Tag
Name

Description
Data Type
Priority
Select the load priority of this DC converter from the list box. This field can be used for load priority,
Priorities can be changed from the Project menu under Settings and Load Priority.
11.4.2 Rating Page

Rating
kW / MW
Enter the rated output power of the DC converter in kW or MW. Choose from the two options by
clicking on the kW/MW button.
%Eff
Enter the rated efficiency of the DC converter in percent. Efficiency cannot exceed 100%. The
efficiency is the rated efficiency and is used for calculating the rated values, i.e., when you change the
efficiency, the converter input full load current is recalculated.

Input
V
Enter the rated input voltage of the DC converter in DC volts.
FLA
The rated input full load current of the DC converter is calculated and displayed here in amperes. When
you modify the input FLA, the converter efficiency is recalculated.
Output
V
Enter the rated output voltage of the DC converter in DC volts.
FLA
The rated output full load current of the DC converter is calculated and displayed here in amperes. When
you modify FLA, the rated kW of the DC converter is changed.
Imax
Enter the maximum output current of the DC converter in percentage of the output full load current. The
DC converter will become constant current source when the output load current exceeds the Imax in DC
load flow studies. PowerStation will use Imax as the maximum constant current output value. Imax
defaults to 150%. This value is also used to determine the DC short-circuit contribution of the converter
(Imax = k).
Operating Parameters
Vout
Enter the regulated voltage setting of the DC converter output terminal as a percentage of the rated output
voltage of the converter. This % operating voltage is used as the control (regulated) value in DC load
flow studies. The DC converter will become idle if the output bus voltage is higher than the converter
regulated voltage (Vregulated times output rated voltage) in DC load flow studies. Vout defaults to
100%.
SC Contribution
K
Displays the short-circuit multiplication factor in percent of the output FLA. PowerStation uses this value
to calculate short-circuit current contribution from the converter in DC short-circuit studies. The
Isc (K*FLA out)
The short-circuit current contribution from the DC converter is calculated and displayed here in amperes.

11.4.3 Remarks Page

User-Defined Info

UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchasing Date

11.4.4 Comment Page



DC Elements Battery

11.5 Battery
The properties associated with batteries of the electrical system can be entered in this editor.

The Battery Editor contains five pages of information.

Info Page
Rating Page
SC Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
11.5.1 Info Page
Within the Info page, specify the battery ID, connected bus ID, In/Out of Service, Equipment FDR Tag,
Name, Description, Data Type, Priority, and number of Strings.

DC Elements Battery

Info
ID
unique ID to each battery. The assigned IDs consist of the default ID plus an integer, starting with the
number one and increasing as the number of batteries increases. The default ID (Battery) for batteries can
be changed from the Defaults menu in the menu bar or from the Project View.
Bus
This is the ID of the connecting DC bus for the battery. If the terminal is not connected to any bus, a
blank entry will be shown for the bus ID. To connect or reconnect a battery to a bus, select a bus from the
that you can connect the terminal of the battery to DC buses that reside in the same view where the it
resides or can connect to buses that reside in other views by connecting the external and internal pins of
the composite networks. You cannot connect to a bus that resides in the Dumpster.

If a battery is connected to a bus through a number of protective devices, reconnection of the battery to a
new bus from the editor will reconnect the last existing protective device to the new bus, as shown below,
where Battery1 is reconnected from DCBus10 to DCBus4.

In/Out of Service
Operating conditions of a battery can be selected by choosing either the In Service or Out of Service
option. The properties of an Out of Service battery can be edited like an In Service battery; however, an
Out of Service battery will not be included in any system studies. When Continuity Check is activated,
an Out of Service battery automatically becomes dimmed in the one-line diagram. All the loads and
branches energized solely through an Out of Service battery will also be de-energized and become
dimmed.

status. Therefore, you can set a battery to be In Service for the Base Data and Out of Service in Revision
Data.
Equipment
FDR Tag
Name
DC Elements Battery

Description
Data Type
the source of the latest data. There are a total of ten data types and you can change their name from the
Priority
Select the load priority of this battery from the list box. This field can be used for load priority, operating
priority, load shedding priority, etc. Ten different priorities are provided to select from list and you can
change their name from the Project menu under Settings and Load Priority.
Quantity
# of Strings
Enter the number of the battery strings. The number of strings defaults to 1.
11.5.2 Rating Page
Within the Rating page, you can view battery specification (from the Battery Library) and specify the
number of battery cells and battery temperature. This page displays the calculated battery rated voltage in
V and total capacity in AH (Ampere Hour).

DC Elements Battery

Rating
# of Cell
Enter the number of battery cells.
Rated Voc
The battery rated voltage (Open Circuit Voltage) is calculated and displayed here in volts.
Total Capacity
The battery total capacity is calculated and displayed here in AH (Ampere Hour).
Library
Click on this button to associate a battery library with this project.
Temp
Max and Min
Two battery temperature limits (in degrees Celsius) may be entered to adjust the voltage source value in
short-circuit studies and correction factor in battery sizing studies. The first limit is the minimum
operating temperature; the second limit is the maximum operating temperature. PowerStation will use the
most conservative temperature limit for each study type. For example:

Temperature Limit
Min Max
Short-Circuit X
Battery Sizing X
11.5.3 SC Page
Within the SC page, select the battery short-circuit model and open-circuit voltage source value, specify
battery external impedance and grounding data, and view battery data from the Battery Library.

DC Elements Battery

Short-Circuit Model
Voc Behind Battery Z
When you select the Voc Behind Battery Z option, the battery is treated as a constant voltage source
behind the battery resistance in DC short-circuit studies.
Constant Current
When you select the Constant Current option, the battery is treated as an ideal current source in DC
short-circuit studies. A constant current source means that the battery short-circuit contribution is
constant regardless of the distance of the fault to the battery.
K
constant current source value in DC short-circuit studies. The multiplication factor defaults to 1000%.
Isc
The constant current short-circuit value of the battery is calculated and displayed here in amperes.
External Impedance
R
Enter the total battery cable and connection resistance in ohms per string.
L
Enter the total battery cable and connection inductance in micro henries per string.
Voc per Cell
Rated Voc (Library)
When you select the Rated V model, the battery rated voltage per cell is used as battery open-circuit
voltage value per cell.
Calculated Value
When you select the Calculated Value model, battery open-circuit voltage per cell is calculated based on
the following formula:

Voc = (0.84 + SG) + (Tmin 25) * 0.0003

Where SG is the specific gravity of the battery and Tmin is the minimum operating temperature specified
in the Rating page.
Voc
The calculated battery open-circuit voltage per cell is displayed here in volts.
Grounding
Grounded
Click on the Grounded check box for the battery to be grounded.
DC Elements Battery

Rg
Enter the battery grounding resistance in ohms. This value represents the total grounding resistance of
this battery system including the cables and connections.
11.5.4 Remarks Page

User-Defined Info
DC Elements Battery

UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchasing Date
DC Elements Battery

11.5.5 Comment Page



DC Elements DC Motor

11.6 DC Motor
The properties associated with DC motors of the electrical distribution system can be entered in this
editor.

The DC Motor Editor contains six pages of information.

Info Page
Rating Page
SC Page
Duty Cycle Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page

11.6.1 Info Page
Within the Info page, specify the DC motor ID, connected bus ID, In/Out of Service, Equipment FDR
(feeder) Tag, Name, Description, Data Type, load Priority, Configuration Status, Quantity of DC motors,
and Demand Factor.


Info
ID
unique ID to each motor. The assigned IDs consist of the default ID plus an integer, starting with the
number one and increasing as the number of motors increases.

The default ID (dcMach) for DC motors can be changed from the Defaults menu in the menu bar or from
the Project View.
Bus
This is the ID of the connecting bus for the DC motor. If the terminal is not connected to any bus, a blank
entry will be shown for the bus ID. To connect or reconnect a DC motor to a bus, select a bus from the
that you can connect the terminal of the motor to DC buses that reside in the same view where the it
resides or can connect to buses that reside in other views by connecting the external and internal pins of
the composite networks. You cannot connect to a bus that resides in the Dumpster.

If a DC motor is connected to a bus through a number of protective devices, reconnection of the DC
motor to a new bus in this editor will reconnect the last existing protective device to the new bus, as
shown below where DCMach1 is reconnected from DCBus10 to DCBus4.

In/Out of Service
Operating conditions of a DC motor can be selected by choosing either the In Service or Out of Service
option. The properties of an Out of Service DC motor can be edited like an In Service DC motor;
however, an Out of Service DC motor will not be included in any system studies. When Continuity
Check is activated, an Out of Service DC motor automatically becomes dimmed in the one-line diagram.

status. Therefore, you can set a branch to be In Service for the Base Data and Out of Service in Revision
Data.

Configuration
Select the operating status of the DC motor(s) for the selected configuration status from the list box.


determined for load flow studies.

Note that status is not a part of the motor engineering properties. For this reason, the name of the
configuration status is shown, indicating the motor status under the specific configuration, i.e., you can
have a different operating status under each configuration. In the following example, status of a motor is

Equipment
FDR Tag
Name
Description
Data Type
Priority
Select the load priority of this motor from the list box. This field can be used for load priority, operating

Quantity
Enter the quantity (number) of DC motors for this motor. This allows you to group identical motors
Demand Factor
Demand factor is the amount of time the DC motor is actually operating. Demand factor affects the


configurations.
Rating Page
In this page, you can specify the motor nameplate data (ratings) and view motor loading and losses for all
loading categories.


Rating
HP/kW
Enter the motor output (shaft) rating in horsepower (HP) or kW. You can choose from these two options
by clicking on the HP/kW button. PowerStation uses the following equation for the DC motor full load
current:

Full-Load Amp = HP * 0.7457 *1000/ ( V* Eff ) Rating in HP
= kW *1000/ ( V* Eff ) Rating in kW

where the Eff is at full load condition (100% loading).
V
Enter the rated voltage of the motor in volts.
RPM
Enter the motor speed in RPM (Revolutions Per Minute).
% Eff
This is the efficiency of the motor. Efficiency cannot exceed 100%. The efficiency is the rated efficiency
and is used for calculating the rated values, i.e., when you change the efficiency, the motor full load
current and the operating load for all loading categories are recalculated.
FLA
This is the rated full load current of the motor in amperes. This is the current the motor would pull from
the system when it is fully loaded, i.e., when the system is operating at the rated HP (or kW), rated V, and
rated efficiency.
Loading
This section is used to assign a percent loading to each one of the ten loading categories for this motor,
the values of the percent loading, click on any one of the edit fields under the % Loading column. Note
that you can select any of these loading categories when conducting DC load flow studies.


11.6.3 SC Page
Within the SC page, specify the multiplication factor, impedance and time constant associated with short-
circuit studies.

SC Parameters
K
Enter the short-circuit multiplication factor in percent of the motor FLA. PowerStation uses this value to
calculate the short-circuit current of the DC motor for a terminal bus fault. When you change the
multiplication factor, the resistance, inductance, and short-circuit contribution are recalculated. The
Isc
The short-circuit current (Isc(K*FLA) contribution of the DC motor for a terminal bus fault is calculated
and displayed here in amperes.
Ra
Enter the resistance of the DC motor short-circuit impedance in ohms. When you change the resistance
value, the inductance, multiplication factor and short-circuit contribution are recalculated.
La
Enter the inductance of the DC motor short-circuit impedance in henries. When you change the
inductance value, the time constant is recalculated.
Time Constant
Enter the time constant of the DC motor. When you change the time constant value, the inductance is
recalculated.


Duty Cycle
This section is used to specify load profile to each one of the five duty cycle categories.
Duty Cycle Category
Load Profile
To add a load to the load profile,, click on either the Ins or Add button, or press the Insert key to create a


or press the Delete key. Click on either the <-Print or Print-> button, and the displayed load profile
curve (random and non-random loads) for the selected duty cycle will be printed out.


11.6.5 Remarks Page

User-Defined Info

UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchasing Date

11.6.6 Comment Page


DC Elements DC Static Load

11.7 DC Static Load
The properties associated with DC static loads of the electrical system can be entered in this editor.

The DC Static Load Editor contains five pages of information.

Info Page
Rating Page
Duty Cycle Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page

11.7.1 Info Page
Within the Info page, specify the ID, connected bus, In/Out of Service, Equipment FDR (feeder) Tag,
Name, Description, Data Type, Load Priority, Configuration Status, Quantity, and Demand Factors for
DC static loads.

Info
ID
unique ID to each DC static load. The assigned IDs consist of the default ID plus an integer, starting with
the number one and increasing as the number of DC static loads increases.

The default ID (dcLoad) for DC Static Loads can be changed from the Defaults menu in the menu bar or

Bus
This is the ID of the connecting bus for the DC static load. If the terminal is not connected to any bus, a
blank entry will be shown for the bus ID. To connect or reconnect a DC static load to a bus, select a bus
OK. Note that you can connect the terminal of the load to DC buses that reside in the same view where
the it resides or can connect to buses that reside in other views by connecting the external and internal
pins of the composite networks. You cannot connect to a bus that resides in the Dumpster.

If a DC static load is connected to a bus through a number of protective devices, reconnection of the DC
static load to a new bus in this editor will reconnect the last existing protective device to the new bus, as
shown below where DCStLoad1 is reconnected from DCBus10 to DCBus4.

In/Out of Service
Operating conditions of a DC static load can be selected by choosing either the In Service or Out of
Service option. The properties of an Out of Service DC static load can be edited like an In Service DC
static load; however, an Out of Service DC static load will not be included in any system studies. When
Continuity Check is activated, an Out of Service DC static load automatically becomes dimmed in the
one-line diagram.

Data.
Configuration
Select the operating status of the DC static load(s) for the selected configuration status from the list box.


Depending on the demand factor specified for each operating status, the actual loading of the DC static
load is determined for load flow studies.

Note that status is not a part of the DC static load engineering properties. For this reason, the name of the
configuration status is shown, indicating the DC static load status under the specific configuration, i.e.,
you can have a different operating status under each configuration. In the following example, status of a
DC static load is shown to be Continuous under Normal configuration and Spare under Emergency
configuration.

Equipment
FDR Tag
Name
Description
Data Type
Priority
Select the load priority of this DC static load from the list box. This field can be used for load priority,
Quantity
Enter the quantity (number) of DC static loads. This allows you to group identical DC static loads
Demand Factor
Demand factor is the amount of time the DC static load is actually operating. Demand factor affects the


configurations.

11.7.2 Rating Page
In this page, you can specify the DC static load ratings, view loading, and losses for all loading
categories.

Rating
kW
Enter the kW rating of the static load. Click on the kW/MW button to choose either kW or MW units for
entering and displaying data. PowerStation uses the following equation for the DC static load full load
current:

Full Load Amp = kW*1000 / V Rating in kW
= MW *1000000 / V Rating in MW
V
Enter the rated voltage of the DC static load in volts.
FLA
The DC static load full load current is calculated and displayed here. When the full load current is
changed, the rated power of the DC static load is recalculated.
Loading
This section is used to assign a percent loading to each one of the ten loading categories for this DC static
load, i.e., each DC static load can be set to have a different operating loading level for each loading
Loading column. Note that you can select any of these loading categories when conducting studies.



Duty Cycle
This section is used to specify load profile to each one of the five duty cycle categories
Duty Cycle Category
Load Profile




11.7.4 Remarks Page

User-Defined Info

UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchasing Date

11.7.5 Comment Page


DC Elements DC Lumped Load

11.8 DC Lumped Load
The properties associated with DC lumped loads of the electrical system can be entered in this editor.

The DC Lumped Load Editor contains six pages of information.

Info Page
Rating Page
SC Page
Duty Cycle Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page

11.8.1 Info Page
Within the Info page, specify the ID, connected bus, In/Out of Service, Equipment FDR (feeder), Tag,
Name, Description, Data Type, Load Priority, Configuration Status, as well as the Quantity and Demand
Factors of DC lumped loads.

Info
ID
unique ID to each DC lumped load. The assigned IDs consist of the default ID plus an integer, starting
with the number one and increasing as the number of DC lumped loads increases.

The default ID (dcLump) for DC lumped loads can be changed from the Defaults menu in the menu bar
or from the Project View.

Bus
This is the ID of the connecting bus for the DC lumped load. If the terminal is not connected to any bus,
a blank entry will be shown for the bus ID. To connect or reconnect a DC lumped load to a bus; select a
bus from the list box. The one-line diagram will be updated to show the new connection after you click
on OK. Note that you can connect the terminal of the lump load to DC buses that reside in the same view
where the it resides or can connect to buses that reside in other views by connecting the external and
internal pins of the composite networks. You cannot connect to a bus that resides in the Dumpster.

If a DC lumped load is connected to a bus through a number of protective devices, reconnection of the
DC lumped load to a new bus in this editor will reconnect the last existing protective device to the new
bus, as shown below where DCLump1 is reconnected from DCBus10 to DCBus4.

Next to the bus ID, PowerStation displays the nominal V of the bus for your convenience.
In/Out of Service
Operating conditions of a DC lumped load can be selected by choosing either the In Service or Out of
Service option. The properties of an Out of Service DC lumped load can be edited like an In Service DC
lumped load; however, an Out of Service DC lumped load will not be included in any system studies.
When Continuity Check is activated, an Out of Service DC lumped load automatically becomes dimmed
in the one-line diagram.

Data.
Configuration
Select the operating status of the DC lumped load(s) for the selected configuration status from the list
box. Options for operating status include:


Depending on the demand factor specified for each operating status, the actual loading of the DC lumped
load is determined for load flow studies.


Note that status is not a part of the DC lumped load engineering properties. For this reason, the name of
the configuration status is shown, indicating the DC lumped load status under the specific configuration,
i.e., you can have a different operating status under each configuration. In the following example, status
of a DC lumped load is shown to be Continuous under Normal configuration and Spare under Emergency
configuration.

Equipment
FDR Tag
Name
Description
Data Type
Priority
Select the load priority of this DC lumped load from the list box. This field can be used for load priority,
Demand Factor
Demand factor is the amount of time the DC lumped load is actually operating. Demand factor affects the


configurations.

11.8.2 Rating Page
In this page, you can specify the DC lumped load ratings and select percentages of motor loads and static
loads. You can also display the kW loading (motor and static) for all loading categories.

Rating
kW
Enter the total kW loading (motor and static) for the lumped load. Click on the kW/MW button to choose
from either kW or MW units for entering and displaying data. PowerStation uses the following equation
for the DC lumped load full load current:

Full-Load Amp = kW*1,000 / V Rating in kW
= MW *1,000,000 / V Rating in MW
V
Enter the rated voltage of the DC lumped load in volts.
FLA
The DC lumped load full load current is calculated and displayed here. When the full load current is
changed, the rated power of the DC lumped load is recalculated.
Motor / Static Load
Select the percent motor and static loading of the lumped load by shifting the slider position.
Loading
This section is used to assign a percent loading to each one of the ten loading categories for this DC
lumped load, i.e., each DC lumped load can be set to have a different operating loading level for each
loading category. To edit the values of the percent loading, click on any one of the edit fields under the %
Loading column. Note that you can select any of these loading categories when conducting DC load flow
studies.


11.8.3 SC Page
Within the SC page, specify the short-circuit multiplication factor, time constant and impedance,
including resistance and inductance of the DC lumped load. You can view the calculated short-circuit
current of the DC lumped load. Note that the data in this page are only related to the motor load of the
DC lumped load.

SC Parameters
K
Enter the short-circuit multiplication factor in percent of the FLA of the motor part of the lumped load.
PowerStation uses this value to calculate the short-circuit current of the lumped load for a terminal bus
fault. When you change the multiplication factor, the resistance, inductance and the short-circuit current
contribution are recalculated. The multiplication factor defaults to 1000%.
Rd
Enter the resistance of the lumped load short-circuit impedance in ohms. When you change the resistance
value, the inductance, multiplication factor, and short-circuit current are recalculated.
Time Constant
Enter the time constant of the lumped load in seconds. When you change the time constant value, the
inductance is recalculated.
Ld
Enter the inductance of the lumped load short-circuit impedance in henries. When you change the
inductance value, the time constant is recalculated.
Isc
The short-circuit current contribution of the motor part of the DC lumped load for a terminal bus fault is
calculated and display here in amperes. If a lumped load is 100% static load, there will be no short-circuit
contribution.


Duty Cycle
Duty Cycle Category
Load Profile





11.8.5 Remarks Page

User-Defined Info

UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchase Date

11.8.6 Comment Page


DC Elements DC Elementary Diagram

11.9 DC Elementary Diagram
The properties associated with DC elementary diagram loads of the electrical distribution system can be

The DC Elementary Diagram Editor contains five pages of information.

Info Page
Rating Page
Duty Cycle Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page

11.9.1 Info Page
Within the Info page, specify the DC elementary diagram load ID, connected bus ID, In/Out of Service,
Equipment FDR (feeder) Tag, Name, Description, Data Type, load Priority.

Info
ID
unique ID to each DC elementary diagram load. The assigned IDs consist of the default ID plus an
integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of DC elementary diagram loads
increases. The default ID (dcElem) for DC elementary diagrams can be changed from the Defaults menu
in the menu bar or from the Project View.
Bus
This is the ID of the connecting bus for the DC elementary diagram load. If the terminal is not connected
to any bus, a blank entry will be shown for the bus ID. To connect or reconnect a DC elementary diagram
load to a bus, select a bus from the list box. The one-line diagram will be updated to show the new
connection after you click on OK. Note that you can connect the terminal of the elementary diagram to

the DC buses that reside in the same view where it resides or can connect to buses that reside in other
views by connecting the external and internal pins of the composite networks. You cannot connect to a
bus that resides in the Dumpster.

If a DC elementary diagram load is connected to a bus through a number of protective devices,
reconnection of the DC elementary diagram load to a new bus in this editor will reconnect the last
existing protective device to the new bus, as shown below where DCED1 is reconnected from DCBus10
to DCBus4.

In/Out of Service
Operating conditions of a DC elementary diagram load can be selected by choosing either the In Service
or Out of Service option. The properties of an Out of Service DC elementary diagram load can be edited
like an In Service DC elementary diagram load; however, an Out of Service DC elementary diagram load
will not be included in any system studies. When Continuity Check is activated, an Out of Service DC
elementary diagram load automatically becomes dimmed in the one-line diagram.

Data.
Equipment
FDR Tag
Name
Description
Data Type
Priority
Select the load priority of this elementary diagram load from the list box. This field can be used for load
priority, operating priority, load shedding priority, etc. Ten different priorities are provided to select
from. Priority names can be changed from the Project menu under Settings and Load Priority.

11.9.2 Rating Page
In this page, you can specify the DC elementary diagram load ratings. The DC elementary diagram load
loading for all loading categories is displayed.

Rating
kW
Enter the rating (total of all elements within this elementary diagram) in kW. Click on the kW/MW
button to choose either kW or MW units for entering and displaying data. PowerStation uses the
following equation for the full load current of the DC elementary diagram load:

Full Load Amp = kW*1,000 / V Rating in kW
= MW *1,000,000 / V Rating in MW
V
Enter the rated voltage of the DC elementary diagram load in volts.
FLA
The full load current of the DC elementary diagram load is calculated and displayed here in amperes.
When the full load current is changed, the rated power of the DC elementary diagram load is recalculated.
Loading
This section is used to assign a percent loading to each one of the ten loading categories for this DC
elementary diagram load, i.e., each DC elementary diagram load can be set to have a different operating
loading level for each loading category. To edit the values of the percent loading, click on any one of the
edit fields under the % Loading column. Note that you can select any of these loading categories when
conducting DC load flow studies.



Duty Cycle
Duty Cycle Category
Load Profile





11.9.4 Remarks Page

User-Defined Info

UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchasing Date

11.9.5 Comment Page


DC Elements DC Composite Motor

11.10 DC Composite Motor
Composite motors are used as a tool to group motors and loads in the system. The elements that you can
include inside a DC composite motor are:

DC Motors
DC Static Loads
DC Lumped Loads
DC Elementary Diagram Loads
DC Circuit Breakers
DC Single-Throw Switches
DC Fuses
DC Composite Motors


To open the DC Composite Motor Editor, open the composite motor by double-clicking on it. Double-
click again on the blank background of the window.

DC Elements DC Circuit Breaker

11.11 DC Circuit Breaker
The properties associated with DC circuit breakers of the electrical power system can be entered in this
editor. DC circuit breaker protection devices are available for a full range of voltages.

The DC Circuit Breaker Editor contains three pages of information.

Info Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
11.11.1 Info Page
Within the Info page, specify the ID, connected bus / load, In/Out of Service, Ratings, Equipment FDR
(feeder) Tag, Name, Description, and Configuration Status of the DC circuit breaker.


Info
ID
unique ID to each DC circuit breaker. The assigned IDs consist of the default ID plus an integer, starting
with the number one and increases as the number of CBs increases.

The default ID (dcCB) for DC circuit breakers can be changed from the Defaults menu in the menu bar or
To & From
Bus IDs for the connecting buses of a DC circuit breaker are designated as From and To buses. If a
terminal of a breaker (From or To) is not connected to any bus, a blank entry will be shown for bus ID. If
a terminal of a DC breaker is connected to a branch, directly or indirectly, the ID of the branch will be
displayed for the terminal connection. To connect or reconnect a DC breaker to a bus, select a bus from
Note that you can connect the terminals of the circuit breaker to other dc elements that reside in the same
view where the it resides or can connect to elements that reside in other views by connecting the external
and internal pins of the composite networks. You cannot connect to elements that reside in the Dumpster.

If a DC breaker is connected to a bus through a number of other protective devices, reconnection of the
DC breaker to a new bus from this editor will reconnect the last existing protective device to the new bus,
as shown below where DCCB1 is reconnected from DCBus10 to DCBus4.

convenience.
In/Out of Service
Operating conditions of a DC circuit breaker can be selected by choosing either the In Service or Out of
Service option. The properties of an Out of Service DC circuit breaker can be edited like an In Service
DC circuit breaker; however, an Out of Service DC circuit breaker will not be included in any system
studies. When Continuity Check is activated, an Out of Service DC circuit breaker automatically
becomes dimmed in the one-line diagram. All the loads and branches energized solely through an Out of
Service DC circuit breaker will also be de-energized and become dimmed.

status. Therefore, you can set a DC circuit breaker to be In Service for the Base Data and Out of Service
in Revision Data.
Configuration
You can change the status of a DC circuit breaker (for the selected configuration) by clicking on the
Close or Open options. Once a configuration status is selected for a one-line presentation, any subsequent

status is shown above the status of the DC circuit breaker to indicate that this is the breaker status under
the specific configuration, i.e., you can have different operating status under different configurations. In
the following example, the status of a DC circuit breaker is shown as closed under Normal configuration
and open under Open Tie configuration.

Ratings
Rated V
Enter the rated voltage of the DC circuit breaker in volts or select the rating from the list box.
Continuous Amp
Enter the continuous current rating of the DC circuit breaker in amperes or select the rating from the list
box.
Max. V
Enter the rated maximum voltage of the DC voltage circuit breaker in volts or select the rating from the
list box.
SC kA
Enter the rated short-circuit current at the rated maximum voltage in kA or select the rating from the list
box. This value is used in DC short-circuit studies to compare against the calculated short-circuit duty of
the connected bus.

OnLine Status
Scanned Status
The scanned status (open or closed) of the switching device is displayed.
Equipment
FDR Tag
Name
Description


User-Defined Info
UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchasing Date



DC Elements DC Fuse

11.12 DC Fuse
The properties associated with DC fuses of the electrical distribution system can be entered in this editor.
DC fuse protection devices are available for a full range of voltages.

The DC Fuse Editor contains four pages of information.

Info Page
Rating Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
11.12.1 Info Page
Within the Info page, specify the DC fuse ID, connected bus ID, In/Out of Service, Equipment FDR
(feeder) Tag, Name and Description, Configuration Status, and view the DC fuse online status.

Info
ID
unique ID to each DC fuse. The assigned IDs consist of the default ID plus an integer, which starts with
the number one and increases as the number of DC fuses increases.

The default ID (dcFuse) for DC fuses can be changed from the Defaults menu in the menu bar or from the
Project View.
From & To
Bus IDs for the connecting buses of a DC fuse are designated as From and To buses. If a terminal of a
DC fuse (From or To) is not connected to any bus, a blank entry will be shown for bus ID. If a terminal
of a DC fuse is connected to a branch, directly or indirectly, the ID of the branch will be displayed for the
terminal connection. To connect or reconnect a DC fuse to a bus, select a bus from the list box. The one-
line diagram will be updated to show the new connection after you click on OK. Note that you can
connect the terminals of the fuse to other dc elements that reside in the same view where the it resides or
DC Elements DC Fuse

can connect to elements that reside in other views by connecting the external and internal pins of the
composite networks. You cannot connect to elements that reside in the Dumpster.

If a DC fuse is connected to a bus through a number of protective devices, reconnection of the DC fuse to
a new bus from this editor will reconnect the last existing protective device to the new bus, as shown
below where DCFuse1 is reconnected from DCBus10 to DCBus4.

convenience.
In/Out of Service
Operating conditions of a DC fuse can be selected by choosing either the In Service or Out of Service
option. The properties of an Out of Service DC fuse can be edited like an In Service DC fuse; however,
an Out of Service DC fuse will not be included in any system studies. When Continuity Check is
activated, an Out of Service DC fuse automatically becomes dimmed in the one-line diagram. All the
loads and branches energized solely through an Out of Service DC fuse will also be de-energized and
become dimmed.

status. Therefore, you can set a DC fuse to be In Service for the Base Data and Out of Service in
Revision Data.
Configuration
You can change the status of a DC fuse (for the selected configuration) by clicking on the Close or Open
of the status of an element (circuit breaker, fuse, motor, or static load) will be saved under the specified
configuration.

status is shown above the status of the fuse to indicate that this is the fuse status under the specific
following example, status of a fuse is shown as closed under Normal configuration and open under Open
Tie configuration.

DC Elements DC Fuse

OnLine Status
Scanned Status
Equipment
FDR Tag
Name
Description
11.12.2 Rating Page

DC Elements DC Fuse

Ratings
Rated V
Enter the rated voltage of the DC fuse in volts or select the rating from the list box.
Continuous Amp
Enter the continuous current rating of the DC fuse in amperes or select the rating from the list box.
Interrupting kA
Enter the rated interrupting capability of the DC fuse in kA or select the rating from the list box. This
value is used in DC short-circuit studies.

User-Defined Info
DC Elements DC Fuse

UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchasing Date
DC Elements DC Fuse



DC Elements DC Single-Throw Switch

11.13 DC Single-Throw Switch
The properties associated with DC single-throw switch of the electrical distribution system can be entered
in this editor.

The Single-Throw Switch Editor contains three pages of information.

Info Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
11.13.1 Info Page
Within the Info page, specify the DC single-throw switch ID, connected bus ID, In/Out of Service,
Ratings, Equipment FDR (feeder) Tag, Name and Description, Configuration Status, and view the online
status of the DC single-throw switch.


Info
ID
unique ID to each DC switch. The assigned IDs consist of the default ID plus an integer, starting with the
number one and increasing as the number of DC single-throw switches increases.

The default ID (dcS) for DC single-throw switches can be changed from the Defaults menu in the menu
To & From
Bus IDs for the connecting buses of a DC single-throw switch are designated as From and To buses. If a
terminal of a switch (From or To) is not connected to any bus, a blank entry will be shown for bus ID. If
a terminal of a switch is connected to a branch (directly or indirectly), the ID of the branch will be
displayed for the terminal connection. To connect or reconnect a switch to a bus, select a bus from the list
box. The one-line diagram will be updated to show the new connection after you click on OK. Note that
you can connect the terminals of the switch to other dc elements that reside in the same view where the it
resides or can connect to elements that reside in other views by connecting the external and internal pins
of the composite networks. You cannot connect to elements that reside in the Dumpster.

If a DC single-throw switch is connected to a bus through a number of other protective devices,
reconnection of the switch to a new bus from this editor will reconnect the last existing protective device
to the new bus, as shown below where DCSPST1 is reconnected from DCBus10 to DCBus4.

convenience.
In/Out of Service
The operating conditions of a DC single-throw switch can be selected by choosing either the In Service or
Out of Service option. The properties of an Out of Service DC single-throw switch can be edited like an
In Service DC single-throw switch; however, an Out of Service DC single-throw switch will not be
included in any system studies. When Continuity Check is activated, an Out of Service DC single-throw
switch automatically becomes dimmed in the one-line diagram. All the loads and branches energized
solely through an Out of Service DC single-throw switch will also be de-energized and become dimmed.


status. Therefore, you can set a DC single-throw switch to be In Service for the Base Data and Out of
Configuration
You can change the status of a DC single-throw switch (for the selected configuration) by clicking on the
Closed or Open options. Once a configuration status is selected for a one-line presentation, any
subsequent manipulation of the status of an element (switch, fuse, motor, or static load) will be saved
under the specified configuration.

following example, status of a DC single-throw switch is shown as closed under Normal configuration
and open under Open Tie configuration.

Rating
V
Enter the rated voltage of the DC single-throw switch in volts or select the rating from the list box.
Cont. Amp
Enter the rated continuous current of the DC single-throw switch in amperes or select the rating from the
list box.
BIL
Enter the basic impulse levels in kV. This value is not used in any calculations at this point.
Momentary
Enter the rated short-circuit withstand capability of the DC single-throw switch in kA or select the rating
from the list box. This value represents the momentary capability (making or bracing) of the switch and
is used in DC short-circuit studies to compare against the calculated fault duty of the connected bus.
Equipment
FDR Tag
Name

Description
OnLine Data
Scanned Status
Pin
Control


User-Defined Info
UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchasing Date



DC Elements DC Double-Throw Switch

11.14 DC Double-Throw Switch
The properties associated with DC double-throw switches of the electrical distribution system can be

The Double-Throw Switch Editor contains three pages of information.

Info Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
11.14.1 Info Page
Within the Info page, specify the DC double-throw switch ID, connected bus ID, In/Out of Service,
Ratings, Equipment FDR (feeder) Tag, Name and Description, Configuration Status, and view the online
status of the DC double-throw switch.


Info
ID
unique ID to each DC double-throw switch. The assigned IDs consist of the default ID plus an integer,
starting with the number one and increasing as the number of DC double-throw switches increases.

The default ID (dc2S) for DC double-throw switches can be changed from the Defaults menu in the menu
From, Pos. A, and Pos. B
Bus IDs for the connecting buses of a DC double-throw switch are designated as From, Pos. A, and Pos.
B buses. If a terminal of a switch (From, Pos. A, or Pos. B) is not connected to any bus, a blank entry
will be shown for bus ID. If a terminal of a switch is connected to a branch (directly or indirectly), the ID
of the branch will be displayed for the terminal connection. To connect or reconnect a switch to a bus,
click on OK. Note that you can connect the terminals of the double-throw switch to DC buses that reside
in the same view where the it resides or can connect to buses that reside in other views by connecting the
external and internal pins of the composite networks. You cannot connect to buses that reside in the
Dumpster.

If a DC double-throw switch is connected to a bus through a number of other protective devices,
reconnection of the switch to a new bus from this editor will reconnect the last existing protective device
to the new bus, as shown below where DCSPDT1 is reconnected from DCBus10 to DCBus4.

Unlike a single-throw switch, the double-throw switch has to be connected to a bus before being
connected to loads and branch elements.

Next to the From, Pos. A, and Pos. B bus IDs, PowerStation displays the nominal V of the buses for your
convenience.
In/Out of Service
The operating conditions of a DC double-throw switch can be selected by choosing either the In Service
or Out of Service option. The properties of an Out of Service DC double-throw switch can be edited like
an In Service DC double-throw switch; however, an Out of Service DC double-throw switch will not be
included in any system studies. When Continuity Check is activated, an Out of Service DC double-throw

switch automatically becomes dimmed in the one-line diagram. All the loads and branches energized
solely through an Out of Service DC double-throw switch will also be de-energized and become dimmed.

status. Therefore, you can set a DC double-throw switch to be In Service for the Base Data and Out of
Configuration
You can change the status of a DC double-throw switch (for the selected configuration) by clicking on the
Position A and Position B options. Once a configuration status is selected for a one-line presentation, any
subsequent manipulation of the status of an element (switch, fuse, motor, or static load) will be saved
under the specified configuration.

following example, status of a switch is shown to be in position A under Configuration Status Switch A
and position B under Configuration Status Switch B.

Rating
V
Enter the rated voltage of the DC double-throw switch in V or select the rating from the list box.
Cont. Amp
Enter the rated continuous current of the DC double-throw switch in amperes or select the rating from the
list box.
BIL
Enter the basic impulse levels in kV.
Momentary
Enter the rated breaking current of the DC double-throw switch in kA or select the rating from the list
box.
Equipment
FDR Tag
Name

Description
OnLine Data
Scanned Status
Pin
Control


User-Defined Info
UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchasing Date



ETAP

PowerStation
4.0
User Guide
Copyright 2001
All Rights Reserved





Southern California

(949) 462-0100 Sales
(949) 462-0400 Fax

Chapter 12

Engineering Libraries

PowerStation provides customized libraries for many devices. Additional devices may be added to each
library through PowerStations Library Editors. Device libraries in ETAP for DOS can be converted to
PowerStation libraries. Details regarding each library and library conversion can be found in this chapter.

Engineering Libraries Introduction
PowerStation library files contain the extension .lib. PowerStation displays the path along with the name
of the current library in the Project View.

Engineering Libraries Utility Tools
12.1 Library Utility Tools
PowerStation provides a number of utility tools to manage your libraries.
Open
This option allows you to associate a library with the current PowerStation project. Upon opening a
library, the association between the PowerStation project and the existing library will be disconnected.
Motor Characteristic Model and dynamically linked cable library data associated with the previous
library, which does not exist in the new library, will be missing.

There are two ways to retrieve the missing data:

1) Reselect the old library file.
2) Merge the old library file into the new library file.

To open a library, select Open from the Library menu, navigate to the appropriate directory, select the
new library file, then select Open. This library is now attached to the PowerStation project.

Copy / Merge
The copy / merge function is available by right-clicking on any portion of the library listed in the Project
View. The copy / merge function copies a portion of the library from the current project library to a
separate library. For example, you can copy the Cable Library from etaplib.lib to backup.lib. The library
being copied from will overwrite any manufacturer information that exists in both libraries.

Save
Select this option to save the entire associated library file. The Save option in the Library menu only
saves the associated library file and is independent of the PowerStation Save Project function in the File
menu.
Save As
Select this option to save the current library file as a new library file. The new library file contains all the
information in the current library file with a new name in an independent location. If the name for the
new library file already exists in the selected location, it will overwrite the old library file after requesting
permission. The new library must have a .lib extension.
Create
This option allows you to create a new library to be associated with the current project file. The old
library file will be disconnected. Motor Characteristic Model and dynamically linked cable library data
associated with the previous library, which does not exist in the new library, will be missing.

There are two ways to retrieve the missing data:
1) Reselect the old library file.
2) Merge the old library file into the new library file.
Purge
This action will permanently delete all data from the current library file. Be certain that you no longer
require the library data prior to clicking on the Purge button. Motor Characteristic Model and
dynamically linked cable library data associated with the previous library, which does not exist in the new
library, will be missing.
Export
This option allows you to export the current device library data. You can select all or a portion of device
libraries to be exported. PowerStation exports the library data to an external MS Access database,
LB1.mdb. This file is created in your PowerStation project folder. The selected libraries are exported
and displayed in Crystal Reports format. For more information on Crystal Reports, see Chapter 7,
Printing and Plotting.


Engineering Libraries Convert ETAP DOS
12.2 Convert ETAP DOS Libraries
You can convert your ETAP DOS libraries for Cables, Motor Nameplates, Motor Circuit Models, Motor
Characteristic Models, and Overload Heaters.

Convert DOS Cable Library
Select this option to convert an ETAP for DOS Cable Library to PowerStation. ETAP DOS Cable
libraries contain the extension .elb for English data and .mlb for metric data. Locate and select the files
on your hard drive or local area network and click on Convert.
Convert Motor Nameplate Library
Select this option if you wish to convert an ETAP for DOS Motor Nameplate Library to PowerStation.
ETAP DOS Motor Nameplate Libraries contain the extension .emt for English data and .mmt for metric
data. Locate and select the file on your hard drive or local area network and click on Convert.
Convert Motor Model Library
Select this option if you wish to convert an ETAP for DOS Motor Model Library to PowerStation. ETAP
DOS Motor Model Libraries contain file names similar to mtrparam.lib. Locate the file on your hard
drive or local area network and click on Convert.
Convert Motor Characteristic Model Library
Select this option if you wish to convert an ETAP for DOS Motor Characteristic Model Library to
PowerStation. Motor Characteristic Model Libraries contain file names similar to mtrtsc.lib. Locate the
file on your hard drive or local area network and click on Convert.
Convert Overload Heater Library
Select this option if you wish to convert an ETAP for DOS Overload Heater Library to PowerStation.
Overload Heater Libraries contain file names similar to oh.lib. Locate the file on your hard drive or local
area network and click on Convert.
Engineering Libraries Library Data Access

12.3 Library Data Access
The following map displays the way the User & the different Calculation Modules access the different
PowerStation Engineering Libraries.

Data for the calculation engines (Load Flow, Short-circuit, MS, etc, etc) is taken from the different
Device Editors & Engineering Libraries. The user may load the data from the libraries into the element
editors and during calculation the engines will take the data from such editors. However, PowerStation
has dynamic links that obtain heavy engineering properties directly from the different libraries. The
following table shows how the different modules manage library & editor data.

AC
Library
Load
Flow
Short-
Circuit
Motor
Starting
Harmonic
Analysis
Transient
Stability
Relay
Coordination
Optimal
Power
Flow
Reliability
Cable* Editor Editor Editor Editor Editor Editor Editor Editor
Cable Fire
Protection

Motor Name Plate Editor Editor Editor Editor Editor Editor Editor Editor
Motor CKT Model Editor Editor
Motor
Characteristic
Model
Library Library
Motor Load Model Editor Editor
Fuse Editor Editor Editor Editor Editor
PowerPlot
Editor**
Editor Editor
HV Circuit
Breaker
Editor Editor Editor Editor Editor Editor Editor
LV Circuit
Breaker
Editor Editor Editor Editor Editor
PowerPlot
Editor**
Editor Editor
Harmonics Library
Overload Heaters Editor Editor Editor Editor Editor Editor Editor Editor
Interruption
Cost
Library
Reliability Editor

Engineering Libraries Library Data Access

DC UGS EDITOR*
Library
Load
Flow
Short-
Circuit
Battery
Sizing
SS
Temperatur
e
UA
Ampacity
UT
Ampacity
Cable
Sizing
Transient
Temperature
Cable Sizing
Cable* Editor Editor Editor Editor
Base
Amp.
from
Library
Base
Amp.
from
Library
Library Editor Library
Cable Fire
Protection
Editor Editor Editor Editor Editor Editor
Battery Editor Editor Library
*Calculations performed in the editors.

Engineering Libraries Cable
12.4 Cable
The Cable Library is set up in a similar manner to a file directory system. You can have unlimited cable
headers (Cable Types) within the library and unlimited cable sizes for each header as shown below.

Cable Library
Cable Size
Cable Size
Cable Size
Cable Size
Cable Header
Cable Header
Cable Header
Cable Header

Cable Library Header

Cable headers are used to indicate the type and construction of a cable. Cable headers consist of the
following items:

Unit System Metric or English unit system; used for all cable physical dimensions
Frequency Rated base frequency of the cable in Hz
Conductor Type Copper or Aluminum
Installation Magnetic or non-magnetic conduit installation
Voltage Rated voltage of the cable in kV
Voltage Class 100, 133, & 173%
Source Library source name such as ICEA, NEC etc., up to 12 characters
Insulation Insulation type such as Rubber, XLPE, PE, XHHW, etc.
#/Cable Single conductor cables (1/C), 3 conductor cables (3/C), etc.
U/G Ampacity Ta, Tc & RHO for base ampacity in U/G raceway installation
Ta Ambient temperature of the Underground raceway in degree C
Tc Maximum allowable conductor temperature in degree C
RHO Soil thermal resistivity in degree C-cm/Watt
A/G Ampacity Ta, Tc for base ampacity in A/G raceway installation
Ta Ambient temperature of the above ground raceway in degree C
Tc Maximum allowable conductor temperature in degree C
Impedance
Ohms per Unit of length for cable impedance, /1000 ft, /km, /mile, etc.
Temperature Base temperature of the conductor resistance in degrees C
12.4.1 Cable Library Selector

The Cable Library selector allows you to add new cable headers, select existing cable headers for editing,
deleting, or copying cables. To edit a Cable Library, double-click on the item or click on the Edit button
after highlighting it. To delete a cable, click on the Delete button after highlighting it. PowerStation will
request confirmation to delete the selected cable.

All available cable headers are displayed in the selector. For each cable header, cable sizes are displayed
for your convenience. Cable size is in AWG or kcmil for English cable data and in mm
2
for metric cable
data.
Add & Copy
This dialog box is used to add a new cable header (type) or copy an existing cable header.


A new cable header consists of all the information you see in this dialog box. You can create a new cable
header by changing any one of the items in the cable header information.
12.4.2 Cable Library Editor
To edit the Cable Library data, select a cable type from the Cable Library and click on the Edit button.
Each cable type (header) can contain an unlimited number of cable sizes. This spreadsheet editor allows
you to view and edit Cable Library data for a selected cable type. The name of the cable type is displayed
on top of the spreadsheet. Each cable record (row) is a unique set of data for each cable size. Each cable
record must have a unique identifier: conductor size. Duplicate records, which have the same data, are
overwritten. The conductor size must contain at least one character, which is different from the other
sizes. If a row of data duplicates a previous one, it will overwrite it.

Available
Enter Y (yes) or N (no) for availability of the cable size. Use this option to flag the cables you want to be
used for this project. PowerStation selects cables from the library for cable sizing (Cable Editor). When
you are picking a cable from the library (Cable Library Quick Pick), you can pick from available cables
only or from all cables in the library. Note that when you use the drop-down list for Cable Sizes (in the
Cable Type section of Cable Editors), you can only select from library cables, which are flagged as
available.
Size
Cable size is specified in AWG or kcmil for English cable data and in mm
2
for metric cable data. English
cable sizes range from #12 to #1, 1/0 to 4/0, and 250 to 1000 kcmil. Metric cable sizes range from 6 to
400 mm
2
.
Duct Bank
Duct Bank refers to the cable base ampacity (in amperes) when a cable is installed in an isolated duct
bank with an ambient temperature of 20C (Ta), a conductor temperature of 90C (Tc), and soil (earth)
thermal resistivity of 90 (RHO). The base ampacity is selected from the library when Duct Bank
Installation Type is selected in the Ampacity page of the Cable Editor. If the base ampacity is zero for the
specified installation type, a different cable should be selected or the Cable Library should be modified
for the specified cable type and size.
Buried
Buried refers to the cable base ampacity (in amperes) when a cable is directly buried underground with an
ambient temperature of 20C (Ta), a conductor temperature of 90C (Tc), and soil (earth) thermal
resistivity of 90 (RHO). The base ampacity is selected from the library when Direct Buried Installation
Type is selected in the Ampacity page of the Cable Editor. If the base ampacity is zero for the specified
installation type, a different cable should be selected or the Cable Library should be modified for the
specified cable type and size.
Free Air
Free Air refers to the cable base ampacity (in amperes) when a cable is installed in free air or trays with
an ambient temperature of 40C (Ta) and conductor temperature of 90C (Tc). The base ampacity is
selected from the library when Cable Tray or Air Drop Installation Type is selected in the Ampacity page
of the Cable Editor. If the base ampacity is zero for the specified installation type, a different cable
should be selected or the Cable Library should be modified for the specified cable type and size.
Cond. Air
Conduit in Air refers to the cable base ampacity (in amperes) when a cable is installed in a conduit in air
with an ambient temperature of 40C (Ta) and conductor temperature of 90C (Tc). The base ampacity is
selected for the library when Conduit Installation Type is selected in the Ampacity page of the Cable
Editor. If the base ampacity is zero for the specified installation type, a different cable should be selected
or the Cable Library should be modified for the specified cable type and size.
R
Positive-sequence cable resistance in ohms per unit length. The resistance must be entered at the base
temperature specified for this cable header (type).
X
Positive-sequence cable reactance in ohms per unit length
Y
Positive-sequence cable charging susceptance in siemens per unit length
R
0

Zero-sequence cable resistance in ohms per unit length. The resistance must be entered at the base
temperature specified for the cable header (type).
X
0

Zero-sequence cable reactance in ohms per unit length
Y
0

Zero-sequence cable charging susceptance in siemens per unit length
R
DC
(25C)
DC resistance calculated at 25 degrees C in micro-ohms per ft or m
Cond. O.D.
Conductor outside diameter in inch or cm
Ins. Thick
Thickness of cable insulation layer in mil or mm
Shielding
Cable shielding type. Right-click to select Non-Shielded or Shield Duct type from the list.
Sheath / Armor
Cable sheath / armor type. Right-click to select from the drop-down list.

Armor Thick
Thickness of cable sheath / armor in mil or mm
Jacket Type
Cable jacket type. Right-click to select from the drop-down list.

Jacket Thick
Thickness of cable jacket in mil or mm
Cable O.D.
Cable outside diameter in inch or cm
Cond. Const.
Cable Conductor Construction is used for determining ks and kp parameters which are used for
calculating the ac to dc ratio parameters. Several choices of conductor construction are available from the
list box provided. These are:


Cable Weight
Weight of the cable in lb or kg per unit length
Max. Tension
Maximum allowable cable tension in lb/kcmil or kg/mm
2

Max. SW Pres.
Maximum allowable sidewall pressure in lb/ft or kg/m
12.4.3 Library Quick Pick - Cable
Access the Library Quick Pick dialog box by clicking on the Library button inside the editor Info page.
The Library Quick Pick displays all of the cable information in the associated library file.

From this dialog box, select a Unit system, Frequency, Conductor Type and Installation. This narrows the
choice of available library selections to a group you are interested in. Then, select a voltage and class
rating, a cable type (header) and cable size from the Cable Library. The Library Quick Pick dialog box
allows you to choose a cable size from all cable sizes in the library file or only cables flagged as
Available.

12.4.4 Source
PowerStations Cable Library data is obtained from the following standards and manufacturers:

National Electric Code (NEC)
Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA)
Kerite Cable Manufacturer

Engineering Libraries Cable Fire Coating
12.5 Cable Fire Coating
The Cable Fire Coating Library is set up in a similar manner to a file directory system. You can have
unlimited headers (manufacturers) within the library and unlimited fire coating types for each
manufacturer, as shown below.

Header
Header
Header
Header
Fire Coating Type

Fire Coating Type
Fire Coating Type
Fire Coating Type
Fire Coating Library

A fire coating header consists of the installation type and the manufacturer. You can have unlimited
manufacturers for each installation type. Three installation types are available:

Tray Specifies cables located in cable trays
Conduit Specifies cables placed in conduits
Air Drop Specifies cables installed as air drop cables

12.5.1 Fire Coating Library Selector

The Cable Fire Coating Library allows you to add new fire coating types, select existing fire coating types
for editing, deleting, or copying. To edit a Fire Coating Library, double-click on the item or click on the
Edit button after highlighting it. To delete a fire coating, click on the Delete button after highlighting a
selection. PowerStation will request confirmation to delete the selected cable fire coating.
Add
Click the Add button to specify the name of the manufacturer you wish to add to the library. Edit the new
library header, by selecting it, and clicking the Edit button.

Copy
Click the Copy button to copy the data from one library header to a new library header name. This
function can be used to change specifications in the library without modifying the original data. Edit the
new library header, by selecting it, and clicking the Edit button.

12.5.2 Fire Coating Library Editor


This spreadsheet editor allows you to view and edit Cable Fire Coating Library data. Each library record
is a unique set of data for each cable fire coating type. Appending two columns, Material+Configuration,
forms a unique record name. If the combined name of these two columns is repeated, that row is deleted,
i.e., duplicate records are overwritten. The combination of both fields must contain at least one
different character. If a row (record) of data duplicates a previous one, PowerStation will request
confirmation before overwriting it.
Material
Enter the type of material used in the construction of the fire coating. Material type is a description only.
Configuration
Enter the thickness of the fire coating. Configuration is a description only.
ACF
Enter the Ampacity Correction Factor (ACF). The ACF is used to calculate the derated ampacity of
cables in the Ampacity page of the cable editor.
Remarks
Enter general remarks concerning the fire coating for the selected Cable Library coating type. Remarks
are a description only (The word default is used if the cable fire coating is part of the original
PowerStation library.)
12.5.3 Cable Fire Coating - Quick Pick
Access the Library Quick Pick dialog box for Cable Fire Coating by checking the box next to Fire
Coating. The Fire Coating box only appears if the installation type is A/G Trays, A/G Conduit, or Air
Drop. Click on the Coating Lib button to select a specific Manufacturer and ACF.

Select a Manufacturer and a cable fire protection type from the dialog box. Cable fire protection type
includes the material, configuration, and ampacity correction factor (ACF).

Engineering Libraries Cable Fire Stop
12.6 Cable Fire Stop
The Cable Fire Stop Library is set up in a similar manner to a file directory system. You can have
unlimited headers (manufacturers) within the library and unlimited fire stop types for each manufacturer,
as shown below.

Header
Header
Header
Header
Fire Stop Type
Fire Stop Type
Fire Stop Type
Fire Stop Type
Fire Stop Library

A fire stop header consists of the installation type and the manufacturer. You can have unlimited
manufacturers for each installation type. The three installation types available are:

12.6.1 Fire Stop Library Selector

The Cable Fire Stop Library allows you to add new fire stop types or select existing fire stop types for
editing, deleting, or copying. To edit a Fire Stop Library, double-click on the item or click on the Edit
button after highlighting it. To delete a fire stop, click on the Delete button after highlighting a selection.
PowerStation will request confirmation to delete the selected cable fire stop.
Add
Copy
12.6.2 Fire Stop Library Editor
This spreadsheet editor allows you to view and edit Cable Fire Stop Library data. Each library record is a
unique set of data for each cable fire stop type. Appending two columns, Material+Configuration, forms
a unique record name. If the combined name of these two columns is repeated, that row is deleted, i.e.,
duplicate records are overwritten. The combination of both fields must contain at least one different
character. If a row (record) of data duplicates a previous one, PowerStation will request confirmation
before overwriting it.

Material
Enter the type of material used in the construction of the fire stop. Material type is a description only.
Configuration
Enter the thickness of the fire stop. Configuration is a description only.
ACF
Remarks
12.6.3 Library Quick Pick - Fire Stop
Access the Library Quick Pick dialog box for Cable Fire Stop by checking the box next to Fire Stop. The
Fire Stop box only appears if the installation type is A/G Trays, A/G Conduit, or Air Drop. Click on the
Stop Lib button to select a specific Manufacturer and ACF.


Engineering Libraries Cable Fire Wrap
12.7 Cable Fire Wrap
The Cable Fire Wrap Library is set up in a similar manner to a file directory system. You can have
unlimited headers (manufacturers) within the library and unlimited fire wrap types for each manufacturer,
as shown below.

Header
Header
Header
Header
Fire Wrap Type
Fire Wrap Type
Fire Wrap Type
Fire Wrap Type
Fire Wrap Library

Fire wrap adjustment factors are used for cables routed through conduits, trays, etc. that have been
wrapped with a fire barrier. A fire wrap header consists of the installation type and the manufacturer.
You can have unlimited manufacturers for each installation type. The three installation types available
are:

12.7.1 Fire Wrap Library Selector

The Cable Fire Wrap Library allows you to add new fire wrap types or select existing fire wraps for
modification, deletion, or copying. To edit a Fire Wrap Library, double-click on the item or click on the
Edit button after highlighting it. To delete a fire wrap, click on the Delete button after highlighting a
selection. PowerStation will request confirmation to delete the selected cable fire wrap.
Add
Copy
12.7.2 Fire Wrap Library Editor
This spreadsheet editor allows you to view and edit Cable Fire Wrap Library data. Each library record is
a unique set of data for each cable fire wrap type. Appending two columns, Material+Configuration,
forms a unique record name. If the combined name of these two columns is repeated, that row is deleted,
i.e., duplicate records are overwritten. The combination of both fields must contain at least one
different character. If a row (record) of data duplicates a previous one, PowerStation will request
confirmation before overwriting it.

Material
Enter the type of material used in the construction of the fire wrap. Material type is a description only.
Configuration
Enter the thickness of the fire wrap. Configuration is a description only.
ACF
Remarks
12.7.3 Library Quick Pick - Fire Wrap
Access the Library Quick Pick dialog box for Cable Fire Wrap by checking the box next to Fire Wrap.
The Fire Wrap box only appears if the installation type is A/G Trays, A/G Conduit, or Air Drop. Click on
the Wrap Lib button to select a specific Manufacturer and ACF.


Engineering Libraries Motor Nameplate
12.8 Motor Nameplate
The Motor Nameplate Library is set up in a similar manner to a file directory system. Select the desired
frequency and unit. Units are converted automatically during calculations so the selection of either kW or
HP provides complete information to PowerStation. Unlimited headers (manufacturers) within the library
may be specified. Within each header, various voltage levels are available. Motor nameplate types for
each voltage level can be selected, as shown below.
Motor Nameplate
Type
Type
Type
Type
Library
60 Hz
50 Hz
Manufacturer
Manufacturer
Manufacturer
Manufacturer
kV
kV
kV
kV
kW
HP
Header Record

A motor nameplate header consists of the frequency, unit system, voltage level, and the manufacturer.
You can have unlimited manufacturers for each header.

Frequency 50 or 60 Hz
kW/HP Select unit type
Manufacturer Up to 12 characters long
Voltage In kV
12.8.1 Motor Nameplate Library Header

The Motor Nameplate Library allows you to add motor nameplate models or modify existing motor
nameplate models. Click the Edit button to edit a Motor nameplate model within the Motor Nameplate
Library. Click the Delete button to delete a selected Motor nameplate model. PowerStation will request
confirmation to delete the selected library entry.
Add
Select this option to input the manufacturer name and kV rating of the motor nameplate you wish to add
to the library. You can edit the properties of the new motor nameplate selection by highlighting it from
the list provided, then clicking on the Edit button.
Copy
Select this option to copy the data from one manufacturer name and kV rating to a new manufacturer
name and kV rating. This function can be useful if you wish to change a few specifications in the library
entry without modifying the original data. The properties of the new nameplate selection can be edited by
highlighting it from the list provided, then clicking on the Edit button.
12.8.2 Motor Nameplate Editor

This spreadsheet editor allows you to view and edit Motor Nameplate Library data. Select the motor
design operating frequency and units for motor mechanical rating of the selected motor. Appending two
columns, HP/kW+Frame Size, forms a unique record name. If the combined name of these two columns
is repeated, that row is deleted, i.e., duplicate records are overwritten. The combination of both fields
must contain at least one different character. If a row (record) of data duplicates a previous one,
PowerStation will request confirmation before overwriting it.
HP/kW
Enter the motor nameplate power (HP or kW).
Frame Size
Enter the motor frame size.
Design Letter
Enter the motor NEMA design letter.
Poles
Enter the number of poles for the motor.
Syn. Speed
Enter the motor rated synchronous speed (RPM).
kVA
Enter the motor rated kVA.
Phase
Enter the number of phases for the motor.
SF
Enter the motor service factor.
LRC
Enter the locked-rotor current as a percentage of the rated full load current.
FLA
Enter the motor full load current in amperes.
Pflr
PF50%
Enter the motor power factor at 50% loading in percent.
PF75%
PF100%
EFF50%
Enter the motor efficiency at 50% loading in percent.
EFF75%
EFF100%
Tlr
Enter the motor locked-rotor torque in lb-ft or kg-m.
Tmax
Enter the motor maximum torque in lb-ft or kg-m.
Tfl
Enter the motor full load torque in lb-ft or kg-m.
Slip@Tmax
Enter the motor slip at maximum torque in percent.
Xsc Cycle
Enter the subtransient reactance of the motor in percent (machine base) to be used in short-circuit studies.
Xsc 1.5-4 Cycle
Enter the transient reactance of the motor in percent (machine base) to be used in short-circuit studies.
X
Enter the motor steady-state reactance in percent (machine base) to be used in the IEC 363 method.
X2
Negative sequence reactance in percent (machine base)
X0
Zero sequence reactance (machine base)
X/R
Induction motors X/R (X/Ra)
Td
Enter the motor transient time constant in seconds:

Td = X / (2 f Rr) (Rr = rotor resistance)

This value is used in the IEC 363 short-circuit method.
Char. Model
Enter the characteristic model ID from the Motor Characteristic Model Library.
CKT Model
Enter the CKT model ID from the Motor Model Library, CKT models include types Single1, Single2,
DBL1, and DBL2.
12.8.3 Library Quick Pick - Motor Nameplate
The Library Quick Pick dialog box is accessed by double-clicking on a motor in the one-line diagram,
then clicking on the Library button in the Nameplate page of motor editor. The Library Quick Pick
options are a compilation of the information you have specified for this element.

From this dialog box, select a motor nameplate from the library. Specify HP tables or kW tables, and
then select the appropriate voltage level, manufacturer, and design from the Motor Nameplate Library.
Motor nameplate design includes the HP/kW, frame size, letter, poles, and synchronous speed (RPM).
Engineering Libraries Motor Circuit (CKT) Model
12.9 Motor Circuit (CKT) Model
The Motor Circuit (CKT) Model Library is set up in a similar manner to a file directory system. You can
have unlimited headers (design classes) within each model type (Single1, Single2, or DBL1/DBL2), and
unlimited motor model IDs for each header, as shown below.

Motor Circuit
Model Library
Single1
Single2 Design Class
Design Class
Design Class
Design Class
Model ID
Model ID
Model ID
Model ID
DBL1/
DBL2

A motor circuit model header consists of the model type and design class. You can have unlimited model
IDs for each header.
12.9.1 Motor Circuit Model Selector

The Motor Circuit (CKT) Model Library allows you to add new motor model design classes or select
existing motor model design classes, based on the selection made for Model Type, for modification,
deletion, or copying. To edit a motor model, double-click on the item or click on the Edit button after
highlighting it. To delete a motor model design class, click on the Delete button after highlighting a
model. PowerStation will request confirmation to delete the selected design class.
Add
Select this option to input the design class of the motor model you wish to add to the library. You can
then edit the properties of the new motor model selection by highlighting it from the list provided, then
clicking on the Edit button.
Copy
Select this option to copy the data from one design class to a new design class. This function can be
useful if you wish to change a few specifications in the library entry without modifying the original data.
The properties of the new model library selection can be edited by highlighting it from the list provided,
then clicking on the Edit button.
12.9.2 Motor Circuit (CKT) Model Editor
This spreadsheet editor allows you to view and edit the Motor Circuit (CKT) Model Library data. Each
library record is a unique set of data for each motor model type. A unique record is obtained by the
Model ID. If this name is repeated, that row is deleted, i.e., duplicate records are overwritten. If a row
(record) of data duplicates a previous one, PowerStation will request confirmation before overwriting it.

Model Type (Single1)
This is an equivalent circuit (CKT) model of a single cage motor where the rotor resistance and reactance
are constant.
Model ID
Select an existing model ID. Model IDs are unique names with up to 12 characters.
X/R
Enter the X/R ratio.
Xlr
Enter the locked-rotor reactance (= Xs+XmXr / (Xm+Xr) in percent (machine base).
Xoc
Enter the open circuit reactance (= Xs+Xm) in percent (machine base).
Tdo
Enter the open circuit time constant (= (Xr+Xm) / 2fRr) in seconds.
Model Type (Single2)
This is a circuit (CKT) model of a single cage motor where the rotor resistance and reactance change as
functions of motor speed to represent deep-bar effects of the rotor.
Model ID
Rs
Enter the motor stator resistance in percent (machine base).
Xs
Enter the motor stator reactance in percent (machine base).
Xm
Enter the motor magnetizing reactance in percent (machine base).
Rr,fl
Enter the motor rotor resistance at full load in percent (machine base).
Rr,lr
Enter the motor rotor resistance at locked-rotor in percent (machine base).
Xr,fl
Enter the motor rotor reactance at full load in percent (machine base).
Xr,lr
Enter the motor rotor reactance at locked-rotor in percent (machine base).
Model Type (DBL1/DBL2)
This is a circuit (CKT) model of a double cage motor where there are two rotor cages.
Model ID
Rs
Enter the motor stator resistance in percent (machine base).
Xs
Enter the motor stator reactance in percent (machine base).
Xm
Enter the motor magnetizing reactance in percent (machine base).
Rr1
Enter the motor rotor resistance for the first rotor circuit in percent (machine base).
Rr2
Enter the motor rotor resistance for the second rotor circuit in percent (machine base).
Xr1
Enter the motor rotor reactance for the first rotor circuit in percent (machine base).
Xr2
Enter the motor rotor reactance for the second rotor circuit in percent (machine base).
12.9.4 Library Quick Pick - Motor Model
then clicking on the Library button in the Model page of motor editor. The Library Quick Pick options
are a compilation of the information you have specified for this element.

From this dialog box, pick a motor model from the library. Specify whether you would like a Single1,
Single2, or Double-Cage (DBL) model, then select the appropriate design class and model ID from the
library.

Engineering Libraries Motor Characteristic Model
12.10 Motor Characteristic Model
The Motor Characteristic Model Library is set up in a similar manner to a file directory system. You can
have unlimited headers, and each header is defined by a motor model ID specified within a design class,
as shown below.
Motor Characteristic
Model Library Header
Header
Header
Header
Model ID
Model ID
Model ID
Model ID

A motor characteristic header consists of a design class and a model ID. You can have unlimited records
for each header.
12.10.1 Motor Characteristic Model Library Selector

Motor Characteristic Model Libraries contain several design classes which are divided into three options:
high / low voltage, speed, and torque. These options are seen in the design class name as HV / LV, HS /
LS, and HT / LT.

The Motor Characteristic Model Library allows you to add new motor characteristic design classes and
models or select existing motor characteristic design classes and models for modification, deletion, or
copying. To edit a motor characteristic model, double-click on the item or click on the Edit button after
highlighting it. To delete a motor characteristic model design class, click on the Delete button after
highlighting a model. PowerStation will request confirmation to delete the selected design class.
Add
Select this option to input the name of the manufacturer and choose the design class you wish to add to
the library. You can edit the properties of the new Motor Characteristic Model Library selection by
highlighting it from the list provided, then clicking on the Edit button.
Copy
Select this option to copy the data from one manufacturer name and design class to a new one. This
function can be useful if you wish to change a few specifications in the library entry without modifying
the original data. The properties of the new Motor Characteristic Model Library selection can be edited
by highlighting it from the list provided, then clicking on the Edit button.
12.10.2 Motor Characteristic Model Editor

This spreadsheet editor allows you to view and edit selected motor characteristic design classes and
models. Each library record is a unique set of data for each motor characteristic design class. A unique
record name is defined by Slip. If the record is repeated, that row is deleted, i.e., duplicate records are
overwritten. If a row (record) of data duplicates a previous one, PowerStation will request confirmation
Model
Slip
Enter the motor slip in percent.
Torque
Enter the machine torque in percent of full load torque.
I
Enter the motor current in percent of full load current.
PF
Enter the motor power factor in percent.
12.10.3 Library Quick Pick - Motor Characteristic Model
then clicking on the Library button in the Model page of motor editor. The Library Quick Pick options
are a compilation of the information you have specified for this element.

From this dialog box, pick a motor torque slip characteristic curve from the library. Select the appropriate
design class and model ID from the Motor Characteristic Model Library.

Engineering Libraries Motor Load Model
12.11 Motor Load Model
The Motor Load Model Library is set up in a similar manner to a file directory system. You can have
unlimited models within the library, as shown below.

Motor Load
Model Library
Model
Model
Model
Model

12.11.1 Motor Load Model Selector

The Motor Load Model Library selector is used to add, modify, and select mechanical load models based
on torque curve characteristics. The load curve equation is used by the Motor Starting and Transient
Stability modules for dynamically modeling motor mechanical load, as shown below.

T = A
0
+ A
1
* + A
2
*
2
+ A
3
*
3

Where is the per unit speed of the load and torque T is in percent of the rated torque of the driving
motor. For convenience, PowerStation displays the load curve and prints the values of percent torque at
0, 25%, 50%, 75%, and 100% speed.
Engineering Libraries Motor Load Model
12.11.2 Motor Load Model Library Editor
Here you can input the model ID of the motor load selection you wish to add to the library. You can edit
the properties of the new motor load selection by highlighting it from the list provided, then clicking on
the Edit button.

Model ID
Select from any one of the existing model IDs. Model IDs are unique names with up to 12 characters.
Coefficients
In Edit mode, you can change the values of A
0
, A
1
, A
2
, & A
3
coefficients by entering a value directly or
by clicking the Up/Down arrows next to the coefficient. Note that the lower limit of the coefficients is
reached when the load torque becomes zero. The upper limit is reached when the load torque is 999%.

The Motor Load selector window allows you to add new motor load types or select one from the existing
library for modification or deletion. To edit a load model, double-click on the item or click the Edit
button after highlighting it. You may then change the coefficients. To delete a motor load model, click
on the Delete button after highlighting it. PowerStation will request confirmation to delete the selected
load model.

Engineering Libraries Overload Heater
12.12 Overload Heater Library
The Overload Heater Library is set up in a similar manner to a file directory system. You can have
unlimited headers (manufacturers) within the library and unlimited models for each manufacturer, as
shown below.

Header
Header
Header
Header
Overload Heater Model

verload Heater
Library
O
12.12.1 Overload Heater Library Selector

Add Manufacturer
Select this option to input the name of the manufacturer of the element you wish to add to the library.
You can edit the properties of the new element by highlighting it from the list provided, then clicking on
the Edit button.
Copy Library
Select this option to copy the data from one manufacturer name to a new name. This function is useful if
you wish to change specifications in the library entry without modifying the original data. The properties
of the new element can be edited by highlighting it from the list provided, then clicking on the Edit
button.
Engineering Libraries Overload Heater
12.13 Overload Heater Library Editor
This spreadsheet editor allows you to view and edit Overload Heater Library data. Each library record is
a unique set of data for each overload heater model. A unique record name is obtained from the Model
field. PowerStation does not allow duplicate Model names.

Model
Enter the manufacturer designated model or class name. Model IDs are unique names with up to 18
characters.
R
Enter the overload heater resistance in ohms.
Min Amp
Enter the minimum amp rating for the heater model.
Max Amp
Enter the maximum amp rating for the heater model.

Engineering Libraries LV Circuit Breaker
12.14 LV Circuit Breaker
The Low Voltage Circuit Breaker Library is set up in a similar manner to a file directory system. ANSI
or IEC libraries are available, depending upon which standard is selected for each individual circuit
breaker. The library header is divided into sections depending upon what type of circuit breaker is
required. You can have unlimited manufacturers within the library for each type of circuit breaker.
Unlimited models / classes are available within each manufacturer, as shown below.
Library
ANSI
IEC Power CB
Insulated Case
Molded Case Model / Class
Model / Class
Model / Class
Model / Class
Manufacturer
Manufacturer
Manufacturer
Manufacturer
Header Record

A low voltage circuit breaker header consists of Standard (ANSI / IEC), Type, and Manufacturer
information. You can have unlimited Models / Classes for each header. The low voltage circuit breaker
types available are:

Molded Case
Power CB
Insulated Case
12.14.1 LV Circuit Breaker Library Selector

The Low Voltage Circuit Breaker Library allows you to add new low voltage circuit breaker models or
select existing low voltage circuit breaker models for modification, deletion, or copying. To edit a low
voltage circuit breaker model, double-click on the item or click on the Edit button after highlighting it.
To delete a low voltage circuit breaker model, click on the Delete button after highlighting a model.
PowerStation will request confirmation to delete the selected model.
Add Manufacturer
the Edit button.
Copy Library
button.
12.14.2 LV Circuit Breaker Library Editor

This spreadsheet editor allows you to view and edit Low Voltage Circuit Breaker Library data. Each
library record is a unique set of data for each low voltage circuit breaker header. Appending three
columns, Model+Continuous Amp+Rated kV, forms a unique record name. If the combined name of
these three columns is repeated, that row is deleted, i.e., duplicate records are overwritten. The
combination of all three fields must contain at least one different character. If a row (record) of data
duplicates a previous one, PowerStation will request confirmation before overwriting it.
ANSI Standard
Model
Enter the manufacturer designated model or class name.
Continuous A
Enter the continuous current rating of the LV CB in amperes or select the rating from the list box.
Rated kV
Enter the rated voltage of the LV CB in kV or select the rating from the list box.
Interrupting
Enter the rated interrupting capability in rms kA or select the rating from the list box.
Test PF
Based on the type and rating of the low voltage circuit breaker, PowerStation displays the applicable
ANSI/IEEE test power factor in percent.
Fused
For power and insulated case circuit breakers, select Fused or Unfused by clicking on the selection box.
The value of Test PF will change appropriately for fused or unfused breaker types.
IEC Standard
Model
Rated Amps
Enter the rated normal current of the LV CB in amperes or select the rating from the list box.
Rated kV
Enter the rated voltage of the LV CB in kV or select the rating from the list box.
Making kA
Enter the rated making capacity of the LV CB in peak kA or select the rating from the list box. The rated
making capacity for a circuit breaker is determined by evaluation of the maximum possible peak value of
the short-circuit current at the point of application of the circuit breaker.
Breaking kA
Enter the rated breaking capacity of the LV CB in kA or select the rating from the list box.
Min. Delay
from the list box.
12.14.3 Library Quick Pick - LV Circuit Breaker
The Library Quick Pick dialog box is accessed by double-clicking on a LV Circuit Breaker in the one-line
diagram, then clicking on the Library button in the editor. The Library Quick Pick options are a
compilation of the information you have specified for this element.

From this dialog box, pick a low voltage circuit breaker from the library. Select the appropriate
manufacturer and specifications for the low voltage circuit breaker, which is associated with this project
file. The low voltage circuit breaker specifications include Model/Class, Continuous Amp, Rated kV,
Interrupting kA, Test PF, and Fused/Unfused.

Engineering Libraries HV Circuit Breaker
12.15 HV Circuit Breaker
The High Voltage Circuit Breaker Library is set up in a similar manner to a file directory system. ANSI
or IEC libraries are available, depending upon which standard is selected for each individual circuit
breaker. The library header is defined by Standard and Manufacturer information. You can have
unlimited manufacturers within the library for each standard. Unlimited model / classes are available
within each manufacturer, as shown below.

High Voltage Circuit Breaker
Library
ANSI
IEC
Model / Class
Model / Class
Model / Class
Model / Class
Manufacturer
Manufacturer
Manufacturer
Manufacturer
Header Record

High voltage circuit breaker headers consist of Standard and Manufacturer information. You can have
unlimited Models / Classes for each header.
12.15.1 HV Circuit Breaker Library Selector

The High Voltage Circuit Breaker Library allows you to add new high voltage circuit breaker models or
select existing high voltage circuit breaker models for modification, deletion, or copying. To edit a high
voltage circuit breaker model, double-click on the item or click on the Edit button after highlighting it.
To delete a high voltage circuit breaker model, click on the Delete button after highlighting a model.
Add Manufacturer
the Edit button.
Copy Library
button.
12.15.2 HV Circuit Breaker Library Editor
This spreadsheet editor allows you to view and edit High Voltage Circuit Breaker Library data. Each
library record is a unique set of data for each high voltage circuit breaker header. Appending three
columns, Model+Continuous Amp+Max kV, forms a unique record name. If the combined name of these
three columns is repeated, that row is deleted, i.e., duplicate records are overwritten. The combination
of all three fields must contain at least one different character. If a row (record) of data duplicates a
previous one, PowerStation will request confirmation before overwriting it.

ANSI Standard
Model
Std.
Select the circuit breaker standard as Sym or Tot rated from the list box.

Sym Rated AC high voltage circuit breaker rated on a symmetrical current basis
Tot Rated AC high voltage circuit breaker rated on a total current basis
Cy
Select the rated interrupting time for ac high voltage circuit breakers in cycles from the list box.

CB Cycle Description
2 2-cycle ac high voltage circuit breakers with 1.5-cycle minimum contact parting time
3 3-cycle ac high voltage circuit breakers with 2-cycle minimum contact parting time
Continuous
Enter the continuous current rating of the HV CB in amperes or select the rating from the list box.
Max. kV
Enter the rated maximum kV of the HV CB in rms kV or select the rating from the list box.
Rated Int.
Enter the rated short-circuit current (rated interrupting capability) at the rated maximum kV in rms kA or
select the rating from the list box.

The interrupting capability of the circuit breaker is calculated by PowerStation as:

(rated short-circuit current) X (rated maximum kV) / (operating kV)

The limit for this calculated interrupting capability is the rated maximum interrupting capability of the
circuit breaker. This value is then used to compare with the calculated short-circuit duty of the breaker.
Note that the value of the prefault voltage is not used in determining the interrupting capability, i.e., if Vf
= 105%, the short-circuit duty is increased by 5%; however, the interrupting capability is not decreased
by 5%.
C & L rms
Enter the closing and latching capability of the HV CB in asymmetrical rms kA. This value is equal to
1.6 times the maximum interrupting capability.
C & L Crest
Enter the closing and latching capability of the HV CB in crest kA. This value is equal to 2.7 times the
maximum interrupting capability.
TRV T1
Enter the transient recovery voltage delay time in micro-seconds.
TRV T2
Enter the transient recovery voltage time to peak value in micro-seconds.
TRV R
Enter the transient recovery voltage rated increase rate in kV/micro-second.
IEC Standard
Model
Enter the manufacturer designated model or class.
FPC Factor
Select the first-pole-to-clear factor of the HV CB from the list box.
Rated A
Enter the rated normal current of the HV CB in amperes or select the rating from the list box.
Rated kV
Enter the rated voltage of the HV CB in kV or select the rating from the list box.
TRV
Enter the transient recovery voltage of the HV CB in kV.
Making
Enter the rated making capacity of the HV CB in peak kA or select the rating from the list box. The rated
making capacity for a circuit breaker is determined by the evaluation of the maximum possible peak value
of the short-circuit current at the point of application of the circuit breaker.
Breaking
Enter the rated breaking capacity of the HV CB in kA or select the rating from the list box.
AC Breaking
Enter the AC component of the rated short-circuit breaking current in kA or select the rating from the list
box.
Min. Delay
from the list box.
12.15.3 Library Quick Pick - HV Circuit Breaker
The Library Quick Pick dialog box is accessed by double-clicking on a HV Circuit Breaker in the one-
line diagram, then clicking on the Library button in the editor. The Library Quick Pick options are a
compilation of the information you have specified for this element.

From this dialog box, pick a high voltage circuit breaker from the library. Select the appropriate
manufacturer and specifications for the high voltage circuit breaker, which is associated with this project
file. The high voltage circuit breaker specifications include Model/Class, Test Std., Continuous Amp,
Cycle, Max kV, Rated Int. kA, Max Int. kA, C&L rms, and C&L Crest.

Engineering Libraries Fuse
12.16 Fuse
The Fuse Library is set up in a similar manner to a file directory system. ANSI or IEC libraries are
available, depending upon which standard is selected for each individual fuse. The library header is
defined by Standard (ANSI /IEC) and Manufacturer information. You can have unlimited manufacturers
within the library for each standard. Unlimited models / classes are available within each manufacturer,
as shown below.
Fuse Library
ANSI
IEC
Model / Class
Model / Class
Model / Class
Model / Class
Manufacturer
Manufacturer
Manufacturer
Manufacturer
Header Record

12.16.1 Fuse Library Selector

The Fuse Library allows you to add new fuse models or select existing fuse models for modification,
deletion, or copying. To edit a fuse model, double-click on the item or click on the Edit button after
highlighting it. To delete a fuse model, click on the Delete button after highlighting a model.
Add Manufacturer
the Edit button.
Copy Library
button.
12.16.2 Fuse Library Editor

This spreadsheet editor allows you to view and edit Fuse Library data. Each library record is a unique set
of data for each fuse header. Appending three columns, Model+Rated A+kV, forms a unique record
name. If the combined name of these three columns is repeated, that row is deleted, i.e., duplicate
records are overwritten. The combination of all three fields must contain at least one different
character. If a row (record) of data duplicates a previous one, PowerStation will request confirmation
ANSI Standard
Model
Enter the manufacturer designated model or design.
Rated A
Enter the rated continuous current in amperes.
kV
Enter the rated maximum voltage in kV.
Interrupting
Enter the rated interrupting capability of the fuse in symmetrical rms kA.
Test PF
Enter the testing short-circuit power factor in percent.
IEC Standard
Model
Enter the manufacturer designated model or design.
Rated A
Enter the rated continuous current in amperes.
kV
Enter the rated maximum voltage in kV.
Breaking (IEC)
Enter the rated breaking capacity in kA.
TRV (IEC)
Enter the transient recovery voltage (kV peak) in kV.
12.16.3 Library Quick Pick - Fuse
The Library Quick Pick dialog box is accessed by double-clicking on a fuse in the one-line diagram, then
clicking on the Library button in the editor. The Library Quick Pick options are a compilation of the
information you have specified for this element.

From this dialog box, pick a fuse from the library. Select the appropriate manufacturer and specifications
for the fuse, which is associated with this project file. The fuse specifications include Model/Class,
Continuous Amp, Rated kV, Interrupting kA, and Test PF.

Engineering Libraries Battery
12.17 Battery
The Battery Library is set up in a similar manner to a file directory system. The library header is defined
by Manufacturer and Model information. You can have unlimited headers (manufacturers) within the
library and unlimited Models for each manufacturer, as shown below.
Header
Header
Header
Header
Battery Model
Battery Model
Battery Model
Battery Model
ttery Library Ba

Battery headers are used to indicate the model and type of battery. Battery headers consist of the
following items:

1) Manufacturer Manufacturer Name
2) Model Battery Model
3) Charact. Type Characteristic Type: Time vs Amp or Time vs Kt
4) VPC Nominal Voltage per Cell
5) SG Specific Gravity at Base Temperature
6) Rp Resistance per Positive Plate in Ohms
7) Temp. Base temperature in Degrees Celsius
8) Time Constant Battery Time Constant in Second
9) Discharge Time Battery Rated Discharge Time in Hour
12.17.1 Battery Library Selector

The Battery Library allows you to add new battery headers or select existing battery headers for editing,
deleting, or copying. To edit a Battery Library, double-click on the item or click on the Edit button after
highlighting it. To delete a battery, click on the Delete button after highlighting it. PowerStation will
request confirmation to delete the selected battery.
Add
This dialog box is used to add a new battery header.

Copy
This dialog box is used to copy an existing battery header.

A battery header consists of all the information you see in this dialog box. You can create a new battery
header by changing any one of the items in the battery header information.
12.17.2 Battery Library Editor
To edit the Battery Library data, select a battery type from the Battery Library and click on the Edit
button. Each battery type (header) can contain an unlimited number of battery sizes. This spreadsheet
editor allows you to view and edit Battery Library data for a selected battery type. The name of the
battery type is displayed on top of the spreadsheet. Each battery record (row) is a unique set of data for
each battery size. Each battery record must have a unique identifier: Plates.

Available Size
Plates
Double-click on this field to enter the total number of plates for the selected battery model. The total
number of plates is always an odd number.
Cap
Double-click on this field to enter the nominal amp-hour capacity for the selected battery model.
1 Min SC Rating
Double-click on this field to enter the one minute short-circuit rating for the selected battery model. The
one minute rate is used for DC short-circuit calculations.
Performance Data
Enter the performance data for each available battery size in this spreadsheet by double clicking on each
cell. You can add, insert, and delete rows and columns to the spreadsheet. Double-click on the column
header to enter the end voltage per cell values. Double-click on the row header to enter time value in
minutes. Note that the cell performance data should be entered, on a per positive plate basis.
12.17.3 Library Quick Pick - Battery
The Library Quick Pick dialog box is accessed by double-clicking on a battery in the one-line diagram,
then clicking on the Library button in the editor. The Library Quick Pick options are a compilation of the
information you have specified for this element.

From this dialog box, select a battery type (header) and battery size from the Battery Library. For a
selected battery header, the Library Quick Pick dialog box allows you to pick a battery size from the list
of all battery sizes in the library.
Engineering Libraries Harmonic
12.18 Harmonic Library
The Harmonic Library is set up in a similar manner to a file directory system. The library header is
defined by Manufacturer and Model information. You can have unlimited headers (manufacturers) within
the library and unlimited models for each manufacturer, as shown below.

Current or Voltage Sources are available, depending upon which harmonic type is selected. The library
header is defined by harmonic type and manufacturer information. You can have unlimited
manufacturers within the library for each type. Unlimited models/classes are available within each
manufacturer, as shown below.

12.18.1 Harmonic Library Selector
The Harmonic Library allows you to add new harmonic library headers or select existing harmonic library
headers for editing, deleting, or copying. Harmonic Library headers are used to indicate the type,
manufacturer, and model of a harmonic source. To edit a Harmonic Library, double-click on the item or
click on the Edit button after highlighting it. To delete a harmonic model, click on the Delete button after
highlighting it. PowerStation will request confirmation to delete the selected harmonic model.

Add
This dialog box is used to add a new harmonic library header.

Copy
This dialog box is used to copy an existing harmonic library header.

12.18.2 Harmonic Library Editor
This spreadsheet editor allows you to view and edit Harmonic Library data.

Harmonic Order
This column is pre-numbered from the 2
nd
to the 73
rd
order, based on the applicable harmonic orders.
Mag.
Double-click on the cells in this column to enter the magnitude of harmonic current or voltage based on
the selected harmonic type.
Angle
Double-click on the cells in this column to enter the harmonic current or voltage phase angles based on
the selected harmonic type.
12.18.3 Library Quick Pick - Harmonic
The Library Quick Pick dialog box is accessed via the Library button, which is located in the editor of
elements containing a Harmonic page.

From this dialog box, select a harmonic type, manufacturer, and model from the Harmonic Library. For a
selected harmonic header, the Library Quick Pick dialog box allows you to pick a harmonic source model
from the list of models in the library.
Engineering Libraries Interrupting Cost Library

12.19 Interruption Cost Library
The Interrupting cost library is set up in a similar manner to a file directory system. The library header is
displays a list of all the interrupting cost load sector headers. You may have an unlimited number of
headers (load sectors) within the library. You may only have one set of interrupting cost data per load
sector as shown below.

12.19.1 Interruption Cost Library Selector
The Interrupting Cost Library Selector window allows the user several features that facilitate the entering
and removing of data. The user may add an unlimited number of load sectors, edit, copy, and delete
them. To edit an existing load sector all the user has to do is double click or highlight it and press edit.

Add
The interrupting cost library Add dialog box is used to add a new interrupting cost load sector to the
library header.


Copy
The Interrupting Cost Library Copy Dialog Box is used to duplicate any desired load sector. The dialog
box will ask the user to enter a new name since the load sector names must be uniquely assigned.

12.19.2 Interruption Cost Library Editor
The Interrupting Cost Library Editor is designed as a spreadsheet for the purpose of entering or removing
interrupting cost data. The user may add insert or delete rows at will.

Minute
This column has been pre-labeled and is used to specify the time in minutes for each Interrupting Cost
Data Point.
Cost ($/kW)
This column has been pre-labeled and is used to enter the Interrupting Cost in dollars per kilowatt for
each minute time interval.
12.19.3 Interruption Cost Library Load Sector Drop Down List
Interrupting Cost Load Sectors are not selected from a library quick pick dialog box. The Interrupting
Cost Load Sectors are selected from the element editors' reliability page. All AC loads have a drop down
menu that allows the user to select the desired load sector.

Engineering Libraries Reliability Library
12.20 Reliability Library
The Reliability Library is setup as a file directory system. The first library header is the PowerStation
element for which reliability data is available, for example 2 winding transformers or buses. The first
sub-division after the kind of element is the Source of the Reliability Data (IEEE, industrial maintenance
data, etc, etc). The next subdivision is the device type (in the case of 2 winding transformers the classes
would be dry or liquid type). After the device type the Reliability Data is sorted according to different
classes (kV, kVA ratings, etc).

The following diagram illustrates the way the Reliability Library is organized.

12.20.1 Reliability Library Selector
The Reliability Library Selector window allows the user to add or modify the contents of the Reliability
Library. From this window the user may edit, add, copy, or remove any set of reliability data for all the
different PowerStation elements. Double clicking on a header or class brings up the Add or Edit
Reliability Data Dialog Boxes.

Add
The Add dialog box is used to insert a new set of Reliability Data for any given PowerStation element.
Pressing the add button on the Reliability Library Selector brings up the Add dialog window, which
prompts the user for new Source and Class names.

Copy
The Copy dialog window allows the user to copy any set of Reliability Library Data for any given
element. The dialog window prompts the user for a new PowerStation Element, Source, and Class name
for the duplicate data. If a user inadvertently enters the Element, Source, and Class name the same as that
of an existing set of Reliability Data, PowerStation displays an error message.

12.20.2 Reliability Library Editor
The Reliability Library editor is designed as a spreadsheet that allows the user to enter the Reliability
Data Values for a given class. Using this editor, the user may edit, add, insert, or delete any row or
individual values. All the different columns within the Reliability Library editor are pre-labeled
according to the kind of Reliability data that is used by the Reliability Analysis Program.

Class
This column is for entering the different class names under the given source and type for the given device.
The determining value for a class may be for example a voltage level, kVA rating, etc, etc.
Active Failure / yr.
This column is for entering the Active Failure per year rate of the device.
Passive Failure / yr.
This column is for entering the Passive Failure per year rate of the device.
MTTR
This column is for entering the Mean Time To Repair value in hours for the given device.
Switch Time
This column is for entering the device switching time.
Replace Time
This column is for entering the time needed to replace the given device.
12.20.3 Library Quick Pick - Reliability
The Library Quick Pick dialog box is accessed via the Library button, which is located in the editor of
elements containing a reliability page. The Reliability Library Quick Pick is very similar to the
Reliability Library Editor. Using this dialog box the user may select the source, type and class of
reliability data to be used for the given device.

Source
This box allows the user to select the Source of the reliability data to be used for the given device.
Type
This box allows the user to select the type of device for selecting the devices reliability data.

ETAP

PowerStation
4.0
User Guide
Copyright 2001
All Rights Reserved





Southern California

(949) 462-0100 Sales
(949) 462-0400 Fax

Chapter 13

Short-Circuit Analysis

The PowerStation Short-Circuit Analysis program analyzes the effect of three-phase, line-to-ground, line-
to-line, and line-to-line-to-ground faults on the electrical distribution systems. The program calculates the
total short-circuit currents as well as the contributions of individual motors, generators, and utility ties in
the system. Fault duties are in compliance with the latest editions of the ANSI/IEEE standards (C37
series) and IEC standards (IEC 909 and others).

This chapter describes definitions and usage of different tools you will need to run short-circuit studies.
In order to give you a better understanding of the standards applied to short-circuit studies and to interpret
output results more easily, some theoretical background and standard information are also included.

The ANSI/IEEE Short-Circuit Toolbar and IEC Short-Circuit Toolbar sections explain how you can
launch a short-circuit calculation, open and view an output report, or select display options. The Short-
Circuit Study Case Editor section explains how you can create a new study case, what parameters are
required to specify a study case, and how to set them. The Display Options section explains what options
are available for displaying some key system parameters and the output results on the one-line diagram,
and how to set them.

The ANSI/IEEE Calculation Methods section lists standard compliance information and both general and
detailed descriptions of calculation methods used by the program. In particular, definitions and
discussion of , 1.5-4, and 30 cycle networks, calculation of ANSI multiplying factors, and high voltage
and low voltage circuit breaker momentary and interrupting duties are provided. The Required Data
section describes what data are necessary to perform short-circuit calculations and where to enter them. If
you perform short-circuit studies using IEC Standards, the IEC Calculation Methods section provides
useful information on standard compliance, definitions on most commonly used IEC technical terms, and
general and detailed descriptions of calculation methods for all important results, including initial
symmetrical short-circuit current, peak short-circuit current, symmetrical short-circuit breaking current,
and steady-state short-circuit current. Finally, the Short-Circuit Study Output Report section illustrates
and explains output reports and their format.
Short-Circuit Analysis ANSI Short-Circuit Toolbar
13.1 ANSI Short-Circuit Toolbar
This toolbar is active when you are in Short-Circuit mode and the standard is set to ANSI in the Short-
Circuit Study Case Editor.

Alert View
Short-Circuit Display Options
Save Fault kA for PowerPlot
LG, LL, LLG & 3-Phase Faults 30 cycle
LG, LL, LLG & 3-Phase Faults 1.5-4 Cycle
LG, LL, LLG & 3-Phase Faults cycle
3-Phase Faults 30 Cycle Network
3-Phase Faults Device Duty
Get Archived Data
Get Online Data
Halt Current Calculation
Short-Circuit Report Manager
3-Phase Faults - Device Duty
Click on this button to perform a three-phase fault study per ANSI C37 Standard. This study calculates
momentary symmetrical and asymmetrical rms, momentary asymmetrical crest, interrupting symmetrical
rms, and interrupting adjusted symmetrical rms short-circuit currents at faulted buses. The program
checks the protective device rated close and latching, and adjusted interrupting capacities against the fault
currents, and flags inadequate devices.

Generators and motors are modeled by their positive sequence subtransient reactances.
3-Phase Faults - 30 Cycle Network
Click on this button to perform a three-phase fault study per ANSI standards. This study calculates short-
circuit currents in their rms values after 30 cycles at faulted buses.

Generators are modeled by their positive sequence transient reactances, and short-circuit current
contributions from motors are ignored.
LG, LL, LLG, & 3-Phase Faults - Cycle
Click on this button to perform line-to-ground, line-to-line, line-to-line-to-ground, and three-phase fault
studies per ANSI standards. This study calculates short-circuit currents in their rms values at cycle at
faulted buses.

Generators and motors are modeled by their positive, negative, and zero sequence subtransient reactances.
In all the unbalanced fault calculations ( cycle, 1.5-4 cycle and 30 cycle), it is assumed that the negative
sequence impedance of a machine is equal to its positive sequence impedance. Generator, motor, and
transformer grounding types and winding connections are taken into consideration when constructing
system positive, negative, and zero sequence networks.
LG, LL, LLG, & 3-Phase Faults - 1.5 to 4 Cycle
Click on this button to perform three-phase, line-to-ground, line-to-line, line-to-line-to-ground, and three-
phase fault studies per ANSI standards. This study calculates short-circuit currents in their rms values
between 1.5 to 4 cycles at faulted buses.

Generators are modeled by their positive, negative, and zero sequence subtransient reactances, and motors
are modeled by their positive, negative and zero sequence transient reactances. Generator, motor and
transformer grounding types and winding connections are taken into considerations when constructing
system positive, negative, and zero sequential networks.
LG, LL, LLG, & 3-Phase Faults - 30 Cycle
Click on this button to perform three-phase, line-to-ground, line-to-line, line-to-line-to-ground, and three-
phase fault studies per ANSI standards. This study calculates short-circuit currents in their rms values at
30-cycles at faulted buses.

Generators are modeled by their positive, negative, and zero sequence reactances, and short-circuit
current contributions from motors are ignored. Generator, motor, and transformer grounding types and
winding connections are taken into consideration when constructing system positive, negative, and zero
sequence networks.
Click on this button to save momentary symmetrical short-circuit currents (rms value) for protective
device coordination studies using PowerPlot.
See the Display Options section to customize the short-circuit annotation display options on the one-line
diagram. This dialog box contains options for ANSI short-circuit study results and associated device
parameters.
Alert
After performing a short-circuit study, you can click on this button to open the Alert View, which lists all
devices with critical and marginal violations based on the settings in the study case.
Short-circuit output reports are provided in two forms: ASCII text files and Crystal Reports. The Report
Manager provides four pages (Complete, Input, Result, and Summary) for viewing the different parts of
the output report for both text and Crystal Reports. Available formats for Crystal Reports are displayed in
each page of the Report Manager for ANSI short-circuit studies.

If any other formats other than TextRept are chosen in the Report Manager, the Crystal Reports will be
activated. You can open the whole short-circuit output report or only a part of it, depending on the format
selection.

You can also view output reports by clicking on the View Output Report button on the Study Case
Toolbar. A list of all output files in the selected project directory is provided for short-circuit
calculations. To view any of the listed output reports, click on the output report name, and then click on
the View Output Report button.

Short circuit text output reports (with an .shr extension) can be viewed by any word processor such as
Notepad, WordPad, and Microsoft Word. Currently, by default, the output reports are viewed by
Notepad. You can change the default viewer in the ETAPS.INI file to the viewer of your preference
(refer to Chapter 1).

The text output reports are 132 characters wide with 66 lines per page. For the correct formatting and
For Notepad, WordPad, and Microsoft Word applications we have recommend settings that are explained
in the Printing & Plotting section.
The Stop Sign button is normally disabled. When a short-circuit calculation has been initiated, this button
becomes enabled and shows a red stop sign. Clicking on this button will terminate the calculation.
Get Online Data
When PowerStation Management System is set-up, and the Sys Monitor presentation is on-line, you can
bring real-time data into your off-line presentation and run a Load Flow by pressing on this button. You
will notice that the Operating Loads, Bus Voltages, and Study Case Editor will be updated with the on-
line data.
Get Archived Data
When ETAPS Playback is set-up, and any presentation is on Playback mode, you can bring this data into
your presentation and run a Load Flow by pressing on this button. You will notice that the Operating
Loads, Bus Voltages, and Study Case Editor will be updated with the playback data.
Short-Circuit Analysis IEC Short-Circuit Toolbar
13.2 IEC Short-Circuit Toolbar
This toolbar is active when you are in Short-Circuit mode and the standard is set to IEC in the Short-
Circuit Study Case Editor.

3-Phase Faults Device Duty (IEC 909)
3-Phase Faults Transient Study (IEC 363)
LG, LL, LLG & 3-Phase Faults (IEC 909)
View Alert
Get Archived Data
Get Online Data
3-Phase Faults - Device Duty (IEC 909)
Click on this button to perform a three-phase fault study per IEC 909 Standard. This study calculates
initial symmetrical rms, peak, symmetrical and asymmetrical breaking rms and steady-state rms short-
circuit currents and their dc offset at faulted buses. The program checks the protective device rated
making and breaking capacities against the fault currents and flags inadequate devices.

Generators are modeled by their positive sequence subtransient reactances, and motors are modeled by
their locked-rotor impedance.
LG, LL, LLG, & 3-Phase Faults (IEC 909)
Click on this button to perform line-to-ground, line-to-line, line-to-line-to-ground, and three-phase fault
studies per IEC 909 Standard. This study calculates initial symmetrical rms, peak and symmetrical
breaking rms, and steady-state rms short-circuit currents at faulted buses.

Generators are modeled by their positive, negative, and zero sequence reactances, and motors are
modeled by their locked-rotor impedance. It is assumed that the negative sequence impedance of a
machine is equal to its positive sequence impedance. Generator, motor, and transformer grounding types,
and winding connections are taken into consideration when constructing system positive, negative, and
zero sequence networks.
3-Phase Faults - Transient Study (IEC 363)
Click on this button to perform a three-phase fault study per IEC 61363 Standard. This study calculates
instantaneous values of actual short-circuit current, dc offset, short-circuit current envelope, ac
component, and dc offset in percent for total short-circuit current at faulted buses. The results are
tabulated as a function of time.

Generators are modeled by their positive sequence subtransient reactances, and motors are modeled by
their locked-rotor impedance. Their subtransient and transient time constants and dc time constants are
also considered in the calculation.
Click on this button to save initial symmetrical short-circuit currents (rms value) for protective device
coordination studies using PowerPlot.
See the Display Options section to customize the short-circuit annotation display options on the one-line
diagram. This dialog box contains options for IEC short-circuit study results and associated device
parameters.
Alert View
After performing a short-circuit study, you can click on this button to open the Alert View, which lists all
devices with critical and marginal violations based on the settings in the study case.
Short-circuit output reports are provided in two forms: ASCII text files and Crystal Reports. The Report
each page of the Report Manager.


PowerStation text output reports (with an .shr extension) can be viewed by any word processor such as

Get Online Data
line data.
Get Archived Data

Short-Circuit Analysis Study Case Editor

13.3 Study Case Editor
The Short-Circuit Study Case Editor contains solution control variables, faulted bus selection, and a
variety of options for output reports. PowerStation allows you to create and save an unlimited number of
study cases. Short-circuit calculations are conducted and reported in accordance with the settings of the
study case selected in the toolbar. You can easily switch between study cases without the trouble of
resetting the study case options each time. This feature is designed to organize your study efforts and
save you time.

With respect to the multi-dimensional database concept of PowerStation, study cases can be used for any
combination of the three major system components, i.e. for any configuration status, one-line diagram
presentation, and Base/Revision data.

The Short-Circuit Study Case Editor can be accessed by clicking on the Study Case button from the Study
Case Toolbar. You can also access this editor from the Project View by clicking on the Short-Circuit
Study Case folder.

Short-Circuit Study Case Toolbar

To create a new study case, go to Project View, right-click on the Short-Circuit Study Case folder, and
select Create New. The program will then create a new study case, which is a copy of the default study
case, and add it to the Short-Circuit Study Case folder.

Project View

13.3.1 Info Page

Study Case ID
Study case ID is shown in this entry field. You can rename a study case by simply deleting the old ID
and entering a new ID. The study case ID can be up to 12 alphanumeric characters. Use the Navigator
button at the bottom of the editor to go from one study case to the next existing study case.
XFMR Tap
Two methods are provided for modeling transformer off-nominal tap settings:
Adjust Base kV
Base voltages of the buses are calculated using transformer turn ratios, which include the transformer
rated kVs as well as the off-nominal, tap settings.
Use Nominal Tap
Transformer rated kVs are used as the transformer turn ratios for calculating base voltages of the buses,
i.e., all off-nominal tap settings are ignored and transformer impedances are not adjusted.


In case a system contains transformers with incompatible voltage ratios (including taps) in a loop, it can
lead to two different base voltage values at a bus, which prevents the short-circuit calculation from
continuing. If this situation occurs, ETAP will post a message to inform you of this condition and give
you the option to continue the calculation with the Use Nominal Tap alternative. If you answer Yes, it
will carry out the calculation with the Use Nominal Tap option.
Cable/OL Heater
Select the appropriate check boxes in this option group to include the impedance of equipment cable and
overload heaters of medium and/or low voltage motors in short-circuit studies.

Report
You can select the following options for short-circuit output reports.
Contribution Level
Choose how far away you want to see the short-circuit current contributions from individual buses to each
faulted bus by specifying the number of bus levels away in this section. Note that for large systems,
choosing a high bus level results in very large output reports (the report grows exponentially with the
number of levels being chosen).

When selecting contribution levels of n buses away, depending on the number of faulted buses, the
calculated results are displayed on the one-line diagram and printed in the output report as follows:

Fault 1 (one) bus Displayed results: whole system
Reported output: n bus levels away

Fault more than one bus Displayed results: 1 bus level away (from the adjacent buses)
Reported output: n bus levels away
Motor Contribution Based on
You can select the following options for considering motor contribution in short-circuit studies.
Motor Status
When this option is selected, motors whose status is either Continuous or Intermittent will make
contributions in short-circuit. Motors with Spare status will not be considered in the short-circuit
analysis.

Loading Category
When this option is selected, you can select a loading category from the selection box to the right. In the
short-circuit calculation, motors that have non-zero loading in the selected loading category will have a
contribution in short-circuit. Motors with zero loading in the selected loading category will not be
included in the short-circuit analysis.
Both
When this option is selected, a motor will make contribution in short-circuit if it meets either the Motor
Status condition or the Loading Category condition. That is, for a motor to be excluded in the short-
circuit analysis, it has to be in the Spare status and have zero loading in the selected loading category.

Bus Selection
PowerStation is capable of faulting one or more buses in the same run; however, in the latter case buses
are faulted individually, not simultaneously. Depending on the specified fault type, the program will
place a three-phase, line-to-ground, line-to-line, and line-to-line-to-ground fault at each bus which is
faulted for short-circuit studies.

When you open the Short-Circuit Study Case Editor for the first time, all buses are listed in the Dont
Fault list box. This means that none of the buses are faulted. Using the following procedures, you can
decide which bus(es) you want to fault for this study case.

To fault a bus, highlight the bus ID in the Dont Fault list box and click on the Fault button. The
highlighted bus will be transferred to the Fault list box.
To remove a bus from the Fault list box, highlight the bus ID and click on the Fault button. The
highlighted bus will be transferred to the Dont Fault list box.
If you wish to fault all buses, or medium voltage buses, or low voltage buses, select that option and
click on the Fault button. The specified buses will be transferred from the Dont Fault list box to
the Fault list box.
To remove all buses, or medium voltage buses, or low voltage buses from the Fault list box, select
that option and click on the Fault button. The specified buses will be transferred from the Fault list
box to the Dont Fault list box.
Remarks 2
nd
Line
You can enter up to 120 alphanumeric characters in this field. Information entered here will be printed on
the second line of every output report page header line. These remarks can provide specific information
regarding each study case. Note that the first line of the header information is global for all study cases
and is entered in the Project Menu.
13.3.2 Standard Page
Standard
Both ANSI and IEC standards are available for short-circuit studies. Select the short-circuit study
standard by clicking on the standard notation. Note that different sets of solution control variables
(prefault voltage, calculation methods, etc.) are available for each standard.

When you create a new study case the short-circuit standard is set equal to the project standard you have
specified in the Project Standards Editor, which is accessible from the Project Menu. Note that the study
case standard can be changed independently of the project standard.

When the ANSI standard is selected, this page will appear as shown below.

Study Page ANSI Standard

When the IEC standard is selected, the study options will change and you will see the page shown below.

Study Case IEC Standard


Prefault Voltage - ANSI Standard
You can select either fixed or variable prefault voltages for all buses.
Fixed Prefault Voltage
This option allows the user to specify a fixed prefault voltage for all the faulted buses. This fixed value
can be in percent of bus nominal kV or base kV. Bus nominal kV is the value entered in the Bus Editor
by the user to represent the normal operating voltage. The bus base kV is calculated by the program and
is only reported in the results section of the Short-Circuit report for each faulted bus.

The process of computing base kV starts from one of the swing machines, such as a utility or a generator,
by taking its design voltage as the base kV for its terminal bus. It then propagates throughout the entire
system. When it encounters a transformer from one side, the transformer rated voltage ratio will be used
to calculate the base KV for the buses on other sides. If the Adjust Base kV option is selected on the
Info Page of the Short-Circuit Study Case editor, the transformer tap values will also be used in the base
kV calculation along with transformer rated voltage ratio. It can be seen from this calculation procedure
that the base kV is close to the operating voltage, provided that the swing machine is operating at its
design setting.

Variable Prefault Voltage
If you select the Vmag x Nominal kV (in the Bus Editor) prefault voltage option, PowerStation uses the
bus voltages entered in the Bus editors as the prefault voltage for faulted buses. Using this option, you
can perform short-circuit studies with each faulted bus having a different prefault voltage. For instance,
you can perform short-circuit studies using the bus voltages calculated from a specific load flow study
and therefore, calculate fault currents for an actual operating condition. To do so, select Update Initial
Bus Voltages from the Load Flow Study Case Editor and run a load flow analysis.

As the short-circuit current is proportional to the prefault voltage, different options will most likely give
different results. However, with any one of the above options, the calculated fault current is the same as
long as the prefault voltage in kV is the same. Then, which option should be used for a study? The
answer is dependent on the users engineering judgment and objective of the study. If you want to
calculate the fault current to size protective switching devices, you may want to apply the maximum
possible prefault voltages in the calculation. This can be done by using the option of Fixed Base kV. If
the bus normal operating voltage is entered in the Bus Editor as the bus nominal voltage, you may also
use the Fixed Nominal kV option.

Machine X/R - ANSI Standard
Fixed and variable machine X/R options are available for short-circuit calculations. Note that selection of
fixed or variable machine X/R impacts only the interrupting (1.5-4 cycle) duty calculations of high
voltage circuit breakers.
Fixed X/R
PowerStation uses the specified machine X/R ratio (=X
d
/Ra) for both cycle and 1.5-4 cycle networks.
The intention of this option is to account for the fact that ANSI standard does not consider variable
machine X/R ratio.


The following example shows Ra calculations when X/R ratio is fixed:

Cycle Network 1.5-4 Cycle Network
Input: Xsc 15 25
Input: X/R = 10
Calculated: Ra 1.5 2.5
Variable X/R
PowerStation uses the specified machine X/R ratio and subtransient reactance (X
d
) to calculate the
armature resistance (Ra). This resistance is then used for both cycle and 1.5-4 cycle networks. Note
that the motor reactance for 1.5-4 cycle network is larger than the motor reactance for cycle networks.
Therefore, this option results in a higher machine X/R ratio and a higher short-circuit contribution for the
interrupting fault calculation of a high voltage circuit breaker than the fixed X/R option.

The following example shows Ra and X/R calculations when variable X/R is considered:

Cycle Network 1.5-4 Cycle Network
Input: Xsc 15 25
Input: X/R = 10
Calculated: Ra 1.5 1.5
Final: X/R 10 16.7

HV CB Interrupting Capability
According to ANSI standards, the rated interrupting capability entered in the High Voltage Circuit
Breaker Editor corresponds to the maximum kV of the circuit breaker. When the circuit breaker is
utilized under a voltage below this maximum kV, its capability is actually higher than the rated
interrupting kA. In this section, you specify the operating voltage to be used to adjust breaker rating.
Nominal kV
When this option is selected, the nominal kV of the bus, connected to the circuit breaker, is assumed to be
the operating voltage, and breaker, interrupting rating is adjusted to this voltage value.
Nominal kV & Vf
When this option is selected, the operating voltage of the breaker is calculated as the multiplication of the
prefault voltage and the nominal kV of the bus the circuit breaker is connected to. The circuit breaker
interrupting rating is adjusted to this voltage value.
Prefault Voltage - IEC Standard
Enter voltage C factors for the indicated bus voltage levels. The equivalent voltage source used in the
IEC short-circuit calculations will be adjusted according to this voltage factor as entered in the study case.

The defaults of the voltage C factors are from Table I of IEC 909 Standard.

230 V & 400 V C Factor = 1.0
Other < 1001 V C Factor = 1.05
1001 to 35000 V C Factor = 1.1
> 35000 V C Factor = 1.1

In calculations of the minimum steady-state short-circuit current, the factor Cmin is used as specified in
IEC 909 Standard.
Calculation Method - IEC Standard
X/R for Peak Current
Method A Using the uniform ratio X/R in calculating the peak current
Method B Using the X/R ratio at the short-circuit location in calculating the peak current
Method C Using equivalent frequency in calculating the peak current
Breaking kA
The breaking duty of circuit breakers and fuses are calculated based on the following two methods:

No Mtr Decay - AC asynchronous (induction) motor decay is not included in the calculation.
With Mtr Decay - AC asynchronous (induction) motor decay is included in the calculation.
Steady-State kA
Steady-state short-circuit current is an rms value which remains after the decay of transient phenomena

Max Value - Factors are used for steady-state short-circuit current that reflect maximum modeling
inaccuracies. This value is used to determine minimum device ratings.
Min Value - Factors are used for steady-state short-circuit that reflect minimum modeling
inaccuracies. This value is used for relay coordination purposes in preventing the occurrence of
nuisance trips and loading deviations.
Fault Impedance for Line-to-Ground Fault
You may consider fault impedance in the line-to-ground fault calculation. In this section, you specify the
fault impedance to be applied to all the faulted buses.
Include Fault Impedance Zf
Check this box to include fault impedance in the calculation. You can enter fault impedance in the editor
box below.
Fault Impedance Unit
You can enter the fault impedance in either ohms or percent. If the Ohm option is selected, the values in
the R and X editor boxes are in ohms. If you select the Percent option, the values in the R and X editor
boxes are in percent based on 100 MVA and the nominal kV of the faulted bus.
R and X
In these two editor boxes, you enter the fault impedance in either ohms or percent, depending on the fault
impedance unit selected. Note that these values apply to all the faulted buses.
Arc Flash Analysis
You can perform arc flash analysis in 3-phase device duty calculation. In this section, you specify
whether you want to perform the analysis for all faulted buses.

NFPA 70E
Check this box to include an arc flash analysis of NFPA 70E-2000 when you perform 3-phase device duty
calculation.
Protective Device Duty ANSI Standard
You can select to use either the bus total fault current or the maximum current through a protective device
to compare against protective device duty.
Based on Total Bus Fault Current
Check this box to use the total bus fault current to compare against protective device rating.
Based on Maximum Through Fault Current
Check this box to use the maximum through fault current to compare against protective device rating.
The maximum through fault current is determined as the larger value between the fault current
contribution through a protective device and the total bus fault current minus the contribution through the
device.
Report Breaking Duty vs. CB Time Delay IEC Standard
When this box is checked, in the IEC Device Duty calculation, the program will report a list of breaking
currents for a number of different delay times in the individual fault calculation result page of the crystal
report.
13.3.3 Alert
The Alert page allows the user to setup alerts on short-circuit calculation results. The objective is to alert
the user of certain conditions of interest in short-circuit studies. The alerts are determined based on
predetermined device ratings and system topology after performing a Short-circuit calculation


Alert
There are two categories of alerts generated by the short-circuit calculations: Critical and Marginal. The
difference between the two is their use of different condition percent values for the same monitored
parameter. If a condition for a Critical Alert is met, then an alert will be generated in the alert view
window and the overloaded element will turn red in the one-line diagram. The same is true for Marginal
Alerts, with the exception that the overloaded component will be displayed in the color magenta. Also,
the Marginal Alerts check box must be selected if the user desires to display the Marginal Alerts. If a
device alert qualifies it for both Critical and Marginal alerts, then only Critical Alerts are displayed.
Bus Alert
Short-circuit simulation Alerts for buses are designed to monitor crest, symmetrical and asymmetrical
bracing conditions. These conditions are determined from bus rating values and Short-circuit analysis
results. The percent of monitored parameter value in the Short-circuit study case alert setup page is fixed
at 100% for Critical Short-circuit Alerts. The Marginal alert percent value is user defined.
Protective Device Alert
The setup of protective device simulation Alerts is similar to that of bus Alerts. The user may enter into
the Short-circuit study case editor alert setup page the monitored parameter percent values for Marginal
Alerts; however, this value is fixed to 100% for Critical level alerts.
Marginal Device Limit
PowerStation flags all protective devices whose momentary and interrupting duties exceed their
capabilities by displaying the element in red on the one-line diagram and flagging it in the output report.
To flag devices with marginal capabilities, select the Marginal Device Limit option and specify the
marginal limit in percent of the device capability.

For example, consider a circuit breaker with an interrupting rating of 42 kA and a calculated short-circuit
duty of 41 kA. The capability of this circuit breaker is not exceeded; however, if the marginal device
limit is set to 95%, the circuit breaker will be flagged in the output report and will be displayed in purple
in the one-line diagram as a device with marginal capability.
Auto Display
The auto display feature of the Short-circuit Study Case Editor Alert Setup page allows the user to decide
if the Alert View Window should be automatically displayed as soon as the Short-circuit calculation is
completed.
Short-Circuit Analysis Display Options

13.4 Display Options
The Short-Circuit Analysis Display Options consist of a Results page and three pages for AC, AC-DC,
and DC info annotations. Note that the colors and displayed annotations selected for each study are
specific to that study.
13.4.1 Result Page
The Result Page of the Display Options is where you select different result annotations to be displayed in
the one-line diagram. Depending on the short-circuit study type, ANSI or IEC, this page gives you
different options for three-phase fault results. If the study type is ANSI short-circuit analysis, you will
see the Result Page as shown below.

If the study type is IEC short-circuit analysis, the options in the 3-Phase Faults section are Peak or Initial
Symmetrical rms current. The rest of the sections are the same as that for the ANSI short-circuit analysis.
Color
Units
Select the Units check box to show kA next to all displayed fault currents on the one-line diagram.

3-Phase Fault Currents
For the ANSI short-circuit method (three-phase faults), select momentary or interrupting
symmetrical kA to be displayed on the one-line diagram.
For the IEC short-circuit method (three-phase faults), select peak or initial symmetrical rms kA to
be displayed on the one-line diagram.
LG Fault Currents
Select 3Io to display three times of zero sequence current in kA, or select Ia to display phase A of the
fault current in kA, for line-to-ground fault.
Bus Voltage
Select bus voltage display units in kV or in percent. Bus voltages are only displayed when you fault one
bus in the system. For a line-to-ground fault, PowerStation displays the voltage of phase B of every bus
in the system.
Motor Contributions
Display Medium Voltage Motor Contributions
Select this option to display short-circuit current contributions from medium voltage motors (more than
1kV) on the one-line diagram.
Display Large Low Voltage Motor Contributions
Select this option to display short-circuit current contributions from large low voltage motors (motor sizes
equal to or larger than 100 hp or kW) on the one-line diagram.
Display Small Low Voltage Motor Contributions
Select this option to display short-circuit current contributions from small low voltage motors (motor
sizes smaller than 100 hp or kW) on the one-line diagram.

13.4.2 AC Page
Color
ID
diagram.

Rating
line diagram.

Device Type Rating
Gen. (Generator) kW / MW
Motor HP / kW
Load kVA / MVA
Panel Connection Type (# of Phases - # of Wires)
Bus kA Bracing
kV

A


Z

Motor % LRC

D-Y
one-line diagram.

For transformers, the operating tap settings for primary, secondary, and tertiary windings are also
Composite Motor
Click on this check box to display the AC composite motor IDs on the one-line diagram, then select the
Use Default Options

13.4.3 AC-DC Page

Color
ID
line diagram.
Rating
one-line diagram.

Device Type Rating
UPS kVA
VFD HP / kW
kV
A
one-line diagram.

Device Type Amp

Composite Network
Use Default Options

13.4.4 DC Page
Color
ID
diagram.
Rating
line diagram.

Device Type Rating
Battery Ampere Hour
Motor HP / kW
Load kW / MW
Converter kW / MW
kV

A
one-line diagram.

Z


Composite Motor
Use Default Options

Short-Circuit Analysis ANSI/IEEE Calculation Methods
13.5 ANSI/IEEE Calculation Methods
PowerStation provides two short-circuit calculation methods based on ANSI/IEEE and IEC standards.
You can select the calculation method from the Short-Circuit Study Case Editor. This section describes
the ANSI/IEEE standard method of calculation.
Standard Compliance
PowerStation short-circuit calculation per ANSI/IEEE standards fully complies with the latest
ANSI/IEEE and UL standards, as listed below:

Standard Pub. Year Title
IEEE C37.04
IEEE C37.04f
IEEE C37.04g
IEEE C37.04h
IEEE C37.04i
1979 (1988)
1990
1986
1990
1991
Standard Rating Structure for AC High-Voltage Circuit Breakers
Rated on a Symmetrical Current Basis and Supplements
IEEE C37.010
IEEE C37.010b
IEEE C37.010e
1979 (1988)
1985
1985
Standard Application Guide for AC High-Voltage Circuit
Breakers Rated on a Symmetrical Current Basis and Supplements
IEEE C37.013 1997 Standard for AC High-Voltage Generator Circuit Breakers Rated
on a Symmetrical Current Basis
IEEE C37.20.1 1993 Standard for Metal Enclosed Low-Voltage Power Circuit Breaker
Switchgear
IEEE Std 399 1990 Power System Analysis -- the Brown Book
IEEE Std 141 1986 Electric Power Distribution for Industrial Plants -- the Red Book
IEEE Std 242 1986 IEEE Recommended Practice for Protection and Coordination of
Industrial and Commercial Power Systems the Buff Book
UL 489_9 1996 Standard for Safety for Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-
Case Switches, and Circuit-Breaker Enclosures
General Description of Calculation Methodology
In ANSI/IEEE short-circuit calculations, an equivalent voltage source at the fault location, which equals
the prefault voltage at the location, replaces all external voltage sources and machine internal voltage
sources.

All machines are represented by their internal impedances. Line capacitances and static loads are
neglected. Transformer taps can be set at either the nominal position or at the tapped position, and
different schemes are available to correct transformer impedance and system voltages if off-nominal tap
setting exists. It is assumed the fault is bolted, therefore, arc resistances are not considered. System
impedances are assumed to be balanced three-phase, and the method of symmetrical components is used
for unbalanced fault calculations.

Three different impedance networks are formed to calculate momentary, interrupting, and steady-state
short-circuit currents, and corresponding duties for various protective devices. These networks are:
cycle network (subtransient network), 1.5-4 cycle network (transient network), and 30-cycle network
(steady-state network).

ANSI/IEEE Standards recommend the use of separate R and X networks to calculate X/R values. An X/R
ratio is obtained for each individual faulted bus and short-circuit current. This X/R ratio is then used to
determine the multiplying factor to account for the system DC offset.
Using the cycle and 1.5-4 cycle networks, the symmetrical rms value of the momentary and
interrupting short-circuit currents are solved first. These values are then multiplied by appropriate
multiplying factors to finally obtain the asymmetrical value of the momentary and interrupting short-
circuit currents.
Definition of Terms
The following terms are helpful in understanding short-circuit calculations using ANSI/IEEE standards.
Cycle Network
This is the network used to calculate momentary short-circuit current and protective device duties at the
cycle after the fault. The following table shows the type of device and its associated duties using the
cycle network.

Type of Device Duty
High voltage circuit breaker Closing and latching capability
Low voltage circuit breaker Interrupting capability
Fuse Interrupting capability
Switchgear and MCC Bus bracing
Relay Instantaneous settings
Cycle Network Duty

The cycle network is also referred to as the subtransient network, primarily because all rotating
machines are represented by their subtransient reactances, as shown in the following table:

Type of Machine Xsc
Utility X
Turbo generator X
d

Hydro-generator with amortisseur winding X
d

Hydro-generator without amortisseur winding 0.75 X
d

Condenser X
d

Synchronous motor X
d

Induction Machine
> 1000 hp @ 1800 rpm or less X
d

> 250 hp @ 3600 rpm X
d

All other > 50 hp 1.2 X
d

< 50 hp 1.67 X
d

Cycle Network Impedance

(X
d
= 1/LRC for induction motors)
1.5-4 Cycle Network
This network is used to calculate the interrupting short-circuit current and protective device duties 1.5-4
cycles after the fault. The following table shows the type of device and its associated duties using the 1.5-
4 cycle network.
Type of Device Duty
High voltage circuit breaker Interrupting capability
Low voltage circuit breaker N/A
Fuse N/A
Switchgear and MCC N/A
Relay N/A
1.5-4 Cycle Network Duty
The 1.5-4 cycle network is also referred to as the transient network. The type of rotating machine and its
representation is shown in the following table:

Type of Machine Xsc
Utility X
Turbo generator X
d

d

Hydro-generator without amortisseur winding 0.75 X
d

Condenser X
d

Synchronous motor 1.5 X
d

Induction machine
> 1000 hp @ 1800 rpm or less 1.5 X
d

> 250 hp @ 3600 rpm 1.5 X
d

All other > 50 hp 3.0 X
d

< 50 hp Infinity
1.5-4 Cycle Network Impedances
(X
d
= 1/LRC for induction motors)
30-Cycle Network
This is the network used to calculate the steady-state short-circuit current and duties for some of the
protective devices 30 cycles after the fault. The following table shows the type of device and its
associated duties using the 1.5-4 cycle network:

Type of Device Duty
High voltage circuit breaker N/A
Low voltage circuit breaker N/A
Fuse N/A
Switchgear and MCC N/A
Relay Overcurrent settings
30-Cycle Network Duty

The type of rotating machine and its representation in the 30-cycle network is shown in the following
table. Note that induction machines, synchronous motors, and condensers are not considered in the 30-
cycle fault calculation.

Type of Machine Xsc
Utility X
Turbo generator X
d

d

Hydro-generator without amortisseur winding X
d

Condenser Infinity
Synchronous motor Infinity
Induction machine Infinity
30-Cycle Network Impedance
13.5.1 ANSI Multiplying Factor (MF)
The ANSI multiplying factor is determined by the equivalent system X/R ratio at a particular fault
location. The X/R ratio is calculated by the separate R and X networks.
Local and Remote Contributions
A local contribution to a short-circuit current is the portion of the short-circuit current fed predominately
from generators through no more than one transformation, or with external reactance in a series which is
less than 1.5 times the generator subtransient reactance. Otherwise the contribution is defined as remote.
No AC Decay (NACD) Ratio
The NACD ratio is defined as the remote contributions to the total contributions for the short-circuit
current at a given location.

NACD
I
I
remote
total
=

Total short-circuit current I
total
= I
remote
+ I
local

NACD = 0 if all contributions are local.
NACD = 1 if all contributions are remote.
13.5.2 Calculation Methods
Momentary (1/2 Cycle) Short-Circuit Current Calc. (Buses & HV CB)
The momentary short-circuit current at the cycle represents the highest or maximum value of the short-
circuit current (before its ac and dc components decay toward the steady-state value). Although, in
reality, the highest or maximum short-circuit current actually occurs slightly before the cycle, the
cycle network is used for this calculation.

The following procedure is used to calculate momentary short-circuit current:

1) Calculate the symmetrical rms value of momentary short-circuit current using the following formula:
I
V
Z
mom rms symm
pre fault
eq
, ,
=
3

where Zeq is the equivalent impedance at the faulted bus from the cycle network.

2) Calculate the asymmetrical rms value of momentary short-circuit current using the following formula:
I MF I
mom rms asymm m mom rms symm , , , ,
=

where MF
m
is the momentary multiplying factor, calculated from

MF e
m
X R
= +
1 2
2
/

3) Calculate the peak value of momentary short-circuit current using the following formula:

I MF I
mom peak p mom rms symm , , ,
=

where MF
p
is the peak multiplying factor, calculated from

MF e
p
X R
= +
|
\
|
.
|
|
2 1
/

This value is the calculated Asymmetrical kA Crest printed in the Momentary Duty column of the
Momentary Duty page in the output report.

In both equations for MF
m
and MF
p
calculation, X/R is the ratio of X to R at the fault location obtained
from separate X and R networks at cycle. The value of the fault current calculated by this method can
be used for the following purposes:

Check closing and latching capabilities of high voltage circuit breakers
Check bus bracing capabilities
Adjust relay instantaneous settings
Check interrupting capabilities of fuses and low voltage circuit breakers
High Voltage Circuit Breaker Interrupting Duty Calculation
The interrupting fault currents for high voltage circuit breakers correspond to the 1.5-4 cycle short-circuit
currents, i.e., the 1.5-4 cycle network is used for this calculation.

The following procedure is used to calculate the interrupting short-circuit current for high voltage circuit
breakers:

1) Calculate the symmetrical rms value of the interrupting short-circuit current using the following
formula:
I
V
Z
rms symm
pre fault
eq
int, ,
=
3

where Zeq is the equivalent impedance at the faulted bus from the 1.5-4 cycle network.

2) Calculate the short-circuit current contributions to the fault location from the surrounding buses.

3) If the contribution is from a Remote bus, the symmetrical value is corrected by the factor of MFr,
calculated from
MF e
r
X R
t
= +
1 2
4
/

where t is the circuit breaker contact parting time in cycles, as given in the following table:

Circuit Breaker
Rating in Cycles
Contact Parting
Time in Cycles
8 4
5 3
3 2
2 1.5
The following table shows the Multiplying Factors for Remote Contributions (MFr).

X/R Ratio
8 Cycle CB
(4 cy CPT)
5 Cycle CB
(3 cy CPT)
3 Cycle CB
(2 cy CPT)
2 Cycle CB
(1.5 cy CPT)
100 1.487 1.540 1.599 1.63
90 1.464 1.522 1.585 1.619
80 1.438 1.499 1.569 1.606
70 1.405 1.472 1.548 1.59
60 1.366 1.438 1.522 1.569

50 1.316 1.393 1.487 1.54
45 1.286 1.366 1.464 1.255
40 1.253 1.334 1.438 1.499
35 1.215 1.297 1.405 1.472
30 1.172 1.253 1.366 1.438

25 1.126 1.201 1.316 1.393
20 1.078 1.142 1.253 1.334
18 1.059 1.116 1.223 1.305
16 1.042 1.091 1.190 1.271
14 1.027 1.066 1.154 1.233

12 1.015 1.042 1.116 1.190
10 1.007 1.023 1.078 1.142
9 1.004 1.015 1.059 1.116
8 1.002 1.009 1.042 1.091
7 1.001 1.005 1.027 1.066

6 1.000 1.002 1.015 1.042
5 1.000 1.00. 1.007 1.023
4 1.000 1.000 1.002 1.009
3 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.002
2 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
1 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000

MFr Remote Contributions Multiplying Factors; Total Current Basis CBs

If the contribution is from a Local generator, the symmetrical value is corrected by the factor of MFl,
which is obtained from: ANSI/IEEE C37.010, Application Guide for AC High-Voltage.

X/R Ratio
8 Cycle CB
(4 cy CPT)
5 Cycle CB
(3 cy CPT)
3 Cycle CB
(2 cy CPT)
2 Cycle CB
(1.5 cy CPT)
100 1.252 1.351 1.443 1.512
90 1.239 1.340 1.441 1.511
80 1.222 1.324 1.435 1.508
70 1.201 1.304 1.422 1.504
60 1.175 1.276 1.403 1.496

50 1.141 1.241 1.376 1.482
45 1.121 1.220 1.358 1.473
40 1.098 1.196 1.337 1.461
35 1.072 1.169 1.313 1.446
30 1.044 1.136 1.283 1.427

25 1.013 1.099 1.247 1.403
20 1.000 1.057 1.201 1.371
18 1.000 1.039 1.180 1.356
16 1.000 1.021 1.155 1.339
14 1.000 1.003 1.129 1.320

12 1.000 1.000 1.099 1.299
10 1.000 1.000 1.067 1.276
9 1.000 1.000 1.051 1.263
8 1.000 1.000 1.035 1.250
7 1.000 1.000 1.019 1.236

6 1.000 1.000 1.005 1.221
5 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.205
4 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.188
3 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.170
2 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.152
1 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.132
MF
l
Local Contributions Multiplying Factors; Total Current Basis CBs

4) Calculate the total remote contributions and total local contribution, and thus the NACD ratio.

5) Determine the actual multiplying factor (AMF
i
) from the NACD ratio and calculate the adjusted rms
value of interrupting short-circuit current using the following formula.

I
int,rms,adj
= AMF
i
I
int,rms,symm

where
AMF
i
= MF
l
+ NACD (MF
r
MF
l
)

6) For symmetrically rated breakers, the adjusted rms value of interrupting short-circuit current is
calculated using the following formula.
S
I
int,rms,adj
i
AMF
=
I
int,rms,symm

where the correction factor S reflects an inherent capability of ac high voltage circuit breakers,
which are rated on a symmetrical current basis, and its values are found in the following table.

Circuit Breaker
Contact Parting Time

S Factor
4 1.0
3 1.1
2 1.2
1.5 1.3
S Factor for AC High Voltage Circuit Breaker
Rated on a Symmetrical Current Basis

The value of this current is applied to check high voltage circuit breaker interrupting capabilities.
The correction factor S is equal to 1.0 for ac high voltage circuit breakers rated on a total current
basis.
Low Voltage Circuit Breaker Interrupting Duty Calculation
Due to the instantaneous action of low voltage circuit breakers at maximum short-circuit values, the
cycle network is used for calculating the interrupting short-circuit current.

The following procedure is used to calculate the interrupting short-circuit current for low voltage circuit
breakers:

1) Calculate the symmetrical rms value of the interrupting short-circuit current from the following
formula.
I
V
Z
rms symm
pre fault
eq
int, ,
=
3

where Zeq is the equivalent impedance at the faulted bus from the cycle network.

2) Calculate the adjusted asymmetrical rms value of the interrupting short-circuit current duty using the
following formula:

I MF I
rms adj
rms, symm
int, ,
int,
=

where MF is the multiplying factor, considering the system X/R ratio and the low voltage circuit
breaker testing power factors, calculated from
MF
e
e
X R
X R
test
=
+
+
2 1
2 1
( )
(
/
( / )

)
for unfused power breakers
or
MF
e
e
X R
X R
test
=
+
+
1 2
1 2
2
2
/
( / )
for fused power breakers and molded cases

where (X/R)
test
is calculated based on the test power factor entered from the Low Voltage Circuit
Breaker Editor. The manufacturer maximum testing power factors given in the following table are
used as the default values:

Max Design (Tested)
Circuit Breaker Type % PF (X/R)test
Power Breaker (Unfused) 15 6.59
Power Breaker (Fused) 20 4.90
Molded Case (Rated Over 20,000 A) 20 4.90
Molded Case (Rated 10,001-20,000 A) 30 3.18
Molded Case (Rated 10,000 A) 50 1.73
Maximum Test PF for Low Voltage Circuit Breaker

The calculated duty value I
int,rms,adj
can be applied to low voltage breaker interrupting capabilities.

Note that if the calculated multiplication factor is less than 1, it is set to 1 so that the symmetrical fault
current is compared against the symmetrical rating of the device. If the symmetrical fault current is less
than the symmetrical rating of the device, the checking on asymmetrical current will certainly pass.
Fuse Interrupting Short-Circuit Current Calculation
The procedures for calculating the fuse interrupting short-circuit current is the same as those for the
Circuit Breaker Interrupting Duty calculation.
Comparison of Device Rating and Short-Circuit Duty
ETAP PowerStation compares the rating of protective devices and busbars with the fault duties of the bus.
The comparison results are listed in the summary page of the output report. The device rating and fault
duty used in the comparison are shown below.

Device Type

Device Capability
Calculated
Short-Circuit Duty
Momentary Duty
HV Bus Bracing Asymm. KA rms Asymm. KA rms
Asymm. KA Crest Asymm. KA Crest
LV Bus Bracing Symm. KA rms Symm. KA rms
Asymm. KA rms Asymm. KA rms

HV CB C&L Capability kA rms Asymm. KA rms
C&L Capability kA Crest Asymm. KA Crest

Momentary Duty
HV CB Interrupting kA*** Adjusted kA

LV CB Rated Interrupting kA Adjusted kA
Comparison of Device Rating and Short-Circuit Current Duty

***The interrupting capability of a high voltage circuit breaker is calculated based on the nominal kV of
the connected bus and the prefault voltage (Vf ) if the flag is set in the Short-Circuit Study Case, as shown
below.

Interrupting kA = (Rated Int. kA) * (Rated Max. kV) / (Bus Nominal kV)
or

Interrupting kA = (Rated Int. kA) * (Rated Max. kV) / (Bus Nominal kV * Vf )

The calculated interrupting kA (as shown above) is then limited to the maximum interrupting kA of the
circuit breaker.

Short-Circuit Analysis IEC Calculation Methods
13.6 IEC Calculation Methods
PowerStation provides two short-circuit calculation methods based on ANSI/IEEE and IEC standards.
You can select the calculation method from the Short-Circuit Study Case Editor. This section describes
the IEC standard method of calculation.
Standard Compliance
PowerStation short-circuit calculation per IEC standards fully complies with the latest IEC documentation
as listed below:

Standard Pub. Year Title
IEC 56 1978 High voltage alternating-current circuit-breakers
IEC 282-1 1985 Fuses for voltages exceeding 1000 V ac
IEC 61363 1998 Electrical Installations of Ships and Mobile and Fixed Offshore
Units
IEC 781 1989 Application guide for calculation of short-circuit currents in low
voltage radial systems
IEC 909-1 1991 Short-circuit calculation in three-phase ac systems
IEC 909-2 1988 Electrical equipment - data for short-circuit current calculations in
accordance with IEC 909
IEC 947-1 1988 Low voltage switchgear and controlgear, Part 1: General rules
IEC 947-2 1989 Low voltage switchgear and controlgear, Part 2: Circuit-breakers

These standards are for short-circuit calculation and equipment rating in ac systems with nominal voltages
up to 240 kV and operating at 50 Hz or 60 Hz. They cover three-phase, line-to-ground, line-to-line, and
line-to-line-to-ground faults.

IEC 909 and the associated standards classify short-circuit currents according to their magnitudes
(maximum and minimum) and fault distances from the generator (far and near). Maximum short-circuit
currents determine equipment ratings, while minimum currents dictate protective device settings. Near-
to-generator and far-from-generator classifications determine whether or not to model the ac component
decay in the calculation, respectively.

IEC 61363 Standard calculates the short-circuit current as a function of time and displays its
instantaneous values using the machines subtransient reactance and time constants. This provides an
accurate evaluation of the short-circuit current for sizing protective devices and coordinating relays for
isolated systems such as ships and off-shore platforms.
General Description of Calculation Methodology
In IEC short-circuit calculations, an equivalent voltage source at the fault location replaces all voltage
sources. A voltage factor c is applied to adjust the value of the equivalent voltage source for minimum
and maximum current calculations.

All machines are represented by their internal impedances. Line capacitances and static loads are
neglected, except for those of the zero-sequence system. Regulator and transformer taps are assumed to
be in the main position, and arc resistances are not considered. System impedances are assumed to be
balanced three-phase, and the method of symmetrical components is used for unbalanced fault
calculations. Calculations consider electrical distance from the fault location to synchronous generators.
For a far-from-generator fault, calculations assume that the steady-state value of the short-circuit current
is equal to the initial symmetrical short-circuit current.
Only the dc component decays to zero, whereas for a near-to-generator fault, calculations count for both
decaying ac and dc components. The equivalent R/X ratios determine the rates of decay of both
components, and different values are recommended for generators and motors near the fault.

Calculations also differ for meshed and unmeshed networks. The factor k, which is used to multiply the
initial short-circuit current to get the peak short-circuit current i
p
, is defined differently for different
system configurations and the methods selected to calculate the R/X ratios.
Definition of Terms
IEC standards use the following definitions, which are relevant in the calculations and outputs of
PowerStation.
Initial Symmetrical Short-Circuit Current (I
k
)
This is the rms value of the ac symmetrical component of an available short-circuit current applicable at
the instant of short-circuit if the impedance remains at zero time value.
Peak Short-Circuit Current (i
p
)
This is the maximum possible instantaneous value of the available short-circuit current.
Symmetrical Short-Circuit Breaking Current (I
b
)
This is the rms value of an integral cycle of the symmetrical ac component of the available short-circuit
current at the instant of contact separation of the first pole of a switching device.
Steady-State Short-Circuit Current (I
k
)
This is the rms value of the short-circuit current which remains after the decay of the transient
phenomena.
Subtransient Voltage (E) of a Synchronous Machine
This is the rms value of the symmetrical internal voltage of a synchronous machine which is active behind
the subtransient reactance X
d
at the moment of short-circuit.
Far-From-Generator Short-Circuit
This is a short-circuit condition during which the magnitude of the symmetrical ac component of
available short-circuit current remains essentially constant.
Near-To-Generator Short-Circuit
This is a short-circuit condition to which at least one synchronous machine contributes a prospective
initial short-circuit current which is more than twice the generators rated current, or a short-circuit
condition to which synchronous and asynchronous motors contribute more than 5% of the initial
symmetrical short-circuit current (I
k
) without motors.
Subtransient Reactance (X
d
) of a Synchronous Machine
This is the effective reactance at the moment of short-circuit. For the calculation of short-circuit currents,
the saturated value of (X
d
) is taken.

According to IEC Standard 909, the synchronous motor impedance used in IEC short-circuit calculations
is calculated in the same way as the synchronous generator.

K
G
=
Z
K
= K
G
(R+ X
d
)
kV
n
c
max

kV
r
1+x
d
sin
r

Where kVn and kVr are the nominal voltage of the terminal bus and the motor rated voltage respectively,
c
max
is determined based on machine rated voltage, xd is machine subtransient reactance (per unit in
motor base), and qr is the machine rated power factor angle.
Minimum Time Delay (T
min
) of a Circuit Breaker
This is the shortest time between the beginning of the short-circuit current and the first contact separation
of one pole of the switching device.

Note that the time delay (T
min
) is the sum of the shortest possible operating time of an instantaneous relay
and the shortest opening time of a circuit breaker. Minimum time delay does not include the adjustable
time delays of tripping devices.
Voltage Factor c
This is the factor used to adjust the value of the equivalent voltage source for minimum and maximum
current calculations according to the following table:

Voltage Factor c

Nominal Voltage Un
For Maximum Short-Circuit
Current Calculation
c
max

For Minimum Short-Circuit
Current Calculation
c
min

Low voltage: 100 V to 1000 V
230 V / 400 V 1.00 0.95
Other voltages 1.05 1.00
Medium voltage: > 1 kV to 35 kV 1.10 1.00
High voltage: > 35 kV to 230 kV 1.10 1.00

The c
max
values given in the above table are used as default values in calculations and the user can set
these values from the Short-Circuit Study Case.
Calculation Methods
Initial Symmetrical Short-Circuit Current Calculation
Initial symmetrical short-circuit current (I
k
) is calculated using the following formula:

I
cU
Z
k
n
k
" =
3

where Z
k
is the equivalent impedance at the fault location.
Peak Short-Circuit Current Calculation
Peak short-circuit current (ip) is calculated using the following formula:
i k
p k
= 2 " I

where k is a function of the system R/X ratio at the fault location.
IEC standards provide three methods for calculating the k factor:

Method A - Uniform ratio R/X. The value of the k factor is determined from taking the smallest ratio
of R/X of all the branches of the network. Only branches that contain a total of 80 percent of the
current at the nominal voltage corresponding to the short-circuit location are included. Branches may
be a series combination of several elements.

Method B - R/X ratio at the short-circuit location. The value of the k factor is determined by
multiplying the k factor by a safety factor of 1.15, which covers inaccuracies caused after obtaining
the R/X ratio from a network reduction with complex impedances.

Method C - Equivalent frequency. The value of the k factor is calculated using a frequency-altered
R/X. R/X is calculated at a lower frequency and then multiplied by a frequency-dependent
multiplying factor.
Symmetrical Short-Circuit Breaking Current Calculation
For a far-from-generator fault, the symmetrical short-circuit breaking current (I
b
) is equal to the initial
symmetrical short-circuit current.

I I
b k
= "

For a near-to-generator fault, I
b
is obtained by combining contributions from each individual machine. I
b

for different types of machines is calculated using the following formula:

=
machines us asynchrono for
machines s synchronou for
"
"
k
k
b
qI
I
I

where and q are factors that account for ac decay. They are functions of the ratio of the minimum time
delay and the ratio of the machines initial short-circuit current to its rated current, as well as real power
per pair of poles of asynchronous machines.

IEC standards allow you to include or exclude ac decay effect from asynchronous machines in the
calculation.
DC Component of Short-Circuit Current Calculation
The dc component of the short-circuit current for the minimum delay time of a protective device is
calculated based on initial symmetrical short-circuit current and system X/R ratio:

|
.
|
\
|
=
R X
ft
I I
k dc
/
2
exp 2
min "

where f is the system frequency, t
min
is the minimum delay time of the protective device under concern,
and X/R is the system value at the faulted bus.
Asymmetrical Short-Circuit Breaking Current Calculation
The asymmetrical short-circuit breaking current for comparison with circuit breaker rating is calculated as
the rms value of symmetrical and dc components of the short circuit current. For fuses, it is the sum of
asymmetrical currents from all first level contribution branches.
Steady-State Short-Circuit Current Calculation
Steady-state short-circuit current I
k
is a combination of contributions from synchronous generators. I
k
for
each synchronous generator is calculated using the following formula:

I I
I I
k r
k r
G
G
max max
min min
=
=

where is a function of a generators excitation voltage, ratio between its initial symmetrical short-circuit
current and rated current, and other generator parameters, and I
rG
is the generators rated current.

The maximum steady-state current reflects maximum modeling inaccuracies. This value is used to
determine minimum device ratings. The minimum steady-state current reflects minimum modeling
inaccuracies. This value is used for relay coordination purposes in preventing the occurrence of nuisance
trips and loading deviations.
Comparison of Device Rating and Short-Circuit Duty
In the Three-Phase Device Duty calculation, PowerStation compares the protective device rating against
bus short-current duty for the devices that are checked as complying with IEC standard and also have
device rating entered. In case the short-circuit duty is greater than the device duty, PowerStation will flag
the device as underrated in both one-line diagram and output reports. The following table lists the device
ratings and short-circuit duties used for the comparison for MV CB, LV CB, and fuses:

Device Type Device Capability SC Current Duty
MV CB Making i
p

AC Breaking I
b,symm

I
b,asymm
* I
b
,
asymm

I
dc
*

LV CB Making I
p

Breaking I
b,symm

I
b,asymm
* I
b,asymm

Fuse Breaking I
b,asymm

I
b,asymm
* I
b,symm

Comparison of Device Rating and Short-Current Duty
*Device capability calculated by PowerStation.

Transient Short-Circuit Calculation
In additional to device duty calculations, PowerStation also provides transient short-circuit calculation per
IEC standard 61363-1. The transient short-circuit calculation presents fault current waveforms as a
function of time, considering a number of factors that affect short-circuit current variations at different
time after the fault. These factors include synchronous machine subtransient reactance, transient
reactance, reactance, subtransient time constant, transient time constant, and dc time constant. It also
considers decay of short-circuit contributions from induction motors. This detailed modeling provides an
accurate evaluation of the short-circuit current for sizing protective devices and coordinating relays for
isolated systems such as ships and off-shore platforms. The calculation can be conducted on both radial
and looped system with one or multiply sources.

As calculation results, PowerStation provides short-circuit current as function of time up to 0.1 second at
0.001 second time increment. It also presents short-circuit current as function of cycles up to 1 cycle at
0.1 cycle increment. Along with the instantaneous current values, PowerStation also furnish calculated
AC component, DC component, as well as top envelope of the current waveform. In the summary page,
it also provides the subtransient, transient, and steady state fault current for each bus.

Calculation of IEC Device Capability
As shown in the above table, some of the device capability values are calculated by PowerStation based
on capability provided by users and default parameters given in IEC standards.

MV CB The asymmetrical breaking and dc current ratings for MV CB are calculated as follows,

|
.
|
\
|
+ =
R X
ft
I I
symm b asymm b
/
4
exp 2 1
min
, ,

|
.
|
\
|
=
R X
ft
I I
symm b dc
/
2
exp 2
min
,

Where f is the system frequency, t
min
is the minimum delay time, and I
b,symm
is the AC breaking current
provided by the user. Following IEC Standard 56, Figure 9, X/R is calculated based on a testing PF
of 7% at 50Hz.

LV CB The asymmetrical breaking current rating for LV CB is calculated as follows:

|
.
|
\
|
+ =
R X
ft
I I
symm b asymm b
/
4
exp 2 1
min
, ,

min
is the minimum delay time, and I
b,symm
is the breaking current
provided by the user. X/R is calculated based on a testing PF given in IEC Standard 947-2, Table XI.

Fuse The asymmetrical breaking current rating for fuse is calculated as follows:

|
.
|
\
|
+ =
R X
ft
I I
symm b asymm b
/
4
exp 2 1
min
, ,

min
is assumed to be a half cycle, and I
b,symm
is the breaking current
provided by the user. X/R is calculated based on the default testing PFof 15 %.
Short-Circuit Analysis Arc Flash Analysis Method
13.7 Arc Flash Analysis Method

The ETAP Arc Flash analysis estimates the arc flash incident energy under a three-phase short-circuit
fault and determines the flash protective boundary to live parts for shock protection based on NFPA 70E-
2000. The flash protection boundary is the distance a worker not wearing flame-resistant personal
protective equipment (PPE) must stay away from a job site involving a possible hazardous arc flash. The
Arc Flash analysis is conducted in the ANSI/IEEE or IEC Device Duty calculations. You can select to
conduct the Arc Flash analysis from the Short-Circuit Study Case Editor.

The ETAP Arc Flash analysis has the following program features:

Report a table of arc flash analysis for every faulted bus.
Compute bolted short circuit current for every faulted bus.
Determine a flash protection boundary as a function of arc duration.
Determine incident energy exposure (Calorie/cm
2
) as a function of distance for a given duration.
Determine incident energy exposure (Calorie /cm
2
) as a function of arc duration for a given distance.
Compute incident energy exposure (Calorie /cm
2
) in open air.
Compute incident energy exposure (Calorie /cm
2
) in a cubic box.

Short-Circuit Analysis AC-DC Converter Models
13.8 AC-DC Converter Models
Charger & UPS
In the current version of ETAP PowerStation, when performing AC analyses, chargers and UPSs are
considered as loads to their input AC buses. The rectifiers in these elements block the current from
flowing back into the AC system. Therefore, chargers and UPSs are not included in an AC short-circuit
analysis.
Inverter
An inverter is a voltage source to the AC system. Under fault conditions, it will provide fault
contribution to the AC system. When its terminal bus is faulted, the contribution from an inverter is equal
to the multiplication of its AC full load amp by a constant K, which is entered form the Rating page of the
Inverter Editor. This is the maximum possible contribution from the inverter. As the fault location
moves away from its terminal bus, the contribution from the inverter decreases.
Variable Frequency Drive (VFD)
A VFD can only be inserted between a motor and its terminal bus. In the Rating page of the VFD Editor,
there is a check box for bypass switch. If this box is not checked, there will be no contribution from the
motor connected to the VFD, due to the fact that the rectifiers in VFD block the current from flowing
back into the system. If this box is checked, it is assumed that the switch is closed as soon as a fault
occurs in the system; hence the motor will make contributions to the fault as if the VFD is not present.

Short-Circuit Analysis Required Data
13.9 Required Data
Bus Data
Required data for short-circuit calculation for buses includes:

Nominal kV (when the prefault voltage option is set to use nominal kV)
%V (when the prefault voltage option is set to use bus voltage)
Type, such as MCC, switchgear, etc., and continuous and bracing ratings
Branch Data
Branch data is entered into the Branch editors, i.e., 3-Winding Transformer Editor, 2-Winding
Transformer Editor, Transmission Line Editor, Cable Editor, Reactor Editor, and Impedance Editor.
Required data for short-circuit calculations for branches includes:

Branch Z, R, X, or X/R values and units, tolerance, and temperatures, if applicable
Cable and transmission line length and unit
Transformer rated kV and MVA
Base kV and MVA of impedance branches

For unbalanced short-circuit calculations you will also need:

Zero sequence impedances
Transformer winding connections, grounding types, and grounding parameters
Power Grid Data
Required data for short-circuit calculations for utilities includes:

Nominal kV
%V and Angle
3-Phase MVAsc and X/R

For unbalanced short-circuit calculations, you will also need:

Grounding types and parameters
Single-Phase MVAsc and X/R
Synchronous Generator Data
Required data for short-circuit calculations for synchronous generators includes:

Rated MW, kV, and power factor
X
d
, X
d
, and X/R
Generator type
IEC exciter type


X
0

Inverter Data
Required data for short-circuit calculations for inverters includes:

Rated MW, kV, and power factor
K factor in the Rating page

Synchronous Motor Data
Required data for short-circuit calculations for synchronous motor includes:

Rated kW/hp and kV, and the number of poles
X
d
and X/R
% LRC, X
d
, and T
do
for IEC short-circuit calculation


X
0

Induction Motor Data
Required data for short-circuit calculations for induction motors includes:

Rated kW/hp and kV
X/R plus one of the following:
Xsc at cycle and 1.5-4 cycle if ANSI Short-Circuit Z option is set to Xsc, or
%LRC if ANSI Short-Circuit Z option is set to Std MF
% LRC, X
d
, and T
d
for IEC short-circuit calculations


X
0

Lumped Load Data
Required data for short-circuit calculations for lumped load includes:

Rated MVA and kV
% motor load
% LRC, X/R, and Xsc for cycle and 1.5-4 cycle
X, X, and T
d
for IEC short-circuit calculation

Additional data for unbalanced short-circuit calculations includes:

High Voltage Circuit Breaker Data
Required data for short-circuit calculations for high voltage circuit breakers includes:

ANSI Standard Circuit Breaker:

Max kV
Rated Int. (rated interrupting capability)
Max Int. (maximum interrupting capability)
C & L rms (rms value of closing and latching capability)
C & L Crest (crest value of closing and latching capability)
Standard
Cycle

IEC Standard Circuit Breaker:

Rated kV
Min. Delay (minimum delay time in second)
Making (peak current)
AC Breaking (rms ac breaking capability)

PowerStation calculates the interrupting capabilities of the circuit breaker from the rated and maximum
interrupting capabilities. This value is calculated at the nominal kV of the bus that the circuit breaker is
connected to.
Low Voltage Circuit Breaker Data
Required data for short-circuit calculations for low voltage circuit breakers includes:

ANSI Standard Circuit Breaker:

Type (power, molded case, or insulated case)
Rated kV
Interrupting (interrupting capability)
Test PF

IEC Standard Circuit Breaker:

Type (power, molded case, or insulated case)
Rated kV
Min. Delay (minimum delay time in second)
Making (peak current)
Breaking (rms ac breaking capability)
Fuse Data
Required data for short-circuit calculations for fuses includes:

Fuse ID

ANSI Standard Fuse:

Interrupting (interrupting capability)
Test PF

IEC Standard Fuse:

Breaking (rms ac breaking capability)
Test PF
Other Data
There are some study case related data, which must also be provided, and you can enter this data into the
Short-Circuit Study Case Editor. The data includes:

Standard (ANSI/IEC)
XFMR tap option (transformer tap modeling method)
Prefault voltage
Report (report format)
Machine X/R (machine X/R modeling method)
Faulted buses
Cable/OL heater (select this option to include cable and overload heater elements)
Short-Circuit Analysis Output Reports
13.10 Output Reports
PowerStation provides short-circuit study output reports with different levels of detail, depending on your
requirements. The following are just some examples that show this flexibility.
13.10.1 View Output Reports From Study Case Toolbar
This is a shortcut for the Report Manger. When you click on the View Output Report button,
PowerStation automatically opens the output report that is listed in the Study Case Toolbar with the
selected format. In the picture shown below, the output report name is Untitled and the selected format is
Complete.

13.10.2 Short-Circuit Report Manager
To open the Short-Circuit Report Manager, simply click on the Report Manager button on the Short-
Circuit Study Toolbar. The editor includes four pages (Complete, Input, Result, and Summary)
representing different sections of the output report. The Report Manager allows you to select formats
available for different portions of the report and view it via Crystal Reports as well as a text report. There
are several fields and buttons common to every page, as described below.
Output Report Name
This field displays the name of the output report you want to view.
Project File Name
This field displays the name of the project file based on which report was generated, along with the
directory where the project file is located.
Help
Click on this button to access Help.
OK / Cancel
Click on the OK button to dismiss the editor and bring up the Crystal Reports view to show the selected
portion of the output report. If no selection is made, it will simply dismiss the editor. Click on the Cancel
button to dismiss the editor without viewing the report.
13.10.3 Input Data Page
This page allows you to select different formats for viewing input data, grouped according to type. They
include: Bus, Cable, Cover, Generator, Loads, Reactor, Transformer, UPS, and Utility.

13.10.4 Result Page
This page allows you to select formats to view the short-circuit result portion of the output report.

13.10.5 Summary Page
This page allows you to select formats to view summary reports of the output report.

13.10.6 Complete Page
In this page you can select the Complete report in Crystal Reports format, which brings up the complete
report for the short-circuit study, or in the text report format, which is described in greater detail in the
Text Report section. The complete report includes input data, results, and summary reports.

13.10.7 SC Arc Flash Page
This page shows up only when 3-phase device duty calculation is conducted. It allows you to view arc
flash analysis reports.

13.10.8 Text Report
Sample 1: Input Data
This section lists system information and program parameters; bus input data; transmission line and cable
data; transformer, reactor, and impedance data; branch connections; and machine data, in that order.

Bus Information (Nominal & Base kV) Voltage Generation Motor Load
======================================================== ============= ============== ==============
ID Type Nom.kV BasekV Description % Mag. Ang. MW Mvar MW Mvar
------------ ---- ------ ------ -------------------- ------ ----- ------ ------ ------ ------
Bus3 Load 13.800 14.154 100.0 0.0 3.368 1.355
LVBus Load 0.480 0.480 100.0 0.0 0.121 -0.059
Main Bus SWNG 34.500 34.500 100.0 0.0 0.000 0.000
MCC1 Load 0.480 0.480 LV Motor Control Cen 100.0 0.0 0.421 0.190
Sub 2A Load 13.800 14.154 100.0 0.0 0.000 0.000
Sub 2B Gen. 13.800 13.800 100.0 0.0 6.300 0.000 0.996 -0.616
Sub 3 Load 4.160 4.160 100.0 0.0 0.000 0.000
Sub3 Swgr Load 4.160 4.160 100.0 0.0 0.400 0.170
T1 Load 34.500 34.500 3W-XFMR center bus 100.0 0.0 0.000 0.000
-------------------------------------------------------- ------ ------ ------
9 Buses Total 6.300 5.306 1.040

CKT / Branch Line / Cable (ohms/1000 ft per phase) Impedance
============ ================================================================= =====================================
ID Library Size L (ft) #/ T (C) R X Y MVAb % R % X % Y
------------ -------- ---- ------ --- ------ -------- -------- -------- ------- ------- ------- ----------
Cable11 15MCUS1 2 1350. 1 75 0.20200 0.06850 0.000000 100.0 13.61 4.62 0.0000000
Cable2 5MCUS3 350 250. 1 75 0.03860 0.04270 0.000000 100.0 5.58 6.17 0.0000000

CKT / Branch Transformer %Tap Setting Reactor Imped.
============ ======================================= ============= ================= ======
ID MVA kV kV % Z X/R From To X (ohm) X/R % Tol.
------------ ------- ------ ------ ------- ----- ------ ------ -------- ------- ------
T3 1.000 4.160 0.480 6.500 18.0 0.000 0.000 0.00
XFMR 3 1.000 4.160 0.480 7.200 28.0 0.000 0.000 0.00
T2 10.000 34.500 13.800 6.900 23.0 -2.500 0.000 0.00
T1 15.000( base MVA for 3-Winding )
15.000 34.500 Zps = 7.100 39.0 0.000 0.00
10.000 13.800 Zpt = 7.200 40.0 0.000 0.00
5.000 4.160 Zst = 14.100 38.0 0.000 0.00

CKT / Branch Connected Bus Info. %Impedance (100 MVA Base)
========================= ========================== ==========================
ID Type From Bus ID To Bus ID R X Z
------------ ----------- ------------ ------------ ------- ------- --------
Cable11 Line/Cable Sub 2A Bus3 13.6 4.6 14.4
Cable2 Line/Cable Sub 3 Sub3 Swgr 5.6 6.2 8.3
T3 2W XFMR Sub3 Swgr LVBus 36.1 649.0 650.0
XFMR 3 2W XFMR Sub3 Swgr MCC1 25.7 719.5 720.0
T2 2W XFMR Main Bus Sub 2A 2.8 65.5 65.6
T1 3W XFMR Main Bus T1 0.0 0.7 0.7
Sub 2B T1 1.2 46.7 46.7
Sub 3 T1 1.2 47.3 47.3
Conned Bus Machine Info. Rating X/R Ratio % Impedance(Machine Base) %
Impedance(100 MVA Base)
============ ================== ====================== ============== ========================= =========================
Bus ID Machine ID Type MVA kV RPM X"/R X'/R R X" X' R X" X'
------------ ------------ ---- ------- ------ ----- ------ ------ ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------
Sub 2B Gen1 Gen. 8.824 13.80 1800.0 24.00 24.00 1.000 24.00 37.00 11.3 272.0 419.3
Main Bus Utility Uty. 1500.000 34.50 1800.0 45.00 45.00 2.222 99.98 99.98 0.1 6.7 6.7
Bus3 Mtr2 IndM 0.649 13.20 1800.0 6.34 6.34 3.830 24.28 60.70 513.4 3254.4 8136.0
Sub3 Swgr Pump 1 IndM 0.434 4.00 1800.0 6.27 6.27 3.830 24.01 60.04 815.2 5111.7 12779.3
Bus3 Syn4 SynM 2.982 13.20 1800.0 46.07 46.07 0.334 15.38 23.08 9.7 448.7 673.1
Sub 2B Syn1 SynM 1.170 13.20 1800.0 27.53 27.53 0.559 15.38 23.08 43.7 1202.6 1804.0
MCC1 EqvLVInd-1 IndM 0.461 0.48 1800.0 6.93 6.93 2.652 18.37 45.92 574.7 3980.1 9950.2
LVBus Syn2 SynM 0.134 0.46 1800.0 9.54 9.54 2.097 20.00 30.00 1434.7 13685.0 20527.5
--------------------------------------------------------
Total Connected Generators ( = 1 ): 8.824 MVA
Total Connected Motors ( = 6 ): 5.831 MVA

Note: For motors, X" and X' are reactances used in 1/2 and 1.5--4 cycle system networks respectively.
Sample 2: Detailed Short-Circuit Report for MV Bus
This section tabulates detailed short-circuit results, organized in each faulted bus. This report gives
prefault voltage in percentage of both bus nominal kV and bus base kV, bus ID, bus voltages for the
faulted bus and the surrounding buses in percent, real part and imaginary part of the total short-circuit
current and the contribution ratios of the two, as well as the symmetrical current magnitudes.

Three-phase fault at bus: Main Bus , Nominal kV = 34.50 Prefault Voltage = 105.00 % of nominal bus kV
Base kV = 34.50 = 105.00 % of base kV

Contribution 1/2 Cycle 1.5 to 4 Cycle
========================= =============================================== ===============================================
From Bus To Bus % V kA kA Imag. kA Symm. % V kA kA Imag. kA Symm.
ID ID From Bus Real Imaginary /Real Magnitude From Bus Real Imaginary /Real Magnitude
------------ ------------ -------- -------- --------- ----- --------- -------- -------- --------- ----- ---------
Main Bus Total 0.00 0.647 -27.459 42.5 27.466 0.00 0.628 -27.260 43.4 27.267

Sub 2A Main Bus 15.15 0.025 -0.376 14.8 0.377 10.18 0.013 -0.253 19.1 0.253
#T1 Main Bus 0.29 0.036 -0.732 20.5 0.733 0.26 0.029 -0.656 22.7 0.656
Utility Main Bus 105.00 0.586 -26.351 45.0 26.357 105.00 0.586 -26.351 45.0 26.357

Bus3 Sub 2A 16.64 0.062 -0.916 14.8 0.918 11.19 0.032 -0.617 19.1 0.618
#Sub 2B T1 18.48 0.025 -0.652 26.3 0.652 17.52 0.024 -0.618 26.1 0.619
#Sub 3 T1 2.58 0.011 -0.080 7.3 0.081 1.33 0.005 -0.037 7.3 0.038

Mtr2 Bus3 105.00 0.020 -0.108 5.3 0.110 105.00 0.008 -0.046 5.6 0.047
Syn4 Bus3 105.00 0.041 -0.808 19.5 0.809 105.00 0.024 -0.571 23.7 0.571
Gen1 Sub 2B 105.00 0.052 -1.329 25.7 1.330 105.00 0.053 -1.343 25.6 1.344
Syn1 Sub 2B 105.00 0.010 -0.301 29.7 0.301 105.00 0.007 -0.203 29.6 0.203
Sub3 Swgr Sub 3 2.90 0.091 -0.665 7.3 0.671 1.47 0.042 -0.309 7.3 0.312

NACD Ratio = 0.98
Sample 3: Momentary Duty Summary
This section tabulates momentary duties for all protective devices in the system, organized by the buses to
which they are connected. It gives bus ID, nominal kV, device ID and type, calculated device momentary
duties including rms values of symmetrical, asymmetrical, and crest short-circuit current in kA rms,
equivalent X/R ratio at the fault location, and the multiplying factor (MF), as well as device momentary
capacities in terms of rms values of symmetrical, asymmetrical, and crest kA. Over-stressed devices are
flagged.

Three-Phase Fault Currents: ( Prefault Voltage = 105 % of the Bus Nominal Voltages )

Bus Information Device Information Momentary Duty Device Capability
==================== ========================= ========================================== ============================
Symm. X/R Asymm. Asymm. Symm. Asymm. Asymm.
ID kV ID Type kA rms Ratio M.F. kA rms kA Crest kA rms kA rms kA Crest
------------ ------ ------------ ----------- -------- ----- ----- -------- -------- -------- -------- ---------
Bus3 13.80 Bus3 MCC 6.368 10.6 1.451 9.238 15.698
Main Bus 34.50 Main Bus Switchgear 27.466 44.1 1.654 45.417 75.014 40.000 67.500 *
CB2 3 cy Sym CB 27.466 44.1 1.654 45.417 75.014 64.000 108.000
CB1 3 cy Sym CB 27.466 44.1 1.654 45.417 75.014 56.000 94.500
CB10 8 cy Tot CB 27.466 44.1 1.654 45.417 75.014 61.000 102.900
Sub 2A 13.80 Sub 2A MCC 6.835 23.0 1.588 10.855 18.099
CB12 8 cy Tot CB 6.835 23.0 1.588 10.855 18.099 60.000 59.400
CB11 8 cy Tot CB 6.835 23.0 1.588 10.855 18.099 80.000 72.900
Sub 2B 13.80 Sub 2B MCC 10.131 36.7 1.639 16.601 27.479
CB5 3 cy Sym CB 10.131 36.7 1.639 16.601 27.479 60.000 67.500
CB4 3 cy Sym CB 10.131 36.7 1.639 16.601 27.479 60.000 67.500
Sub 3 4.16 Sub 3 MCC 27.480 39.6 1.645 45.207 74.758
CB8 5 cy Sym CB 27.480 39.6 1.645 45.207 74.758 39.000 65.000 *
CB9 3 cy Sym CB 27.480 39.6 1.645 45.207 74.758 58.000 97.000
Sub3 Swgr 4.16 Sub3 Swgr Bus 24.607 8.7 1.404 34.556 59.061
CB14 5 cy Sym CB 24.607 8.7 1.404 34.556 59.061 78.400 132.300
CB13 5 cy Sym CB 24.607 8.7 1.404 34.556 59.061 78.400 132.300
CB3 5 cy Sym CB 24.607 8.7 1.404 34.556 59.061 78.400 132.300

Sample 4: Interrupting Duty Summary
This section tabulates interrupting duties for all protective devices in the system, organized by the buses
to which they are connected. It gives bus ID, nominal kV, device ID and type, calculated device
interrupting duties including rms values of symmetrical and adjusted symmetrical short-circuit current in
kA rms, equivalent X/R ratio at the fault location, and the multiplying factor (MF), as well as device
interrupting capacities in terms of rated kV, test power factor, rms values of rated interrupting current and
the adjusted interrupting current. Overstressed devices are flagged.

Bus Information Device Information Interrupting Duty Device Capability
==================== ========================= ================================ =================================
Symm. X/R Adj Sym. Test Rated Adjusted
ID kV ID Type kA rms Ratio M.F. kA rms kV PF Int. Int.
------------ ------ ------------ ----------- -------- ----- ----- -------- ------ ----- -------- --------
Bus3 13.80 5.985 8.8
Main Bus 34.50 CB2 3 cy Sym CB 27.267 44.3 1.216 33.147 38.000 40.000 40.000
Main Bus 34.50 Fuse1 Fuse 27.466 44.1 1.243 34.128 38.000 15.00 48.000 48.000
Main Bus 34.50 CB1 3 cy Sym CB 27.267 44.3 1.216 33.147 38.000 31.500 34.696 #
Main Bus 34.50 CB10 8 cy Tot CB 27.267 44.3 1.279 34.864 38.000 22.800 25.113 *
Sub 2A 13.80 CB12 8 cy Tot CB 6.457 23.9 1.115 7.201 15.000 10.000 10.870
Sub 2A 13.80 CB11 8 cy Tot CB 6.457 23.9 1.115 7.201 15.000 20.000 21.739
Sub 2B 13.80 CB5 3 cy Sym CB 10.003 36.8 1.168 11.687 15.000 19.300 20.978
Sub 2B 13.80 CB4 3 cy Sym CB 10.003 36.8 1.168 11.687 15.000 19.300 20.978
Sub 3 4.16 CB8 5 cy Sym CB 27.091 40.0 1.213 32.858 4.760 29.000 31.000 *
Sub 3 4.16 CB9 3 cy Sym CB 27.091 40.0 1.198 32.462 4.760 42.400 48.515
Sub3 Swgr 4.16 CB14 5 cy Sym CB 24.218 8.7 1.000 24.218 4.760 41.000 46.913

Notes: * Indicates buses with short-circuit values exceeding the device ratings.
# Indicates buses with short-circuit values exceeding the device marginal ratings (Device Margin: 90%).
Method: IEEE - X/R is calculated from separate R & X networks.
Short-Circuit Analysis Alert View
13.11 Alert View
To facilitate the user to check the device ratings after a device duty calculation, ETAP PowerStation
provides a short-Circuit Analysis Alert View which lists all devices that have a critical or marginal rating
violation. This view can be open by clicking on the Alert View button. If the Auto Display box is
checked in the study case, the Alert View will be automatically open once the device duty short-circuit
calculation is completed.

13-56 ETAP PowerStation 4.0

13.11.1 Alert View Entries
Device ID
The Device Identification section of the alert view window lists the names of the components that
qualified as alerts after the Short-circuit calculation.
Type
The type section of the alert view window displays information about the type of the device having the
displayed alert.
Rating
The rating section of the Alert View Window provides the rating information being used to determine
whether an alert should be reported and of what kind of alert was found.
Calculated
The calculated section of the alert view window displays the results (duty) from the Short-circuit
calculation. The results listed here are used in combination with those displayed in the ratings section to
determine the operating percent values. These values are then compared to those entered in the Short-
circuit study case editor alarm page.
%Value
This section displays the percent operating values calculated based on the Short-circuit results and the
different device ratings. The values displayed here are directly compared to the percent of monitored
parameters entered directly into the study case editor alarm page. Based on the element type, system
topology and given conditions, the program uses these percent values to determine if and what kind of
alert should be displayed.
Condition
The conditions section of the Alert View Window provides a brief comment about the type of alert being
reported. In the case of Short-circuit alarms, the different conditions reported are the same as those listed
in the bus and protective device monitored parameters tables.
13.11.2 Parameters Monitored and Conditions Reported
Bus Alert
Short-circuit simulation Alerts for buses are designed to monitor crest, symmetrical and asymmetrical
bracing conditions. These conditions are determined from bus rating values and Short-circuit analysis
results. The conditions reported for buses are the same for ANSI and IEC project standards. The
following table contains a list of monitored parameters and the conditions that their corresponding alerts
report.
Bus Alerts Monitored parameters and Condition Reported
Type of Device Monitored Parameter Condition Reported
Momentary Asymmetrical. rms kA Bracing Asymmetrical
HV Bus (> 1000 Volts)
Momentary Asymmetrical. crest kA Bracing Crest
Momentary Symmetrical. rms kA Bracing Symmetrical
LV Bus (<1000Volts)
Momentary Asymmetrical. rms kA Bracing Asymmetrical

Protective Device Alert
Short-circuit Alerts monitor certain conditions of interest for both ANSI and IEC project standards. The
conditions reported by the alerts depend on whether the user runs ANSI or IEC Short-circuit analysis.
ANSI and IEC standards have different sets of monitored parameters. The following table contains a list
of monitored parameters used for both standards.
Protective Alerts Monitored parameters
Device Type ANSI Monitored Parameters IEC Monitored Parameters
LVCB Interrupting Adjusted Symmetrical. rms kA Breaking
Momentary C&L Making
Momentary C&L Crest kA N/A HV CB
Interrupting Adjusted Symmetrical. rms kA Breaking
FUSE Interrupting Adjusted Symmetrical. rms kA Breaking
SPDT Momentary Asymmetrical. rms kA Making
SPST Switches Momentary Asymmetrical. rms kA Making

Short-Circuit Alerts for protective devices report different conditions depending on the monitored
parameters. The following table contains a list of the corresponding conditions reported in the Alert View
Window.
Protective Device Reported Condition
Device Type ANSI Reported Condition IEC Reported Condition
LVCB Interrupting Breaking
Interrupting Breaking
C&L Making
HV CB
C&L Crest N/A
Fuse Interrupting Breaking
SPDT C&L Making
SPST Switches C&L Making

ETAP

PowerStation
4.0
User Guide
Copyright 2001
All Rights Reserved





Southern California

(949) 462-0100 Sales
(949) 462-0400 Fax

Chapter 14

PowerPlot Interface

In this chapter, the capabilities that allow you to perform protective device coordination studies using the
PowerPlot program directly from the PowerStation one-line diagram are discussed. Using this program,
you can edit the protective device settings and simply rubber band an area of your one-line diagram and
display the time-current curves.

PowerPlot Interface Introduction
The steps required to generate time-current curves directly from a one-line diagram are as follows:

Add protective devices to the one-line diagram (Edit mode)
Run short-circuit calculations (Short-Circuit mode)
Click on the icon to save short-circuit results for PowerPlot
Switch to Relay Coordination mode
Edit protective device settings
Display time-current curves by selecting devices from the one-line diagram

The PowerStation and PowerPlot programs are installed with separate installation programs. The two
programs can be linked together from PowerStation by specifying the PowerPlot project name and path.
You can access the PowerPlot Name and Path Editor from the Project menu on the menu bar.

In this chapter, the process of creating the data link between the PowerStation and PowerPlot programs,
saving short-circuit calculation results for PowerPlot, and the capabilities of PowerStation-PowerPlot
interface are discussed. Adding protective devices to a one-line diagram and conducting short-circuit
calculations are discussed in other chapters.

PowerPlot Interface PowerStation Data Link
14.1 PowerStation-PowerPlot Data Link
You can create a data link between the PowerStation and PowerPlot programs by specifying the
PowerPlot project name and path in the PowerPlot Name and Path Editor. To access this editor, select
PowerPlot Path from the Project menu located on the menu bar.

Once you establish the PowerPlot project name and path, device IDs are the only link between the two
programs, i.e., in order for a protective device to share properties between PowerStation and PowerPlot, it
must have the same ID in both programs.

From the PowerPlot Project Name and Path Editor specify the following:
PowerPlot Path
Enter the path for the PowerPlot program, for example, C:\PowerPlot v.2.5. You can use Browse to find
your PowerPlot directory.
PowerPlot Project Name
Enter up to thirty alphanumeric characters for the PowerPlot Project Name. The program will create a
PowerPlot project file by this name and will add the time-current curves that you wish to save to the
indicated project file. This project file, that has the extension of .plt, will be located in the path specified
in this editor.

PowerPlot Interface PowerStation Data Link
PowerPlot Project Path
Enter the path for PowerPlot project file. You can also browse to find your PowerPlot project directory.
Program by default assigns your PowerStation project path for PowerPlot project path. However, the
PowerPlot path can be selected to be on any location on your system.
Update Short-Circuit Values
Select this option to automatically transfer the following data to the PowerPlot program:

Momentary symmetrical fault currents for balanced faults (ANSI)
Phase a symmetrical fault currents for unbalanced (L-G) faults (ANSI)
Peak currents (Ip) for balanced faults (IEC)
Phase a symmetrical fault currents for unbalanced (L-G) faults (IEC)

Note that if a device is not connected to a faulted bus there will be no transfer of short-circuit current
value to that device.

When this option is selected and you edit any of the protective devices in Relay Coordination (RC) mode,
nominal bus voltages and fault currents of the last saved short-circuit results will be transferred to the
PowerPlot database and will be displayed in the device editors.
Note that the selection of this option does not automatically update short-circuit currents and bus voltages
for protective devices which already exist in PowerPlot. To update all devices, click on the Update
PowerPlot with SC kA Bus kV button on the Relay Coordination Toolbar.

The following data, if applicable, also transfers to PowerPlot every time you open an existing curve or
create a new curve:

Trip device types
Relay types
Transformer data
Cable data
Motor data

The following device curves are available for PowerStation-PowerPlot interface program:

Fuse
Electro-Mechanical, MCP, Solid-State, MCP, Thermal Magnetic
Motor Relay
Over Current Relay
Solid-State Relay
Transformer Damage Curve
Cable Damage Curve
Motor starting Curve
Motor starting Curve
PowerPlot Interface Project Files
14.2 Project Files
When you link a PowerStation project and a PowerPlot project (by specifying the project name and path),
any devices and Time-Current Curve (TCC) files that you generate from PowerStation will be added to
the PowerPlot project file. It is possible to have more than one PowerPlot project file per PowerStation
project. However, this structure may cause confusion and is not recommended.

Assigning only one PowerPlot project per PowerStation project is recommended.

PowerStation
Project

PowerPlot
Project

PowerPlot Project File
A PowerPlot project consists of one file with a .plt extension. Each PowerPlot project file may consist of
a number of Time-Current Curve (TCC) files. A TCC file can contain protective device characteristic
curves created and added to one TCC file, which are available to be retrieved and added to any of the
TCC files in the same project file.

For example, the PowerPlot project file Example may contain a number of TCC files named: TCC1,
TCC2, TCC3, etc. Protective devices PD1, PD2, and PD13 are included and displayed in TCC1. At the
same time PD2 is also included and displayed in the TCC4 file. Note that any changes made in the PD2
settings will be reflected in both the TCC1 and TCC4 files.

Project TCC File Devices
Example TCC1 PD1
TCC2 PD2
XYZ PD13

TCC4 PD2
. PD4
TCCX PD5
Open, Modify, and Save PowerPlot TCC Files
There are two methods to open an existing TCC file:

From the PowerPlot program, first select Open from the File menu and select a TCC file from the
displayed list of files.
From the PowerStation one-line diagram in Relay Coordination mode, without selecting any devices,
first click on the Display Time-Current Curve button and then select a TCC file from the displayed
list of PowerPlot TCC files.

To modify the settings of a device included in a TCC file, double-click on the curve or its label to open its
editor, and then modify the settings.

To save a TCC file double-click on the TCC and type in the name you want.

PowerPlot Interface Project Files
14.3 Data Transfer to PowerPlot
After you establish a data link between a PowerStation and a PowerPlot project, data such as voltage,
short-circuit current, trip device type, relay type, and current transformer (CT) turn ratio of all protective
devices can be transferred from the PowerStation project to the PowerPlot project. If you select the
Update Short-Circuit Values option from the PowerPlot Name and Path Editor, the short-circuit results
transfer is done automatically when you edit a protective device in Relay Coordination mode.

To transfer data for all protective devices that have the same ID in both programs, click on the Update
PowerPlot with SC kA Bus kV button located on the Relay Coordination Toolbar.

Note that this action transfers the last saved short-circuit analysis results for all protective devices.

In addition, the following data, if applicable, will also transfer to PowerPlot every time you open an
existing curve or create a new curve:

Trip device types
Relay types
Transformer data
Cable data
Motor data

The following steps describe actions needed for preparing a short-circuit current for coordination studies:

1. Configure your system for a maximum short-circuit current condition
2. Perform the short-circuit analysis of your choice (ANSI or IEC method) with all buses faulted
3. Click on the Save kA button located on the Short-Circuit Toolbar to save the following:

Momentary symmetrical fault currents for balanced faults (ANSI)
Phase a symmetrical fault currents for unbalanced (L-G) faults (ANSI)
Peak currents (Ip) for balanced faults (IEC)
Phase a symmetrical fault currents for unbalanced (L-G) faults (IEC)

Note that the short-circuit fault currents are transferred for the devices connected to the faulted buses.

PowerPlot Interface Data Transfer to PowerPlot
Motor Starting Devices
Mapping of the motor starting devices from PowerStation to PowerPlot is as follows:

Device PowerStation (% Tap) PowerPlot
Auto-transformer 59% < Xfrmr-50%
59% >= or 74% < Xfrmr-65%
74% >= Xfrmr-80%
Resistor 74% < Resist-65%
74% >= Resist-80%
Reactor 74% < React-65%
74% >= React-80%
Cable Insulation Class
Mapping of the cable insulation class from PowerStation to PowerPlot is as follows:

PowerStation PowerPlot
0 None Bare-Copper
1 Paper PAPER
2 PE XLPE
3 ALPE XLPE
4 EPR EPR
5 SBR RUBBER
6 Rubber RUBBER
7 Rubber1 RUBBER
8 Rubber2 RUBBER
9 Neoprene THER
10 PVC THER
11 FEP EPR
12 FEPB EPR
13 MI THER
14 MTW THER
15 PFA THER
16 PFAH THER
17 RH RUBBER
18 RHH RUBBER
19 RHW RUBBER
20 SA THER
21 SIS THER
22 TA THER
23 TBS THER
24 TFE THER
25 THHN THER
26 THHW THER
27 THW THER
28 THWN THER
29 TW THER
30 UF THER
31 USE THER
32 V VARN CLOTH
33 XHHW THER
PowerPlot Interface Data Transfer to PowerPlot

Note that after you click on the Save kA button, the associated data are saved for transferring to the
PowerPlot database. Calculated data is not actively transferred to the PowerPlot database unless the
Update Short-Circuit Values option is checked in the PowerPlot Project name and Path Editor or until you
click on the Transfer Data to PowerPlot button located on the Relay Coordination Toolbar.

PowerPlot Interface Relay Coordination Mode
14.4 Relay Coordination Mode
You can access the Relay Coordination mode by clicking on the Relay Coordination button located on the
Configuration & Mode Toolbar. If you have not specified the PowerPlot path, PowerStation will notify
you that the PowerPlot path is not found. To edit the path, select PowerPlot Path from the Project menu
on the menu bar. For more information, see PowerStation-PowerPlot Data Link.

14.4.1 Relay Coordination Toolbar
Upon the selection of Relay Coordination Mode, the Relay Coordination Toolbar will appear to the right
side of your screen. When using this toolbar, you can either access the PowerPlot program directly or
interface with PowerStation.

Copy the Selected One-Line Diagram Elements to PowerPlot
Not Active in This Release
Not Active in This Release
Display Options
Update PowerPlot with SC kA Bus kV
Display Time Current Curve (TCC)
Edit PowerPlot Device Settings
Run PowerPlot (Stand-Alone)

Run PowerPlot (Stand-Alone)
Click on the PowerPlot button to run PowerPlot as a stand-alone program from the PowerStation one-line
diagram. This is useful when you want to add protective devices to the PowerPlot project file without
having them in the PowerStation project file. In this mode, short-circuit fault currents and bus voltages
cannot be transferred from PowerStation to PowerPlot. To learn more about this stand-alone operation,
refer to the PowerPlot Quick-Start Manual or PowerPlot online Help, located in the top right corner of the
PowerPlot menu bar.
When you are running PowerPlot as a stand-alone program and you decide to add protective devices to
the PowerPlot project file, you should enter an ID identical to the PowerStation device ID so that you can
maintain a future link between the two programs.

This feature is useful when you choose to create a PowerPlot project in stand-alone mode first and then
decide to use the interface capabilities.

The following steps show how to add a trip device in the PowerPlot stand-alone program with the link to
PowerStation:

1. From Relay Coordination mode, run PowerPlot (stand-alone)
2. Open your PowerPlot project file and select a TCC file
3. Click on the Electro-Mechanical Trips button
4. Add a device with CB10 as its device ID
5. Enter the device settings and save
6. From Relay Coordination mode return to the one-line diagram (PowerStation), select CB10, and click
on the Edit button. You can see that the electro-mechanical device created in PowerPlot is now
linked to the PowerStation protective device CB10.
Edit PowerPlot Device Settings
To edit the settings of protective devices from ETAP PowerStation, take the following steps:

Select a protective device by clicking on the device symbol on the one-line diagram. The selected
device will be displayed in blue.
Click on the Edit button and edit the selected device settings in the PowerPlot Editor. Note that if the
Update Short-Circuit Values option in the PowerPlot Name and Path Editor is selected, PowerPlot
editors will contain the last saved short-circuit results.
Click on the OK button to save data or click on the Cancel button to close the editor without saving
any changes.

Protective device IDs are the link between PowerStation and PowerPlot databases. When you select
a device in the Relay Coordination mode to edit, the associated PowerPlot editor automatically contains
the ID of the device that you have selected.
Display Time-Current Curve (TCC)
After editing all device settings, you can display time-current curves of any number of devices simply by:

Rubber-banding or selecting the devices on the one-line diagram
Clicking on the Display Time-Current Curve (TCC) button

Transfer Data to PowerPlot (Update)
Click on this button to update calculated short-circuit fault currents of all protective devices that have the
same ID in both the PowerStation and PowerPlot programs.

Note that short-circuit data that is being updated (transferred) to the PowerPlot database is the last short-
circuit data saved by using the Save kA button located on the Short-Circuit Toolbar. Also, the short-
circuit fault currents are transferred for the devices connected to the faulted buses.

Copy the Selected One-Line Diagram Elements to PowerPlot

To copy a PowerStation one-line diagram into a PowerPlot TCC do the following:

In PowerStation select the area you want. Selection can be done by rubber banding the desired
elements or by holding the Ctrl button down and left-clicking on the elements to be included.

Click on the Copy the selected OLD Elements to PowerPlot button, which is located on the Relay
Coordination toolbar.
Select the appropriate PowerPlot TCC from the listing

The one-line diagram will be copied to the selected TCC.

Note that the size of the copied one-line diagram depends on the zoom level in the PowerStation one-line
diagram.

ETAP

PowerStation
4.0
User Guide
Copyright 2001
All Rights Reserved





Southern California

(949) 462-0100 Sales
(949) 462-0400 Fax

Chapter 15

Load Flow Analysis

The PowerStation Load Flow Analysis program calculates the bus voltages, branch power factors,
currents, and power flows throughout the electrical system. The program allows for swing, voltage
regulated, and unregulated power sources with multiple utility and generator connections. It handles both
radial and loop systems. Different methods are provided for you to select from in order to achieve the
best calculation efficiency.

This chapter defines definitions and explains the usage of different tools you will need to run load flow
studies. Theoretical background for different load flow calculation methods is also provided.

The Load Flow Toolbar section explains how can you launch a load flow calculation, open and view an
output report, or select display options. The Load Flow Study Case Editor section explains how can you
create a new study case, what parameters are required to specify a study case, and how to set them. The
Display Options section explains what options are available for displaying some key system parameters
and the output results on the one-line diagram, and how to set them. The Load Flow Calculation Methods
section shows formulations of different load flow calculation methods. Comparisons on their rate of
convergence, improving convergence based on different system parameters and configurations, and some
tips on selecting an appropriate calculation method are also found in this section. The Required Data for
Calculations section describes what data is necessary to perform load flow calculations and where to enter
them. Finally, the Load Flow Study Output Report section illustrates and explains output reports and
their format.

Load Flow Analysis Toolbar
15.1 Load Flow Toolbar
The Load Flow Toolbar will appear on the screen when you are in the Load Flow Study mode.

Run Load Flow Studies
Update Cable Load Current
Alert View
Load Flow Display Options
Load Flow Report Manager
Get Online Data
Get Archived Data
Run Load Flow Studies
Select a study case from the Study Case Editor. Then click on the Run Load Flow Study icon to
perform a load flow study. A dialog box will appear to specify the output report name if the output file
name is set to Prompt. The study results will then appear on the one-line diagram and in the output
report.
Update Cable Load Current
Selecting the Update Cable Load Current icon will transfer cable load current data from the previously
run load flow study. The data is transferred to the Operating Load Current in the Cable Editor for each
cable associated with the load flow study.
Load Flow Display Options
The results from load flow studies are displayed on the one-line diagram. To edit how these results look,
click on the Load Flow Display Options icon. For more information see Load Flow Display Options.

Alert View
After performing a load flow study, you can click on this button to open the Alert View, which lists all
equipment with critical and marginal violations based on the settings in the study case.
Load Flow Report Manager
Load flow output reports are provided in two forms: ASCII text files and Crystal Reports. The Report
each page of the Report Manager for load flow studies.

Choosing any format other than TextRept in the Report Manager activates the Crystal Reports. You can
open the whole load flow output report or only a part of it, depending on the format selection. The format
names and corresponding output report sections are given below:

Branch Branch input data
Bus Bus input data
Cable Cable input data
Complete Complete output report including all input and output
Cover Title page of the output report
EqCable Equipment cable input data
LFreport Load Flow calculation results
Losses Branch loss results
Summary Summary of load flow calculation
XFMR&X Transformer and reactor input data
Loading Branch loading results
UndrOver Bus undervoltage/overvoltage report



Load flow text output reports (with an .lfr extension) can be viewed by any word processor such as

For Notepad, WordPad, and Microsoft Word applications, recommended settings are explained in the
Printing & Plotting section.
Get Online Data
line data.
Get Archived Data
Load Flow Analysis Study Case Editor
The Load Flow Study Case Editor contains solution control variables, loading conditions, and a variety of
options for output reports. PowerStation allows you to create and save an unlimited number of study
cases. Load flow calculations are conducted and reported in accordance with the settings of the study
case selected in the toolbar. You can easily switch between study cases without the trouble of resetting
the study case options each time. This feature is designed to organize your study efforts and save you
time.

As a part of the multi-dimensional database concept of PowerStation, study cases can be used for any
combination of the three major system toolbar components, i.e. for any configuration status, one-line
diagram presentation, and Base/Revision data.

When you are in Load Flow Analysis mode, you can access the Load Flow Study Case Editor by clicking
on the Study Case button from the Load Flow Study Case Toolbar. You can also access this editor from
the Project View by clicking on the Load Flow Study Case folder.

To create a new study case, go to the Project View, right-click on the Load Flow Study Case folder, and
select Create New. The program will then create a new study case, which is a copy of the default study
case, and adds it to the Load Flow Study Case folder.

15.2.1 Info Page

Study Case ID
and entering the new ID. Study case ID can be up to 12 alphanumeric characters. Use the Navigator
Method
In this section you can select a load flow solution method. Three methods are available: Newton-
Raphson, Fast-decoupled, and Accelerated Gauss-Seidel.

Note that for the Newton-Raphson, a few Gauss-Seidel iterations are made first to establish a set of sound
initial values for the bus voltages (since convergence of the Newton-Raphson method is highly dependent
on the initial bus voltages).
Maximum Iteration
Enter the maximum number for iterations. If the solution has not converged before the specified number
of iterations, the program will stop and inform the user. The recommended and default values are 2000
for the Gauss-Seidel method, and five for the Newton-Raphson and Fast-decoupled methods.
Precision
Enter the value for the solution precision, which is used to check for convergence. This value determines
how precise you want the final solution to be. For the Gauss-Seidel method, precision is applied to check
the difference between the bus voltages after each iteration. For the Newton-Raphson and Fast-decoupled
methods, the precision is compared with the difference in power for each bus (MW and Mvar) between
iterations. If the difference between the iterations is less than or equal to the value entered for precision,
the desired accuracy is achieved.

If the solution converges but the mismatch values are high, reduce the value of the precision to make your
results more precise and run the program again (you may need to increase the number of iterations). Note
that a smaller precision value results in lower mismatch (higher accuracy), as well as a longer run time.
The default (and recommended) values are 0.000001 pu volts for the Gauss-Seidel method, and .001 pu
power for the Newton-Raphson and Fast-decoupled methods.
Acceleration Factor
This field is present if the Accelerated Gauss-Seidel method is used. Enter the convergence acceleration
factor to be used between iterations. Typical values are between 1.2 and 1.7; the default is 1.45.
Apply XFMR Phase-Shift
Check this box to consider transformer phase-shift in load flow calculations. The phase-shift of a
transformer can be found from the transformer editor.
Loading
In the Loading section of the Load Flow Study Case Editor, you can specify the operating loads by
selecting a loading category and diversity factors (variable or fixed).
Loading Category
Select one of the ten Loading Categories for this Load Flow Study. With the selection of any category,
PowerStation uses the percent loading of individual motors and other loads as specified for the selected
category. Note that you can assign loading to each one of the ten categories from the Nameplate page of
the induction machine editor and synchronous motor editor and the Loading or Rating page of other load
component editors.
Operating Load
This option is available if your ETAP key has the online feature. When this box is checked, the operating
loads updated from online data or a previous load flow study will be utilized in the load flow study.
This section allows you to specify load diversity factors to be applied on the loading category load. When
the Operating Load is selected, no diversity factor is considered.
None
Select None to use the percent loading of each load as entered for the selected Loading Category.
Bus Maximum
When the Maximum Loading option is selected, all motors and other loads directly connected to each bus
will be multiplied by the bus maximum diversity factor. Using this option, you can simulate load flow
studies with each bus having a different maximum diversity factor.

This study option is helpful when the future loading of the electrical system has to be considered and each
bus may be loaded at a different maximum value.
Bus Minimum
When the Minimum Bus Loading option is selected, all motors and other loads directly connected to each
bus will be multiplied by the bus minimum diversity factor. Using this option, you can simulate load
flow studies with each bus having a different minimum diversity factor.

The minimum bus loading study option may be used to see the effect of transformer taps and capacitors
(if any) on the system voltages under a minimum (light) loading condition.
Global Diversity Factor
Enter the diversity factors for all constant kVA and constant Z loads. When you select this option,
PowerStation will globally multiply all motors and static loads of the selected Loading Category with the
entered values for the motor and static load diversity factors.

Note that a motor load-multiplying factor of 125% implies that the motor loads of all buses are increased
by 25 percent above their nominal values. This value can be smaller or greater than 100 percent.
Charger Loading
For chargers, you have the option to use the loading category load or the operating load. Note that the
operating load for a charger can only be updated from a DC load flow study.
Initial Condition
Initial conditions for all bus voltages and angles can be specified in this section for load flow calculation
purposes.
Use Bus Voltages
Select this option to use bus voltages and angles as entered in the Info page of the bus editors. Using this
option you can simulate load flow studies with different initial conditions for bus voltage.
Use Fixed Values
This option allows you to simulate load flow studies using a fixed bus voltage and angle for all buses.
When you select the fixed initial condition option, you must enter the initial voltage value as the percent
of the bus nominal voltage. The default values are 100% for bus voltage magnitude and zero degree for
bus voltage angle.
Determination of Initial Bus Voltage Angle
When transformer phase-shift is considered in the load flow calculation, the initial bus voltage angle
should take it into account. Otherwise, very poor initial bus voltage angle may be used and will affect
load flow convergence. To resolve this issue, ETAP load flow program calculates the bus voltage angle
based on transformer phase-shift and compare the calculated value against the initial bus voltage angle
from user selected option. If the difference between the two values is larger than MaxIniAngDiff, ETAP
uses the calculated the values as the initial bus voltage angle, where MaxIniAngDiff is an ETAP.INI file
entry defaulted at 10. According to the selection for the initial bus voltage and the Apply XFMR Phase-
Shift field, there are four different situations:

When the Use Fixed Values is checked and the Apply XFMR Phase-Shift is also checked, the
calculated initial bus voltage angles are used in the load flow calculation.
When the Use Bus Voltages is checked and the Apply XFMR Phase-Shift is also checked, the initial
bus voltage angle from the Bus Editor is compared against the calculated bus voltage angle. If the
difference is less than MaxIniAngDiff, the initial bus voltage angle from the Bus Editor is used;
otherwise the calculated value is used in the load flow calculation.
When the Use Fixed Values is checked and the Apply XFMR Phase-Shift is not checked, the initial
voltage angle entered in the Load Flow Study Case is used in the load flow calculation. In this case,
all the buses have the same initial voltage angle.
When the Use Bus Voltages is checked and the Apply XFMR Phase-Shift is not checked, the initial
bus voltage angles from the Bus Editor are used in the load flow calculation.

When the operating load is specified as the system load, the operating voltage angles are used as the
initial value. In this case, if the Apply XFMR Phase-Shift is checked, the operating voltage angle is
compared against the calculated bus voltage angle. If the difference is less than MaxIniAngDiff, the
operating voltage angle is used; otherwise the calculated value is used in the load flow calculation.
Report
Equipment Cable Losses and Vd
Select this option to report losses and voltage drop associated with equipment cables in the output report.
Bus Voltage
Calculated bus voltages seen in the output report can be printed in kV or in percent of the bus nominal
voltages. Select your preference by clicking on in Percent or in kV. For graphical display of bus
voltages see Load Flow Display Options.
Update
In this section, you can decide to update initial conditions of the buses and/or set the transformer taps to
the calculated value of LTCs. The selected options will be updated after the subsequent load flow run.
Initial Bus Voltage
Select this option to update the values of the bus voltage magnitudes with the result of this load flow run.
Bus voltage update will result in a faster convergence of the subsequent load flow solutions since the
initial bus voltages will be closer to the final values.
Inverter Operating Load
In an AC load flow study, an inverter is represented as a constant voltage source. When this option is
checked, the load provided by the inverter will be updated to the inverter element, which can be used later
as DC load of the inverter in a DC load flow study.
Operating Load & V
The option is available if your ETAP key has the online feature. When this box is checked, the
calculation results will be updated to sources, loads, and buses, so that they can be utilized as input for
later studies. These values are also displayed in element editors. If your ETAP key does not have the
online feature, you can see the operating P, Q, and V in only element editors, and they cannot be used in a
later study.
Transformer LTCs
Select this option to update the transformer taps to reflect the result of load tap changer (LTC) settings,
i.e., transformer taps will be set to values determined from the load flow solution for LTCs. This feature
is useful when you want to consider the impedance of the LTC taps for short-circuit calculations.
Remarks 2nd Line
You can enter up to 120 alphanumeric characters in this remarks box. Information entered in this location
will be printed on the second line of every output page header line. These remarks can provide specific
information for each study cases. Note that the first line of the header information is global for all study
cases and is entered in the Project Information Editor.
15.2.2 Alert Page
The Alert Page in the Load Flow Study Case Editor is used to specify the setup of all the Simulation
Alerts provided to notify the user of an abnormal loading condition based on predetermined, allowable,
percent values and system topology. The functional capability of the Simulation Alert System is to
generate alerts when there is an overload in protective devices, buses, transformers, cables, reactors,
generators, and utilities. The alerts are reported by the generation of different types of alerts, either
graphically in the one-line diagram display or in the Alert View Window.

Critical and Marginal Alerts
There are two types of simulation alerts generated after a Load Flow study. The difference between
Marginal and Critical Alerts is their use of different percent value conditions to determine if an alert
should be generated. If a condition for a Critical alert is met, then an alert will be generated in the Alert
View Window and the overloaded element will turn red in the one-line diagram. The same is true for
Marginal Alerts, except that the overloaded component will be displayed in magenta color. Also, the
Marginal Alerts check box must be selected if the user desires to display the Marginal Alerts. If a device
alert qualifies it for both Critical and Marginal alerts, only Critical Alerts are displayed. It should be
noted that in order for ETAP PowerStation to generate alerts for an element type, both the element rating
and the percent value entered in this page must be non-zero. The element ratings for alert checking are
given in the following sections.
Loading
This set of value fields allows the user to enter the condition percent values of the monitored parameters
used to determine if an alert should be reported based on loading conditions determined by a Load Flow
calculation. The Load Flow Loading Alerts generate overload alerts.
Bus Alerts
Bus loading alerts are determined from the values entered into the percent value input fields. The
monitored parameter is the percent of rated continuous current flowing through the bus. If the continuous
current calculated from a Load Flow study exceeds the specified percent values, then the program
generates an alert.
Transformer Alerts
Transformer Simulation Alerts generate an alert if the Critical or Marginal percent limit of maximum
MVA rating is exceeded after a Load Flow calculation. If the calculated MVA is more than the percent of
rated value specified in the Marginal or Critical percent fields, overload alerts are reported. The
simulation alerts work for both two and three winding transformers.
Cable
Cable Simulation Alerts monitor the rated loading limit for cables / line in percent of allowable ampacity,
which is entered from the Ampacity Page of the Cable Editor. If the Load Flow calculated current
percent flowing through the cable is greater than the Marginal or Critical percent limits, overload alerts
are reported.
Reactor
A reactor alert generates alerts if the program determines that the percent of rated continuous current is
exceeded based on the Load Flow calculation results. These alerts are reported as overloads.
Generator / Utility
The generator Loading Simulation Alert monitors the percent of rated MW. If the results from a Load
Flow calculation indicate that the specified percent of rated MW is exceeded, then, the program reports an
overload alert.
Protective Devices
Protective Device Simulation Alerts generate alerts when certain predetermined parameter value ratings
are exceeded. The following table contains a list of the conditions used by the Alert Simulation Program
to determine when to report an alert. Load Flow results are compared to the monitored parameters listed
in the following table:

Protective Devices Monitored parameters in
percent of
Condition reported
Low Voltage Circuit Breaker Continuous rated Current Overload
High Voltage Circuit Breaker Continuous rated Current Overload
Fuses Rated Current Overload
Contactors Continuous rated Current Overload
SPDT / SPST switches Continuous rated Current Overload

Protective device alerts will generate alerts only if the monitored parameter rating is larger than zero.
Bus Voltage Alerts
Bus Voltage Simulation Alerts generate alerts if the voltage magnitude percent results from the Load
Flow calculation exceed or are below the specified nominal kV rating percent values. Bus Voltage Alerts
report over voltage and under voltage alerts.
Generator / Utility Excitation Alerts
Simulation Alerts for generator excitation, monitor the percent rated Mvar limits. An alert for Over
Excitation is reported if the Upper Excitation percent limit (Qmax) for the generator is exceeded
according to a Load Flow calculation. An alert for Under Excitation is reported if the generator Mvar
result from the Load Flow calculation is below the specified Lower Excitation percent limit (Qmin).

Load Flow Analysis Display Options
15.3.1 Results Page
The Load Flow Analysis Display Options consist of a Results page and three pages for AC, AC-DC, and
DC info annotations. Note that the colors and displayed annotations selected for each study are specific
to that study.

Color
Select the color for result annotations to be displayed on the one-line diagram.
Voltage
Voltage
Select kV or percent for voltage display on the one-line diagram from the list. It should be noted that all
percent voltages are displayed with the bus nominal kV as the base voltage.
Bus
Select this option to display bus voltages on the one-line diagram. Bus voltages are displayed at 15
degrees.
Load Term
Select this option to display load (motors and static loads) terminal voltages on the one-line diagram.
Load terminal voltages are displayed at 15 degrees.
% Voltage Drop
Line / Cable
Select this option to display line and cable voltage drops on the one-line diagram.
Load FDR
Select a unit for power flow or current flow from the list to be displayed on the one-line diagram.
Power Flows
Here you specify how the flows will be displayed.
Units
Select the unit (kVA or MVA) to be used to display power flow on the one-line diagram.
kW + jkvar
Select the kW + jkvar radio button to display power flow in kW+jkvar or MW+jMvar.
kVA
Select the kVA radio button to display power flow in kVA or MVA.
Amp
Select the Amp radio button to display current flow in amperes.
%PF
When the Amp or kVA radio button is selected, you can check this box to show power factor of power
flow along with the current.
Show Units
Select this option to show units for power flow and current displayed on the one-line diagram.
Elements
Branch
Select this option to display power flow through all branches on the one-line diagram. PowerStation
displays the power flow at one end of a branch, i.e., the end that has a positive kW value flowing into the
branch. For three-winding transformers, all three power flows are displayed.
Gen./Motor/Load
Select this option to display power flow for generators, motors, MOVs, capacitors, lumped loads, and
static loads on the one-line diagram.
Composite Motor
Select this option to display power flow into composite motors.
Composite Network
Select the check box to display power flow into composite networks.
Branch Losses
Select this option to display branch losses on the one-line diagram. Losses are displayed inside a bracket
in [kW+jkvar] or [MW+jMvar].
Meters
Ammeter
Check this option to display primary current for the branch to which an ammeter is attached.
Voltmeter
Check this option to display primary voltage for the bus to which a voltmeter is attached.
Multi-Meter
Check this option to display the measurements of a multi-meter, including bus voltage, branch current,
branch power flow, power factor, and frequency.

15.3.2 AC Page
Color
ID
diagram.
Rating
line diagram.

Device Type Rating
Generator kW / MW
Motor HP / kW
Load kVA / MVA
Panel Connection Type (# Phases - # Wires)
Bus kA Bracing
kV

A

Z

Motor % LRC
D-Y
one-line diagram.

For transformers, the operating tap setting for primary, secondary, and tertiary windings are also
Composite Motor
Use Default Options
15.3.3 AC-DC Page
Color
ID
line diagram.
Rating
one-line diagram.

Device Type Rating
UPS kVA
VFD HP / kW
kV
A
one-line diagram.

Device Type Amp
Composite Network
Use Default Options
15.3.5 DC Page
Color
ID
diagram.
Rating
line diagram.

Device Type Rating
Battery Ampere Hour
Motor HP / kW
Load kW / MW
Converter kW / MW
kV

A
one-line diagram.
Z
Composite Motor
Use Default Options

Load Flow Analysis Calculation Methods
15.4 Calculation Methods
PowerStation provides three load flow calculation methods: Newton-Raphson, Fast-Decoupled, and
Accelerated Gauss-Seidel. They possess different convergent characteristics, and sometimes one is
more favorable in terms of achieving the best performance. You can select any one of them depending on
your system configuration, generation, loading condition, and the initial bus voltages.
Newton-Raphson Method
The Newton-Raphson method formulates and solves iteratively the following load flow equation:

P
Q
J J
J J V
1 2
3 4

where P and Q are bus real power and reactive power mismatch vectors between specified value and
calculated value, respectively; V and represents bus voltage angle and magnitude vectors in an
incremental form; and J1 through J4 are called Jacobian matrices.

The Newton-Raphson method possesses a unique quadratic convergence characteristic. It usually has a
very fast convergence speed compared to other load flow calculation methods. It also has the advantage
that the convergence criteria are specified to ensure convergence for bus real power and reactive power
mismatches. This criteria gives you direct control of the accuracy you want to specify for the load flow
solution. The convergence criteria for the Newton-Raphson method are typically set to 0.001 MW and
Mvar.

The Newton-Raphson method is highly dependent on the bus voltage initial values. A careful selection of
bus voltage initial values is strongly recommended. Before running load flow using the Newton-Raphson
method, PowerStation makes a few Gauss-Seidel iterations to establish a set of sound initial values for the
bus voltages.

The Newton-Raphson method is recommended for use with any system as a first choice.
Fast-Decoupled Method
The Fast-decoupled method is derived from the Newton-Raphson method. It takes the fact that a small
change in the magnitude of bus voltage does not vary the real power at the bus appreciably, and likewise,
for a small change in the phase angle of the bus voltage, the reactive power does not change appreciably.
Thus the load flow equation from the Newton-Raphson method can be simplified into two separate
decoupled sets of load flow equations, which can be solved iteratively:

[ ] [ ][ ]
[ ] [ ][ ]

P J
Q J V
=
=
1
4

The Fast-decoupled method reduces computer memory storage by approximately half, compared to the
Newton-Raphson method. It also solves the load flow equations using significantly less computer time
than that required by the Newton-Raphson method, since the Jacobian matrices are constant.

As with the Newton-Raphson method, convergence criteria of the Fast-decoupled method is based on real
power and reactive power mismatches, which are typically set to 0.001 in the order of MW and Mvar.
Although for a fixed number of iterations it is not as accurate as the Newton-Raphson method, the savings
in computer time and the more favorable convergence criteria makes for a very good overall performance.

In general, the Fast-decoupled method can be used as an alternative to the Newton-Raphson method, and
it should definitely be given a try if the Newton-Raphson method has failed when dealing with long radial
systems or systems that have long transmission lines or cables.
Accelerated Gauss-Seidel Method
From the system nodal voltage equation

[ ] [ ][ ]
I Y V
BUS
=

the Accelerated Gauss-Seidel method derives the following load flow equation and solves it iteratively:

[ ]
[ ][ ][ ]
P jQ V Y V
T
BUS
+ =
* *

where P and Q are specified bus real and reactive power vectors, V is the bus voltage vector, and
Y
BUS
is the system admittance matrix.

The Accelerated Gauss-Seidel method has relatively lower requirements of the bus initial voltage values
compared to the Newton-Raphson method and the Fast-decoupled method. Instead of using bus real
power and reactive power mismatch as convergence criteria, the Accelerated Gauss-Seidel method checks
bus voltage magnitude tolerance between two consecutive iterations to control the solution precision. The
typical value for bus voltage magnitude precision is set to 0.000001 pu.

The Accelerated Gauss-Seidel method has slower convergence speed. When you apply appropriate
acceleration factors, a significant increase in the rate of convergence can be obtained. The range for the
acceleration factor is between 1.2 and 1.7, and is typically set to 1.45.
Load Flow Convergence
As in any iterative solution method, the convergence of the load flow solution is affected by a number of
factors specific to power systems.
Negative Impedance
Negative resistance and reactance should be avoided. As an example, the traditional method of modeling
three-winding transformers by a Y equivalent model, using one impedance and two two-winding
transformers, sometimes results in a negative impedance value for one of the impedance branches. In this
case, the negative impedance should be combined with other series circuit elements so that the result is a
positive impedance value. Load flow calculations may not converge if a large value of negative
impedance is used. PowerStation can now model three-winding transformers directly with no need for
the user to do any conversions.
Zero or Very Small Impedance
A zero or very small impedance value of any branch is not allowed, since this will result in infinity or a
huge number in the system admittance matrix. You should represent this type of impedance by a tie
circuit breaker to solve the problem.
Widely Different Branch Impedance Values
Widely different branch impedance values on the same per unit base may result in a slow convergence.
To avoid this situation, various techniques, such as combining series branches with low impedance
values, ignoring short length transmission lines and/or cables, or modeling a small impedance branch with
tie circuit breakers, can be employed.
Long Radial System Configurations
Long radial system configurations usually take a longer time to converge than loop configurations. In
general, the Fast-decoupled method works faster than the Newton-Raphson or the Accelerated Gauss-
Seidel method for radial system.
Bad Bus Voltage Initial Values
Solution convergence speed and computing time are functions of the initial voltages for load-type buses.
The closer the initial voltages are to their final profile, the faster the solution converges. The solution
may not converge if the initial voltages are too far from the final profile, thus it is recommended that the
Update Bus Voltage option be used to obtain a set of sound initial bus voltages.
Modeling of AC-DC Converters
In a load flow study, chargers and UPSs are represented as constant kVA loads connected to their AC
input bus. An inverter is represented as a swing machine, which can maintain its terminal bus angle and
voltage magnitude constant. If you have more than one inverters connected to a bus, they will equally
share the load.

Variable frequency drives are not considered in the load flow study. The load behind a variable
frequency drive is directly added to its terminal bus.
Different Factors Considered in Load Calculation
PowerStation provides users with great flexibility in modeling load variations through different load
factors, such as demand factor, load percent, service factor, and application factor, etc. Depending on
user specifications, these factors are used differently in calculating loads under several circumstances:

Load Editor Calculation of load for loading categories and voltage drop
Input for Studies Calculation of load specification for load flow and initial load for motor starting
and transient stability studies
Studies Results Calculation of load displayed in one-line diagram from load flow, motor starting,
and transient stability studies
Bus Editor Sum of load connected to a bus

The following two tables describe how these factors are used in these cases:
Factors Used for Motor Load Calculation
Load Editor Input to Studies Results from Studies
Load Loss Vd Load Loss Load Loss Vd
Bus
Editor
Bus Nominal kV x x x x x x x x
Bus Operating V x x x x x
Demand Factor x x x x x x x x x
Loading % x x x x x x x x x
Service Factor *
App. Factor *
Load Quantity x x x x x x x
Bus Diversity Factor * * * * *
Global Diversity Factor * * * * *

Factors Used for Static Load Calculation
Load Editor Input to Studies Results from Studies
Load Loss Vd Load Loss Load Loss Vd
Bus
Editor
Bus Nominal kV x x x x x x x x x
Bus Operating V x x x x
Demand Factor x x x x x x x x x
Loading % x x x x x x x x x
App. Factor *
Load Quantity x x x x x x x
Bus Diversity Factor * * * * *
Global Diversity Factor * * * * *
* Indicates the factor is used in calculation if specified by the user in the related load editor or study case.

Notes:

Motor load includes induction motor and generator, synchronous motor, MOV, and motor load
portion of lumped load.
Static load includes static load, capacitor, and static load portion of lumped load

Load Flow Analysis Required Data
15.5 Required Data
Bus Data
Required data for load flow calculations for buses includes:

Nominal kV
%V and Angle (when Initial Condition is set to use Use Bus Voltages)
Load Diversity Factor (when the Loading option is set to use Diversity Factor)
Branch Data
Branch data is entered into the Branch Editors, i.e., Transformer, Transmission Line, Cable, Reactor, and
Impedance Editors. Required data for load flow calculations for branches includes:

Branch Z, R, X, or X/R values and units, tolerance, and temperature, if applicable
Cable and transmission line, length, and unit
Transformer rated kV and kVA/MVA, tap, and LTC settings
Impedance base kV and base kVA/MVA
Power Grid Data
Required data for load flow calculations for power grids includes:

Operating mode (Swing, Voltage Control, or Mvar Control)
Nominal kV
%V and Angle for swing mode
%V, MW loading, and Mvar limits (Qmax & Qmin) for voltage control mode of operation
MW and Mvar loading for Mvar control mode
Required data for load flow calculations for synchronous generators includes:

Operating mode (Swing, Voltage Control or Mvar Control)
Rated kV
%V and Angle for swing mode of operation
%V, MW loading, and Mvar limits (Qmax & Qmin) for Voltage Control mode of operation
MW and Mvar loading for Mvar control mode of operation
Inverter Data
Required data for load flow calculations for inverters includes:

Inverter ID
DC and AC rating data
AC output voltage regulating data
Required data for load flow calculations for synchronous motors includes:

Rated kW/hp and kV
Power factors and efficiencies at 100%, 75%, and 50% loadings
Loading Category ID and % Loading
Equipment cable data
Required data for load flow calculations for induction motors includes:

Rated kW/hp and kV
Static Load Data
Required data for load flow calculations for static loads includes:

Static Load ID
Rated kVA/MVA and kV
Power factor
Capacitor Data

Capacitor ID
Rated kV, kvar/bank, and number of banks
Loading category ID and % Loading
Lumped Load Data

Load ID
Rated kV, MVA, power factor, and % motor load
Charger & UPS Data
Required data for load flow calculations for chargers and UPSs includes:

Element ID
Rated AC kV, MVA, and power factor, as well as DC rating data
Other Data
There are some study case related data, which must also be provided. This includes:

Method (Newton-Raphson, Fast-decoupled, or Accelerated Gauss-Seidel)
Max Iteration
Precision
Acceleration Factor (when Accelerated Gauss-Seidel method is selected)
Loading Category
Initial Condition
Update (for bus voltages and transformer LTCs using load flow result)

The study case related data is entered into the Load Flow Study Case Editor.

Load Flow Analysis Output Reports
15.6 Output Reports
The load flow calculation results are reported both on the one-line diagram and in the Crystal Reports
format. The graphical one-line diagram displays the calculated bus voltages, branch flows and voltage
drops, load power consumption, etc. You can use the Display Options Editor to specify the content to be
displayed. It also flags abnormal operating conditions, such as overloaded cables and over- or
undervoltage buses, in different colors.

The Crystal Reports format provides you with detailed information for a load flow analysis. You can
utilize the Load Flow Report Manager to help you view the output report.
15.6.1 View from Study Case Toolbar
PowerStation automatically opens the output report listed in the Study Case Toolbar with the selected
format. In the picture shown below, the output report name is LF-Winter and the selected format is Text
Report.

15.6.2 Report Manager
To open the Report Manager, simply click on the View Report Manager button on the Load Flow
Toolbar. The editor includes four pages (Complete, Input, Result, and Summary) representing different
sections of the output report. The Report Manager allows you to select formats available for different
portions of the report and view it via Crystal Reports. There are several fields and buttons common to
every page, as described below.
Output Report Name
Project File Name
Help
OK / Cancel
15.6.3 Input Data
include:
Branch
Bus
Cable
Cover
EqCable
XFMR&X


15.6.4 Results
This page allows you to select formats to view the load flow result portion of the output report.


15.6.5 Summary
This page allows you to select different portions of the load summary to view. Note that some portions of
the summary are available only when you selected specific options in the study case, such as Critical and
Marginal Voltage options.

Alert-Complete
Alert-Critical
Alert-Marginal
Branch Loading
Bus Loading
Losses
Summary


15.6.6 Complete
In this page you select from the formats available, Complete, which brings up the complete report for the
load flow study, or Text Report, which is explained in greater detail in the Text Report section. The
complete report includes input data, results, and summary reports.


15.6.7 Text Report
The text report is a continuous ASCII file that contains input data, results, and summary reports. Text
reports can be viewed by any word processor as specified in the PowerStation INI file. The default word
processor PowerStation uses to view text reports is set to Notepad. For more information see the Printing
and Plotting chapter.

PowerStation provides load flow study output reports with different levels of detail, depending on your
requirements. The following are some sample output reports.
Sample 1: Input Data
This section lists system input parameters for buses; transmission lines & cables; transformers, reactors,
& impedances; and all connections including tie circuit breakers, fuses, and switches.
Bus Information & Nominal kV Init. Voltage Generation Motor Load Static Load Mvar Limits
================================================ ============= ============== ============== ============== ==============
ID Type kV Description % Mag. Ang. MW Mvar MW Mvar MW Mvar Max. Min.
------------ ---- ------ -------------------- ------ ----- ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------
Bus3 Load 13.800 101.0 -1.2 3.368 1.355 0.000 0.000
LVBus Load 0.480 99.1 -1.8 0.121 -0.059 0.250 0.127
Main Bus SWNG 34.500 100.0 0.0 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
MCC1 Load 0.480 LV Motor Control Cen 98.0 -3.0 0.421 0.190 0.200 0.000
Sub 2A Load 13.800 101.5 -1.3 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
Sub 2B Gen. 13.800 100.0 1.4 6.300 0.000 0.996 -0.616 0.000 0.000 4.650 -2.000
Sub 3 Load 4.160 99.8 -0.4 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
Sub3 Swgr Load 4.160 99.6 -0.4 0.400 0.170 0.000 0.000
------------------------------------------------- ------ ------ ------ ------ ------
8 Buses Total 6.300 5.306 1.040 0.450 0.127

CKT / Branch Line / Cable (ohms/1000 ft per phase) Impedance
============ =================================================================== ===================================
ID Library Size L (ft) #/ T (C) R X Y MVAb % R % X % Y
------------ -------- ---- ------ --- ------ -------- -------- -------- ------- ------- ------- ----------
Cable11 15MCUS1 2 1350. 1 75 0.20200 0.06850 0.0000000 100.0 14.32 4.86 0.0000000
Cable2 5MCUS3 350 250. 1 75 0.03860 0.04270 0.0000000 100.0 5.58 6.17 0.0000000

CKT / Branch Transformer %Tap Setting Reactor Impedance (100 MVA Base)
============ ======================================= ============= ================= ========================
ID MVA kV kV % Z X/R From To X (ohm) X/R % Tol. % R % X
------------ ------- ------ ------ ------- ----- ------ ------ -------- ------- ------ ------- -------
T3 1.000 4.160 0.480 6.500 18.0 0.000 0.000 0.00 36.1 649.0
XFMR 3 1.000 4.160 0.480 7.200 28.0 0.000 0.000 0.00 25.7 719.5
T2 10.000 34.500 13.800 6.900 23.0 -2.500 0.000 0.00 3.0 68.9
T1 15.000( base MVA for 3-Winding )
15.000 34.500 Zps = 7.100 39.0 0.000 0.00 1.2 47.3
10.000 13.800 Zpt = 7.200 40.0 0.000 0.00 1.2 48.0
5.000 4.160 Zst = 14.100 38.0 0.000 0.00 2.5 94.0

CKT / Branch Connected Bus ID %Impedance (100 MVA Base)
======================== ========================== =========================
ID Type From To R X Z
------------ ---------- ------------ ------------ ------- ------- -------
Cable11 Line/Cable Sub 2A Bus3 14.3 4.9 15.1
Cable2 Line/Cable Sub 3 Sub3 Swgr 5.6 6.2 8.3
T3 2W XFMR Sub3 Swgr LVBus 36.1 649.0 650.0
XFMR 3 2W XFMR Sub3 Swgr MCC1 25.7 719.5 720.0
T2 2W XFMR Main Bus Sub 2A 2.9 67.2 67.3
T1 3W XFMR Main Bus Sub 2B 1.2 48.0 48.0
Main Bus Sub 3 1.2 48.7 48.7
Sub 2B Sub 3 324.1 3383.4 3398.9
Tie CB Tie Breakr Sub 2A Sub 2B 0.0 0.0 0.0
Sample 2: Load Flow Report
This section tabulates detailed load flow results. It gives bus ID, type, and nominal kV, calculated
voltage magnitudes and angles, MW and Mvar generation and loading, and the branch flows from the bus
to all buses connected to it. Flows are given in MW and Mvar, amperes and %PF measured at the bus.
Flows into 3-winding transformers are indicated as flows from one of the bus windings to the other two
bus windings, e.g., form Main Bus to Sub 2B and Sub 3. The settings of tap-changing transformers are
also indicated at buses to which a tap side is connected. These tap settings include the fixed taps and
results from the LTCs. Regulated (voltage-controlled) buses are flagged with a *.

Bus Information & Nom kV Voltage Generation Motor Load Static Load Load Flow XFRM
======================== =========== ============ ============ ============ ====================================== =====
ID Type kV % Mag. Ang. MW Mvar MW Mvar MW Mvar To Bus ID MW Mvar Amp %PF % Tap
------------ ---- ----- ------ ---- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ------------ ----- ----- ---- ----- -----

Bus3 Load 13.80 99.74 0.3 0.00 0.00 3.37 1.35 0.00 0.00 Sub 2A -3.37 -1.35 152 92.8

LVBus Load 0.48 99.06 -1.8 0.00 0.00 0.12 -0.06 0.25 0.12 Sub3 Swgr -0.37 -0.07 451 98.4

*Main Bus Swng 34.50 100.00 0.0 -0.53 3.31 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 Sub 2A -0.69 3.42 58 -19.8 -2.500
Sub 2B 0.16 -0.11 3 -82.9
Sub 3

MCC1 Load 0.48 98.00 -3.0 0.00 0.00 0.42 0.19 0.19 0.00 Sub3 Swgr -0.61 -0.19 787 95.5

Sub 2A Load 13.80 100.29 0.3 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 Bus3 3.39 1.36 152 92.8
Main Bus 0.69 -3.34 142 -20.3
Sub 2B -4.08 1.98 189 -90.0

Sub 2B Load 13.80 100.29 0.3 6.30 -2.00 1.00 -0.62 0.00 0.00 Sub 2A 4.08 -1.98 189 -90.0
Sub 3 1.22 0.59 56 90.0
Main Bus

Sub 3 Load 4.16 99.76 -0.4 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 Sub3 Swgr 1.38 0.47 202 94.7
Main Bus -1.38 -0.47 202 94.7
Sub 2B

Sub3 Swgr Load 4.16 99.65 -0.4 0.00 0.00 0.40 0.17 0.00 0.00 Sub 3 -1.38 -0.47 202 94.8
LVBus 0.37 0.08 52 98.0
MCC1 0.61 0.22 90 94.1

Sample 3: Load Flow Summary (Undervoltage and Overvoltage Buses)
This section tabulates undervoltage buses and overvoltage buses, indicating the limit violated, the bus ID,
the nominal kV, and the magnitude of the operating voltage in percent of the nominal voltage and in kV.

Undervoltage Buses - Critical Limit = 95.00 %, Marginal Limit = 99.00 %
------------------

Bus Oper. Voltage Bus Oper. Voltage Bus Oper. Voltage
===================== =============== ===================== =============== ===================== ===============
ID kV % Mag. kV ID kV % Mag. kV ID kV % Mag. kV
------------ ------- ------ ------- ------------ ------- ------ ------- ------------ ------- ------ -------
MCC1 0.480 98.00 0.470#


Overvoltage Buses - Critical Limit = 105.00 %, Marginal Limit = 101.00 %
-----------------
Bus Oper. Voltage Bus Oper. Voltage Bus Oper. Voltage
===================== =============== ===================== =============== ===================== ===============
ID kV % Mag. kV ID kV % Mag. kV ID kV % Mag. kV
------------ ------- ------ ------- ------------ ------- ------ ------- ------------ ------- ------ -------
All bus voltages are below this limit.

Note: * indicates bus voltages violate critical limit.
# indicates bus voltages violate marginal limit.
Sample 4: Load Flow Summary (Branch Loading)
This section identifies branches by giving their IDs, and then indicating the allowable ampacity, loading
current and percent loading for cables, maximum MVA capability, loading MVA, and percent loading of
transformers. Overload cables and transformers are flagged.

Branch Loading Summary Report
-----------------------------

CKT / Branch Cable & Reactor Two-Winding Transformer
========================= =========================== ====================================================
Loading Capability Loading (input) ANSI Loading(output)
ID Type Ampacity Amp % MVA MVA % MVA %
------------ ----------- -------- ------- -------- ---------- -------- -------- --------- ---------
T3 Transformer 1.500 0.374 25.0 0.372 24.8
XFMR 3 Transformer 1.500 0.652 43.5 0.641 42.8
T2 Transformer 15.000 3.485 23.2 3.408 22.7

Sample 5: Load Flow Summary (Branch Losses)
This section indicates the branch ID, connected bus IDs, MW, and Mvar flows into each side of the
branch, kW and kvar losses, percentage voltage, and voltage drop for each branch. Losses are calculated
by adding the From-To and To-From bus flows for each branch. Voltage drops, in magnitude, are
calculated by obtaining the difference between the From and To bus voltages. The last column of the
Branch Losses Summary Report sets forth voltage drops across the branches due to different phase
angles.

Branch Losses Summary Report
----------------------------

CKT / Branch Connected Bus Info. From-To Bus Flow To-From Bus Flow Losses % Bus Voltage Vd
============ ========================= ================== ================== ================= ============= % drop
ID From Bus ID To Bus ID MW Mvar MW Mvar kW kvar From To in Vmag
------------ ------------ ------------ -------- -------- -------- -------- -------- -------- ------ ------ -------
Cable11 Bus3 Sub 2A -3.368 -1.356 3.387 1.362 19.0 6.4 99.74 100.29 0.55
T3 LVBus Sub3 Swgr -0.366 -0.066 0.367 0.075 0.5 9.2 99.06 99.65 0.59
T2 Main Bus Sub 2A -0.689 3.417 0.692 -3.337 3.5 79.6 100.00 100.29 0.29
XFMR 3 MCC1 Sub3 Swgr -0.613 -0.190 0.614 0.220 1.1 30.8 98.00 99.65 1.65
Cable2 Sub 3 Sub3 Swgr 1.382 0.467 -1.381 -0.465 1.2 1.3 99.76 99.65 0.11
T1 Sub3 Swgr Sub 3 (3 winding transformer) 0.5 18.7
Sub 2A
-------- --------
25.7 146.0
Sample 6: Load Flow Summary (Generation, Loading, and Demand)
This section summarizes the total generation, loading, and demand, which give totals of MW, Mvar,
MVA, and %PF for the swing bus(es), generators, total demand, and motor loads. MW and Mvar totals
are also given for the static loads, the apparent losses, and the system mismatch. This summary also
indicates the number of iterations it took the program to effect the convergence.

SUMMARY OF TOTAL GENERATION, LOADING & DEMAND
---------------------------------------------

MW Mvar MVA % PF
========= ========= ========= ==============

Swing Bus(es): -0.531 3.311 3.353 15.8 Leading

Generators: 6.300 -2.000 6.610 95.3 Leading

Total Demand: 5.769 1.311 5.916 97.5 Lagging
--------- --------- --------- --------------
Total Motor Load: 5.306 1.040 5.407 98.1 Lagging

Total Static Load: 0.437 0.125

Apparent Losses: 0.026 0.146

System Mismatch: 0.000 0.001

Number of Iterations = 171

Load Flow Analysis Alert View
15.7 Alert View
The Alert Views functional objective is to provide an immediate list of all the alerts generated by the
Load Flow calculation. The Alert View Window may be configured to automatically display as soon as
the Load Flow calculation is over by selecting the Auto Display check box in the alarm page of the Load
Flow study case. It may also be accessed by a left click on the Alert View Icon. The Alert View provides
several tabulated sections of information about the reported alerts. You may refer to Section 16.2.2 Alert
Page for detailed information on alerts for each type of elements.

Device ID
The Device Identification section of the Alert View lists the names of all the components that qualified as
alerts after the Load Flow calculation.
Type
The type section of the Alert View displays information about the type of the device having the displayed
alert.
Rating
The rating section of the Alert View provides the rating information being used by the load flow program
to determine whether an alert should be reported and of what kind. Section 16.2.2 Alert Page provides
detailed information on alerts for each type of elements.
Calculated
The calculated section of the Alert View displays the results from the Load Flow calculation. The results
listed here are used in combination with those displayed in the ratings section to determine the operating
Load Flow Analysis Alert View
percent values. These values are then compared to those entered in the Load Flow study case editor alarm
page.
%Value
This section displays the percent operating values calculated based on the Load Flow results and the
different element ratings. The values displayed here are directly compared to the percent of monitored
parameters entered directly into the Alert Page of the Load Flow Study Case Editor. Based on the
element type, system topology and given conditions, the Alert Simulation Program uses these percent
values to determine if and what kind of alert should be displayed.

Condition
The conditions section of the Alert View provides a brief comment about the type of alert being reported.
In the case of Load Flow alerts, the different conditions reported are Overloads, Over Voltage, Under
Voltage, Over Excited, and Under Excited.

ETAP

PowerStation
4.0
User Guide
Copyright 2001
All Rights Reserved





Southern California

(949) 462-0100 Sales
(949) 462-0400 Fax

Chapter 16

Motor Starting Analysis

During the motor starting period, the starting motor appears to the system as a small impedance connected
to a bus. It draws a large current from the system, about six times the motor rated current, which
therefore results in voltage drops in the system and poses disturbances to the normal operation of other
system loads. Since the motor acceleration torque is dependent on motor terminal voltage, in some cases
the starting motor may not be able to reach its rated speed due to extremely low terminal voltage. This
makes it necessary to perform a motor starting analysis. The purpose of performing a motor starting
study is twofold: to investigate whether the starting motor can be successfully started under the operating
conditions, and to see if starting the motor will seriously impede the normal operation of other loads in
the system.

PowerStation provides two types of motor starting calculations: Dynamic Motor Acceleration and Static
Motor Starting. In the Dynamic Motor Acceleration calculation, the starting motors are represented by
dynamic models and the program simulates the entire process of motor acceleration. This method can be
used to determine if a motor can be started and how much time is needed for the motor to reach its rated
speed, as well as to determine the effect of voltage dips on the system. In Static Motor Starting, the
starting motors are modeled by the locked-rotor impedance during acceleration time, simulating the worst
impact on normal operating loads. This method is suitable for checking the effect of motor starting on the
system when the dynamic model is not available for starting motors.

The Motor Starting Toolbar section explains how to launch a motor starting calculation, to open and view
an output report, or to select display options. The Motor Starting Study Case Editor section explains how
you can create a new study case, what parameters are required to specify a study case, and how to set
them. The Display Options section explains available options for displaying some key system parameters
and the output results on the one-line diagram and how to set them. The Motor Starting Calculation
Methods section describes calculation methods used by the program. The Required Data for Calculations
section describes what data are necessary to perform motor starting studies and where to enter them.
Finally, the last three sections describe how to view calculation results.

Motor Starting Analysis Motor Starting Toolbar
16.1 Motor Starting Toolbar


Static Motor Acceleration

Motor Acceleration Display Option

Motor Acceleration Report Manager

Motor Acceleration Plots


Get Online Data

Get Archived Data

Click on this icon to perform a time-domain simulation for starting and/or switching off motors and static
loads. For this study, accelerating motors are modeled dynamically; therefore, related motor parameters
such as dynamic model (or LR model for synchronous motors), inertia, and starting load must be
specified. Motors (induction and synchronous) and static loads can be switched off and on in any one of
the 15 time events.
Static Motor Acceleration
Click on this icon to perform a time-domain simulation for starting and/or switching off motors and static
loads. For this study, starting motors are modeled as constant impedance loads calculated from their
locked-rotor currents with a user-defined acceleration time. Required parameters for this study include
the locked-rotor current and power factor, acceleration time at no-load and full-load, and starting load.

Motors (induction and synchronous) and static loads can be switched off and on in any one of the 15 time
events.
Display Option
Click on this icon to customize the information and results annotations displayed on the one-line diagram
in Motor Starting mode.
Motor Acceleration Report Manager
Motor acceleration output reports are provided in two forms: ASCII text files and Crystal Reports. The
Report Manager provides four pages (Complete, Input, Result, and Summary) for viewing the different
parts of the output report for both text and Crystal Reports. Available formats for Crystal Reports are
displayed in each page of the Report Manager for motor stating (dynamic & static) studies.

The Crystal Reports is activated by choosing, in the Report Manager, any formats other than TextRept.
You can open the whole study output report or only a part of it, depending on the format selection.

Toolbar. A list of all output files in the selected project directory is provided for motor starting

Motor starting text output reports (with an .msr extension) can be viewed by any word processor such as

Motor Acceleration Plots
To view plots of accelerated motors, click on this icon to bring up a dialog box to select motors from a
drop-down list.
The Stop Sign button is normally disabled. When a motor acceleration calculation has been initiated, this
button becomes enabled and shows a red stop sign. Clicking on this button will terminate the current
calculation. One-line diagram display will not be available if you terminate the calculation before it
completes; but the text output report and plots do store the calculation results up to the time instant when
you terminates the calculation.
Get Online Data
If the ETAP key installed on your computer has the online feature (PSMS), you can copy the online (real-
time) data to the current presentation.
Get Archived Data
If the ETAP key installed on your computer has the online feature (PSMS), you can copy the archived
data to the current presentation.
Motor Starting Analysis Study Case Editor
The Motor Starting Study Case Editor contains solution control variables, pre-start loading conditions,
motor starting events, and a variety of options for output reports. The study case is used for both dynamic
and static motor acceleration studies.

PowerStation allows you to create and save an unlimited number of study cases. Motor starting
calculations are conducted and reported in accordance with the settings of the study case selected in the
toolbar. You can easily switch between study cases without resetting the options each time. This feature
is designed to organize your study efforts and save you time.

As part of the multi-dimensional database concept of PowerStation, study cases can be used for any
combination of the three major system toolbar components, i.e., for any configuration status, one-line
diagram presentation, and Base/Revision Data.

The Motor Starting Study Case Editor can be accessed by first selecting the Motor Starting Analysis
Mode from the Status/Mode toolbar, then clicking on the Study Case button from the Motor Starting
Toolbar. You can also access this editor from the Project View by clicking on the Motor Starting Study
Case folder.

To create a new study case, go to the Project View, right-click on the Motor Starting Study Case folder,
and select Create New. The program will then create a new study case, which is a copy of the default
study case, and adds it to the Motor Starting Study Case folder.
16.2.1 Info Page

Study Case ID
and entering the new ID. Study case ID can be up to 12 alphanumeric characters. Use the Navigator
Solution Parameters
This option allows you to choose solution control values for the load flow and motor starting solutions as
well as the plot resolution.
Maximum Iteration
This value determines the maximum number of iterations PowerStation can make while solving the load
flow equations. This means that the load flow should quit if it has not converged after the number of
iterations you specify here. Since dynamic and static motor starting calculation methods use the Newton-
Raphson algorithm, typical systems are solved within two to three iterations. We recommend choosing a
minimum of five iterations. If the solution does not converge, you may want to increase this number, as
well as decrease the value you have specified for precision.
Solution Precision
The load flow algorithm works by an iterating procedure until the motor loads it calculates for each bus
match the motor loads which are scheduled for each bus. The difference is called system mismatch.
Solution Precision tells PowerStation how many mismatches is allowed for a solution to be considered
valid. When the mismatch for the motor MW and Mvar on each individual bus is below the value you
enter for precision, PowerStation halts the load flow solution and declares that the solution has converged.
Try using a value of 0.001 to begin with. If your system will not converge, try increasing this value to
0.005, etc.
Simulation Time Step
Enter the simulation time step for motor starting calculations. The recommended simulation time step is
0.001 second. If the simulation time step is too small, accumulation of the round off errors can cause
inaccurate results. On the other hand, if this value is too large, calculation results may not capture the
dynamic characteristics corresponding to very small time constants of the control equipment or system.
Plot Time Step
This value determines how often PowerStation should record the results of the simulation for plotting.
For instance, if you specify 20 steps, PowerStation will plot points at every 20 X simulation time step, i.e.
for a simulation time step of 0.001; plot time step will be .02 seconds. The smaller this number is, the
smoother your plots will look, but also remember that the plot files on your hard disk may grow quite
large. The main thing to keep in mind is that PowerStation records plot information at this interval
throughout the simulation. So if you specified a simulation time step of 0.001 seconds, plot time step of
10, and a total time of 20 seconds, PowerStation will write 20 / (0.001*10)= 2000 points to disk, which is
a very large plot file.
Total Simulation Time
Total Simulation Time is the amount of time, in seconds, which you want the simulation to run. For
instance, let's say you set up the following scenario:

t1 = 0.00 Nothing happens during this time event
t2 = 0.10 Start motor Mtr10 and switch on static load Stat2 on bus 20
t3 = 0.20 Switch off Mtr8 on bus 10

Total Simulation Time = 2.00

This simulation will go as follows: at time t1 = 0, PowerStation will run a load flow, using the pre-start
loading you selected, to find the initial conditions of the system. At time t2 = 0.1 seconds, PowerStation
will begin accelerating motor Mtr10 and switch on static load Stat2 on bus 20. At time t3 = 0.2 seconds,
PowerStation will switch off the motor Mtr8 on bus 10. The simulation will continue for 1.8 more
seconds, until time T = 2.0 seconds, when the simulation ends and the plots and summary reports are
generated. As you can see, the total time MUST be greater than your last event time.
Check this box to consider transformer phase-shift in load flow calculations. The phase-shift of a
transformer can be found from the transformer editor.
Prestart Loading
This option allows you to specify how the system is loaded prior to starting any motors and/or switching
on any static loads. You can select pre-starting loads by loading categories or from operating load.
Loading Category
Select one of the ten loading categories for pre-start loading in the motor starting study case. With the
selection of any category, PowerStation uses the percent loading of all motors and other loads as specified
for that category. Note that you can assign loading to each one of the ten categories from the Nameplate
page of the Motor Editors and the Loading page of the Static Load Editors.
Operating Load
This check box shows up only if the key you used to run ETAP PowerStation has the online capability.
When this box is checked, the operating load will be used as the pre-start load instead of the loading
category.
This section allows you to specify load diversity factors to be applied on the loading category load. When
the Operating Load is selected, no diversity factor is considered.
None
Select this option to use the percent loading of each load as entered for the selected Loading Category.
Bus Maximum
When this option is selected, all motors and other loads directly connected to each bus will be multiplied
by the bus maximum diversity factor. Using this option, you can simulate load flow studies with each bus
having a different maximum diversity factor.

Bus Minimum
When this option is selected, all motors and other loads directly connected to each bus will be multiplied
by the bus minimum diversity factor. Using this option, you can simulate load flow studies with each bus
having a different minimum diversity factor.
Global
Enter the diversity factors for all constant kVA and constant Z loads. When you select this option,
PowerStation will globally multiply all motor and static loads of the selected category with the entered
motor and static load diversity factors. Using this option, you can simulate motor starting studies with
fixed diversity factors for all operating loads.

by 25 percent above their nominal values. This value can be smaller or greater than 100 percent.
Charger Prestart Loading
This section allows you to select the charger loading source.
Loading Category
When this option is selected, the load from the category specified in the Category field will be used to
calculate the charger load for the pre-starting load flow.

Operating Load
When this option is selected, the charger operating load will be used for the pre-starting load flow. Note
that the charger operating load is updated from DC load flow studies when the Updating Charger Load
option has been selected in the DC Load Flow Study Case.
Alert
Motor starting report options include critical and marginal undervoltage and overvoltage buses, and the
option for bus voltages to be printed in percent or kV.
Critical Voltage
Select this option and enter the minimum and maximum voltages that any bus may achieve before it is
flagged and included in the critical undervoltage and overvoltage bus summary report. The flagged
critical undervoltage and overvoltage buses will be displayed in red on the one-line diagram.
Marginal Voltage
flagged and included in the marginal undervoltage and overvoltage bus summary report. The flagged
critical undervoltage and overvoltage buses will be displayed in magenta on the one-line diagram.
Report
Bus Voltages
Calculated bus voltages seen in the output report can be printed in kV or as a percentage of the bus
nominal voltages. Select your preference by clicking on in Percent or in kV. For graphical display of bus
voltages see Display Options Motor Starting.
Remarks 2nd Line
You can enter up to 120 alphanumeric characters in this remark box. Information entered here will be
printed on the second line of every output report page header. These remarks can provide specific
information regarding each study case. Note that the first line of the header information is global for all
study cases and entered in the Project Information Editor.
16.2.2 Model Page
In the Model Page specify model information for transformer LTCs and motor loads.

Transformer LTC Include Automatic Action
In this section you can specify the transformer LTC feature to be simulated in motor starting studies.
For Prestart Load Flow
If this option is checked, automatic voltage regulation actions and LTCs of transformers, if there are any,
will be simulated in the pre-start load flow calculation.
During & After Motor Acceleration
If this option is checked, LTCs of transformers, if there are any, will be simulated in calculations after the
pre-start load flow.
Transformer LTC Time Delay
During motor starting, the program will check the voltages of the LTC regulated buses and set up an
internal clock with a time delay. If a voltage is out-of-range and stays out-of-range, at the end of the
initial delay time (Ti), the program will check the voltage again and decide whether to reset the clock or
initiate an LTC tap adjustment. In the latter case, it will take a time duration equal to the operating time
(Tc) to complete the LTC tap change. This process will continue until the final voltage falls within the
regulating range or the LTC has reached its limits.
In this section you specify the LTC time delay used in the calculation. The information in this section is
applied in the study only when the During & After Motor Acceleration option is checked.
Use Individual LTC Time Delay
If this option is checked, the initial time delay and the operating time entered in the individual transformer
editor will be used in the calculation.
Use Global Time Delay
When this option is checked, the values entered in the Initial Time Delay and Operating Time fields will
be used in the calculation. This means that all of the LTCs in the system will assume the same initial time
delay and operating time.
Initial Time Delay
In this field you can enter the global initial time delay in seconds.
Operating Time
In this field you can enter the operating time in seconds.
Starting Load of Accelerating Motors
In the motor acceleration calculations, the difference between the motor torque and the load torque
changes the motor speed. In ETAP PowerStation, the load torque model is specified as torque in percent
as a function of normalized motor speed. This load torque may be based on motor electrical rating or on
mechanical load. In this section, you indicate to the program which base you want to use.
Based on Motor Electrical Rating
When this option is checked, it is assumed that the load torque model you selected in the Motor Editor
only represents the shape of the load as a function of speed. The load torque values will be adjusted so
that at the synchronous speed the torque is equal to 100%. This means that, with the modified load curve,
the motor will consume the rated electrical power at 100% starting load, under the rated voltage, and at
the rated speed.
Based on Motor Mechanical Load
When this option is checked, it is assumed that the load torque model you selected in the Motor Editor
represents the actual load based on rated output. The load curve will be applied as it is without any
adjustments.

To illustrate the implication of this selection, consider a motor that has a start load of 50%. On the Start
Dev page of the motor, the load torque curve is such that at rated speed the load torque is 67%.

Case 1: Load Model Based on Motor Electrical Loading

In this case, the load torque curve will be shifted so that the torque at rated speed is 100% of the motor
rated torque. This means that the torque at each point on the load curve will be multiplied by a factor of
1.5 (equal to 1/0.67). This modified the curve will be used as the load torque curve for the study.

Since the starting load is 50%, the actual load will be 50% of the load based on the modified curve as
described above.

Case 2: Load Model Based on Motor Mechanical Load

In this case, the load torque curve will not be shifted because it is assumed to represent the actual load.
However, since the starting load is 50%, the load torque curve will be adjusted so that the torque at each
point of the curve is multiplied by 0.5.
16.2.3 Time Event Page
PowerStation provides 15 time events to simulate switching actions. Time Event pages t1 to t15 allow
you to specify unlimited actions for each time event, i.e., you can start or switch off individual loads or
categorized motor groups with the Action by Load and Action by Starting Category features, respectively.
You can also change the operating load by clicking on the Load Transitioning option to change from one
loading category to another.

Each time event (1 to 15) starts at a specific time and must occur in a forward order (e.g., Time Event 4
must occur at a later time than Time Event 3). PowerStation ignores the actions that are out of order from
previous time events.

You must enter a value for the total simulation time in the Info page.

You can start or switch off multiple loads by starting category and/or by individual load. Note that the
program assumes that all In Service loads are operating, except for the loads that are started or switched
off in time events.

If you start an already running load, PowerStation will ignore the second starting action. If you switch off
an already switched off load, PowerStation will ignore the second switch off action.

Note that it is possible to specify conflicting actions on a motor during the same time event by using the
Action by Starting Category and Action by Load options. In such an event, the program checks the action
specified by Action by Load first, and then checks the Action by Category event. The first valid action
gets executed in the simulation and the rest are ignored.
Event
Name
Enter up to 12 alphanumeric characters for the time event ID. This field is for user information only.
Time
Enter the time for each time event in seconds. Each time event must be placed per Time Event page.
Time events must occur in a forward order (e.g., Time Event 4 must occur at a later time than Time Event
3). PowerStation ignores the actions of the out of order time events.

Action by Load
This feature allows you to switch on/off any existing motor or static load in a time event. The list of
loads that have been selected is displayed in the Action by Load list box.

Add
To add a switching action for a motor, MOV, or static load, click on the Add button to open the Add
Action By Load Editor. Select a motor, MOV, or static load and choose Start/Stop or Switch On/Off.
Edit
To edit a load, click on its action item and then click on the Edit button. The Edit button opens the Edit
Action By Load Editor. This editor allows you to modify the data. For more information see Add
Action By Load.
Delete
To delete a load from the Action by Load list, select the load by clicking on its action item and then click
on the Delete button. The selected load will be removed from the action list.
Add Action by Load
This option allows you to add and/or modify a motor, MOV, or static load specifications, such as
start/switch off, starting categories and connected bus IDs. Click on the OK button and the specifications
of the selected loads will be displayed in the Action by Load list box.

Load Type
Motor Starting studies simulate switching of three types of loads: induction/synchronous motor, static
load and capacitor, and MOV.
Action
Select this option to switch/stop motor, switch on/off a static load or a capacitor, or start an MOV. If you
start an already running load, PowerStation will ignore the second starting action. If you switch off an
already switched off load, PowerStation will ignore the second switch off action. Note that PowerStation
assumes that all In Service loads are operating, except for the loads that are started or switched off in time
events.
Load
Load ID
Select a load ID from the list box. The content in this list varies according to load type selected. For
motor load, it contains all induction and synchronous motors; for static load, it contains all static loads
and capacitors, and for MOV, it contains all the MOVs in the system.
Starting Category
Select a predefined starting category from the list box. This list box contains all ten motor starting
categories. Motor starting categories can be defined in the Start Cat page of Induction and Synchronous
Motor Editors. Note that the starting category is not applicable to static loads.
Action by Starting Category
This feature allows you to start motors by predefined motor starting categories. Note that motor starting
categories can be defined in the Start Cat page of Induction Motor, Synchronous Motor, and MOV
Editors. The selected motor groups are displayed in the Action by Starting Category list box.

Add
To start or switch off a predefined group of motors, click on the Add button to open the Add Action By
Starting Category Editor. Then select a group of motors and choose Start or Switch Off.
Edit
To edit a selected group of motors, click on its action item and then click on the Edit button. The Edit
button opens the Add Action By Starting Category Editor. This editor allows you to modify the data.
Delete
To delete a motor group from the Action by Starting Category listing, select the motor group by clicking
on its action item, then click on the Delete button. The selected motor group will be removed from the
action list.

Add Action by Starting Category
This editor allows you to add and/or modify motor group specifications, such as start/switch off, starting
categories, and connected bus IDs. Click on the OK button and the specifications of the motor groups
selected in this editor will be displayed in the Action by Starting Category list box.

Action
Select Start/Stop or Switch On/Off for the selected motor group. If you start an already running load,
PowerStation will ignore the second starting action. If you switch off an already switched off load,
PowerStation will ignore the second switch off action. Note that PowerStation assumes that all In Service
loads are operating, except for the loads that are started or switched off in time events.
Starting Category
Category
Select a predefined starting category from the list box. This list box contains all ten motor starting
categories. Motor starting categories can be defined in the Start Cat page of Induction and Synchronous
Motor Editors.
Bus ID
Select a bus ID to define the motor starting group from the list box. This list box contains all bus IDs
created for the electrical system under study. In addition, you can choose Start or Switch Off for all buses
defined by a starting category by selecting All Buses from the Bus ID list box.
Action by Load Transition
This feature allows you to change operating load from one loading category to another. In changing the
loading category, if a motor load is changed from a zero percent to a non-zero percent load, it will create
an action to start the motor. However, once a motor is started by an action from load transition, the Load
Transition option will not apply to the motor anymore. Furthermore, once a load, including motors, static
loads, and capacitors, has been switched on or off through Action by Load or Action by Starting
Category, the Load Transition option will not apply to this load from that point on.

Active
Check this box to flag that a load transition will take place in this event.
Loading Category
Select from the list a loading category as the new loading category, which you want to change to.
Include MV Loads Below
Check this box to enable the kVA field at right. You can enter an upper limit of kVA in the field for
medium voltage loads to be involved in the load transition. If this box is not checked, medium voltage
loads of all sizes will be considered in the load transition. Loads with rated voltage higher than 1 kV are
treated as medium voltage loads.
Include LV Loads Below
Check this box to enable the kVA field at right. You can enter an upper limit of kVA in the field for low
voltage loads to be involved in the load transition. If this box is not checked, low voltage loads of all
sizes will be considered in the load transition. Loads with rated voltage not higher than 1 kV are treated
as low voltage loads.
kVA
Once enabled, you can enter an upper limit for load capacity rating in this field. Note that a value of zero
means that no loads are considered in the Load Transition.

Motor Starting Analysis Display Options
The Motor Starting Analysis Display Options consist of a Results page and three pages for AC, AC-DC,
16.3.1 Results Page
Select the result information to be displayed on the one-line diagram.

Color
Power Flow Units
Select this option to display units for power flow or current flow on the one-line diagram.
kW + j kvar
Click on the kW + j kvar button to display power flow in kW and kvar.
kVA
Click on the kVA button to display power flow in kVA.
Amp
Click on the Amp button to display current flow in amperes.
Power Factor - PF
The PF check box is enabled when the kVA or Amp options are selected.
Bus Voltage
Select a unit for voltage display from the list.
16.3.2 AC Page
Color
ID
diagram.
Rating
line diagram.

Device Type Rating
Motor HP / kW
Load kVA / MVA
Bus kA Bracing
kV

A

Z

Motor % LRC
D-Y
one-line diagram. For transformers, the operating tap setting for primary, secondary, and tertiary
windings are also displayed. The operating tap setting consists of the fixed taps plus the tap position of
the LTC.
Composite Motor
Use Default Options
16.3.3 AC-DC Page
Color
ID
line diagram.
Rating
one-line diagram.

Device Type Rating
UPS kVA
VFD HP / kW
kV
A
one-line diagram.

Device Type Amp
Composite Network
Use Default Options
16.3.4 DC Page
Color
ID
diagram.
Rating
line diagram.

Device Type Rating
Battery Ampere Hour
Motor HP / kW
Load kW / MW
Converter kW / MW
kV

A
one-line diagram.

Z
Composite Motor
Use Default Options

Motor Starting Analysis Calculation Methods
PowerStation provides two methods for motor starting: Dynamic Motor Acceleration and Static Motor
Starting. Both methods perform time-domain simulations and report results in both text report and plot
formats.

The purpose of performing a motor starting study is twofold: to investigate whether the starting motor can
be successfully started under the operating conditions and to see if starting the motor will seriously
impede the normal operation of other loads in the system.

The Dynamic Motor Acceleration and Static Motor Starting differ in the way the starting motors are
modeled.

16.4.1 Dynamic Motor Acceleration
In Dynamic Motor Acceleration, a dynamic model through out the whole simulation models the
accelerating motor. For this study, you also need to specify a load torque model for the load that the
motor is driving.

From the Model page for induction motor, or the LR Model page for synchronous motor, you can specify
motor dynamic model from one of the five different types:

Single1 - Equivalent (Thevenin) circuit model with constant rotor resistance and reactance
Single2 - Circuit model with deep-bar effect, rotor resistance and reactance change with speed
DBL1 - Double cage circuit model, with integrated rotor cages
DBL2 - Double cage circuit model, with independent rotor cages
TSC - Torque slip characteristic curve model
While the Single1, Single2, DBL1, and DBL2 models are all based on an electrical circuit representation
of the motor, the TSC model allows you to model a starting motor directly from the manufacturers
performance curves. You can choose one of the existing library models or create your own motor model
in the Motor Library.

PowerStation also allows you to model the load torque curve for each individual motor. You can choose
one of the existing library models or create your own motor model in the Load Library.

Due to the difference in modeling of starting motors, you may perform the static motor starting study if
you are more concerned with the effect of motor starting on other operating loads in the system or if
information on dynamic model for the starting motor is not available. On the other hand, if you are
concerned with the actual acceleration time or whether the starting motor can be successfully started, a
dynamic motor acceleration study should be performed.
16.4.2 Static Motor Starting
In the Static Motor Starting method, it is assumed that the starting motor can always be started. You
specify from the Motor Editor motor acceleration time at 0% and 100% of the load, and the program
interpolates the acceleration time for the motor load based on these two values.

During the acceleration period, the motor is represented by its locked-rotor impedance, which draws the
maximum possible current from the system and has the most severe effect on other loads in the system.
Once the acceleration period has passed, the starting motor is changed to a constant kVA load and
PowerStation simulates the load ramping process according to the starting and final loads specified in the
motor editor. Refer to Motor Starting Category page in Motor Editor for more information.
16.4.3 Load Transition
In an event, you can specify a load transition to transfer system operating load from one loading category
to another. This allows you to globally adjust the system load during motor starting studies. You may
apply a load transition to all operating loads or to a group of loads by setting an upper limit of capacity on
loads to be involved in the load transition. Additionally, you can start motors through load transition if
the load percent is changed from zero to a non-zero value.

Due to the complexity involved in the interaction between normal motor starting actions and load
transition, the following rules are implemented to resolve conflicts in motor starting action preparation.

1. If, in an event, both action by load or starting category and action by load transition call for change
of status or loading of a load, the action by load or starting category takes priority.
2. If a load, whether a motor, an MOV, a static load, or a capacitor, is switched on/off through actions
by load or starting category in one event, the load transition will not apply to this load from that point
on.
3. If, in a load transition, the load percent of a motor is changed from zero percent to a non-zero value,
this motor will be started at the new load percent (non-zero value). And from this point on, the load
transition will not apply on this motor any more.
4. In calculating load for a load transition, it takes into consideration the options for load diversity
factors entered in the Motor Study Case Editor for pre-start load flow.
16.4.4 MOV Motor Starting
MOVs are specially designed motors that have different operational characteristics from regular motors.
Since these motors behave close to constant impedance load during operation, they are modeled as
constant impedance load in motor starting calculations.

The operation mode of an MOV may be opening or closing a valve, depending upon its initial status. In
order to start an MOV motor, its status has to be either open or closed. If the initial status of an MOV is
open, its operation mode will be closed and if the initial status is closed, its operation mode will be open.
Both modes involve several stages of operation as defined in the Characteristic section of the Nameplate
page in MOV editor. For each stage, the impedance to represent the MOV is calculated based on the
current and power factor for the stage and the rated voltage.

Due to infrequent operations of MOV, for one motor starting simulation, a MOV is allowed to start only
once.
16.4.5 Motor Starting vs. Transient Stability Studies
The motor starting calculation is intentionally directed to investigate the behavior of a starting motor and
its effect on system operations, facilitated by starting devices, etc. The transient stability calculation can
also simulate the motor starting process, with emphasis on the dynamic behavior of the whole system
under the impact of motor starting. The differences in objectives of the two types of calculation lead to
different modeling of system elements, as shown in the following table:
Comparison of System Element Models

Element

Transient Stability
Dynamic
Motor Acceleration
Static
Motor Starting

Generators

Dynamically Modeled

Constant Voltage
Behind Xd

Constant Voltage
Behind Xd

Exciter/Governors

Dynamically Modeled

Not Modeled

Not Modeled
Utility Ties Constant Voltage
Behind X
Constant Voltage
Behind X
Constant Voltage
Behind X

Operating Motors Modeled Dynamically
or Constant kVA

Constant kVA Constant kVA
Starting Motors Single1, Single2,
DBL1, & DBL2
Models
Single1, Single2,
DBL1, DBL2, & TSC
Models
Locked-Rotor Z
and Power Factor

Starters Not Modeled Modeled Modeled

16.4.6 Other Features of Motor Starting Study
Many features are included in the motor starting study to facilitate system design and analysis, some of
which are listed here:

A static load can be switched on and off repeatedly at any time during a simulation.
A motor can be started and switched off repeatedly at any time during a simulation.
The motor switching can be specified by an individual load or by bus and starting category.
In static motor starting, after the acceleration period is passed, it will be modeled as a constant power
load. The load level can vary at a rate specified by the user. Please see the Motor Starting
Category page for a detailed description on the model for load changes.
An MOV can be started at any time during the simulation.

Motor Starting Analysis Required Data
16.5 Required Data
Bus Data
Required data for motor starting calculations for buses includes:

Bus ID
Nominal kV
%V and Angle (when Initial Condition is set to use Bus Voltages)
Load Diversity Factor (if the Loading option is set to use the Maximum or Minimum load)
Branch Data
Branch data is entered into the Branch Editors, i.e., 3-Winding Transformer Editor, 2-Winding
Transformer Editor, Transmission Line Editor, Cable Editor, Reactor Editor, and Impedance Editor.
Required data for motor starting calculations for branches includes:

Branch ID
Branch Z, R, X, or X/R values and units, tolerance, and temperatures, if applicable
Cable and transmission line length and unit
Transformer rated kV and kVA/MVA, tap and LTC settings
Impedance base kV and base kVA/MVA
Power Grid Data
Required data for motor starting calculations for power grids includes:

Utility ID
Mode (Swing, Voltage Control or Mvar Control)
Rated kV, and short-circuit MVA and power factor
%V and Vangle
Required data for motor starting calculations for synchronous generators includes:

Synchronous Generator ID
Mode (Swing, Voltage Control or Mvar Control)
Rated kW, kV, and power factor
Xd and X/R ratio
Required data for motor starting calculations for synchronous motors includes:

Synchronous Motor ID
Rated kW/hp and kV
Power factors and efficiencies at 100%, 75%, and 50% loading for operating motors
Loading Category IDs and % Loading for operating motors

Required data for motor starting calculations for induction motors includes:

Induction Motor ID
Rated kW/hp and kV
Power factors and efficiencies at 100%, 75%, and 50% loading
Static Load Data
Required data for motor starting calculation for static loads includes:

Static Load ID
Rated kVA/MVA and kV
Power factors at 100%, 75%, and 50% loading
MOV Data
Required data for motor starting calculation for MOV includes:

MOV ID
Rated kW/hp and kV
Current, PF, and time for each operation stage
Capacitor Data
Required data for motor starting calculation for capacitor includes:

Capacitor ID
Rated kV, kvar/bank and number of banks
Lumped Load Data
Required data for motor starting calculation for lumped load includes:

Load ID
Rated kV, MVA, power factor, and % for motor load
Additional Data for Starting Motors
For Static Motor Starting studies, the additional data includes:

Motor locked-rotor impedance and power factor
Motor acceleration time at no load and full load
Start and final percent loading and begin and end of load change time
Starting device data when needed
No load and full load accelerated time (for static motor starting)

For Dynamic Motor Acceleration studies, the additional data includes:

Dynamic motor model for induction motors
LR model for synchronous motors
Load torque model
Motor inertia
Study Case Data
There are some study case related data, which must also be provided. This data includes:

Study Case ID
Maximum number of iteration
Precision of solution
Total simulation time, simulation time step, and plot time step
Prestart loading (loading category)
Initial Condition
Transformer LTC data

The study case related data is entered into the Motor Starting Study Case Editor.

Motor Starting Analysis Output Reports
16.6 Output Reports
The motor starting calculation results are reported in four different formats: a text output report, Crystal
Reports, a one-line view display, and plots. You can use the Display Options Editor to specify the
content to be displayed.

The Crystal Reports format provides you with detailed information for a motor acceleration analysis.
You can utilize the Report Manager to help you view the output report.
PowerStation automatically opens the output report, which is listed in the Study Case Toolbar with the
Complete.

16.6.2 Motor Starting Report Manager
To open the Report Manager, simply click on the View Report Manager button on the Motor Acceleration
Toolbar. The editor includes four pages (Complete, Input, Result, and Summary) representing different
sections of the output report. The Report Manager allows you to select formats available for different
portions of the report and view it via Crystal Reports. There are several fields and buttons common to
every page, as described below.
Output Report Name
Project File Name
Help
OK / Cancel
16.6.3 Input Data Page
include:
Branch
Bus
Cable
Cover
Equipment Cable
Events
Inverter
Machines
Reactor
Switching Motors
Torque Slip curve
Transformer
UPS


16.6.4 Result Page
This page allows you to select formats to view the result portion of the output report.


16.6.5 Summary Page
This page allows you to select formats to view summary reports of the output report.


16.6.6 Complete Page
In this page there is only one format available, Complete, which brings up the complete report for a motor
acceleration study. The complete report includes input data, results, and summary reports.


16.6.7 Text Report
The output report consists of several sections, as summarized below:
System Input Data
The beginning of the output report prints the system input data that is used in the motor starting study,
including bus input data with the operating load connected to each bus, system branch data, branch
connection summary, and generator and utility machine data.
Initial Load Flow Report
An initial load flow study is performed with the specified pre-starting load. This load flow calculation is
carried out using the Newton-Raphson method. The load flow result is printed for you to inspect system
operating conditions.
Switching Motor and Static Load Data
The switching motor and static load data printed include the motor nameplate data, equivalent cable data,
and the switching static load data.

For dynamic acceleration studies, the motor dynamic model and load model data are printed in this
section.
Switching Event Data
This section of the output report lists, in the sequence of time events, every load-switching action. It
provides you with a summary of all the actions that are to be simulated in the study.
Event Load Flow Report
For each specified time event, whether there are switching actions or not, the program will run a load flow
calculation and report the result in this section. This feature provides you with a way to inspect system
operating conditions at any time during motor starting simulation. The program also runs a load flow at
the end of the total simulation time and prints the results in this section.
Tabulated Simulation Results
This section tabulates, for each switching motor, the simulation results as functions of time at the
specified plot time step. The tabulated results include motor slip, motor terminal voltage, bus voltage,
motor current, and motor real power input.
Sample Text Report

SYSTEM ANALYSIS
Project: Example ==================== Page: 1
Location: Lake Forest, California PowerStation 4.0.0C Date: 05-17-2000
Contract: OTI-1234 SN: 85OTI30125
Engineer: Operation Technology, Inc. Study Case: MS-Dyn File: EXAMPLE
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
---
This info is printed on top of every output report, 1st remark line. (120 characters)
Second line of remarks for "MS Dyn" study case.

=================================================================================================================================
Electrical Transient Analyzer Program
-------------------------------------
MOTOR STARTING ANALYSIS
-----------------------
Dynamic Acceleration

Swing Gen. Load Total
----- ----- ----- -----
Number of Buses: 1 1 8 10

XFRM2 React. Line/Cable Imp. Tie PD XFRM3 Total
----- ------ ---------- ----- ------- ----- -----
Number of Branches: 4 0 3 0 0 1 8

Synch. Uti-
Gen. lity
----- -----
Number of Machines: 1 1
Prestart Loading: Category 1 (Design ), Normal Loading
Method of Solution: Newton-Raphson
Maximum Number of Iterations: 5

Precision of the Solution: .00100 MW and Mvar
System Frequency: 60.0 Hz

Unit System: English

Data Filename: EXAMPLE
Output Filename: C:\PowerStation 3.0\PowerStn\Example\Untitled.msr

BUS INPUT DATA
Project: Example ==================== Page: 2
Location: Lake Forest, California PowerStation 4.0.0C Date: 05-17-2000
Engineer: Operation Technology, Inc. Study Case: MS-Dyn File: EXAMPLE
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
---
Second line of remarks for "MS Dyn" study case.

=================================================================================================================================
Bus Information & Nominal kV Init. Voltage Generation MTR Load @T=0- Static Load Mvar Limits
=================================================== ============= ============== ============== ==============
ID Type kV Description % Mag. Ang. MW Mvar MW Mvar MW Mvar Max. Min.
-------------- ---- ------ -------------------- ------ ----- ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ----
Bus1 Load 0.480 100.0 0.0 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
Bus2 Load 0.480 100.0 0.0 0.647 0.370 0.000 0.000
Bus3 Load 13.800 101.5 -1.2 3.239 1.355 0.000 0.000
LVBus Load 0.480 97.1 -3.5 0.426 0.114 0.391 0.207
Main Bus SWNG 34.500 100.0 0.0 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
MCC1 Load 0.480 97.9 -3.1 0.421 0.190 0.000 0.000
Sub2A Load 13.800 101.5 -1.2 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
Sub2B Gen. 13.800 100.0 1.4 6.300 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 4.650 -2.000
Sub 3 Load 4.160 99.8 -0.5 0.000 0.000 0.000 -0.450
Sub3 Swgr Load 4.160 99.6 -0.5 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
------------------------------------------------- ------ ------ ------ ------ ------
10 Buses Total 6.300 4.733 2.029 0.391 -0.243
Motor Starting Analysis One-Line Diagram Displayed Results
16.7 One-Line Diagram Displayed Results
In addition to the text report, PowerStation displays the calculation results on the one-line diagram. Once
a motor starting study is finished, a Motor Starting Display Time ruler, as shown below, will appear in the
toolbar. The ruler ranges from zero seconds to the final simulation time. Initially, the reference pointer is
at the far left, corresponding to t = 0 second. You may click on either end of the ruler to move the pointer
one grid at a time, or hold the mouse button down to move the pointer continuously. You may also click
on the pointer, hold the mouse button down, and then drag the pointer to the desired position. The time
corresponding to the pointer position is also displayed next to the ruler in seconds.

The one-line diagram displays the bus voltages and the current (or kW+jkvar or kVA) of the starting
motors for the simulation time specified on the ruler. As you move the pointer along the ruler, the
displayed results change accordingly, providing you with a quick way to examine the calculation results.

In the example one-line diagram shown below, the starting motors Pump 1 and Mtr4 are drawing 317
amperes and 588 amperes respectively, while the voltage of bus Sub3 Swgr is 4.07 kV.

Motor Starting Analysis Plots
16.8 Plots
PowerStation also provides simulation plots for you to examine calculation results graphically. To view
the simulation plots, click on the Motor Acceleration Plots button in the Motor Starting Toolbar. It will
bring up a Motor Starting Plot Selection diagram, as shown here, where you can specify the motors and
types of plots to view.
Motor ID
This list contains IDs of all the starting motors. Click on a motor to view its plots. Clicking again will
deselect it. Plots for up to sixteen (16) motors can be displayed on one plot view. If more than sixteen
motors have been selected, plots for the first sixteen motors will be displayed.

Plot Type
The types of plots available include slip, current, terminal voltage, acceleration torque, real input power,
and reactive input power. Clicking on a check box will select/deselect the corresponding plot type.

Clicking on the OK button will open plot views for the selected plot types. PowerStation opens one plot
view for each selected plot type to display the type of plots for the selected motors.

The Printing and Plotting Chapter, Plot View, describes features that will be helpful in viewing the plot.

Modifying Plot Parameters
Plot parameters such as plot line type, axis, legend, and text can be modified directly from the plot view.
For example, to modify plot line type, double-click on the plot line and change the line type from the Plot
Parameter Editor.
ETAP

PowerStation
4.0
User Guide
Copyright 2001
All Rights Reserved





Southern California

(949) 462-0100 Sales
(949) 462-0400 Fax

Chapter 17

Transient Stability Analysis

The PowerStation Transient Stability Analysis program is designed to investigate the stability limits of a
power system before, during, and after system changes or disturbances. The program models dynamic
characteristics of a power system, implements the user-defined events and actions, solves the system
network equation and machine differential equations interactively to find out system and machine
responses in time domain. From these responses, users can determine the system transient behavior,
make stability assessment, find protective device settings, and apply the necessary remedy or
enhancement to improve the system stability.

This chapter describes different tools to assist you in running transient stability studies. An overview on
the basics of transient stability study is also provided.

This chapter is organized into 8 sections. The Transient Stability Toolbar section explains how you can
launch a transient stability calculation, open and view an output report, select display options, and view
plots. The Study Case Editor section explains how to create a new study case, to define parameters for a
study case, to create a sequence of switching events and disturbances, to globally define machine
dynamical modeling method, to select plot/tabulation devices, etc. The Display Options section explains
what options are available for displaying some key system parameters and the output results on the one-
line diagram, and how to set them. The Calculation Methods section provides some theoretical
backgrounds and quick reference for the fundamentals on transient stability study, which are very helpful
for users who do not have extensive experience on running transient stability studies. The Required Data
section is a very good reference for you to check if you have prepared all necessary data for transient
stability calculations. These data range from the system side, such as bus and branch information, to the
machine side, such as machine model and parameters, exciter model and parameters, and governor model
and parameters. The Output Reports section explains and demonstrates the format and organization of the
transient stability text reports. The One-Line Diagram Displayed Results section explains the available
one-line displaying results and provides one example. The Plots section explains what plots for transient
stability are available and how to select and view them.

Transient Stability Analysis Toolbar
17.1 Transient Stability Toolbar
The Transient Stability Toolbar will appear on the screen when you are in the Transient Stability Study
mode.

Run Transient Stability

Display Options

Report Manager

Transient Stability Plots


Get On-Line Data

Get Archived Data
Run Transient Stability
Select a study case from the Study Case Toolbar. Then click on the Run Transient Stability button to
perform a transient stability study. A dialog box will appear to ask you to specify the output report name
if the output file name is set to Prompt. When the calculation completes, the transient stability study
results will appear on the one-line diagram and are stored in the output report, as well as in the plot file.
Display Options
Click the Display Options button to customize the one-line diagram annotation options under the
transient stability study mode. Also to edit the one-line diagram display for transient stability calculation
results. See Display Options for more information.
Report Manager
Click on Report Manager button to select a format and view transient stability output report. Transient
stability analysis reports are current provided in ASCII formats only, which can be accessed from the
Report Manager.


You can also select output files from the Output Report list box.

This list contains all the output files in the current project folder with the same file extension specified.
To change output file extensions, you can click on the List Output Reports button next to the Output
Report list box, which will allow you to select a different output file extension.

The output reports for transient stability studies have a .tsr extension.

PowerStation text output reports can be viewed by any word processor such as Notepad, WordPad, and
Microsoft Word. Currently, by default, the output reports are viewed by Notepad. You can change the
default viewer in the ETAPS.INI file to the viewer of your preference. Refer to Chapter 1, Product
Description, or Chapter 7, Printing & Plotting for more details.

in Chapter 7, Printing & Plotting.
Transient Stability Plots
Click on the Transient Stability Plots button to select and plot the curves of the last plot file. The plot
file name is displayed on the Study Case Toolbar. The transient stability plot files have the following
extension: .tsp. For more information see Plots section.
The Stop Sign button is normally disabled. When a transient stability calculation has been initiated, this
button becomes enabled and shows a red stop sign. Clicking on this button will terminate the current
calculation. One-line diagram display will not be available if you terminate the calculation before it
completes; but the text output report and plots do store the calculation results up to the time instant when
you terminate the calculation.
Get On-Line Data
If the ETAP key installed on your computer has the on-line feature, you can copy the on-line data from
the on-line presentation to the current presentation.
Get Archived Data
If the ETAP key installed on your computer has the on-line feature, you can copy the archived data to the
current presentation.

Transient Stability Analysis Study Case Editor
The Transient Stability Study Case Editor contains solution control variables, loading conditions, event
and action specifications, machine modeling selections and a variety of options for output reports and
plots. PowerStation allows you to create and save an unlimited number of study cases. Transient stability
calculations are conducted and reported in accordance to the settings of the study case selected in the
Study Case Toolbar. You can easily switch between study cases without the trouble of resetting the study
case options each time. This feature is designed to organize your study efforts and save you time.

As a part of the multi-dimensional database concept of PowerStation, study cases can be used for any
combination of the three major system toolbar components, i.e. for any configuration status, one-line
diagram presentation, and Base/Revision Data.

When you are in the Transient Stability Analysis mode, you can access the Transient Stability Study Case
Editor by clicking on the Study Case button on the Transient Stability Toolbar. You can also access this
editor from the Project View by clicking on the Transient Stability subfolder under the Study Cases
folder.

To create a new study case, go to the Project View, right-click on the Transient Stability Study Case
folder, and select Create New. The program will then create a new study case, which is a copy of the
default study case, and adds it to the Transient Stability Study Case folder.

The Transient Stability Study Case Editor consists of four pages: Info Page, Events Page, Dyn Model
Page, and Plot Page.
17.2.1 Info Page
This page is provided for you to specify some general solution parameters and study case information.

Study Case ID
and entering a new ID. Study case ID can be up to 12 alphanumeric characters. Use the Navigator button
at the bottom of the editor to go from one study case to another.
Initial Load Flow
In this section you can specify the solution parameters for initial load flow calculation in transient
stability analysis.
Max Iteration
Enter the maximum number of iterations. If the solution has not converged at the specified number of
iterations, the program will stop and inform the user. The recommended and default value is 2000.
Solution Precision
Enter the value for the solution precision that is used to check for convergence. This value determines
how precise you want the final solution to be. The default (and recommended) value is 0.000001.
Accel. Factor
Enter the convergence acceleration factor to be used between iterations. Typical values are between 1.2
and 1.7. The default value is 1.45.
Solution Parameters
This is the integration time step in seconds in transient stability simulation. You should set this number
smaller than the smallest time constant in the system so you can see all the exciter and governor
responses. Note that the smaller this number is, the more calculations are required, so the calculation time
increases. The recommended value is 0.001 seconds. If you feel you need higher resolution, decrease
this number. However, if the integration time step is too small, accumulated round up errors may
increase.
Plot Time Step
This value determines how often PowerStation should record the results of the simulation for plotting.
For instance, if you specify 20 steps, PowerStation will plot points at every 20 simulation time step, i.e.,
for a simulation time step of 0.001, the plot time step will be .02 seconds. The smaller this number is, the
smoother your plots will look, but also remember that the plot files on your hard disk may grow quite
large. Keep in mind that PowerStation records plot information at this interval throughout the simulation.
For example, if you specified a simulation time step of 0.001 seconds, plot time step of 10, and a total
time of 20 seconds, PowerStation will write 20 / (0.001*10)= 2000 points to disk, which may be a very
large plot file, depending on the number of machines and buses being plotted.
Select this option to include transformer phase-shift specified in the transformer editors in both transient
stability initial load flow calculation and time simulation calculation. Otherwise transformer phase-shift
will be ignored (i.e., 0 degree phase-shift regardless of the transformer winding connections).
Initial Loading
In the Initial Loading block of the Transient Stability Study Case Editor, you can specify the system
initial operating loads by selecting a loading. The initial loading conditions will establish an initial
normal operation condition for the transient stability studies.
Loading Category
Select one of the ten loading categories for this study case. With the selection of any category,
category. Note that you can assign loading to each one of the ten categories in the Nameplate page,
Loading page, or Rating page for most load components. Harmonic Filter loading is calculated from its
parameters.
Operating Load
Check this option to operate P and Q as specified in the relevant component editors.
Charger Loading
Load Category
Select this option to use the P and Q specified in the Loading Category section of the Charger Editor for
chargers.
Operating Load
Select this option to use the P and Q as specified in the Operating Load section of the Charger Editor. If
this option is selected, a DC load flow calculation is required to run first in order to estimate the charger
load.
Apply appropriate load diversity factor(s) for transient stability initial load flow calculation. The choices
are:
None
Select None to use the percent loading of each load as entered for the selected Loading Category, i.e., no
diversity factor is considered.
Bus Maximum
When the Bus Maximum option is selected, the loading of all motors and other loads will be multiplied
by the maximum diversity factor of the bus, which they are directly connected to. Using this option, you
can define the initial loading for transient stability studies with each bus having a different maximum
diversity factor.

bus may have a different maximum diversity factor.
Bus Minimum
When the Bus Minimum option is selected, the loading of all motors and other loads will be multiplied by
the bus minimum diversity factor of the bus that they are directly connected to. Using this option, you
can define the initial loading for transient stability studies with each bus having a different minimum
diversity factor.

This study option may be used to see the effect of transformer taps and capacitors (if any) on the system
voltages under a minimum (light) loading condition.
Global
When this option is selected, PowerStation will ask you to enter global diversity factors for constant kVA
and constant Z loads, respectively. When you select this option, PowerStation will globally multiply all
constant kVA and constant Z loads of the selected loading category with the entered values. When using
this option, you can define the initial loading for transient stability analysis studies with fixed diversity
factors for all loads.

Note that a constant kVA load diversity factor of 125% implies that the constant kVA loads of all buses
are increased 25% above their values as specified by the selected loading category. This value can be
smaller or greater than 100%.
Remarks 2nd Line
You can enter up to 120 alphanumeric characters in the Remarks box. Information entered in this
location will be printed on the second line of the header information in every page of the output report.
These remarks can provide specific information and conditions for each study case. Note that the first
line of the header information is global for all study cases and is entered in the Project Information Editor.
17.2.2 Events Page
This page is provided for you to design and store transient stability study scenarios and events.

Events
In this list, all events are displayed in their time order to give you a clear picture of the event sequence in
this study. The active events are marked by '*' and are listed first, followed by those which are inactive.
Event ID
The Event ID is a unique name with a maximum length of 12 alphanumeric characters.
Time
This is the time when the associated event occurs. The unit is in second.
Add (Event)
A new event can be added by clicking on the Add (Event) button and opening the Event Editor.

Active
Select this option to make an event active. Clicking on the box again will make the event inactive. Only
active events will be included in the study.
Edit (Event)
Click on the Edit (Event) button to open the Event Editor and edit an existing event. You can also
double-click on an event in the Event list to activate the Event Editor.
Delete (Event)
Delete an existing event from the list.
Actions
Each event can encapsulate a number of actions (system changes or disturbances). When you select an
event by highlighting that event in the Event list, the actions associated with that event will be displayed
in the Action list. Each action is composed of the information of the Device Type, the Device ID, and an
Action. Note that the event ID is displayed on top of the Action list for your reference.
Device Type
The type of device that is going to take an action.
Device ID
The ID of the device that is going to take an action.
Action
The action to be taken by the specified device and the device type. The following is a table showing
device types and their associated actions:

Device Type Actions
Bus Fault / Clear Fault
Cable Fault at /Fault at / Fault at / Clear Fault
Line Fault at /Fault at / Fault at / Clear Fault
Impedance Fault at /Fault at / Fault at / Clear Fault
Circuit Breaker Open / Close
SPST Switch Open / Close
Fuse Open / Close
Generator Ref. Machine / Delete / Droop / Isoch / Start / Loss Excitation
Utility Ref. Machine / Delete
Syn. Motor Delete
Ind. Motor Accelerate / Delete
MOV Start
None Load Flow (no action, print load flow at the event time)
Add (Action)
A new action can be added by clicking on the Add (Action) button and opening the Action Editor. Select
a device type from the Device Type drop-down list. Select the device ID from the Device ID drop-down
list. Select an action from the Action drop-down list.
Edit (Action)
Click on the Edit (Action) button to edit an existing action. You can also double-click on a listed action
to bring up the Action Editor.

Delete (Action)
Delete an existing action.
The total simulation time for a transient stability study. The unit is in seconds.
17.2.3 Dyn Model Page
This page is provided to globally specify if you want to dynamically model synchronous and induction
motors in the system. Motors are subdivided into medium voltage (above 1.0 kV) and low voltage (less
than or equal to 1.0kV) synchronous motor and induction machine groups.

A machine will be dynamically modeled if you have specified a dynamic model in its editor and you
select to globally model that motor group from this page.

Note that all synchronous generators are dynamically modeled.
Machine Type
Syn. Motors, MV
The machine group consisting of all synchronous motors, which are medium voltage (rated above 1.0
kV).
Syn. Motors, LV
The machine group consisting of all synchronous motors that are low voltage (rated less than or equal to
1.0 kV).
Ind. Machines, MV
The machine group consisting of all induction machines that are medium voltage (above 1.0 kV).
Ind. Machines, LV
The machine group consisting of all induction machines that are low voltage (rated less than or equal to
1.0 kV).
Dynamic Modeling
Do Not Model
If selected, the corresponding machine group will not be dynamically modeled in the transient stability
study for this study case, regardless of dynamic models specified for individual machines.
Model Machines Larger or Equal To
If selected, machines that are in the corresponding machine group and rated larger than the size specified
in the HP/kW field will be dynamically modeled, and machines in the same group that are rated less than
the size specified will not be dynamically modeled.

Note that for the machine to be dynamically modeled, it should also have a dynamic model specified for it
from its editor.
HP/kW
Specify the size of machines (in HP or kW) for the selected machine group to be dynamically modeled.
Starting Load for Accelerating Motors
Specify the base for load torque vs. slip models used for accelerating motors.
Based on Motor Electrical Rating
Load torque vs. slip curve is defined based on the motor electrical rating, i.e., the load torque vs. slip
curve will be scaled to reach 100% at the synchronous speed, corresponding to 100% of the motor
electrical rating.
Based on Motor Mechanical Load
Load torque vs. slip curve is defined based on the motor mechanical load, i.e., the load torque vs. slip
curve will not be scaled.
Generator Start-Up
Specify special frequency dependent models for generator start-up studies here.
Frequency Dependent Models for Network, Motors, & Generators
The network, motors, and generators will be modeled as frequency dependent. This option has to be
checked in order to perform the generator start-up study.
17.2.4 Plot Page
This page is provided for you to select devices to be plotted for viewing transient stability study results.

Device Type
Select a device type.
Syn. Generators
The machine group consisting of all synchronous generators.
Syn. Motors, MV
The machine group consisting of all dynamically modeled synchronous motors, which are rated above 1.0
kV.
Syn. Motors, LV
The machine group consisting of all dynamically modeled synchronous motors which are rated equal to
or less than 1.0 kV.
Ind. Machines, MV
The machine group consisting of all dynamically modeled induction machines, which are rated above 1.0
kV.
Ind. Machines, LV
The machine group consisting of all dynamically modeled induction machines which are rated equal to or
less than 1.0 kV.

Buses
The device group consisting of all buses.
MOVs
The device group consisting of all MOVs with initially open or closed status.
Branches
The device group, consisting of all different types of branches, with the exception of tie circuit breakers
(protective devices).
Plot Options
Once a machine or device group is selected, all devices in that group will be displayed in the Plot Options
list for you to select.
Device ID
Device IDs for the selected machine or device group, excluding the non-dynamically modeled machines.
Plot/Tabulation (column)
You can click on this column to select or deselect the plot/tabulation option for a particular device. Once
this option is set, an X will show in this column next to the selected device. By selecting this option,
information for the selected device will be tabulated at the end of the transient stability output report and
stored in the plot file to be plotted.
Plot/Tabulation (check box)
This provides another way to set the plot/tabulation option for the highlight device.

Transient Stability Analysis Display Options
The Transient Stability Analysis Display Options consist of a Results page and three pages for AC, AC-
DC, and DC info annotations. Note that the colors and displayed annotations selected for each study are
17.3.1 Results Page
The Results page allows you to define options for one-line diagram calculation results display. These
results can be displayed for each plot time step as selected from the Time Slider. The results include bus
voltage and frequency, synchronous machine power angle and frequency, induction motor speed, and
power flow to machines. The bus and machine data that are displayed on the one-line diagram are the
same data, which are stored in the plot file, i.e., to show a bus voltage and frequency on the one-line
diagram, you need to request a plot for that bus.

Color
Select the color for result annotations to be displayed on the one-line diagram.
Show Units
Select the check boxes under this heading to show units for the displayed results.
Bus
Display the calculated voltage and frequency of buses selected for plotting.
Voltage
Bus voltage in kV or in percent of the bus nominal kV.
Frequency
Bus frequency in hertz or in percent of system frequency.
Syn. Machines
Display the calculated power angle and frequency of synchronous generators and motors, which are
selected for plotting from the Study Case.
Power Angle
Machine power (rotor) angle in degrees or radians.
Frequency
Machine frequency in hertz or in percent of system frequency.
Ind. Machines
Speed
Display speed of induction machines (RPM or % Slip), which are selected for plotting from the Study
Case. % Slip = (
s
-
m
) /
s

Machine Flows
Specify how the flows will be displayed in (kW+jkvar or MW+jMvar), or (kVA or MVA), or Amp.

Transient Stability Study Results Displayed on the One-Line Diagram at Time 1.38 Seconds
17.3.2 AC Page
Color
ID
Select the check boxes under this heading to display the ID of the AC elements on the one-line diagram.
Rating
Select the check boxes under this heading to display the ratings of the AC elements on the one-line
diagram.

Device Type Rating
Motor HP / kW
Load kVA / MVA
Bus kA Bracing
kV

A

Z

Motor % LRC
D-Y
one-line diagram. For transformers, the operating tap setting for primary, secondary, and tertiary
windings are also displayed. The operating tap setting consists of the fixed taps plus the tap position of
the LTC.
Composite Motor
Use Default Options
17.3.3 AC-DC Page
Color
ID
line diagram.
Rating
one-line diagram.

Device Type Rating
UPS kVA
VFD HP / kW
kV
A
one-line diagram.

Device Type Amp
Composite Network
Use Default Options
17.3.4 DC Page
Color
ID
Select the check boxes to display the IDs of the selected DC elements on the one-line diagram.
Rating
Select the check boxes to display the ratings of the selected DC elements on the one-line diagram.

Device Type Rating
Battery Ampere Hour
Motor HP / kW
Load kW / MW
Converter kW / MW
kV
elements on the one-line diagram. For cables, the kV check box is replaced by the button. Click on
this button to display the conductor type on the one-line diagram.
A
one-line diagram. For cables, the Amp check box is replaced by the button. Click on this button to
display the cable length (one way) on the one-line diagram.
Z
Composite Motor
Transient Stability Analysis Calculation Methods
Performing the power system transient stability study is a very comprehensive task. It requires
knowledge of machine dynamic models, machine control unit models (such as excitation system and
automatic voltage regulators, governor and turbine/engine systems, and power system stabilizers),
numerical computations, and power system electromechanical equilibrium phenomena. The full
discussion on this topic is far beyond the scope of this manual. In this section, we will brief you with
some fundamentals and underlying principles on the power system transient stability study, with the focus
on applications with PowerStation.
Purpose for Performing Transient Stability Study
Dynamic performance of a power system is significant in the design and operation of the system. The
transient stability study determines the machine power angles and speed deviations, system electrical
frequency, real and reactive power flows of the machines, power flows of lines and transformers, as well
as the voltage levels of the buses in the system. These system conditions provide indications for system
stability assessments. The results are displayed on the one-line diagram, and also can be printed or
plotted. For transient stability studies, you should model particular groups of machines in the system that
are known to have important influences on the system operation. The total simulation time for each study
case should be sufficiently long to obtain a definite stability conclusion.
Power System Stability Definition
Power system stability is the property of a power system that insures the system remains in
electromechanical equilibrium throughout any normal and abnormal operating conditions.

Because the power system stability is an electromechanical phenomenon, it is thus defined as the ability
of designated synchronous machines in the system to remain in synchronism with one another following
disturbances such as fault and fault removal at various locations in the system. It also indicates the ability
of induction motors in the system to maintain torque to carry load following these disturbances.
Synchronous Machine Rotor Angles
Synchronous machines play a decisive role in the power system stability because during and after
disturbances their rotor angles will oscillate to cause power flow oscillations in the system. Depending on
the level of these oscillations, the electromechanical equilibrium in the system could be destroyed and the
instability could occur. Therefore, power system stability is sometimes also referred to as synchronous
machine rotor angle stability.

The following two equations are often referenced in power system transient stability studies:

Torque Equation (Generator Case)
sin
8
2
r
F
air
P
T =

where
T = mechanical shaft torque
P = number of poles

air
= air-gap flux
F
r
= rotor field MMF
= power (rotor) angle
The torque equation defines the relationship between the mechanical shaft torque, the stator voltage, the
excitation system, and the rotor angle. Changes in any one of them will cause the rotor angle to readjust
itself to a new position.

Swing Equation (Generator Case)
elec
P
mech
P
dt
d
D
dt
d
M = +

2
2

where
M = inertia constant
D = damping constant
P
mech
= input mechanical power
P
elec
= output electrical power

The swing equation shows that the solution of the rotor angle is a function of balance between the
mechanical power and the electrical power. Any change in the system that breaks this balance will cause
the rotor angle to undergo a transient and reach a new position in an oscillatory manner. This oscillation
is usually called the rotor angle swing.
Stability Limits
There are two types of stability limit for a power system, namely steady-state stability limit and transient
stability limit.
Steady-State Stability Limit
The steady-state stability is defined as the stability of a system under conditions of gradual or small
changes in the system. This stability can be either found by the load flow calculation for a steady-state
operation, or determined by a transient stability study if there are system changes or disturbances
involved. The system is said to be steady-state stable if, following any small and/or gradual disturbances,
all synchronous machines reach their steady-state operating condition identical or close to the pre-
disturbance operating conditions. The steady-state stability limit for any synchronous machine is when its
rotor angle is less than 90 degrees.
Transient Stability Limit
Transient or dynamic stability is defined as the stability of a system during and after sudden changes or
disturbances in the system, such as short-circuits, loss of generators, sudden changes in load, line tripping,
or any other similar impact. The system is said to be transient stable if following a severe disturbance, all
synchronous machines reach their steady-state operating condition without prolonged loss of synchronism
or going out of step with other machines.
Causes of Instability Problems
The major causes to industrial power system instability problems include, but are not limited to:

Short-circuits
Loss of a tie connection to a utility system
Loss of a portion of in-plant co-generation (generator rejection)
Starting a motor that is large relative to the system generating capacity
Switching operations of lines, capacitors, etc.
Impact loading (motors and static loads)
A sudden large step change of load or generation
Consequences of Instability Problems
The consequences of power system instability problems usually are very severe and can range from
permanent damage on equipment and shutting down processes, all the way to causing a whole area power
outage. Some typical consequences are listed below:

Area-wide blackout
Interruption of loads
Low-voltage conditions
Damage to equipment
Relay and protective device malfunctions
Power System Transient Stability Enhancement
Depending on the causes of instability problems in a particular system, a number of enhancements can be
made to improve the system stability. Typical enhancements include:

Improve configuration and system design.
Increase synchronizing power
Design and selection of rotating equipment use induction motors, increase moment of inertia,
reduce transient reactance, improve voltage regulator and exciter characteristics
Application of Power System Stabilizers (PSS)
Add system protection fast fault clearance, system separation, etc.
Add load shedding scheme

However, note that each of the above remedies requires careful consideration and we recommend that you
re-run all system studies again, because changes brought by those remedies very likely will impact system
load flow, short-circuit, and motor starting results.
Simulation of Time Events and Actions
Transient Stability study is essentially an action driven time-domain simulation. Actions should be
specified at different time instants (events). There are two ways to specify events and actions. One way
is to use the Event Editor and Action Editor in the Transient Stability Study Case Editor. Another way is
to use relay-controlled dynamic actions.

When using actions specified in the Transient Stability Study Case Editor, Action List, the exact time
instant for the action to take place needs to be given. Type of actions in this category includes all the pre-
scheduled operations such as generator start-up and shutdown, generator control mode change, load
addition and rejection, motor acceleration, MOV start and others. When to simulate the system response
for existing events, such as a recorded fault in the system, user also can use this type of action, because
the recorded fault occurring time and duration are known. To specify this type of actions, user first
creates a new event and the event occurring time in the Event Editor of the Transient Stability Study Case
Editor, Event page, as shown below.

Secondly, user can use the Action Editor in the same page to add as many actions as desired for this
event.


A complete list of devices in ETAP PowerStation that can be specified with actions and types of these
actions is given in section 2.2 Events Page, of this chapter, under subsection Actions.

However, in power systems, many actions occur without any pre-acknowledgment, instead, they are
controlled by sensors and relays. For instance, a current relay will trip off circuit breakers once the
measured current by relay exceeds a pre-set value. In another case, a voltage relay can be used to open or
close circuit breakers based on its monitored voltage and comparison with an upper and an lower settings.
These types of action do not have a definite time of happening and are solely depending on the system
dynamic responses and relay settings. They, therefore, have to be implemented using the second method,
i.e., relay controlled actions. To use relay-controlled actions, user need to add a relay and connect it to
the one-line diagram via a PT or CT, depending on type of the relay. Next in relay editor, user specifies
relay-controlled circuit breaker ID, control settings, time delay, and other data related to relay operations.
During the transient stability simulation in time-domain, if a relay setting is met, then its controlled circuit
breaker will take an automatic action. This method avoids requesting to give a pre-defined action time
and is a true resemblance to power system real operating conditions.

Following two pictures give an example of how to use relay-controlled actions. In the first picture,
assuming CB2 and/or CB11 are tripped off due to a fault in transformer T2, thus substation Sub2A-N
losses power. To make a bus transfer for Sub2A-N to the adjacent bus Sub2B, user can place a voltage
relay (27) on bus Sub2A-N to monitor the bus voltage magnitude and close a normally opened tie circuit
breaker Tie CB when it is necessary.


To do so, user can set the voltage relay to pick up under-voltage at 65% and close Tie CB after 0.1 relay
delaying time and what ever the closing cycle by Tie CB itself. Settings for the voltage relay is shown in
the second figure down below.

Transient Stability Analysis Required Data
17.5 Required Data
To run a transient stability study, you need to provide all the data required for load flow calculation. In
addition to that, you need to provide machine dynamic model data, load model data, and any control
units, such as exciter and governor data. Required data for transient stability calculations include:
Bus Data
Bus ID
Nominal kV
Load Diversity Factor (when Loading option is set to Maximum or Minimum diversity factor)
Branch Data
2-Winding and 3-Winding Transformers
Transform ID
Bus Connections
Rated kV and MVA
Impedance and tolerance
X/R ratio
Tap and LTC settings
Phase Shift as in Standard Positive or Negative Sequence connections, or Special configurations
Cable/Transmission Line
Cable or Transmission Line ID
Bus Connections
Type, size, rated kV, # of conductors per phase, and length
Use library data or enter cable's resistance, reactance, and susceptance values
Impedance
Impedance ID
Bus Connections
Resistance, reactance, and susceptance values
Current-Limiting Reactor
Current-Limiting Reactor ID
Bus Connections
X/R ratio, impedance, and tolerance
Protective Device Data
Protective Device ID
Bus and Branch Connections
Status
CT/PT Data
CT/PT ID
Bus or Branch or Source or Load Connections
Rating (Ratio)
Relay Data
Relay ID
CT/PT Connections
Device, CB ID, Action, Delay, Setting, Unit
Power Grid Data
Power Grid ID
Bus Connections
Operating mode (Swing, Voltage Control, or Mvar Control)
Nominal kV
%V and Angle for Swing mode
%V, MW loading, and Mvar limits (Qmax & Qmin) for Voltage Control mode
MW and Mvar loading for Mvar Control mode
3-Phase MVAsc and X/R values
Synchronous generator ID
Bus Connections
Operating mode (Swing, Voltage Control or Mvar Control)
Rated kV
%V and Vangle for Swing mode of operation
%V, MW loading, and Mvar limits (Qmax & Qmin) for Voltage Control mode of operation
MW and Mvar loading for Mvar Control mode of operation
Rated MVA
Model type (None, Equivalent, Transient, or Subtransient)
Machine type (Round-Rotor or Salient-Pole)
Xd, Xd, Xd, Xq, Xl, X/R, Tdo for Equivalent model
Xd, Xd, Xd, Xq, Xq, Xl, X/R, Tdo, Tqo for Transient model Round-Rotor machine type
Xd, Xd, Xd, Xq, Xq, Xq, Xl, X/R, Tdo, Tdo, Tqo, Tqo for Subtransient model Round-Rotor
machine type
Xd, Xd, Xd, Xq (= Xq), Xq, Xl, X/R, Tdo for Transient model Salient-Pole machine type
Xd, Xd, Xd, Xq, Xq (= Xq), Xq, Xl, X/R, Tdo, Tdo, Tqo for Subtransient model Salient-Pole
machine type
S100, S120, H, and Damping
Sbreak for Generator Start-up Study
Exciter Type and all associated parameters or fixed excitation
Governor Type and all associated parameters or no governor action
Power System Stabilizer (PSS) Type and all associated parameters or no PSS control
Synchronous motor ID
Bus Connections
Quantity
Rated kW/hp and kV
Model type (None, Equivalent, Transient or Subtransient)
Machine type (Round-Rotor or Salient-Pole)
Xd, Xd, Xd, Xq, Xl, X/R, Tdo for Equivalent model
Xd, Xd, Xd, Xq, Xq, Xl, X/R, Tdo for Transient model Round-Rotor machine type
Xd, Xd, Xd, Xq, Xq, Xq, Xl, X/R, Tdo, Tdo, Tqo, Tqo for Subtransient model Round-Rotor
machine type
Xd, Xd, Xd, Xq (= Xq), Xq, Xl, X/R, Tdo for Transient model Salient-Pole machine type
Xd, Xd, Xd, Xq, Xq

(= Xq), Xq, Xl, X/R, Tdo, Tdo, Tqo for Subtransient model Salient-Pole
machine type
S100, S120, H and Damping
Exciter Type and all associated parameters or fixed excitation
H
Load model

Induction Machine Data
Induction machine ID
Bus Connections
Application type (motor or generator)
Quantity
Rated kW/hp and kV
Model type (None, Single1, Single2, DBL1, or DBL2)
Xlr, Xoc, X/R, and Tdo
for Single1 model

Rs, Xs, Xm, Rr,fl, Rr,lr, Xr,fl, and Xr,lr for Single2 model
Rs, Xs, Xm, Rrl, Rr2, Xr1, and Xr2 for DBL1 and DBL2 model
H
Load model
% Start Loading for the First Starting Category (defines the motor start loading percent)
MOV Data
MOV ID
Bus Connection
Quantity
Initial Status & Associated Demand Factor
Rated kW/hp & kV
Power Factor & Efficiency
Rated Torque
Hammer Blow & Micro Switch Flags
Locked Rotor (LR), No Load (NL), Normal, & Rated Torque (Rated T) Time Duration
Loading Category ID & % Loading
Equipment Cable Data
% Voltage Limit
Static Load Data
Static Load ID
Bus Connection
Quantity
Status & Associated Demand Factor
Rated kVA/MVA & kV
Power Factor
Lumped Load Data
Lumped Load ID
Bus Connection
Rated kVA/MVA & kV

Power Factor
% Motor Load & % Static Load
Capacitor Data
Capacitor ID
Bus Connection
Rated kV
Mvar/Band and # of Bank
Harmonic Filter
Harmonic Filter ID
Filter Type
Rated kV & 3-Phase kvar for Capacitors
Xl & Q for Reactors
R, if applicable
Grounding Connection
Grounding Type
UPS Data
UPS ID
Bus Connection
AC Connections
Rated kW/MW & kV
AC Input & Output Rated kV
VFD Data
VFD ID
Bus Connection

VFD is Modeled as a Transparent Device in the Transient Stability Study
Charger Data
Charger ID
Bus Connections
AC Ratings
Inverter Data
Inverter is not Modeled in the Transient Stability Study
Study Case Parameters
Study Case ID
Max. Number of Iterations
Solution Precision
Acceleration Factor
Plot Time Step
Initial Loading Category
Initial Loading Condition (Loading Category, Operating Load)
Load Diversity Factor (None, Bus Maximum, Bus Minimum, or Global)
Charger Loading Condition (loading Category, Operating Load)
Events & Actions
Dynamic Modeling Information
Starting Load Modeling Method
Plots/Tabulated Selection

Study Case parameters are entered into the Transient Stability Study Case Editor.

Transient Stability Analysis Output Reports
17.6 Output Reports
PowerStation provides transient stability study results at all different levels of detail, depending on your
requirements. The results are reported in three different formats: a text output report, a one-line view
display, and plots.
17.6.1 Transient Stability Report Manager
Click on the View Output File button on the Transient Stability Toolbar to open the Transient Stability
Report Manager. The Transient Stability Report Manager provides the format for text and consists of
four pages.
Complete Page
From this page you can select the report format that gives you the complete output report. Currently, only
the TextRept format is available.

Input Page
This page provides the formats for different input data. Currently, the formats in this page are not
available for the transient stability study.
Result Page
This page provides the formats for different calculation results. Currently, the formats in this page are not
available for the transient stability study.
Summary Page
This page provides the formats for different summaries from both input data and calculation results.
Currently, the formats in this page are not available for the transient stability study.
17.6.2 Transient Stability Text Report
The text output report can be viewed by clicking on the View Output File button in the Study Case
Toolbar or from the Transient Stability Report Manager by selecting TextRept and clicking on OK. The
transient stability analysis output report consists of several sections, as summarized below.
Cover Page
This is the first page of the output report. It includes information on the number of different types of
buses, the number of different types of branches, the number of different types of machines; system
parameters such as initial loading category, frequency, and unit system; solution parameters such as
maximum iterations and solution precision; study parameters such as integration time step and plot time
step, as well as output and plot file names.

DYNAMIC STABILITY ANALYSIS
--------------------------
Swing Gen. Load Total
----- ----- ----- -----
XFRM XFRM3 React. Line Imp. C.B. SPDT Total
----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
Number of Branches: 3 1 0 2 0 0 0 6
Synch. Synch. Ind. Uti-
Gen. Motor Motor lity Total
----- ----- ----- ----- -----
Number of Machines: 1 2 2 1 6
Initial Loading: Design
Maximum Number of Iterations: 2000
Solution Precision for the Initial LF: 0.00000100
Acceleration Factor for the Initial LF: 1.45
Time Increment for Integration Steps: 0.0010 Sec.
Time Increment for Plots: 0.0200 Sec.
Data Filename: EXAMPLE
Bus Input Data
This section contains information for all the buses in the system, including bus ID, bus type (swing,
generator, or load), nominal voltage, initial voltage magnitude and angle, MW and Mvar generation,
Mvar limits, MW and Mvar motor load, MW and Mvar static load, etc.

These data are the same as those in load flow output report and thus a sample printout is omitted.
Branch Input Data
This section contains the information for all branches in the system, including branch ID, R, X, Y, X/R,
transformer tap and LTC, and all the related information on branch impedance. Branch connections are
also reported.

These data are the same as those in load flow output report, thus a sample printout is omitted.
Power Grid, Synchronous Machine Data
This section contains the information for all utility equivalent machines, synchronous generators, and the
dynamically modeled synchronous motors in the system, including machine ID, connected bus ID,
machine type and model type, rated kV and MVA, impedance data, time constants, inertia, damping, and
saturation factors. For synchronous motors, it also contains the information on the load model and
parameters.

Conned Bus Synch. GEN./MTR Rating (base) Machine Impedance ( % )
============ ====================== =============== ==============================================================
Bus ID Machine ID TYP MDL kV MVA Ra Xd" Xd' Xd Xq" Xq' Xq Xl
------------ ------------ --- --- ------ ------- ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------
Sub 2B Gen1 GEN 4 13.800 8.824 1.00 24.00 37.00 115.00 34.00 75.00 75.00 15.00
Main Bus Utility UTL 0 34.500 1500.000 2.22 99.98
Sub 2B Syn1 MTR 4 13.200 1.170 0.56 15.38 23.00 110.00 12.00 23.00 108.00 11.00
Bus3 Syn4 MTR 4 13.200 2.982 0.33 15.38 23.00 110.00 12.00 23.00 108.00 11.00
Synch. GEN./MTR Time Constant (sec) H(sec), D(MWpu/Hz) & Sat. Gen./Loading
====================== ============================== ========================== ==============
Machine ID TYP MDL Tdo" Tdo' Tqo" Tqo' H % D S100 S120 MW Mvar
------------ --- --- ------ ------ ------ ------ ----- ----- ----- ----- ------ ------
Gen1 GEN 4 0.030 5.000 0.050 3.700 1.200 5.00 1.070 1.180 6.300 0.000
Syn1 MTR 4 0.002 5.600 0.002 3.700 1.000 2.00 1.070 1.180 0.995 -0.617
Syn4 MTR 4 0.002 5.600 0.002 3.700 1.000 2.00 1.070 1.180 2.770 1.105
Synch. MTR Load Model
====================== ================================================
Machine ID TYP MDL Model ID A0 A1 A2 A3
------------ --- --- ------------ ------ ------ ------ ------
Syn1 MTR 4 COMP CENT 10.00 -91.00 321.00 -147.00
Syn4 MTR 4 Centr. Comp 10.00 -91.00 328.00 -147.00
Exciter/AVR Data
This section contains the information for all exciters installed in the system, including the generator ID to
which the exciter is installed, exciter type, gains, time constants, and other parameters.

Generator Type Time Constants (Sec.) and Parameters
============== ======== ==================================================================================================
1,2,3&1S KA KE KF TR TA TE TF/TF1 TF2/XL VRmax VRmin SEm/KP SE7/KI Efd/VB
DC1 &DC2 KA KE KF TA TB TC TE TF TR VRmax VRmin SEmax SE75 Efd
DC3 KE KV TE TR TRH VRmax VRmin SEmax SE75 Efd
ST1, ST2 KA KC KE/KG KF/KJ KI KP KPreal KPimg TA TB TC TE TF TR
& ST3 XL VGmax VImax VImin VRmax VRmin SEmax SE75 Efdmax
AC1 &AC4 KA KC KD KE KF TA TB TC TE TF TR
VAmax VAmin VImax VImin VRmax VRmin SEmax SE75 Efd
AC2 &AC3 KA KB/KR KC KD KE KF KH/KN KL(V) TA TB TC TE TF TR
VLR VLV Efdn VAmax VAmin VRmax VRmin SEmax SE75 Efd
SR8F KA KF TR TA TB TF1 TF2 VRmax VRmin
HPC 840 C D Kpow KQ KE Bmax Bmin Amax Amin VRmax VRmin SEmax SE75 Efd
Te T4 TI TD TF Tdsty TP TQ CtlBus
AC5A KA KE KF VRmax VRmin SEmax SE75 Efd
TA1 TA2 TA3 TE TF1 TF2 TF3 TR
JEUM Ar1 Ar2 Ku1 Ku2 Kif Kae Ke Vres Vsup SEm SE7 Efdmax Te
Max1 Min1 Max2 Min2 Max3 Min3 Max4 Min4 Max5 Min5 Max6 Min6 Max7 Min7
Av1 Av2 Av3 Av4 Av5 Av6 Av7 Av8 Av9 Av10 Av11
Ai1 Ai2 Ai3 Ai4 Ai5 Ai6 Ai7 Ai8 Ai9 Ai10 Ai11 Ai12
ST1D KA KC KF KVF KVL TA TB TC TD TH TF TR TVL
ID VImax VImin VRmax VRmin RC XC VVLR Vdc Rf VHZ Vfb Ifb Vref
-------------- -------- ------- ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------
Gen1 1 250.00 1.000 0.060 0.005 0.030 1.250 1.000 17.50 -15.50 1.650 1.130 6.600
Governor/Turbine Data
This section contains the information for all governors installed in the system, including generator ID to
which the governor is installed, governor type, mode, gains, time constants, and other parameters.

Type Operation Limits Time Constants(Sec.) and Parameters
====== ============= ============== ====================================================================
All ST %Droop Mode Pmax Pmin Tsr Tc Tch Trh1 Trh2 Tco Fhp Fvhp Fip
GT&GP %Droop Mode Pmax Pmin Tsr Tc Tt Tdrp Ta
DT,GTF %Droop Mode Pmax Pmin T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8 T9
&STM %Droop Mode Pmax Pmin K1/Kr K2/Kf K3/KD K4/Ff K5 K6 K7 DB UO/VU UC/VL
UG8 Mode Pmax Pmin A1 A2 A3 B1 B2 C1 K1 Ad T7 T8
Generator GTH& Ki Mode Max. Min. X Y Z A/a B/b C/c D Kf T.Ctl A.Ctl
GTS Tf/R Tcr/S Tcd/T Ttd T Tt Tr
505E Mode P1 I1 SDr1 L1 L2 Ta1 Tm1 Ts Prior Ramp
ID HPa HPb HPc HPmax Sa Sb Sc Smax EFmax
P2 I2 SDr2 L3 L4 Ta2 Tm2 EP EF
2301A %Droop Mode eMax eMin Alpha Beta Rho K1 Tao T1 T2 LS GP Pmax Pmin
MARS %Droop Mode T1 T2 T3 T5 T6 T7 Ks Kt Ko Ku
Kl MaxGv MinGv Maxo Mino Max2 Min2 Max3 Min3
DDEC %Droop Mode Pmax Pmin K1 K2 R1 Ts T1 T2 T3
GHH VLmax VLmin VMmax VMmin VHmax VHmin PLmax PLmin PMmax PMmin
PHmax PHmin Kp1 Kp2 Kp3 Kp4 GL GM GH m1
m2 m3 e1 e2 HP MP Pa Pb Pc Pd
Pe Pf LFa LFc LFd EX2f LFV1 LFV2 LFV3 LF1
LF2 LF3 FL0 KFL0 FL1 FM0 KFM0 FM1 Tn1 Tn2
Tn3 Tn5 Tn6 TL TM TH Esf1 Esf2
HYDR VO VC1 VC2 Gmax1 Gmax2 Gmin Q GC RP RT
TP TG TR Zt Zp1 ft fp1 Tt Tp1 At1
Damp QNL Q2 RPM1 RPM2 RPM3 GBUFF Wref Href m
B
SGT Mode Pmax Pmin T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 TR K1 K2 K3
Pref
PL-A Fuel TP TL TQ TLD TLG TA TC TD TV TPL
TPG TC1 TC2 TX1 TX2 TX3 TX4 TX5 KL KI
KA KC KT DL JRL1 JRL2 TFLD Tref Plimit GOVBase
============ ------ ------ ----- ------ ------ ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
Gen1 ST1 5.0 Droop 8.33 0.00 0.100 0.100 0.150 5.000 0.700
PSS Data
This section contains the information for all PSS installed in the system, including generator ID to which
the PSS is installed, PSS type, and all PSS parameters.
Generator Type Time Constants (Sec.) and Parameters
============== ======== ==================================================================================================
PSS1A KS VSTmax VSTmin VTmin TDR A1 A2 T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6
PSS2A KS1 KS2 KS3 VSTmax VSTmin VTmin TDR Tw1 Tw2 Tw3 Tw4 N M T1
ID T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8
-------------- -------- ------- ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------
Gen1 PSS1A 3.150 0.900 -0.900 0.000 0.200 0.000 0.000 0.760 0.100 0.760 0.100 1.000 0.100
This section contains the information for all dynamically modeled induction machines in the system,
including machine ID, connected bus ID, rated kV and MVA, model type and model parameters, load
model and model parameters, inertia, initial MW and Mvar loading, and slip.

Conned Bus Ind. Motor Rating (base) Eqiv. Model (%Z & seconds) CKT or Double Cage Models (% impedance)
============ ================ ============== =========================== ================================================
Bus ID Machine ID MDL kV MVA Ra Xlr Xoc Tdo' Rs Xs Xm Rrfl,1 Rrlr,2 Xrfl,1 Xrlr,2
------------ ------------ --- ------ ------- ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------
Bus3 Mtr2 CKT2 13.200 0.649 3.83 10.29 365.20 1.52 1.23 11.67 9.30
Sub3 Swgr Pump 1 CKT1 4.000 0.434 3.83 19.36 375.50 0.81
Conned Bus Ind. Motor H(sec) Load Model Normal Loading
============ ============ ====== ================================================ ==============================
Bus ID Machine ID H Model ID A0 A1 A2 A3 % Slip MW Mvar % Load
------------ ------------ ------ ------------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------
Bus3 Mtr2 0.310 a k***3 0.00 0.00 100.00 0.00 1.41 0.599 0.297 0.0
Sub3 Swgr Pump 1 0.200 FAN 10.00 -91.00 321.00 -147.00 1.18 0.400 0.188 30.0
Initial Load Flow Report
An initial load flow study is performed to determine all initial settings for machines, exciters/AVRs, and
governors/turbines with the specified initial loading condition. The initial load flow result is printed for
you to inspect the system pre-event operating conditions.

The format for the initial load flow report is similar to those of the load flow output report and thus a
sample printout is omitted.

Load Flow Report @ T=*.*
This is the load flow report prior to the occurrence of a specified event. Following this section should be
a detailed list of actions for the event. Note that for each event, there will be a corresponding pre-event
load flow report. The format of this section is similar to those of the load flow output report and thus a
sample printout is omitted.
Event/Action Data
This section lists detailed information on each action included in an event. This section appears right
after a load flow report performed before this event and its associated actions occur.

Bus / Machine Revision (Modification)
=====================================
Bus/Mach ID Existing Type New Type
------------ ------------- ----------
Main Bus Swing Bus Faulted
This page indicates bus/machine revisions occurring at simulation time T = 0.1000 seconds.
Final Load Flow Report
This is the load flow reported for the time at the end of the simulation. Formats of this section are similar
to those of the load flow output report and thus a sample printout is omitted.
Tabulated Simulation Result
This section tabulates, for each device that is selected for tabulation in the study case, the simulation
results as functions of time at the specified plot time step. The type of tabulated results is the same as the
plot curves, as defined in Plot Options.

Gen. (Gen1 ) Syn. MT (Syn1 ) Syn. MT (Syn4 )
====== ================================== ================================== ==================================
Time Ang. Freq. Mech. Elec. Term. Ang. Freq. Mech. Elec. Term. Ang. Freq. Mech. Elec. Term.
(Sec.) (deg) (Hz) (MW) (MW) I (A) (deg) (Hz) (MW) (MW) I (A) (deg) (Hz) (MW) (MW) I (A)
------ ----- ----- ----- ----- ------ ----- ----- ----- ----- ------ ----- ----- ----- ----- ------
0.000 30.92 60.00 6.34 6.30 265.1 -27.60 60.00 0.99 0.99 48.9 -55.88 60.00 2.76 2.77 123.6
0.020 30.92 60.00 6.34 6.30 265.1 -27.60 60.00 0.99 0.99 48.9 -55.88 60.00 2.76 2.77 123.6
0.040 30.91 60.00 6.34 6.30 265.0 -27.60 60.00 0.99 0.99 48.9 -55.88 60.00 2.76 2.77 123.6
0.060 30.91 60.00 6.34 6.30 265.0 -27.60 60.00 0.99 0.99 48.9 -55.88 60.00 2.76 2.77 123.6
0.080 30.91 60.00 6.34 6.30 265.0 -27.60 60.00 0.99 0.99 48.9 -55.88 60.00 2.76 2.77 123.6
0.100 30.90 60.00 6.34 6.30 264.9 -27.60 60.00 0.99 0.99 48.9 -55.88 60.00 2.76 2.77 123.6
0.101 30.90 60.01 6.34 0.53 1202.6 -27.60 59.99 0.99 0.37 328.9 -55.87 59.98 2.76 -0.79 834.8
0.121 31.92 60.28 6.34 0.48 998.3 -28.86 59.62 0.98 0.37 231.1 -58.01 59.35 2.73 -0.30 495.4
0.141 35.00 60.57 6.34 0.51 908.8 -32.82 59.26 0.97 0.42 233.1 -64.69 58.73 2.69 -0.31 491.0
0.161 40.15 60.86 6.33 0.56 877.5 -39.25 58.93 0.97 0.49 235.3 -75.83 58.12 2.65 -0.29 485.6
0.181 47.31 61.13 6.32 0.61 869.6 -47.87 58.65 0.96 0.55 239.0 -91.32 57.52 2.62 -0.26 479.2
0.201 56.39 61.38 6.30 12.44 756.5 -58.48 58.44 0.96 4.33 264.8 -111.07 56.99 2.58 9.23 837.0
0.221 64.76 60.91 6.26 15.28 756.7 -65.16 59.93 0.99 4.22 195.3 -127.85 58.58 2.67 11.12 689.2
0.241 69.21 60.32 6.21 16.48 769.4 -60.51 61.48 1.02 3.89 176.2 -132.76 60.20 2.77 10.88 706.9
0.261 69.32 59.72 6.16 16.13 732.8 -45.69 62.64 1.04 2.69 117.3 -126.29 61.73 2.85 10.58 656.7
0.281 65.30 59.19 6.10 14.40 639.6 -24.93 62.99 1.04 0.73 35.6 -109.13 63.14 2.93 9.59 533.6
0.301 57.95 58.80 6.05 11.67 508.4 -5.05 62.29 1.03 -1.25 54.2 -82.88 64.16 2.98 6.56 331.3
0.321 48.44 58.59 6.02 8.53 366.8 6.90 60.79 1.01 -2.35 99.7 -51.73 64.33 2.99 1.22 105.3
TS Action Summary
This section lists all the actions in the study, including both specified in the Transient Stability Study
Case Editor and those initiated by relay actions.
Device Action Time
============ ========== ========
Main Bus Faulted 0.100
Main Bus Normal 0.200
Transient Stability Analysis One-Line Diagram Displayed Results

In addition to the text report, PowerStation displays the transient stability calculation results on the one-
line diagram.
Transient Stability Time-Slider
Once a transient stability study is completed, a Transient Stability Time-Slider, as shown below, will
appear next to the Configuration & Mode Toolbar. The slider ranges from zero to the total simulation
time. Initially, the reference pointer is at the far left, corresponding to t = 0 seconds. You may click on
either end of the ruler to move the pointer one grid at a time, or hold the mouse button down to move the
pointer continuously. You may also click on the pointer, hold the mouse button down, and then drag the
pointer to the desired position. The time corresponding to the pointer position is also displayed next to
the ruler in units of seconds. As you move the pointer along the slider, the displayed results change
accordingly, providing you with a quick way to examine the calculation results.

The one-line diagram displays are only available for those devices that are selected for plot options.
Depending on the device type, different calculation results are displayed as defined below:
Buses
Voltage bus voltage magnitude in kV or percent
Frequency bus frequency in Hz or percent
Syn. Generators
Power Angle synchronous generator rotor angle in degree or radian
Frequency synchronous generator frequency in Hz or percent
Efd synchronous generator field voltage in per unit
Real and Reactive Power synchronous generator electrical power generation in kW+jkvar or
MW+jMvar
Apparent Power synchronous generator electrical power generation in kVA or MVA
Current synchronous generator terminal current in Amp
Syn. Motors, MV
Power Angle synchronous motor rotor angle in degree or radian
Frequency synchronous motor frequency in Hz or percent
Voltage synchronous motor terminal voltage in kV or percent
Real and Reactive Power induction machine electrical power loading in kW+jkvar or MW+jMvar
Apparent Power induction machine electrical power loading in kVA or MVA
Current induction machine terminal current in Amp

Syn. Motors, LV
Power Angle synchronous motor rotor angle in degree or radian
Frequency synchronous motor frequency in Hz or percent
Voltage synchronous motor terminal voltage in kV or percent

Ind. Machines, MV
Speed induction machine speed in RPM or percent slip
Voltage induction machine terminal voltage in kV or percent
Ind. Machines, LV
Speed induction machine speed in RPM or percent slip
Voltage induction machine terminal voltage in kV or percent
MOV
Real and Reactive Power mov electrical power loading in kW+jkvar or MW+jMvar
Apparent Power mov electrical power loading in kVA or MVA
Current mov terminal current in Amp

The units for the displayed results are defined in the Results Page of the Transient Stability Display
Options.

The following is a sample of one-line diagram display from the Transient Stability study.


Transient Stability Analysis Plots

17.8 Plots
PowerStation also provides simulation plots for you to examine Transient Stability calculation results in a
graphic form. To view the plots, click on the Transient Stability Plots button on the Transient Stability
Toolbar. It will bring up a dialog box for the Transient Stability Plot Selection, as shown below, from
which you can specify the devices and types of plots to view.

Device Type
Select a device type for plotting.
Device ID
From this list, select the devices (up to 16 devices at a time) to be plotted. This list contains the devices
that have been selected for plots from the study case editors.
Plot Type
Check plot type(s) for plot. Different device types have different plot types.
Syn. Generators
Power Angle synchronous generator power angle in degree
Frequency synchronous generator frequency in Hz
MWm synchronous generator shaft mechanical power generator in MW
MWe synchronous generator electrical power generation in MW
Current synchronous generator terminal current in Amp
Efd synchronous generator field voltage in per unit
Ifd synchronous generator field current in Amp
Machine Z synchronous generator terminal impedance in % on machine base

Syn. Motors, MV (medium voltage motors)
Power Angle synchronous motor power angle in degree
Frequency synchronous motor frequency in Hz
MWm synchronous motor mechanical power in MW
MWe synchronous motor electrical power in MW
Current synchronous motor terminal current in Amp
Voltage synchronous motor connected bus voltage in % of the bus nominal kV
Machine Z synchronous motor terminal impedance in % on machine base

Syn. Motors, LV (low voltage motors)
Power Angle synchronous motor power angle in degree
Frequency synchronous motor frequency in Hz
MWm synchronous motor mechanical power in MW
MWe synchronous motor electrical power in MW
Current synchronous motor terminal current in Amp
Voltage synchronous motor connected bus voltage in % of the bus nominal kV
Machine Z synchronous motor terminal impedance in % on machine base
Ind. Machine, MV (medium voltage machines)
Slip induction machine slip in %
Accel Torque induction machine acceleration power in MW
MWm induction machine mechanical power in MW
MWe induction machine electrical power in MW
Voltage induction machine connected bus voltage in % of the bus nominal kV
Machine Z induction motor terminal impedance in % on machine base
Ind. Machine, LV (low voltage machines)
Slip induction machine slip in %
Accel Torque induction machine acceleration power in MW
MWm induction machine mechanical power in MW
MWe induction machine electrical power in MW
Voltage induction machine connected bus voltage in % of the bus nominal kV
Machine Z induction motor terminal impedance in % on machine base
Buses
Voltage Angle bus voltage angle in degree
Frequency bus frequency in % of system frequency
MW bus real power loading in MW
Mvar bus reactive power loading in Mvar
Voltage/Hz bus voltage per Hz in volt/Hz
Voltage bus voltage magnitude in % of the bus nominal kV

MOVs
Slip MOV slip in percent
Acce l Power MOV acceleration power in kvar
kvar MOV reactive power loading in kvar
kW MOV real power loading in kW
Current MOV current in Amp
Voltage MOV terminal voltage in % of the connected bus nominal kV base

Note that for synchronous motors and induction machines, terminal voltages are also displayed on the
one-line diagram.

The following is a set of sample plots from the Transient Stability study:

Combine Plots
Curves for the selected item will be plotted on the same graph. Multiple scales will be used.
ETAP

PowerStation
4.0
User Guide
Copyright 2001
All Rights Reserved





Southern California

(949) 462-0100 Sales
(949) 462-0400 Fax

Chapter 18

Generator Start-Up

The PowerStation Generator Start-Up Analysis is a special feature of the PowerStation Transient Stability
program. This type of analysis is needed for nuclear generation plants and other special conditions when
the connection to a power grid is lost and recovery of the power supply to some critical loads is
mandatory. In such cases, a cold stand-by generator is started under an emergency condition goes
through acceleration and load acceptation stages, and finally settles down to a steady-state.

A comparison of the results from the PowerStation Generator Start-Up program with the field
measurement data for an actual system is shown below for the generator frequency and motor kW power.

Generator Start-Up Introduction
The generator start-up analysis is a very distinctive study for several reasons. First, at the time the
generator receives the emergency starting signal and is ready to start, its in a zero speed/zero voltage
state. There is no voltage on the generator terminal to feed the excitation system, thus an alternative
source has to be used. This alternative source usually stays online until the generator terminal voltage has
built up high enough to support the excitation system. At this point, the alternative source is withdrawn
and the excitation source is switched to the generator terminal voltage. Second, the generator parameters
are not constant during the starting process; rather, they change significantly with the generator speed.
This fact must be considered and the generator parameters have to be re-calculated from the generator
instantaneous speed. Furthermore, the saturation effect also needs to be accounted for in adjusting the
generator parameters. Third, once the generator has reached the designated speed (or frequency) and/or
terminal voltage, the emergency loads are switched on. A frequency and/or voltage controlled action is
required to close the system circuit breakers. These actions are usually initiated by frequency relays and
voltage relays. Fourth, when the emergency system is energized, motors in the emergency system are
started at that point. Note that at this time, system frequency and voltage are still under their nominal
values, which means a special modeling technique must be developed to handle the motor starting at
under frequency and under voltage conditions. Finally, all system impedances ought to be adjusted
according to system instantaneous frequency.

The generator start-up analysis can simulate the entire process of a synchronous generator during start-up,
from the cold stand-by mode to the full operation mode. The synchronous generator and all of its
associated controls, including turbine/engine and governor system, excitation/AVR system, and other
associated controls, are modeled in a very detailed and extensive way, including both frequency
dependency and saturation correction. The Event and Action editors in the Transient Stability Study Case
Editor, along with Frequency and Voltage Relays, allow you to start the generator and operate circuit
breakers exactly the same as in a real system. Induction motors are dynamically modeled with frequency
dependent models to allow acceleration at under frequency and under voltage conditions. Other system
components are also correctly and accurately modeled.

Key features of the PowerStation Generator Start-Up Analysis include:

Accurate Synchronous Generator Model with Completely Frequency Dependent Parameters
Synchronous Generator Parameter Correction Due to Saturation Effect
Initial Field Flashing Circuit & Switching Time
Sophistic Turbine Model to Include Special Dynamics During the Generator Start-Up
Detailed & User-Programmable Speed Governor System Control
System Switching Actions Controlled by Relay Actions
Variety of Relay Settings (Volt, Hz, V/Hz, dHz/dt)
Frequency Dependent Network Impedance Model
Frequency Dependent Induction Machine Model
Induction Motor Starting at Under Voltage & Under Frequency Conditions
Full Text Report of Study Results for Viewing and Printing
One-Line Display of Study Results with Time Slider to Recapture the System Dynamic Responses
Graphic Plots of Study Results for Viewing & Printing

Generator Start-Up Study Case Editor

The Generator Start-Up Analysis is part of the PowerStation Transient Stability program. To run a
generator start-up analysis, you need to be in Transient Stability mode. The functions of all buttons on
the Transient Stability Toolbar and the Study Case Toolbar stay the same as when you are performing a
transient stability study. Here is a list of the additional settings that are required to run a generator start-
up analysis. These settings are done in the Transient Stability Study Case Editor.
Time Step
Because of the complexity involved in a generator start-up analysis, many differential equations need to
be solved. To ensure the solution accuracy, it is recommended that you use a smaller value for simulation
time step, for example, 0.0003 second. Consequently, a relatively large value can be used for the plot
time step, say 100.

Generator Start-Up Study Case Editor

Event & Action
When performing a generator start-up analysis, it is very import to remember that starting the generator
should be the first action to take place. The generator start action is specified in the Transient Stability
Study Case Editor, as shown below. To do this, you need to create a time event and add one action with
the Device Type specified as Generator and the Action type as Start.

Dynamic Model
The generator start-up analysis requires all system components to be modeled with frequency
dependency. This is done by checking the Frequency Dependent Models for Network, Motors, &
Generators box in the Dyn Model page of the Transient Stability Study Case Editor.

Generator Start-Up Calculation Methods

The major difference between the regular transient stability study and the generator start-up analysis is
that in the latter case, the system frequency undergoes a drastic change from 0 Hz to an overshoot
(normally 20 to 30 percent of the nominal frequency,) and finally settles down at the nominal value. This
fact requires all power system components, especially rotating machines, to be modeled correctly to
account for the frequency changes. Impedance of other components should also be able to be adjusted to
the true instantaneous system frequency. The PowerStation Generator Start-Up Analysis can make all
these adjustments spontaneously if the correct models are selected. This section describes what you need
to do to select the right models for different components and how those components are being modeled.
Starting Generator
To perform a generator start-up analysis, the following synchronous generator model needs to be selected.
This model is adapted from the latest IEEE Standard 1110 IEEE Guide for Synchronous Generator
Modeling Practices in Stability Analyses. It has one damping winding on each of the direct and
quadratic axis.


The equivalent circuit for this model is illustrated below.

- +
L
fd
- L
ad
L
l
R
d
R
fd
L
fd
V
fd
L
d
L
ad
R
a
i
d
q
V
d
+
-
Direct-Axis Equivalent Circuit

V
q
d
L
l
+ -
L
aq
R
a
i
q

L
q

R
q

Direct-Axis Equivalent Circuit

Turbine Governor Models
Practically any type of turbine-governor model in PowerStation can be used in the generator start-up
study, provided there are no other special control functions required. For example, shown below is a
hydro turbine and speed governor model. It includes water tunnel and penstock dynamics and a very
complex gate opening control scheme.


Exciter/AVR Models
The exciter/AVR system requires special controls in the generator start-up study. For example,
exciter/AVR model ST1D is shown below and can be used for the generator start-up analysis. This model
includes a special field flashing circuit to supply the initial DC excitation voltage to the generator field
winding. A voltage per Hz relay is also included to switch the excitation source from the initial DC
source to the normal source once the generator has built up enough voltage.


Induction Machine Model
Induction machines, which are accelerated during generator start-up process, should be modeled by their
frequency dependent circuit models. PowerStation automatically uses the frequency dependent circuit
models that are selected from the Motor CKT Model Library Quick Pick Editor inside the Induction
Machine Editor. All four types of induction machine circuit models, namely Single1, Single2, DBL1, and
DBL2, can be used as the frequency dependent models for a generator start-up analysis.

Synchronous Motor Models
Accelerating synchronous motors in the system are modeled with their LR models same as induction
machines with frequency dependent circuit models, since they behave like induction motors during start-
up.

Other Components
Other system components such as transforms, lines, and cables are modeled the same way as in transient
stability studies except for the fact that the program will adjust their impedance according to the system
instantaneous frequency.
Generator Start-Up Output Reports

18.3 Output Reports
Three types of output reports are available for a generator start-up analysis, and they are text report, one-
line display, and plots. Please refer to the Transient Stability chapter for more information on how to
access and manage the output reports.
Text Report
The text report for the generator start-up analysis is the same format as the transient stability analysis.
One-Line Display
The one-line display for the generator start-up analysis is the same format as the transient stability
analysis.
Plots
The plots for the generator start-up analysis are the same format as the transient stability analysis.

Some sample plots from a generator start-up analysis are shown here.

ETAP

PowerStation
4.0
User Guide
Copyright 2001
All Rights Reserved





Southern California

(949) 462-0100 Sales
(949) 462-0400 Fax

Chapter 19

Dynamic Models

Motor dynamic models are required for dynamic motor starting, transient stability, and generator starting
studies. Generator dynamic models and some control units (exciters and governors) are only needed for
transient stability studies. In addition, load torque characteristics for different types of models are
required for both motor starting and transient stability studies. PowerStation provides a variety of
induction and synchronous machine models, plus extensive libraries for exciters and governors for you to
select from to perform your studies.

For dynamic motor acceleration studies, only the motors that are accelerated need to have a dynamic
model, i.e., generators, exciters, and governors are not dynamically modeled. For transient stability
studies, all generators, exciters, and governors are dynamically modeled. Motors, which have dynamic
models and are designated to be dynamically modeled from the study case, will be dynamically modeled.
For generator starting and frequency dependent transient stability studies, all generators, exciters,
governors, and motors have to use frequency dependent models.

This chapter describes different types of machine models, machine control unit models, load models, and
explains their applications in motor starting and transient stability studies. It also describes tools that
assist you to select those models and specify model parameters.

The induction machine models section describes five different types of induction machine models and the
frequency dependent forms of these models. Those are Circuit Models (Single1, Single2, DBL1, DBL2)
and Characteristic Curve Models. In the synchronous machine models section, descriptions of five
different types of synchronous machine models and the frequency dependent forms of these models are
given. Those are Equivalent Model, Transient Model for round-rotor machines, Sub-transient Model for
round-rotor machines, Transient Model for salient-pole machines, and Sub-transient Model for salient-
pole machines. Motor starting and transient stability studies also require the utility tie system to be
modeled as an equivalent machine. A description of the modeling of power grid systems is found in the
section Power Grid. Different types of exciter and automatic voltage regulator (AVR) models, including
standard IEEE models and vendor special models, are defined in the Exciter and AVR Models section.
Governor-turbine models that are also based on both IEEE standards and vendors product manuals are
listed in the Governor-turbine Models section. Finally, different types of load models are described in the
Mechanical Load section.
Dynamic Models Induction Machine
19.1 Induction Machine
PowerStation provides five different types of induction machine models, which cover all commonly used
induction machine designs. These models are:

Single1 CKT Model
Single2 CKT Model
DBL1 CKT Model
DBL2 CKT Model
Characteristic Curve Model
Frequency Dependent Model

In general, Single1, Single2, DBL1, and DBL2 are referred to as CKT (circuit) models, because they all
use equivalent circuits to represent an induction machine stator and rotor windings. These models can be
used for both dynamic motor starting and transient stability studies. Characteristic models use machine
performance curves specified at some discrete points to represent an induction machine. It can be used
for dynamic motor starting studies, but is not suitable for transient stability studies.

Note that the models described in this section are also employed by synchronous motors for motor
starting studies since, during starting, synchronous motors behave similarly to induction motors. This
modeling procedure is approved by the industrial standards.
Notations and Symbols
The following notations are used in defining various parameters for induction machine models:

R
s
= Stator resistance
X
s
= Stator reactance
X
m
= Magnetizing reactance
R
r
= Rotor resistance
X
r
= Rotor reactance
X
lr
= Locked-rotor reactance ( = X
s
+ X
m
X
r
/ (X
m
+ X
r
) )
X
oc
= Open-circuit reactance ( = X
s
+ X
m
)
T
do
= Rotor open-circuit time constant ( = (X
m
+ X
r
) / (2fR
r
) )
X/R = Machine X/R ratio

Plus the notations used in the machine electrical and mechanical equations:

E = Machine internal voltage
It = Machine terminal current
s
= Machine synchronous speed
m
= Machine mechanical speed
s = Machine slip ( = (
s
-
m
) /
s
)
f = Synchronous frequency
H = Machine shaft inertia
D = Damping factor (this value is negligible)
P
m
= Mechanical output power
P
e
= Electrical input power
19.1.1 Single1 Model
This is the least complex model for a single-cage induction machine, with no deep-bars. It is essentially
using a Thevenin equivalent circuit to represent the machine. The rotor circuit resistance and reactance
are assumed constants; but the internal voltage will change depending on the machine speed.

Parameters for this model are:

E Machine internal voltage
Xlr Locked-rotor reactance ( = X
s
+ X
m
X
r
/ (X
m
+ X
r
) )
Xoc Open-circuit reactance ( = X
s
+ X
m
)
Tdo Rotor open-circuit time constant ( = (X
m
+ X
r
) / (2fR
r
) )
X/R Machine X/R ratio

Note that the X/R value is obtained from the library and is not the same X/R used for short-circuit
calculations.
19.1.2 Single2 Model
This is the standard model for induction machines, representing the magnetizing branch, stator, and rotor
circuits, and accounts for the deep-bar effect. The rotor resistance and reactance linearly change with the
machine speed.


Rs Stator resistance
Xs Stator reactance
Xm Magnetizing reactance
Rrfl Rotor resistance at full load
Rrlr Rotor resistance at locked-rotor
Xrfl Rotor reactance at full load
Xrlr Rotor reactance at locked-rotor
19.1.3 DBL1 Model
This CKT model represents double cage induction machines with integrated bars. The rotor resistance
and reactance of each cage are constant for all machine speeds; however, the equivalent impedance of the
two rotor circuits becomes a non-linear function of the machine speed.


Xs Stator reactance
Rr1 Rotor resistance for the first rotor circuit
Rr2 Rotor resistance for the second rotor circuit
Xr1 Rotor reactance for the first rotor circuit
Xr2 Rotor reactance for the second rotor circuit
19.1.4 DBL2 Model
This is another representation of double cage induction machines with independent rotor bars. The same
as the DBL1 model, the rotor resistance and reactance of each cage are constant for all machine speeds,
and the equivalent impedance of the two rotor circuits is a non-linear function of the machine speed. The
DBL2 model has a different characteristic than the DBL1 model.


Xs Stator reactance
Xr1 Rotor reactance for the first rotor circuit
Xr2 Rotor reactance for the second rotor circuit
19.1.5 Characteristic Curve Model
This model provides the capability to model induction machines directly based on machine performance
curves provided by the manufacturer. Although only a discrete set of points is required to specify each
curve, PowerStation uses advanced curve fitting techniques to generate continuous curves for calculation
purposes.

Curves specified in this model include:

Torque vs. Slip
Current (I) vs. Slip
Power Factor (PF) vs. Slip

Note that this model is only used for motor starting studies. For transient stability studies you can use the
Machine Parameter Estimation program to convert this model into one of the CKT models.
19.1.6 Frequency Dependent Model
In generator starting and frequency dependent transient stability studies, the frequency dependent models
of induction machines are used. PowerStation provides the frequency dependent forms for the four types
of circuit models (Single1, Single2, DBL1, DBL2). In these models, the stator and rotor reactance and
slip of machine are functions of system frequency. The following is the equivalent circuit for a double
cage induction machine model with independent rotor bars (DBL2).

R
s
R
r1
/s
s
L
r1
V
s
s
L
m
i
s
s
L
s

s
L
r2

R
r2
/s


Ls Stator inductance
Lm Magnetizing inductance
Lr1 Rotor inductance for the first rotor circuit
Lr2 Rotor inductance for the second rotor circuit

s
System speed
s Motor slip

The data interface and library for the frequency dependent forms of the four types of induction machine
models (Single1, Single2, DBL1, DBL2) are the same as the corresponding regular induction machine
models. PowerStation internally converts the reactance in machine interface to inductance.

The model also can be expressed as the following equivalent circuit in terms of transient inductance and
transient internal electromagnetic-force.

s
E
s
L
V
s
R
s
i
s
Parameters in the circuit are:

Ls Transient inductance
E Transient internal electromagnetic-force
Dynamic Models Synchronous Machine
19.2 Synchronous Machine
PowerStation provides five different types of synchronous machine models to choose for transient
stability studies and frequency dependent models for generator starting and frequency dependent transient
stability studies. The complexity of these models ranges from the simple Equivalent Model to the model
that includes the machine saliency, damper winding, and variable field voltage. These models are:

Equivalent Model
Transient Model for Round-Rotor Machine
Transient Model for Salient-Pole Machine
Subtransient Model for Round-Rotor Machine
Subtransient Model for Salient-Pole Machine
Frequency Dependent Model

Synchronous generators and synchronous motors share the same models. In the following discussion, the
generator case is taken as an example.
Notations and Symbols
The following notations are used in defining various parameters for synchronous machine models:

Xd = Direct-axis subtransient synchronous reactance
Xd = Direct-axis transient synchronous reactance
Xd = Direct-axis synchronous reactance
Xq = Quadrature-axis subtransient synchronous reactance
Xq = Quadrature-axis synchronous reactance
Xq = Quadrature-axis transient synchronous reactance
Xl = Armature leakage reactance
Ra = Armature resistance
X/R = Machine X/R ration (= Xd/Ra)
Tdo = Direct-axis subtransient open-circuit time constant
Tdo = Direct-axis transient open-circuit time constant
Tqo = Quadrature -axis subtransient open-circuit time constant
Tqo = Quadrature -axis transient open-circuit time constant
S100 = Saturation factor corresponding to 100 percent terminal voltage
S120 = Saturation factor corresponding to 120 percent terminal voltage
H = Total inertia of the shaft
D = Shaft damping factor
General Concept of Modeling Synchronous Machines
A synchronous machine is, in general, modeled by an equivalent internal voltage source and its equivalent
resistance and reactance. The equivalent internal voltage source is connected to the machine internal bus
behind the equivalent resistance and reactance, as shown in the diagram.

Depending on the structure (round-rotor or salient-pole) and design (with or without damper windings),
the equivalent internal voltage and equivalent impedance are calculated differently. These differences are
reflected in differential equations describing different types of synchronous machine models.

Parks transformation is adopted and the following notations and symbols are employed in the differential
equations for synchronous machine models:

Efd = Term representing the field voltage acting along the quadrature-axis. It is
calculated from the machine excitation system
f() = Function to account machine saturation effect
Eq = Quadrature-axis component of the voltage behind the equivalent machine
subtransient reactance
Ed = Direct-axis component of the voltage behind the equivalent machine subtransient
reactance
transient reactance
Ed = Direct-axis component of the voltage behind the equivalent machine transient
reactance
reactance
Ed = Direct-axis component of the voltage behind the equivalent machine reactance
Ei = Voltage proportional to field current
It = Machine terminal current
Id = Direct-axis component of machine terminal current
Iq = Quadrature-axis component of machine terminal current
Saturation
The synchronous machine saturation effect needs to be considered in the modeling. This effect is
represented by two parameters S100 and S120 as defined in the following figure and equations:

f
f
f
f
I
I
S
I
I
S
2 . 1
120
120
100
100
=
=

where

I
f

I
f100
= Field current corresponding to 100% terminal voltage on the open-circuit saturation
curve
I
f120
= Field current corresponding to 120% terminal voltage on the open-circuit saturation
curve

For generator starting studies, another factor, S
break
, is required to correct machine inductance as shown in
the above generator saturation curve. The factor S
break
is defined as %V
t
at the saturation break point.

19.2.1 Equivalent Model
The screen below shows the equivalent model, its parameters, and the typical data.

This model uses an internal voltage source behind the armature resistance and quadrature-axis reactance
to model a synchronous machine. The voltage source is proportional to the machine field flux linkages.
The model includes the effect of variable field voltage and the effect of saliency in the case of Salient-
Pole machines.

For this model, Req and Xeq are defined as:

Req = Ra
Xeq = Xq

Differential equations to describe this model are:

19.2.2 Transient Model for Round-Rotor Machine
The screen below shows the transient model for a round-rotor machine, its parameters, and the typical
data.

This model uses an internal voltage source behind a fictitious impedance Rh + jXh. Rh and reactance Xh
are used to replace Req and Xeq to achieve a faster calculation convergence, i.e.:

Req = Rh
Xeq = Xh
where

2 / ) X j(X - Ra
X X Ra
jX R
'
q
'
d
'
q
'
d
2
h h
+
= +


This model is more comprehensive than the equivalent model because it includes more parameters to
account for the machines saliency. The following differential equations are involved to describe this
model:
19.2.3 Subtransient Model for Round-Rotor Machine
The screen below shows the subtransient model for a round-rotor machine, its parameters, and the typical
data.

This model also consists of an equivalent internal voltage source and a fictitious impedance Rh + jXh.
This model is a more comprehensive representation of general type synchronous machines. In addition to
the machines transient parameters, the subtransient parameters are included to model the machines
subtransient characteristics. This model is particularly useful for machines with damper windings.

The models differential equations are shown below:

19-14 ETAP PowerS

Operation Technology, Inc. tation 4.0
19.2.4 Transient Model for Salient-Pole Machine
The screen below shows the transient model for a salient-pole machine, its parameters, and the typical
data.

This model essentially has the same complexity as a transient model for round-rotor machines, but
considers special features of salient-pole machines which are:

Xq = X q and the time constant T qo is meaningless and omitted

For this model, the fictitious resistance R
h
and reactance X
h
are set to:
R
h
= R a
X
h
= X a

The following differential equations are involved to describe this model:

19-15

19.2.5 Subtransient Model for Salient-Pole Machine
The screen below shows the Subtransient Model for a salient-pole machine, its parameters and the typical
data.

This model includes the damper winding effect for a salient-pole machine. The same conditions are held
true as with the transient model for salient-pole machines:

X
q
= X
q
and the time constant Tqo is meaningless.

The following differential equations are involved to describe this model:

19-16 ETAP PowerS

Operation Technology, Inc. tation 4.0
19.2.6 Frequency Dependent Model
A subtransient synchronous machine model with frequency dependency in PowerStation is developed
based on a standard IEEE 2.1 synchronous generator model. An equivalent circuit diagram of the model
is shown here:

- +
L
f1d
- L
ad L
l
R
1d
R
fd
L
ffd
V
fd
-
L
1d
L
ad
R
a
i
d
q

V
d

+

Direct-axis Equivalent Circuit
L
l
-
d
+
L
aq
R
a
i
q

L
1q

V
q

R
1q

Quadrature-axis Equivalent Circuit

Parameters in the circuits are:

R
s
Stator resistance
L
l
Stator leakage inductance
L
ad
Direct-axis stator to rotor mutual inductance
L
aq
Qaudrature-axis stator to rotor mutual inductance
L
f1d
Field to direct-axis rotor mutual inductance
L
1d
Direct-axis rotor equivalent leakage inductance
R
1d
Direct-axis rotor equivalent resistance

L
ffd
Field leakage inductance
R
fd
Field resistance
L
1q
Qaudrature-axis rotor equivalent leakage inductance
R
1q
Qaudrature-axis rotor equivalent resistance
V
fd
Field voltage

d
Direct-axis flux linkages

q
Quadrature-axis flux linkages

s
System speed

The data interface for the frequency dependent subtransient synchronous machine model is the same as
the regular subtransient model with a salient-pole. PowerStation internally calculates the required
parameters for the frequency dependent model from the data in generator interface.

Dynamic Models Power Grid
19.3 Power Grid
For motor starting and transient stability studies, it is required to model a power grid (utility system) with
an equivalent machine. Due to the fact that a power grid is generally considered as an interfacing point to
the power grid whose voltage and frequency are supported by a larger system and unlikely to change, it is
valid to assume this equivalent machine has a constant internal voltage source and an infinite inertia.
Thus the power grid is modeled in PowerStation with the following Thevenin equivalent:

where Ei is calculated from the initial terminal bus voltage and Req and Xeq are from positive sequence R
and X of the Power Grid Editor, as shown below:

Dynamic Models Excitation System
19.4 Excitation System
To accurately account for dynamics from exciter and AVR systems in power system transient responses,
complete modeling of these systems is usually necessary.

PowerStation provides the following exciter and AVR models:

IEEE Type 1
IEEE Type 2
IEEE Type 3
IEEE Type 1S
IEEE Type DC1
IEEE Type DC2
IEEE Type DC3
IEEE Type ST1
IEEE Type ST2
IEEE Type ST3
IEEE Type AC1
IEEE Type AC2
IEEE Type AC3
IEEE Type AC4
IEEE Type AC5A
Basler SR8F & SR125A
HPC 840
JEUMONT Industrie
IEEE Type ST1D
IEEE Type AC8B
IEEE Type AC1A
User-defined Dynamic Model (UDM)

For IEEE type exciter and AVR systems, the equivalent transfer functions and their parameter names are
in accordance with the IEEE recommended types from the following references:

IEEE Committee Report, Computer Representation of Excitation System, IEEE Trans. on PAS,
Vol. PAS-87, No. 6, June 1968, pp 1460-1464.
IEEE Committee Report, Excitation System Models for Power System Stability Studies, IEEE
Trans. on PAS, Vol. PAS-100, No. 2, February 1981, pp 494-509.
IEEE Std. 412.5-1992, IEEE Recommended Practice for Excitation System Models for Power
System Stability Studies, IEEE Power Engineering Society, 1992
Excitation System Saturation
Following is a typical block diagram for exciters:

This diagram shows the output of the AVR is applied to the exciter after a saturation function SE is
subtracted from it. The exciter parameter KE represents the setting of the shunt field rheostat when a self-
excited shunt field is used.

It should be noted that there is a dependency between exciter ceiling Efdmax, AVR ceiling VRmax,
exciter saturation SE and exciter constant KE. These parameters are related by the following equation
(the sign of KE is negative for a self-excited shunt field):

V
R
( K
E
+ S
E
) E
fd
= 0 for E
fdmin
< E
fd
< E
fdmax

At excitation ceiling ( E
fd
= E
fdmax
) the above equation becomes:

V
Rmax
= (K
E
+S
Emax
) - E
fdmax

Therefore, it is important that the exciter parameters entered satisfy the above equation, when applicable.
PowerStation will check this condition at run time and flag any violations.

The exciter saturation function (SE) represents the increase in exciter excitation due to saturation. It is
defined as:

where the quantities A and B are defined as the exciter field currents which produce the exciter output
voltage on the constant-resistance-load saturation curve and air gap line, respective, as shown in the
exciter saturation curve below

PowerStation assumes that S
E
is specified at the following exciter voltages:

Saturation Factor Exciter Voltage
S
Emax
E
fdmax

S
E.75max
0.75E
fdmax

IEEE Type (1)
19.4.1 IEEE Type 1

IEEE Type 1 - Continuously Acting Regulator and Exciter (1)

This type of exciter and AVR system represents a continuously acting regulator with rotating exciter
system. Some vendors' units represented by this model include:

Westinghouse brushless systems with TRA, Mag-A-Stat, Silverstat, or Rotoroal regulator
Allis Chalmers systems with Regulex regulator
General Electric systems with Amplidyne or GDA regulator
Parameters and Sample Data
Parameters for this model and their sample data are shown in the following screen capture:

IEEE Type (1)
Parameter Definitions and Units
Parameter definitions and their units are given in the following table:

Parameter Definition Unit
VRmax Maximum value of the regulator output voltage p.u.
VRmin Minimum value of the regulator output voltage p.u.
SEmax The value of excitation function at Efdmax
SE.75 The value of excitation function at 0.75 Efdmax
Efdmax Maximum exciter output voltage p.u.
KA Regulator gain p.u.
KE Exciter constant for self-excited field p.u.
KF Regulator stabilizing circuit gain p.u.
TA Regulator amplifier time constant Sec.
TE Exciter time constant Sec.
TF Regulator stabilizing circuit time constant Sec.
TR Regulator input filter time constant Sec.
IEEE Type (2)
19.4.2 IEEE Type 2

IEEE Type 2 - Rotating Rectifier System (2)
This type of exciter and AVR system represents a rotating rectifier exciter with static regulator system.
Its characteristics are similar to IEEE Type 1 exciter, except for the feedback damping loop. This system
applies to units where the main input to the damping loop is provided from the regulator output rather
than the exciter output. To compensate for the exciter damping which is not included in the damping
loop, the feedback transfer function contains one additional time-constant.

An example of such a system is the Westinghouse brushless system, which was in service up to 1966.

IEEE Type (2)

TF1 Regulator stabilizing circuit first time constant Sec.
TF2 Regulator stabilizing circuit second time constant Sec.
IEEE Type (3)
19.4.3 IEEE Type 3
R
sT + 1
1
A
A
sT
K
+ 1 E E
sT K +
1
V
ref
V
t
VR
max
Efd
+
-
-
F
F
sT
sK
+ 1
VR
min
+
t I t P thev
I jK V K V + =
( ) A 1 I
fd
+
VB
max
0.0
( )
8 . 1 0
/ 78 . 0
2
1
> =
=
A for V
V I X A
B
thev fd
I
t

IEEE Type 3 - Static System with Terminal Potential and Current Supplies (3)

This type of exciter and AVR system represents static excitation systems with compound terminal voltage
and current feedback. The regulator transfer function for this model is similar to IEEE Type 1. In this
model, the regulator output is combined with a signal, which represents the self-excitation from the
generator terminals.

An example of such a system is the General Electric SCPT system.
IEEE Type (3)


VBmax The value of excitation function at Efdmax p.u.
KI Current circuit gain coefficient
KP Potential circuit gain coefficient
XL Reactance associated with potential source
TF Regulator stabilizing circuit second time constant Sec.

IEEE Type (1S)
19.4.4 IEEE Type 1S

IEEE Type 1S - Controlled Rectifier System with Terminal Voltage (1S)

In this type of exciter and AVR system, excitation is obtained through terminal voltage rectification. In
this model the maximum regulated voltage (VRmax) is proportional to terminal voltage Vt.

IEEE Type (1S)

Efdmax The value of excitation function at Efdmax p.u.
KF Exciter constant for self-excited field p.u.
KP Regulator stabilizing circuit gain p.u.
TF Regulator stabilizing circuit second time constant Sec.

IEEE Type (DC1)
19.4.5 IEEE Type DC1

IEEE Type DC1 - DC Commutator Exciter with Continuous Voltage Regulation (DC1)
This type of exciter and AVR system is used to model field-controlled DC-commutator exciters with
continuous voltage regulators. Examples of this model are:

Allis Chalmers Regulex regulator
General Electric Amplidyne and GDA regulator
Westinghouse Mag-A-Stat, Rototrol, Silverstat, and TRA regulators

IEEE Type (DC1)

TB Voltage regulator time constant Sec.
TC Voltage regulator time constant Sec.

IEEE Type (DC2)

IEEE Type DC2 - DC Commutator Exciter with Continuous Voltage Regulation and Supplies from
Terminal Voltage (DC2)
This type of exciter and AVR system is used for field-controlled DC commutator exciters with continuous
voltage regulators supplied from the generator or auxiliaries bus voltage. Its only difference from IEEE
Type DC1 is the regulator output limits, which are now proportional to terminal voltage Vt.

IEEE Type (DC2)

TC Voltage regulator time constant Sec
IEEE Type (DC3)

IEEE Type DC3 - DC Commutator Exciter with Non-Continuous Voltage Regulation (DC3)

This type of exciter and AVR system is used for the older DC commutator exciters with non-continuously
acting regulators.

Examples of this model are:

General Electric exciter with GFA4 regulator
Westinghouse exciter with BJ30 regulator
IEEE Type (DC3)


KV Fast raise/Lower contact setting p.u.
TRH Rheostat travel time Sec.
IEEE Type (ST1)
19.4.8 IEEE Type ST1

IEEE Type ST1 - Potential-Source Controlled-Rectifier Exciter (ST1)
This type of exciter and AVR system is used to represent potential-source, controlled-rectifier excitation
systems. This is intended for all systems supplied through a transformer from the generator terminals.

Examples of this model include:

Canadian General Electric Silcomatic exciters
Westinghouse Canada Solid State Thyristor exciters
Westinghouse type PS static excitation systems with type WTA or WHS regulators
IEEE Type (ST1)


VImax Maximum internal signal within voltage regulator p.u.
VImin Minimum internal signal within voltage regulator p.u.
KC Regulator gain p.u.
TB Voltage Regulator amplifier time constant Sec.
TC Voltage Regulator amplifier time constant Sec.
IEEE Type (ST2)

IEEE Type ST2 - Static System with Terminal Potential and Current Supplies (ST2)

This type of exciter and AVR system is used for compound source rectifier excitation systems. These
systems use both current and voltage sources.

An example of this model is General Electric static exciter SCT-PPT or SCPT.
IEEE Type (ST2)


KC Regulator gain p.u.
KI Current circuit gain coefficient p.u.
KP Potential circuit gain coefficient p.u.

IEEE Type (ST3)

IEEE Type ST3 - Compound Source-Controlled Rectifier Exciter (ST3)

This type of exciter and AVR system represents compound-source rectifier excitation systems. These
exciters utilize internal quantities within the generator as the source of power.

Examples of this model are:

General Electric GENERREX exciter
Shunt-Thyristor exciter
IEEE Type (ST3)


VGmax Maximum inner loop voltage feedback p.u.
VImax Maximum internal signal within voltage regulator p.u.
VImin Minimum internal signal within voltage regulator p.u.
KC Rectifier loading factor related to commutating
reactance
p.u.
KG Inner loop feedback constant p.u.
KI Current circuit gain coefficient p.u.
KJ First stage regulation gain p.u.
KPreal Real part of potential circuit gain coefficient p.u.
KPimg Reactive part of potential circuit gain coefficient p.u.
TB Exciter time constant Sec.
TC Regulator stabilizing circuit time constant Sec.
XL Reactance associated with potential source p.u.
IEEE Type (AC1)
19.4.11 IEEE Type AC1
R
sT + 1
1
A
A
sT
K
+ 1
E
sT
1
V
ref
V
t Efd
+
-
-
F
F
sT
sK
+ 1
VR
max
VR
min
+
E E
K S +
-
B
C
sT
sT
+
+
1
1
+
+
( ) IN f F
EX
=
I
fd D
K
V
E
E
fd
C
V
I
K IN =
IN
0

IEEE Type AC1 - Alternator-Rectifier Exciter System with Non-Controlled Rectifiers and Field
Current Feedback (AC1)

This type of exciter and AVR system represents alternator-rectifier excitation systems with non-controlled
rectifiers and exciter field current feedback. There is no self-excitation and the source of voltage
regulator power is not affected by external transients.

Westinghouse Brushless excitation systems fall under this type of exciter model.
IEEE Type (AC1)


KC Rectifier loading factor related to commutating reactance p.u.
KD Demagnetizing factor p.u.

IEEE Type (AC2)
A
A
sT
K
+ 1
E
sT
1
V
ref
V
t
Efd
+
-
-
F
F
sT
sK
+ 1
VA
max
VA
min
+
E E
K S +
-
B
C
sT
sT
+
+
1
1
+
+
( ) IN f F
EX
=
I
fd
D
K
V
E
E
fd
C
V
I
K IN =
IN
0
R
sT + 1
1
LV
GATE
B
K
VR
max
VR
min
H
K
L
K

-
+
+
V
LR

IEEE Type AC2 - High-Initial-Response Alternator-Rectifier Exciter System (AC2)

This type of exciter and AVR system represents high-initial-response, field-controlled alternator-rectifier
excitation systems. It uses an alternator main exciter and non-controlled rectifiers. It is similar to IEEE
Type AC1 exciter model but has two additional field current feedback loops.

An example of this model is Westinghouse High-Initial-Response Brushless excitation system.
IEEE Type (AC2)


VAmax Maximum regulator internal voltage p.u.
VAmin Minimum regulator internal voltage p.u.
KB Second stage regulator gain p.u.
IEEE Type (AC2)

KH Exciter field current feedback gain p.u.
KL Gain of exciter field current limit p.u.
TC Regulator stabilizing circuit time constants Sec.
VLR Exciter field current limit reference

IEEE Type (AC3)
A
A
sT
K
+ 1
E
sT
1
V
ref
V
t
Efd
+
-
-
F
sT
s
+ 1
VA
max
VA
min
E E
K S +
-
B
C
sT
sT
+
+
1
1
+
+
( ) IN f F
EX
=
I
fd
D
K
V
E
E
fd
C
V
I
K IN =
IN
0
R
sT + 1
1
HV
GATE
R
K
( )
fd N
E g V =
+
V
N
LV
K

+
V
LV

IEEE Type AC3 - Field-Controlled Alternator-Rectifier Exciter (AC3)

This type of exciter and AVR system represents field-controlled, alternator-rectifier excitation systems. It
can model systems that derive voltage regulator power from the exciter output voltage and simulate their
non-linearity.

An example of this model is General Electric ALTERREX excitation system using static voltage
regulators.
IEEE Type (AC3)


EFDN Value of Efd at which feedback gain changes p.u.
VAmax Maximum regulator internal voltage p.u.
VAmin Minimum regulator internal voltage p.u.
VLV Exciter low voltage limit reference p.u.
KLV Gain of the exciter low voltage limit signal p.u.
IEEE Type (AC3)

KN Exciter control system stabilizer gain p.u.
KR Constant for regulator and alternator field power supply p.u.
IEEE Type (AC4)

IEEE Type AC4 - High-Initial-Response Alternator-Supplied Controlled Rectifier Exciter (AC4)

This type of exciter and AVR system represents alternator-supplied, controlled-rectifier excitation
systems. A high-initial response excitation system, it has a Thyristor bridge at the output circuit.

General Electric ALTHYREX and Rotating Thyristor excitation systems are examples of this type of
exciter.

IEEE Type (AC4)

VImax The value of excitation function at Efdmax p.u.
VImin The value of excitation function at 0.75 Efdmax p.u.

IEEE Type (AC5A)
19.4.15 IEEE Type AC5A

IEEE Type AC5A - Simplified Rotating Rectifier Excitation System (AC5A)

This type of exciter and AVR system is a simplified model for brushless excitation systems. The
regulator is supplied from a source, such as a permanent magnet generator, which is not affected by
system disturbances.

This model can be used to represent small excitation systems such as those produced by Basler and
Electric Machinery.

19-52

IEEE Type (AC5A)

TA1 Voltage regulator time constant Sec.
TF1 Exciter control system time constant Sec.

Basler SR8F & SR125A (SR8F)
19.4.16 Basler SR8F & SR125A

Basler SR8F & SR125A Excitation System (SR8F)

This type of exciter and AVR system is used to represent Basler SR8F and SR125A exciter systems.

Basler SR8F & SR125A (SR8F)

TF1 Regulator stabilizing circuit time constant Sec.
TF2 Regulator stabilizing circuit time constant (Rot. Rec.) Sec.

HPC 840 (HPC)
19.4.17 HPC 840

HPC 840 Excitation and AVR System (HPC)

This type of exciter and AVR system includes both forward gain and feedback damping loops. There are
three compensation signals to regulate excitation voltages. These signals are terminal voltage magnitude,
real power generation, and reactive power generation.
HPC 840 (HPC)


Amax Regulator internal maximum limit (Amax = VImax * Ka) p.u.
Amin Regulator internal minimum limit (Amin = VImin * Ka) p.u.
Bmax Integrator upper limit (Bmax = LIMmax * Ka) p.u.
Bmin Integrator lower limit (Bmin = LIMmin * Ka) p.u.
C Combined excitation system (C = Kg * kp * Ka) p.u.
D Combined stabilizing feedback gain (d = Kd * Kf/Kp) p.u.
Efdmax Maximum Exciter output voltage p.u.
Kpow Active power compensation factor p.u.
KQ Reactive power compensation factor p.u.
SE .75 Value of excitation saturation function at 0.75 Efdmax
SEmax Value of excitation saturation function at Efdmax
TL Integration time constant Sec.
T4 Excitation system total delay Sec.
TD Stabilizing feedback time constant Sec.
HPC 840 (HPC)
Tdsty Voltage transducer filter time constant Sec.
TP Active power compensation time constant Sec.
TQ Reactive power compensation time constant Sec.
Control Bus Voltage feedback bus ID
JEUMONT Industrie (JEUM)
19.4.18 JEUMONT Industrie

JEUMONT - JEUMONT Industrie (JEUM)

This type of exciter and AVR system consists of a voltage block, a current block, a voltage regulator
block, and an excitation block. It uses a rotating rectifier for excitation system.


AV1 Gain of voltage control loop
AV2 Constant of voltage control loop Sec.
AV3 Constant of voltage control loop Sec.
AV5 Gain of reference voltage
AV7 Time constant of voltage control loop Sec.
AV11 Parameter of voltage control loop
Ai1 Gain of current control loop

Ai2 Gain of supply voltage to current control loop
Ai7 Time constant of current control loop Sec.
AR1 Gain of regulator
AR2 Regulator reference
KU1 Gain of terminal voltage feedback V
KU2 Gain of regulator
Vres Supply voltage of thy-bridge V
VSUP Supply voltage of current control loop V
Te Time constant of exciter loop Sec.
Ke Gain of exciter loop
S
Emax
Saturation coefficient at maximum field voltage
S
E.75max
Saturation coefficient at 0.75 maximum field voltage
E
fdmax
Maximum field voltage V
Kae Gain of field current feedback loop
Kif Gain of field current feedback V
Max1 Maximum value 1 of voltage control loop V
Min1 Minimum value 1 of voltage control loop V
Max4 Maximum value 4 of current control loop V
Min4 Minimum value 4 of current control loop V
Control Bus Voltage feedback bus ID

19.4.19 IEEE Type ST1D

IEEE Type ST1D- Static System with Terminal Potential and Current Supplies (ST1D)

This type of exciter and AVR system is used for compound source rectifier excitation systems with volts-
per-hertz limiter. These systems use both current and voltage sources.


R
C
Resistive part of reactive droop compensation p.u.
X
C
Inductive part of reactive droop compensation p.u.
T
R
Transducer time constant Sec.
T
C
Transient gain reduction lead time constant Sec.
T
B
Transient gain reduction lag time constant Sec.
K
A
Amplifier gain p.u.
T
A
Amplifier time constant Sec.
K
F
Stabilizing feedback signal gain p.u.
T
F
Stabilizing feedback signal time constant Sec.
K
C
Field current gain p.u.
V
VLR
Set point of V/Hz limiter p.u.
K
VL
Over-excitation feedback signal gain p.u.
T
VL
Over-excitation feedback signal time constant Sec.

K
VF
Stabilizing feedback signal gain p.u.
T
H
Measurement time constant Sec.
VI
max
Maximum error limit p.u.
VI
min
Minimum error limit p.u.
VR
max
Maximum regular output p.u.
VR
min
Minimum regular output p.u.
Vdc Field flashing battery voltage Volts
Rf Field flashing battery and external circuit resistance Ohms
Vref Voltage reference p.u.
TD Pickup delay time Sec.
VHZ V/Hz pickup value p.u.
Ifb Exciter base current Amps
Vfb Exciter base voltage Volts

IEEE Type (AC8B)
19.4.20 IEEE Type AC8B


IEEE Type (AC8B)

VRmax Maximum value of the regulator output voltage in pu p.u.
VRmin Minimum value of the regulator output voltage in pu p.u.
SEmax Saturation value of exciter at Efdmax p.u.
SE.75 Saturation value of exciter at 0.75 Efdmax p.u.
Efdmax Maximum exciter output voltage in pu p.u.
KP Proportional control gain in pu p.u.
KI Integral control gain in pu p.u.
KD Derivative control gain in pu p.u.
KA Regulator gain in pu p.u.
KE Exciter constant for self-excited field in pu p.u.
TD Derivative control time constant in sec Sec.
TA Regulator amplifier time constant in sec Sec.
TE Exciter time constant in sec Sec.

IEEE Type (AC1A)
19.4.21 IEEE Type AC1A

IEEE Type AC1A Exciter (AC1A)

IEEE Type (AC1A)


VAmax Maximum value of the regulator output voltage in pu p.u.
VAmin Minimum value of the regulator output voltage in pu p.u.
VRmax Maximum regulator internal voltage in pu p.u.
VRmin Minimum regulator internal voltage in pu p.u.
V
UEL
Underexcitation limiter in pu p.u.
V
OEL
Overexcitation limiter in pu p.u.
SEmax Saturation value of exciter at Efdmax in pu p.u.
SE.75 Saturation value of exciter at 0.75 Efdmax in pu p.u.
Efdmax Maximum exciter output voltage in pu p.u.
KA Regulate gain in pu p.u.
IEEE Type (AC1A)

KC Rectifier loading factor in pu p.u.
KD Demagnetizing factor in pu p.u.
KF Regulate stabilizing circuit gain in pu p.u.
KE Exciter gain in pu p.u.
TA Regulator amplifier time constant in sec Sec.
TC Internal signal lead time constant in sec Sec.
TB Internal signal lag time constant in sec Sec.
TE Exciter time constant in sec Sec.
TF Regulate stabilizing time constant in sec Sec.
TR Regulate input filter time in sec Sec.
a

Rectifier regulation characteristic coefficient in pu
1
p.u.
a
2
Rectifier regulation characteristic coefficient in pu p.u.
b
1
b
2
b
3
b
4
b
5
b
6
Rectifier regulation characteristic coefficient in pu
b
7
b
8
b
9
b
10
p.u.

User-defined Dynamic Model (UDM)
19.4.22 User-defined Dynamic Model (UDM)
From the exciter type list, user can access UDM models that have been created and save.

Details on how to use UDM model are described in User-define Dynamic Models chapter.

Dynamic Models Governor-Turbine

19.5 Governor-Turbine
Modeling of governor-turbine system in transient stability studies is essential for simulation time frames
of more than a second.

PowerStation provides the following governor-turbine models:

Steam-Turbine (ST)
Single-Reheat Steam-Turbine (ST1)
Tandem-Compound Single-Reheat Steam-Turbine (ST2)
Tandem-Compound Double-Reheat Steam-Turbine (ST3)
IEEE General Steam-Turbine (STM)
Gas-Turbine (GT)
Gas-Turbine including Fuel System (GTF)
General Purpose (GP)
Diesel-Engine (DT)
Woodward Steam-Turbine 505
Woodward UG-8
Woodward Governor 2301
GE Heavy Duty Governor and Gas Turbine (GTH)
GE Simplified Heavy Duty Governor and Gas Turbine (GTS)
Solar Turbine MARS Governor Set (MARS)
Detroit Diesel DDEC Governor Turbine (DDEC)
GHH BROSIG Steam-Turbine Governor (GHH)
Woodward Hydraulic Governor-turbine (HYDR)
IEEE Gas -Turbine (SGT)
PowerLogic Governor-turbine Model A (PL-A)
Solar Taurus 60 Solonox Gas Fuel Turbine/Governor (ST60)
Solar Taurus 70 Solonox Gas Fuel Turbine/Governor (ST70)
Gas-Turbine and Governor (GT-2)
Gas-Turbine and Governor (GT-3)
Combustion Turbine and Governor (CT251)

For IEEE type governor-turbine systems, the equivalent transfer functions and their parameter names are
in accordance with the IEEE recommended types from the following reference:

IEEE Committee Report, "Dynamic Models for Steam and Hydro Turbines in Power System
Studies", IEEE Transaction on Power Apparatus and System, Vol. PAS-92, No. 6, Nov./Dec. 1973,
pp. 1904-1915.

IEEE Committee Report, "Dynamic Models for Fossil Fueled Steam Units in Power System Studies",
IEEE Transactions on Power Systems, Vol. PS-6, No. 2, May 1991, pp. 753-761.

Steam Turbine (ST)
19.5.1 Steam-Turbine (ST)

ST Governor System Representation (ST)
This type of governor-turbine system represents a simple steam turbine and speed governing system.

Steam Turbine (ST)

Mode Droop or Isoch
Droop Steady-state speed droop %
Fhp (Shaft capacity ahead of reheater)/(Total shaft capacity) p.u.
Pmax Maximum shaft power (rated MW) MW
Pmin Minimum shaft power ( > = 0) MW
Tc Governor reset time constant Sec.
Tch Steam chest time constant Sec.
Trh Reheater time constant Sec.
Tsr Speed relay time constant Sec.

19.5.2 Single-Reheat Steam-Turbine (ST1)

This type of governor-turbine system represents a two-stage steam turbine with reheat and speed
governing system. It consists of a speed relay, a control amplifier, a steam chest, and a reheater.


Mode Droop or Isoch
Pmax Maximum shaft power MW
Pmin Minimum shaft power MW
Tch Steam time constant Sec.
Tdrp Load sensor time constant Sec.
Tsr Speed relay time constant in second Sec.
Compound Single-Reheat Steam (ST2)
19.5.3 Compound Single-Reheat Steam-Turbine (ST2)

Compound Single-Reheat Steam-Turbine (ST2)

This type of governor-turbine system represents a tandem-compound, single-reheat steam turbine, and
speed governing system. It is a type ST1 model with a block representing crossover piping to the low-
pressure turbines.
Compound Single-Reheat Steam (ST2)


Mode Droop or Isoch
Fip Intermediate pressure turbine power fraction p.u.
Flp Low pressure turbine power fraction p.u
Tco Crossover time constant Sec.
Trh Reheater time constant Sec.

Compound Double-Reheat Steam (ST3)
19.5.4 Compound Double-Reheat Steam-Turbine (ST3)

Compound Double-Reheat Steam-Turbine (ST3)
This type of governor-turbine system represents a tandem-compound, double-reheat steam turbine, and
speed governing system. It is similar to type ST2 model except for the added block representing reheated
steam between the very-high pressure and high-pressure turbines.
Compound Double-Reheat Steam (ST3)


Mode Droop or Isoch
Fip Intermediate pressure turbine power fraction p.u.
Flp Low pressure turbine power fraction p.u.
Fvhp Very high pressure turbine power fraction p.u.
Tco Crossover time constant Sec.
Trh1 First reheater time constant Sec.
Trh2 Second reheater time constant Sec.

19.5.5 IEEE General Steam-Turbine (STM)

This type of governor-turbine system represents an IEEE suggested general steam turbine and speed
governing system. It may be used for modeling the steam systems represented by ST, ST1, ST2, and
ST3, as well as the cross-compound, single-reheat and cross-compound, double-reheat systems.


Mode Droop or Isoch
Droop Steady-state speed droop in second %
DB Speed deadband p.u.
K1 Partial very high pressure turbine power fraction p.u.
K2 Partial very high pressure turbine power fraction p.u.
K3 Partial high pressure turbine power fraction p.u.
K4 Partial high pressure turbine power fraction p.u.
K5 Partial intermediate pressure turbine power fraction p.u.
K6 Partial intermediate pressure turbine power fraction p.u.
K7 Partial low pressure turbine power fraction p.u.
K8 Partial low pressure turbine power fraction p.u.
T1 Amplifier / Compensator time constant Sec.


T4 Load sensor (droop) time constant Sec.
T5 Control Amp. / current driver time constant Sec.
T6 Acutator time constant Sec.
T7 Engine dead time constant Sec.
UC Limit of value closing
UO Limit of value opening

Gas Turbine (GT)
19.5.6 Gas-Turbine (GT)

Gas-Turbine (GT)

This type of governor-turbine system represents a simple gas turbine and speed governing system.

Gas Turbine (GT)

Mode Droop or Isoch
Tt Turbine relay time constant Sec.

Gas Turbine including Fuel System (GTF)
19.5.7 Gas-Turbine including Fuel System (GTF)
Gas-Turbine including Fuel System (GTF)
This type of governor-turbine system represents a steam turbine and speed governing system, with the
inclusion of the fuel system.
Gas Turbine including Fuel System (GTF)


Mode Droop or Isoch
Ff Minimum fuel flow
KD Governor gain
Kf Fuel system feedback gain Kf = 0 or 1
Kr Fuel system transfer function gain
T8 Fuel value time constant Sec.
T9 Fuel system lead time constant Sec.
VL Lower incremental power limit p.u.
VU Upper incremental power limit p.u.
19.5.8 General Purpose (GP)

This type of governor-turbine system represents a general purpose governor-turbine system.


Mode Droop or Isoch
Ta Actuator time constant Sec.
Tdrp Load sensor time constant Sec.
Tt Turbine relay time constant Sec.

Diesel-Engine (DT)
19.5.9 Diesel-Engine (DT)

Diesel-Engine (DT)
This type of governor-turbine system represents a simple diesel engine and speed governing system.

Diesel-Engine (DT)

Mode Droop or Isoch

Woodward Steam-Turbine 505 (505)
19.5.10 Woodward Steam-Turbine 505
s
T
e
5 . 1
Speed
Ref
Speed

-
+
Speed Ctrl Loop
1
1
1
1
f
sT
sD
+
+
Pm
L
2
L
1
1
P
+
-
1
1
1
a
sT +
1
+
+
Ratio/
Limiter
1
1
1
m
sT +
EF
L
4
L
3
2
P
-
+
2
1
1
a
sT +
1
+
+
Inverse
Ratio/
Limiter
2
1
1
m
sT +
1 r
D
1
/ 1
1
I s +
2 r
D
2
/ 1
1
I s +
Steam
Map
s
T
e
5 . 1
Ext Pres
Ref
Ext Press

-
+
2
2
1
1
f
sT
sD
+
+
Extraction Ctrl Loop
Extraction Flow
Turbine Shaft HP
LP

Woodward 505 and 505E Steam-Turbine (505)
This type of governor-turbine system represents the Woodward 505 and 505E PID governor for extraction
steam turbine system.


Mode Droop or Isoch
Droop1 Steady-state speed droop %
Droop2 Extraction loop droop %
Efmax Max. extraction flow T/Hr
ExtFlow Turbine extraction flow %
ExtPress Extraction pressure %
Hpa Min. extraction @ max. power T/Hr
HPb Max. extraction @ min. power T/Hr
HPc Min. extraction @ min. power T/Hr
Hpmax Max. HP flow T/Hr
I1 <D> Speed loop integral (Droop mode) %
I1 <I> Speed loop integral gain in (Isoch mode) %
I2 Extraction loop integral gain %
L1 Up limit for speed loop output %
L2 Low limit for speed loop output %
L3 Up limit for extraction loop output %
L4 Low limit for extraction loop output %

P1 <D> Speed loop proportional gain (Droop mode) %
P1 <I> Speed loop proportional gain (Isoch mode) %
P2 Extraction loop proportional gain %
RampRate Speed reference ramp rate %
Sa Max. power @ min. extraction %/Sec.
Sb Min. power @ max. extraction kW
Sc Min. power @ min. extraction kW
SDR1 Speed loop parameter (Droop mode) %
SDR1 <I> Speed loop parameter (Isoch mode) %
SDR2 Extraction loop parameter %
Smax Max. power kW
Ta1 HP valve actuator time constant Sec.
Ta2 LV valve actuator time constant Sec.
Tm1 Turbine time constant (shaft power output) Sec.
Tm2 Turbine time constant (extraction flow) Sec.
TS Controller sample time Sec.

Woodward UG-8 (UG-8)
19.5.11 Woodward UG-8

This type of governor-turbine system represents the Woodward UG-8 governor, used mainly for diesel
generators. This model includes a representation for a ball head filter, amplifier/compensator, and a
diesel engine.


Mode Droop or Isoch
A1 Compensator constant rad/Sec.
Ad Permanent droop constant rpm/in
B1 Ball head filter constant
B2 Ball head filter constant
C1 Governor drive ratio
K1 Partial very high pressure turbine power fraction Deg/in

Woodward 2301 (2301)
19.5.12 Woodward Governor 2301
This type of governor-turbine system represents the Woodward 2301 and 2301A speed governing systems
with a diesel turbine system and load sharing capability.

Woodward Governor 2301A and 2301 (2301)

Load Sharing (MW Sharing)
To share load (MW) between generators, set LS GP# (Load Sharing Group Number) of 2301 governors to
the same group number. Note that in order to use this capability, load sharing governors must be in
isochronous mode.

Mode Droop or Isoch
LS GP# Load sharing group number
max Min. shaft position in degrees Deg
min Max. shaft position in degrees Deg
Gain setting
Reset setting
Actuator compensation setting
K1 Partially very high pressure power fraction Deg/A


Actuator time constant Sec.
T1 Amplifier / compensator time constant Sec.
T2 Amplifier / compensator time constant Sec.
GE Gas Turbine (GTH)
19.5.13 GE Heavy Duty Governor - Gas Turbine (GTH)
This type of governor-turbine system represents the GE heavy-duty gas turbine speed governing system.

GE Heavy Duty Governor and Gas Turbine (GTH)


Mode Droop or Isoch
Max Fuel upper limit (VCE' upper limit) p.u.
Min Fuel lower limit (VCE' lower limit) p.u.
Term.Ctrl Flag to include temperature control loop p.u.
Acc.Ctrl Flag to include acceleration control loop p.u.
X Governor transfer function coefficient p.u.
Y Governor transfer function coefficient p.u.
Z Governor transfer function coefficient p.u.
a Fuel system transfer function coefficient p.u.
b Fuel system transfer function coefficient p.u.
c Fuel system transfer function coefficient p.u.
Kf Fuel system feedback gain, Kf = 0 or 1 p.u.


Tf Fuel system time constant Sec.
Tcr Combustion reaction time delay Sec.
Tcd Compressor discharge volume time constant Sec.
Ttd Turbine & exhaust system transportation delay Sec.
T Transportation delay Sec.
Tt Temperature controller integration rate Sec.
Tr Turbine rated exhaust temperature Deg.F
t
1
Tr - 700 (1 - W
F
) + 550 (1 -N) in English units
Tr - 390 (1 - W
F
) + 306 (1 -N) in Metric units

t
2
1.3 (W
F
- 0.23) + 0.5 (1 -N)
GE Gas Turbine (GTS)
19.5.14 GE Simplified Heavy Duty Governor - Gas Turbine (GTS)
This type of governor-turbine system represents the GE simplified single shaft gas turbine speed
governing system.

GE Simplified Heavy Duty Governor and Gas Turbine (GTS)
GE Gas Turbine (GTS)


Mode Droop or Isoch p.u.
Droop Steady-state speed droop p.u.
Max Fuel upper limit p.u.
Min Fuel lower limit p.u.
X Governor transfer function coefficient p.u.
Y Governor transfer function coefficient p.u.
Z Governor transfer function coefficient p.u.
A Fuel system transfer function coefficient p.u.
B Fuel system transfer function coefficient p.u.
C Fuel system transfer function coefficient p.u.
D Fuel system transfer function coefficient p.u.
R Fast load pickup operating zone limit p.u.
S Fast load pickup operating zone limit p.u.
T Fast load pickup operating zone limit p.u.
19.5.15 Solar Turbine MARS Governor Set (MARS)
This type of governor-turbine system represents the Solar Turbine MARS governor set for gas turbine and
speed governing systems.



Mode
Droop Speed droop %
MaxGov Governor maximum at no load p.u.
MinGov Governor minimum at no load p.u.
Max2
Maximum mechanical power p.u.
Min2
Minimum mechanical power p.u.
Max3
Maximum gas producer
p.u.
Min3
Minimum gas producer
p.u.
Maxo
Maximum overspeed control
p.u.
Mino
Minimum overspend control
p.u.
Wover Over speed reference p.u.
Tref Temprature reference p.u.
Ks
Speed control gain
p.u.
Kt
Temperature control gain
p.u.
Ko
Overspeed control gain
p.u.
Ku
Loader delta maximum fuel
p.u.
Kl
Loader delta minimum fuel
p.u.
T1
Governor reset time
Sec.
T2
Combustor time constant
Sec.
T3
Gas producer time constant
Sec.
T4 Controller delay time constant Sec.
T5
Speed Lead/Lag lead time constant
Sec.
T6
Speed Lead/Lag lag time constant
Sec.
T7
Thermocouple time constant
Sec.
T8 Controller delay time constant Sec.
Th1 Controller recursion time constant Sec.
Th2 Controller recursion time constant Sec.

Detroit Diesel (DDEC)
19.5.16 Detroit Diesel DDEC Governor Turbine (DDEC)
This type of governor-turbine system represents the Detroit Diesel turbine with DDEC controller and the
Woodward DSLC unit system.

Detroit Diesel DDEC Governor Turbine (DDEC)

Detroit Diesel (DDEC)

Mode Droop or Isoch
PMmax Maximum shaft power (rated MW) MW
PMmin Minimum shaft power (>=0) MW
K1 PL control gain p.u.
K2 Lead/Lag controller gain p.u.
R1 PL control constant p.u.
Ts Load share system time constant Sec.
T1 PTO filter time constant Sec.
T2 Filter and Delay time constant Sec.
T3 Filter time constant Sec.

GHH BROSIG Steam Turbine Governor (GHH)
19.5.17 GHH BROSIG Steam Turbine Governor (GHH)
This type of governor-turbine system represents the GHH BROSIG steam turbine governor system.

GHH BROSIG Steam Turbine Governor System (GHH)


KP1
Generator load control gain

KP2
Extraction 1 control gain

KP3
Extraction 2 control gain

KP4
Speed control gain

GL
Low pressure steam valve control gain

GM
Medium pressure steam valve control gain

GH
High pressure steam valve control gain

Tn1
Time constant of generator load control
Sec.
Tn2
Time constant of extraction 1 control
Sec.
Tn3
Time constant of extraction 2 control
Sec.
Tn5
Time constant of medium pressure steam valve control
Sec.
Tn6
Time constant of low pressure steam valve control
Sec.
TL
Time constant of low pressure steam valve control loop
Sec.
TM
Time constant of medium pressure steam valve control loop
Sec.
TH
Time constant of high pressure steam valve control loop
Sec.
HP
Extraction 1 pressure
bar
MP
Extraction 2 pressure
bar

VLmax
Maximum value of low pressure valve control signal
mm/Sec.
VLmin
Minimum value of low pressure valve control signal
mm/Sec.
VMmax
Maximum value of medium pressure valve control signal
mm/Sec.
VMmin
Minimum value of medium pressure valve control signal
mm/Sec.
VHmax
Maximum value of high pressure valve control signal
mm/Sec.
VHmin
Minimum value of high pressure valve control signal
mm/Sec.
PLmax
Maximum value of low pressure valve position
mm
PLmin
Minimum value of low pressure valve position
mm
PMmax
Maximum value of medium pressure valve position
mm
PMmin
Minimum value of medium pressure valve position
mm
PHmax
Maximum value of high pressure valve position
mm
PHmin
Minimum value of high pressure valve position
mm
Pa
Power output value at point A of steam map
MW
Pb
Power output value at point B of steam map
MW
Pc
Power output value at point C of steam map
MW
Pd
Power output value at point D of steam map
MW
Pe
Power output value at point E of steam map
MW
Pf
Power output value at point F of steam map
MW
LFa
Maximum value of live steam flow
t/h
LFc
Live steam flow value at point C of steam map
t/h
LFd
Minimum value of live steam flow
t/h
EX2f
Extraction 2 steam value at point F of steam map
t/h
LFv1
Valve position value at point 1 of live steam flow characteristics
mm
LFv2
mm
LFv3
mm
LF1
Flow value at point 1 of live steam flow characteristics
t/h
LF2
t/h
LF3
t/h
KFM0
Exponential coefficient of medium pressure steam flow characteristics
1/mm
FM0
Minimum flow value of medium pressure steam flow characteristics
t/h
FM1
Coefficient of medium pressure steam flow characteristics
t/h
KFL0
Exponential coefficient of low pressure steam flow characteristics
1/mm
FL0
Minimum flow value of low pressure steam flow characteristics
t/h
FL1
Coefficient of low pressure steam flow characteristics
t/h
m1
Valve control parameter

m2

m3

e1

e2

Esf1
Initial extraction 1 steam flow
t/h
Esf2
Initia2
Initial extraction2 steam flow
t/h
Woodward Hydraulic (HYDR)
19.5.18 Woodward Hydraulic Governor-turbine (HYDR)
This type of governor-turbine system represents the Woodward hydraulic governing systems.

Woodward Hydraulic Governor-turbine (HYDR)


VO Gate opening speed p.u.
VC1 Gate closing speed inside of the buffer zone p.u.
VC2 Gate closing speed outside of the buffer zone p.u.
GMAX1 Max gate position (RPM>RPM2) p.u.
GMAX2 Max gate position.(RPM<RPM2) p.u
GMIN Min gate position p.u.
Q Servo gain p.u.
RP Permanent droop p.u.
RT Temporary droop p.u.
TP Pilot and servo motor time constant p.u.
TG Main servo time constant p.u.
TR Dashpot time constant p.u.
Zt Surge impedance of tunnel p.u.
Zp1 Surge impedance of penstock p.u.
ft Head loss coefficient of tunnel p.u.
fp1 Head loss coefficient of penstock p.u.
Tt Travel time constant of tunnel in p.u.

Tp1 Travel time constant of penstock p.u.
At1 Proportionality factor p.u.
QNL No load flow in first unit p.u.
Q2 Flow rate in second unit p.u.
Wref Speed reference p.u.
Href Head reference p.u.
GC Gate conversion factor p.u.
Damp Damping coefficient p.u.
RPM1 Gate limit speed set point 1 p.u.
GBUFF Buffer zone gate limit p.u.
m Partial shutdown gate position coefficient p.u.
B Partial shutdown gate position coefficient p.u.

IEEE Gas-Turbine (SGT)
19.5.19 IEEE Gas-Turbine (SGT)
This type of governor-turbine system represents the IEEE gas-turbine governing systems.



Pref Load reference p.u.
Pmax Maximum power limit p.u.
Pmin Minimum power limit p.u.
K1 Gain 1 p.u.
K2 Gain 2 p.u
K3 Gain 3 p.u.
T1 Governor time constant 1 Sec.
T2 Governor time constant 2 Sec
T3 Governor time constant 3 Sec.
T4 Turbine time constant 1 Sec.
TR Load setting time constant Sec.

PowerLogic Model A (PL-A)
19.5.20 PowerLogic Governor-turbine Model A (PL-A)
This type of governor-turbine system represents the Siemens Westinghouse PowerLogic model A
governing systems.

PowerLogic Turbine/Governor Model A (PL-A)


Model Liquid fuel or Gas fuel
Plimit Turbine base load p.u.
TP Load transducer time constant Sec.
TL Filter time constant in sec Sec.
TQ Speed transducer time constant Sec.
TLD Lead time constant Sec.
TLG Leg time constant Sec.
TA Speed/load controller time constant Sec.
TC Speed/load controller time constant Sec.
TD Current to pneumatic pressure transmitter time constant Sec.
TV Valve servo time constant Sec.
TPL Liquid piping time constant Sec.
TPG Gas piping time constant Sec.
TC1 Combustion time constant Sec.
TC2 Combustion time constant Sec.
TX1 Temperature controller time constant Sec.

KL Speed droop p.u.
KI Speed/load controller gain p.u.
KA Temperature controller gain V/F
KC Temperature controller gain V/V
KT Temperature controller gain V/BTU/Sec
DL Decel limiter p.u.
JRL1 Jump rate limiter1 %/Sec
JRL2 Instantaneous jump rate limiter1 %/Sec
TFLD Loading time from no-load to full load min
Tref Temperature reference p.u./100
GovBase Governor base MW

Solar Taurus 60 Solonox Gas Fuel (ST60)
19.5.21 Solar Taurus 60 Solonox Gas Fuel Turbine-Governor (ST60)
This type of governor-turbine system represents the Solar Taurus 60 Solonox Gas Fuel systems

Solar Taurus 60 Solonox Gas Fuel Governor-Turbine system


Mode
T
1
Controller delay time constant Sec.
T
2
Speed compensator lead time constant Sec.
T
3
Speed compensator lag time constant Sec.
T
4
Governor reset time constant Sec.
T
5
Combustor time constant Sec.
T
6
T
7
Thermocouple time constant Sec.
T
8
Gas producer time constant Sec.
T
h1
Controller recursion time constant Sec.
T
h2
K
S
Speed control gain p.u.
K
T
Temperature control gain p.u.
K
max
Loader delta maximum fuel gain p.u.
K
min
Loader delta minimum fuel gain p.u.
Min
GOV
Governor minimum at no load p.u.
P
max
P
min
G
max1
Maximum gas producer p.u.
G
min1
Minimum gas producer p.u.
G
max2
Maximum fuel p.u.
G
min2
Minimum fuel p.u.
P
solo
Solonox control threshold p.u.
R Speed droop p.u.
T
ref
Temperature reference p.u.

19.5.22 Solar Taurus 70 Solonox Gas Fuel Turbine-Governor (ST70)
This type of governor-turbine system represents the Solar Taurus 70 Solonox Gas Fuel systems

Solar Taurus 70 Solonox Gas Fuel Governor-Turbine system



Mode
T
1
T
2
Speed compensator lead time constant Sec.
T
3
Speed compensator lag time constant Sec.
T
4
Governor reset time constant Sec.
T
5
Combustor time constant Sec.
T
6
T
7
Thermocouple time constant Sec.
T
8
Gas producer time constant Sec.
G
p
Gas producer constant Sec.
T
h1
T
h2
K
S
Speed control gain p.u.
K
T
Temperature control gain p.u.
P
max
P
min
G
max1
Maximum gas producer p.u.
G
min1
Minimum gas producer p.u.
R Speed droop p.u.
T
ref
Temperature reference p.u.

Gas-Turbine (GT-2)
19.5.23 Gas-Turbine and Governor (GT-2)
This type of governor-turbine system represents gas turbine with windup limits.

Gas-Turbine and Governor system (GT-2)

Gas-Turbine (GT-2)

Plimt Ambient temperature load limit p.u.
Vmax Maximum fuel valve opening p.u.
Vmin Minimum fuel valve opening p.u.
Base Governor base MW
R Speed droop p.u.
TR Load sensing time constant sec
T1 Governor time constant sec
T2 Combustion-chamber time constant sec
T3 Turbine thermal time constant sec
KT Load limit thermal sensitivity gain p.u.

Gas-Turbine (GT3)
19.5.24 Gas-Turbine and Governor (GT3)
This type of governor-turbine system represents gas turbine with non-windup limits.

Gas-Turbine and Governor-Turbine system (GT3)

Gas-Turbine (GT3)


Parameter Description Unit
Plimt Ambient temperature load limit p.u.
Vmax Maximum fuel valve opening p.u.
Vmin Minimum fuel valve opening p.u.
Base Governor base MW
R Speed droop p.u.
T1 Governor time constant sec
T2 Combustion-chamber time constant sec
T3 Turbine thermal time constant sec
KT Load limit thermal sensitivity gain p.u.

Combustion Turbine (CT251)
19.5.25 Combustion Turbine-Governor (CT251)
This type of governor-turbine system represents a combustion turbine-governor.

Combustion Turbine and Governor system (CT251)

Combustion Turbine (CT251)

R Speed droop p.u.
T1 PID Integral time constant sec
TV Throttle valve time constant sec
TE Piping combustion time constant sec
K1 PID input scaling factor sec
K2 PID output scaling factor p.u.
PID proportional gain p.u. KP

User Definded Dynamic Model (UDM)
19.5.26 User-Defined Dynamic Model (UDM)
From the governor type list, user can access UDM models that have been created and save.

Details on how to use UDM model are described in User-define Dynamic Models chapter.
Dynamic Models Power System Stabilizer (PSS)

19.6 Power System Stabilizer (PSS)
Power system stabilizer (PSS) is an auxiliary device installed on synchronous generator and tuned to help
with system stability.

PowerStation provides two standard IEEE type models:


Reference for these two types of PSS is from:

IEEE Std. 412.5-1992, IEEE Recommended Practice for Excitation System Models for Power
System Stability Studies, IEEE Power Engineering Society, 1992

IEEE Type (PSS1A)
19.6.1 IEEE Type 1 PSS (PSS1A)

IEEE Type (PSS1A)


VSI PSS input (speed, power or frequency deviation) in pu p.u.
KS PSS gain p.u.
VSTmax Maximum PSS output p.u.
VSTmin Minimum PSS output p.u.
Vtmin Terminal undervoltage comparison level p.u.
TDR Reset time delay for discontinuous controller sec
A1 PSS signal conditioning frequency filter constant p.u.
A2 PSS signal conditioning frequency filter constant p.u.
T1 PSS lead compensation time constant sec
T2 PSS leg compensation time constant sec
T5 PSS washout time constant sec
T6 PSS washout time constant sec

19.6.2 IEEE Type 2 PSS (PSS2A)


Dynamic Models Power System Stabilizer
IEEE Type 2 PSS (PSS2A))

Dynamic Models Power System Stabilizer
IEEE Type 2 PSS (PSS2A))

VSI1 PSS first input (speed, power or frequency deviation) p.u.
VSI2 PSS second input (speed, power or frequency deviation) p.u.
KS1 PSS gain p.u.
KS2 PSS gain p.u.
KS3 PSS gain p.u.
VSTmax Maximum PSS output p.u.
VSTmin Minimum PSS output p.u.
VTmin Terminal undervoltage comparison level p.u.
TDR Reset time delay for discontinuous controller sec
Tw1 PSS washout time constant sec
N Integer filter constant
M Integer filter constant
T5 PSS transducer time constant sec
T6 PSS transducer time constant sec
T7 PSS filter time constant sec
T8 PSS filter time constant sec

Dynamic Models Mechanical Load

19.7 Mechanical Load
For accelerating motors in motor starting studies and dynamically modeled motors in transient stability
studies, the connecting mechanical loads should be modeled for the calculation to determine the motors
acceleration and deceleration characteristics. Mechanical loads are modeled based on load torque curves
as shown in the following screen capture:

A load curve is expressed by a third order generic polynomial equation:

T=A
0
+A
1
+
2

2
+
3

3

where

T = Load torque in percent of the rated torque of the driving motor
= Per unit speed of the load ( = m/s)
A0, A1, A2, A3 = Coefficients

PowerStation provides a number of the most common load models for you to choose from. New load
torque curves can be added to the PowerStation Motor Load Library and are then accessible from the
Start Dev pages in the Induction Machine and Synchronous Motor Editors.

ETAP

PowerStation
4.0
User Guide
Copyright 2001
All Rights Reserved





Southern California

(949) 462-0100 Sales
(949) 462-0400 Fax


Chapter 20

User-Defined Dynamic Models (UDM)

The PowerStation User-Defined Dynamic Models (UDM) program is an interpreter tool which links user-
defined governor, exciter, and Power System Stabilizer (PSS) models for synchronous generators and
exciter models for synchronous motors. PowerStation compiles these dynamic models when conducting
transient stability studies at run time. The UDM control blocks can be created using the Matlab
Simulink
interface tool.

PowerStation includes a number of internally modeled turbine/governor, exciter/AVR, and PSS block
diagrams such as IEEE types and manufacturer specified models. The UDM program is needed in cases
when a specific model is not represented internally in PowerStation.

Using Simulink, Create UDM Template File
Create a custom dynamic model (block diagram / transfer function).
Save the model in a specific directory in PowerStation, this is called a UDM Template file.

From PowerStation Editors, Create UDM Equation File
Select the UDM Template Model (governor, exciter, or PSS) for any synchronous generator.
Select the UDM Template Model (exciter) for any synchronous motor.
Press the Compile button to create the UDM Equation file, which is specific for that machine.
PowerStation gives you options to map input and output variable names as well as test the model.

From PowerStation Transient Stability Mode, Run Studies
Run transient stability studies and the UDM models will be automatically used.

User-Defined Dynamic Models Create UDM

20.1 UDM Template File
Open the Simulink Editor and build your control block diagram, such as governor, exciter, or PSS model,
using the applicable block components provided by Simulink
. When you save the control block diagram

as XYZ, Simulink
will automatically generate a scripting file XYZ.mdl, which we refer to as the

UDM Template file. This implies that you can use this Template file for any applicable machines in
multiple PowerStation project files.
20.1.1 Create Template File Using Simulink
Some rules and requirements on creating UDM Template files are applied to the current version of ETAP
PowerStation and are specified below.

The blocks and components of Simulink
, which are recognized by ETAP PowerStation application

are as following:

The maximum order of a transfer function (Transfer Fcn) block is a third order function.
The function types that can be used in an Fcn block consists of: sin, cos, tan, atan, abs, exp, sqrt,
and log.


The input/output variable names you specify for your block diagrams in Simulink
can be specified
arbitrary and then mapped to PowerStation input/output variable names using the System Variable
Selection Editor (Section 20.4). However, to simplify your work, we recommend using the following
key words for the input/output variable names. The appropriate key words reserved for PowerStation
UDM Turbine/Governor, Exciter/AVR, and PSS models, are given in the following tables.

Turbine/Governor Model
Key Word Description
Pe Generator Real Electrical Power
Input
W Generator Speed

Output Pm Turbine Output Mechanical Power

Exciter/AVR Models
Vt Machine Terminal Voltage
CVt Machine Terminal Voltage in complex form
It Machine Terminal Current
CIt Machine Terminal Current in complex form
Pe Machine Real Power
Qe Machine Reactive Power
Vs PSS Signal
Input
Ifd Machine Field Current

Output Efd Exciter Output Voltage

PSS Model
Vt Generator Terminal Voltage
W Shaft Speed
f Generator Terminal Voltage Frequency
Pe Generator Real Power
Pm Generator Mechanical Power
Input
Ang Generator Rotor Angle

Output Vs PSS Output Signal


Some examples of block diagrams showing the input and output variables for turbine/governor,
exciter/AVR, and PSS models are shown below.


20.1.2 Saving UDM Template File
The control block diagram file (XYZ.mdl) created by Simulink
must be saved under the following

folders:

Governor Models ETAPS\PowerStation\Udm\Gov
Exciter Models ETAPS\PowerStation\Udm\Exc
PSS Models ETAPS\PowerStation\Udm\Pss

The following figure shows two UDM exciter models saved in the directory in which the PowerStation
program is installed. These two models can then be selected from the Exciter page of synchronous
generators and motors.

User-Defined Dynamic Models Select UDM

20.2 Select UDM Models
Once an UDM Template file is created and saved in the applicable folder, PowerStation will
automatically add it in the list box of Governor, Exciter, or PSS models for synchronous machines. You
can select the desired UDM Template file in the Exciter, Governor, or PSS page of synchronous machine
editors. Note that the same Template file can be used for multiple machines in multiple PowerStation
project files. The Compile UDM button becomes active once you select a UDM Template file.
20.2.1 UDM Models for Synchronous Generator Exciter/AVR
The following figure shows how to select an Exciter UDM Template file for a synchronous generator.


20.2.2 UDM Models for Synchronous Generator Turbine/ Governor
The following figure shows how to select a Governor UDM Template files for a synchronous generator.


20.2.3 UDM Models for Synchronous Generator PSS
The following figure shows how to select a PSS UDM Template file for a synchronous generator.


20.2.4 UDM Models for Synchronous Motor Exciter/AVR
The following figure shows how to select an Exciter UDM Template file for a synchronous motor.

User-Defined Dynamic Models UDM Compiler Editor

20.3 Compile UDM Equation File
After you select a UDM Template file from an Editor, click on the Compile UDM button to create a
compiled equation file for the selected machine and UDM model. This compiled equation file is
automatically linked to this machine and will be used from now on whenever you run the transient
stability studies.

When you click the Compile UDM button, the UDM Compiler dialogue box will show up. This
Compiler dialogue box provides three functions for you to specify the initial condition parameters,
compile the UDM script file to the equation file, and the test equation file.
20.3.1 UDM Compiler

User-Defined Dynamic Model
Type
This indicates the model type (Governor, Exciter, or PSS) that the UDM Template file represents.
Element
This indicates the ID of the machine that the UDM Template file will be compiled to an Equation file.
User-Defined Dynamic Models UDM Compiler Editor

UDM Template File
This indicates the name and the path of the UDM Template file (script file created by Simulink
).

Compile UDM Template File to Equation File
Here you can complete the Equation file and change the Advanced Setting.
Advanced Setting
In this Advanced Setting Editor you can specify the initial condition parameters: Max, Iteration,
Precision, and Increment Step. These parameter settings will affect the convergence of initialization
calculation.

Max. Iteration
This parameter defines the maximum iteration of initialization calculation. The default value is 2000. It
is recommended that you do not change this parameter in most cases.
Precision
This parameter defines the precision in per unit for the convergence of initialization calculation. The
default value is 0.0001. It is recommended that you do not change this parameter in most cases.
Increment Step
This parameter defines the increment step for the convergence of initialization calculation. The default
value is 0.0035. It is recommended that you do not change this parameter in most cases.
Compile
Click this button to convert the UDM Template file to UDM Equation file that will be used by
PowerStation.
UDM Equation File
This indicates UDM Equation file name and path.
Test Model
Click this button to test the UDM Equation file with different test modes in a stand-alone mode.

User-Defined Dynamic Models System Variable Selection Editor

20.4 System Variable Name Mapping
When you click on the Compile button, the Variable Name Mapping Editor will show up. This editor
consists of Governor, Exciter, and PSS editor pages, which are provided for you to select the appropriate
system input, output, and reference variable names represented by block names in model block diagram.

This editor allows you to map the variable names of the input, output, and reference of the Template file
to the keyword that are used by PowerStation. If the correct key words (as explained in previous
sections) are used in model block diagram (Template file), the proper variable names corresponding to
PowerStation key words are automatically picked up in the selection list box, otherwise it shows None.
Click the OK button in an editor page to carry out the compiling processing. Once the compiling is
successfully completed, the UDM Template file is converted to an UDM Equation file with the name and
format as UDM_GENID_XYZ.bin, where GENID is the ID of the machine and XYZ is the name of the
Template file. This Equation file is saved under the same folder where project file resides.
20.4.1 Governor Page
The following displays the variable names of the input, output, and reference variables for governors.


System Input
Speed (W)
Select to map the variable name of the governor input speed to the PowerStation key word (W). Speed is
in per unit of the generator synchronous speed.

Elec Power (Pe)
Select to map the variable name of the governor input electrical power to the PowerStation key word (Pe).
This is the generator real electrical power in per unit of the generator MW.
System Output

Mech Power (Pm)
Select to map the variable name of the governor output power to the PowerStation key word (W).
This is the generator output mechanical power in per unit of the generator MW.

System Reference

Speed Ref (Wref)
Select to map the variable name of the speed reference to the PowerStation key word (Wref). This is the
governor speed reference in per unit of the generator synchronous speed.

Power Ref (Pref)
Select to map the variable name of the power reference to the PowerStation key word (Pref). This is the
governor power reference in per unit of the generator MW.

Temp Ref (Tref)
Select to map the variable name of the temperature reference to the PowerStation key word (Tref). This
is the governor temperature reference in per unit of the governor base.

20.4.2 Exciter Page
The following displays the exciter system variable selection page and describes the exciter input, output,
and reference variables.

System Input
Terminal Voltage (Vt)
Select to map the variable name of the exciter input terminal voltage to the PowerStation key word (Vt).
This is the machine terminal voltage magnitude in per unit of the nominal machine terminal bus voltage.
Terminal Current (It)
Select to map the variable name of the exciter input terminal current to the PowerStation key word (It).
This is the machine terminal current magnitude in per unit of the rated machine current.
Complex Terminal Voltage (CVt)
Select to map the variable name of the exciter input complex terminal voltage to the PowerStation key
word (CVt). This is the complex machine terminal voltage in per unit of the nominal machine terminal
bus voltage.

Complex Terminal Current (CIt)
Select to map the variable name of the exciter input complex terminal current to the PowerStation key
word (CIt). This is the complex machine terminal current in per unit of the rated machine current.
Real Power (Pe)
Select to map the variable name of the exciter input real electrical power to the PowerStation key word
(Pe). This is the machine real electrical power in per unit of the machine MVA.
Reactive Power (Qe)
Select to map the variable name of the exciter input reactive power to the PowerStation key word (Qe).
This is the machine reactive power in per unit of the machine MVA.
PSS Signal (Vs)
Select to map the variable name of the exciter input PSS signal to the PowerStation key word (Vs). This
is the PSS output signal in per unit of nominal machine terminal bus voltage.
Field Current (Ifd)
Select to map the variable name of the exciter input field winding current to the PowerStation key word
(Ifd). This is the machine field winding current in per unit of machine base.
System Output
Field Voltage (Efd)
Select to map the variable name of the exciter output voltage to the PowerStation key word (Efd). This is
the machine exciter output voltage in per unit of the nominal machine terminal bus voltage.
System Reference
Voltage Ref (Vref)
Select to map the variable name of the voltage reference to the PowerStation key word (Vref). This is
exciter voltage reference in per unit of the nominal machine terminal bus voltage.

20.4.3 PSS Page
The following displays the PSS system variable selection page and describes the PSS input and output
variables.

System Input
Shaft Speed (W)
Select to map the variable name of the PSS input shaft speed to the PowerStation key word (W). This is
generator shaft speed increment in per unit of the generator synchronous speed.
Voltage Frequency (f)
Select to map the variable name of the PSS input voltage frequency to the PowerStation key word (f).
This is the generator terminal voltage frequency increment in per unit of the nominal system frequency.
Real Power (Pe)
Select to map the variable name of the PSS input real power to the PowerStation key word (Pe). This is
the generator real electrical power increment in per unit of the machine MVA.
Rotor Angle (Ang)
Select to map the variable name of the PSS input rotor angle to the PowerStation key word (Ang). This is
the generator rotor angle increment in radius.

Mech Power (Pm)
Select to map the variable name of the PSS input mechanical power to the PowerStation key word (Pm).
This is the generator mechanical power increment in per unit of the generator MVA.
Select to map the variable name of the PSS input terminal voltage to the PowerStation key word (Vt).
This is the generator terminal voltage magnitude increment in per unit of the nominal machine terminal
bus voltage.
System Output
PSS Signal (Vs)
Select to map the variable name of the PSS output signal to the PowerStation key word (Vs). This is the
PSS output signal in per unit of nominal machine terminal bus voltage.

User-Defined Dynamic Models Test Model Editor

20.5 Test Model
The UDM program also allows you to do a standard-alone test for your UDM equation files. Depending
on the model type you have selected, click the Test Model button, and a Test Model Editor, like the
Governor Test Model Editor, the Exciter Test Model Editor, or the PSS Test Model Editor, will show up.
This editor is provided for you to specify the appropriate system input variable values and the test type as
Load Shedding, Load Acceptance, and Fault Bus on a simple power system. The test power system
consists of a single generator connected to a single load via a transmission line as shown below. The
parameters of the power system are built in the program.

20.5.1 Governor Model Test
The following displays the governor model test editor and describes the test input/output values,
simulation time, and test types.

Vt
Governor
Exciter
Generator
Z
L

System Input (pu)
Speed (W)
This parameter defines the generator speed in per unit. The default value is 1.0.
Elec Power (Pe)
This parameter defines the generator real electrical power in per unit. The default value is 1.0 for testing
load shed and fault bus, and 0.5 for testing load acceptance.
Simulation Time
Time Step (sec)
This parameter defines the simulation time step in seconds. The default value is 0.005.
Total Time (sec)
This parameter defines the total simulation time in seconds. The default value is 40.0.
System Output (pu)
Mech Power (Pm)
This field displays the governor output mechanical power in per unit.
Test Type
Load Shed
Select this option to simulate power system load shed by 50%.
Load Acceptance
Select this option to simulate power system load adding by 50%.
Fault Bus
Select this option to simulate short-circuit fault on the generator terminal bus.

Test
When the test input values and simulation times are specified and a test type is selected in the governor
model test editor, you can implement the governor model testing by clicking the Test button.
Plot
When the testing is successfully completed, the results are available for plot. Click the Plot button in the
Test Model Editor, the plot window will show up as shown below:



An Example of a Governor Test Result Plot on Load Shed
20.5.2 Exciter Model Test
The following displays the exciter model test editor and describes the test input/output values, simulation
time and test types.


System Input (pu)
This parameter defines the generator terminal voltage in per unit. The default value is 1.0.
Terminal Current (It)
This field displays the generator terminal current in per unit.
Real Power (Pe)
This field displays the generator real electrical power in per unit.
Reactive Power (Qe)
This field displays the generator reactive electrical power in per unit.
PSS Signal (Vs)
This parameter defines the PSS input signal in per unit. The default value is 0.
Field Current (Ifd)
This parameter defines the generator filed winding current in per unit. The default value is 0.
Complex Terminal Voltage (CVt)
This field displays the generator terminal complex voltage in per unit.
Complex Terminal Current (It)
This field displays the generator terminal complex current in per unit.
Simulation Time
Time Step (sec)
Total Time (sec)
System Output (pu)
Filed Voltage (Efd)
This field displays the exciter output voltage in per unit.
Test Type
Load Shed
Select this option to simulate power system load shed by 50%.
Load Acceptance
Select this option to simulate power system load adding by 50%.

Fault Bus
Select this option to simulate short-circuit fault on generator terminal bus.
Test
When the test input values and simulation times are specified and a test type is selected in the exciter
model test editor, you can implement the exciter model testing by clicking Test button.
Plot

An Example of an Exciter Test Result Plot on Load Shed

20.5.3 PSS Model Test
The following displays the PSS model test editor and describes the test input/output values, simulation
time, and test types.

System Input (pu)
Shaft Speed (W)
This parameter defines the generator speed increment value in per unit. The default value is 0.005.
This parameter defines the terminal voltage increment in per unit. The default value is 1.0.
Real Power (Pe)
This parameter defines the increment value of the generator real electrical power in per unit. The default
value is 0.01.
Rotor Angle in rad (Ang)
This parameter defines the generator rotor angle increment value in radius. The default value is 0.01.
Mech Power (Pm)
This parameter defines the increment value of the generator mechanical power in per unit. The default
value is 0.01.

Voltage Frequency (f)
This parameter defines the increment value of the generator terminal voltage frequency in per unit. The
default value is 0.01.
Simulation Time
Time Step (sec)
Total Time (sec)
System Output (pu)
PSS Signal (Vs)
This field displays the PSS output signal in per unit.
Test
When the test input values and simulation times are specified in the PSS model test editor, you can
implement the PSS model testing by clicking the Test button. The PSS model test is conducted only with
a pulse disturbance on its input signals.
Plot

An Example of a PSS Test Result Plot on a Pulse Disturbance of Shaft Speed

Chapter 21

Harmonic Analysis

Because of the wide and ever increasing applications of power electronic devices, such as variable speed
drives, uninterruptible power supplies (UPS), static power converters, etc., power system voltage and
current quality has been severely affected in some areas. In these areas components other than that of
fundamental frequency can be found to exist in the distorted voltage and current waveforms. These
components usually are the integer multipliers of the fundamental frequency, called harmonics. In
addition to electronic devices, some other non-linear loads, or devices including saturated transformers,
arc furnaces, fluorescent lights, and cycloconverters are also responsible for the deterioration in power
system quality.

Harmonic Analysis Introduction

The presence of harmonics in a power system can give rise to a variety of problems including equipment
overheating, reduced power factors, deteriorating performance of electrical equipment, the incorrect
operation of protective relays, interference with communication devices, and in some cases, circuit
resonance to cause electric apparatus dielectric failure and other types of severe damage. Even worse,
harmonic currents generated in one area can penetrate into the power grid and propagate into other areas,
resulting in voltage and current distortions for the entire system. This phenomenon has become a major
concern for power quality due to the ever-increasing usage of electronic devices and equipment in power
systems.

Using computer simulation, the phenomena of power system harmonics can be modeled and analyzed.
The PowerStation Harmonic Analysis program provides you with the best tool to accurately model
various power system components and devices to include their frequency dependency, non-linearity, and
other characteristics under the presence of harmonic sources. This program has two analytical methods,
Harmonic Load Flow and Harmonic Frequency Scan, which are the most popular and powerful
approaches for power system harmonic analysis. By using those two methods in combination, different
harmonic indices are computed and compared with the industrial standard limitations, existing and
potential power quality problems, along with security problems associated with harmonics, can be easily
revealed. Causes to those problems can be identified and different mitigation and corrective schemes can
be tested and finally verified.

Some of the main features of the PowerStation Harmonic Load Flow Study are summarized below:

Common & Integrated Database
Fully Inherited 3-D Data Structure, Including Infinite Presentations, Unlimited Configurations, &
Multiple Data Revisions
Looped, Radial, or Combined Systems
Systems with Multiple Swing Buses
Systems with Isolated Sub-Systems
Systems with Zero Impedance Branches (Tie Circuit Breakers)
Systems with De-Energized Buses & Branches
Automatic Adjustment of Cable/Line Resistance According to Operating Temperatures
Automatic Adjustment of Transformer Impedance According to Tolerance
Automatic Adjustment of Current Limiting Reactor Impedance According to Tolerance
Multiple Loading Categories
Load Diversity Factors
Complete Fundamental Load Flow Calculation
Automatic LTC Settings for Fundamental Load Flow
Modeling of Frequency Dependency of Rotary Machine Impedance
Modeling of Non-linearity & Frequency Dependency of Cable/Line & Transformer Impedance
Modeling of Frequency Dependency of Other Power System Components & Loads
Effect of Transformer Phase Shifting to Harmonic Flow
Effect of Machine & Transformer Winding Connections & Grounding Types to Harmonic Flow
Harmonic Current Injection Method
Positive, Negative, & Zero Sequence Harmonics
Harmonic Order up to 73
rd

Harmonic Voltage Source
Harmonic Current Source
User-Expandable Harmonic Source Library
User-Selected Harmonic Source Inclusion by Device Categories
Harmonic Analysis Introduction

Calculation of Various Harmonic Indices Based on IEEE Standards
Total RMS Value (RMS) for Both Bus Voltages & Branch Currents
Total Arithmetic Summation Value (ASUM) for Both Bus Voltages & Branch Currents
Total Harmonic Distortions (THD) for Both Bus Voltages & Branch Currents
Telephone Influence Factors (TIF) for Both Bus Voltages & Branch Currents
I*T Product for Branch Currents
Built-in Harmonic Filters in Different Types
Automatic Filter Sizing Based on Different Criteria
Check and Flag Filter Overloading
Verifying Performance of Harmonic Filters
Graphic One-Line Display of Study Results
Slider Bar to Display Fundamental Load Flow, Total & Individual Harmonic Distortion
Graphic Plots of Voltage & Current Waveform for Viewing & Printing
Graphic Plots of Voltage & Current Spectrums for Viewing & Printing
Text Report for Input Data, Fundamental Load Flow Results, Voltage & Current Harmonic Indices,
Tabulated Voltage & Current Harmonic
Crystal Reports for Preformatted Reports
Flag Violations of Bus Total & Individual Harmonic Distortion Limits

Some of the main features of the PowerStation Harmonic Frequency Scan Study are summarized
below:

Same System & Component Modeling Capabilities for Harmonic Load Flow & Fundamental Load
Flow
Modeling of Frequency Dependency of Rotary Machine Impedance
Modeling of Non-linearity & Frequency Dependency of Cable/Line & Transformer Impedance
Modeling of Frequency Dependency of Other Power System Components & Loads
Transformer Phase Shifting
Machine & Transformer Winding Connections & Grounding Types
Built-in Harmonic Filters in Different Types
Automatic Filter Sizing Based on Different Criteria
User-Definable Frequency Scan Range & Step
Slider Bar to Display Bus Driving Point Impedance Magnitude & Phase Angle at Selected
Frequencies
Graphic Plots of Bus Driving Point Impedance in Ohms for Viewing & Printing
Graphic Plots of Bus Driving Point Impedance Phase Angle for Viewing & Printing
Text Report for Input Data, Fundamental Load Flow Results, Tabulated Bus Driving Point Impedance
Magnitudes & Phase Angles

Harmonic Analysis Study Toolbar

21.1 Study Toolbar
The Harmonic Analysis Study Toolbar will appear on the screen when you are in the Harmonic Analysis
Study mode. This toolbar has eight function keys as shown below.

Run Harmonic Load Flow

Run Frequency Scan

Display Options

Report Manager

Harmonic Analysis Plots


Get On-Line Data

Get Archived Data

Run Harmonic Load Flow
Select a study case from the Study Case Toolbar when you are in Harmonic Analysis Study mode. Click
on the Run Harmonic Load Flow button to perform a harmonic load flow study. A dialog box will
appear for you to specify the output report name if the output file name is set to Prompt in the Output
Report list box. The harmonic load flow study results will appear on the one-line diagram and can be
viewed in output report text and plot formats after the calculation completes.
Run Frequency Scan
After selecting a study case from the Study Case Toolbar, click on the Run - Frequency Scan button to
perform a harmonic frequency scan study. A dialog box will pop up asking you the output file name if
Prompt is set in the Output Report list box. As in the harmonic load flow study, study results are
displayed on the one-line diagram and can be viewed in output report text and plot formats after the
calculation completes.
Display Options
Click on the Display Options button to customize the one-line diagram annotation display options under
the Harmonic Analysis Study mode. See Display Options for more information.
Report Manager
Click on the Report Manager button to select a format and view harmonic analysis output report.
Harmonic analysis reports are provided in two formats: ASCII text files and Crystal Reports.

The Report Manager provides four pages (Complete, Input, Result, and Summary) for viewing the
different parts of the output report for both text and Crystal Reports. Available formats for Crystal
Reports are displayed on each page of the Report Manager.

Choosing any format other than TextRept in the Report Manager activates the Crystal Reports. You
can open the complete harmonic analysis report or just a part of it, depending on the format you choose.
The preformatted Crystal Reports names are:

Branch
Bus
Cable
Complete
Cover
Filter Overloading
Filter
HA Source
Harmonic Library
Harmonic Source
Impedance
Line
Load Flow Report
Machine
Reactor
Results
Summary
Transformer
UPS
VIHD Report
VTHD Report




The output reports for harmonic load flow studies have an extension of .har.

default viewer in the ETAPS.INI file to the viewer of your choice. Refer to Chapter 1 for detailed
information on changing the INI file.

in the Printing & Plotting chapter.

Click on the Harmonic Analysis Plots button to select and plot the curves from the selected output plot
file. The plot file name is the same as the output text file displayed in the Output Report list box. Plot
files for harmonic load flow have .hfp as an extension.
The Stop Sign button is normally disabled. When a harmonic load flow or a harmonic frequency scan has
been initiated, this button becomes enabled and shows a red stop sign. Clicking on this button will
terminate the current calculation. One-line diagram displays and plots will not be available if you
terminate the calculation before it completes, and the output report will be incomplete.
Get On-Line Data
the on-line presentation to the current presentation.
Get Archived Data
Harmonic Analysis Study Case Editor

The Harmonic Analysis Study Case Editor contains solution control variables, system loading conditions,
report options, harmonic source modeling options, and component plot selection. PowerStation allows
you to create and save an unlimited number of study cases for each type of study. Like all other study
types, you can easily switch between different harmonic analysis study cases. This feature is designed to
organize your study efforts and save you time.

A study case can be used for any combination of any configuration status, one-line diagram presentation,
and Base/Revision Data.

To create a new harmonic analysis study case, go to the Project Editor, right-click on the Harmonic
Analysis sub-folder inside the Study Cases folder, and select Create New. The program will then create a
new study case, which is a copy of the default study case, and adds it to the Harmonic Analysis sub-
folder.

When you are in the Harmonic Analysis mode, you can access the Harmonic Analysis Study Case Editor
by clicking on the Study Case button on the Study Case Toolbar. You can also access this editor from the
Project View by clicking on the Harmonic Analysis sub-folder under the Study Cases folder.

The Harmonic Analysis Study Case Editor consists of three pages: Info page, Model page, and the Plot
page.

21.2.1 Info Page
This page is provided for you to specify some general solution parameters, loading conditions, report
options, and study case information.

Study Case ID
The study case ID is shown in this entry field. You can rename a study case by simply deleting the old ID
Fundamental Load Flow
These settings are used for the fundamental load flow calculation solution control, and apply to both
harmonic load flow and harmonic frequency scan studies.
Max. Iteration
of iterations, the program will stop and inform the user. The recommended and default value for
maximum iteration is 2000.

Precision
Enter the value for the solution precision, which is used to check for the fundamental load flow
convergence. This value determines how precise you want the final solution to be. The default and
recommended value for precision is 0.000001.
Accel. Factor
Enter the convergence acceleration factor for the fundamental load flow calculation. Typical values are
between 1.2 and 1.7. The default value is 1.45.
Frequency Scan
These values are used for only harmonic, frequency scan calculations.
From
Specify the starting frequency in Hz for frequency scan. The default is the system fundamental
frequency.
To
Specify the finishing frequency in Hz for frequency scan. This value should be greater than the From
frequency and is an integer multiplier of the system fundamental frequency.
Step (df)
Specify the frequency step in Hz. This value is the interval between two adjacent frequency points during
a harmonic frequency scan study, and is a positive integer number.
Plot Step
This value determines the resolution of the frequency scan plot. The smaller it is, the smoother the plot
will look, but requires more data to be recorded. The default value for it is 1, which means every point
calculated from the harmonic frequency scan study will be plotted.
Fundamental Loading
In this section, you can specify the system loading conditions for the fundamental load flow calculation.
The fundamental loading conditions will also affect the harmonic load flow and the harmonic frequency
scan calculations.
Loading Category
Select one of the ten loading categories for this study case. With the selection of any category,
category. Note that you can assign loading to each one of the ten categories in the Nameplate page,
parameters.
Operating Load
Check this option to operate P and Q as specified in the relevant component editors.

Charger Loading
Load Category
Select this option to use the P and Q specified in the Loading Category section of the Charger Editor for
chargers.
Operating Load
Select this option to use the P and Q as specified in the Operating Load section of the Charger Editor.
Note that if this option is selected, it is required that a DC load flow calculation is run first in order to
estimate the charger load.
Apply appropriate load diversity factor(s) for the fundamental load flow as well as harmonic load flow
and frequency scan analysis. The choices are:
None
Select None to use the percent loading of each load as entered for the selected loading category, i.e., no
Bus Maximum
can define the initial loading for harmonic analysis studies with each bus having a different maximum
diversity factor. This study option is helpful when the future loading of the electrical system has to be
considered.
Bus Minimum
When the Bus Minimum option is selected, the loading of all motors and other loads will be multiplied by
the bus minimum diversity factor of the bus that they are directly connected to. Using this option, you
can define the initial loading for harmonic analysis studies with each bus having a different minimum
diversity factor.

This study option may be useful in some cases where the effect of light loading condition needs to be
investigated.
Global
constant kVA and constant Z loads of the selected loading category with the entered values. Using this
option you can define the initial loading for harmonic analysis studies with fixed diversity factors for all
loads.

are increased by 25 percent above their values as specified by the selected loading category. This value
can be smaller or greater than 100 percent.

Report
This section allows you to specify report options for Crystal Reports.
VTHD
If this box is checked, a summary of buses whose VTHD (Voltage Total Harmonic Distortion) exceeds
the limit will be reported.
VHD
If this box is checked, a summary of buses whose individual VHD (Voltage Harmonic Distortion) for any
harmonic exceeds the limit will be reported.
Filter Overloading
If this box is checked, a summary of overloaded filters will be reported.
Remarks 2
nd
Line
21.2.2 Model Page
This page is provided for you to choose the modeling methods for different types of components.


Skip Harmonic Source
In this section, you can specify globally what types of components you do NOT want to model as
harmonic sources. The results will affect both the harmonic load flow and the harmonic frequency scan
studies. For example, if a type of component is selected to not be modeled as a harmonic source, then all
components of this type will be modeled as impedances with the appropriate values in both the harmonic
load flow and the harmonic frequency scan studies.
Utility
If this box is checked, then all the power grid (utility) components will not contribute harmonics to the
system. This corresponds to the situation where the grid has no or negligible harmonic contamination.
Generator Saturation
If this box is checked, then all synchronous generator components will not be considered as harmonic
sources. This corresponds to the situation that generators are not significantly saturated; thus, they
generate near-ideal sinusoidal voltages.
Transformer Saturation
If this box is checked, then all transformer components, both 2-winding and 3-winding, will not be
considered as harmonic sources. This is true for transformers, which are close to their rated loading
conditions.
Charger/Converter
If this box is checked, then all charger and converter components will not be considered as harmonic
sources.
Inverter
If this box is checked, then all inverter components will not be considered as harmonic sources.
UPS
If this box is checked, then all UPS components will not be considered as harmonic sources.
VFD
If this box is checked, then all VFD components will not be considered as harmonic sources.
Static Load
If this box is checked, then all static load components will not be considered as harmonic sources.

21.2.3 Plot Page
Select the components you want to display on the one-line diagram and in plot format. The selections are
applied to both the harmonic load flow and the harmonic frequency scan studies.

Device Type
Select the type of components or devices from the list. Only the components associated with the listed
types can be selected for plotting.
Plot Options
Device ID
This table provides a list of the devices or components for the given Device Type.
Plot/Tabulate Column
You can select a device or component and click next to it under the Plot/Tabulate column. An X will be
placed next to this device or component to include it in the plot list.
Plot/Tabulate
You also can include a device or component in the plot list by first selecting that device or component,
and then checking this box. An X will be placed next to this device or component in the Plot/Tabulate
column.
Harmonic Analysis Display Options

The Harmonic Analysis Display Options consist of a Results page and three pages for AC, AC-DC, and
to that study.
21.3.1 Results Page
Select the result information to be displayed on the one-line diagram.

Color
Select the color for the harmonic analysis result annotations to be displayed on the one-line diagram.
Bus
Select kV or % to display bus voltages in kV or percent of the bus nominal voltage.

Show Units
Click on this check box to include or suppress bus display units.
Flows
Branch Current
Click on this check box to include or suppress one-line displays for branch current and other information
for branches from the harmonic load flow and the harmonic frequency scan calculations.
Show Units
Click on this check box to include or suppress branch display units.
Total Harmonic Info
In this section, you can select specific information to display for buses and branches. The information is
related to the total harmonic distortion, etc.
Bus Voltage
RMS or ASUM
Choose to display the bus total voltage in RMS or ASUM (Arithmetic Summation) including
contributions from the fundamental component and all harmonic components.
THD or TIF
Choose to display the bus voltage THD (Total Harmonic Distortion) or TIF (Telephone Influence Factor).
Branch Current
RMS or ASUM
Choose to display the branch total current in RMS or ASUM, including contributions from the
fundamental component and all harmonic components.
THD or TIF
Choose to display the branch current THD or TIF.
Frequency Scan
This section sets the option for one-line display of the harmonic frequency scan results.
Z Magnitude
Click on this check box to display the bus driving point impedance magnitude.
Z Angle
Click on this check box to display the bus driving point impedance phase angle.
Show Unit
Click on this check box to show units for the bus display from the harmonic frequency scan study.

21.3.2 AC Page
Color
ID
diagram.
Rating
line diagram.

Device Type Rating
Motor HP / kW
Load kVA / MVA
Bus kA Bracing
kV

A


Z
Select the check boxes under this heading to display the impedance values of the selected elements on the
one-line diagram.

Motor % LRC
D-Y
one-line diagram.

Composite Motor
Use Default Options
21.3.3 AC-DC Page
Color
ID
line diagram.
Rating
one-line diagram.

Device Type Rating
UPS kVA
VFD HP / kW


kV

A
one-line diagram.

Device Type Amp
Composite Network
Use Default Options
21.3.4 DC Page
Color
ID
diagram.
Rating
line diagram.

Device Type Rating
Battery Ampere Hour
Motor HP / kW
Load kW / MW
Converter kW / MW
kV


A
one-line diagram.

Z
Composite Motor
Use Default Options

Harmonic Analysis Calculation Methods
Power system harmonic analysis involves modeling the frequency characteristics of different components
of power systems, computing harmonic indices at given buses and branches, identifying problems
associated with the existing harmonics, and providing an environment to simulate and test any migration
methods. This section briefly discusses these topics and prepares you to use the PowerStation Harmonic
Analysis program to carry on your projects or analyze your systems in the most effective way.
21.4.1 Standard Compliance
PowerStation Harmonic Analysis program fully complies with the latest version of the following
standards:

1. IEEE Standards 519, IEEE Recommended Practices and Requirements for Harmonic Control in
Electrical Power Systems
2. IEEE Standards 141, IEEE Recommended Practice for Electric Power Distribution for Power Plants
3. ANSI/IEEE Standard 399, IEEE Recommended Practice for Power System Analysis
21.4.2 Component Modeling
For harmonic analysis, frequency characteristics and the non-linearity of power system components must
be recognized and modeled appropriately. Depending on their nature and behavior, these components are
modeled in very different ways.

Non-linear loads in power systems are essentially either injecting harmonic currents into the system or
applying harmonic voltages at the given points. Therefore, they are conventionally modeled as current
sources and voltage sources with harmonic frequencies. Normal power sources such as power grids or
generators, if they contain harmonic components in their fixed voltages, are modeled as voltage sources
with harmonic frequencies.
Harmonic Current Source
Non-linear loads that can be modeled as a harmonic current source in PowerStation are:

Static Load
UPS
Charger/Converter
VFD
Transformer

Static loads, chargers/converters and VFDs, if they are modeled as a harmonic current source, will inject
harmonic current into the connected buses.

When a saturated transformer contributes significant harmonic current into the system (most likely when
the transformer is lightly loaded), it can also be modeled as a harmonic current source. Harmonic current
source generated by a transformer is normally placed at the primary side; however, if there is a triple n
th

harmonic current specified for a transformer and the transformer winding and ground connections do not
allow the triple n
th
harmonic current to flow in the primary winding, the secondary side and then the
tertiary side will be considered as the location for the harmonic current source.
When a UPS is modeled as a load, it injects harmonic current into the connected bus. On the other hand,
if a UPS is modeled as a branch, then it will inject harmonic current into both the AC input bus and the
AC output bus. As a result, the path from the AC input bus to the AC output bus inside the UPS will be
opened in harmonic load flow calculations.

To model a component as a harmonic current source, go to the Harmonic page of that component and
select an appropriate harmonic current library via the Library button and Harmonic Library Quick Pick
Editor. Magnitudes of harmonic current from a harmonic current source are in percentage of the
component rated fundamental current.
Harmonic Voltage Source
The following components can be modeled as a harmonic voltage source in PowerStation:

Power Grid
Synchronous Generator
Inverter
Charger/Converter
Static Load

Polluted power grids (utilities) or saturated synchronous generators can be modeled as harmonic
voltage sources if they contain significant voltage distortion.

Inverters, chargers/converters, and static loads can also be modeled as harmonic voltage sources if they
primarily cause voltage distortion instead of current distortion.

To model a component as a harmonic voltage source, go to the Harmonic page of that component and
select an appropriate harmonic voltage library via the Library button and Harmonic Library Quick Pick
Editor. Magnitudes of harmonic voltage from a harmonic voltage source are in percentage of the nominal
voltage at the connected bus.
Harmonic Impedance for Rotating Machines
If a rotating machine is not modeled as a harmonic source, its equivalent harmonic impedance is its
negative impedance.
Harmonic Impedance for Load Components
For a load or a shunt component, when it is not modeled as a harmonic source, its equivalent harmonic
impedance is calculated from its fundamental loading using an equivalent parallel R and X circuit.

The reactance part of the harmonic impedance for rotating machines and load components are adjusted
linearly based on the order of harmonic.
Harmonic Impedance for Branch Component
Harmonic impedance of a branch component is computed from the impedance at the fundamental
frequency by considering adjustments due to harmonic frequency. For an impedance branch, the
adjustment is linear and only applies to the reactive part. For cable, transmission line, transformer, and
reactor components, the adjustment applies to both the resistive and reactive parts. This is because of the
skip effect and non-linear change in their reactance under high frequency.
Zero Sequence Impedance
If the triple n
th
harmonics (3
rd
, 9
th
, etc.) exist in the system, then zero sequence impedance of a component
is used for the calculation. For rotating machines and some of the branch components, if their zero
sequence impedances are specified in their editors, these impedances will be used with the adjustment to
the harmonic frequency. For other components, their equivalent zero sequence impedances are assumed
to be the same as their positive counterpart. It is very important to point out that for rotating machines
(including the utility grid), transformers and harmonic filters, Delta or Wye connections, grounding
methods, and grounding impedances will all affect the triple n
th
harmonic flow in the system.
Harmonic Indices
The effect of harmonics is usually measured in terms of several indices that are defined below. Note that
the definitions are applied to both voltage and current.
Total Harmonic Distortion (THD)
Total Harmonic Distortion (THD), also known as Harmonic Distortion Factor (HDF), is the most popular
index to measure the level of harmonic distortion to voltage and current. It is a measure that shows the
ratio of the mean-square-root of all harmonics to the fundamental component. For an ideal system, THD
is equal to zero. THD is determined by:
1
2
2
F
F
THD
i
=

where F
i
is the amplitude of the i
th
harmonic, and F
1
is that for the fundamental component.
Individual Harmonic Distortion (IHD)
Individual Harmonic Distortion (IHD) simply calculates the ratio of a given harmonic component to the
fundamental component. This value is sometimes used to track the effect of each individual harmonic
and examine its magnitude. IHD is determined by:

1
F
F
IHD
i
=
Root Mean Square (RMS) - Total
This is the square root of the sum of the squares of the magnitudes of the fundamental plus all harmonics
in the system. For a system with no harmonics at all, the total RMS should be equal to the fundamental
component RMS. The total RMS is determined by:
=
1
2
i
F RMS

Arithmetic Summation (ASUM)
This is the arithmetic summation of the magnitudes of the fundamental and all harmonics. It adds the
magnitudes of all components directly to have a conservative estimation of the crest value of voltage and
current, and is useful for the evaluation of the maximum withstanding ratings of a device. ASUM is
determined by:
=
1
i
F ASUM
Telephone Influence Factor (TIF)
Telephone Influence Factor (TIF) is a variation of the THD with a different weight given to each of the
harmonics based on its amount of interference to an audio signal in the same frequency range. Normally,
the current TIF has a more significant impact on adjacent communication systems. The TIF is determined
by:
( )
2
1
2
1
=
i
i i
F
F W
TIF

where W
i
is the TIF weighting factor. The values for the weighting factors for different harmonic
frequencies are given in the IEEE Standard 519.

=
1
i
F ASUM
I*T Product (I*T)
I*T Index is a product current components (fundamental and harmonics) and weighting factors, as shown
in the formula below:

=
=
H
h
h h
T I T I
1
2
) (

where I
h
= current component
T
h
= weighting factor
h = harmonic order (h=1 for fundamental)
H = maximum harmonic order to account

21.4.3 Harmonic Load Flow Study
The Harmonic Load Flow Study first carries out a load flow calculation at the fundamental frequency.
The results of the fundamental load flow sets the base for the fundamental bus voltage and branch
currents which are used later to calculate different harmonic indices. Then, for each harmonic frequency
at which any harmonic source exists in the system, a direct load flow solution is found by using the
current injection method. The harmonic frequencies considered are all the low order frequencies from the
2
nd
to the 15
th
, plus the characteristic harmonics from the 17
th
up to the 73
rd
. Impedance of components is
adjusted based on the harmonic frequencies and the types of components. For a triplen harmonic
frequency, a zero sequence impedance is adjusted to the actual frequency and the zero sequence network
is used.

From the harmonic load flow calculation, the harmonic components for bus voltages and branch currents
are found, and then all harmonic indices are computed accordingly. The computed bus THD and IHDs
are compared with their limits as specified by the user in the Bus Editor and, if any violations are
detected, flags are placed in the text report next to the associated bus in the Harmonic Information
section.

The harmonic load flow study generates text output reports showing the system input data, fundamental
load flow results, system harmonic information, and tabulation of bus voltages and branch currents with
all harmonic contents. These results can also be viewed directly from the one-line diagram using the
Harmonic Load Flow Slider and the Harmonic Display Options Editor. Along with the text report and
one-line display, bus voltage and branch current plots are also available to show both voltage and current
waveforms in time domain and the harmonic spectrums in a bar chart.
21.4.4 Harmonic Frequency Scan Study
One particular concern with harmonics is the resonance condition in the power system. Because of the
existence of both inductive components and capacitive components in the system, at certain frequencies,
resonance conditions might occur at some buses. If the resonance occurs at a bus where a harmonic
current is injected into the system, an overvoltage and overcurrent condition will be observed.

The PowerStation Frequency Scan program is the best tool to investigate the system resonance problem.
It calculates and plots the magnitudes and phase angles of bus driving point impedance over a frequency
range specified by the user; thus, any parallel resonance condition and its triggering frequency can be
clearly identified. The harmonic frequency scan study also allows users to tune their harmonic filter
parameters and test the final results.

The frequency range for scanning is defined by the user, which starts from the fundamental frequency and
can go as high as the user needs.

The results from the frequency scan study are reported in a text report which includes the system input
data, the fundamental load flow results, and a tabulation listing bus driving point impedances. The same
tabulated information is also given on the one-line diagram, as well as in a plot format.
21.4.5 Harmonic Filter
Harmonic filters are extensively used to mitigate harmonic problems. A properly designed harmonic
filter can prevent the harmonic current from injecting into the system, or it can provide a low impedance
path at the tuned frequency to remove a parallel resonance.

The PowerStation Harmonic Filter Editor provides all the practical and popular filter structures for you to
choose from. A Filter Sizing program is also available in this editor for the Single Tuned filter type, with
which users can optimize the filter parameters based on different installation or operation criteria.

Harmonic filter loading is usually a concern in practical application. Two loading conditions are to be
checked: capacitor Max. kV and inductor Max. I, both of those values are specified in the Harmonic
Filter Editor, Parameter page. The capacitor Max. kV is a peak value, calculated by considering voltage
drop across the capacitor, and the inductor Max. I is an rms value, calculated by considering current flow
through the inductor. Note that in calculating these values, all voltage and current components including
fundamental and harmonics are included. If Filter Overloading, check box in the Harmonic Analysis
Study Case Editor. If Info page is checked, comparisons will be made between the calculated values and
the specified values by Harmonic Load Flow study. Percentage of overloading will then be computed and
reported in the Filter Overloading report.
21.4.6 Transformer Phase Shift
Properly configuring transformer phase-shift can be helpful for cancellation of certain harmonics, thus
improving system power quality.

ETAP PowerStation Harmonic Analysis program uses transformer phase-shift to adjust network
impedance phase angle in the Harmonic Load Flow study. Transformer phase-shift is specified in the
Transformer Editor Tap page based on transformer connection convention, namely Standard Positive
Sequence connection and Standard Negative Sequence connection. In addition, a user also can specify
Special phase-shift for a transformer.
Harmonic Analysis Required Data

21.5 Required Data
To run a harmonic analysis study, you need to provide all the data required for load flow and short-circuit
calculations. In addition to that, you need to provide some harmonic related data, such as harmonic
sources, modeling methods, and filters. A summary of these data for different types of components is
given in this section. Note that except for the harmonic library information, which is required only for the
harmonic load flow study, all other data are mandatory for both the harmonic load flow and the harmonic
frequency scan studies.
Bus Data
Bus ID
Nominal kV
Load Diversity Factor (when Loading is set to Maximum or Minimum Diversity Factor)
Harmonic Limit Category
VTHD (Voltage Total Harmonic Distortion) Limit
VIHD (Voltage Individual Harmonic Distortion) Limit
Branch Data
2-Winding & 3-Winding Transformers
Transformer ID
Bus Connections
Rated kV & MVA
Positive & Zero Sequence Impedance & X/R Ratios
Impedance Tolerance
Tap & LTC Settings
Winding Connections for all Windings
Phase Shift as in Standard Positive or Negative Sequence connections, or Special configurations
Grounding Type & Parameters for all Windings
Harmonic Library Information, if any
Bus Connections
Conductor Type, Size, Rated kV, # of Conductors per Phase, & Length
Use Library Data or Enter Cable Resistance, Reactance, & Susceptance Values, Both Positive & Zero
Sequence Values Required
Impedance
Impedance ID
Bus Connections
Resistance, Reactance, & Susceptance Values, Both Positive & Zero Sequence Values Required
Bus Connections
X/R ratio & Impedance, Both Positive & Zero Sequences Values Required
Impedance Tolerance

Machine Data
Power Grid (Utility) Data
Power Grid (Utility) ID
Bus Connection
Operating Mode (Swing, Voltage Control, or Mvar Control)
Nominal kV
%V & Vangle for Swing Mode
%V, MW Loading, & Mvar Limits (Qmax & Qmin) for Voltage Control Mode
MW & Mvar Loading for Mvar Control Mode
3-Phase MVAsc & X/R Values or Positive Sequence %R & %X
1-Phase MVAsc & X/R Values or Zero Sequence %R & %X
Grounding Connection
Grounding Type
Bus Connection
Rated kV
%V & Vangle for Swing Mode of Operation
%V, MW loading, & Mvar Limits (Qmax & Qmin) for Voltage Control Mode of Operation
MW & Mvar Loading for Mvar Control Mode of Operation
Rated MVA
Harmonic Z (X2)
X/R Ratio
Winding Connection
Grounding Type & Parameters
Bus Connection
Quantity
Rated kW/hp & kV
Power Factors & Efficiencies at 100%, 75%, & 50% Loadings
Harmonic Z (X2)
X/R Ratio
Winding Connection

Induction Machine (Motor or Generator) ID
Bus Connection
Quantity
Rated kW/hp & kV
Negative Impedance X2
X/R Ratio
Winding Connection
MOV Data
MOV ID
Bus Connection
Quantity
Initial Status & Associated Demand Factor
Rated kW/hp & kV
Load Data
Static Load Data
Static Load ID
Bus Connection
Quantity
Rated kVA/MVA & kV
Power Factor
Grounding Connection/Type
Lumped Load Data
Lumped Load ID
Bus Connection
Rated kVA/MVA & kV
Power Factor
% Motor Load & % Static Load


Capacitor Data
Capacitor ID
Bus Connection
Rated kV
Mvar/Band & # of Banks
Harmonic Filter Data
Harmonic Filter ID
Filter Type
Xl & Q for Reactors
R, if applicable
UPS Data
UPS ID
Bus Connection
AC Connections
Rated kW/MW & kV
AC Input & Output Rated kV
Power Factor and Efficiency
VFD Data
VFD ID
Bus & Motor Connection
Charger Data
Charger ID
Bus Connections
AC Ratings

Inverter Data
Device ID
Bus Connection
AC Rating
AC Output Voltage in %
Study Case ID
Max. Number of Iterations
Precision
Acceleration Factor
From Frequency (for Harmonic Frequency Scan)
To Frequency (for Harmonic Frequency Scan)
Step (for Harmonic Frequency Scan)
Plot Step (for Harmonic Frequency Scan)
Fundamental Loading Category
Fundamental Loading Condition (Loading Category, Operating Load)
Load Diversity Factor (None, Bus Maximum, Bus Mininum, or Global)
Charger Loading Option (Loading Category, Operating Load)
Report Option (for Crystal Reports)
All Options in Model Page
Buses & Branches to be Plotted
Harmonic Analysis Output Reports

21.6 Output Reports
Output reports for harmonic analysis studies are available in different levels and are arranged into three
formats: text output reports, one-line diagram displays, and plots.
21.6.1 View from Study Case Toolbar
This is a shortcut for the Report Manager. When you click on the View Output Report button,
PowerStation automatically opens the output report listed in the Study Case Toolbar with the selected
format. In the picture shown below, the output report name is Harm-LF and the selected output report
format is TextRept.

21.6.2 Harmonic Analysis Report Manager
Click on the View Output File button on the Harmonic Analysis Toolbar to open the Harmonic Analysis
Report Manager. The Harmonic Analysis Report Manager consists of four pages.

Complete Page
From this page you can select the report format that gives you the complete output report. Both TextRept
in ASCII format and Complete in Crystal Reports are available.

Input Page
This page provides the formats for different input data. The following formats are available:

Branch
Bus
Cable
Complete
Cover
Filter
HA Source
Harmonic Library
Harmonic Source
Impedance
Line
Machine
Reactor
Results
Transformer
UPS


Result Page
This page provides the formats for different calculation results. The following two formats are available:

Load Flow Report
Results


Summary Page
This page provides the formats for different summaries from both input data and calculation results. The
following four formats are available:

Filter Overloading
Summary
VIHD Report
VTHD Report


21.6.3 Harmonic Load Flow Text Report
If the last study you have run is the harmonic load flow, or you have selected the output file extension
.har, then by clicking on the View Output Report button on the Study Case Toolbar or by selecting the
TextRept format from the Harmonic Analysis Report Manager, you will be able to open and view the text
output report for the harmonic load flow study.

The harmonic load flow study text report contains the following major sections:
Cover Page
This is the first page of the harmonic load flow study text report. It includes the information from a
number of different types of buses, branches, system frequency, unit system, project file name, and the
output file name and its location.

HARMONIC ANALYSIS
=================
Harmonic Load Flow
SWING GEN. LOAD TOTAL
===== ===== ===== =====
2XFRM 3XFRM REACT. CALBE LINE IMP. C.B. UPS TOTAL
===== ===== ====== ===== ==== ===== ==== === =====
Number of Branches: 4 1 0 3 0 0 0 0 8
Data File Name: Example
Output File Name: E:\TEMP\EXAMPLE\HarmLF.har

Bus Input Data
This section reports the input data related to system buses, including their ID, type, nominal kV,
description, initial voltage, generation and/or loading, and voltage harmonic distortion limit for both total
and individual harmonics.

Bus Information & Nominal kV Ini Voltage Generation Motor Load Static Load Mvar Limits % VHD Limits
============================================= ============ ============= ============= ============= ============ ============
ID Type kV Description % Mag. Ang. MW Mvar MW Mvar MW Mvar Max. Min. Total Single
------------ ---- ------ -------------------- ------ ----- ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ----- ------
Bus1 Load 0.480 100.0 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 2.5 1.5
Bus2 Load 0.480 100.0 0.000 0.647 0.370 0.000 0.000 2.5 1.5
Bus3 Load 13.800 101.5 -1.232 3.239 1.355 0.000 0.000 2.5 1.5
LVBus Load 0.480 97.1 -3.491 0.426 0.114 0.391 0.207 2.5 1.5
Main Bus SWNG 34.500 100.0 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 2.5 1.5
MCC1 Load 0.480 97.9 -3.063 0.421 0.190 0.200 0.000 2.5 1.5
Sub2A Load 13.800 101.5 -1.207 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 2.5 1.5
Sub2B Gen. 13.800 100.0 1.431 6.300 0.000 0.998 -0.616 0.000 0.000 4.650 -2.000 2.5 1.5
Sub 3 Load 4.160 99.8 -0.476 0.000 0.000 0.000 -0.450 2.5 1.5
Sub3 Swgr Load 4.160 99.6 -0.501 0.396 0.193 0.000 0.000 2.5 1.5
--------------------------------------------- ------ ------ ------ ------ ------
10 Buses Total 6.300 6.127 1.606 0.591 -0.243
Machine Data
This section reports the input data related to system machines, which include power grid (utility),
synchronous generator, synchronous motor, and induction machine. The input data reported are machine
connected bus ID, machine ID and type, machine rating in MVA, kV and RPM, machine negative and
zero sequence impedance, and machine winding connection and grounding.

Conned Bus Machine Info. Rating (Base) Negative Seq. Imp. Grounding Zero Seq. Imp.
============ ================= ==================== ==================== ================== =====================
Bus ID Machine ID Type MVA kV RPM X/R % R % X2 Conn. Type Amp X/R % Ro % Xo
------------ ------------ ---- ------- ------ ----- ----- ------ ------- ----- ----- ------ ----- ------- -------
Main Bus Utility Uty. 2500.000 34.50 0. 45.00 2.222 99.98 Wye Solid 45.00 0.764 34.37
Sub 2B Gen1 Gen. 8.824 13.80 1800. 48.00 0.250 12.00 Wye Solid 48.00 0.250 12.00
Bus3 Syn4 SynM 2.982 13.20 1800. 46.07 0.334 15.38 Wye Open
LVBus Syn2 SynM 0.134 0.46 1800. 9.54 2.097 20.00 Wye Open
Sub 2B Syn1 SynM 1.170 13.20 1800. 27.53 0.559 15.38 Wye Open
Bus3 Mtr2 IndM 0.660 13.20 1800. 6.34 3.830 18.50 Wye Open
MCC1 Mtr6 IndM 0.107 0.46 1800. 6.03 3.315 20.00 Wye Open
Sub3 Swgr Pump 1 IndM 0.440 4.00 1800. 6.27 3.830 18.46 Wye Open
Branch Input Data
This section reports the input data related to system branches, which include cables, transmission lines,
impedances, reactors, 2-winding and 3-winding transformers. The input data reported are branch ID,
library information (if any), positive and zero sequence impedances and shunt susceptances in both ohms
and 100 MVA base.

CKT / Branch Ohms/1000 ft per Conductor (Cable) or per Phase (Line) Impedance
============ ===================================================================== =================================
ID Library Size L(ft) #/ T C R1 X1 Y1 Ro Xo MVAb % R1 % X1 % Y1
------------ -------- ---- ------ --- ---- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ----- ------- ------- -----------
Cable2 5MCUS3 4/0 250. 1 0 0.0650 0.0446 0.00000 0.2048 0.1097 100.0 9.39 6.44 0.0000000
Cable11 15MCUS1 350 1350. 2 0 0.0386 0.0562 0.00000 0.1216 0.1382 100.0 1.37 1.99 0.0000000
Cable14 1MCUN3 250 100. 2 0 0.0552 0.0379 0.00000 0.1739 0.0932 100.0 119.79 82.25 0.0000000

If the branch is a transformer, then its tap setting, LTC information (if any), winding connection, and
grounding type are also reported.

CKT / Branch Transformer %Tap Setting XFRM Grounding Imped.
============ ======================================= ============= ==================== ======
ID MVA kV kV % Z X/R From To Conn. Type Amp % Tol.
------------ ------- ------ ------ ------- ----- ------ ------ ----- ----- ------ ------
T2 10.000 34.500 13.800 6.900 23.0 -2.500 0.000 D-Y Solid 0.00
T3 1.000 4.160 0.480 6.500 18.0 0.000 0.000 D-Y Restr 10.0 0.00
T4 1.500 4.160 0.480 5.750 7.1 0.000 0.000 D-Y Solid 0.00
XFMR 3 1.000 4.160 0.480 7.200 28.0 0.000 0.000 D-Y Restr 20.0 0.00
Branch Connection
This section reports branch connection information for all branches in the system. It shows the branch
ID, from which bus and to which bus it is connected, and positive sequence impedance converted to the
system base.

CKT / Branch Connected Bus ID %Impedance (100 MVA Base)
======================== ========================== =========================
ID Type From To R X Z
------------ ---------- ------------ ------------ ------- ------- -------
Cable2 Cable Sub 3 Sub3 Swgr 9.4 6.4 11.4
Cable11 Cable Sub 2A Bus3 1.4 2.0 2.4
Cable14 Cable Bus1 Bus2 119.8 82.2 145.3
T2 2W Xfmr Main Bus Sub 2A 2.9 67.2 67.3
T3 2W Xfmr Sub3 Swgr LVBus 36.1 649.0 650.0
T4 2W Xfmr Sub 3 Bus1 53.5 379.6 383.3
XFMR 3 2W Xfmr Sub3 Swgr MCC1 25.7 719.5 720.0
T1 3W XFMR Main Bus Sub 2B 1.2 48.0 48.0
Main Bus Sub 3 1.2 48.7 48.7
Sub 2B Sub 3 324.1 3383.4 3398.9
Harmonic Library Data
This section lists harmonic library data, including all harmonic libraries used in the current study with
their model ID and manufacturer ID, harmonic spectrum up to 73
rd
harmonic in % of the device rated
current. Note that each harmonic library can be used by multiple devices; however, each library will be
reported only once.

Device % Harmonic Source Current
========================= =====================================================================================================
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 17 19 23
Manufacturer Model 25 29 31 35 37 41 43 47 49 53 55 59 61 65 67 71 73
------------ ------------ ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
Harmonic 12 Pulse1 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 9.10 0.00 7.70 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 4.30
4.00 0.00 0.00 3.90 2.70 0.00 0.00 2.10 2.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Harmonic 6 Pulse1 0.00 0.00 0.00 20.00 0.00 14.30 0.00 0.00 0.00 9.10 0.00 7.70 0.00 0.00 5.90 5.30 4.30
4.00 3.40 3.20 2.80 2.70 2.40 2.30 2.10 2.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Harmonic Source Data
This section lists harmonic sources existing in the system, including bus ID, where the source is
connected to, source type, and reference to the harmonic library.

Connected Bus Harmonic Library Info
============= =====================================
ID Type Manufacturer Model
------------ --------- ------------ ------------
Bus2 Current Harmonic 12 Pulse1
Bus2 Current Harmonic 6 Pulse1

Fundamental Load Flow Report
This section reports the fundamental load flow. The fundamental load flow establishes a base for all bus
voltages and branch currents, which are later used for calculating harmonic voltage, current percentages,
and other harmonic indices. The format of the fundamental harmonic load flow report is identical to that
of the regular load flow report.

Bus Information & Nom kV Voltage Generation Motor Load Static Load Load Flow XFRM
======================== =========== ============ ============ ============ ====================================== =====
ID Type kV % Mag. Ang. MW Mvar MW Mvar MW Mvar To Bus ID MW Mvar Amp %PF % Tap
------------ ---- ----- ------ ---- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ------------ ----- ----- ---- ----- -----
Bus1 Load 0.48 97.77 -2.0 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 Bus2 0.65 0.38 928 86.7
Sub 3 -0.65 -0.38 928 86.7
Bus2 Load 0.48 96.65 -2.1 0.00 0.00 0.65 0.37 0.00 0.00 Bus1 -0.65 -0.37 928 86.8
Bus3 Load 13.80 101.45 28.8 0.00 0.00 3.24 1.35 0.00 0.00 Sub2A -3.24 -1.35 144 92.3
LVBus Load 0.48 96.89 -3.7 0.00 0.00 0.43 0.11 0.37 0.19 Sub3 Swgr -0.79 -0.31 1056 93.2
*Main Bus Swng 34.50 100.00 0.0 0.41 2.39 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 Sub2A 3.25 1.44 59 91.4 -2.500
Sub2B -2.83 0.95 49 -94.8
& Sub 3
MCC1 Load 0.48 97.73 -3.2 0.00 0.00 0.42 0.19 0.19 0.00 Sub3 Swgr -0.61 -0.19 788 95.5
Sub2A Load 13.80 101.52 28.8 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 Bus3 3.24 1.36 144 92.3
Main Bus -3.24 -1.36 144 92.3
*Sub2B Gen. 13.80 100.00 1.4 6.30 -0.68 1.00 -0.62 0.00 0.00 Sub 3 5.30 -0.06 221-100.0
& Main Bus
Sub 3 Load 4.16 99.61-30.7 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 -0.45 Sub3 Swgr 1.81 0.78 274 91.9
Bus1 0.66 0.40 107 85.6
Main Bus -2.47 -0.73 358 95.9
& Sub2B
Sub3 Swgr Load 4.16 99.39-30.7 0.00 0.00 0.40 0.19 0.00 0.00 Sub 3 -1.80 -0.77 274 91.9
LVBus 0.80 0.36 121 91.1
MCC1 0.61 0.22 90 94.1
Harmonic Information Report
Following the fundamental load flow section, system harmonic information is reported. This section has
three parts. In the Bus Info. & Rated kV part, the bus ID and its nominal voltage are reported. In the
Voltage Distortion part, the fundamental bus voltage value, RMS value, ASUM value, THD value, and
TIF value are reported. The fundamental voltage value, RMS value, and ASUM value are all on the base
of nominal voltage of bus. The Current Distortion part shows the connected bus ID, fundamental current
value, RMS value, ASUM value, THD value, TIF value, and I*T value. The fundamental current value,
RMS value, and ASUM value are all in amperes. Also, in this section of the report, a * sign will be
placed next to the bus if its total harmonic voltage distortion exceeds the limit, and a # sign will be
placed next to the bus whose individual harmonic voltage distortion exceeds the limit.
Bus Info. & Rated kV Voltage Distortion Current Distortion
==================== ===================================== ================================================================
ID kV Fund(%) RMS(%) ASUM(%) THD(%) TIF To Bus ID Fund.(A) RMS(A) ASUM(A) THD(%) TIF IT
------------ ------ ------- ------ ------- ------ ------- ------------ -------- -------- -------- ------ ------- --------
* # Bus1 0.48 97.77 98.12 130.36 8.51 571.16 Bus2 928.07 944.70 1425.02 19.01 480.44 0.45E+06
Sub 3 928.07 944.70 1425.02 19.01 480.44 0.45E+06
* # Bus2 0.48 96.65 97.10 133.21 9.69 633.31 Bus1 928.07 944.70 1425.02 19.01 480.44 0.45E+06
Bus3 13.80 101.46 101.46 101.75 0.10 5.21 Sub2A 144.68 144.68 144.68 0.00 0.50 0.72E+02
LVBus 0.48 96.89 96.89 99.96 1.07 53.85 Sub3 Swgr 1056.39 1056.43 1082.37 0.83 41.46 0.44E+05
Main Bus 34.50 100.00 100.00 100.35 0.11 6.19 Sub2A 59.37 59.37 59.37 0.00 0.50 0.30E+02
Sub2B 49.99 49.99 49.99 0.00 0.50 0.25E+02

Sub 3
MCC1 0.48 97.73 97.74 101.42 1.26 67.08 Sub3 Swgr 788.25 788.26 800.39 0.51 23.82 0.19E+05
Sub2A 13.80 101.53 101.53 101.82 0.10 5.23 Bus3 144.68 144.68 144.68 0.00 0.50 0.72E+02
Main Bus 144.72 144.72 144.72 0.05 0.50 0.72E+02
Sub2B 13.80 100.00 100.00 100.29 0.09 5.18 Main Bus 221.84 221.84 221.84 0.00 0.50 0.11E+03
Sub 3
Sub 3 4.16 99.61 99.62 104.28 1.54 83.61 Sub3 Swgr 274.13 274.13 279.28 0.63 30.12 0.83E+04
Bus1 107.09 109.00 164.43 19.01 480.44 0.52E+05
Main Bus 358.17 358.17 358.17 0.00 0.50 0.18E+03
Sub2B
Sub3 Swgr 4.16 99.39 99.40 104.02 1.54 83.22 Sub 3 274.13 274.13 279.28 0.63 30.12 0.83E+04
LVBus 121.89 121.90 124.87 0.83 41.44 0.51E+04
MCC1 90.95 90.95 92.32 0.50 23.72 0.22E+04
* - THD ( Total Harmonic Distortion exceeds the limit)
# - IHD (Individual Harmonic Distortion exceeds the limit)
Bus Tabulation
In the Bus Tabulation section, the bus ID, fundamental kV, and voltage harmonics up to the 73
rd
harmonic
in percent of fundamental voltage are reported. Note that only the buses that are selected for plotting in
the Harmonic Analysis Study Case Editor are tabulated.

Bus Harmonic Voltages (% of fundamental voltage)
===================== =====================================================================================================
ID Fund. kV 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 17 19 23
25 29 31 35 37 41 43 47 49 53 55 59 61 65 67 71 73
------------ -------- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
Bus1 0.47 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.10 0.00 1.10 0.00 0.00 0.00 2.93 0.00 2.81 0.00 0.00 1.26 1.39 1.31
1.09 0.92 0.95 1.96 1.46 0.97 0.98 2.42 2.55 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Bus2 0.46 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.30 0.00 1.30 0.00 0.00 0.00 3.40 0.00 3.23 0.00 0.00 1.42 1.54 1.45
1.23 1.04 1.06 2.16 1.60 1.06 1.06 2.61 2.74 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
LVBus 0.47 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.12 0.00 0.13 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.34 0.00 0.35 0.00 0.00 0.20 0.28 0.35
0.16 0.05 0.04 0.04 0.02 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
MCC1 0.47 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.11 0.00 0.12 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.35 0.00 0.38 0.00 0.00 0.24 0.36 0.49
0.24 0.08 0.06 0.08 0.05 0.02 0.02 0.03 0.03 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Sub 3 4.14 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.13 0.00 0.14 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.42 0.00 0.45 0.00 0.00 0.29 0.44 0.62
0.30 0.11 0.08 0.11 0.06 0.03 0.03 0.05 0.04 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00

For your convenience, the bus voltage harmonics converted to the bus nominal voltage are also tabulated.

Bus Harmonic Voltages (% of nominal voltage)
===================== =====================================================================================================
ID Nom. kV 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 17 19 23
25 29 31 35 37 41 43 47 49 53 55 59 61 65 67 71 73
------------ -------- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
Bus1 0.48 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.07 0.00 1.08 0.00 0.00 0.00 2.87 0.00 2.74 0.00 0.00 1.24 1.36 1.28
1.07 0.90 0.93 1.92 1.43 0.95 0.96 2.37 2.49 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Bus2 0.48 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.26 0.00 1.26 0.00 0.00 0.00 3.29 0.00 3.12 0.00 0.00 1.38 1.49 1.40
1.19 1.00 1.02 2.09 1.55 1.02 1.03 2.52 2.65 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
LVBus 0.48 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.12 0.00 0.12 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.33 0.00 0.34 0.00 0.00 0.19 0.27 0.34
0.16 0.05 0.04 0.04 0.02 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
MCC1 0.48 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.11 0.00 0.11 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.35 0.00 0.37 0.00 0.00 0.24 0.35 0.48
0.23 0.08 0.06 0.08 0.05 0.02 0.02 0.03 0.03 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Sub 3 4.16 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.13 0.00 0.14 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.42 0.00 0.45 0.00 0.00 0.29 0.44 0.61
0.30 0.11 0.08 0.11 0.06 0.03 0.03 0.05 0.04 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00

Branch Tabulation
In this section, branch currents are tabulated on 1 MVA base for harmonics up to the 73
rd
harmonic. Note
that only the branches that are selected for plotting in the Harmonic Analysis Study Case Editor are
tabulated.
Branch % Harmonic Current Contents in 1 MVA Base
============ =====================================================================================================
ID 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 17 19 23
25 29 31 35 37 41 43 47 49 53 55 59 61 65 67 71 73
------------ ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
Cable2 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.20 0.00 0.17 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.44 0.00 0.44 0.00 0.00 0.25 0.35 0.44
0.20 0.07 0.05 0.06 0.03 0.01 0.01 0.02 0.02 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Cable11 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Cable14 0.00 0.00 0.00 4.90 0.00 3.48 0.00 0.00 0.00 5.60 0.00 4.37 0.00 0.00 1.32 1.12 1.25
1.03 0.68 0.62 1.06 0.72 0.41 0.38 0.81 0.79 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
T2 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
T3 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.10 0.00 0.10 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.27 0.00 0.28 0.00 0.00 0.16 0.22 0.28
0.13 0.04 0.03 0.03 0.02 0.00 0.00 0.01 0.01 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
T4 0.00 0.00 0.00 4.90 0.00 3.48 0.00 0.00 0.00 5.60 0.00 4.37 0.00 0.00 1.32 1.12 1.25
1.03 0.68 0.62 1.06 0.72 0.41 0.38 0.81 0.79 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
XFMR 3 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.06 0.00 0.05 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.11 0.00 0.10 0.00 0.00 0.06 0.08 0.11
0.05 0.02 0.01 0.02 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00

For your convenience, the branch currents are also tabulated on the base of fundamental current.

Branch % Harmonic Currents (% of fundamental current)
==================== =====================================================================================================
ID Fund(A) 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 17 19 23
25 29 31 35 37 41 43 47 49 53 55 59 61 65 67 71 73
------------ ------- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
Cable2 274. 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.10 0.00 0.09 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.22 0.00 0.22 0.00 0.00 0.13 0.18 0.22
0.10 0.03 0.02 0.03 0.02 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Cable11 145. 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Cable14 928. 0.00 0.00 0.00 6.35 0.00 4.51 0.00 0.00 0.00 7.26 0.00 5.67 0.00 0.00 1.71 1.46 1.62
1.33 0.88 0.81 1.37 0.94 0.53 0.49 1.05 1.03 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
T2 59. 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
T3 122. 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.11 0.00 0.11 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.31 0.00 0.31 0.00 0.00 0.18 0.26 0.31
0.15 0.05 0.03 0.04 0.02 0.00 0.00 0.01 0.01 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
T4 107. 0.00 0.00 0.00 6.35 0.00 4.51 0.00 0.00 0.00 7.26 0.00 5.67 0.00 0.00 1.71 1.46 1.62
1.33 0.88 0.81 1.37 0.94 0.53 0.49 1.05 1.03 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
XFMR 3 91. 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.09 0.00 0.07 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.16 0.00 0.16 0.00 0.00 0.09 0.13 0.17
0.08 0.03 0.02 0.02 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
21.6.4 Harmonic Frequency Scan Report
If the last study you have run is the harmonic frequency scan, or you have selected the output file
extension .fsr, then by clicking on the View Output Report button on the Study Case Toolbar or selecting
the TextRept format from the Harmonic Analysis Report Manager, you will be able to open and view the
text output report for the harmonic frequency scan study.

The harmonic frequency scan text report shares the same sections for Summary Page, Bus Input Data,
Machine Data, Branch Input Data, Branch Connection, and Fundamental Load Flow Report with the
harmonic load flow text report. It does not have Harmonic Library Data and Harmonic Source Data,
since the harmonic frequency scan does not actually use any harmonic source information.

Frequency Scan
This section reports the driving point impedance, and its magnitude and phase angle, at each frequency
specified in the Harmonic Analysis Study Case Editor. Note that only the buses that are selected for
plotting are tabulated.

Bus1 Bus2 LVBus MCC1 Sub 3
------ ------------------- ------------------- ------------------- ------------------- -------------------
Freq Mag. Angle Mag. Angle Mag. Angle Mag. Angle Mag. Angle
(Hz) (ohm) (rad) (ohm) (rad) (ohm) (rad) (ohm) (rad) (ohm) (rad)
------ --------- -------- --------- -------- --------- -------- --------- -------- --------- --------
60 0.01 1.43 0.01 1.23 0.02 1.45 0.02 1.49 0.09 1.54
120 0.02 1.45 0.02 1.33 0.03 1.41 0.03 1.50 0.18 1.54
180 0.03 1.43 0.04 1.35 0.05 1.35 0.04 1.49 0.27 1.53
240 0.04 1.40 0.05 1.34 0.06 1.30 0.06 1.48 0.36 1.52
300 0.05 1.37 0.06 1.32 0.08 1.24 0.07 1.46 0.46 1.51
360 0.06 1.34 0.07 1.30 0.09 1.18 0.09 1.45 0.57 1.50
420 0.07 1.31 0.08 1.28 0.10 1.12 0.10 1.43 0.68 1.49
480 0.08 1.28 0.09 1.25 0.11 1.07 0.12 1.41 0.81 1.48
540 0.09 1.25 0.11 1.23 0.12 1.02 0.13 1.39 0.95 1.47
600 0.10 1.21 0.12 1.20 0.13 0.97 0.15 1.37 1.10 1.45
660 0.11 1.18 0.13 1.17 0.14 0.92 0.16 1.35 1.29 1.43
720 0.13 1.15 0.14 1.14 0.15 0.87 0.18 1.33 1.50 1.41
780 0.14 1.12 0.16 1.11 0.16 0.83 0.20 1.31 1.76 1.39
840 0.15 1.09 0.17 1.08 0.17 0.79 0.21 1.29 2.08 1.36
900 0.16 1.05 0.18 1.05 0.18 0.74 0.23 1.27 2.49 1.32
960 0.18 1.02 0.20 1.02 0.18 0.70 0.24 1.24 3.03 1.27
1020 0.20 0.97 0.22 0.98 0.19 0.65 0.26 1.21 3.76 1.20
1080 0.22 0.92 0.24 0.93 0.20 0.60 0.28 1.17 4.83 1.10
1140 0.24 0.84 0.26 0.85 0.20 0.53 0.30 1.11 6.43 0.93
1200 0.27 0.71 0.29 0.72 0.20 0.44 0.31 1.01 8.74 0.63
1260 0.27 0.50 0.29 0.53 0.18 0.37 0.30 0.90 10.87 0.15
1320 0.23 0.36 0.24 0.42 0.16 0.43 0.27 0.89 10.30 -0.39
1380 0.20 0.42 0.21 0.49 0.17 0.52 0.26 1.00 8.10 -0.77
1440 0.19 0.52 0.21 0.59 0.18 0.55 0.27 1.06 6.27 -0.99
1500 0.20 0.59 0.22 0.64 0.18 0.54 0.29 1.09 5.04 -1.12
1560 0.21 0.62 0.24 0.66 0.19 0.53 0.31 1.09 4.19 -1.20
1620 0.23 0.63 0.25 0.67 0.20 0.51 0.32 1.08 3.59 -1.26
1680 0.24 0.63 0.26 0.67 0.20 0.50 0.34 1.08 3.14 -1.30
1740 0.25 0.62 0.28 0.66 0.20 0.48 0.35 1.06 2.80 -1.34
1800 0.26 0.61 0.29 0.65 0.21 0.46 0.36 1.05 2.52 -1.36
1860 0.27 0.60 0.30 0.63 0.21 0.45 0.38 1.04 2.30 -1.38
1920 0.28 0.59 0.31 0.62 0.21 0.43 0.39 1.03 2.12 -1.40
1980 0.29 0.58 0.32 0.60 0.21 0.42 0.40 1.01 1.97 -1.41
2040 0.30 0.56 0.33 0.59 0.22 0.40 0.41 1.00 1.84 -1.42
2100 0.31 0.55 0.34 0.57 0.22 0.39 0.42 0.99 1.72 -1.44
2160 0.32 0.54 0.35 0.56 0.22 0.38 0.43 0.97 1.63 -1.44
2220 0.33 0.52 0.36 0.54 0.22 0.37 0.44 0.96 1.54 -1.45
2280 0.34 0.51 0.37 0.53 0.22 0.36 0.45 0.95 1.46 -1.46
2340 0.35 0.50 0.38 0.51 0.22 0.34 0.46 0.93 1.39 -1.46
2400 0.36 0.48 0.39 0.50 0.23 0.33 0.47 0.92 1.33 -1.47
Harmonic Analysis One-Line Diagram Displayed Results

The one-line diagram displays the study results after the current calculation is complete. Based on the
study type and selected options from the Display Options, different results are displayed.
21.7.1 Harmonic Load Flow Display
By using the Harmonic Load Flow Slider and the Harmonic Analysis Display Options Editor, you can
choose different results to be displayed on the one-line diagram for the harmonic load flow analysis study.
Harmonic Load Flow Slider
The Harmonic Load Flow Slider is located on the top of the PowerStation window. To make it visible,
you need to select the Harmonic Load Flow Slider option. This slider has three sections. They are Total,
1 (fundamental frequency), and h (a harmonic order from 2 to 73). To set the slider to different positions,
put your mouse pointer on top of the indicator, hold the left mouse button down, then drag it to the
desired location on the slider.
Total

At this position, harmonic information of buses and branches is displayed. The information displayed is:

Bus Voltage RMS or ASUM Bus Voltage THD or TIF
Branch Current RMS or ASUM
Branch Current THD or TIF
1 (Fundamental Frequency)

At this position, the fundamental load flow results are displayed. The information displayed is:

Bus Voltage Magnitude in kV or in Percent
Bus Voltage Phase Angle in Degree
Branch Current in Amperes
Branch Current in Percent of Fundamental Current Base

Harmonic Order n (n from 2 to 73)

At this position, the bus voltages and branch currents for the given harmonic order are displayed. The
information displayed is:

Bus Voltage Magnitude in kV or in Percent
Bus Voltage in Percent of the Fundamental Voltage
Branch Current in Amperes
Branch Current in Percent of the Fundamental Current Base

The following screen capture shows a one-line diagram display with the slide position at Total.


21.7.2 Harmonic Frequency Display
By using the Harmonic Frequency Scan Slider and the Harmonic Analysis Display Options Editor, you
can choose different results to display on the one-line diagram for the harmonic frequency scan analysis
study.
Harmonic Frequency Scan Slider
The Harmonic Frequency Scan Slider is located on the top of the PowerStation window. To make it
visible, you need to check the Harmonic Frequency Scan Slider option. This slider goes from the From
frequency to the To frequency with the Plot Step specified by the user. The values of From frequency, To
frequency, and Plot Step are all specified in the Harmonic Analysis Study Case Editor. You can use the
same technique as described for the Harmonic Load Flow Slider to move the pointer to any frequency and
see the one-line diagram display changes.

The Harmonic Frequency Scan Slider displays the magnitude and phase angle of the bus driving point
impedance for the selected frequency. Only those buses, which are selected in the Harmonic Study Case
Editor for plotting, are available to display. The following is a screen capture of a Harmonic Frequency
Scan one-line display.


21.8 Plots
Plots are available for both the harmonic load flow study and the harmonic frequency scan study.
21.8.1 Harmonic Analysis Plot Selection
The plot files share the same name as the text output files, so the procedure for selecting plot files is the
same as that described in Section 20.6. To select a plot, click on the Harmonic Analysis Plots button
located on the Harmonic Analysis Toolbar.

Harmonic Load Flow
Check this radio button for plots of the harmonic load flow study.
Frequency Scan
Check this radio button for plots of the harmonic frequency scan study.
Device Type
Device ID
Select the devices that you want to plot. This box lists all the devices, which are selected in the Harmonic
Study Case Editor, Plot page, for the selected device type. Multiple devices can be selected.

Plot Type
For Harmonic Load Flow plot, following curves are available.
Waveform
Plot voltage or current waveforms for the selected devices. Curves are plotted in the time domain for one
cycle duration. The scale for voltage waveform is in percent of the nominal bus voltage. The scale for
current waveform is in percent of the fundamental branch current.
Spectrum
Plot voltage or current harmonic spectrum. Both voltage and current harmonics in spectrum charts are in
percent of their fundamental values.

For harmonic frequency scan plots, the following curves are available.
Z Magnitude
Plot the driving point impedance magnitudes for buses in Ohms.
Z Angle
Plot the driving point impedance angles for buses in radians.
21.8.2 Harmonic Load Flow Plots
A set of sample plots for a harmonic load flow study is shown below.


21.8.3 Harmonic Frequency Scan Plots
A set of sample plots for a harmonic frequency scan study is shown below.

ETAP

PowerStation
4.0
User Guide
Copyright 2001
All Rights Reserved





Southern California

(949) 462-0100 Sales
(949) 462-0400 Fax

Chapter 22

Optimal Power Flow Analysis

The PowerStation Optimal Power Flow (OPF) program is an extremely powerful simulation software for
power system design, planning, and operation. It solves power system load flow, but at the same time can
optimize system operating conditions and automatically adjust control variable settings, while ensuring
both equality and inequality constraints are not violated. The optimized system will reduce the
installation and/or operating cost, improves its overall performance, and increases its reliability and
security. Besides minimizing the operating and installation cost, the program also provides a variety of
other choices of optimization objectives, which covers virtually all the optimization criteria for a real
power system. Any practical control means in a power system such as transformer LTC, generator AVR
control, shunt and series compensations, and load shed can all be considered in the calculation.
Constraints for bus voltage, branch flow in different types (MVA, MW, Mvar, and Amp), as well as
control variables are also available for users to select and enforce. By using state-of-the-art optimization
algorithms and advanced programming techniques, this program is proven very capable, robust, and
effective. Systems with over 20,000 buses can be solved at incredible speed.

Optimal Power Flow Analysis Introduction
Some of the key features of the Optimal Power Flow program are summarized below:

Common & Integrated Databases
Fully Inherited 3-D Data Structure Including Infinite Presentations, Unlimited Configurations, &
Multiple Data Reversions
Handles Looped, Radial, or Combined Systems
Systems with Multiple Swing Buses
Systems with Zero Impedance Branches (Tie Circuit Breakers)
Automatic Adjustment of Cable/Line Resistance According to Operating Temperatures
Automatic Adjustment of Transformer Impedance According to Tolerance
Automatic Adjustment of Current Limiting Reactor Impedance According to Tolerance
Choice of Loading Categories
Load Diversity Factors
Accurate AC Modeling
State-of-the-Art Interior Point Algorithm
Logarithmic Barrier Function (Handles Both Equality & Inequality Constraints)
Primal-Dual Direction Search Method
Controlled Solution Parameters
Minimize System Real Power Losses
Minimize System Reactive Power Losses
Minimize Swing Bus Power
Minimize Shunt Mvar Devices
Minimize Fuel Cost
Minimize Series Compensation
Minimize Generation Cost
Minimize Control Movement
Minimize Control Adjustment
Maximize Voltage Security Indexes
Maximize Line Flow Security Indexes
Flatten Voltage Profiles
User-Defined Objective Functions
Voltage Constraint
Line Flow Constraint
Control Limit Constraint
Generator Var Limit Constraint
Transmission Interface Limit Constraint
Smooth Function of Any Variables
Generator MW & Mvar Control
Transformer LTC Control
Transformer Phase-Shifter Control
Shunt Compensation Control
Series Compensation Control
Switching Capacitor Control

Optimal Power Flow Study Toolbar

22.1 Study Toolbar
The Optimal Power Flow Study Toolbar will appear on the screen when you are in Optimal Power Flow
Study mode. This toolbar has six function keys, as shown below:

Run Optimal Power Flow

Display Options

Report Manager


Get On-Line Data

Get Archived Data

Run Optimal Power Flow
Select a study case from the Study Case Toolbar when you are in Optimal Power Flow study mode, then
click on the Run Optimal Power Flow button to perform an optimal power flow study. A dialog box
will appear at this time to ask you to specify the output report name if the output file name is set to
Prompt in the Output Report list box. The optimal power flow study results will appear on the one-line
diagram and can be viewed in the output report text format.
Display Options
Click on this button to customize the one-line diagram annotation display options under the Optimal
Power Flow Study mode. See Display Options for more information.
Report Manager
Click on the Report Manager button to select a format and view transient stability output report.
Optimal power flow analysis reports are currently provided in ASCII formats only, which can be accessed
from the Report Manager.

Optimal Power Flow Study Toolbar



The output reports for optimal power flow studies have a .opr extension.
Click on the Stop Sign button to halt the current calculation.
Get On-Line Data
If the ETAP key installed on your computer has the on-line feature you can copy the on-line data from the
on-line presentation to the current presentation.
Get Archived Data
If the ETAP key installed on your computer has the on-line feature you can copy the archived data to the

Optimal Power Flow Study Case Editor

The Optimal Power Flow Study Case Editor contains solution control variables, objective selections,
constraint settings, control variable activation, system loading conditions, and report options.
PowerStation allows you to create and save an unlimited number of study cases for each type of study.
Like any other study types, you can easily switch between different optimal power flow study cases. This
feature is designed to organize your study efforts and save you time.

A study case can be used for any combination of configuration status, one-line diagram presentation, and
Base/Revision Data.

To create a new optimal power flow study case, go to the Project Editor, right-click on the Optimal Power
Flow sub-folder inside the Study Cases folder, and select Create New. The program will then create a
new study case, which is a copy of the default study case, and adds it to the Optimal Power Flow sub-
folder.

When you are in Optimal Power Flow mode, you can access the Optimal Power Flow Study Case Editor
by clicking on the Study Case button on the Study Case Toolbar. You can also access this editor from the
Project Editor by clicking on the Optimal Power Flow sub-folder under the Study Cases folder.

The Optimal Power Flow Study Case Editor consists of the following nine pages: Info page, Objective
page, LTC page, Generator AVR page, Generator MW page, Shunt Comp page, Bus Voltage Constraint
page, and Branch Flow Constraint page.

22.2.1 Info Page

Study Case ID
and entering a new ID. The study case ID can be up to 12 alphanumeric characters. Use the Navigator
button at the bottom of the editor to go from one study case to another.
Solution Parameters
Barrier Factor
This is the fixed value of barrier factor used in the barrier function. It is defaulted to 0.0000001. The
program starts the barrier factor at 1 and will automatically reduce it during the calculation iteration.
Power Mismatch
This is the power flow mismatch. The default value is 0.001 per unit on 1 MVA base.

Max. Iteration
Enter the maximum number of iterations. If the solution has not converged at the specified number of
iterations, the program will stop and inform the user. The recommended and default value is 50.
Advanced
Click on this button to open up the Advanced Solution Parameter Editor and set additional solution
parameters for the optimal power flow study.

Advanced Solution Parameter Editor
Currently there is only one parameter available in this editor.

Objective Precision
This parameter defines the precision for the objective function convergence. The default value is 0.001.
It is recommended that you do not change this parameter in most cases.
Loading
In this section of the Optimal Power Flow Study Case Editor you can specify the operating loads by
selecting a loading category.
Loading Category
Select one of the 10 loading categories for this study case. With the selection of any category,
category. Note that you can assign loading to each one of the 10 categories in the Nameplate page,
parameters.
Operating Load
Check this option to use operating P and Q as specified in the relevant component editors.
Charger Loading Category
Select this option to use P and Q as specified in the loading category section of the Charger Editor.
Charger Operating Load
Select this option to use P and Q as specified in the operating load section of the Charger Editor. Note
that if this option is selected, you are required to run a DC load flow calculation first in order to estimate
the charger load.

Apply appropriate load diversity factor(s) for the system loading. The choices are:
None
Select None to use the percent loading of each load as entered for the selected loading category, i.e., no
Bus Maximum
can define the initial loading for optimal power flow studies with each bus having a different maximum
diversity factor.

bus may have a different maximum diversity factor.
Bus Minimum
When the Minimum option is selected, the loading of all motors and other loads will be multiplied by the
bus minimum diversity factor of the bus that they are directly connected to. Using this option, you can
define the initial loading for optimal power flow studies with each bus having a different minimum
diversity factor.

This study option may be useful in some cases where the effect of light loading conditions need to be
investigated.
Global
constant kVA and constant Z loads of the selected loading category with the entered values. When using
this option you can define the initial loading for transient stability analysis studies with fixed diversity
factors for all loads.

are increased by 25% above their values as specified by the selected loading category. This value can be
smaller or greater than 100%.
Initial Condition
This section specifies the initial voltage used for the optimal power flow study.
Use Bus Voltage
Select this option to use bus voltages as specified in the Bus Editor.

Use Fixed Voltage
When this option is selected, the Optimal Power Flow Study Case Editor will ask you to enter the bus
voltage magnitude (in percent) and phase angle (in degree). In this case, initial values for all the buses in
the system will be set to the same to have a flat start point.

Report
The check boxes in this section are for reporting constraint violation purpose. This section is temporarily
disabled.
Voltage Constraint
If this box is checked, any voltage constraint violations will be reported.
Line/Transformer Constraint
If this box is checked, any line flow constraint violations for cable, transmission line, transformer, reactor,
and impedance will be reported.
Generator Constraint
If this box is checked, any violations in generator reactive power limits will be reported.
Transformer Tap Constraint
If this box is checked, any violations in transformer tap limits will be reported.
Control/Update
This section is for updating the control settings from optimal power flow study results. Note that only
those controls, which are activated for the present study case, will be updated if their settings are ever
changed. This section is temporarily disabled.
Generator Voltage
If this box is checked, the generator voltage (AVR) setting will be updated.
LTC
If this box is checked, the transformer LTC settings will be updated.
Generator var
If this box is checked, the generator var generation will be updated.
Generator MW
If this box is checked, the generator MW generation will be updated.

Shunt Compensation
If this box is checked, settings for the shunt compensation components (capacitor, etc.) will be updated.
Load Shed
If this box is checked, load shed control status will be updated.
Phase Shift
If this box is checked, the transformer phase shift controls will be updated.

Infeasibility Handling Editor
Click on the Infeasibility Handling button to open this editor.

Strategy
This section provides different strategies for handling infeasibility due to various conflicts in objective
functions, constraints, and power balancing equations that might be encountered during the optimal power
flow calculation. The selected strategy will be automatically enforced if an infeasible condition occurs
during the calculation.
Relax Generator Voltage Constraints
Select this option to remove constraints on the generator voltages.
Relax Load Bus Voltage Constraints
Select this option to remove constraints on the load bus voltages.
Relax All Voltage Constraints
Select this option to remove voltage constraints on all buses, including the generator buses and the load
buses.

Ignore and Continue
Select this option to continue the optimization without any of the constraint relaxation. The calculation
will continue until either a feasible solution is reached within the given number of iterations or the
maximum number of iterations is reached.
Quit Calculation
Select this option to quit the calculation once an infeasibility is encountered.

22.2.2 Objective Page
This page is provided for you to choose the objectives for this study case.

Objective Selection
Select objectives for this study case. You can select multiple objectives and use the weight factors to
combine them.
Minimize Real Power Losses
Select this option to minimize the real power losses in the system.
Minimize Reactive Power Losses
Select this option to minimize the reactive power losses in the system.

Minimize Swing Bus Power
Select this option to minimize the real power generation at the swing bus(es).
Minimize Shunt var Devices
Select this option to minimize the utilization of the var generation from available shunt var control
devices. Note that when this objective is selected, you must specify some shunt devices (capacitors) on
the Shunt Comp page.
Minimize Fuel Cost
Select this option to minimize the total generation cost from the available generators. Note that when this
objective is selected, you must specify some generator MW controls on the Generator MW page.
Minimize Series Compensation
Select this option to minimize the utilization of the var generation from the available series var control
devices. This objective is temporarily disabled.
Minimize Load Shedding
Select this option to minimize the load to be shed from the available bus load shed schedule. This
objective is temporarily disabled.
Minimize Control
There are two ways to minimize controls. One is to minimize control movement. In this case, the total
number of controls to be adjusted is minimized. Another way is to minimize the control adjustment. In
this case, the overall adjustment from all controls is minimized.
Maximize Voltage Security Index
Select this option to maximize bus voltage security index. The bus voltage security index function is
determined by:
n
i i
avg i i
dV
V V
J
2
Buses All
,

=

where

V
i,avg
= (V
i,max
+ V
i,min
) / 2
dV
i
= (V
i,max
V
i,min
) / 2
Maximize Line Flow Security Index
Select this option to maximize line flow security index. The line flow security index function is
determined by:
n
j j
j
S
S
J
2
Branches All
=

where S
j
is the line flow and
j
S is the line rating.
Flat Voltage Profile
Select this option to optimize the system control variable settings for a flat bus voltage profile, i.e. the
voltage magnitude difference for all the buses is minimum.

Weight
Assign weighting factors for the each objective. A larger weighting factor represents a higher weight and
will be given to its associated objective.
Exponent
Variable n in the associated bus voltage and line flow index functions.

22.2.3 LTC Page
This page is provided to choose the LTC controls and set their associated parameters.


Active Controls
This box lists the information on all of the selected transformer LTCs, including their associated
transformer ID, location (primary, secondary, or tertiary), maximum and minimum taps, and weighting
factor. Only the selected LTCs are treated as active controls in the optimization process.
Select / Deselect Buttons
First highlight an LTC from the box underneath the Select button. This box initially lists all the LTCs in
the system for the specified Select Option. Then click on the Select button to move the highlighted LTC
into the Active Controls box. Highlighting an LTC in the Active Controls box and clicking on the
Deselect button will move that LTC into the box underneath the button to become an inactive control.
Selection Option
Specify a category to show all the available LTCs in that category.
All / By Category
Select the All option to show all the available LTCs in the system. Select the By Category option to show
the available LTCs by category. Either one or any number of combinations of the categories can be
chosen. For LTCs, there are two categories available: By Area and By Zone. An area number needs to
be given for By Area and a zone number for By Zone. The By Category option is temporarily disabled.
Default Settings
Weight
This sets the weighting factors for the selected LTC controls. You need to set the weighting factor first
before you click on the Select button to activate an LTC. This number determines the weight between
different LTC controls, with 100% being the maximum and highest weight.


22.2.4 Generator AVR Page
This page is provided to choose the generator voltage (AVR) controls and set their associated parameters.

Active Control
This box lists information on all of the selected generator AVR controls, including the generator ID,
MVA rating, voltage control range, and weighting factor. Only the selected generators are treated as
active controls in the optimization process.
First highlight a generator from the box underneath the buttons. This box initially lists all the generators
in the system for the specified Select Option. Then click on the Select button to move the highlighted
generator into the Active Controls box. Highlighting a generator in the Active Controls box and clicking
on the Deselect button will move that generator into the box underneath the button to become an inactive
control.

Selection Option
Specify a category to show all the available generators in that category.
All / By Category
Select the All option to show all of the available generators in the system. Select the By Category option
to show the available generators by category. Either one or any number of combinations of the categories
can be chosen. For generator AVR control, there are two categories available: By Area and By Zone.
An area number needs to be given for By Area and a zone number for By Zone. The By Category option
is temporarily disabled.
Default Settings
Vmax / Vmin
This option sets the maximum and minimum voltage limits (in %) for the selected generator AVR
controls. You need to set Vmax and Vmin first before you click on the Select button to activate a
generator AVR control.

Weight
This option sets the weighting factors for the selected generator AVR controls. You need to set the
weighting factor first before you click on the Select button to activate a generator AVR control. This
number determines the weight between different generator AVR controls, with 100% the maximum and
the highest weight.

22.2.5 Generator MW Page
This page is provided to choose the shunt compensation controls and set their associated parameters.

Active Control
This box lists information on all of the selected generator/power grid MW controls, including the
generator ID, MVA rating, MW control range, and weighting factor. Only the selected generators/power
girds are treated as active controls in the optimization process.
First highlight a generator from the box underneath the buttons. This box initially lists all the generators
in the system for the specified Select Option. Then click on the Select button to move the highlighted
generator into the Active Controls box. Highlighting a generator in the Active Controls box and clicking
on the Deselect button will move that generator into the box underneath the button and become an
inactive control.

Selection Option
Specify a category to show all the available generators in that category.
All / By Category
Select the All option to show all of the available generators in the system. Select the By Category option
to show the available generators by category. Either one or any number of combinations of the categories
can be chosen. For generator MW control, there are two categories available: By Area and By Zone. An
area number needs to be given for By Area and a zone number for By Zone. The By Category option is
temporarily disabled.
Default Settings
Weight
This option sets the weighting factors for the selected generator MW controls. You need to set the
weighting factor first before you click on the Select button to activate a generator MW control. This
number determines the weight between different generator MW controls, with 100% being the maximum
and the highest weight.


22.2.6 Shunt Comp Page
This page is provided to choose the shunt compensation controls and set their associated parameters.

Active Controls
This box lists information on all the selected shunt compensation controls, including the device ID, Mvar
range, initial Mvar, and weighting factor. Only the selected shunt compensation devices are treated as
active controls in the optimization process.
Select Button
First highlight a shunt compensation device from the box underneath the button, and then click on this
button to move the highlighted shunt compensation device into the Active Controls box. This box
initially lists all the shunt compensation devices in the system for the specified Select Option.
Deselect Button
Highlighting a shunt compensation device in the Active Controls box and clicking on this button will
move that shunt compensation device into the box underneath the button to become an inactive control.

Selection Option
Specify a category to show all the available shunt compensation devices in that category.
All
Select this option to show all the available shunt compensation devices in the system.

By Category
Select this option to show the available shunt compensation devices by category. Either one or any
number of combinations of the categories can be chosen. For shunt compensation control, there are two
categories available: By Area and By Zone. An area number needs to be given for By Area and a zone
number for By Zone. This option is temporarily disabled.
Default Settings
Min Mvar
This option sets the minimum Mvar limit for the selected shunt compensation controls. You need to set
Min Mvar before you click on the Select button to activate a shunt compensation control.
Max Mvar
The same as Min Mvar, but the Max Mvar option sets the maximum Mvar limit for the selected shunt
compensation controls.
Initial Mvar
The same as Min Mvar and Max Mvar, but the Initial Mvar option sets the initial Mvar for the selected
shunt compensation controls.
Weight
This sets the weighting factors for the selected shunt compensation controls. You need to set the
weighting factor first before you click on the Select button to activate a shunt compensation control. This
number determines the weight between different shunt compensation controls, with 100% being the
maximum and the highest weight.

22.2.7 Bus Voltage Constraint Page
This page is provided for you to set the bus voltage constraints and their associated parameters.

Enforced Constraints
This box lists information on all the enforced bus voltage constraints for load buses, including the bus ID,
bus kV rating, range of variation and weighting factor. Only the selected buses are constrained in the
optimization process.
Select Button
First highlight a bus from the box underneath the button, and then click on this button to move the
highlighted bus load into the Enforced Constraints box. This box initially lists all the load buses in the
system for the specified Select Option.

Deselect Button
Highlighting a bus in the Enforced Constraints box and clicking on this button will move that bus into the
box underneath the button to become an unconstrained bus.
Selection Option
Specify a category to show all the load buses in that category.
All
Select this option to show all the load buses in the system.
By Category
Select this option to show all load buses by category. Either one or any number of combinations of the
categories can be chosen. For bus voltage constraints, there are three categories available: By Area, By
Zone and By kV. An area number needs to be given for By Area, a zone number for By Zone, and a kV
rating for By kV. This option is temporarily disabled.
Default Settings
Max. V
This option sets the maximum voltage limit in percent of bus nominal voltage for the selected bus
voltages. You need to set Max. V first before you click on the Select button to enforce that bus voltage
constraint.
Min. V
The same as Max. V, but this option sets the minimum voltage limit in percent of bus nominal voltage for
the selected bus voltages.
Weight
This option sets the weighting factors for the selected bus voltage constraints. You need to set the
weighting factor first before you click on the Select button to enforce a bus voltage constraint. This
number determines the weight between different bus voltage constraints, with 100% being the maximum
and the highest weight.

22.2.8 Branch Flow Constraint Page
This page is provided for you to set the branch (line) flow constraints and their associated parameters.

Enforced Constraints
This box lists information on all the enforced branch flow constraints for load buses, including the branch
ID, branch type, constraint type, base rating, maximum and minimum allowable branch flow, and
weighting factor. Only the selected branches are constrained in the optimization process.
Select Button
First highlight a branch from the box underneath the button, and then click on this button to move the
highlighted branch into the Enforced Constraints box. This box initially lists all the branches in the
system for the specified Select Option.
Deselect Button
Highlighting a branch in the Enforced Constraints box and clicking on this button will move that branch
into the box underneath the button to become an unconstrained branch.

Selection Option
Specify a category to show all branches in that category.
All
Select this option to show all the branches in the system.

By Type
Select this option to show branches by category. Either one or any number of combinations of the
categories can be chosen. For bus branch flow constraints, there are three categories available: Xfmr,
Cable, and Reactor.
Default Settings Button
Click on this button to bring up the Branch Flow Constraint Editor.

From this box you can set and edit constraint parameters for different types of branches. All the
parameters need to be set before clicking on the Select button to enforce constraints for any branches.
Constraint
Choose a type of branch flow to constrain. There are four types of branch constraints available: MW,
Mvar, MVA, and Amp.
Max.
Maximum branch flow limit in percent of the base of branch rating for the given branch type and
constraint type.
Min.
Minimum branch flow limit in percent of the base of branch rating for the given branch type and
constraint type.

Optimal Power Flow Display Options

The Optimal Power Flow Display Options consist of a Results page and three pages for AC, AC-DC, and
to that study.
22.3.1 Results Page
This page controls the result annotations of the OPF which are displayed on the one-line diagram.

Color
Select the color for the optimal power flow result annotations to be displayed in on the one-line diagram.

Voltage
Voltage
From the dropdown list, select either % (percent of bus nominal kV) or kV.
Bus
Click on this check box to display bus voltages.
Power Flows
kVA or MVA
Select kVA or MVA from the dropdown list.
KW + jkvar, kVA, and Amp
Select the kW + jkvar, kVA, or Amp option to display the corresponding power flows.
%PF
Check this box to display branch flow units.
Meters
Select from the check boxes in this section to display readings for the corresponding meters. Meter
readings available for display are:

Ammeter
Voltmeter
Multi-Meter
Show Units
Check this box to show units for all flow displays.
Required Setting
Select options in this section to display the required control changes/updates. Controls whose required
settings can be displayed are:

Generator V
Generator Mvar
LTC
Shunt Compensation
Show Final Results
Click on this option to display the final value of the control variables.
Show Requested Changes
Click on this option to display the delta changes of the control variables. This option is temporarily
disabled.

Elements
Click on any or all of the check boxes in this section to display annotation information.

22.3.2 AC Page
Color
ID
diagram.
Rating
line diagram.

Device Type Rating
Motor HP / kW
Load kVA / MVA
Bus kA Bracing
kV


A

Z
one-line diagram.

Motor % LRC
D-Y
one-line diagram.

Composite Motor
Use Default Options
22.3.3 AC-DC Page
Color
ID
line diagram.
Rating
one-line diagram.


Device Type Rating
UPS KVA
VFD HP / kW
kV

A
one-line diagram.

Device Type Amp
Composite Network
Use Default Options
22.3.4 DC Page
Color
ID
diagram.
Rating
line diagram.

Device Type Rating
Battery Ampere Hour
Motor HP / kW
Load kW / MW
Converter kW / MW
Cable # of Cables - # of Conductor / Cable Size


kV


A
one-line diagram.

Z
Composite Motor
Use Default Options

Optimal Power Flow Calculation Methods

In traditional load flow studies, the final settings of many system control parameters are based on the
engineers experience and judgment. Sometimes an iterative process is required to reach the final overall
satisfactory settings, which can be very exhaustive for large systems. These system control parameters
are typically transformer LTC settings, generator AVR settings or reactive power generations, series and
shunt static var compensation device settings, the amount of load shed, and some others. In practice, any
of those control settings or any combination of them can be used in a particular system. The Optimal
Power Flow Study can be understood as an intelligent load flow. It employs an optimization technique to
automatically adjust the power system control settings while it solves the load flow equation at the same
time. Moreover, it allows you to specify a wide range of optimization criteria for your system and
enforce limits on system quantities (bus voltage, line flow, etc.) during the optimization process. These
optimization criteria are called objectives, usually the system performance indexes, and the limits are
called constraints.

Mathematically, the optimal power flow study can be expressed as:

Min = f(x,u) (1)

subject to the equality constraints:

P(x,u) = 0 (2)
Q(x,u) = 0 (3)

and the inequality constraints:

u
min
u u
max
(4)
y(x,u)
min
y(x,u) y(x,u)
max
(5)

where

x = Bus voltage vector, called state variable set
u = System control vector, called control variable set
f = Objective functions, expressed in terms of x and u
y = System output vector, a variable set typically including line flows, etc.,
as a function of x and u
P = Real power, expressed in terms of x and u
Q = Reactive power, expressed in terms of x and u

Equation (1) indicates the specified objective function to be minimized or optimized. Equations (2) and
(3) show the system power balance equation (load flow equation) to be solved. Equation (4) specifies the
control upper and lower limits, and equation (5) sets the upper and lower limits for output variables.

The PowerStation Optimal Power Flow Analysis uses the state-of-the-art interior point optimization
technique with the logarithm barrier function and the prime-dual direction searching method. The
algorithm is very efficient and robust, suitable for large size systems with both equality and inequality
constraints. On the power system modeling side, a true AC model is used, which makes it possible for
this program to achieve the ultimate accuracy and capability in solving power system optimal power flow
problems of any size under any feasible conditions.
Optimal Power Flow Required Data

22.5 Required Data
The Optimal Power Flow Study essentially requires all the data needed for a regular load flow study, plus
a few additional data specific for the optimal power flow calculation, and all the settings in the Optimal
Power Flow Study Case Editor. A summary of the required data for different types of components for
OPF calculations is given in this section.
Bus Data
Bus ID
Nominal kV
Load Diversity Factor (Loading Option is Set to Max or Min Diversity Factor)
Area Number & Zone Number
Branch Data
Transformer ID
Rated kV & MVA
Positive Sequence Impedance, Impedance Variation, & Tolerance
X/R Ratio
Tap Settings
LTC Settings, if the Transformer LTC is Used as a Control
Max MVA, if the Transformer Flow is Constrained
Type, Size, Rated kV, # of Conductors per Phase, & Length
Use Library Data or Enter Cable Resistance, Reactance, and Susceptance Values for Positive Sequence
Allowable Ampacity, if the Cable/Transmission Line Flow is Constrained
Impedance
Impedance ID
Resistance, Reactance, & Susceptance Values for Positive Sequence
Rated Current & kV
X/R Ratio & Impedance for Positive Sequences & Tolerance
Amp Rating, if the Reactor Flow is Constrained
Power Grid (Utility) Data
Power Grid (Utility) ID
Nominal kV
MW Loading, & Mvar Limits (Qmax & Qmin) for Voltage Control Mode
Energy Cost Data (Min MW, Max MW, MW and $Cost Points)

Rated kV
%V, MW Loading, & Mvar Limits (Qmax & Qmin) for Voltage Control Mode
Fuel Cost Data (Min MW, Max MW, Model Type, MW and $Cost Points)
Quantity
Rated kW/hp & kV
Induction Machine (Motor or Generator) ID
Quantity
Rated kW/hp & kV
Load & Shunt Device Data
Other load and shunt devices include static load, lumped load, capacitor, MOV, charger/converter, &
UPS
Device ID
Rated kVA/MVA & kV
Power Factor
Harmonic Filter Data
Device ID
Filter Type
Xl & Q for Reactors
R, if Applicable
Phase Connection

Study Case ID
Barrier Factor
Power Mismatch
Max. Iteration
Objective Precision
Loading Category
Loading Condition (if Operating P & Q is selected)
Load Diversity Factor Option & Associated Parameters
Charger Loading Option
Initial Voltage Option
Infeasibility Handling Option
Objectives & Weight Factors; Exponents, if Applicable
LTC Controls & Associated Parameters
Generator AVR Controls & Associated Parameters
Generator MW Controls & Associated Parameters
Shunt Compensation Controls & Associated Parameters
Bus Voltage Constraints & Associated Parameters
Branch Flow Constraints & Associated Parameters

Optimal Power Flow Output Reports

22.6 Output Reports
The OPF calculation results are reported both on the one-line diagram and in the text format. You can use
the Optimal Power Flow Report Manager (from the Study Toolbar) or View Output Report button (from
the Study Case Toolbar) to view the output reports.
22.6.1 Optimal Power Flow Report Manager
Click on the Report Manager button on the Study Toolbar to open the Optimal Power Flow Report
Manager. The Optimal Power Flow Report Manager provides different formats for both text and Crystal
Reports. Currently, only the TextRept format is available. The editor includes four pages (Complete,
Input, Result, and Summary) representing different sections of the output report. There are several fields
and buttons common to every page, as described below.
Output Report Name
Project File Name
Help
OK / Cancel
Click on the OK button to dismiss the editor and view the selected output report. If no selection is made,
it will simply dismiss the editor. Click on the Cancel button to dismiss the editor without viewing the
report.
Complete Page
From this page, you can select the report format that gives you the complete output report. The complete
report includes input data, results, and summary reports. Currently only the TextRept in ASCII format is
available.


Input Page
This page allows you to select different formats for viewing input data, grouped according to type.
Crystal Report Formats for various input reports will be available in the future version of PowerStation.
Result Page
This page provides the formats for different calculation results. Crystal Report Formats for various
output reports will be available in the future version of PowerStation.
Summary Page
This page provides the formats for different summary reports. Crystal Report Formats for various
summary reports will be available in the future version of PowerStation.
TextRept.

22.6.3 Optimal Power Flow Text Report
default viewer in the ETAPS.INI file to the viewer of your choice.

For Notepad, WordPad, and Microsoft Word applications, we have recommend settings that are explained
in the Printing & Plotting Chapter.

By clicking on the View Output Report button on the Study Case Toolbar or selecting the TextRept
format from the Optimal Power Flow Report Manager, you will be able to open and view the text output
report for the optimal power flow study.

The optimal power flow study text report contains the following major data sections:

Bus Input Data
This section reports the input data related to system buses, including bus number, bus ID, bus nominal
kV, area number, zone number, and the total number of buses in the system.

Bus # Bus ID kV Gen P Gen Q Mtr P Mtr Q Stc P Stc Q Area Zone
----- ------------- ------ ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ---- ----
1 Bus1 13.80 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 1 1
2 Bus2 2.40 20.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 1 1
3 Bus3 2.40 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 1 1
4 Bus4 2.40 0.000 0.000 20.400 12.643 5.100 3.161 1 1
4 buses read in.
Generator Input Data
This section reports the input data related to the generators in the system, including generator number,
MW and Mvar, upper and lower limits for real power and reactive power generation, and the total number
of the generators in the system. Note that the power grid (utility) is also counted as a generator.

Gen # Conn. Bus MW Mvar Pmax Pmin Qmax Qmin
----- ------------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------
1 Bus2 20.00 0.00 20.00 20.00 15.00 -15.00
2 Bus1 0.00 0.00 99999.00 -99999.00 0.00 0.00
2 generators read in.
Line Input Data
This section reports the input data related to all branches (lines) in the system, including line number,
From and To bus IDs, R, X and Y values of the line in pu, and the total number of lines.

Line# From Bus ID To Bus ID R X Y
----- ----------- ------------- ------- ------- -------
1 Bus2 Bus4 0.0645 0.1053 0.0000
2 Bus3 Bus4 0.1291 0.2106 0.0000
3 Bus1 Bus2 0.0901 1.3971 0.0000
4 Bus1 Bus3 0.0901 1.3971 0.0000
4 branches read in.
Transformer Tap & LTC Input Data
This section reports the input data related to system LTCs, including tap number, From and To bus IDs of
the associated transformer, initial tap setting, maximum and minimum limits of the LTC, step change of
the LTC, and the total number of LTCs. Note that only LTCs which are selected as the controls are
included.

Tap # From Bus ID To Bus ID Tap Max Min Step
----- ------------ ------------ ------- ------- ------- -------
1 Bus1 Bus2 0.0000 10.0000 -10.0000 0.0063
2 Bus1 Bus3 0.0000 10.0000 -10.0000 0.0063
2 transformers read in.

Other Control Variable Input Data
If there are other control variables selected in the Optimal Power Flow Study Case Editor, such as
generator fuel cost, load shed, shunt compensation and series compensation, then they will also be
reported in the corresponding sections.
Branch Flow Constraint Input Data
This section reports the input data related to the branch flow constraints, including the From and To bus
number and ID of the branch, area number, maximum and minimum flows allowed, and the flow type.

From Bus ID Area To Bus ID Area Flow(min) Flow(max) Type
----- ----------- ---- ----- ----------- ---- --------- --------- -----
2 Bus2 1 4 Bus4 1 0.000 6000.000 Amps
1 Bus1 1 3 Bus3 1 0.000 6.000 MVA
Input Variable Summary
This section summarizes the total variables defined for the given system in the current study.
Classification of the variables is purely from the optimization point of view. They include the total
number of voltage angles, voltage magnitudes, transformer LTCs, generator MW and Mvar, and
constrained branch flows.

Optimization Summary
Free Variables:
--------------------
Angles : 3
Voltages : 3
Transformers : 2
MW variables: 1
Mvar gener. : 2
Branch Flows: 2
Total optim.: 13
Objective Output
This section reports the final computed objectives after the optimization solution is reached.

Minimum R loss objective: 0.004732
Minimum X loss objective: 0.012301
Bus Voltage Output
This section reports the bus voltage output with both magnitude in percent of its nominal value and phase
angle in degree.

Bus# Bus ID Vmag Vang
---- ------------ -------- --------
1 Bus1 100.0000 0.0000
2 Bus2 101.7727 -1.7707
3 Bus3 100.4670 -2.5219
4 Bus4 99.1109 -2.6503

Generator MW & Mvar Output
This section reports the generator MW and Mvar generation as a result of the optimization.

Gen # Conn. Bus Vmag MW Mvar
----- ------------- -------- -------- --------
1 Bus2 100.0000 20.0000 13.2644
2 Bus1 101.7727 5.8830 3.7132
Branch Flow Output
This section reports the final branch flows in Mw and Mvar. Flows from both ends of a branch are
reported.

Line# From Bus ID To Bus ID MW Mvar
----- ------------ ------------- ------- -------
1 Bus2 Bus4 22.1980 12.2343
1 Bus4 Bus2 -21.7978 -11.5810
2 Bus3 Bus4 3.6519 4.2317
2 Bus4 Bus3 -3.6119 -4.1665
3 Bus1 Bus2 2.2031 -0.9500
3 Bus2 Bus1 -2.1980 1.0295
4 Bus1 Bus3 3.6798 4.6642
4 Bus3 Bus1 -3.6519 -4.2317
Transformer Tap & LTC Setting Output
This section reports the optimized transformer tap and LTC settings. Settings are in percent, including
both off-nominal tap and LTC tap.

Tap# From Bus ID To Bus ID Tap
---- ------------ ------------ ------
1 Bus1 Bus2 -0.6024
2 Bus1 Bus3 -6.3495
System Summary
This section summarizes the total system loading, generation, and losses.

Total System Power Balance:
---------------------------
Active Reactive
------ --------
Fixed Load: 2.040E+01 1.264E+01
Shunt Devices: 5.010E+00 -3.105E+00
Line Charging: 0.000E+00
Generation: 2.588E+01 1.698E+01
Power Losses: 4.732E-01 1.230E+00
Largest mismatch:-9.261E-05 8.757E-04 1 Bus1
Optimal Power Flow One-Line Diagram Displayed Results

The one-line diagram display shows study results after the current calculation is completed. Different
results can be chosen and displayed by setting appropriate options in the Optimal Power Flow Display
Option Editor. A sample one-line diagram display for an optimal power flow study is shown here.

ETAP

PowerStation
4.0
User Guide
Copyright 2001
All Rights Reserved





Southern California

(949) 462-0100 Sales
(949) 462-0400 Fax

Chapter 23

Reliability Assessment Analysis

Distribution system reliability assessment is concerned with the availability and quality of power supply
at each customers service entrance. Analysis of customer failure statistics shows that failures in
distribution systems contribute as much as 90% towards the unavailability of supply to a load as
compared with other parts of electric power systems. These statistics reinforce the need for reliability
evaluation of distribution systems.

The basic reliability indices normally used to predict or assess the reliability of a distribution system are
the three reliability indices:

Load point average failure rate ,
Average outage duration r,
Annual unavailability U

In order to incorporate the severity or significance of a system outage, two expanded sets of indices can
be calculated, by using these three basic indices, the number, and average load of customers connected at
each load point in the system, and the customer interruption cost. One set is the system reliability indices:

System Average Interruption Frequency Index (SAIFI),
System Average Interruption Duration Index (SAIDI),
Customer Average Interruption Duration Index (CAIDI),
Average Service Availability Index (ASAI),
Average Service Unavailability Index (ASUI)

These additional indices can be used to assess the overall behavior of the distribution system. The other
set is the reliability cost/worth indices:

Expected Energy Not Supply (EENS),
Expected Interruption Cost (ECOST),
Interrupted Energy Assessment Rate (IEAR)
Reliability Assessment Analysis Toolbar

The indices EENS, ECOST, and IEAR can be those at each load points or for the overall system. All
these indices can be used to evaluate the reliability of an existing distribution system and to provide
useful planning information regarding improvements to existing systems and the design of new
distribution systems. Moreover, in order to analyze the sensitivity of a reliability index EENS or ECOST
with respect to failure rate of different elements, element contributions to that index and their rankings
can be used. The rankings can be for a load point or the overall system.

Using ETAP PowerStation Reliability Analysis program, all the indices and rankings given above can be
evaluated. The program provides you with the best tool to efficiently model various power system
elements and devices to include their effects on the distribution system reliability, such as fault isolation
and load restoration through the operation of switching devices. This program is quite suitable for
reliability analysis of large-scale systems of general configurations. By using this program, the
distribution system reliability can be assessed, and the merits of various reinforcement schemes available
to the planner can be quantitatively evaluated to ensure that limited capital resources are used to achieve
the greatest possible improvement in the system reliability.

Some of the main features of the ETAP PowerStation Distribution System Reliability Analysis Study are
summarized below:

Common & Integrated Database
Fully Inherited 3-D Data Structure, Including Infinite Presentations, Unlimited Configurations, &
Multiple Data Revisions
Looped, Radial, or Combined Systems
Systems with Multiple Source Buses (Generators/Utilities)
Fault Isolation and Load Restoration
Modeling of Single-Pole Double-Throw Switches
Modeling of Normally Closed/Open Tie Circuit Connections
User-Expandable Sector Interruption Cost Library
Three Basic Reliability Indices (, r, U) for each load point
Overall System Reliability Indices (SAIFI, SAIDI, CAIDI, ASAI, ASUI)
Reliability Cost/Worth Indices EENS, ECOST and IEAR for each load point
Reliability Cost/Worth Indices EENS, ECOST and IEAR for the Overall System
Element Contributions to the Load Point EENS and ECOST and Their Rankings
Element Contributions to the Overall System EENS and ECOST and Their Rankings
Graphic Plots of Element Contributions and Their Rankings for the Load Point EENS and ECOST for
Viewing & Printing
Graphic Plots of Element Contributions and Their Rankings for the Overall System EENS and
ECOST for Viewing & Printing
Tabulated Input Data, Load Point Reliability Indices, Overall System Reliability Indices, Element
Contributions and their rankings
Reliability Assessment Analysis System Analysis Toolbar

Reliability System Analysis Toolbar
The Distribution System Reliability Analysis Toolbar will appear on the screen when you are in the
Distribution System Reliability Analysis Study mode. This toolbar has six function keys as shown below.

Run Distribution System Reliability Analysis

Distribution System Reliability Analysis Display Options

View Distribution System Reliability Output File

Distribution System Reliability Analysis Plots


Get Online Data

Get Archived Data

Run Distribution System Reliability Analysis
Select a study case from the Study Case Toolbar when you are in Distribution System Reliability
Analysis Study mode. Click on the Run Distribution System Reliability Analysis button to perform a
Distribution System Reliability Analysis study. A dialog box will appear for you to specify the output
report name if the output file name is set to the Prompt in the Output Report list box. The Distribution
System Reliability Analysis study results will appear on the one-line diagram and can be viewed in output
report tabulated formats and plot formats.
Distribution System Reliability Analysis Display Options
Click on the Distribution System Reliability Analysis Display Options button to customize the one-line
diagram annotation display options under the Distribution System Reliability Analysis Study mode, and
to specify the load point reliability indices to be displayed. See Display Options for more information.
View Output File
Click on this button to open up the Distribution System Reliability Analysis Report Manager dialog box
from which you can select a variety of pre-formatted output files. Select a file type and click on the OK
button to bring up the output file. A detailed explanation of the Distribution System Reliability Analysis
Report Manager is given in section 27.6.

Reliability Assessment Analysis System Analysis Toolbar


This list contains all the output files in the current project folder.
Distribution Reliability Analysis Plots
To view plots of EENS/ECOST rankings, click on this icon to bring up a dialog box to select load
points/buses/system from a list.
The Stop Sign button is normally disabled. When a distribution system reliability analysis has been
initiated, this button becomes enabled and shows a red stop sign. Clicking on this button will terminate
the current calculation. One-line diagram displays will not be available if you terminate the calculation
before it completes, and the output report will be incomplete.
Get On-Line Data
This button is reserved for the on-line application, PSMS.
Get Archived Data
T

his button is reserved for the on-line application, PSMS.

Reliability Assessment Analysis Study Case Editor

The Distribution System Reliability Analysis Study Case Editor contains solution control variables, report
options, and component/system plot display selection. PowerStation allows you to create and save an
unlimited number of study cases for each type of study. Like any other study types, you can easily switch
between different distribution system reliability analysis study cases. This feature is designed to organize
your study efforts and save you time.

A study case can be used for any combination of any configuration status, one-line diagram presentation,
and Base/Revision Data.

To create a new distribution system reliability analysis study case, go to the Project View, right-click on
the Distribution System Reliability Analysis sub-folder inside the Study Case folder, and select Create
New. The program will then create a new study case, which is a copy of the default study case, and it can
be added to the Distribution System Reliability Analysis sub-folder.

When you are in the Distribution System Reliability Analysis mode, you can access the Distribution
System Reliability Analysis Study Case Editor by clicking on the Study Case button on the Study Case
Toolbar. You can also access this editor from the Project View by clicking on the Distribution System
Reliability Analysis sub-folder under the Study Cases folder.

The Distribution System Reliability Analysis Study Case Editor consists of three pages: Info page,
Sensitivity Analysis Report page and the Plot page.

23.1.1 Info Page
This page is provided for you to specify some general solution parameters and study case information.

Study Case ID
Loading
In this section, you can specify the system loading conditions for the Distribution System Reliability
Analysis.
Category
Select one of the 10 loading categories for this study case. With the selection of any category,
PowerStation uses the percent loading of individual motors and static loads as specified for the selected
category. Note that you can assign loading to each one of the 10 categories in the Nameplate page,
Loading page, or Rating page for induction machines, synchronous motors, static loads, lumped loads,
MOVs, capacitors, UPSs, inverters, and chargers, respectively.

None
Select Normal to use the percent loading of each load as entered for the selected loading category, i.e., no
Bus Maximum
When the Maximum bus loading option is selected, the loading of all motors and static loads will be
multiplied by the maximum diversity factor of the bus that they are directly connected to. Using this
option, you can define the different loading for reliability analysis studies with each bus having a different
maximum diversity factor. This study option is helpful when the future loading of the electrical system
has to be considered.
Bus Minimum
When the Minimum bus loading option is selected, the loading of all motors and static loads will be
multiplied by the bus minimum diversity factor of the bus that they are directly connected to. Using this
option, you can define the different loading for reliability analysis studies with each bus having a different
minimum diversity factor.

This study option may be useful in some cases where the effect of light loading condition needs to be
investigated.
Global
When this option is selected, PowerStation will ask you to enter global diversity factors for motors and
static loads, respectively. When you select this option, PowerStation will globally multiply all motors
and static loads of the selected loading category with the entered values. When using this option you, can
define the different loading for reliability analysis studies with fixed diversity factors for all loads.

by 25% above their values as specified by the selected loading category. This value can be smaller or
greater than 100% .
Operating Load
Check this option to use operating P and Q as specified in the relevant component editors. Note that if
this option is selected, it is required that a load flow calculation is run first in order to obtain the operating
load.
Charger Loading
Load Category
Select this option to use the P and Q specified in the Loading Category section of Charger Editor for
chargers.
Operating Load
Select this option to use the P and Q as specified in the Operating Load section of the Charger Editor.
Note that if this option is selected, it is required that a DC load flow calculation is run first in order to
estimate the charger load.

Remarks 2
nd
Line
23.1.2 System Index Report Page
In this page, you can specify the numbers of elements that contribute most to system reliability indices
EENS and ECOST and their rankings will be reported.

System Contribution Ranking for Reporting
No of Most Contributing Elements to EENS
Select the number of the elements that contribute most to the index EENS.
No of Most Contributing Elements to ECOST

Select the number of the elements that contribute most to the index ECOST.

23.1.3 Load Index Report Page
In this page, you can specify the numbers of elements that contribute most to load point reliability indices
EENS and ECOST and their rankings will be reported.

Element Contribution Ranking for Reporting
No of Most Contributing Elements to EENS
Select the number of the elements that contribute most to the index EENS.
No of Most Contributing Elements to ECOST
Select the number of the elements that contribute most to the index ECOST.



23.1.4 Plot Page
Select the elements you want to display in plot format.

System Index
Plot/Tabulate System Reliability Indices
Check this box to plot/tabulate system reliability indices.
Element Index
In this section, you can specify the load points that will be plotted.
Element Type
Select types of components or devices from the list. Only the components associated with the listed types
can be selected for plotting/tabulating.
Plot Options
Device ID
This table provides a list of the devices or components for the given Device Type. You can select a
device or component and click next to it under the Plot/Tabulate column.
Plot/Tabulate
You also can include a device or component in the plot list by first selecting that device or component,
and then checking this box. An X will be placed next to this device or component in the Plot/Tabulate
column.
Reliability Assessment Analysis Display Options

The Distribution System Reliability Analysis Display Options consist of a Results page, and three pages
for AC, AC-DC, and DC info annotations. Note that the colors and displayed annotations selected for
each study case are specific to that study
23.2.1 Results Page
Select the information annotations to be displayed on the one-line diagram.

Color
Select the color for the reliability analysis result annotations to be displayed on the one-line diagram.

Load Point Reliability Indices
Average Failure Rate
Check this box to display the average failure rate for the Buses/Generators/Load Points checked from
Display Results below.
Average Outage Duration r
Check this box to display the average outage duration for the Buses/Generators/Load Points checked from
Annual Outage U
Check this box to display the annual unavailability for the Buses/Generators/Load Points checked from
Expected Energy Not Supplied EENS
Check this box to display the EENS for the Buses/Generators/Load Points checked from Display Results
below. Note that the EENS for a bus is defined as the EENS of the loads that are directly connected to
the bus owing to the interruption of this bus.
Expected Interruption Cost ECOST
Check this box to display the ECOST for the Buses/Generators/Load Points checked from Display
Results below. Note that the EENS for a bus is defined as the ECOST of the loads that are directly
connected to the bus owing to the interruption of this bus.
Interruption Energy Assessment Rate IEAR
Check this box to display the IEAR for the Buses/Generators/Load Points checked from Display Results
below.
Display Results
Buses
Check this box to display the reliability indices checked from the section of Load Point Reliability Indices
for buses.
Generators
for generators.
Load Points
for load points.


23.2.2 AC Info Page
Color
ID
Select the check boxes under this heading to display the IDs of the selected AC elements on the one-line
diagram.
Rating
line diagram.

Device Type Rating
Motor HP / kW
Load kVA / MVA
Bus kA Bracing
kV

A
one-line diagram.

Z
one-line diagram.
D-Y

one-line diagram.
Composite Motor
Click on this check box to display the composite motor IDs on the one-line diagram, then select the color
in which the IDs will be displayed.
Use Default Options
23.2.3 AC-DC Info Page
Color
ID
line diagram.
Rating
one-line diagram.

Device Type
Charger
Inverter
UPS
VFD
kV
A
one-line diagram.
Composite Network
Use Default Options

23.2.4 DC Info Page
Color
ID
Select check boxes under this heading to display the IDs of selected DC elements on the one-line
diagram.
Rating
line diagram.

Device Type
Battery
Motor
Load
Elementary Diagram
Converter
Branch
Cable
Bus
Node
CB
Fuse
Switch
Composite Motor
kV
elements on the one-line diagram. For cables/lines, the kV check box is replaced by the button. Click
on this button to display the cable/line conductor type on the one-line diagram.
A
one-line diagram. For cables/lines, the Amp check box is replaced by the button. Click on this button
to display the cable/line length on the one-line diagram.
Z
one-line diagram.
Composite Motor
Click on this check box to display the composite motor IDs on the one-line diagram, then select the color
in which the IDs will be displayed.
Use Default Options
Reliability Assessment Analysis Modeling and Calculation Method

23.3 Modeling and Calculation Method
Electric distribution system reliability analysis involves modeling different components of distribution
systems, computing reliability indices at load points and for the overall AC system, and ranking the
elements that contribute to the load point/bus/system indices EENS and ECOST. This section briefly
discusses some fundamentals and underlying principles on the PowerStation Distribution System
Reliability Analysis program, with the focus on applications with PowerStation
23.3.1 AC Component and System Modeling
A two-state up/down representation is used for the operation/repair cycle of an element (such as lines,
cables, transformers, breaks, fuses, switches, loads and busbars).
Normally open tie circuit connections can be taken into account. Currently, a normally open tie
circuit connection is defined in the ETAP as the connection that satisfies: (i) the two buses that it is
connected are energized (ii) it is composed of only the components of PDs, (iii) the connection is in
service and (iv) it contains at least one normally open PD.
As a default option of a sector interruption cost library, a Standard Industrial Classification (SIC) is
used to divide customers into seven categories of large user, industrial, commercial, agriculture,
residential, government & institutions and office & buildings. Users can change this library.
The sector interruption cost library gives the Sector Customer Damage Functions (SCDF), i.e., the
interruption costs for several discrete outage durations. A log-log interpolation of the cost data is
used where the interruption duration lies between two separate times. In the case of durations greater
than the largest duration, a linear extrapolation with the same slope as that between the second largest
and largest durations will be used to calculate the interruption cost.
Any switching device, such as breaker, fuse, contactor, and switch, has the function of fault isolation.
Only an overcurrent protective device (such as breaker and fuse) can interrupt fault currents.
A fault in a radial sub-system is interrupted by the nearest overcurrent PD on its source side; a fault in
a meshed sub-system is interrupted by its surrounding nearest overcurrent PDs. The associated set of
interrupted load points (LPs) is called the interrupted LP zone of the faulted element.
A fault in a radial sub-system is isolated by the nearest switching device of any kind on its source
side; a fault in a meshed sub-system is isolated by its surrounding nearest switching devices. The
associated set of isolated load points is called the isolated LP zone of the faulted element.
The affected load points in the isolated LP zone of an element will be connected after the repair of the
faulty component, while the ones contained in its interrupted LP zone but outside its isolated LP zone
will have the supply restored after a short switching or sectionalizing time.
The switching time for a load is internally set to the switching time of the component that is the
nearest to this load. The component may be an equivalent cable, switching device, or bus.
The EENS and ECOST for a bus are respectively defined as the Expected Energy Not Supply and
Expected Interruption Cost of the loads that are directly connected to that bus due to the outage of
that bus.
23.3.2 AC-DC Converter Models
In the current version of ETAP PowerStation, the distribution system reliability analysis involves only
AC systems. The AC-DC converters are modeled below.
Charger & UPS
In the current version of ETAP PowerStation, when performing AC reliability analyses, chargers and
UPSs are considered as loads connected to their input AC buses.

Inverter
An inverter is treated as a power supply source like a generator or utility.
Variable Frequency Drive (VFD)
A VFD can only be inserted between a motor or a lump load and its terminal bus, and is treated as a
branch between the terminal bus and the motor.
23.3.3 Modeling Assumptions/Limitations
The current distribution system reliability analysis makes the following assumptions:

Only AC systems are considered.
All switching devices operate successfully when required.
Switching devices can be opened whenever possible to isolate a fault. Power supply can be restored
to provide power to as many load points as possible using appropriate switching actions and available
alternative supplies.
All failures are statistically independent. Multi-order faults are ignored.

23.3.4 Distribution System Reliability Indices
The distribution system reliability is usually measured in terms of several indices that are defined below.
Average Failure Rate at Load Point I,
i
(f/yr)

=
Ne j
j e i ,

Where
e,j
is the average failure rate of element j; N
e
is the total number of the elements whose faults will
interrupt load point i.
Annual Outage Duration at Load Point i, U
i
(hr/yr)
=
Ne j
ij j e i
r U
,

where r
ij
is the failure duration at load point i due to a failed element j.

Average Outage Duration at Load Point i, r
i
(hr)

i i i
U r / =
Expected Energy Not Supplied Index at Load Point i, EENS
i
(MWhr/yr)

EENS
i
=
i i
U P

where P
i
is the average load of load point i.

Expected Interruption Cost Index at Load Point i, ECOST
i
(k$/yr)

=
Ne j
j e ij i i
r f P ECOST
,
) (
where f(r
ij
) is the SCDF.
Interrupted Energy Assessment Rate Index at Load Point i, IEAR
i
($/kWhr)

i
i
i
EENS
ECOST
IEAR =
System Average Interruption Frequency Index, SAIFI(f/customer.yr)
= =
i
i i
N
N
SAIFI
served customer of number Total

ons interrupti customer of number Total

where N
i
is the number of customers at load point i; the symbol means the summation for all load
points.

System Average Interruption Duration Index, SAIDI(hr/customer.yr)

= =
i
i i
N
N U
SAIDI
durations on interrupti customer of Sum

Customer Average Interruption Duration Index, CAIDI(hr/customer interruption)
i
i
i i
N
N U
CAIDI
= =
ons interrupti customer of number Total
s duration on interrupti customer of Sum


Average Service Availability Index, ASAI(pu)

=
=
8760
8760
demanded hours Customer
service available of hours Customer
i
i i i
N
U N N
ASAI

Where 8760 is the number of hours in a calendar year.
Average Service Unavailability Index, ASUI(pu)

ASAI ASUI =1
System Expected Energy Not Supplied Index, EENS(MWhr/yr)

EENS = Total energy not supplied by the system =
i
EENS

System Expected Interruption Cost Index, ECOST(k$/yr)

=
i
ECOST ECOST
Average Energy Not Supplied Index, AENS(MWhr/customer.yr)

= =
i
i
N
EENS
AENS
system by the supplied not energy Total

System Interrupted Energy Assessment Rate Index, IEAR($/kWhr)

EENS
ECOST
IEAR =

23.3.5 Distribution System Reliability Analysis Study
The Distribution System Reliability Analysis employs a new analytical algorithm to assess the reliability
indices of mixed radial and meshed distribution systems. This algorithm basically uses the algorithm for
radial distribution systems since the meshed network, if any, is first converted to a radial network.
Therefore, the employed algorithm is quite efficient and suitable for large-scale distribution systems of
general configurations.

The distribution system reliability analysis study generates crystal output reports showing the system
input data, reliability indices results, element ranking information, and tabulation of the results. Some of
these results can also be viewed directly from the one-line diagram using the Distribution System
Reliability Display Options Editor.
Reliability Assessment Analysis Required Data

23.4 Required Data
To run a distribution system reliability analysis study, you only need to provide some reliability-related
data, such as failure rates, repair times, and switching times of network elements. A summary of these
data for different types of elements is given in this section. Note that Maintenance Outage Rate and
Maintenance Outage Time below are not used in reliability calculation for this version.
Bus Data
Active Failure Rate
Repair Time
Switching Time
Replacement Time
Branch Data
Active Failure Rate
Passive Failure Rate
Repair Time
Switching Time
Replacement Time
Length
Active Failure Rate
Repair Time
Switching Time
Replacement Time
Impedance & Current-Limiting Reactor
Active Failure Rate
Repair Time
Switching Time
Replacement Time
Power Grid (Utility) & Synchronous Generator Data
Active Failure Rate
Repair Time
Switching Time
Replacement Time

Active Failure Rate
Repair Time
Replacement Time
Load Sector
Quantity (No. of Loads)
Active Failure Rate
Repair Time
Replacement Time
Load Sector
Static Load Data
Active Failure Rate
Repair Time
Replacement Time
Load Sector
Lumped Load Data
Active Failure Rate
Repair Time
Replacement Time
Load Sector
UPS Data
Active Failure Rate
Repair Time
Switching Time
Replacement Time
Load Sector
VFD Data
Active Failure Rate
Repair Time
Switching Time
Replacement Time

Charger Data
Active Failure Rate
Repair Time
Switching Time
Replacement Time
Load Sector
Inverter Data
Active Failure Rate
Repair Time
Switching Time
Replacement Time
Study Case ID
Report Option (for Plots and Crystal Reports)
Reliability Assessment Analysis Output Report

23.5 Output Report
Output reports for distribution system reliability analysis studies are available in different levels and are
arranged into two formats: crystal output report, one-line diagram display.
23.5.1 Distribution System Reliability Analysis Report Manager
Click on the View Output File button on the Distribution System Reliability Analysis Toolbar to open the
Distribution System Reliability Analysis Report Manager. The Distribution System Reliability Analysis
Report Manager provides different formats for Crystal Reports and consists of four pages.
Complete Page
From this page you can select the report format that gives you the complete output report.
Input Page
This page provides the formats for different input data.
Result Page
This page provides the formats for different calculation results.
Summary Page
This page provides the summary from calculation results.


23.5.2 Distribution System Reliability Crystal Report
If the last study you have run is the distribution system reliability analysis, then by clicking on the Report
Manager button on the Study Case Toolbar or by selecting the Crystal Report format from the Reliability
Analysis Toolbar, you will be able to open and view the crystal output report for the distribution system
reliability analysis study. The distribution system reliability analysis study crystal report contains the
following major sections:
Cover Page
This is the first page of the distribution system reliability analysis study crystal report. It includes the
information from a number of different types of buses, branches, unit system, project file name, and the
output file name and its location.


Bus Input Data
This section reports the input data related to system buses, including their ID, nominal kV, failure rate,
repair time, switching time and replacement time.

Load Input Data
This section reports the input data related to system loads that include synchronous motor, induction
machine, static Load, lumped load, UPS, charger, capacitor, and filter. The input data reported are load
ID and type, connected bus ID, average load, user sector ID, # of loads, failure rate, repair time and
replacement time.


Source Input Data
This section reports the input data related to system sources that include power grid (utility) and
synchronous generator. The input data reported are source connected bus ID, source ID and type, failure
rate, repair time, switching time and replacement time.

Branch Input Data
This section reports the input data related to system branches that include cables, transmission lines,
impedances, reactors, and 2-winding and 3-winding transformers. The input data reported are branch ID,
branch type, length (if any), total failure rate, active failure rate, repair time, switching time, and
replacement time.


Branch Connection
This section reports branch connection information for all branches in the system. It shows the branch
ID, branch type, from which bus and to which bus it is connected.


Sector Interruption Cost Library Data
This section lists the library data of sector interruption cost.


Switching Device Input Data
This section reports the input data related to protective devices. The input data reported are switching
device ID, switching device type, active failure rate, passive failure rate, repair time, switching time and
replacement time.


Load Point Report
In the Load Point Report section, the load point ID, user sector, load point connected bus ID (if any),
average (active) failure rate, average outage duration, annual outage duration, EENS, ECOST and IEAR
are reported. Note that only the buses that are selected for plotting in the Reliability Analysis Study Case
Editor are tabulated.

EENS Sensitivity Analysis
In the EENS Sensitivity Analysis section, the system/bus/load point ID and type, corresponding
contributing element ID, type and EENS are reported.


ECOST Sensitivity Analysis
In the ECOST Sensitivity Analysis section, the system/bus/load point ID and type, corresponding
contributing element ID, type and ECOST are reported.


Summary
The Summary section includes the information from a number of different types of buses, branches,
system frequency, unit system, project file name, output file name, and its location.


23.5.3 Distribution System Reliability Analysis Display
By using the Distribution System Reliability Analysis Display Options Editor, you can choose different
results to be displayed on the one-line diagram for the distribution system reliability analysis study. The
following screen capture shows a one-line diagram display.
Reliability Assessment Analysis Plots

23.6 Plots
Plots are available for EENS ranking and ECOST ranking of system/load points. To select a plot, click
on the Reliability Analysis Plots button located on the Reliability Analysis Toolbar.
Device Type
Device ID
Select the devices that you want to plot. This box lists all the devices that are selected in the Reliability
Study Case editor, Plot page, for the selected device type. Multiple devices can be selected.
Plot Type
For Reliability Analysis plot, the following curves are available.
EENS
Plot EENS ranking for the selected devices.
ECOST
Plot ECOST ranking for the selected devices.

Reliability Assessment Analysis Plots

A set of sample plots is shown below.


Chapter 24

DC Short-Circuit Analysis

In order to assure the safe operation of DC systems, whenever there is any changes in the system related
to sources, loads, and power transmission components, a DC Short-Circuit Analysis must be carried out
to evaluate system conditions under a fault and assess protective device ratings. A complete short-circuit
calculation should provide details of fault current variations at the fault location as well as for
contributing branches, from the initiation of the fault to its end. Due to the complexities involved in
source behaviors and the non-linearity characteristics of the equipment, such calculations are very
extensive and therefore the maximum short-circuit current is often calculated instead for examination of
protective device ratings.

DC Short-Circuit Analysis Introduction

In compliance with IEEE Std. 946, the PowerStation DC short-circuit program calculates the total fault
current, current contributions from different sources, and the rise time constant of the total fault current.
It can conduct calculations on both radial and looped systems. The fault under consideration is a short-
circuit between the positive and the negative terminals at the fault location. The contributing sources to
the short-circuit current include charger/rectifier, UPS, battery, and DC motor. These sources can be
modeled as a constant current source or a constant voltage source behind an impedance. For a
charger/rectifier source, the AC system equivalent impedance on the AC side can also be considered.

For each DC protective device, PowerStation calculates the bus fault current as well as the maximum
current that flows through the device and flags the user in an outstanding color for underrated devices.

The calculation results are reported in a Crystal Reports format as well as in a one-line diagram display.
The Crystal Reports format provides detailed information about the study, including all the input data
used in the calculation, fault current, contributions from different sources, and device rating validation
summary, etc. The format and content of the Crystal Reports output report can be customized by the user.
The one-line diagram display provides you with a direct visual representation of the system under fault
conditions. It displays the short-circuit current at the faulted bus, fault current contributions on
surrounding branches, as well as the system voltage profile under the fault.

DC Short-Circuit Analysis Study Toolbar

24.1 Study Toolbar
The DC Short-Circuit Study Toolbar will appear on the screen when you are in DC Short-Circuit Study
mode.

Run DC Short-Circuit Analysis
DC Short-Circuit Display Options
DC Short-Circuit Report Manager
Get Online Data
Get Archived Data

Run DC Short-Circuit Analysis
Click on this button to run a DC short-circuit calculation.
Display Options
Click on this button to customize the information and results annotations displayed on the one-line
diagram in DC Short-Circuit mode.
DC Short-Circuit Report Manager
Click on this button to open the DC Short-Circuit Report Manager. Here you can specify the Crystal
Reports format for your output reports. A detailed explanation of the DC Short-Circuit Report Manager
is in the Output Reports section.
Get On-Line Data
If the ETAP key installed on your computer has the on-line feature, you can copy the online data from the
on-line presentation to the current presentation.
Get Archived Data

DC Short-Circuit Analysis Study Case Editor

The DC Short-Circuit Study Case Editor contains parameter settings required to perform a short-circuit
calculation. The calculation results are dependent on these settings. When a new study case is created,
ETAP PowerStation provides you with the default parameters. However, you want to check these
parameters to make sure that they are set as required.

The DC Short-Circuit Study Case Editor contains two pages: the Info page and the Source Model page.
In the Info page, you can select faulted buses and specify contribution level, etc. In the Source Model
page, you specify the type of model for chargers and batteries, as well as what loads need to be
considered in a study.
24.2.1 Info Page

Study Case ID
ID
Enter a unique alphanumeric ID with a maximum of 12 characters.
Report
Specify the contribution level the report should encompass.
Bus Selection
Here you can select which buses to Fault, Dont Fault, or click on the All Buses check box to fault all
buses. Note that you can fault buses (or remove faults) directly from the one-line diagram by right
clicking on the desired bus.
Remarks 2
nd
Line

24.2.2 Source Model Page
This page allows you to specify the type of models you want the program to use in a short-circuit
calculation.

Charger Contributions Based on
A charger can be represented as a constant current source or a constant voltage source behind impedance.
As a constant current source, it injects a constant current into the system when a fault occurs.
Editor Selection
Click on this option to select the model type as specified in the editor for individual chargers.
Fixed SC Contribution
Click on this option to use the constant current model for all the charges in the system.
AC System Impedance
Click on this option to use the constant voltage model for all the charges in the system.
Battery Contributions Based on
A battery can be represented as a constant current source or a constant voltage source behind impedance.
As a constant current source, it injects a constant current into the system when a fault occurs. The current
injected into the system is equal to a constant multiplied by its 1-minute discharge rate.
Editor Selection
Click on this option to select the model type as specified in the editor for individual batteries.
Constant Current (K*1-Min-Rating*String)
Click on this option to use the constant current model for all the batteries in the system.

Voc Behind Battery Impedance
Click on this option to use the constant voltage model for all the batteries in the system.
Motor Internal Voltage
A motor, or the motor load portion of a lump load, is modeled as a constant voltage source behind an
impedance. You can specify the internal voltage value by selecting one of the following two options:
100% of Motor Rated Voltage
Click on this option to use the motor rated voltage as the internal voltage.
Percent of Motor Rated Voltage
Click on this option to specify the motor internal voltage in percent based on the motor rated voltage.
Short-Circuit Contributions Based on
This section provides you with an option to skip certain load elements in a short-circuit analysis. Note
that static loads are also considered in a DC short-circuit analysis and their presence reduces total fault
current.
Load Status Only
Select this option to include loads in the short-circuit study based on load status. For the current system
configuration, loads that have either the Continuous or Intermittent status will be considered in the study.
Loads that have the Spare status will be excluded from the study. Note that when this option is selected
all of the elementary diagram loads will be included in the study.
Load Category Only
Select this option to use the loading percent to determine which loads will be included in the short-circuit
calculation. Once this option is selected, you can specify a loading category in the loading category
selection box. All loads that have non-zero loading percent for the selected loading category will be
included in the short-circuit calculation.
Use Both Above Options
Select this option to use both load status and loading category to determine loads to be included in the
short-circuit calculation. When this option is selected, all the loads that satisfy either or both of the above
two criterions will be included in the short-circuit study.

DC Short-Circuit Analysis Display Options

The DC Short-Circuit Analysis Display Options consist of a Results page and three pages for AC, AC-
DC, and DC info annotations. Note that the colors and displayed annotations selected for each study are
24.3.1 Results Page

Color
The drop down list allows you to select a color for displaying calculation results on the one-line diagram.
Show Units
When this box is checked the unit for the calculation results will be displayed on the one-line diagram
along with the results.
Voltage
Bus
Click on this check box to display bus voltage on the one-line diagram.

Bus Voltage Unit Selection
From the drop down list you can select to display bus voltage in percent or volt.
Display Faulted Bus
Fault Current Rise Time-Constant
Click on this option to display the fault current rise time-constant in ms for faulted buses.
Equivalent Fault R
Click on this option to display the equivalent fault resistance in ohms for faulted buses.
Display Contribution
Converter, Battery, & Load
Click on any or all of these check boxes to display short-circuit contribution from these components on
24.3.2 AC Page
Color
ID
diagram.
Rating
line diagram.

Device Type Rating
Motor HP / kW
Load kVA / MVA
Bus kA Bracing

kV

A

Z

Motor % LRC
D-Y
one-line diagram.

Composite Motor
Use Default Options
24.3.3 AC-DC Page
Color

ID
line diagram.
Rating
one-line diagram.

Device Type Rating
UPS kVA
VFD HP / kW
kV
A
one-line diagram.

Device Type Amp
Composite Network
Use Default Options
24.3.4 DC Page
Color
ID
diagram.

Rating
line diagram.

Device Type Rating
Battery Ampere Hour
Motor HP / kW
Load kW / MW
Converter kW / MW
kV

A
one-line diagram.

Z
Composite Motor
Use Default Options

DC Short-Circuit Analysis Calculation Methods

The PowerStation DC short-circuit program can perform fault analysis for a radial or a looped system. It
calculates the maximum system fault current and contributions from individual sources. The fault under
consideration is assumed to be a short-circuit between the positive and negative terminals at the fault
location. Fault current contributing sources include chargers/rectifiers, UPS, batteries, and DC motors.
These sources can be modeled either as constant current sources or constant voltage sources behind an
impedance, as specified by the user. It is assumed that these sources will reach their maximum
contribution level at the same time, which results in a conservative solution. The program also calculates
the rise time of fault current based on the equivalent R and L at the fault location. When calculating
short-circuit current, inductance values for all of the system components are neglected. These inductance
values are used in calculating fault current rise time.
24.4.1 Procedure for DC Short-Circuit Calculation
In a DC short-circuit calculation, a contributing source may be represented by different models, either as a
voltage source or as a current source. Even the sources that are represented as constant voltage sources
may have different per unit values. This is different from the AC short-circuit calculation by the IEEE
method, where a prefault voltage is specified and a circuit network is solved to find the fault current. In
the DC short-circuit calculation, a two-step procedure is adopted that applies the superposition theorem to
calculate fault current. The two steps are voltage profile calculation and short-circuit current calculation.

In the first step of the calculation, the short-circuit current sources such as charger, UPS, battery, and
motor are modeled as specified in the study case editor and individual element editors. They may be
modeled as constant current sources or as constant voltage sources behind an impedance. Based on this
system, a load flow calculation is conducted to determine system voltage profile and current flows. These
voltage values will be used in the second step as the prefault voltage for short current calculation.

In the second step of the calculation, the program calculates fault current and contributions for each bus to
be faulted with the bus voltage calculated in the first step as the prefault voltage.

In addition to fault current, the program also calculates the equivalent R and L at the faulted bus, based on
the separate R and L network. Using the equivalent R and L, it calculates the current rise time constant
for the fault.
24.4.2 Short-Circuit Current Rise Time Constant Calculation
The short-circuit current reaches its maximum value at a rate depending on the system configuration and
the resistance and inductance values of all the elements in the system. For a radial system, it depends on
the system R/L ratio, which is simple to calculate. However, for a looped network with multiple sources,
it is rather complicated to determine the rise time constant of the short-circuit current.

PowerStation calculates the rise time constant based on the equivalent R and L at the fault location.


24.4.3 Device Rating Evaluation
One of the major purposes of conducting a short-circuit calculation is to evaluate device rating under fault
conditions, such as bus rating and protective device ratings. For each DC protective device, PowerStation
calculates the bus fault current and the maximum current that flows through the device. The program
then compares the device rating against the maximum through current. If an underrated condition occurs,
PowerStation will flag the underrated condition in the text report as well as in the one-line display.
24.4.4 Component Models
Charger
A charger can be represented as a constant current source or a constant voltage source behind an
impedance. As a constant current source, it injects into the system a constant current equal to its rated
current multiplied by the Imax specified in the Rating page of the charger editor.

When modeled as a constant voltage source behind an impedance, the rated voltage is used as the internal
voltage. The AC system Z specified in the SC page of the Charger Editor is converted to the DC side and
used as the impedance in the model.
UPS
A UPS (Uninterruptible Power Supply) is represented as a constant current source. It injects into the
system a constant current equal to its rated current multiplied by the Imax specified in the Rating page of
the UPS Editor.
Battery
A battery can be represented as a constant current source or a constant voltage source behind an
impedance. As a constant current source, it injects into the system a constant current equal to its 1 minute
discharging current multiplied by a K factor specified in the SC page of the Battery Editor.

When modeled as a constant voltage source behind an impedance, the internal voltage depends on the
option selected in the Battery Editor. These options include using the rated voltage or the value
calculated based on the battery specific gravity and minimum operating temperature.
DC Converter
A DC converter is used to change the voltage level in a DC system. If a fault occurs on the output side of
the system, the DC converter is modeled as a constant current source injecting into the system a constant
current. This current is equal to its rated current multiplied by the Imax specified in the Rating page of
the DC Converter Editor.

When calculating fault current contributions, the calculation does not extend into the input side of the
system. In case a DC converter has the same input and output rated voltage values, and it is involved in
any loop as the only DC converter, the program stops the calculation and posts a message to inform the
user.

DC Motor
A DC motor is modeled as a constant voltage source behind an impedance. The internal voltage value
can be specified in the DC Short-Circuit Study Case Editor. The impedance is specified in the SC page of
the DC Motor Editor.
DC Lumped Load
A DC lumped load is modeled as a constant voltage source behind an impedance. The internal voltage
value can be specified in the DC Short-Circuit Study Case Editor. The impedance is specified in the SC
Imp page of the DC Lumped Load Editor.

Note that only the motor loads of the lumped loads contribute short-circuit currents, i.e., if the percent
motor load of a lumped load is greater than zero, the motor load part will be modeled the same as a DC
motor, while the static load part will be represented as a static load with no short-circuit contribution.
DC Static & Elementary Diagram Loads
DC static loads are included in short-circuit calculations. The presence of static loads provide shunt paths
for short-circuit current and hence reduce the total fault current. An elementary diagram (ED) load is
treated the same as a static load.
DC Cable
In order to achieve conservative results, in a DC short-circuit analysis, the cable resistance is calculated at
the minimum temperature entered in the Cable Editor.

DC Short-Circuit Analysis Required Data

24.5 Required Data
24.5.1 Source
Charger
Info Page
Charger ID
Bus connection data
Rating Page
All the data in this page are required for DC load flow calculations
SC Page
Data in the SC Contribution for DC System section
AC System Z data is required if the Based on AC System Z option is selected
UPS
Info Page
UPS ID
Bus connection data
Rating Page
AC rating data
DC rating data
Auction diode option
SC Imp Page
SC Contribution to DC System section data
Battery
Info Page
Battery ID
Bus connection data
Number of strings
Rating Page
Number of cells
SC Page
Battery Library type data: Rp, time constant, SG, Vpc, and 1-min-rating
Short-circuit model data
External impedance data
Voc per cell data

24.5.2 Load
DC Motor
Info Page
Motor ID
Bus connection data
Configuration status
Quantity
Rating Page
Rating data
Load category data
SC Page
SC parameters
Lump Load
Info Page
Lump load ID
Bus connection data
Rating Page
Rating section data
Motor/static load percent
Load category data
SC ImpPage
SC parameters
Static Load
Info Page
Static load ID
Bus connection data
Quantity
Rating Page
Rating section data
Load category data

ED Load
Info Page
ED load ID
Bus connection data
Rating Page
Rating section data
Load category data
24.5.3 Branch
DC Cable
Info Page
Cable ID
Bus connection data
Cable length
Number of cables per phase
Impedance Page
Cable resistance and inductance
Units section data
Base and minimum operating temperature
DC Impedance
Info Page
DC impedance ID
Bus connection data
Impedance resistance and inductance
24.5.4 DC Converter
Info Page
DC converter ID
Bus connection data
Rating Page
Rating section data
SC contribution data

24.5.5 Protective Device
If the data for a protective device has been entered by the user, the DC short-circuit calculation will
compare the short-circuit current against device rating and flag the user if the device is underrated.
DC CB
Info Page
ID
Bus connection data
Rated V
SC kA
DC Fuse
Info Page
ID
Bus connection data
Rating Page
Rated V
Interrupting kA
DC Single-Throw Switch
Info Page
ID
Bus connection data
Rated V
Momentary kA
DC Double-Throw Switch
Info Page
ID
Bus connection data
Rated V
Momentary kA
24.5.6 Study Case
Similar to any other study, you are always required to run a DC short-circuit calculation. When a DC
short-circuit calculation is initiated by the user, PowerStation uses the study case currently showing in the
study case editor in the calculation. Every field in a study case has its default value. However, it is
important to set the values in the study case correctly to meet your calculation requirements.
DC Short-Circuit Analysis Output Reports

24.6 Output Reports
The DC short-circuit calculation results are reported both on the one-line diagram and in the Crystal
Reports format. The graphical one-line diagram displays the calculated fault currents, time constant for
current rise, equivalent resistance at the faulted bus, as well as fault contributions from neighboring buses.
You can use the Display Options Editor to specify the content to be displayed. It also flags underrated
protective devices in red.

The Crystal Reports format provides you with detailed information for a DC short-circuit analysis. You
can utilize the DC Short-Circuit Report Manager to help you view the output report.
24.6.1 DC Short-Circuit Report Manager
To open the DC Short-Circuit Report Manager, simply click on the View Output File button on the DC
Short-Circuit Toolbar. The editor includes four pages (Complete, Input, Result, and Summary)
available for different portions of the report and view it via Crystal Reports. There are several fields and
buttons common to every page, as described below.

Output Report Name
Project File Name
Help
OK / Cancel
Complete Page
On this page there is only one format available, Complete, which brings up the complete report for the
DC short-circuit study. The complete report includes input data, results, and summary reports.


Input Data Page
include:

Battery
Branch Connection
Bus
Cable
Converter
Cover
Loads

Result Page
This page allows you to select formats to view the short-circuit result portion of the output report.


Summary Page
This page allows you to select formats to view summary reports of the output report. The only summary
report format available is the Interrupting Current format.

Complete.


24.6.3 Input Data
Input data are grouped together according to element type. The following are some samples of input data.
Cable & Impedance Data
The cable and impedance input data page prints resistance and inductance values for these branches,
along with connection information. The resistance value for cables has been adjusted to the minimum
operating temperature. The inductance value is used to calculate time constant for fault current rise.

Converter Input Data
The converter input data section includes converter rating and the model used in the study. UPS and DC
converters are always represented as constant current sources. A charger may be modeled as a constant
voltage source behind system Z or a constant current source, depending on the selection in the DC Short-
Circuit Study Case Editor and the Charger Editor. When modeled as a constant V behind system Z, the
constant V is the charger AC input bus voltage converted to the DC side based on the rated voltage ratio.
The value is printed in the V
sys
column.


Load Data
The load data section prints input data for motors, lump loads, static loads, and ED loads. The Vin
column shows the internal voltage of motors and the motor load portion of lump loads.

24.6.4 Short-Circuit Report
This section of the report shows the calculation results, arranged in such a way that each faulted bus is
started from a new page. It shows the total fault current as well as bus voltage and short-circuit
contributions from the neighboring buses up to the level specified in the DC Short-Circuit Study Case
Editor. It also prints the equivalent R and L at the faulted bus and the time constant for fault current rise.


24.6.5 Short-Circuit Summary
The Summary page presents the comparison between fault current and protective device capability. In
order for the program to make the comparison, the interrupting capability has to be entered from the
editors of individual protective devices. The kA Fault Current column prints the total bus fault current as
well as the maximum fault current flowing through the protective device. If the device capability is less
than the maximum fault current for a device, a flag will be raised for the device.

ETAP

PowerStation
4.0
User Guide
Copyright 2001
All Rights Reserved





Southern California

(949) 462-0100 Sales
(949) 462-0400 Fax

Chapter 25

DC Load Flow Analysis

The DC power system is an integral part of the whole electric power system, providing power to control
circuits and backup power during emergency conditions. It includes DC power sources, their distribution
systems, and vital supporting systems that supply power to critical equipment.

In the past, due to lack of analytical tools, DC power system design and validation studies have been
mainly done by hand-calculations, limited to simplified calculations on simple system configurations.
Such simplified hand-calculations cannot meet todays requirement for DC system analysis, especially for
the nuclear power industry. ETAP DC program is an ideal tool for you to perform DC system studies. It
provides a diversity of DC components and calculations required for conducting DC power system design
and validation studies. It can handle any system configuration at ease, including radial system; loop
system and AC-DC interconnected system.

A variety of DC components and AC-DC power conversion components are available for you to model
the DC power system, including:

DC battery
DC bus and node
DC cable
DC machine, static load, lumped load, and elementary diagram (ED) load
DC protective devices, such as circuit breaker, fuse, switch, and contact
DC composite network and DC composite motor
DC-DC converter
AC-DC power conversion components, such as charger/rectifier, inverter, and UPS

DC load flow analysis is an essential study for DC system design and operating condition assessment.
The PowerStation load flow program calculates bus voltage profile and branch power flows for a user-
specified loading category. It validates the calculated operating conditions against element operating
limits, such as bus maximum/minimum operating voltage, branch allowable current, and source
maximum output, etc. In case any abnormal operating condition occurs in the system, PowerStation flags
the user in the one-line diagram by showing the element in an outstanding color.
DC Load Flow Analysis Introduction
In order to simulate correctly various operating modes for AC-DC interface components in actual
operations, PowerStation provides different models to represent them in load flow studies. It
automatically selects the one that is suitable for the actual operating condition. For example, a charger
may be operating in constant voltage, constant current, or non-effective modes, depending on its terminal
bus voltage and loading conditions.

The calculation results are reported in a Crystal Reports format as well as in the one-line diagram display.
The Crystal Reports format provides detailed information about the study, including all the input data
used in the calculation, system voltage profile, branch power flows, and overloading validation results,
etc. The one-line diagram display provides you with a direct visual representation of system operating
conditions.

DC Load Flow Analysis Study Toolbar

25.1 Study Toolbar
The DC Load Flow Study Toolbar will appear on the screen when you are in DC Load Flow Study mode.

Run DC Load Flow Studies
DC Load Flow Display Options
DC Load Flow Report Manager
Get Online Data
Get Archived Data
Run DC Load Flow Studies
Click on this button to run a DC load flow calculation using the parameters currently selected in the DC
Load Flow Study Case Editor. Note that PowerStation will give you an error message list indicating
missing information if your system is not set up properly .
DC Load Flow Display Options
diagram in DC Load Flow mode.
DC Load Flow Report Manger
Click on this button to open the DC Load Flow Report Manager. Here, you can select the Crystal Reports
format for your output reports. A detailed explanation of the DC Load Flow Report Manager is in the
Output Reports section.
Get On-Line Data
the online presentation to the current presentation.
Get Archived Data

DC Load Flow Analysis Study Case Editor
The DC Load Flow Study Case Editor allows you to specify variables related to DC load flow
calculations and output reports.

Study Case ID
unique ID, which consists of the letters DCLF plus an integer, starting with the number 1 and increases as
the number of study cases increases.
Solution Parameters (Newton-Raphson)
The PowerStation DC load flow study uses the Newton-Raphson method for calculation.
Maximum Iteration
of iterations, a message will show up to flag the user.
Precision
Enter the value for the solution precision to be used to check for convergence. This value determines how
precise you want the final solution to be. A load flow solution is considered reached if, between two
iterations, the maximum bus voltage difference in per unit is less than the specified precision value.
Loading
Category
Select one of the 10 Loading Categories for this load flow study. The selection applies to all DC load
elements and UPS.
None
Select Normal to use the percent loading of each load for the selected Loading Category.
Maximum
When the Maximum Loading option is selected, each load will be multiplied by the Maximum Load
Diversity Factor entered in the Bus Editor for the bus where the load is connected.

Minimum
When the Minimum Loading option is selected, each load will be multiplied by the Minimum Load
Diversity Factor entered in the Bus Editor for the bus where the load is connected.

The minimum bus loading study option may be used to check system voltages under a minimum (light)
loading condition.
Global Diversity Factor
When this option is selected, the Constant kVA and Constant Z edit boxes will be enabled, allowing you
to enter the diversity factors in percent for constant kVA and constant impedance loads.

Note that these factors are global throughout the whole system. A motor load multiplying factor of 125%
implies that the motor loads of all buses are increased by 25% above their nominal values. This value
can be smaller or greater than 100%.
Constant kVA
Enter the global diversity factor in percent for constant kVA loads.
Constant Z
Enter the global diversity factor in percent for constant impedance loads.
Inverter Loading
There are two options for including inverter loads: operating load and loading category load.
Use Inverter Operating Load
Select this option to use the load displayed in the operating load section in the Loading page of the
Inverter Editor. When the operating load is used, the diversity factor will not be applied to the inverter
load. Note that these operating loading values can only be updated by running an AC load flow
calculation. They cannot be edited directly by the user.
Use Inverter Loading Category
Select this option to use the loading category selected in the Category list.
Motor Load
A motor normally behaves as a constant power load when its terminal voltage is close to its rated voltage.
However, when its terminal voltage deviates considerably from its rated voltage, its behavior becomes
similar to a static load. This section allows you to set the voltage range within which you want a motor to
be modeled as a constant power load.
Constant kW if V is within Range
Click on this check box for setting VMin and VMax. If this box is not checked, all of the motor loads
will be modeled as constant power loads regardless of their terminal voltage. Please note that when only
constant current sources in the system are present, this can prohibit load flow calculations from reaching a
solution.
Vmin
Enter the minimum voltage in percent, below which the motor load will be modeled as a constant
impedance load.
Vmax
Enter the maximum voltage in percent, above which the motor load will be modeled as a constant
impedance load.
Initial Condition
Use Bus Voltages
Select this option to use the initial voltage value in the Bus Editor as the initial voltage in a load flow
calculation. Please note that the bus initial voltage can be updated automatically in load flow studies.
Use Fixed Values
This option allows you to specify a flat initial voltage for all buses in a load flow calculation.
Report
Critical Voltage
flagged and included in the critical undervoltage and overvoltage bus summary report.
Marginal Voltage
flagged as a marginally undervoltage or overvoltage bus.
Bus Voltage
Calculated bus voltages seen in the output report can be printed in kV or in percent of the bus nominal
voltages. Select your preference by clicking on Percent or kV.
Update
The selected options will be updated after the subsequent load flow run.
Initial Bus Voltage
Select this option to update the values of the bus voltage magnitudes with the result of this load flow run.
Charger/UPS Operating Load
Select this option to update the load provided by chargers/rectifiers. When a UPS is operating as a source
to the DC system, its operating load will also be updated. The AC loads for these sources are calculated
based on the DC power they provide, the losses involved, and their operating power factor.
Remarks 2
nd
Line

DC Load Flow Analysis Display Options

The DC Load Flow Analysis Display Options consist of a Results page and three pages for AC, AC-DC,
25.3.1 Results Page

Color
Select a color from the drop down list for displaying calculation results on the one-line diagram.
Show Units
When this box is checked the unit for the calculation results will be displayed on the one-line diagram
along with the results.
Voltage
Bus
Click on this check box to show the bus voltage in the one-line diagram.
Bus Display Unit
From the drop down list box, you can select to display the bus voltage in percent or in volt.

Power Flows
Power Flow Display Units
Select to display the power flow in kW or MW.
kW and Amp
Select the kW to display power flow Amp to display current in ampere.
% Voltage Drop
Click on the Cable / Z check box to display voltage drop across cables and impedance.
Branch Losses
Click on the kW check box to display branch losses in kW.
Elements
Click on these check boxes to display load flow results for different types of elements, including Branch,
Source, Load, Composite Motor, and Composite Network.
25.3.2 AC Page
This page includes options for displaying information annotations for AC elements.
Color
ID
diagram.
Rating
line diagram.

Device Type Rating
Motor HP / kW
Load kVA / MVA
Bus kA Bracing

kV

A

Z

Motor % LRC
D-Y
one-line diagram.

Composite Motor
Use Default Options
25.3.3 AC-DC Page
Color

ID
line diagram.
Rating
one-line diagram.

Device Type Rating
UPS kVA
VFD HP / kW
kV
A
one-line diagram.

Device Type Amp
Composite Network
Use Default Options
25.3.4 DC Page
Color
ID
diagram.

Rating
line diagram.

Device Type Rating
Battery Ampere Hour
Motor HP / kW
Load kW / MW
Converter kW / MW
kV

A
one-line diagram.

Z
Composite Motor
Use Default Options

DC Load Flow Analysis Calculation Methods

The PowerStation DC Load Flow calculation is an iterative process, due to the presence of constant
power loads and power converter components. The objective of a load flow calculation is to find bus
voltage values with specified system loads and sources. Based on the obtained bus voltage results, branch
flows can then be calculated. The Newton-Raphson method is used in solving DC load flow calculations.
This method is fast in convergence speed, bus it has a relatively high requirement on initial bus voltage
values.

In a DC load flow calculation, the loads involved in the system are constant power loads and constant
impedance loads. The sources include constant voltage source and constant current source. A constant
voltage source maintains its terminal bus voltage at a fixed value, while a constant current source injects a
fixed value of current into the system.

Because a converter component, such as a charger, has a maximum current limit, it is a constant voltage
source only when its output current is not larger than its current limit. Once the output current is over the
limit, it becomes a current source. Therefore, the operating mode of a converter component and its model
cannot be predefined. It varies depending on system loads and configurations, and is determined during
the process of calculation.
Newton-Raphson Method
The Newton-Raphson method formulates and solves iteratively the following load flow equation:

I V J =

where I is a vector for bus current injection mismatch between the specified value and the calculated
value. Here the constant power loads are converted to current injections using the calculated voltage. V
is a vector for bus voltage incremental and J is a coefficient matrix called the Jacobian matrix.

The Newton-Raphson method possesses a unique quadratic convergence characteristic. It usually has a
very fast convergence speed compared to other load flow calculation methods. However, the method is
highly dependent of the initial value of bus voltages. A careful selection of bus voltage initial values is
strongly recommended.

It should be noted that when the system contains constant power loads and a charger (or a UPS) is the
only source in the system, if the source is overloaded and it changes to a constant current source, there
may be problems in reaching a solution. This can occur when the source switches to a constant current
source, it provides less current than it would as a constant voltage source. For a constant power load, its
terminal voltage increases when it draws less current in order to maintain a constant power. It can lead to
abnormally high voltage values as the calculation resolves. At such high voltage values, the motor loads
actually behave as constant impedance loads. In order to resolve this situation, you may check the option
of Constant kW if V within Range in the study case and properly set the VMin and VMax values.

25.4.1 Component Models and Operations
Charger
Model
In DC load flow calculations, a charger can be represented in one of three models: constant voltage source
model, constant current source model, and inactive mode model.

A charger is normally operating as a constant voltage source, maintaining its terminal bus voltage at the
regulated value specified in the Charger Editor. However, when the current drawn from the charger is
more than I
max
, the maximum current it can provide while keeping its terminal voltage constant at the
same time, it becomes a constant current source. The current drawn from the charger is then kept at I
max
,
while the terminal voltage drifts, depending on system loads and other sources.

Whenever the terminal bus voltage is lower than the regulated voltage of a charger, it will try to raise the
voltage to the regulated value until the charger current reaches I
max
. On the contrary, if for some reason,
such as other sources being connected to the same buses, the terminal bus voltage is higher than the
charger regulated voltage, the charger becomes inactive as if it is switched off from the system.
Operating Mode
As a constant voltage source, a charge can operate in either the Constant Vdc mode or the Fixed Firing
Angle mode, depending on the selection made in the Rating page of the Charger Editor.

In the Constant Vdc mode, the charger output voltage is regulated at either the floating voltage or the
equalizing voltage, as selected in the Rating page of the Charger Editor.

In the Fixed Firing Angle mode, the output voltage depends on the firing angle and the input bus voltage
value. When the load to the charge varies, its output voltage should change accordingly. However, since
the internal voltage drop of a charger is not considered in the calculation, the charger output voltage is
assumed to be constant in the load flow studies.
Converter
From the Information page of the Charger Editor, you may select the type of charger as Converter, which
means it is actually a rectifier. As a rectifier, it behaves almost the same as a charger, except that it does
not have floating and equalizing voltage values. When operating in the Constant Vdc mode, the regulated
voltage is equal to its rated output voltage.
UPS
UPS as Source or Load
To the DC system, a UPS (Uninterruptible Power Supply) can be a source or a load. When a UPS is
connected to an energized input AC bus and it does not have an auction diode (the Auction Diode option
in the Rating page of the UPS Editor is not checked), it is considered as a source to the DC system.

When a UPS is not connected to an energized AC input bus, it becomes a load to the DC system.

When a UPS is connected to an energized input AC bus, but it has an auction diode, the diode prevents
the flow from entering into the DC system, so the UPS will not be a source to the DC system. In this
case, either the DC system or the AC input bus may provide the power to loads connected to the UPS
output AC bus, depending on the voltage values of the AC input bus and the DC bus. After converting to
the UPS AC output terminal using the UPS rated voltage ratio, if the DC bus voltage is higher than the
AC bus voltage, the DC system will provide the power to the UPS output load; otherwise, the AC input
bus provides the power to the load.
UPS as Source to the DC System
When operating as a source to the DC system, a UPS behaves very similarly to a charger. It can be
represented in one of three models: constant voltage source model, constant current source model, and
inactive mode model.

As a source, a UPS is normally operating as a constant voltage source, maintaining its terminal bus
voltage at its rated voltage. However, when the current drawn from the UPS is more than I
max
, the
maximum current it can provide while keeping its terminal voltage constant at the same time, it becomes
a constant current source. The current drawn from the UPS is then kept at I
max
, while the terminal voltage
drifts, depending on system loads and other sources.

Whenever the terminal bus voltage is lower than the regulated voltage of a UPS, it will try to raise the
voltage to the regulated value, until the UPS current reaches I
max
. On the contrary, if for some reason,
such as other sources being connected to the same buses, the terminal bus voltage is higher than the
charger regulated voltage, the UPS becomes inactive as if it is switched off from the system.
Constant Voltage Source Operating Mode
As a constant voltage source, a UPS can operate in either the Constant Vdc mode or the Fixed Firing
Angle mode, depending on the selections made in the Rating page of the UPS Editor.

In the Constant Vdc mode, the UPS output voltage is regulated at its rated DC voltage.

In the Fixed Firing Angle mode, the output voltage depends on the firing angle and the input bus voltage
value. When the load to the charge varies, its output voltage should change accordingly. However, since
the internal voltage drop of a UPS is not considered in the calculation, the UPS output voltage is assumed
to be constant in load flow studies.
UPS as Load to the DC System
When a UPS is a load to the DC system, it is a constant kW load. The loading category load is used in
load flow studies.
Battery
Under normal operation conditions, a battery serves as a back up source. It actively provides power to
loads only when other sources, such as chargers, become de-energized or fail to maintain system voltage
at the required level.

In DC load flow analyses, a battery can be represented in one of two models: a constant voltage source
model and an inactive mode model. When the terminal bus voltage is higher or equal to the rated voltage
of a battery, it is in the inactive mode and is not supplying any power to the system. A battery that has just
been discharged is actually a load to the DC system. Due to the complexity in determining quantitatively
the load for a charging battery, it is not considered as a load in the DC load flow analysis. It is considered
in the battery sizing calculation.

When the terminal bus voltage of a battery is lower than its rated voltage, the battery becomes an active
source. It is represented by a constant voltage source (at battery rated voltage) behind battery resistance.
DC Converter
A DC converter can change DC voltage from one level to another, either increasing or decreasing the
voltage value. It has the capability of regulating the output voltage as long as it is not overloaded. It is
unidirectional in terms of power flow, allowing the current flowing from the input terminal to the output
terminal only.

In DC load flow calculations, a DC converter can be represented in one of three models: constant voltage
source model, constant current source model, and inactive mode model.

A DC converter is normally operating as a constant voltage source, maintaining its terminal bus voltage at
the regulated value specified in the DC converter editor. However, when the current drawn from the DC
converter is more than I
max
, the maximum current it can provide while keeping its terminal voltage
constant at the same time, it becomes a constant current source. The current drawn from the DC
converter is then kept at I
max
, while the terminal voltage drifts, depending on system loads and other
sources.

Whenever the terminal bus voltage is lower than the regulated voltage of a DC converter, it will try to
raise the voltage to the regulated value, until the DC converter current reaches I
max
. On the contrary, if for
some reason, such as other sources being connected to the same buses, the terminal bus voltage is higher
than the DC converter regulated voltage, the DC converter becomes inactive as if it is switched off from
the system.

When a DC converter is operating as a source, either a constant voltage source or a constant current
source, it is a constant power load to its input bus, with a load equal to output power plus converter losses.
25.4.2 Factors Considered in DC Load Flow Calculations
Load Flow Convergence
Due to the iterative process used for solving load flow and the Newton-Raphson method used, DC load
flow may have convergence problems for some ill-conditioned systems and some special operating
conditions.

Consider a system that contains motor loads and a charger (or a UPS) as the only source in the system. If
the source is overloaded and it changes to a constant current source, there may be problems in reaching a
solution. This is because when the source switches to a constant current source, it provides less current
than it would as a constant voltage source. For a constant power load, its terminal voltage increases when
it is drawing less current in order to maintain a constant power. It can lead to abnormally high voltage
values and causes the calculation process to fail to converge.

In the real world, at such high voltage values, the motor loads actually behave as constant impedance
loads. In order to resolve this situation, the DC load flow study case provides you with the opportunity to
set a voltage range for motor loads to be modeled as constant power loads. In the DC Load Flow Study
Case Editor, you can check the option of Constant kW if V within Range and properly set the VMin and
VMax values. Once the motor terminal voltage is outside this range, the motor will be modeled as a
constant impedance load. However, inverter or UPS loads are always modeled as constant power loads.
DC Load Flow Analysis Required Data

25.5 Required Data
25.5.1 Source
Charger
Info Page
Charger ID
Bus connection data
Rating Page
All data in this page are required for DC load flow calculations
UPS
Info Page
UPS ID
Bus connection data
Rating Page
All data in this page are required for DC load flow calculations
Loading Page
Loading data. If a UPS is a load to the DC system, that is, when the it is not connected to an energized
AC input bus or the Auction Diode option in the Rating page is checked, the data entered is used to
determine the UPS load to the DC system.
Battery
Info Page
Battery ID
Bus connection data
Number of strings
Battery Library type data. The resistance per positive plate (Rp) is used to calculate battery internal
resistance.
Rating Page
Number of cells
Rated voltage
SC Page
External resistance R

25.5.2 Load
DC Motor
Info Page
Motor ID
Bus connection data
Demand factor
Quantity
Rating Page
Rating section data
Load category data
Lumped Load
Info Page
Lumped load ID
Bus connection data
Demand factor
Rating Page
Rating section data
Motor/static load percent
Load category data
Static Load
Info Page
Static load ID
Bus connection data
Demand factor
Quantity
Rating Page
Rating section data
Load category data

ED Load
Info Page
ED load ID
Bus connection data
Rating Page
Rating section data
Load category data
Inverter
Info Page
Inverter ID
Bus connection data
Demand factor
Rating Page
AC rating section data
DC rating section data
Loading Page
Loading category data
25.5.3 Branch
DC Cable
Info Page
Cable ID
Bus connection data
Cable length
Number of cables per phase
Impedance Page
Cable resistance
Units section data
Base and maximum operating temperature

DC Impedance
Info Page
DC impedance ID
Bus connection data
Impedance resistance
Tie PD (CB, Fuse, Single-Throw & Double-Throw Switches)
Info Page
ID
Bus connection data
25.5.4 DC Converter
Info Page
DC converter ID
Bus connection data
Rating Page
Rating section data
Operating V
out

25.5.5 Study Case
Similar to any other study, you are always required to run a DC load flow calculation. When a DC load
flow calculation is initiated by the user, PowerStation uses the study case currently showing in the study
case editor for the calculation. Every field in a study case has its default value. However, it is important
to set the values correctly in the study case to meet your calculation requirements.

DC Load Flow Analysis Output Reports

25.6 Output Reports
The DC load flow calculation results are reported both on the one-line diagram and in the Crystal Reports
format. The graphical one-line diagram displays the calculated bus voltages, branch flows and voltage
drops, load power consumption, etc. You can use the Display Options Editor to specify the content to be
displayed. It also flags abnormal operating conditions, such as overloaded cables and over- or
undervoltage buses, in different colors.

The Crystal Reports format provides you with detailed information for a DC load flow analysis. You can
utilize the DC Load Flow Report Manager to help you view the output report.
25.6.1 DC Load Flow Report Manager
To open the DC Load Flow Report Manager, simply click on the View Report File button on the DC
Load Flow Toolbar. The editor includes four pages (Complete, Input, Result, and Summary) representing
different sections of the output report. The Report Manager allows you to select formats available for
different portions of the report and view it via Crystal Reports. There are several fields and buttons
common to every page, as described below.
Output Report Name
Project File Name
Help
OK / Cancel
Complete Page
In this page there is only one format available, Complete, which brings up the complete report for the DC
load flow study. The complete report includes input data, results, and summary reports.


Input Data Page
include:
Battery
Branch Connection
Bus
Cable
Charger
Cover
DC Converter
Impedance
Inverter
Loads
UPS

Result Page
This page allows you to select formats to view the load flow result portion of the output report.


Summary Page
This page allows you to select different portions of the load summary to view. Note that some portions of
the summary are available only when you selected specific options in the study case, such as Critical and
Marginal Voltage options.

Branch Flow Summary
Overvoltage & Undervoltage Buses
Summary
Total Sources and Demands

selected format. In the picture shown below, the output report name is RPT-200X and the selected format
is Summary.


25.6.3 Input Data
Input data are grouped together according to element type. The following are some samples of input data.
Bus Input Data

Cable & Impedance Input Data


Converter Input Data

Load Input Data


25.6.4 Load Flow Results
The result section of the output report includes the calculated results of a DC load flow analysis, including
bus voltage, bus loading, and branch flows.
25.6.5 Summary Reports
The load flow summary portion of the output report includes the branch flow summary, the bus over-
/undervoltage summary, and the summary of total system sources and demands.

ETAP

PowerStation
4.0
User Guide
Copyright 2001
All Rights Reserved





Southern California

(949) 462-0100 Sales
(949) 462-0400 Fax

Chapter 26

Battery Sizing & Discharge Analysis

Batteries are an essential part of a critical DC power system, serving as the backup power source under
emergency conditions. During normal operating conditions, a DC system is generally powered by AC
sources through chargers or other ACDC interface components. However, the battery has to provide
power to the system under one of the following conditions:

1. Load on the DC system exceeds the maximum output of the battery charger
2. Output of the battery charger is interrupted
3. Auxiliary AC power is lost

The battery should be sized for the most severe of these conditions, which most likely is the third
condition. When the AC power is lost, batteries will provide power to critical loads and control circuits
for a specified time period so that the AC power source can be recovered or the critical equipment can be
adequately shut down. For example, in US nuclear power plants, it is required that batteries have
sufficient capacity to supply the required load during a loss of AC power for field flashing, control
circuits, DC fuel oil booster pumps, and DC lube oil pumps for a period of four hours. In order to meet
this requirement, battery sizing calculations need to be carried out to determine the appropriate battery
size.

The ETAP PowerStation Battery Sizing program provides you with a powerful tool to accomplish this
task. In complying with IEEE Standard 485, it determines the number of strings, number of cells, and
cell size of a battery for a designated duty cycle. The number of cells is determined to satisfy the
maximum system voltage during the battery charging period and the minimum system voltage during the
battery discharging period. The number of strings and cell size is determined to provide sufficient power
to the load cycle considering the minimum system voltage and the minimum operating temperature. It
also considers different factors that affect battery performance, such as design margin, aging
compensation, initial capacity, and temperature, etc.

The duty cycle for the battery can be a summation of the duty cycles of all the loads that the battery is to
supply power for. It can also be calculated using DC load flow, which considers different characteristics
of constant power load and constant impedance load, their variations to voltage changes, branch voltage
drops and losses. The battery duty cycle includes both random load and non-random load from individual
Battery Sizing & Discharge Analysis Study Toolbar
loads. In compliance with IEEE Standard 485, the load impulses in the battery duty cycle that are less
than one minute are automatically extended to one minute.

To verify the performance of an existing or a sized battery, ETAP PSMS also provides a Battery
Discharging Analysis program. The program calculates the battery capacity, voltage, current, and output
power as the battery discharges through a duty cycle. The battery duty cycle can be calculated from
either load current summation or load flow calculations. When the battery duty cycle is calculated from
load flow, the Battery Discharging Analysis also provides bus voltage and branch power along with
battery output results. Several correction factors used in battery sizing calculation, such as battery
temperature, aging and initial capacity, can also be considered in the battery discharge calculations.
26.1 Study Toolbar
The Battery Sizing Study Toolbar will appear on the screen when you are in Battery Sizing Study mode.

Run Battery Sizing Calculation
Click on this button to initiate a battery sizing calculation. If the battery size is determined, a battery
discharging calculation will automatically follow to verify the battery capability. Note that PowerStation
will give you an error message indicating missing information if you have not entered all of the data
required for the calculation.
Run Battery Discharge Calculation
Click on this button to initiate a battery discharge calculation on an existing battery using the method
specified in the battery sizing info and discharge pages. Just like in battery sizing, PowerStation will give
you an error message if any required data is still missing.
Display Options
diagram in Battery Sizing mode.
Battery Sizing Report Manager
Click on this button to open the Battery Sizing Report Manager. You can also view output reports by
clicking on the View Output Report button on the Study Case Toolbar.
Battery Sizing Plots
Click on this button to view output plots.

Get Online Data
If the ETAP key installed on your computer has the online feature, you can copy the online data from the
online presentation to the current presentation.
Get Archived Data
If the ETAP key installed on your computer has the online feature, you can copy the archived data to the
Battery Sizing & Discharge Analysis Study Case Editor

The Battery Sizing Study Case Editor contains parameter settings required to perform a battery sizing
calculation. The calculation results are dependent on these setting. When a new study case is created,
ETAP PowerStation provides the default parameters. However, it is important to set the values correctly
in the study case to meet your calculation requirements.

The Battery Sizing Study Case Editor includes three pages: the Information page, the Sizing page, and the
Discharge page. On the Information page, you specify the battery to be sized, select the duty cycle to be
considered, and enter the diversity factor that allows you to globally adjust system load.

On the Sizing page, you specify sizing requirements and correction factors for the calculation.

The Discharge page contains parameters for battery discharging calculations and will be available in
future versions of ETAP PowerStation.
26.2.1 Info Page


Study Case ID
ID
unique ID for a new study case.
Battery
ID
Select a battery to be sized from the drop down list.
Duty Cycle From
Specify the method for determining the battery duty cycle. For ETAP PowerStation 3.0, only the Load
Current Summation option is available.
Load Current Summation
Select this option to determine the battery duty cycle by using the load summation method. The battery
duty cycle will be equal to the sum of the load duty cycles for all the loads powered by the battery.
DC Load Flow Calculation
Select this option to determine the battery duty cycle by performing DC load flow calculations. This
method considers branch losses and voltage drops in determining battery duty cycle.
Correction Factor
Temperature
Click on this check box to specify the temperature to be used as correction factor in battery sizing and
discharge calculations. Once the box is checked, you have two choices for specifying the temperature:
using the battery minimum temperature from the Battery Editor or entering a desired temperature value.
Aging Compensation
Enter here the aging compensation correction factor in percent to be used in sizing and discharge
calculations.
Initial Capacity
Enter here the initial capacity correction factor in percent to be used for the battery sizing and discharge
calculations.
Load
Duty Cycle
Select the duty cycle from the dropdown list for battery sizing. Every load has five different duty cycles.
Duration
Select either the Hours or Duty Cycle Span option to specify the length of time to size the battery. You
must specify the length of duration (number of hours) if you use the Hours option by selecting a value
from the dropdown list or entering a value.

Diversity Factor
Specify the load diversity factor in percent. The load used in battery sizing will be multiplied by this
diversity factor.
Remarks 2
nd
Line
26.2.2 Sizing Page

Voltage Requirements
Maximum System Voltage Deviation
Specify the maximum system operating voltage in percent based on the nominal voltage of the terminal
bus of the battery selected for sizing.

Minimum. System Voltage Deviation
Specify the minimum system operating voltage in percent based on the nominal voltage of the terminal
bus of the battery selected for sizing.
Battery Charge Voltage
Specify the required voltage in V/Cell to charge the battery to be sized.
Battery Minimum Discharge Voltage
Specify the minimum discharge voltage in V/Cell for the battery to be sized.
Correction Factor
In this section, you specify the correction factors to be considered in battery sizing calculations.
Temperature
Click on this check box to use the temperature correction factor in battery sizing calculations. Once the
box is checked, the temperature value specified in the Info Page is displayed here.
Aging Compensation.
Click on this check box to use the aging compensation correction factor specified in the Info Page.
Initial Capacity
Click on this check box to use the initial capacity correction factor specified in the Info Page.
Design Margin
Click on this check box to use the design margin correction factor specified in the edit box.
Perform Discharge Calculation
This option will be available in future releases of ETAP PowerStation.
Update Battery Size
This option will be available in future releases of ETAP PowerStation.
Battery Library
Use Sizes Given in Library Only
Select this option to use only the sizes given in the library. For example, if the library has battery curves
for 11, 13, and 21 plates, then only these three sizes will be considered in the battery sizing calculation.
Use Sizes in Library as Min/Max Range
Select this option to use the sizes given in the library as the maximum and minimum limits. For example,
if the library has battery curves for 11, 13, and 21 plates, then it is assumed that batteries with 15, 17, and
19 plates are also available and the characteristic curves of these sizes are assumed to be the same as that
for the 21-plate battery.

Options
Desirable Number of Cells
When this box is checked, in the battery sizing calculation, the value entered in the edit box will be the
number of cells for the battery, if this number is within the acceptable range determined based on the
voltage requirements. In case this number is outside the acceptable range, the number of the cells will be
selected so that the battery rated voltage is closest to the terminal bus rated voltage.
Update Battery Size
If this box is checked, when the battery sizing calculation has completed successfully, the program will
update the battery to the calculated size automatically. In order to make certain that a battery always has
corresponding library data for its size, this field is enabled only when the Use Sizes Given in Library
Only in the Battery Library section is checked.
26.2.3 Discharge Page

Vd Calc Parameters
Battery discharge calculation uses the information included in these fields in order to determine how the
voltage drop calculation will be performed.

Time Step
The Time Step parameter is the time interval at which a plot point is to be generated. A plot point is also
generated at the times when load changes occur. This value will affect time of calculations, especially in
the case that the battery duty cycle is obtained by the load flow method.
Amax Limit
This feature allows the user to specify the maximum voltage value at the battery terminal. The default
value is 100% of the battery rated voltage. The calculated battery voltage will be limited at this value.
Correction Factors
This section of the battery discharge page provides a set of correction factors to be used during the battery
discharge cycle. Similar to battery sizing calculations, the adjusting factors have either a positive or a
negative effect on the battery AH capacity (Amp Hour) or the battery duty cycle. With these features, the
user is able to simulate the effect on the battery of operating temperature, battery maintenance conditions,
and aging factor. The user has the choice of applying the correction factors to the battery duty cycle or to
the battery initial AH capacity. The program calculates a total correction factor by multiplying the
temperature CF and the Aging Compensation CF and then divided by the initial Capacity CF.
Adjust Battery Capacity
If you select this feature, the correction factors are used to the battery capacity. The battery initial
ampere-hour capacity is as the rated capacity divided by the total correction factor.
Adjust Battery Duty Cycle
If this feature is used, the correction factor will used to modify battery duty cycle. The battery duty cycle
used in the discharge calculation is adjusted by multiplying by the total correction factor.
Temperature
Select this check box if you want the temperature correction factor to be used in battery discharge
calculations. This factor has the effect of either increasing or decreasing battery capacity. The
temperature correction factor is applied according to the IEEE method described in standard 485 for
correcting cell size in sizing calculations. The same standard applies for discharge calculations. IEEE
provides values between 4C and +52C. Any value outside of this range is curve fitted using the IEEE
recommended curve-shifting method (PowerStation checks the temperature value and provides a user
message indicating that the entered temperature is out of normal range). When the box is not checked, the
temperature correction factor is assumed to be 100%.
Aging Compensation
Select this check box if you would like to use the aging compensation correction factor in battery
discharge calculations. When this factor is applied, the battery discharge simulation includes a decrease
in battery capacity due to aging. When the box is not checked, the aging correction factor is assumed to
be 100%.
Initial Capacity
Check this check box to use the initial capacity correction factor percent specified in the information
page. When the box is not checked, the initial capacity correction factor is assumed to be 100%.

LF Parameters (Newton-Reason)
This section of the battery sizing discharge page becomes active if the Load Flow duty cycle calculation
method is selected form the info page. If the Current Summation method is used, this section remains
grayed out.
Maximum Iteration
of iterations, a message will show up to flag the user.
Precision
Enter the value for the solution precision to be used to check for convergence. This value determines how
precise you want the final solution to be. A load flow solution is reached if, between two iterations, the
maximum bus voltage difference in per unit is less than the specified precision value.
Initial Condition
Similar to the LF Parameter Section, this part of the discharge page only has an effect if the Load Flow
method for battery discharge is selected from the Info Page. If the load flow method is indeed selected,
then the information entered in this area is used to initialize the Newton-Raphson load flow calculation.
Use Bus Voltage
The Newton- Raphson calculation method is highly dependent on initial conditions. If this radio box is
selected, the initial bus voltage will be set according to the bus nominal voltage multiplied by the initial
voltage entered in the Bus Editor. It should be noted that the DC Load Flow calculation performed for
battery discharge does not update the initial bus voltage values. If initial bus voltage values are required,
then the user should run a DC Load Flow study to update the initial bus voltages, then select this option to
run the discharge calculation using bus initial voltage values.
Use Fixed Value
When selecting this option, the voltage values used to initialize the Newton-Raphson calculation are equal
to the flat fixed voltage percent value specified here.
Motor Load
A motor normally behaves as a constant power load when its terminal voltage is close to its rated voltage.
However, as the battery terminal voltage deviates considerably from its rated voltage, its behavior
becomes similar to a static load. This section allows you to set the voltage range within which you want a
motor to be modeled as a constant power load.
Constant kW if V within Range
Click on this check box for setting VMin and VMax. When the motor terminal voltage is within this
range, it is represented as a constant power load. However, once the voltage is outside this range, it is
automatically converted to a constant impedance load.

If this box is not checked, all of the motor loads will be modeled as constant power loads regardless of
their terminal voltage. Please note that when there are only constant current sources in the system, this
may prohibit load flow calculations from reaching a solution.

Vmin
Enter the minimum voltage in percent, below which the motor load will be modeled as a constant
impedance load.
Vmax
Enter the maximum voltage in percent, above which the motor load will be modeled as a constant
impedance load.
Report
Similar to DC Load Flow Calculations, If at any point during the specified battery discharge cycle (using
DCLF method) a bus voltage falls below the percent value specified in the Under Voltage field, this
information will be flagged in the One-Line diagram. The same is true for buses violating over voltage
limit.
Critical Voltage
flagged. The buses violating the critical voltage limits will be flagged in red color in the one-line
diagram.
Marginal Voltage
flagged as a marginally undervoltage or overvoltage bus. The buses violating the marginal voltage limits
will be flagged in pink color in the one-line diagram.
Bus Voltage
Calculated bus voltages displayed in the plot and one-line diagram can be given in kV or in percent of the
bus nominal voltages. Select your preference by clicking on Percent or V options.
Battery Sizing & Discharge Analysis Display Options

The Battery Sizing Display Options consist of a Results page and three pages for AC, AC-DC, and DC
info annotations. Note that the colors and displayed annotations selected for each study are specific to
that study.
26.3.1 Results Page

Color
Select a color for displaying calculation results on the one-line diagram.
Voltage
Bus Display Unit
From the drop down list, select to display the bus voltage in percent or in volt.

Battery
Click on this check box to show the battery voltage in the one-line diagram.
Bus
Click on this check box to show the bus voltage in the one-line diagram.
Power Flows
Power Flow Display Units
Select the power flow to be displayed in kW or MW.
kW and Amp
Select kW to display power flow or select Amp to display the current in amperes.
Show Units
Check this box to show the unit with calculation results displayed on the one-line diagram.
Elements
Click on these check boxes to display load flow results for different types of elements, including Branch,
Source, Load, Composite Motor, and Composite Network.
24.3.2 AC Page
Color
ID
diagram.
Rating
line diagram.

Device Type Rating
Motor HP / kW
Load kVA / MVA
Bus kA Bracing
kV

A

Z

Motor % LRC
D-Y
one-line diagram.


Composite Motor
Use Default Options

26.3.3 AC-DC Page
Color
ID
line diagram.
Rating
one-line diagram.

Device Type Rating
UPS kVA
VFD HP / kW
kV
A
one-line diagram.

Device Type Amp
Composite Network
Use Default Options

26.3.4 DC Page
Color
ID
diagram.
Rating
line diagram.

Device Type Rating
Battery Ampere Hour
Motor HP / kW
Load kW / MW
Converter kW / MW
kV

A
one-line diagram.

Z
Composite Motor
Use Default Options

Battery Sizing & Discharge Analysis Calculation Methods

The ETAP PowerStation Battery Sizing and Discharging calculations comply with IEEE Standard 485,
the IEEE Recommended Practice for Sizing Large Lead Storage Batteries for Generating Stations and
Substations. Based on the characteristic curves from the Battery Library, it determines the number of
strings, number of cells, and cell size of a battery for a designated duty cycle.
26.4.1 Battery Duty Cycle
The duty cycle of a battery is the combination of the duty cycles of all the loads supplied by the battery.
The duty cycle of a battery can be determined by two different methods: load duty cycle summation and
load flow calculation. The first method simply sums up duty cycles for all the loads, with the conversion
of load current from the load rated voltage to the nominal voltage of the battery terminal bus. The load
flow calculation method runs a series of load flow calculations to determine battery load that considers
system losses and branch voltage.
Individual Load Duty Cycle
The individual load supplied by a battery can generally be classified into continuous and non-continuous
loads. Continuous loads are the ones that last for the whole duty cycle. Typical continuous loads include
lighting, continuously operating motors, inverters, indicating lights, continuously energized coils, and
annunciator loads, etc.

Non-continuous loads are on only during a portion of the duty cycle. Typical non-continuous loads
include emergency pump motors, critical ventilation system motors, communication system power
supplies, and fire protection systems, etc. Some of the non-continuous loads can occur repeatedly in a
duty cycle but are of short duration, less than one minute in any occurrence. These loads are called
momentary loads. Typical momentary loads include switchgear operations, motor-driven valve
operations, isolating switch operations, field flashing of generators, motor starting currents, and inrush
currents, etc.

If the time of occurrence of a non-continuous load cannot be predetermined, it is called a random load.
The random loads should be shown at the most critical time of a duty cycle. In battery sizing
calculations, these loads are treated differently from non-random loads.

In order to explain how the program determines the battery duty cycle, let us consider a sample case, in
which a battery supplies power to two loads: Load 1 and Load 2. The following two tables list the
load duty cycle as entered in the Duty Cycle page of the Load Editor. Notice that the tables have two
columns: Non-random Load and Random Load. The Non-random load includes continuous, non-
continuous, and momentary loads.

Load Items for Load 1 Duty Cycle (Time in Seconds)
Non-Random Load Random Load
Item Name Amp St Time Duration Item Name Amp Duration
L1 280 0 12 Ld 100 60
L2 60 60 7140
L3 80 1800 1800

Load 2 Duty Cycle (Time in Seconds)
Non-Random Load Random Load
Item Name Amp St Time Duration Item Name Amp Duration
Stage1 40 0 1800 Ld1 50 120
Stage2 140 1800 5400
Stage3 40 7200 3540
Stage4 120 10740 60

The load duty cycle for Load 1 is plotted in the following figure. In figure A, it is plotted in load items
as entered in the Load Editor, while in figure B it is the combination of all load items plotted as a function
of time. Notice that the random load is also displayed in the curve.
Duty Cycle Diagram for Load 1

The following figure displays load duty cycle curve for Load 2.

Duty Cycle Diagram for Load 2

Battery Duty Cycle Current Summation Method
When using the summation method, the battery duty cycle is the sum of all load currents at every time
moment in the duty cycle, with the current value converted from the load rated voltage to the bus nominal
voltage of the battery terminal bus. This is equivalent to assume that the all loads are constant current
loads. The non-random loads and random loads are summed up separately, as shown in the figure below.

Battery Duty Cycle Diagram Load 1 Plus Load 2
Battery Non-Random Load
The summation of non-random loads for the battery duty cycle is straight forward, as seen in the battery
duty cycle diagram. It should be noted that at the beginning of the duty cycle, the duration for the 320-
ampere load section is extended from 12 seconds to one minute. According to IEEE Std 485, the load for
a one-minute period shall be assumed to be the maximum current at any instant. After summing up the
non-random loads from individual loads, the program searches through the duty cycle for current peaks.
If the duration for any peak is less than one minute, the peak current value will be used as the load for the
one-minute period from the beginning of the peak.
Battery Random Load
The summation of random loads for the battery duty cycle is different from that of non-random loads.
The duration of the battery random load is equal to the longest duration of all random loads from
individual loads. The random loads from individual loads are summed up so that they are aligned at the
end of the duration of the battery random load. This ensures that the maximum random load value occurs
at the end of the duration, to produce the severest duty cycle for the battery.

After summing up random loads, if there is any peak with duration less than one minute, it will also be
extended to a one minute time period, similar to the process applied on the non-random load.

Battery Combined Duty Cycle
In the battery sizing calculation, the non-random and random loads are handled separately. The battery
total capacity is equal to the sum of the capacity that can provide power to the non-random load and
random load respectively. However, in the battery discharge calculation, the load applied on the battery
is the combined duty cycle, in which the random load is add on top of the non-random load. Per IEEE
Std. 485, to consider the worst case, the random load should be added to the non-random load at the time
where the battery has the lowest voltage value. In the example case, assuming that at 120 minutes the
battery has the lowest voltage value when the load consists of only the non-random load, the combined
battery duty cycle will be constructed by adding the random load backward at the 120-minute time, as
shown below.

Battery combined Duty Cycle Diagram


Battery Duty Cycle Load Flow Method
When using the load flow method to determine battery duty cycle, the load current at each moment is
determined by the DC load flow calculation, with the battery being the only constant voltage source. In
the battery sizing calculation, since the parameters are not available, the battery is modeled as a constant
voltage source at the nominal voltage of the terminal bus. In the battery discharging calculation, the
battery voltage is calculated based on the battery characteristic curves and duty cycle in previous steps.

The battery duty cycle determined based on the load flow method will give more accurate representation
of the actual load. With the load flow calculation, the load can be modeled as constant power or constant
impedance load depending the load type. As the responses of these two types of load with respect to
voltage variations are the very different, correctly modeling these loads provides more accurate battery
load current. In the load flow calculation, the battery load can also include losses on cables and other
branches. Additionally, when the load flow method is used in the discharge calculation, the program
calculates bus voltages and loads and branch flows for the whole system along with battery results.
26.4.2 Battery Library Data
The battery sizing calculation is based on the battery characteristics from the library of the battery to be
sized. Therefore, in order to size a battery, the battery has to be linked with the Battery Library, which is
done from the Battery Editor by clicking on the Library button in the Rating page and selecting a battery
from the Battery Library Quick Pick Editor. Once you have selected a battery from the library, the
battery is linked to the Battery Library and the battery type information appears in the Battery Type
section in the editor. The battery type information includes manufacturer, voltage per cell, resistance per
positive plates, etc. The same section also displays information on the selected size for the battery
including number of plates, cell capacity, and one-minute-discharge rate.

In the battery sizing calculation, the program retrieves the battery characteristic curves according to the
battery type information. Since this link between the battery and the library is dynamic, any changes you
make on the battery characteristics in the library may affect the battery sizing results afterward.

The ETAP PowerStation Battery Library provides two types of battery characteristic curves: Time vs.
Amp type and Time vs. Kt type. The following figure displays sample curves for both types, taken from
IEEE Std 485. On the left is the Time vs. Amp type and on the right Time vs. Kt type. The Time vs.
Amp type curves provide values for Rt, which is the number of amperes that each positive plate can
supply for a specified time, at 25 C and to a definite end-of-discharge voltage. Time vs. Kt type curves
provide values for Kt, which is the ratio of rated ampere-hour capacity (at a standard time rate, at 25 C,
and to a standard end-of-discharge voltage) of a cell, to the amperes that can be supplied by that cell for a
specified time, at 25 C and to a definite end-of-discharge voltage.


In the above sample curves, the set of curves may apply to batteries of different sizes or to only one size.
In ETAP PowerStation, you specify a set of characteristic curves for a given size. If you want to use a
given set of curves for batteries of different sizes, you can indicate this in the Battery Sizing Study Case
Editor. Please see the Study Case Editor section for more information.
26.4.3 Battery Sizing Method
The battery sizing calculation includes determining the number of cells to meet the system voltage
requirement and determining the battery size and number of strings to meet the load duty cycle
requirement.
Number of Cells
The number of cells should be determined to satisfy system minimum and maximum voltage
requirements:

1. When charging the battery, the voltage to be applied to the battery should not be greater than the
maximum system voltage.
2. When discharging the battery, the battery minimum discharge voltage should not be smaller than the
minimum system voltage.


Let N be the number of cells. The voltage requirements can be given in the following equation

N
V
sys, max

V
cell, ch
V
sys, min

V
cell, disch

Where

V
sys,min
is the minimum system voltage that is equal to the nominal voltage of the battery terminal bus
multiplied by the minimum system voltage deviation entered in the Battery Sizing Study Case Editor.
V
sys,max
is the maximum system voltage that is equal to the nominal voltage of the battery terminal bus
multiplied by the maximum system voltage deviation entered in the Battery Sizing Study Case Editor.
V
cell,ch
is the battery charge voltage in V/Cell entered in the Battery Sizing Study Case Editor.
V
cell,disch
is the battery discharge voltage in V/Cell entered in the Battery Sizing Study Case Editor.

It is clear that the number of cells of the battery is dependent on the four values for voltage requirement
entered in the Battery Sizing Study Case Editor. It can happen that for some incompatible values, we
cannot determine a value for N to satisfy the above equation. When this situation occurs, ETAP will
display a message indicating that it cannot determine the number of cells.

In practical cases, there is often a range of values that N can take to satisfy the above equation. In this
case, ETAP will select the value for N that results in the battery rated voltage being closest to its terminal
bus nominal voltage.
Cell Size
In determining the battery size, ETAP will find the smallest size that can provide sufficient power for the
specified duty cycle. The capacity of a battery can be increased either by using a larger size or by adding
more strings. Since ETAP allows you to enter different characteristic curves for different sizes of
batteries, in the battery sizing calculation, the program starts with one string and the smallest size
available for the calculation. If it fails to meet the load requirement, the program first increases the size
and performs calculations with the characteristic curves for the new size. When no available sizes can
meet the load requirement for the given number of strings, it then increases the string number and
performs the calculation with the smallest size again. This process continues until a battery size and a
string number are found to meet the load requirement.
Load Sections in Battery Duty Cycle
A battery duty cycle generally can be represented as a square waveform. It consists of a number of time
periods, with a constant current value during a period. The figure below shows a sample duty cycle for a
battery. It consists of six periods, designated as P
1
, P
2
, P
6.
A load section S
i
is a combination of a
number of load periods, defined as:
=
=
i
j
j i
P S
1


In the sample duty cycle there are six load sections.

Load Sections for A Sample Battery Duty Cycle
Determination of Cell Size Based on Battery Characteristic Curves
Based on a given set of battery characteristic curves, we can determine the required battery size for a
specified duty cycle. Let F represent cell size. It is equal to:

F= Max F
i
i=1,..S
m

where S
m
is the total number of load sections and F
i
is the size calculated for the i
th
load section. The
calculation of F
i
depends on the type of battery library curves.

For the Time vs. Amp type battery library, the cell size F
i
is the number of positive plates, which is
calculated as:
=
=
=
i P
P t
P p
i
R
A A
F
1
1

where A
p
is the load current value in period P. R
T
is the value obtained from the battery characteristic
curve, which is the number of amperes that each positive plate can supply for t minutes, at 25 C, and to
the end-of-discharge voltage specified in the study case.

For the Time vs. Kt type battery library, the cell size F
i
is the capacity in ampere-hours, which is
calculated as:
( )
=
=
=
i P
P
t P p i
K A A F
1
1

where A
p
is the load current value in period P. K
t
is the value obtained from the battery characteristic
curve, which is the ratio of rated ampere-hour capacity (at a standard time rate, at 25 C and to a standard
end-of-discharge voltage) of a cell, to the amperes that can be supplied by that cell for t minutes, at 25 C,
and to the end-of-discharge voltage specified in the study case.
Random Load and Non-Random Load
In general, the duty cycle for a battery consists of random loads and non-random loads. The program
determines the cells for random and non-random loads separately in the same way as described in the
previous section. The sum of the two cell size values is the uncorrected cell size for the given duty cycle.
Adjusting Factors
In the Battery Sizing Study Case Editor, you can select several adjusting factors to be considered in
calculating battery size. These factors include temperature factor, design margin factor, aging
compensation factor, and initial capacity factor. The uncorrected battery size is adjusted by multiplying
the first three factors and dividing that value by the initial capacity factor.
Calculation Cycle
It is clear from the equations for determining cell size that the cell size is calculated based on a given set
of battery characteristic curves, which is for a given cell size. If the calculated cell size is different from
the one corresponding to the characteristic curves used. We have to do the calculation again with the
battery characteristic curves for the calculated cell size, which may again result in a new size because of
different characteristic curves used. This process continues until the calculated size matches with the
curves used in the calculation. Sometimes the calculation may get into a cycle of changing cell size and
characteristic curves, especially if the curves were not entered correctly. ETAP PowerStation has
implemented a scheme to break the cycle.

26.4.4 Battery Discharging Calculation Method
The purpose of battery discharge calculation is to determine battery performance for a specified duty
cycle. One of the key parameters for battery performance is the battery terminal voltage. When the
battery is supplying the load as the sole source, it should be able to maintain voltage level for the whole
period of the specified duty cycle.
Battery Characteristic Curves for Voltage Interpolation
The terminal voltage of a battery is dependent on the current drawing from the battery and the ampere-
hour capacity contained in the battery. This relationship is described by the battery characteristic curve
and is very nonlinear. In ETAP, the battery characteristics are described in the battery library as discrete
points. Because no closed form equation is available to describe the battery characteristics, numerical
interpolation methods have to be used to find the points missing in the curves. Apparently, the more
curves are entered in the battery library, the more accurate the calculated results will be. The minimum
number of the characteristic curves entered in the library is two. ETAP will post an error message if the
number of curves in the library for the battery to be discharged is less than two.

In this release of ETAP, the discharge calculation is performed only when the battery is linked to the
Time vs. Amp type library. The Library data required by the discharge calculation for the characteristic
curves is described in section 24.6.2. The battery characteristic curves can be used to interpolate voltage
values in different ways. Because of the non-linearity of battery characteristics and often limited curves
available, voltage values interpolated from battery curves sometimes may not seem reasonable. For
example, the interpolated voltage value for a very small current at the beginning of discharging could be
larger than the rated voltage of battery. The method used in ETAP PowerStation first convert the curves
from Time vs. Amp curves to equivalent AH vs. Amp curves, and then interpolate for voltage values
at a fixed current value. This method is chosen for ETAP PowerStation due its consistent results for a
constant discharging current.
Battery Combined Duty Cycle
When the load powered by the battery includes random load, the random load should be added to the non-
random load at the worst point, which is the time the battery has the lowest voltage value when only the
non-random load is considered. To identify this time moment, the program first performs battery
discharge calculation excluding the random load. It then determine the worst point, add the random load
to the non-random load and perform discharge calculation from the time when the random load takes
effect all the way to the end of battery duty cycle.
Battery Voltage Calculation
An iterative process is conducted to calculated battery discharge voltage values. A battery voltage value
is reported at each time step specified in the battery sizing study case and at each moment when there is a
change in the load duty cycle. By changing the step size from the battery sizing study case, the user can
adjust the level of detail information on discharge calculation to be reported.


If the battery duty cycle is calculated by the load current summation method, the battery current will
change only when there is a change in any load duty cycle. When the load flow method is selected in the
study case, even if there is no change in the load duty cycle, the battery current will change due to
decrease in the battery voltage. In this case the battery current is calculated by a full load flow
calculation, considering different types of loads and system losses. In this load flow calculation, the
battery is modeled as a constant voltage source with the voltage calculated in the previous step. The
calculated battery current will be used in the current step for battery voltage calculation.

Along with battery voltage and current, the battery discharge program also calculates battery discharge
capacity. When there is change in the load current, two values of voltage and current are calculated, at t
-

and t
+
, one for before the load change and one for after the load change.

When the battery is calculated using load flow method, the battery discharge calculation also provides a
lot of information on the system performance, including bus voltage, bus loading, branch power and
current, etc.

Battery Sizing & Discharge Analysis Required Data

26.5 Required Data
26.5.1 Source
In battery sizing calculation, the only source is the battery to be sized. Batteries may only be
sized/discharged one at a time as specified in the study case. A UPS may be considered as a load to the
system when its input bus is not connected to an energized bus.
Battery
ID
Bus connection data
Battery library type data. This information is used to retrieve library data for calculations.

If only the battery discharge calculation is conducted, the following additional information is also
required:

Battery number of plates and Capacity.
Number of cells
Number of Strings
SC page battery external resistance.

26.5.2 Load
UPS
When a UPS is not connected to an energized input AC bus, it is considered a load in battery sizing
calculations.

ID
Bus connection data
DC rated voltage
kW and kVA.
Duty Cycle Page
If no duty cycle data is entered, this load will be assumed to be zero.
DC Motor
ID
Bus connection data
Quantity
Rated voltage
kW or HP and Efficiency.
Duty Cycle Page


Lumped Load
ID
Bus connection data
Rated voltage
kW Rating
Duty Cycle Page
Static Load
ID
Bus connection data
kW Rating.
Rated voltage
Duty Cycle Page
Elementary Diagram (ED) Load
ID
Bus connection data
Rated voltage
kW Rating.
Duty Cycle Page
Inverter
ID
Bus connection data
DC rated voltage
kVA, PF, DC kW rating
Duty Cycle Page
26.5.3 Branch
DC Cable
ID
Bus connection data
Cable length
Resistance and Inductance and cable length units
DC Impedance
ID
Bus connection data
Resistance and inductance impedance information.

Tie PD (CB, Fuse, & Single-Throw & Double-Throw Switches)
ID
Bus connection data
DC Converter
ID
Bus connection data
kW Rating and Rated kV Input and output.
Library
Library type data
Battery characteristic curve data
Study Case
When you initiate a battery sizing calculation, PowerStation uses the study case currently selected from
the Study Case Toolbar. Every field in the Study Case Editor is set to its default value. However, it is
important to set the values in the study case correctly to meet your calculation requirements.
Battery Sizing &Discharge Analysis Output Reports

26.6 Output Reports
The battery sizing calculation results are reported graphically on the one-line diagram, in plots and in the
Crystal Reports format. The graphical one-line display shows the number of cells, number of strings, cell
size, etc. You can use the Display Options Editor to specify the content to be displayed.

The Crystal Reports format provides you with detailed information for a battery sizing study. You can
utilize the Battery Sizing Report Manager to help you view the output report.
26.6.1 Battery Sizing Report Manager
To open the Battery Sizing Report Manager, simply click on the View Output File button on the Battery
Sizing Study Toolbar. The editor includes four pages (Complete, Input, Result, and Summary)
available for different portions of the report and view it via Crystal Reports. There are several fields and
buttons common to every page, as described below.
Output Report Name
This field displays the name to the output report you want to view.
Project File Name
Help
OK / Cancel
Complete Report Page
In this page there is only one format available, Complete, which brings up the complete report for the
battery sizing study. The complete report includes input data, results, and summary reports.


Input Page
This page allows you to select formats to view different input data, grouped according to type. They
include the following available formats:

Battery Characteristics
Branch Connection
Bus and Connected Load
Cable
Cover
DC Converter
Impedance
Inverter
Load Duty Cycle
UPS

Result Page
This page allows you to select formats to view the result portion of the output report, including
Calculation Results, Battery Load Profile, and Battery Characteristics. The Calculation Results portion
prints the uncorrected cell size for each load section in non-random load and random load. The Battery
Load Profile is the battery duty cycle generated based on load duty cycles. The Battery Characteristics
are mostly data entered by the user. However, if the characteristic data does not contain a curve
corresponding to the minimum discharge voltage specified in the Battery Sizing Study Case Editor, the
calculation program will generate a new curve based on data entered by the user. Therefore, the Battery
Characteristics portion is placed in both the Input and Results lists of the report manager.


Summary Page
This page allows you to select available formats to view the result summary portion of the report. The
summary portion contains the final result for battery sizing calculations.

PowerStation automatically opens the output report that is listed in the Study Case Toolbar with the
selected format. In the picture shown below, the output report name is BS-300A and the selected format
is Cable.


26.6.3 Input Data
Input data are grouped together according to element type. The bus and branch connection data for
battery sizing are similar to DC load flow input data. The following are some samples of input data
specific for battery sizing calculations.
Load Duty Cycle
In battery sizing calculations, the load comes from the duty cycle of all the connected loads. In order for
a load to be considered in the study, you must enter load duty cycle data in the Duty Cycle Page of the
Load Editor.

In the sample below, there are duty cycles for a lump load, a static load, and an ED load. The lump load
and the static load are continuous load, maintaining constant load current over the whole duty cycle. The
ED load has both non-random and random loads. Notice that in the report the non-random load is the
combination of all load items entered in the Duty Cycle page, shown as a series of square waveforms as a
function of time. The random load is printed in load items, each with different load duration. Please note
that if you have entered two random load items that have the same load duration, they will be summed up
and shown as one item in the report.


Battery Duty Cycle
The battery duty cycle is the total load used to size the battery. In this page, it prints the battery name, the
method used for obtaining the battery duty cycle, and the battery duty cycle. Notice that for the battery
duty cycle, both the non-random and random load profiles are printed as a function of time. In the load
profiles, any peaks that last less than one minute have been extended to one minute.

Battery Characteristics
In this page, the information from the Battery Library is printed. It starts with the library type information
including battery manufacturer, model, characteristic curve type, base temperature, V/Cell, resistance per
positive plate, etc. It is then followed by the information for the final battery size used. Note that in the
Battery Library there may be a set of characteristic curves for each battery size, but only one set of curves
is printed in the report, and it is the one used to determine the cell size. In this sample, curves for the
battery size with 21 plates are printed, including four curves with final discharge voltages at 1.75, 1.91,
1.84, and 1.88 volts, respectively. This page also prints the option you selected in the Battery Sizing
Study Case Editor on how to use the battery library data: as Sizes Given in Library Only or as Min/Max
Ranges. In this case, the Min/Max ranges option was selected.

26.6.4 Results Report
Printed on this page are cell sizes for each load section. There are two columns, one for non-random load,
and one for random load. The maximum value from each column is selected and the sum of the two
values is the uncorrected cell size.

It is seen that for some load sections, such as sections 2 and 5, the cell size is printed as zero. This is
because the calculation skipped these sections. If the load current for the last load period of a load section
is less than the current of the next load period, the calculation for the load section is skipped, because its
size is surely smaller than the size for the next load section. In this sample case, it can be seen from the
Battery Load Profile in the Battery Duty Cycle section above that, for load periods 2 and 5, their load
currents are smaller than their next load period. Therefore, the calculation for load sections 2 and 5 are
skipped and the report prints zero for those sections.

26.6.5 Load Flow Summary
This page summarizes the results of a battery sizing calculation. It shows the battery to be sized, the
requirements applied, and the final results.

The Correction Factors section prints the individual and total adjusting factors used in the calculation. If
you have indicated in the Study Case Editor not to use one or more adjusting factors, they will be printed
as 100 in this section.

The Cell Size section prints the curve used in the calculation. In this sample case, the curves for cell size
21 were used in the calculation. It also prints the cell sizes for maximum non-random and maximum
random load, as well as the uncorrected and the recommended sizes. Please note that, when the curves
used are the Time vs. Amp type, the first three values are the number of positive plates, while the last is
the total number of plates. When the curves used are the Time vs. Kt type, all four values are capacity in
ampere-hour.

Battery Sizing & Discharge Analysis One-Line Diagram Displayed Results

PowerStations Battery Discharge Program displays the results from a battery discharge calculation on the
one-line diagram. The Battery Discharge Time Slider is a tool that may be used to change the displayed
results as they change throughout the discharge cycle. The user may click or move the time slider to any
desired position, and the results corresponding to that particular time are displayed on the OLV. The
range of the time slider is set from the beginning to end of the simulation time duration. If the pointer
position is clicked and dragged, the numerical time displayed is updated throughout the motion. The
numerical value displayed has units of minutes.

If the Current Summation Method for battery discharge is used, the displayed results are the discharged
Battery AH Capacity, Terminal Current (Amps), and the Terminal Voltage. These three results vary with
the time slider. Please note that when the time is equal to zero, the capacity displayed in the one-line
diagram as the sizing result is the rated capacity. Furthermore, the program will also display the number
of positive plates, strings, and cells it used for the discharge calculation. The following diagram provides
an example of how the parameters are displayed in the One-Line Diagram. The Battery Discharge Time
Slider displays the results at time equal to 59 minutes.

If the DCLF Method of Battery Discharge is used, branch flow results along with bus voltages may be
displayed on the One-Line Diagram. Branch flows displayed are Current (Amps) and Power (kW or
MW). Bus Voltage may be displayed in terms of kV or %Nominal Voltage.



26.8 Plots
PowerStations Battery Discharge Program provides Simulation Plots for the purpose of examining
calculation results graphically. To view the Battery Discharge plots, you may click on the Battery Sizing
Plots Icon located on the Battery Sizing toolbar. It will bring up a Battery Sizing Plot selection window.
Here you may select from one of several plots generated by the program. The device types currently
plotted by the program are Batteries, Buses, and Branches.


Plots generated for the battery includes:

Battery voltage, amp and discharged AH.
Battery duty cycle for non-random load, random load, and combined duty cycle.
Battery characteristic curves used for the discharge calculation.

If the load flow method is used to generate battery duty cycle, the program also generates plot for system
bus and branch, including.

Bus voltage and load.
Branch load current.

Plot parameters such as the plot line type, axis, legend, and text may be modified directly from the plot
view. For example, to modify the plot line type, double-click on the plot line and change the line type
from the Plot Parameter Editor.

ETAP

PowerStation
4.0
User Guide
Copyright 2001
All Rights Reserved





Southern California

(949) 462-0100 Sales
(949) 462-0400 Fax


Chapter 27


Cable derating analysis is an important part of power system design and analysis. For designing a new
system, it determines the proper size of cables to carry the specified loads. For analysis of an existing
system, it examines cable temperatures and determines their ampacities.

Underground Raceway Systems Overview

PowerStation provides five types of calculations for cable derating analysis, namely, steady-state
temperature calculation, uniform-ampacity cable ampacity calculation, uniform-temperature cable
ampacity calculation, cable sizing, and transient temperature calculation. The steady-state temperature
calculation, cable ampacity calculation, and cable sizing are based on the NEC accepted Neher-McGrath
method. The transient temperature calculation is based on a dynamic thermal circuit model. All of the
calculations can handle multi-raceway systems and consider the effect of heat generated by neighboring
cables and external heat sources.

This chapter contains the following sections:

The GUI section explains the various toolbars and their functions, how to launch calculations, open
and view an output report, and how to select display options.
The Editor section explains how to add/edit elements of the system, how to create a new study case,
what parameters are required to specify a study case, and how to set them.
The Display Options section explains what options are available for displaying some key system
parameters and the output results on the UGS diagram, and how to set them.
The Calculation Methods section briefly describes calculation methods for steady-state temperature
calculation, cable ampacity calculation, cable sizing, and transient temperature calculation.
The Required Data section describes what data is necessary to perform Cable Ampacity Derating
calculations and where to enter them.
The Output Reports and Plots section illustrates and explains the data contents of the output report
and how to interpret results on the plots.
The Tutorial section provides an overview of the operation and of some key functions of the
Underground Raceway Systems module.
Underground Raceway Systems GUI


27.1 Underground Raceway Systems GUI

The UGS presentation is conceptually a cross-section of desired raceways, conduits/locations, cables, and
heat sources, which are in the same vicinity. The UGS presentation allows you to graphically arrange
raceways, conduits, cables, and external heat sources to represent cable routing and to provide a physical
environment to conduct cable ampacity derating studies.

Each UGS presentation is a different cross-section of the underground system. This is a different concept
than the multi-presentation of the one-line diagram, where all presentations have the same elements.

You can create as many UGS presentations as you wish. There is no limit on the number of raceways and
heat sources that can be created/added in one presentation. In UGS, each presentation acts independently.
If you add a raceway to a UGS presentation, this raceway will not be shown in the other UGS
presentations. However, raceways from any UGS presentation can be added to the other UGS
presentations as existing raceways. Also, if you delete a raceway from a UGS presentation into the
Dumpster, this raceway can be added to other UGS presentations as an existing raceway.
27.1.1 Create a New UGS Presentation
When a new project is created, by default, no UGS presentation is created. You need to create UGS
presentations when necessary. To create a UGS presentation, right-click on U/G Raceway System in the
Project View, then click on Create New.

Creating A UGS Presentation

A graphical user interface window with a UGS presentation will be displayed on your screen. The ID
(name) of the displayed presentation is UGS1 by default (default name appended with a number). The
name may be changed to any unique name (maximum 12 characters) that you choose. To change the
name, double-click on the UGS1 presentation. This will open its editor.

Change ID (Name) of a UGS Presentation

Another way you can change the name of a UGS presentation is to right-click on UGS1 in the Project
View, then click on Properties, as shown below. Enter a new name from the dialog box.

Right-Click On UGS1, to View, Save, Rename, or Purge UGS1
27.1.2 Edit Toolbar

UGS Edit Toolbar
Pointer
The mouse pointer allows you to select or move items. Clicking on the Pointer icon returns the cursor to
its original shape after an element icon has been clicked on, displaying an element to be placed into the
UGS.
Existing External Heat Source
Click on the Existing External Heat Source icon to open a drop-down list from which you can choose an
external heat source that has been previously created.

A message will appear if no existing external heat sources are available. These external heat sources can
be found either in the Dumpster or in other U/G Systems. For more information on external heat sources
see the External Heat Source Editor.
New External Heat Source
Click on the New External Heat Source icon to create a new external heat source. This will enable you to
place it in the UGS wherever there is space available. For more information on external heat sources see
External Heat Source Editor.
Add Existing Heat Sources
Add Existing Cables
Add Existing Duct Bank RWs
Add Existing Direct Buried RWs
Add New Conduits for Duct Banks RWs
Display Options
Add New Heat Sources

Add New Cables

Add New Duct Bank RWs

Add New Direct Buried RWs

Add New Locations for Direct Buried RWs
Existing Cable
Click on the Existing Cable icon to open a drop-down list from which you can choose a cable that has
been previously created. This list includes one-line, equipment, and UGS cables.

The cables in this list can be found in the one-line diagram (either as a one-line or equipment cable),
Dumpster (deleted cables), or in other U/G raceway systems (UGS cables). Cables selected from the one-
line diagram will be converted from one-line or equipment cables to compound cables. A compound
cable represents a cable that exits in the one-line diagram and UGS. For more information on cables, see
the Cable Editor Overview.

Note that you can graphically add existing one-line cables to any location (conduit) in UGS. To do this,
press and hold Control+Shift and drag the cable, using the mouse, from the one-line diagram into a
location in UGS.

A message will appear if no existing cables are available. These cables can be found in the one-line
diagram, Dumpster, or in other U/G Systems. Cables selected from the one-line diagram will be
converted from one-line cables to compound cables. For more information on cables see the Cable Editor
Overview.
New Cable
Click the New Cable icon to create a new cable. This will enable you to place it in the UGS wherever
there is space available. This cable will be a UGS cable since it only exists in the UGS. To add this cable
(or any other cable in the UGS) to the one-line diagram press and hold Control+Shift and drag the cable,
using the mouse, from the UGS into the one-line diagram. For more information on cables see the Cable
Editor Overview.
Existing Duct Bank Raceway
Click the Existing Duct Bank Raceway icon to open a dialog box from which you can choose a duct bank
raceway that has been previously created.

A message will appear if no existing duct bank raceways are available. These duct bank raceways can be
found either in the Dumpster or in other U/G Systems. For more information on duct bank raceways see
Duct Bank Raceway Editor.
New Duct Bank Raceway
Click the New Duct Bank Raceway icon to create a new duct bank raceway. This will enable you to
place it in the UGS wherever there is space available. For more information on duct bank raceways see
Duct Bank Raceway Editor.

Existing Direct Buried Raceway
Click the Existing Direct Buried Raceway icon to open a dialog box from which you can choose a direct
buried raceway that has been previously created.

A message will appear if no existing direct buried raceways are available. These direct buried raceways
can be found either in the Dumpster or in other U/G Systems. For more information on direct buried
raceways see the Direct Buried Raceway Editor section.
New Direct Buried Raceway
Click the New Direct Buried Raceway icon to create a new direct buried raceway. This will enable you to
place it in the UGS wherever there is space available. For more information on direct buried raceways
see the Direct Buried Raceway Editor section.
New Conduit
Click the New Conduit icon to create a new conduit. This will enable you to place it in any duct bank
raceway wherever there is space available. For more information on conduits see Conduit Editor.
New Location
Click the New Location icon to create a new location. This will enable you to place any Direct Buried
Raceway wherever there is space available. For more information on locations see the Location Editor
section.
Display Option
Click on the Display Options icon to change the appearance of element IDs and ratings in the UGS. For
more information, see the Display Options section.

Underground Raceway Systems Study Toolbar
27.2 Study Toolbar
Steady-State Cable Temperature Calculation
Click on this icon to calculate the steady-state temperature of cables in the raceway system under the
specified loading conditions. PowerStation uses the NEC accepted Neher-McGrath method for these
calculations. It determines steady-state conductor temperature for the specified cable loading and
raceway system configuration, considering the effect of heat generated by neighboring cables and external
heat sources.
Uniform-Ampacity Cable Ampacity Calculation
Click on this icon to calculate cable ampacity under uniform ampacity conditions for all cables in the
raceway system. This calculation assumes that the loading of all cables is increased/decreased uniformly
based on cable base ampacity, which is defined in the cable library. The cable ampacity is calculated by
increasing the loading of all cables until the temperature of the hottest cable reaches the maximum
allowable limit. PowerStation uses the Neher-McGrath method for this calculation.
Uniform-Temperature Cable Ampacity Calculation
Click on this icon to calculate cable ampacity under uniform temperature conditions for all cables in the
raceway system. This calculation adjusts individual cable loading to maintain uniform temperature
throughout the raceway system. The cable ampacity is obtained when the cable temperature reaches its
maximum allowable limit. PowerStation uses the Neher-McGrath method for this calculation.
Steady-State Cable Temperature Calculation
Cable Ampacity Calculation, Uniform-Ampacity
Cable Ampacity Calculation, Uniform-Temperature
Cable Sizing
Transient Cable Temperature Calculation
Display Options
View Output Report
Cable Temperature Plots
Get On-Line Data
Get Archived Data
Underground Raceway Systems Study Toolbar
Cable Sizing
Click on this icon to automatically optimize cable sizes for the specified cable loading and cable
temperature limit. The result of this study yields the smallest possible sizes for all cables in the raceway
system that can carry the specified loading within the temperature limit. PowerStation uses the Neher-
McGrath method for this calculation.
Transient Cable Temperature Calculation
Click on this icon to calculate cable transient temperatures as a function of time. The cables carry time-
varying loads, as defined in the Load Profile of the Cable Editor. This study allows you to investigate
cable transient operating conditions and verify cable temperatures against time for determining the short-
time loading limit. This calculation is based on a dynamic thermal circuit model.
Display Options
Click on this icon to open the Cable Derating Display Options dialog box to display calculation results.
View Output Report
To view the contents of the last output report, click on the View Output File button on the toolbar. The
output file name is displayed on the Study Case Toolbar. You can also view output reports by clicking on
the View Output File button on the Study Case Toolbar. A list of all output files in the selected project
directory is provided for cable ampacity derating calculations. To view any of the listed output reports,
click on the output report name, and then click on the View Output File button.

The output reports for cable derating studies have a .cdr extension.

default viewer in the ETAPS.INI file to the viewer of your preference.

For Notepad, WordPad, and Microsoft Word applications we have recommended settings that are
explained in the Printing and Plotting chapter.
Cable Transient Temperature Plot
Click on the Plot icon to select and plot the calculated temperatures of the cables in the raceway.
Get On-Line Data
If the ETAP key installed on your computer has the on-line feature (PSMS), you can copy the on-line data
to the cables in the current U/G system.

Get Archived Data
If the ETAP key installed on your computer has the on-line feature (PSMS), you can copy the archived
data to the current U/G system.
Underground Raceway Systems Study Case Editor

The Cable Derating Study Case Editor contains solution control variables, cable loading parameters, and
options for output reports. PowerStation allows you to create and save an unlimited number of study
cases. Cable derating calculations are conducted and reported in accordance with the settings you have
specified in the study case editor. Note that you can have an unlimited number of study cases and can
easily switch between the study cases without the trouble of resetting the study case options each time.
This feature is designed to organize your study efforts and save you time.

To conduct studies, you first need to switch to the calculation mode by clicking on the U/G Cable
Raceways button on the Mode Toolbar.

The Cable Derating Study Case Editor can be accessed by clicking on the Study Case button located on
the Study Case Toolbar. You can also access this editor from the Project View by clicking on the Cable
Derating Study Case folder.

To create a new study case, go to the Project View, right-click on the Cable Derating Study Cases folder,
and select Create New. The program will then create a new study case, which is a copy of the default
study case, and add it to the Cable Derating Study Case folder.

Study Case ID
Study case ID is shown in this entry field. Here you can rename a study case by deleting the old ID and
entering the new ID. The study case ID can be up to 25 alphanumeric characters. Use the Navigator
button at the bottom of the editor to move between study cases.
Initial/Steady-State Amp
Here you can specify the cable loading for the study case. The loading amps are entered into the Loading
page of the Cable Editor. Note that the cable current specified in the Cable Editor is the phase current,
and the current each conductor carries is equal to the phase current divided by the number of conductors
per phase.
Load Profile
When this option is selected, the first current value in the Transient Load Profile list in the Loading page
of the Cable Editor will be used as the initial load current for the transient temperature calculation, and as
the load current for the steady-state temperature calculation.
Operating Load
When this option is selected, the operating load in the Loading page of the Cable Editor will be used as
the initial load current for the transient temperature calculation and as the load current for the steady-state
temperature calculation. Note that operating load current can be updated with the load flow calculation
result by clicking on the Update Cable Load Current button on the Load Flow Tool Bar.
Multiplication Factor
ETAP PowerStation provides several multiplication factors, which allow you to vary the cable loading
both individually and globally. These options furnish flexibility in raceway system design and allow you
to project future load variation.
Global Projection MF
The cable load, which you have specified in the Cable Editor, is multiplied by this factor prior to
calculation, allowing you to globally change the system load.
Use Individual Projection MF
Select this option to apply the individual load projection multiplication factor that you have entered in the
Loading page of the Cable Editor. The cable load will be multiplied by this factor prior to calculation.
Use Application MF
When this box is checked, the Application MF selected in the Ampacity page of the Cable Editor will be
utilized to modify the cable load. Prior to performing the cable derating calculation, the cable load
current is multiplied by the Application MF.
Transient Temperature Study
Enter the time limit and plot time step for a cable transient temperature study in this section.
Max. Time
Maximum Time is the length of time, at the unit selected, for which the transient temperature calculation
will be performed.
Output Step Size
Output Step Size specifies the time step, at the unit selected, at which plot points will be generated. The
total number of plot points generated is approximately equal to the Max. Time divided by the Output Step
Size.
Unit
The Unit selection box allows you to select time units for the Max. Time and Output Step Size. Time unit
selections include days, hours, minutes, and seconds.
Update
This section is provided for you to flag PowerStation to update your cable data.
Currents from Ampacity Calculation
If the box is checked, after running a UT ampacity or UA ampacity calculation, PowerStation will update
the allowable current for each cable involved with the calculated ampacity.
Size from Cable Sizing Calculation
If the box is checked, after running a cable sizing calculation, PowerStation will update all the cables
involved with the calculated optimal size.

Underground Raceway Systems Display Options
27.4 Display Options for UGS
27.4.1 Cable Derating Result Display Options
This dialog box allows you to specify the format for information annotations associated with an
Underground Raceway presentation.

Default
This check box is used to edit the display options specified by the Project Default Display Options. When
this option is selected, the Info section in this dialog box will be disabled and all the customized
selections displayed will be ignored and replaced by the default settings.
Info
This section becomes accessible only when the Use Default Display Options box is not checked;
otherwise, the information in this section will not apply.
Color
This selection box allows you to select one of the sixteen available colors for information annotations.
Cable ID
Select the check box to display the cable ID in the raceway view.
Conduit/Location ID
Select the check box to display the conduit/location ID in the raceway view.
Raceway ID
Select the check box to display the raceway ID in the raceway view.
Heat Source ID
Select the check box to display the external heat source ID in the raceway view.
27.4.2 U/G Raceway Display Options
This dialog box is used to specify the format and content of the annotations to be displayed for each
individual element on the UGS presentation.

Default
If the Use Project Default Options box is selected, the project default settings will be used on the UGS
presentation.
Options
Color
Select from a variety of colors to display annotations for each element.
ID
For each element type (cable, conduit/location, raceways, and heat sources) choose whether or not to
display their ID in the UGS presentation.
Size
For each element type (conduit/location, raceways, and heat sources) choose whether or not to display
their size (in inches or cm) on the UGS presentation.
27.4.3 Default Display Options - UGS
This dialog box is used to specify the default format and content of the annotations to be displayed for
each individual element on UGS presentations.

Underground Raceway System Annotations
Color
Select the color for information annotations to be displayed.
ID
For each element type (cable, conduit/location, raceways, and heat sources) choose whether or not to
display their ID on the UGS presentation.
Size
For each element type (conduit/location, raceways, and heat sources) choose whether or not to display
their size (in inches or cm) on the UGS presentation.
Annotation Font
IDs
Select the font, style, and size to display all IDs selected in Display Options.
Ratings
Select the font, style, and size to display all ratings selected in Display Options.
Results
Select the font, style, and size to display all study results selected in their respective Display Options.
Underground Raceway Systems Edit A UGS
27.5 Edit A UGS

This section addresses editors for elements in the U/G Raceway Systems (UGS). Except for the
elements ID, all other data that appear in the editors are considered engineering properties.

The elements that are included in this chapter are shown below.

Underground System Raceway External Heat Source

Add Elements
Duct bank raceways and direct buried raceways, conduits for duct bank raceways, locations for direct
buried raceways, external heat sources, and cables are the elements available for adding to an
underground raceway system which can be done by clicking on the Edit Toolbar.

Rules
Elements can be added ONLY in Edit mode when the Base Data is active.
Elements CANNOT be added when you are in study mode or in a Revision level of the database.
You CANNOT drop two raceways on top of each other.
You CANNOT drop an external heat source inside a raceway.
Cables can ONLY be placed inside of a conduit or location.
Conduits and locations can ONLY be added inside of their respective raceway types.
Conduits and raceways CANNOT overlap each other.


A UGS Presentation

To add a new element to your UGS presentation, select a new element from the Edit Toolbar, which
changes the cursor symbol to a picture of that element. You may place the element anywhere in the UGS
(where there is room) by clicking the mouse. After dropping the element, the cursor goes back to its
original arrow shape. If you double-click on an element in the Edit Toolbar, you can place multiple
copies of the same element in the UGS.

To add an existing element to a UGS presentation, select an existing element in the Edit Toolbar (red
symbols), which changes the cursor shape to a picture of that element. Move the cursor into the UGS
presentation and click. It will open an editor (dialog box), which allows you to select an element from the
list box to be added as an existing element, and then click on OK. The element will be added with the
same ID (name) with all of the engineering properties preserved.

External Heat Source Cable Duct Bank Raceway Direct Buried Raceway
Dialog Boxes for Adding Existing Elements to UGS Presentations
Add Raceways and External Heat Sources
Click on the Raceway or External Heat Source button on the Edit Toolbar, move the cursor to the UGS
presentation, and drop it into place by clicking. If a new raceway or heat source is selected from the
toolbar, PowerStation creates the new raceway or external heat source using the default values. If an
existing raceway or heat source is selected, PowerStation prompts you with a drop-down list to select an
element from the already existing ones.
Add Cables
Click on the Cable button on the Edit Toolbar, move the cursor inside of a conduit or location, and drop it
into place by clicking. If you select new cables from the toolbar, a new cable (UGS cable) is created with
a dummy cable diameter. If an existing cable is selected, PowerStation provides a drop-down list to
select from. You can select a one-line cable, equipment cable, or UGS cable.
Add Conduits
Click on the Conduit button on the Edit Toolbar, move the cursor inside of a duct bank raceway, and drop
it into place by clicking. Conduits are always created. You cannot add existing conduits to a raceway.
The drop point of a conduit or location is its center. The cursor is marked with an X if your drop point is
too close to the raceways edge causing it to overlap the outside of the raceway.
Add Locations
Click on the Location button on the Edit Toolbar, move the cursor inside of a direct buried raceway, and
drop it into place by clicking. Locations are used for placing and locating cables in direct buried
raceways and do not physically exist. Locations are always created. You cannot add existing locations to
a raceway. The drop point of a location is its center. The cursor is marked with an X if your drop point is
too close to the raceway edge causing it to overlap outside of the raceway.
Add One-Line Cables
You can graphically add cables from one-line diagrams (one-line cables) to underground raceways. To
do this from a one-line diagram presentation, use <Ctrl><Shift>+Drag to select and graphically drag a
one-line cable to a conduit or location in a UGS presentation. At first, the cursor becomes a cable symbol
with a big X marked on top of it. Once the cursor inside a conduit or location, the X disappears and you
can drop it. The cable that you have just placed inside a U/G raceway appears both in the one-line
diagram and the UGS presentations. The property of this cable can be changed from either presentation.
Note that you can also use <Ctrl><Shift> + Drag to add UGS cables to the one-line diagram.
Select Elements
To select an element, click the left mouse button while the cursor (arrow shape) is on top of the element.
To rubber-band multiple raceways, click the left mouse outside the raceway and drag the mouse across
the raceways you want to select. It will show you a dotted rectangle. When the mouse is released, only
the raceways inside the rectangle will be selected. Note that when a raceway is selected, no matter how
many conduits, locations, or cables it contains, the raceway is considered to be one element. For
example, if you cut or copy a selected raceway, the raceway and its contents will be cut or copied.
Selecting & Deselecting Multiple Elements
<Ctrl>Click on the elements that you want to select or deselect.

Move / Relocate Elements
When an element (other than a cable) is added to a UGS presentation, according to the drop point, its
coordinates (x and y) are updated automatically in its editor and in the Help line at the bottom of your
screen. You may relocate the element to new coordinates, either from its editor (Ref. X and Ref. Y for
raceways and external heat sources, and Horiz. Dist. and Vert. Dist. for conduits and locations relative to
their raceways reference point) or by dragging the element and watching the Help line change to the
desired position, as shown below.

X and Y coordination of an element in the Help Line

To drag an element, first select the element that you want to move, place the cursor on top of the selected
element. Click and hold the left mouse button, drag the element to the desired position, and release the
left button.
Move Raceways, Heat Sources, and Locations (Conduits)
Select the element, hold the left button, drag it to the new position, and then release the left button. When
the cursor is placed on a selected element, the cursor becomes a movement symbol.
The following graph shows the relationship between raceway reference points and other elements.

The value of the reference Y for raceways and heat sources represents the depth of the elements below the
earths surface. The value of the reference X determines the relative horizontal distance between
raceways and heat sources. For a UGS presentation that has only one raceway, the reference X is
irrelevant.

Rules
Elements CANNOT be relocated in study mode or in a Revision level of the database.
Elements CANNOT be overlapped.
All three phases of a cable must be routed through the same raceway, i.e., if you move one of the
conductors, PowerStation prompts you to move all conductors (placed together).

You can also move a raceway (reference X and Y) or a location/conduit (horizontal and vertical distance)
from its editor as shown below.

Move Cables
You can graphically move any cable within a UGS. To move a cable, select the cable, hold the left
button, drag it to the new location (conduit), and then release the left button. When you move a cable
from one raceway to another raceway, all conductors for that cable will be moved.

Move Cable2 from One Conduit to Another

Move Cable4 from Raceway RW1 to RW2
Cut (Delete) Elements
When elements are cut, they are placed into the Dumpster (inside a Dumpster Cell). To cut an element
that is selected, click on the Cut button in the Project Toolbar or press Delete on the keyboard. You can
cut elements in Edit mode only. When you cut an element or group of elements, they are deleted from
UGS and placed in the Dumpster with the same IDs (engineering properties are preserved). Elements can
be cut (deleted) three ways.

Click on Edit in the menu bar, and then click on Cut.
Click on the Cut button on the Project Toolbar.
Press the Delete key on the keyboard.

Rules
Elements can be cut in Edit mode ONLY when Base Data is active.
Elements have to be selected in order for them to be Cut (deleted).
When a conduit or location that contains cables is cut, the cables are not deleted. They are moved
into a container attached underneath of the raceway. This container is used to hold cables that belong
to this raceway but are not assigned to a specific conduit or location.
When one or more raceways, cables, or heat sources are placed in the Dumpster, PowerStation forms
a new Dumpster Cell (element group) that holds these elements. PowerStation automatically assigns
the name of the Dumpster Cell.
Copy Elements
Elements are copied into the Dumpster (inside a Dumpster Cell). To copy an element or group of
elements, place the mouse on top of the element, click the right mouse button, and then select Copy.
When you copy an element or group of elements, they get copied into the Dumpster with new IDs while
the engineering properties are preserved.

Elements can be copied two ways:

Click on Edit in the menu bar, and then select Copy.
Click on the Copy button in the Project Toolbar.

Rules
Element can be copied in Edit mode ONLY when Base Date is active.
Element must be selected before they can be copied.
When one or more raceways, cables, or heat sources are placed in the Dumpster, PowerStation forms
a new Dumpster Cell (element group) that holds these elements. PowerStation automatically assigns
the name of the Dumpster Cell.

To graphically copy raceways from a UGS presentation to the Dumpster, use <Shift>+Drag. After you
select a raceway, hold the <Shift> key down, and click and hold the left mouse button down while you
drag the mouse. At first, the cursor becomes a preventive symbol (a red circle with a line across it).
When you move the cursor on top of the Dumpster, it becomes a box symbol with a plus sign indicating
that you can copy it to the Dumpster.

Paste
Use the Paste command to copy the selected cell from the Dumpster into the UGS presentation. To paste
a copy of the elements from a Dumpster Cell, first select the Cell from the Dumpster, activate the UGS
presentation view you want the element to be pasted into, and then click on Paste. When you paste
elements, they get copied into the UGS presentation with new IDs (engineering properties are preserved).

Elements can be pasted two ways:

Click on Edit in the menu bar, and then select Paste.
Click on the Paste icon in the Project Toolbar.

Rules
Pasting CANNOT be done if there are no Cells (element groups) in the Dumpster.
Pasting can be done in Edit mode ONLY when Base Data is active.
In the Dumpster, conduits or locations CANNOT be deleted or purged unless the raceway containing
these conduits or locations is deleted or purged.
You can paste any Dumpster Cell you desire by making it active from the Dumpster presentation.
When you cut or copy elements to the Dumpster, the newly created Dumpster Cell becomes the
active Cell.
You CANNOT paste part of a Dumpster Cell; the entire contents of a Cell are pasted.
You CANNOT paste Dumpster Cells that contain one-line diagram elements in UGS presentations.
A UGS presentation can contain multiple raceways, but not a duplicate raceway, i.e., a raceway
CANNOT be placed twice in the same UGS presentation.
Size Elements
When an element is added into a UGS presentation, its size is set to the default. You can graphically
change the width and height of raceways, as well as, the outside diameter of conduits, locations, and heat
sources. To change the size, select the element, move the cursor to the corner or edges of the selected
element, and, when the cursor changes its shape, release the mouse button. You can see the new sizes on
the Help Line. Note that you can also change the sizes from the raceway editor. Outside diameter (OD)
of cables can only be changed from the Cable Editor.

Rules
Sizing elements can be done in Edit mode ONLY when Base Data is active.
Elements CANNOT overlap each other.

Underground Raceway Systems Underground System Editor
27.6 Underground System Editor
The Underground System (UGS) Editor provides details regarding the overall layout of the underground
system. This includes global properties such as soil type and temperature.

ID
unique ID to each UGS. The IDs consist of the word UGS plus an integer starting with the number one
and increasing with the addition of each UGS. The default ID can be changed from the Defaults menu in
Soil
Soil refers to the surrounding earth for the raceway system. Backfill soil or concrete for raceways is
specified in the Raceway Editor.
Type
Select the soil type from the drop-down list.

Average Dry
Average Wet
Clay Dry
Clay Wet
Sandy Dry
Sandy Wet

Note that the selection of soil type will not affect the value of RHO.
RHO
Enter the thermal resistivity of the earth (soil) in degrees C-cm/Watt.
Underground Raceway Systems Underground System Editor
Temperatures
Ambient
Ambient refers to the soil ambient temperature specified in degrees Celsius. The soil temperature is a
constant from the surface of the soil to the deepest point considered in the underground raceway system.
Warning
Warning refers to the conductor warning temperature specified in degrees Celsius. Each conductor,
whose temperature is above the warning level and below the alarm level, will be shown in magenta after a
cable temperature calculation study has been performed.
Alarm
Alarm refers to the maximum allowable conductor temperature specified in degrees Celsius. Each
conductor, whose temperature is above the alarm level, will be shown in red after a cable temperature
calculation study has been performed.
Heat Sources
This is the list of all external heat sources located in this underground raceway system. Each heat source
is specified by an ID as well as its (center-point) X and Y coordinates. X and Y coordinates are specified
from the upper left corner of your underground raceway system.
Raceways
This is the list of all raceways (direct-buried or duct bank) located in this underground raceway system.
Each raceway is specified by its ID, as well as, its reference point X and Y coordinates. The reference
point is the upper-left corner of the raceway.

Underground Raceway Systems Raceway Editor
27.7 Raceway Editor
The Raceway Editor consists of three separate pages or screens. These are the Raceway, Location, and
Cable pages. The Location and Cable pages will not be displayed if there are no conduits/locations or
cables in the raceway.
27.7.1 Raceway Page

Raceway Info
ID
unique ID to each raceway (direct buried or duct bank). The default ID consists of RW plus an integer
starting with the number one and increasing as the raceway numbers increase. The default ID can be
changed from the Defaults menu in the menu bar or from the Project View.
Ref.X
Ref.X is the X coordinate for the reference point in inches or cm. The reference point is the upper left
corner of the raceway. X and Y coordinates are specified from the upper left corner of your underground
raceway system.
Ref.Y
Ref.Y is the Y coordinate for the reference point in inches or cm. The reference point is the upper left
corner of the raceway. X and Y coordinates are specified from the upper left corner of your underground
raceway system.
Width
Width specifies the raceway width in inches or in centimeters. The width of the raceway begins from the
raceway reference point and extends to the right.
Height
Height specifies the raceway height in inches or in centimeters. The height of the raceway begins from
the raceway reference point and extends down.
Fill Type
Select the type of fill (material) from the list of options used in the construction of the raceway. Light
Aggregate and Heavy Aggregate are options for duct bank raceways, and Average Dry, Average Wet,
Sandy Dry, Sandy Wet, Clay Dry, and Clay Wet are options for direct buried raceways.
Fill RHO
Fill RHO specifies the thermal resistance of the fill material. Units are specified in degrees Celsius
centimeters per Watt.
Cables in Raceway
Displays a list of all the cables located in this raceway. Each cable is described with its ID, the number of
conductors per phase, the number of conductors per cable, and which location (conduit) the cable is
located in.
27.7.2 Location Page

Conduit / Location Info
Conduit
unique ID to each location or conduit. The default IDs consist of Loc (for direct buried locations) or
Cond (for duct bank conduits) plus an integer starting with the number one and increasing as the location /
conduit numbers increase. The default ID can be changed from the Defaults menu in the menu bar or
Horiz.Dist
Horiz. Dist specifies the horizontal distance of the center point of the location (conduit) from the raceway
reference point. The horizontal distance is specified in inches or in centimeters.
Vert. Dist
Vert. Dist specifies the vertical distance of the center point of the location (conduit) from the raceway
reference point. The vertical distance is specified in inches or in centimeters.
Type (Conduit)
Type specifies the type of material used in the fabrication of the conduit for duct bank raceways. This
field is not active for direct buried raceways. You can select from a variety of options including:

Metal
Fiber
Transite
PVC-40
PVC-80
PVC-A
Other
Size (Conduit)
Size specifies the standard diameter of a conduit in inches or centimeters. There are a variety of sizes to
choose from including:

0.50
0.75
1.00
1.25
1.50
2.00
2.50
3.00
3.50
4.00
5.00
6.00
OD (Conduit)
OD specifies the outside diameter of a conduit in inches or centimeters. For standard size conduits,
PowerStation provides the outside diameter of the conduit based on the conduit type.
Thickness (Conduit)
Thickness specifies the thickness of the material used to fabricate the conduit in inches or centimeters.
For standard size conduits, PowerStation provides the conduit thickness based on the conduit size and
type.
27.7.3 Cable Page

Cable Type
Cable type specifies details regarding the selected cable header and size. The details include
manufacturer, type, voltage rating, loading factor, number of conductors per cable, conductor material
type, and magnetic or non-magnetic installation type.
Size
Size specifies the cable size using international standards. The units for cable sizing are AWG/kcmil for
English unit cables and mm2 for Metric unit cables. Note that for quick selection, PowerStation provides
the list of all available cable sizes from the selected library. Changing the cable size will update pertinent
cable data from the library.
Cable Editor
Clicking on the Cable Editor button will open the editor for the selected cable. The Cable Editor contains
electrical and physical data used in both the one-line diagram and the underground raceway systems. Any
changes made in the Cable Editor will be reflected on the Cable page of the Raceway Editor.
Cable Routing
Cable routing specifies the conduit or location where this cable is installed (routed) in every underground
raceway system for this project. Details include the raceway ID, the type of raceway, i.e. direct buried or
duct bank, and which underground raceway system the raceway is located in.

Underground Raceway Systems External Heat Source
27.8 External Heat Source

External heat sources can be placed in underground raceway systems to simulate steam pipes or other
sources of heat in the vicinity of raceways.
Info
ID
unique ID to each external heat source. The IDs consist of HS plus an integer starting with the number
one and increasing as the external heat source numbers increase. The default ID can be changed from the
Defaults menu in the menu bar or from the Project View.
Ref. X
Ref. X is the X coordinate reference for the focal (center point) of the external heat source in inches or
cm. X and Y coordinates are specified from the upper left corner of your underground raceway system.
Ref. Y
Ref. Y is the Y coordinate reference for the focal (center point) of the external heat source in inches or
cm. X and Y coordinates are specified from the upper left corner of your underground raceway system.
Outside Diameter
Outside diameter specifies the diameter of the external heat source in inches or cm. The thermal energy
produced by the external heat source uses a constant temperature for the entire external heat source. The
larger the diameter, the greater the thermal energy provided by the external heat source. The outside
diameter is specified in inches or in centimeters.
Operating Temp.
Operating Temp. specifies the surface operating temperature of the external heat source in degrees
Celsius. The temperature is constant throughout the external heat source.
Underground Raceway Systems Calculation Methods
PowerStation provides five types of cable derating calculations, namely, steady-state temperature
calculation, uniform-ampacity ampacity calculation, uniform-temperature ampacity calculation, cable
sizing, and transient temperature calculation.

In the calculations, all conductors from the same cable branch are presumed to equally share the total line
current. They can be located in the same conduit/location or different conduits/locations in the same
raceway. Note that the cables located in different conduits/locations in general will not have the same
temperature, even though they carry the same load current. However, if they are located in the same
conduit/location, the calculated temperature will be the same.

The raceway system can contain several raceways and external heat sources. The calculation considers
the mutual heat effect of cables in the same raceway as well as in different raceways. It also considers the
heat effect from external heat sources.
Cables with De-Energized Conductors
For a DC or a single-phase cable branch, it is possible that some of the cable conductors may not carry
current. For example, consider that a single-phase branch needs five conductors per phase to carry its
load. Since a single-phase circuit has a forward and a return path, it requires ten conductors in total. If
for some reason three-conductor cables are used for this branch, four, three-conductor cables will be
needed, which equals a total of twelve conductors. This leaves two of the twelve conductors as non-
current-carrying (de-energized) conductors. PowerStation will spread non-current-carrying conductors
among individual cables for the branch. In this case, two of the four cables will have only two conductors
carrying current. In the Cable Temperature section of the output report, PowerStation reports the number
of energized conductors for each individual cable.
Voltage Used for Calculating Cable Dielectric Losses
Since the cable dielectric losses are directly related to the voltage applied on the insulation layer, the cable
operating voltage should be used for this calculation. In PowerStation, if a cable is a branch cable or an
equipment cable, the nominal kV of the cable terminal bus will be used. For an underground cable (no
terminal bus), the cable rated voltage is used. In the report, the voltage applied on the insulation layer is
printed under the Insulation Layer kV column.
27.9.1 Steady-State Temperature Calculation
The Steady-State Cable Temperature calculation determines the temperature of all the cable conductors
involved in the raceway system under a specified loading condition. The calculation is based on the NEC
accepted Neher-McGrath approach, which employs a thermal circuit model to represent heat flow
situations. It is assumed that the cables have been carrying the specified load long enough that the heat
flow has reached its steady-state and no more changes of temperature will occur throughout the raceway
system. The cable temperature calculated is dependent on raceway system configuration, cable loading,
and the location of each particular cable.
Maximum Number of Iterations
The maximum number of iterations for the steady-state and transient temperature calculations is set to 50.
To modify this value, enter the following command line in the ETAPS.INI file under the [ETAP
PowerStation] heading. Note that you must close PowerStation and launch it again to see the results of
the changes made in the ETAPS.INI file.

27.9.2 Cable Ampacity Calculation
The Cable Ampacity calculation determines the maximum allowable load current that the cables in a
raceway system can carry under the specified system conditions and the cable conductor temperature
limit. PowerStation provides two approaches to ampacity calculation: Uniform-Ampacity calculation and
Uniform-Temperature calculation. Both approaches employ the NEC accepted Neher-McGrath method
to calculate cable temperature, but they differ in the criteria used to determine the maximum allowable
load current.
27.9.3 Uniform-Ampacity (UA) Ampacity Calculation
This approach is based on the equal loading criterion for ampacity calculation. It determines the
maximum allowable load currents when all the cables in the system are equally loaded to the same
percentage of their base loading. The base load is obtained from the Cable Library for the appropriate
system configuration type, such as duct bank or directly buried raceways.

The calculation involves an iterative process of cable temperature calculation and load adjusting, as listed
below.

1. Determine an initial loading level based on the base ampacity from the Cable Library and using cable
derating factors for the given configuration.
2. Calculate cable temperature as in the steady-state temperature calculation described above.
3. Check cable temperature values against the cable temperature limit.
4. If the temperature of the hottest cable is within close range of the temperature limit, the solution has
been reached. If not, adjust the cable loading uniformly at the same percentage, either increasing or
decreasing the loading in order to make the highest cable temperature come closer to the temperature
limit. Then go to back to step 2 to recalculate cable temperature.

If the Update Currents from Ampacity Calc option is checked in the study case, the cable allowable
current is updated by the calculated ampacity.
The maximum number of iterations for uniform-ampacity and uniform-temperature calculations is set to
200. To modify this value, enter the following command line in the ETAPS.INI file under the [ETAP
PowerStation] heading. Note that you must close PowerStation and launch it again to see the results of
the changes made in the ETAPS.INI file.

Cables with Fixed Current
If the Fixed Current box in the Leading page of the Cable Editor is checked for a cable, the load current
for this cable will be held constant in the ampacity calculation. The cable current used in the calculation
depends on the Initial/Steady-State Amp selection in the study case.
27.9.4 Uniform-Temperature (UT) Ampacity Calculation
This approach is based on the equal temperature criterion for ampacity calculation. It determines the
maximum allowable load currents when all the cables in the system have their temperature within a small
range of the temperature limit. Since all the conductors in a cable branch are assumed to equally share the
load current, in the case where these conductors are not located in the same conduit/location, they may
not have the same temperature. When this situation occurs, the temperature of the hottest conductor in
this cable branch will be used to represent this cable branch.

The calculation involves an iterative process, which adjusts cable loading current in each iteration so that
the cable temperature approaches the temperature limit. The load adjustment in each step is determined
based on the gradient of cable temperature change and therefore offers fast convergence to the solution.
The following steps are involved in the calculation:

1. Determine an initial loading level based on the base ampacity from the Cable Library and using cable
derating factors for the given configuration.
2. Calculate cable temperature as in the steady-state temperature calculation described above.
3. Check cable temperature values against the cable temperature limit. If the temperature values of all
the cables are within close range of temperature limit, the solution has been reached. If not,
determine the load change required for the cable temperature to approach the temperature limit based
on the gradient of cable temperature change.
4. Update cable loading and go back to step 2 to recalculate cable temperature.

If the Update Currents from the Ampacity Calculation option is checked in the study case, the cable
allowable current will be updated by the calculated ampacity.

The maximum number of iterations for uniform-ampacity and uniform-temperature calculations is set to
200. To modify this value, enter the following command line in the ETAPS.INI file under the [ETAP
PowerStation] heading.

Acceleration Factor
The uniform-temperature ampacity acceleration factor has a range between 0.0 and 2.0. The value can be
set higher than the default setting of 0.7 to speed up the calculation; however, the calculation may
diverge. To modify this value, enter the following command line in the ETAPS.INI file under the [ETAP

UTAmpAccelFactor=0.7

Note that you must close PowerStation and launch it again to see the results of the changes made in the
ETAPS.INI file.
Cables with Fixed Current
If the Fixed Current box in the Leading page of the Cable Editor is checked for a cable, the load current
for this cable will be held constant in the ampacity calculation. The cable current used in the calculation
depends on the Initial/Steady-State Amp selection in the study case.
27.9.5 Cable Sizing
The Cable Sizing calculation determines the minimum size for each cable that will carry the specified
load current without violating the cable temperature limit. The cables considered as candidates for cable
sizing are the ones that are flagged as available cables in the Cable Library of the same cable type, that is,
they have the same voltage, insulation, conductor type, etc., as the cable to be sized.

The calculation is an iterative process involving repetitively adjusting the cable size and calculating cable
temperature. The cable temperature calculation is done in the same way as the steady-state temperature
calculation described above. If there are no available alternative sizes for a cable, the cable will be
considered not changeable.

If a solution is reached, calculation results will be reported in the output report and the cables involved in
the study will be changed to the new sizes if the Update Size option is checked in the study case.
The maximum number of iterations for cable sizing calculations is set to 1000. To modify this value,
enter the following command line in the ETAPS.INI file under the [ETAP PowerStation] heading. Note
that you must close PowerStation and launch it again to see the results of the changes made in the
ETAPS.INI file.

MaxIterForCableSizeCalc=1000
Cables with Fixed Size
If the Fixed Size box in the Loading page of the Cable Editor is checked for a cable, the size of this cable
will not be changed in the Cable Sizing studies.
27.9.6 Transient Temperature Calculation
The transient temperature calculation yields cable temperature variations as a function of time in
accordance to load changes. While the steady-state temperature calculation can be used to check the
cable temperature under constant loading, the transient temperature calculation provides a tool to verify
operation conditions of the raceway systems against the cable short-time or emergency temperature limits.
In most cases, the short-time maximum allowable temperature of a cable is considerably higher than its
steady-state temperature limit. For loads that have high peak values for only a short period of time, the
transient temperature calculation can be used to determine the cable peak temperature and its duration,
and to compare against its short-time maximum allowable temperature, resulting in a more economical
design of your raceway systems.


The transient temperature calculation is based on a dynamic thermal model of the raceway system,
constructed mainly from thermal resistance, thermal capacitance, and heat sources. The thermal
resistance is used to represent different thermal layers from the cable conductor to ambient soil. The
thermal capacitance is used to represent the capability of each layer to absorb the heat. When you change
the cable loading, the heat generated by the loss in the conductor will change accordingly, resulting in a
variation of the heat flow dissipated from the cable conductor to the ambient soil. As a result, the cable
conductor temperature will vary to follow the load change pattern, at a rate of temperature change that
depends on the resistance and capacitance values of the circuit.

The cable load variations are defined in the Load Profile of the Cable Editor. The initial state of the
raceway system is based on the initial load specified in the Cable Derating Study Case, either the load
profile (the first current value in the profile list) or the operating load. It is assumed that all cables
initially carry the initial load and have reached the steady-state.
The maximum number of iterations for the steady-state and transient temperature calculations is set to 50.
To modify this value, enter the following command line in the ETAPS.INI file under the [ETAP

Maximum Transient Steps
Maximum number of transient steps is set to 5000. To modify this value, enter the following command
line in the ETAPS.INI file under the [ETAP PowerStation] heading. Note that you must close
PowerStation and launch it again to see the results of the changes made in the ETAPS.INI file.

MaxTransientStep=5000
Underground Raceway Systems Required Data
27.10 Required Data
27.10.1 Underground Raceway System Data
The data for the underground raceway system can be entered from the Underground System Editor. The
minimum requirement for underground system data includes soil type, soil thermal resistivity, and
ambient temperature.
27.10.2 Raceway Data
Two types of raceways are supported in the current version of PowerStation: Duct Bank Raceway and
Direct Buried Raceway. Raceway data can be entered from the Raceway page of the Raceway Editor.
The minimum requirement for raceway data includes raceway dimension, raceway fill type, and its
thermal resistivity.

You can run studies with raceways that contain no cables. However, you cannot run studies if the
raceway contains unassigned cables (cables that are assigned to a raceway but are not located in a specific
conduit or location).
Conduit/Location Data
The data for conduit/location can be entered into the Location page of the Raceway Editor. A
conduit/location can be empty (contain no cables).
Conduit
A conduit can only be placed in a duct bank raceway. The minimum requirements for conduit data
include location, type, outside diameter, and thickness.
Location
A location is a specified space in a direct buried raceway in which cables are placed. Location can only
be assigned to a direct buried raceway. The only requirement for location data is its location.
Cable Data
Cable data is entered into several pages of the Cable Editor.
Data from the Info Page
The cable type data must be available before performing any cable derating calculation. You can select
cable type from the Cable Library by clicking on the Library button.

Other data that is needed for cable derating calculations and can be entered into the Info page including
the cable size and the number of conductors per phase.

Special attention should be given to the Link to Library box. When this box is checked, the cable
derating calculation will extract the cable physical data directly from the Cable Library; otherwise it will
use the data from the Physical page of the Cable Editor.
Underground Raceway Systems Required Data
Physical Page
This page is designed especially for entering parameters employed in cable derating calculations. The
parameters describing the physical aspect of a cable are required to calculate cable electrical resistance,
thermal resistance of different layers, dielectric losses, etc.
Loading Page
The data entered in this page describe the loading condition of a cable. The Transient Load Profile data is
used for transient temperature calculation. The Operating Load or the first current value in the Transient
Load Profile list are used, depending on the selection in the Cable Derating Study Case, as the initial or
steady-state load current in the transient temperature calculation, steady-state temperature calculation, and
cable sizing.

The Load Factor is used in all types of cable derating calculations to represent cyclic load conditions.

The Projection Multiplication Factor is used to modify cable loading in the transient temperature
calculation, steady-state temperature calculation, and cable sizing, if the corresponding option is checked
in the Cable Derating Study Case.

The Sheath/Armor Current is specified as a percentage of the load current. It represents the situation
where the sheath/armor is intentionally utilized to carry part of the load current. In all other situations,
sheath/armor current should be set to zero.
Ampacity Page
The Application Multiplication Factor is used to modify cable loading in the transient temperature
calculation, steady-state temperature calculation, and cable sizing, if the corresponding option is checked
in the Cable Derating Study Case.
External Heat Source Data
The external heat source data required for cable derating calculations include the location of the external
heat source, its outside diameter, and its temperature.
Study Case
Prior to performing any type of cable derating calculations, a Cable Derating Study Case must be
selected. The study case contains information necessary to carry out the calculation.

Underground Raceway Systems Output Reports
27.11 Output Reports
A text report is generated after performing a cable derating calculation. Printed on the top of each page of
the output report is the general information about the project, the study cases, and the version of
PowerStation, etc.

The first page of the report contains information about the underground raceway system, including the
number of raceways and external heat sources in the system. If there are external heat sources in the
underground system, this information is printed on the second page. It is followed by raceway and cable
information.

Input data and calculation results for raceways and cables are grouped together according to raceways,
namely, the conduits/locations and cable information, as well as the related calculation. Results will be
printed together with the information of the raceway in which the conduits/locations and cables are
located. This section of the output report is formatted according to the type of calculation being
performed.
Steady-State Temperature Calculation
This section of the output report starts with raceway information, followed by conduit/location
information. It then presents information for cables, including cable parameters, calculated cable
insulation thermal resistance, dielectric losses, etc. As the cable conductor temperature is the main result
from the steady-state temperature calculation, these values are presented in the final portion of this
section. Note that conductors that belong to the same cable and are located in the same conduit/location
have the same temperature; therefore, the temperature for only one conductor is printed.

CABLE AMPACITY DERATING
=======================
Project: Example PowerStation 4.0.0C Page: 1
Location: Lake Forest, California Date: 10-12-2000
Engineer: Operation Technology, Inc. Study Case: CD File: EXAMPLE

_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


=================================================================================================================================

ETAP PowerStation
_________________

Cable Derating Analysis
_______________________

Cable Steady State Temperature Calculation

UGS System Number of EHS Number of Raceway
____________ _____________ _________________

UGS1 1 1

Ambient Conductor Soil Earth
Temp (C) Temp (C) Type RHO
_________ _________ _____________ ______

35.00 90.00 Clay Wet 90.00

Multiplication Factor: Global Projection MF = 100 %
Initial/Steady State Amp: Operating Load

Output File: C:\ETAPS30\PowerStn\Example\TranTemp.cdr
External Heat Source Information
________________________________

Horiz. Vertical
Distance Distance OD Temp.
No. ID (in) (in) (in) (C)
___ ____________ ________ ________ _____ ______

1 Steam Pipe 75.40 35.90 6.00 80.00

Raceway Information
___________________

Horiz. Vertical Fill Number Number
Raceway Distance Distance Height Width ______________________ of of
ID (in) (in) (in) (in) Type RHO Conduit Cable
____________ ________ ________ ______ ______ _____________ ______ _______ ______

RW1 19.20 30.00 20.40 43.50 Light Aggreg. 90.00 9 8

Conduit/Location Information
____________________________

Horiz. Vertical Duct
Distance Distance Size Thick Fill
No. ID (in) (in) Type (in) (in) (%)
___ ____________ ________ ________ _____________ _____ _____ _____

1 Cond1 6.55 6.55 PVC__40 5.56 0.258 30.04
2 Cond2 14.05 6.55 PVC__40 5.56 0.258 18.49
3 Cond3 29.05 14.15 PVC__40 5.56 0.258 20.32
4 Cond4 6.55 14.05 PVC__40 5.56 0.258 13.36
5 Cond5 14.00 14.00 PVC__40 6.62 0.280 23.03
6 Cond6 21.50 14.00 PVC__40 6.62 0.280 12.66
7 Cond7 29.00 6.50 PVC__40 2.87 0.203 28.37
8 Cond8 21.50 6.50 PVC__40 2.87 0.203 28.37
9 Cond9 36.50 6.50 PVC__40 2.87 0.203 28.37

Cable Information
_________________

No. Cab Insul Sheath
of per Volt Cable Load Cond Insul Thick Shield Sheath Thick
No. ID Size Cond Phs kV I Factor Type Type (mil) Status Type (mil)
___ ____________ ____ ____ ___ ____ ______ ______ _____ ________ _____ ______ ______ ______

1 Cable8 500 1 1 15 234.00 100.00 CU RUBBER 2 295.0 Y None 0.00
2 Cable6 3/0 1 1 15 156.00 100.00 CU RUBBER 2 295.0 Y None 0.00
3 Cable2 4/0 3 1 5 203.09 100.00 CU RUBBER 190.0 Y None 0.00
5 Cable1 4/0 1 1 15 94.00 100.00 AL RUBBER 2 295.0 Y None 0.00

Jacket Cable Insul Insul Dielec Cable Cond
Jacket Thick O.D. DC Res. Ther.R Layer Losses Temp Losses
No. ID Type (mil) (in) (uOhm/ft) (Ohm/ft) kV (W/ft) Yc Ys (C) (W/ft)
___ ____________ ______ ______ _____ _________ ________ _____ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______

1 Cable8 None 0.00 1.60 21.63 1.735 8.66 0.107 0.018 0.000 79.37 4.37
2 Cable6 None 0.00 1.25 64.23 2.585 8.66 0.072 0.002 0.000 90.71 5.89 *
3 Cable2 None 0.00 2.28 50.98 0.603 2.40 0.008 0.007 0.021 101.65 8.22 *
4 Cable5 None 0.00 1.07 50.98 1.724 2.89 0.012 0.003 0.000 72.65 1.10
5 Cable1 None 0.00 1.31 83.50 2.385 8.66 0.078 0.001 0.000 82.55 2.72
6 Cable3 None 0.00 1.05 162.67 3.514 8.66 0.053 0.000 0.000 81.93 1.31
7 Cable4 None 0.00 1.25 30.77 1.410 2.89 0.015 0.008 0.000 76.93 0.41
8 Cable9 None 0.00 1.31 50.98 2.385 8.66 0.078 0.003 0.000 77.87 1.92

Cable Temperature
_________________

Conduit No. of No. of Cable
Cable Location Conductors Engergized Temp
No. ID ID per Cable Cond/Cable (C)
___ ____________________ ____________ __________ __________ ______

1 Cable8-1A Cond1 1 1 79.37
2 Cable8-1B Cond1 1 1 79.37
3 Cable8-1C Cond1 1 1 79.37
4 Cable6-1A Cond2 1 1 90.71 *
5 Cable6-1B Cond2 1 1 90.71 *
6 Cable6-1C Cond2 1 1 90.71 *
7 Cable2 Cond3 3 3 101.65 *
8 Cable5-1C Cond4 1 1 72.65
9 Cable5-1B Cond4 1 1 72.65
10 Cable5-1A Cond4 1 1 72.65
11 Cable1-1A Cond5 1 1 82.55
12 Cable1-1B Cond5 1 1 82.55
13 Cable1-1C Cond5 1 1 82.55

*Indicates cables with conductor temperature exceeding its limit.

Ampacity Calculation
The ampacity calculation results are reported in the same format as the steady-state temperature
calculation, the only difference being that the cable current value reported is the cable maximum
allowable load instead of the actual cable load current.
Cable Sizing Calculation
The cable sizing calculation results are reported in the same format as the steady-state temperature
calculation, the only difference being that the cable size reported is the smallest cable size that can carry
the specified load current without violating the cable temperature limit.
Transient Temperature Calculation
The results of the transient temperature calculation are represented in both text and plot formats. The text
report has the same format as the report generated by the steady-state temperature calculation. As the
cable temperature varies with time, the temperature values reported in the text report is the highest
temperature value during the simulation period.

The temperature plots can be viewed by clicking on the View Cable Temperature Plots button on the
Cable Derating Toolbar. The Printing and Plotting Chapter describes features that will be helpful in
viewing the plot.

Underground Raceway Systems Plots
27.12 Plots
Click on the Plot icon to open the Cable Selection dialog box, which contains all the cables in the raceway
system. Clicking on a cable will select the cable for plotting its temperature. If a cable is already selected,
clicking on it again will deselect that cable. Clicking the OK button will open the Plot View, which will
display the transient temperature for the selected cables.

The Cable Selection dialog box displays the cable ID along with the conduit/location ID in which the
cables are located and the raceway ID. Note that you can have more than one raceway in a U/G system,
and the same cable can be placed in more than one raceway.

Temperatures for up to sixteen cables can be displayed in one plot. If more than sixteen cables are
selected, the temperature for the first sixteen cables will be displayed in the plot. The Cable Transient
Temperature plot indicates temperatures of selected cables as functions of time. You can change the size
and font of the text (labels) by double-clicking on the labels. You can also change the type and color of
plots (curves) by double-clicking on them. For more details, refer to Printing and Plotting.

Plots, which are generated as a result of transient temperature calculations, can be printed by any printer
supported by your Windows platform. To print a plot, display the plot view, make formatting
modifications, if required, and select the Print command from the File menu. You may have several plot
views displayed on your screen; however, only one plot can be active at any time. The printed plot size is
currently set to the size of the paper on which it is being printed.

Plot parameters such as plot line type, axis, legend, and text can be modified directly from the plot view.
For example, to modify plot line type, double-click on the plot line and change the line type from the Plot
Parameter Editor. For more details see the chapter on Printing and Plotting.
Underground Raceway Systems Tutorial

27.13 Underground Systems Tutorial

This tutorial provides a brief overview of the operation of the Underground Raceway System (UGS).
Once you finish this tutorial, you will be familiar with some the key features and capabilities of the
program and the various options available for performing cable derating analysis.

Cable derating analysis is an important part of power system design and analysis. For designing a new
system, it determines the proper size of cables to carry the specified loads. For analysis of an existing
system, it examines cable temperatures and determines their ampacities.

Starting the PowerStation Program and Opening the Example Project

Start the ETAP PowerStation program by double-clicking on the icon.

PowerStation organizes your work on a project basis. Each project provides all the necessary tools and
support for modeling and analyzing an electrical power system. A project consists of an electrical system
that requires a unique set of electrical components and interconnections. In PowerStation, each project
provides a set of users, user access controls, and a separate database in which its elements and
connectivity data are stored.

Follow these simple steps to open the EXAMPLE project file.

Enter your User Name in the Logon Editor and select the Project Editor option in the Select
Access Level Editor.

The Example project includes a one-line diagram of an electrical system. Notice the UGS1 view located
behind the Study View. Click on the UGS1 view to bring it to the front and maximize it.

27.13.1 Cross Section Diagrams and Editors

PowerStation provides a fully graphical Underground (U/G) Raceway System. Each PowerStation
project supports a unique U/G raceway system with multiple views of the U/G system. Each view is
conceptually a cross-section of the desired raceways and heat sources that are in the same vicinity.

Notice the toolbars on the top and the right-hand side of the U/G raceway cross-section view.

Editors

Double-click on the raceway RW1 and view the Raceway Editor. This editor includes Raceway,
Location, and Cable information. Flip through the pages and familiarize yourself with the Raceway
Editor. Note that the Help button is available on each page of all editors.

Double-click on the underground system and view Underground System Editor. This editor
provides details regarding the overall layout of underground raceways, which includes global
properties such as soil type and temperature.
Double-click on the External Heat Source. External heat sources can be placed in underground
raceway systems to simulate steam pipes or other sources of heat in the vicinity of raceways.

27.13.2 Menu Bars and Toolbars
Power Station Menu Bar

The PowerStation Menu Bar contains a comprehensive collection of menu options.

This menu bar is displayed when a UGS view is active. The PowerStation menu bar contains a list of
menu options which, when an option is selected, activates a drop-down list of commands. Some of the
menu options also activate an additional list of menus (an arrow pointing to the right denotes an
additional menu). For example, select Project, Settings, and Data Type.
Project Toolbar

in PowerStation.
Mode Toolbar

Underground raceway system has two modes of operation, Edit, and U/G Cable Raceway.
Edit Mode
Edit mode allows you to create a cross-section view of your underground raceway system.

Click on the Edit mode of the UGS Mode Toolbar.

To add elements to the UGS view you click on the
elements on the Edit toolbar and add it to the UGS view.
Lets start by adding a New Duct Bank Raceway to the
UGS View. Then add two New Conduits to the raceway.
Resize a conduit as follows:

Click once on one of the conduits so it is selected.
Then move your cursor to one corner of the selection
box. A double-end arrow appears.
Left-click, hold, and drag the cursor.
Release the cursor when the desired conduit size is
reached.

Note that you can also resize a conduit from its editor.



Next click on the New Cable icon on the Edit Toolbar and add a cable to the conduit. Then double-
click on the cable cross-section and select a cable from the library.

Select different cable sizes and notice how the cross-section size of the cable changes
accordingly.
Click on one conductor and notice the cable phase annotation.
Select a conductor and drag it to the second conduit.
Study Mode
Cable Derating Study mode enables you to create and modify study cases, perform system analysis, and
view output reports and plots.

Click on the U/G Cable Raceway icon on the Mode Toolbar to go to the Cable Derating Study
Mode. Cable Derating Study Toolbar and Cable Derating Study Case Toolbar are available in the
Study mode of operation.

Cable Derating Study Toolbar
When a study mode is active (selected), the Study Toolbar for the selected study is displayed on the right
side of the screen.

By clicking on the buttons on the Study Toolbar, you can run studies, view output reports, view plots, and
change display options.

Cable Derating Study Case Toolbar and Editor
When program is in Study mode, the Study Case toolbar appears on the top toolbar. This toolbar contains
Cable Derating Study Case, output report name, and viewer.

Click on the Edit Study Case icon on the Study Case toolbar.

The Cable Derating Study Case Editor contains solution control variables, cable loading parameters,
and options for output reports. PowerStation allows you to create and save unlimited numbers of study
cases. Cable derating calculations are conducted and reported in accordance with the settings you have
specified in the study case editor. Note that you can have an unlimited number of study cases and can
easily switch between the study cases without the trouble of resetting the study case options each time.
This feature is designed to organize your study efforts and save you time.


27.13.3 Exercise
Lets do an exercise to get the feel of how the program works. You have learned how to add elements to
the UGS view earlier in this tutorial. In this exercise you can run a study and study the calculation results.

Steps
1. Go to the Project View and open UGS2 view. This is a working example and you can perform all
Cable Derating Analyses for learning purposes.

This example consists of one Raceway (RW2), six conduits, and six routed cables. There is a steam pipe
in the close vicinity of this raceway.

2. Activate UGS2 view by clicking once on the view. Study toolbar appears on the right-hand side.

3. Run Steady-State Temperature analysis by clicking on its icon.


4. View the output report for the calculated results.

5. Perform other calculation methods and view the output report.

Cable Temperature
_________________
Conduit Cable
Cable Location Temp
No. ID ID (C)
___ ____________________ ____________ ______

1 Cable10 Loc1 54.84
2 Cable2 Loc2 70.41
3 Cable4-1A Loc3 66.08

Calculated
Results
Temperature
Warning

Chapter 28

Ground Grid Systems

Since the early days of the electric power industry, the safety of personnel in and around electric power
installations has been a primary concern. With ever increasing fault current levels in todays
interconnected power systems, there is renewed emphasis on safety. The safety of personnel is
compromised by the rise in the ground potential of grounded structures during unbalanced electric power
faults. At such times, humans touching grounded structures can be subjected to voltages. However, the
magnitude and duration of the electric current conducted through the human body should not be sufficient
to cause ventricular fibrillation

Years of research on the effects of electric current on the human body have lead to the development of
standards of permissible values to avoid electrocution. The Ground Grid Systems program utilizes the
following four methods of computation:

FEM - Finite Element Method
IEEE 80-1986
IEEE 80-2000
IEEE 665-1995
Ground Grid Systems Introduction

The Ground Grid Systems program calculates the following:

The Maximum Allowable Current for specified conductors. Warnings are issued if the specified
conductor is rated lower than the fault current level.
The Step and Touch potentials for any rectangular/triangular/L-shaped/T-shaped configuration of a
ground grid, with or without ground rods (IEEE Std 80 and IEEE Std 665).
The tolerable Step and Mesh potentials and compares them with actual, calculated Step and Mesh
potentials (IEEE Std 80 and IEEE Std 665).
Graphic profiles for the absolute Step and Touch voltages, as well as the tables of the voltages at
various locations (Finite Element Method).
The optimum number of parallel ground conductors and rods for a rectangular/triangular/L-shaped/T-
shaped ground grid. The cost of conductors/rods and the safety of personnel in the vicinity of the
substation/generating station during a ground fault, are both considered. Design optimizations are
performed using a relative cost effectiveness method (based on the IEEE Std 80 and IEEE Std 665).
The Ground Resistance and Ground Potential rise (GPR).

Some of the main features of the Ground Grid Systems Analysis Study are summarized below:

Calculate the tolerable Step and Touch potentials
Compare potentials against the actual, calculated Step and Touch potentials
Optimize number of conductors with fixed rods based on cost and safety
Optimize number of conductors & rods based on cost and safety
Calculate the maximum allowable current for specified conductors
Compare allowable currents against fault currents
Calculate Ground System Resistance
Calculate Ground Potential Rise
User-expandable conductor library
Allow a two-layer soil configuration in addition to the surface material
Ground grid configurations showing conductor & rod plots
Display 3-D/contour Touch Voltage plots
Display 3-D/contour Step Voltage plots
Display 3-D/contour Absolute Voltage plots
Calculate Absolute, Step & Touch potentials at any point in the configuration
Conductor/Rod can be oriented in any possible 3-Dimensional direction
Handle irregular configurations of any shape
Ground Grid Systems Ground Grid Systems Presentation

28.1 Ground Grid Systems Presentation
The GGS presentation is composed of the Top View, Soil View, and 3D View. The Top View is used to
edit the ground conductors/rods of a ground grid. The Soil View is used to edit the soil properties of the
surface, top, and lower layers of soil. The 3D View is used for the three-dimensional display of the
ground grid. The 3D View also allows the display of the ground grid to rotate, offering views from
various angles. The GGS presentation allows for graphical arrangement of the conductors and rods that
represent the ground grid, and to provide a physical environment to conduct ground grid design studies.

Each GGS presentation is a different and independent ground grid system. This concept is different from
the multi-presentation approach of the One-Line Diagram, where all presentations have the same
elements. There is no limit to the number of GGS presentations that can be created.
28.1.1 Create a New Ground Grid Presentation
To create a GGS presentation, a ground grid must first be added to the One-Line Diagram. Click on the
Ground Grid component located on the AC toolbar, and drop the GGS symbol anywhere on the One-
Line Diagram.

Right-click on any location inside the ground grid box, and select Properties to bring up the Grid Editor.
The Grid Editor dialog box is used to specify grid information, grid styles, equipment information, and to
view calculation results. Click on the Grid Presentation button to bring up a GGS presentation.

Double-clicking on the ground grid box located on the One-Line Diagram will bring up the Ground-Grid
Project Information dialog box, used to select an IEEE or FEM - Finite Element Method Study Model.
Ground Grid Systems Ground Grid Systems Presentation

After selecting the IEEE or FEM Study Model, the Ground Grid Systems graphical user interface window
will be displayed. Below is a GGS presentation of a ground grid for the FEM Study Model case.

Soil View
3D View
Top View

Ground Grid Systems FEM Edit Toolbar

28.2 FEM Editor Toolbar
The FEM Editor Toolbar appears when the FEM Study Model is selected, and when in the Ground Grid
Systems Edit mode. This toolbar has the following function keys:

Pointer
Conductor
Rod
FEM Rectangular Shape
FEM L-Shape
FEM T-Shape
FEM Triangular Shape
Pointer
The cursor takes the shape of the element selected from the Edit Toolbar. Click on the Pointer icon to
return the cursor to its original arrow shape, or to move an element placed in the Top View of the GGS
presentation.
Conductor
Click on the Conductor icon to create a new conductor and to place it in the Top View of the GGS. For
more information on conductors see the Conductor/Rod Editor section (for FEM).
Rod
Click on the Rod icon to create a new rod and to place it in the Top View of the GGS. For more
information on rods see the Conductor/Rod Editor section (for FEM).
FEM Rectangular Shape
Click on the FEM Rectangular Shape icon to create a new FEM grid of rectangular shape and to place it
in the Top View of the GGS. For more information on grids see the FEM Group Editor section.
FEM T-Shape
Click on the FEM T-Shape icon to create a new FEM T-shaped grid and to place it in the Top View of the
GGS. For more information on grids see the FEM Group Editor section.
Ground Grid Systems FEM Edit Toolbar

FEM L-Shape
Click on the FEM L-Shape icon to create a new FEM L-shaped grid and to place it in the Top View of the
GGS. For more information on grids see the FEM Group Editor section.

FEM Triangular Shape
Click on the FEM Triangular Shape icon to create a new FEM grid of triangular shape and to place it in
the Top View. For more information on grids see the FEM Group Editor section.
Ground Grid Design IEEE Edit Toolbar

28.3 IEEE Edit Toolbar
The IEEE Editor Toolbar appears when the IEEE Study Model is selected, and when in the Ground Grid
Systems Edit mode. This toolbar has the following function keys:

Pointer
IEEE Rectangular Shape
IEEE T-Shape
IEEE L-Shape
IEEE Triangular Shape

Pointer
The cursor takes the shape of the element selected from the Edit Toolbar. Click on the Pointer icon to
return the cursor to its original arrow shape, or to move an element placed in the Top View of the GGS
presentation.
IEEE Rectangular Shape
Click on the IEEE Rectangular Shape icon to create a new IEEE grid of rectangular shape and to place it
in the Top View of the GGS. For more information on grids see the IEEE Group Editor section.
IEEE T-Shape
The IEEE T-Shape grid is valid only for the IEEE Std. 80-2000 method. Click on the IEEE T-Shape icon
to create a new IEEE T-shaped grid and to place it in the Top View of the GGS. For more information on
grids see the IEEE Group Editor section.
IEEE L-Shape
The IEEE L-Shape grid is valid only for the IEEE Std 80-2000 method. Click on the IEEE L-Shape icon
to create a new IEEE L-shaped grid and to place it in the Top View of the GGS. For more information on
grids see the IEEE Group Editor section.

IEEE Triangular Shape
The IEEE Triangular Shape grid is valid only for the IEEE Std 80-2000 method. Click on the IEEE
Triangular Shape icon to create a new IEEE grid of triangular shape and to place it in the Top View. For
more information on grids see the IEEE Group Editor section.
Ground Grid Design Study Method Toolbar

28.4 Ground Grid Study Method Toolbar
The Ground Grid Study Method Toolbar appears when the GGS Study mode is selected. This toolbar has
the following function keys:

Ground-Grid Calculation
Optimized Conductors
Optimized Conductors and Rods
Summary and Warning
Plot Selection
Report Manager
Stop
Ground-Grid Calculation
Click on the Ground-Grid Calculation button to calculate:

Step and Touch (mesh) Potentials
Ground Resistance
Ground Potential Rise
Tolerable Step and Touch Potential Limits
Potential Profiles (only for the FEM method)
Optimized Conductors
Click on the Optimized Conductors button to calculate the minimum number of conductors (that satisfy
the tolerable limits for the Step and Touch potentials) for a fixed number of ground rods. This
optimization function is for IEEE Std methods only.
Optimized Conductors and Rods
Click on the Optimized Conductors button to calculate the optimum numbers of conductors and ground
rods needed to limit the Step and Touch potentials. This optimization function is for IEEE Std methods
only.

Summary and Warning
Click on this button to open the GRD Analysis Alert View dialog box of Summary and Warning for the
Ground Grid Systems Calculation.

Plot Selection
This function is valid only for the FEM method. Click on this button to open the Plot Selection dialog
box to select a variety of potential profile plots to review, and click OK to generate the output plots.


Report Manager
Click on this button to open the Ground Grid Design Report Manager dialog box to select a variety of
pre-formatted output plots to review. Select a plot type and click OK to bring up the output plot. A
detailed explanation of the Ground Grid Design Report Manager is given in section 28.13.

Output Report files can be selected from the Output Report List Box on the Study Case Toolbar shown
below.

Study Case Toolbar
Stop
The Stop Sign button is normally disabled, and becomes enabled when a Ground Grid Systems
Calculation is initiated. Clicking on this button will terminate calculations in progress, and the output
reports will be incomplete.

Ground Grid Design Edit A GGS

28.5 Edit A GGS
Conductors, rods, and grids of various shapes are the elements available for adding to the Top View of the
Ground Grid Systems presentation. These elements are located on the Edit Toolbar of the GGS module.
28.5.1 Select Elements
Place the cursor on an element located on the Edit toolbar and click the left mouse button. Note that
when a grid shape is selected, regardless of the number of conductors or rods it contains, the shape is
considered to be one element. If a selected shape is deleted or copied, the shape and its contents will also
be deleted or copied. Press the <Ctrl> key and click on multiple elements to either select or de-select
them.
28.5.2 Add Elements
To add a new element to the GGS presentation, select a new element from the Edit Toolbar by clicking on
the appropriate element button. Notice that the shape of the cursor changes to correspond to that of the
selected element.

Place the selected element by clicking the mouse anywhere in the Top View section of the GGS
presentation, and note that the cursor returns to its original shape. Double-click on any element in the
Edit Toolbar to place multiple copies of the same element in the Top View section of the GGS
presentation.

Rules
Elements can be added ONLY in Edit mode
Two conductors/rods cannot be added on top of each other
Elements cannot be added in the Study mode
Only one IEEE shape can be added in the Top View
FEM group shapes can overlap each other
Add Conductors
Click on the Conductor button on the FEM Edit Toolbar, move the cursor to the GGS presentation, and
click to place the element in the Top View. PowerStation creates the new conductor using default values.
Add Rods
Click on the Rod button on the FEM Edit Toolbar, move the cursor to the GGS presentation, and click to
place the element in the Top View. PowerStation creates the new rod using default values.
Add Grid Shapes
Click on the desired Shape button on the FEM Edit Toolbar, move the cursor to the GGS presentation,
and click to place the element in the Top View. PowerStation creates the new grid shape using default
values.
Add Conductors by Ungrouping FEM Shapes
An FEM shape added in the Top View of a GGS presentation can be ungrouped into individual
conductors. To ungroup, move the cursor inside the selected shape, right-click and select Ungroup.
Ground Grid Design Edit A GRD

28.5.3 Move / Relocate Elements
When an element is added to a GGS presentation its position coordinates (x, y and z) are updated
automatically in the editor/spreadsheet and in the Help line at the bottom of your screen. The element
may be relocated to new coordinates by changing the coordinate values at the editor/spreadsheet (xs, yes
and zs for conductors/rods, and Lx, Ly, Depth, # of Rods and # of Conductors in X/Y Directions for
various typical grid shapes) or by dragging the element and watching the Help line change to the desired
position.

To drag an element, first select the element to be moved. Place the cursor on top of the selected element,
Click and hold the left mouse button, drag the element to the desired position, and release the left button.
Move Conductors/Rods
Select the element, click and hold the left mouse button, drag the element to the new position and release
the left button.
Move Shapes
Shapes can be graphically moved within the Top View. Select the shape, click and hold the left mouse
button, drag the shape to the new location and release the left button.
28.5.4 Cut (Delete) Elements
Select the element or group of elements and press the Delete key on the keyboard.
28.5.5 Copy Elements
Select an element or group of elements, click the right mouse button, and select Copy.
28.5.6 Paste
Use the Paste command to copy the selected cells from the Dumpster into the GGS presentation.
28.5.7 Size of Elements
When an element is added to a GGS presentation, its size is set by default. The width and height of grid
shapes and the length of conductors can be graphically changed. Select the element and move the cursor
to a corner or edge of the element. Once the cursor changes its form, click and hold the left mouse button
to drag the element to its new size. Release the left mouse button once the desired size has been obtained.
Conductor/rod sizes can be change from the spreadsheet or shape editors. When the Length is altered, X
1
,
Y
1,
and Z
1
will remain unchanged, and X
2
, Y
2,
and Z
2
will change accordingly. The cross-sectional area
of a conductor, the outside diameter and/or length of a rod can only be changed from the conductor or rod
Editor.

Rules
Sizing elements can be done in Edit mode ONLY
Elements cannot overlap each other
Ground Grid Design Study Case Editor

The GGS Study Case Editor contains Average Weight, Ambient Temperature, Current Projection Factor,
Fault Current Durations, option to input or compute Fault Current Parameters (i.e., zero-sequence fault
current, current division factor, and X/R ratio), and Plot Parameters (for the Finite Element Method only).
PowerStation allows for the creation and saving of an unlimited number of study cases for each type of
study, allowing the user to easily switch between different GGS study cases. This feature is designed to
organize the study efforts and to save time. To create a new GGS study case, go to the Study Case Menu
on the toolbar and select Create New to bring up the GGS Study Case Editor.

28.6.1 Study Case Page

Study Case ID
A study case can be renamed by simply deleting the old Study Case ID and entering a new one. The
Study case ID can be up to 25 alphanumeric characters. Use of the Navigator button at the bottom of the
Study Case Editor allows the user to go from one study case to another.

Options
In this section, select the average body weight for the person working above the ground grid, and the
ambient temperature. The weight is used to calculate the tolerable Step and Touch potentials.
50 kg
Check this button to select an average body weight of 50 kg.
70 kg
Check this button to select an average body weight of 70 kg.
Ambient Temperature

Enter the ambient temperature in
0
C. This parameter is used for checking the size of the ground
conductors.
Reports & Plots
Specify the report/plot parameters.
Report Details

Check this box to report intermediate results for an IEEE Std. Method or voltage profiles for the Finite
Element Method.
Auto Display of Summary & Alert

Check this box to automatically show the result window for Summary & Warning.
Plot Step

Plot Step is valid only for the FEM Study Model. This value is entered in m/ft, and it is used to find the
points (or locations) where Absolute/Step/Touch potentials need to be computed and plotted. Note that
the smaller this number, the more calculations are required, increasing calculation time, but yielding
smoother plots. The recommended value is 1 meter. If higher resolution is needed, decrease this number.
Boundary Extension

Enter the boundary extension in m/ft. This value is used to extend the grid boundaries inside which the
Absolute/Step/Touch potentials need to be computed.
Fault Durations

Allows the user to specify Fault Current durations.
t
f
Enter the duration of fault current in seconds to determine decrement factor. The Fault duration (t
f
), t
c
,
and Shock duration (t
s
) are normally assumed to be equal, unless the Fault duration is the sum of
successive shocks.
t
c
Enter in seconds the duration of Fault Current for sizing ground conductors.

t
s
Enter in seconds the duration of Shock Current to determine permissible levels for the human body.
Grid Current Factors

In this section, the Corrective Projection Factor and the Current Division Factor can be specified.
C
p
Enter the Corrective Projection Factor in percent, accounting for the relative increase of fault currents
during the station lifespan. For a zero future system growth, C
p
= 100.
S
f
Enter the Current Division Factor in percent, relating the magnitude of Fault current to that of its portion
flowing between the grounding grid and the surrounding earth.
Update

Check this box to update/replace the number of conductors/rods in the Conductor/Rod Editor, with the
number of conductors/rods calculated by using optimization methods. This box is only valid with the
IEEE methods.
Ground Short-Circuit Current
This section is used to specify the fault current conditions for the GGS.
User Specified

Check this button to input and display values for 3I
0
and X/R specified by the user.
Short-Circuit Study

Check this button to use and display the 3I
0
and X/R values obtained from a short circuit study performed
on a One-Line Diagram.
3I
0
Enter the rms value of the zero-sequence fault current in kA. The Maximum Grid Current is determined
from this rms value, the Decrement Factor, Current Projection Factor, and Current Division Factor.
X/R
Enter the ratio of Inductive Reactance to Resistance. This value is used to calculate the decrement factor.
Remarks 2
nd
Line
Up to 120 alphanumeric characters can be entered in this remark box. Information entered here will be
study cases and is entered in the Project Information Editor.

Ground Grid Design Ground Short-Circuit Current Editor

28.7 Ground Short-Circuit Current Values
This feature allows the user to link the Ground Grid Systems module with the One-Line Diagram, to
update and use the total 3I
0
and the equivalent X/R values obtained directly from the One-Line Diagram
representation of the power system.
Updating Ground-Short Circuit Current
To update and use the 3I
0
and X/R values, with values obtained by performing an Unbalanced Fault Short
Circuit Study on a One-Line Diagram, select the Short-Circuit Study radio button located in the Ground
Short Circuit Current section of the GRD dialog box, and follow these steps:
Perform an Unbalanced Fault Short Circuit Study
An Unbalanced Fault Short Circuit Study must be performed on the One-Line Diagram power system
representation. The following conditions must be met:

For the ANSI SC Unbalanced Fault Calculation only the half-cycle values are transferred.
For the IEC SC Unbalanced Fault Calculation only the IEC 909 values are transferred.
Select a Grid to be Updated
At the One-Line Diagram, right-click on the grid of interest, and choose the Update Fault kA option
from the menu. This option is only available when successful Unbalanced Fault Current Calculation
results are obtained, for the ANSI and IEC standards specified. All the buses covered by the grid are
considered by the update function. However, only the results for the bus with the highest total short
circuit current will be used.

The Grd ShortCircuit Current Updating dialog box will be displayed. The new Short-Circuit Current
values will be used only if the user clicks on the Replace button, located on this dialog box.


28.7.1 GRD Short-Circuit Current Updating
All the fields in this dialog box are for display only.

GRD ID
Displays the ID of the selected grid.

Existing SC kA
Displays the current short-circuit kA value used with the selected grid.

Existing SC kA X/R
Displays the current short-circuit kA X/R value used with the selected grid.

New SC kA
Displays the new Short-Circuit kA value to be updated for the selected grid.

New SC kA X/R
Displays the new short-circuit kA X/R value to be updated for the selected grid. The Range and format
are the same as those for the X/R field in the Induction Motor Editor.

Faulted Bus
Displays the ID of the faulted bus used for the study case.

Fault Type
Displays the type of fault used to calculate the New SC kA value. Currently only Line-Ground faults are
used, but additional fault types will be added in future versions of PowerStation.


Replace
Click on this button to update the New SC kA and X/R values for the selected grid.

Cancel
Click on this button to close the dialog box and retain the existing SC kA and X/R values.
Ground Grid Design Soil Editor

28.8 Soil Editor
Double-click at any location inside the Soil View to bring up the Soil Editor to specify earth/surface
materials, their soil resistivities and depths.

Surface Material
Used to specify the resistivity, depth, and material type for the surface layer.
Resistivity
Enter the Resistivity of the Surface Material in Ohms-m.
Material

Select the type of Surface Material.
Depth

Enter the Surface Material depth in m/ft.
Top Layer
Used to specify the resistivity, depth, and type of material for the Top Layer soil.
Resistivity
Enter the material resistivity of the Top Layer soil in Ohms-m.
Material

Select the type of material of the Top Layer soil.
Ground Grid Design Soil Editor

Depth

Enter the depth of the Top Layer soil in m/ft.
Lower Layer
Used to specify the Resistivity and type of material used for Lower Layer soil.
Resistivity
Enter the resistivity of the material of the Lower Layer soil in Ohms-m.
Material

Select the type of material of the Lower Layer soil.

Ground Grid Design IEEE Group Editor

28.9 IEEE Group Editor
When an IEEE Study Model is used, double-click on any location inside the selected grid shape in the
Top View of the GGS to bring up the IEEE Group Editor. The Editor is used to specify conductor/rod
parameters for the grid shape.
28.9.1 Conductors Page
Within the Conductor Page, specify the parameters of the conductors and the grid size.

Grid Size
L
x
/L
x,long
Enter the long length of the grid in the X direction in m/ft. Show L
x
if the rectangular/triangular shape is
selected; show L
x,long
if the L-shape or T-shape are selected.
L
y
/L
y,long
Enter the long length of the grid in the Y direction in m/ft. Show L
y
selected; show L
y,long

L
x,short
Enter the short length of the grid in the X direction in m/ft. L
x,short
appears only if the L-shape or T-shape
are selected.
L
y,short
Enter the short length of the grid in the Y direction in m/ft. L
y,short
shows only if the L-shape or T-shape
are selected.
# of Conductors
X Direction

Enter the number of the conductors in the X direction
Y Direction

Enter the number of the conductors in the Y direction
Conductors
Depth

Enter the depth of the conductor grip in m/ft.
Type

Select the type of the conductor material.
Size
Select the conductor size in AWG/kcmil or mm
2
.
Cost

Enter the cost of the conductor in $/m or $/ft.
Material Constants
This information is displayed on the Conductors Page to reflect the selected conductor type (the
conductor constants are from an internal conductor library/file GRDLib.mdb which can be modified using
Microsoft Access). It includes Material Conductivity (%), Thermal Coefficient of Resistivity at 20
0
C
(1/
0
C), K
0
Factor (
0
C), Fusing Temperature (
0
C), Resistivity of the Ground Conductor at 20
0
C in cm,
and the Thermal Capacity Factor in J/cm
3
/
0
C.


28.9.2 Rods Page
Within the Rods Page, specify the parameters of the Rods.

Rods
# of Rods
Enter the number of rods.
Diameter

Enter the diameter of the rod in inch/cm.
Length
Enter the length of the rod in m/ft
Arrangement

Select the arrangement of the rods throughout the grid area.
Type
Select the type of rod material.

Cost

Enter the cost of the rod in $/rod.
Material Constants
This information is displayed on the Rods Page to reflect the selected rod type (the conductor constants
are from an internal conductor library/file GRDLib.mdb which can be modified using Microsoft Access).
It includes Material Conductivity (%), Thermal Coefficient of Resistivity at 20
0
C (1/
0
C), K
0
Factor (
0
C),
Fusing Temperature (
0
C), Resistivity of the Ground Conductor at 20
0
C in cm, and the Thermal
Capacity Factor in J/cm
3
/
0
C.
Ground Grid Design FEM Group Editor

28.10 FEM Group Editor
When an FEM Study Model is used, double-click on any location inside the selected grid shape in the
Top View of the GGS to bring up the FEM Group Editor. The Editor is used to specify conductor/rod
parameters and grid size for the shape.
28.10.1 Group Conductors Page

Grid Size
L
x
/L
x,long
Enter the long length of the grid in the X direction in m/ft. Show L
x
selected; show L
x,long
L
y
/L
y,long
Enter the long length of the grid in the Y direction in m/ft. Show L
y
selected; show L
y,long
Ground Grid Design FEM Group Editor

L
x,short
Enter the short length of the grid in the X direction in m/ft. L
x,short
are selected.
L
y,short
Enter the short length of the grid in the Y direction in m/ft. L
y,short
are selected.
# of Conductors
X Direction

Enter the number of conductors in the X direction.
Y Direction

Enter the number of conductors in the Y direction.
Conductors
Depth

Enter the depth of conductor grip in m/ft.
Size
Select the conductor size in AWG/kcmil or mm
2
.
Type

Select the type of conductor material.
Insulation
Select the type of conductor insulation (Bare or Insulated). If Insulated is selected, this grid group will
not be reconsidered for calculation/plotting.
Cost

Enter the cost of the conductor in $/m or $/ft.

Ground Grid Design Conductor/Rod Editor (FEM)

28.11 Conductor/Rod Editor (FEM)
The Conductor/Rod Editor is used with the FEM study model only. To edit the data for a conductor/rod,
a conductor/rod must be selected from the FEM Edit Toolbar and placed in the Top View of the GGS.
Double-click on a conductor/rod in the Top View to bring up the Conductor/Rod Spreadsheet Editor.

The Material Constants of the conductor/rod are displayed in the top section of the spreadsheet according
to the material type. Each conductor/rod record (row) is a unique set of data. Each conductor/rod record
must have a unique identifier: ConID. Duplicate records with the same data are overwritten.

Ground Grid Design Conductor/Rod Editor (FEM)

Label
Symbol representing a conductor/rod.
Length
Length of the conductor/rod in m/ft. If the length is altered, X
2
, Y
2
and Z
2
are changed accordingly. If X
1
,
Y
1
, Z
1
, X
2
, Y
2
, and Z
2
values are entered, the length is changed accordingly.
X
1
X coordinate of One End of the conductor/rod in m/ft
Y
1
Y coordinate of One End of the conductor/rod in m/ft
Z
1
Z coordinate of One End of the conductor/rod in m/ft
X
2
X coordinate of the Other End of the conductor/rod in m/ft
Y
2
Y coordinate of the Other End of the conductor/rod in m/ft
Diameter
Rod diameter in cm or inches, used only in the Rod Editor.
Type

Type of conductor/rod material.
Size
Conductor cross-sectional area in AWG/kcmil or mm
2
, used only in the Conductor Editor.
Insulation
Conductor insulation type, used only in the Conductor Editor.
Cost

Cost in $/m or $/ft for a conductor, cost in $/rod for a rod.

Ground Grid Design Calculation Methods

The Ground Grid Systems Program includes the following methods of computation:

Finite Element Method
ANSI/IEEE Std 80-1986
IEEE Guide for Safety in AC Substation Grounding
ANSI/IEEE Std 802000
IEEE Guide for Safety in AC Substation Grounding
ANSI/IEEE Std 665 1995
IEEE Guide for Generating Station Grounding
Optimization of Conductors
ANSI/IEEE Std Based Methods
Optimization of Conductors and Rods
ANSI/IEEE Std Based Methods
28.12.1 Finite Element Method
The Finite Element method (FEM) is based on a method of images, and assumes that the grounding
system is an equipotential structure. It gives accurate results for small (around 50 m by 50 m) and
medium (around 250 m by 250 m) size grounding networks at low frequencies. The uniform or two-
layer soil view is also used with the FEM method.
28.12.2 IEEE Std Methods
IEEE Std 80-2000, IEEE Std 80-1986, or IEEE Std 665-1995 is optional for the calculation of Step and
Touch (mesh) Potentials, Ground Resistance, Ground Potential Rise, Tolerable Step and Touch Potential
Limits. IEEE Std 80-1986, or IEEE Std 665-1995 is used only for the Square/Rectangular shapes of
ground grids; IEEE Std 80-2000 can be used for Square/Rectangular, Triangular, L-Shaped, or T-Shaped
ground grids.
28.12.3 Optimization of Conductors
For a fixed number of ground rods, the program determines the minimum number of conductors that
satisfy the tolerable limits for the Step and Touch potentials. The GGS program begins calculations with
a grid consisting of only two conductors on each side, and increases the number of conductors (keeping
the mesh almost square) until a solution is reached. This optimization function is for IEEE Std methods
only.
28.12.4 Optimization of Conductors and Rods
The GGS program performs a cost optimization routine to determine the optimum number of conductors
and ground rods needed to limit the Step and Touch potentials. The program begins the optimization
routine with a minimum of two parallel conductors horizontally, two parallel conductors vertically, and 4
rods. With each iteration, the number of rods and conductors is increased based on their cost
effectiveness in reducing unwanted potential levels. This optimization function is for IEEE Std methods
only.

28.12.5 Fundamental Formulas
Some fundamental formulas are given below.
Reflection Factor, K

s
s
K

+
=

Where

is the resistivity of the earth beneath the surface material in ohm-m;
s
is the surface layer soil
resistivity in ohm-m.

Surface Layer Derating Factor, C
s

For IEEE Std 80-2000

( )
09 . 0 2
/ 1 09 . 0
1
+
=
s
s
s
h
C

Where h
s
is the thickness of the surface layer in meter.

For IEEE Std 80-1986, IEEE Std 665-1995

( )
+
+ =
=1
2
08 . 0 / 2 1
2 1
96 . 0
1
n
s
n
s
nh
K
C

C
s
is 1 when K=0.
Decrement Factor, Df

( )
a f
T t
f
a
f
e
t
T
D
/ 2
1 1
+ =

Where T
a
is the equivalent system subtransient time constant in seconds.
Tolerable Step Potential, E
step
and

E
touch

For body weight of 50 kg

s
s s step
t
C E
116 . 0
) 6 1000 (
50
+ =


s
s s touch
t
C E
116 . 0
) 5 . 1 1000 (
50
+ =

For body weight of 70 kg

s
s s step
t
C E
157 . 0
) 6 1000 (
70
+ =

s
s s touch
t
C E
157 . 0
) 5 . 1 1000 (
70
+ =
Maximum Grid Current, I
G

) 3 (
0
I D C S I
f p f G
=
Ground Grid Design Required Data

28.13 Required Data
To run a Ground Grid Systems study, the following related data is necessary: Soil Parameters, Grid Data,
and System Data. A summary of these data for different types of calculation methods is given in this
section.
System Data
System Frequency
Average Weight of Worker
Ambient Temperature
Short Circuit Current
Short Circuit Current Division Factor
Short Circuit Current Projector Factor
Durations of Fault
System X/R Ratio
Plot Step (for FEM model only)
Boundary Extension (for FEM model only)
Soil Parameters
Surface Material Resistivity
Surface Material Depth
Upper Layer Soil Resistivity
Upper Layer Soil Depth
Lower Layer Soil Resistivity
Ground Conductor Library
Material Conductivity
Thermal Coefficient of Resistivity
K
0
Factor
Fusing Temperature
Ground Conductor Resistivity
Thermal Capacity Factor
Grid Data (IEEE Std.s Only)
Shape
Material Type
Conductor Cross Section
Grid Depth
Maximum Length of the Grid in the X Direction
Maximum Length of the Grid in the Y Direction
Minimum Length of the Grid in the X Direction (for IEEE Std 80-2000 L-Shaped or T-Shaped Grids
Only)
Minimum Length of the Grid in the Y Direction (for IEEE Std 80-2000 L-Shaped or T-Shaped Grid
Only)
Number of Conductors in the X Direction
Number of Conductors in the Y Direction
Cost
Ground Grid Design Required Data

Rod Data (IEEE Std.s Only)
Material Type
Number of Rods
Average Length
Diameter
Arrangement
Cost
Conductor Data (FEM model only)
Material Type
Insulation
Cross Section
X, Y and Z Coordinates of One End of Conductor
X, Y and Z Coordinates of Other End of Conductor
Cost
Rod Data (FEM model only)
Material Type
Insulation
Diameter
X, Y and Z Coordinates of One End of Rod
X, Y and Z Coordinates of Other End of Rod
Cost
Optional FEM Model Grid Group Data
Shape
Material Type
Conductor Cross Section
Grid Depth
Maximum Length of the Grid in the X Direction
Maximum Length of the Grid in the Y Direction
Minimum Length of the Grid in the X Direction (for L-Shaped or T-Shaped Grids)
Minimum Length of the Grid in the Y Direction (for L-Shaped or T-Shaped Grids)
Number of Conductors in the X Direction
Number of Conductors in the Y Direction
Cost

Ground Grid Systems Output Reports

28.14 Output Report
Output reports for the Ground Grid Systems studies are available in different levels and are arranged in
two formats: Crystal Output Report and Pop-Up Window display.
28.14.1 Ground Grid Systems Report Manager
Click on the Report Manager button on the Ground Grid Study Method Toolbar to open the Ground Grid
Systems Report Manager dialog box. The Ground Grid Systems Report Manager consists of four pages
and provides different formats for the Crystal Reports.
Complete Page
Selects a report format that provides the complete output report.

Input Page
Provides the format for different input data.


Result Page
Provides the format for different calculation results.

Summary Page
Provides the summary from the calculation results.


28.14.2 Ground Grid Systems Crystal Report
After running the Ground Grid Systems study, click on the Report Manager button located on the Study
Case Toolbar, or select the Crystal Report format from the Ground Grid Systems Toolbar, to open and
view the Crystal output report. The Ground Grid Systems study Crystal Report contains the following
major sections:

Cover Page
This is the first page of the Ground Grid Systems study Crystal Report. It includes information from the
number of conductors and rods, to unit system, project file name, and the output file name and its
location.

Input Data
This section reports the input data related to the System, Soil, Grid, and Conductor Library.
System Input Data
This section reports the input data related to the system including the System Frequency, Average Weight
of Worker, Ambient Temperature, Short Circuit Current, Short Circuit Current Division Factor, Short
Circuit Current Projector Factor, Durations of Fault, System X/R Ratio, Plot Step (for FEM model only),
and Boundary Extension (for FEM model only).


Soil Input Data
This section reports the input data related to Soil including the Surface Material Resistivity, Surface
Material Depth, Upper Layer Soil Resistivity, Upper Layer Soil Depth, and Lower Layer Soil Resistivity.

Conductor Library
This section reports Conductor Library information. It shows the Material Conductivity, Thermal
Coefficient of Resistivity, K
0
Factor, Fusing Temperature, Ground Conductor Resistivity, and Thermal
Capacity Factor.

Grid Data (for IEEE Stds)
This section reports the input data related to the grid including the Shape, Material Type, Conductor Cross
Section, Grid Depth, Maximum Length of the Grid in the X Direction, Maximum Length of the Grid in the
Y Direction, Minimum Length of the Grid in the X Direction (Only for IEEE Std 80-2000 L-Shaped or T-
Shaped Grid).
Rod Data (for IEEE Stds)
This section reports the input data related to the grid including the Material Type, Number of Rods,
Average Length, Diameter, Arrangement, and Cost.


Conductor Data (for FEM model)
This section reports the conductor input data for the FEM model including Material Type, Insulation, Cross
Section, X, Y and Z Coordinates of One End of Conductor, X, Y and Z Coordinates of Other End of
Conductor, and Cost.

Rod Data (for FEM model)
This section reports the rod input data for the FEM model including the Material Type, Insulation,
Diameter, X, Y and Z Coordinates of One End of Conductor, X, Y and Z Coordinates of Other End of
Conductor, and Cost.

Cost Data
Lists the cost data of conductors/rods.

Result
This section reports the results related to Intermediate Constants, Potential Profiles, S ummary, and
Warning.

Report of Intermediate Constants for IEEE Std.s
In this section the intermediate results K
im
, K
is
, K
m
, K
s
, K
ii
, K
1
, K
2
are reported, if the Report Details box
in the Study Case Editor dialog box is checked.

Summary for IEEE Stds
In this section, the Ground Resistance R
g
, GPR, Step and Touch potentials, Reflection Factor K, Derating
Factor D
f
, Maximum Grid Current and Warning information are reported.


Report of Potential Profiles for the FEM Model
In this section, the three Potential Profiles are reported if the Report Details box in the Study Case Editor
is checked.


Summary for the FEM Model
In this section, the Ground Resistance R
g
, GPR, Step and Touch Potentials, Reflection Factor K, Derating
Factor D
f
, Maximum Grid Current and Warning information are reported.

28.14.3 Summary and Warning
After running the Ground Grid Systems study, click on the Summary and Warning button located on the
Ground Grid System Toolbar, to open the GRD Analysis Alert View dialog box. If the Auto Display of
Summary and Warning box located on the Study Case Editor dialog box is checked, this view will open
automatically after the Ground Grid Systems calculations are executed.

28-41 ETAP PowerS


tation 4.0
Ground Grid Systems Plot Selection

28.15 Plot Selection
Plots are used only with the FEM method, and are available for Absolute/Step/Touch Voltages. To select
a plot, open up the Plot Selection dialog box by clicking on the Plot Selection button located on the
Ground Grid Systems Toolbar.

Plot Selection
The following 3-D Potential profiles are available for analysis of GGS study case results:
Absolute Voltage
Select to plot an Absolute Potential profile.
Touch Voltage
Select to plot a Touch Potential profile.
Step Voltage
Select to plot a Step Potential profile.
Plot Type
The following plot types are available for analysis of GGS study case results:
3-D
Plot a 3-D Potential profile for the Absolute/Touch/Step voltage.
Contour
Plot a Contour Potential profile for the Absolute/Touch/Step voltage.
Display Over Limit Voltage
Show areas with potentials exceeding the tolerable limits for 3-D Touch/Step Potential profiles. This
function is disabled when the Contour plot type is selected. A set of sample plots is shown below.




ETAP

PowerStation
4.0
User Guide
Copyright 2001
All Rights Reserved





Southern California

(949) 462-0100 Sales
(949) 462-0400 Fax

Chapter 29

Panel Systems

Panel Systems are an integral part of ETAP PowerStation used for representing power and lighting panels
in electrical systems. PowerStation provides a comprehensive model for designing and scheduling AC
panel systems including 3-Phase and 1-Phase panels. 3-Phase panels can be either 3-Wire or 4-Wire
panels. 1-Phase panels can be set up as 2-Wire or 3-Wire.

A panel is a collection of branch circuits feeding system loads. PowerStation supports an unlimited
number of circuits within a panel. A branch circuit in a panel is modeled with complete details, which
includes connected load information, protective device ratings, and feeder data. The PowerStation panel
model is supported by a comprehensive breaker, fuse, and cable libraries. Default and typical data are
provided to save you time and money when designing and scheduling panels. PowerStation allows you to
graphically connect sub-panels to upstream panels. There is no limit.

In PowerStation, a panel branch circuit load can be modeled as an internal or external load. If the load is
connected physically to a panel on the one-line diagram, for example the motor BLR-MTR in the diagram
below, it is known as an external load. Loads that are not connected physically to the panel are referred
as Internal Loads.

The total load fed by branches connected to a panel circuit are calculated and displayed on the panel
schedule. Note that the system connected to a panel circuit may itself represent a complete sub-system
with all PowerStation elements. For example, in the diagram below, one of the Main-Panel circuits is
connected to the Panel-67 through a cable and a transformer. In this case, PowerStation calculates the
total load of the Panel-67 and displays it on the corresponding circuit in the Main-Panel schedule.
PowerStation performs the calculation to include all downstream loads. Connections forming loops
between branches emanating from panel circuits are not allowed.
Panel Systems Introduction

-2 ETAP PowerStation 4.0

PowerStation maintains the electrical integrity of the system while allowing you to make panel
connections. For example, PowerStation will not allow connection of a 3-Phase 4-Wire panel to a panel
circuit that is 1-Phase.

Operation Technology, Inc. 29
Panel Systems Graphical User Interface (GUI)

29.1 Graphical User Interface (GUI)
PowerStation provides a fully Graphical User Interface (GUI) for adding a panel to your one-line
diagram. Here, you can graphically add, delete, relocate, connect elements, zoom in or out, display grid
on or off, change element size, change element orientation, change symbols, hide or show protective
devices, enter properties, set operating status, etc.
29.1.1 Add Panels
To add a panel to a one-line diagram, click on the panel symbol from the AC Edit Toolbar, which
changes the cursor shape to a panels picture. Now you can drop the panel at any position on the one-line
diagram by clicking the mouse. After dropping the panel, the cursor goes back to its original arrow
shape. If you double-click on the Edit Toolbar, you can place multiple copies of the panel in the one-line
diagram.
29.1.2 Panel Pins
Each panel has one or more (5, 9, 13, 17, 21 or 24) pins. A pin is a graphical tool (represented by a small,
red square indicating the connection point) to connect elements together. You can right click on a panel
in the one-line diagram to select the number of pins (external connections) allowed from a panel as shown
below. The program allows up to 24 external load connections. The default is four external connections.

The figure below shows the panel pin assignment. The pin assignments are not necessarily the same as
the panel circuit numbers. Pin 0 is the top pin of the panel. This pin is used to connect the panel to its
source element. The top pin of a panel can be connected only to a bus or to any pin other than the top pin
of another panel. The connection may include protective devices.


External loads including a sub-panel can be connected to Pins 1 through 24 of a Panel. These pins can be
connected to all PowerStation elements excluding dc elements, three-winding transformer, power grid,
synchronous generator, and composite motor.

29.1.3 Panel Connections
PowerStation maintains electrical integrity while making connections in the one-line diagram. The panel
top pin can be connected to a bus or another panel circuit (through an external load pin) only when the
connection is electrically feasible.

Following are the rules of connecting the top pin of a panel to a bus or another panel circuit. Connecting
a panel refers to connecting the top pin of the panel.
3-Phase Panels
A 3-Phase 3-Wire or 3-Phase 4-Wire panel can be connected to a 3-Phase bus. It cannot be connected
to a 1-Phase bus.
A 3-Phase 3-Wire or 3-Phase 4-Wire panel can be connected to a panel circuit with 3 poles. It cannot
be connected to Panel circuits with 1 or 2 poles.
1-Phase 3-Wire Panels
A 1-Phase 3-Wire panel can be connected to a 1-Phase 3-Wire bus. It cannot be connected to a 3-
Phase or 1-Phase 2-Wire bus.
A 1-Phase 3-Wire panel cannot be connected directly to a panel circuit.
A 1-Phase 2-Wire panel can be connected to a 3-Phase, 1-Phase 3-Wire or 1-Phase 2-Wire bus.
A 1-Phase 2-Wire panel can be connected to a panel circuit with 1 or 2 poles. It cannot be connected
directly to a panel circuit with 3 poles.


29.1.4 External & Internal Loads
There are two types of loads linked to PowerStation Panels: External and Internal loads. PowerStation
provides these two options to make data entry easier and system representation more concise. There is no
physical difference between internal and external loads.

External loads are graphically connected to a panel through external pin on the one-line diagram.
PowerStations graphical representation of a panel allows for up to 24 connections externally. For
example, in the diagram below, AC, Mtr9 and Panel-15 are the external loads connected to Panel-21.

Internal loads are embedded in the panel editor and are not graphically connected to the panel on the one-
line diagram. For example, in the diagram below, Load1, Load2, Main-Pump, Load5, and Load6 are
internal loads in the panel.


29.1.5 The Panel Editor
The panel editor provides a user-friendly graphical interface with a lot of suitable default values and built-
in electrical intelligence. The editor fields are designed in a manner to minimize data entry errors while
eliminating the repetitive task in completing panel schedules.

The properties associated with a panel can be entered in the panel editor. The Panel Editor contains six
pages.

Info Page for entering Panel ID, Phase Connection, Status of Main Disconnect
Rating Page -- for entering Panel Rating, Main Disconnect Rating, # of Circuits
Schedule Page -- for entering Rating / Loading / PD / Feeder of individual circuits
Summary Page -- for entering Loading Summary, total connected, continuous, non-continuous and
code demand load
Remarks Page -- for entering remarks and other user information
Comment Page -- for entering text comment

The Header on each page of a panel editor displays the rated kV and rated Amps of the panel.
Panel Systems Panel Editor Info Page

29.2 Panel Editor - Info Page
Within the Info Page, specify the panel ID, connected Bus ID, In/Out of Service, Equipment FDR (feeder)
Tag, load Priority, Name and Description, Data Type, Configuration Status, Main Disconnect Status,
Phase Connection, and Phase Arrangement.

Info
ID

PowerStation automatically assigns a unique ID to each panel. The assigned IDs consist of default panel
ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of panels increase. The
default panel ID (Pnl) can be changed from the Defaults Menu in the menu bar or from the Project View.
Bus / Element
This is the ID of the connecting bus or upstream element for the panel. If the terminal is not connected to
any bus, a blank entry will be shown for the bus ID. To connect or reconnect a panel to a bus, select a bus
OK. Note that you can only connect to buses that reside in the same view where the panel resides. For
example, you cannot connect to a bus that resides in the Dumpster or in another composite network.

If a panel is connected to a bus through a number of protective devices, reconnection of the panel to a
new bus from this editor will reconnect the last existing protective device to the new bus, as shown below
where Aux-Loads is reconnected from Bus4 to Bus5.



A panel can also be connected to another panel as shown below. In this case, PowerStation displays the
ID of the upstream panel.

In/Out of Service:
The operating condition of a panel can be selected by choosing either the In-Service or Out-of-Service
options. The properties of an Out-of-Service panel can be edited like an In-Service panel; however, an
Out-of-Service panel will not be included in any system studies. When the continuity check is activated,
an Out-of-Service panel automatically becomes dimmed in the one-line diagram.
Configuration
Main Disconnect Status
You can change the status of the panel main disconnect (for the selected configuration) by clicking on the
Close or Open options. Once a configuration status is selected for a one-line presentation, any subsequent
manipulation of the status will be saved under the specified configuration.

If the Main Disconnect on the Rating Page is set to None (Lugs Only), the status is set to close and
disabled (grayed out).

Note that status is not a part of the panel engineering properties. For this reason, the name of the
configuration status is shown above the Main Disconnect Status of the panel to indicate that this is the
main disconnect status under the specific configuration.

For example, you can have different operating status under different configurations. In the following
example, status of a panel is shown as Close under Normal configuration and Open under Emergency
configuration.

Equipment
FDR Tag
Name
Description
Data Type
the source of the latest data. There are a total of 10 load types. Their names can be changed from the
Priority
Select the load priority of this panel from the list box. This field can be used for load priority, operating
priority, load-shedding priority, etc. Ten different priorities are provided to select from. Priorities may be
chosen from the Project Menu under Settings and Load Priority.
Connection
PowerStation classifies panels into 4 types depending on their connection.

3-Phase 4-Wire Panel

PowerStation has built-in electrical intelligence that allows a panel to be connected to buses or elements
that have compatible phase connections. For example, a 3-Phase 4-Wire panel cannot be connected to a
1-Phase bus. Note that a 1-Phase 3-Wire panel cannot be connected to a 3-Phase bus.

Panel connection can be changed only if there are no external connections from the panel. When panel
connection is changed the data for all circuits on the Schedule Page is reset.

Phase
This is the phase connection of the panel. Select either 1-Phase or 3-Phase connection.
Wire
For a 3-Phase panel select 3 Wires or 4 Wires. For a 1-Phase panel select 2 Wires or 3 Wires.
1-Phase 2-Wire Phase
When a 1-Phase 2-Wire Panel is connected to a 1-Phase 3-Wire bus, the options for panel connection are:

L1
L2
LL

When a 1-Phase 2-Wire Panel is connected to a 3-Phase bus, the options for panel connection are:

A
B
C
AB
BC
CA

This option is not displayed for any other type of panel connection.
Upstream Connection
For a 1-Phase 3-Wire Panel connected to a 1-Phase 3-Wire bus, or a 1-Phase 2-Wire Panel connected to a
1-Phase 2-Wire bus, the Upstream Connection display box displays the connection phase type of the
upstream element. If the panel is not connected to an upstream element the display box shows
Unknown.

For a 3-Phase panel and 1-Phase 2-Wire panel connected to a 3-Phase bus the display box is not shown.
Phase Arrangement
Select from the following phase arrangements for a 3-Phase panel:

ABC
CBA
NEC

If NEC is selected, the phase arrangement shall be on A, B, C from top to bottom or left to right from the
front of the panel. Also, for this option phase B shall be the highest voltage (LG) on a 3-phase, 4-wire
delta connected system (midpoint grounded).
1
st
Ckt
Select the following phase designation of the first circuit in the panel:

A
B
C

If NEC phase arrangement is selected, this option is disabled (grayed out).
Panel Systems Panel Editor Rating Page

29.3 Panel Editor - Rating Page
On this page, you can specify the panel Rated kV, Rated Amps, ANSI, or IEC Standard, number of
Branch Circuits, Layout, and Main Disconnect information.

Rating
Rated kV
Enter the rated voltage of the panel in kV. The panel rated voltage can also be selected from the list box.
If this is a three-phase panel, kV is the line-to-line voltage. For single-phase panels, the rated voltage
must be consistent with the way this panel is connected to the system. For example,, if the bus nominal
kV is 4.16 and this load is connected between phase A and neutral, then the rated voltage of the panel
must be in the neighborhood of 2.4 kV (4.16/1.73). If the bus nominal kV is 4.16 and this panel is
connected between phase A and phase B, then the rated voltage of the panel must be in the neighborhood
of 4.16 kV.

If a 3-Phase panel is connected to a 3-Phase bus or another 3-Phase panel, the default rated voltage of the
panel is set to the nominal kV of the upstream bus. For example, if a 3-Phase panel is connected to
another 3-Phase panel that is connected to a 3-Phase bus having a nominal voltage equal to 0.48 kV, the
default rated kV of both the panels is set to 0.48 kV.

The default rated voltage of a 1-Phase panel connected to a 3-Phase bus is set to the line to neutral kV of
the bus. For example, if a 1-Phase panel is connected to a 3-Phase bus having a nominal voltage equal to
0.48 kV, the default rated kV of the panel is set to (0.48/1.732 =) 0.277 kV.

Panel rated voltage is used to determine the current flow in the panel circuits.

Amps
Enter the continuous current rating of the panel in Amperes. The rated amps can also be selected from the
list box.
Standard

If ANSI is selected, all the applicable libraries within the panel are based on ANSI standard. If IEC is
selected, all the applicable libraries within the panel are set to IEC standard.
Layout
Layout Type
Select Standard or Column layout.

Standard layout has its protective devices on both sides (1,3,5,7 and 2,4,6,8).Column layout has its
protective devices on one-side only (1,2,3,4,5).The circuits on the Schedule Page are arranged per the
selected layout.

The layout of a panel having externally connected branches or loads cannot be changed. Data on the
Schedule Page is reset, if the panel layout is changed.
Mounting
Enter mounting type of the panel in this field, up to 12 alphanumeric characters. Alternatively, select one
of the following options:

Flush
Surface
Switchboard

The default mounting type is Flush.
Feed
Enter panel incoming feed location in this field, up to 12 alphanumeric characters. Alternatively, select
one of the following options:

Top
Bottom
Left
Right

The Default panel incoming feed location is Top.
Enclosure
Enter panel enclosure in this field, up to 10 alphanumeric characters. Alternatively, select one of the
following options:


For ANSI Standard the options are:

NEMA 1 NEMA 3R
NEMA 3S NEMA 4
NEMA 4X NEMA 5
NEMA 12

For IEC Standard the options are:

IP10 IP11
IP14 IP52
IP54 IP67

Branch Circuits
# of Circuits
Select a panel circuit size from the list or enter the total number of circuits (panel size). Panel size should
be an even integer. If an odd number is entered, panel size is reset to the next largest even number.

The number of circuits in a panel cannot be decreased for panels with external connections. The data on
Schedule Page is deleted if the number of circuits in a panel is reduced.
Main Disconnect
Select the type of main disconnect for the panel from the following options:
None
Select this option if a panel is connected to a bus or an element through lugs only.
Breaker
Select this option if a panel is connected to a bus or an element through a circuit breaker.
Fusible Switch
Select this option if a panel is connected to a bus or an element through a fuse.

The default option is None when the panel is connected to a bus or an element through lugs only.

If the option None is selected, the Main Disconnect Status on the Info page is set to Close and disabled
(grayed out).
Library Button

To select a circuit breaker or a fuse from the corresponding Libraries, click on the Library button and the
Library Quick Pick - LV Circuit Breaker (Molded Case, with Thermal Magnetic Trip Device) or the
Library Quick Pick Fuse will appear depending on the type of Main Disconnected selected. If the type
of Main Disconnect is None, the Library button is disabled (grayed out).


From the Library Quick Pick, select a circuit breaker or a fuse by highlighting the manufacturer name and
to the editor. Note that upon selection of library data, the manufacturer's name and model number is
displayed in the fields adjacent to the Library button.
Breaker Rating, ANSI Standard
Click on ANSI Standard and Main Disconnect Breaker to enter the ratings for this circuit breaker in
accordance with the ANSI/IEEE standards.
Rated kV
Continuous Amp
Enter the continuous current rating of the low voltage circuit breaker in amperes or select the rating from
the list box.
Interrupting
Enter the rated interrupting capability in rms kA, or select the rating from the list box.
Test PF
Breaker Rating, IEC Standard
Click on IEC Standard and Main Disconnect Breaker to enter the ratings for this circuit breaker in
accordance with the IEC standards.
Rated kV
Rated Amps
Enter the rated normal current of the low voltage circuit breaker in amperes or select the rating from the
list box.
AC Breaking
Enter the rated breaking capacity of the low voltage circuit breaker in kA or select the rating from the list
box.
Making
Enter the rated making capacity of the low voltage circuit breaker in peak kA or select the rating from the
list box. The rated making capacity for a circuit breaker is determined by evaluation of the maximum
possible peak value of the short-circuit current at the point of application of the circuit breaker.
Min. Delay
from the list box.

Fuse Rating, ANSI Standard
Click on ANSI Standard and Main Disconnect Fusible Switch to enter the fuse ratings according to the
ANSI standards.
kV
Rated Amp
Enter the current rating of the fuse in amperes or select the rating from the list box.
Interrupting
Enter the rated interrupting capability of the fuse in symmetrical rms kA or select the rating from the list
box.
Test PF
Enter the power factor of test equipment on which the rating of the fuse has been established.
Fuser Rating, IEC Standard
Click on IEC to enter the fuse ratings according to the IEC standards.
kV
Rated Amps
Enter the rated normal current in amperes or select the rating from the list box.
AC Breaking
Enter the rated breaking capacity of the fuse in kA or select the rating from the list box.
TRV
Enter the transient recovery voltage of the fuse in kV.
Panel Systems Panel Editor Schedule Page

29.4 Panel Editor - Schedule Page
The properties associated with each circuit in the panel can be entered on the Schedule Page. The
Schedule Page contains the following six tabs of properties:

Description
Rating
Loading
Protective Device
Feeder

Some properties of a panel circuit are shown on all the tabs for easy reference.

Ckt #
Indicates the panel circuit number. Circuits (rows) in the Panel Schedule page are analogous to the slots
in a physical panel board. The order of circuit numbers is based on the panel layout type, Standard or
Column. This is not editable. For a panel with Standard Layout, the odd circuit numbers are laid out first
followed by the even circuit numbers. Panel circuit numbers for Standard and Column Layouts are
shown in the below figure.


Circuit Numbers with
Standard Layout
Circuit Numbers with
Column Layout
Phase
This represents the phase of the circuit. This column is not shown for 1-Phase, 2-Wire connection. For 1-
Phase, 3-Wire connection this column may have one of the following values, depending on the number of
poles:

Poles Phase
1 L1 or L2
2 LL

L1 or L2 phase connection implies that the circuit is connected between the center tap and one of the
lines. LL phase connection implies that the circuit is connected between the two lines.

For 3-Phase, 3-Wire and 3-Phase, 4-Wire panels, the value for this column is determined using the Phase
Arrangement and 1
st
Circuit information from the Info Page. For example, if the Phase Arrangement is
CBA and the 1
st
Ckt is C, the phase for the first circuit will be C, followed by B and A for the consecutive
circuits. This phase order will be repeated for other circuits.
Pole
Specify number of poles for the circuit. PowerStation uses the built in electrical intelligence to determine
the number of poles for a circuit. For example, the last row of a panel circuit is not allowed to have a
number of poles greater than 1.

The number of poles for a circuit depends on the phase of the load connected to the circuit. If a 3-Phase
load is connected to a panel circuit, the number of poles for this circuit will be 3. For a load connected
between two phases of a 3-Phase system, the number of poles will be 2. For a load connected between
one of the phases of a 3 Phase system and the neutral wire, the pole is set to 1
Name
Enter load name (ID), up to 25 alphanumeric characters.

Link
Select from the following options:

Internal
Ext-#
Spare
Unusable (row is blocked)
Space (row is blank and blocked)

The default option set is Space (blank)
Internal
These are loads specified internally and not connected externally to the panel on the one-line diagram.
Loads for which Link is set to Internal are referred as Internal Loads.
External
External loads are those connected to the panel externally via the one-line. Sub panels are considered
external loads to the upstream panel. In calculations, PowerStation will include loads connected
externally.

Once the link option is set to External (for example Ext. 1), placing the mouse cursor over the external pin
displays the pin number and phase connection.

When an external load is connected to a panel:

Data is automatically updated on the Rating Tab and Loading Tab of the Schedule page, from the
external load editor.
A protective device can be specified on the Protective Device Tab of the Schedule page
On the Description Tab a Load Description can be entered. The Load Type and Status fields are
blocked.
The fields on Feeder Tab are blocked.

When an external load is deleted from a pin, the load type assignment is changed to Space and the
external connection is removed.
Spare
A panel circuit with link option set to Spare is intended to be used as a spare circuit. Protective device
data can be entered on the Protective Device Tab of the Schedule Page. Other than this, data cannot be
entered for fields on other tabs of the Schedule page.
Unusable
A circuit may become unusable depending upon phase connection and number of poles. In this case, data
cannot be entered on any tab of the Schedule page. For example, in case of 3-Phase 3-Wire connection, if
Pole = 1, the Link is set to Unusable and cannot be changed. This is because in case of 3-Phase 3-Wire
panel a single-phase load cannot be connected.

Space
A blank circuit in a panel, that is a circuit to which a load has not yet been assigned and has Link option
set to Space. This is the default value for Link option. In this case, data cannot be entered on any tab of
the Schedule page.
Changing Links
If link is changed to Spare, data is blanked on Description, Rating, Loading, and Feeder pages.

If link is changed to Unusable or Space, data is blanked on Description, Rating, Loading, Protective
Device, and Feeder pages.

If link is changed to Ext.#, data is blanked on Description (except Load Description field), Rating,
Loading, and Feeder pages.

When link is set to Ext.# and an external connection exists, the link cannot be changed to any other type
before deleting the external connection.
State
Specify the state (status) of the circuit. This also applies to the state of the protective device for the given
circuit. Click on the button to change the state. Note that the state of the protective device is not related
to the Status Configuration. The default state of a circuit is ON.
29.4.1 Description Tab
Within the Description tab enter data for Load Type, Status and Load Description of a panel circuit.


Load Type
Select load type from the list. The first 15 load items in the list are based on NEC 1999. The next 10
items in the list are user definable.

You can specify the last 10 load types in the Panel Code Factor Table. The Panel Code Factor table can
be edited from the Project Menu under Settings and Panel Code Factors. Load Type is used to determine
the Code Factors used in calculating the total panel load.

Load Type options are available for internal links only. External loads are classified as motor load or
static load according to the element types.
Load Status
This field is enabled only for internal loads, that is, for circuits whose Link field is Internal. There are
two options available:

Continuous
Non-Continuous

For the purpose of panel code demand calculations, all circuits in a panel maintain the same Load Status
for a particular Load Type. For example, consider a panel having three circuits (say 1, 7 and 9) with Load
Type being Hospital and Load Status being Continuous. If the Load Status for circuit 1 is changed to
Non-Continuous, the Load Status for circuits 7 and 9 will also be changed to Non-Continuous.

The load status is used for the panel load calculations. For external links the load status is determined
from the connected loads demand factor status.
Load Description
Enter the load description, up to 50 alphanumeric characters.

29.4.2 Rating (Connected Load) Tab
Within the Rating Tab specify the connected load ratings for each panel circuit.

VA, W, A
Enter the connected load for an internal load in VA, Watts, or Amperes. PowerStation calculates the
fields accordingly based on the %PF and Panel voltage. For external load, these fields only display the
total connected load. For internal loads, the values can be entered in Watts, VA, or Amperes.

A 3-phase load that has Pole = 3, is represented by three panel circuits. Enter per phase VA, W, or
Amperes for this load. For example, if total Watts for a 3-phase load are 1200, enter W as 400 (=1200/3).

The next two rows after a row with Pole = 3 on the Rating Tab of the Schedule page in a panel are
disabled (grayed out) and have VA, W, A and %PF values same as the Row with Pole = 3.

The row next to a row with Pole = 2, on the Rating Tab of the Schedule page in a panel is blocked.


The Amp value for a panel circuit depends on the panel connection and number of poles. The relations
used to calculate the amp value for a panel circuit are summarized below.

Panel
Connection
Number of
Poles
Amps
3-Phase 3 or 1 Panel Circuit VA per phase / (Panel Rated kV 3 1000 / (3))
3-Phase 2 Panel Circuit VA per phase / (Panel Rated kV 3 1000)
1-Phase 3-Wire 1 Panel Circuit VA per phase / (Panel Rated kV 3 1000 / 2)
1-Phase 3-Wire 2 Panel Circuit VA per phase / (Panel Rated kV 3 1000)
1-Phase 2-Wire 1 Panel Circuit VA per phase / (Panel Rated kV 3 1000)

For external loads, the Amp values are also calculated based on panel rated voltage.
%PF
For internal loads, enter the percent power factor for the selected circuit. This power factor applies to all
three phases of the circuit. The default value of %PF is 100. For external loads, this is the calculated
power factor of the connected external loads and is disabled (grayed out).
QTY
Enter the quantity of internal load. This is used to calculate the total connected load. For external loads
this is blocked.
29.4.3 Loading Tab
This Tab is used to assign a percent loading to each one of the 10 loading categories for the loading of
each panel circuit, that is each panel circuit can be set to have a different operating loading level for each
loading category. Note that you can select any of these loading categories when conducting AC load flow
studies.


Loading Category
Select the desired loading category (up to 10 loading categories) from the drop down box on the top of
the Schedule Page. These are the same loading categories used by other loads in PowerStation. To edit
the loading category names, select Loading Category from the Project menu.
% Loading
For external load this field is blank and cannot be edited. For internal loads, enter the % loading for the
selected loading category.
VA, W, A, %PF
These display columns show the total calculated loading in VA, W, and A, including the % loading and
QTY (on Rating Tab) for both external and internal loads. For external load, the PF column displays the
rated % PF (at 100% load for motors). For internal loads, the %PF displayed is the same as entered in the
Rating Tab of the Schedule page.

VA operating (Loading Tab) = Connected VA (Rated VA Rating Page) 3 QTY 3 %Loading

For Example, if Connected VA = 500, QTY = 3, % Loading = 90,
VA operating = 500 3 3 3 90% = 1,350 VA

For both internal and external loads, Amp values are calculated based on terminal bus nominal kV.
29.4.4 Protective Device Tab
Within the protective device tab enter information about the protective device used with each panel
circuit.


Lock
If this box is checked, then breaker / fuse sizing will not be allowed for this circuit. This feature is not
currently available . It will be available in future releases of PowerStation.
Type
Select the type of PD for the selected circuit from a drop down menu from the following options:

Fuse
Breaker
Lib Button
To select a circuit breaker or a fuse from the corresponding Libraries, click on the Library button and the
Library Quick Pick - LV Circuit Breaker (Molded Case, with Thermal Magnetic Trip Device) or the
Library Quick Pick Fuse will appear depending on the Type of protective device selected.

From the Library Quick Pick, select a circuit breaker or a fuse by highlighting the manufacturer name and
to the editor. Note that upon selection of library data, the manufacturer's name and model number are
displayed in the fields MFR and Model, respectively.
MFR
Displays the protective device manufacturer. This field is filled out based on the selected library
manufacturer.
Model
Displays the protective device model. This field is filled out based on the selected library model.
Ratting (A)
Select from a list of ratings or enter a value. Default is set per the selected library continuous amp rating.
Interrupting kA
Select from a list of values or enter a value. Default is set per the selected interrupting rating of the
device based on the library selection.

29.4.5 Feeder Tab
Within the feeder tab enter Feeder Tag, Type, #/Phase, Size and Length of cables feeding each
panel circuit with internal loads. Feeder information for external loads is entered in the external
load editor. For circuits with external loads, the row in Feeder Tab is blocked.

Lib Button
To select cables from the Cable Library, click on the Lib button at the top of the Schedule page and the
Cable Library Quick Pick will appear. From the Library Quick Pick select the Cable Library type and
size at the same time. Note that the selected Cable Library type, size, and parameters are transferred to
the Feeder Tab.
Length Unit
Select the unit for cable length from the following options:

feet
meter
FDR Tag
Enter or change Cable ID Up to 25 Characters.
Size
Displays the cable size selected from the library.

Insulation
Displays the cable insulation type selected from the library.
Length
Enter the cable length.
#/Phase
Enter the number of conductors per phase.
Vd
Display the % voltage drop for internal loads based on the cable data.
Cable Z Button
Click on this button on the top of the Schedule Page to launch an editor for viewing and editing the cable
impedance data. The default values impedance values displayed are based on the cable selected from the
library.

Note:
Base temperature for the cable resistance is displayed next to the impedance (static). Default is 75
degrees Celsius. The impedances are adjusted based on the system frequency.

Cable Header
This information is displayed on top of the Cable Impedance Data Editor to reflect the cable type and size
selected from the Cable Library. This is a partial list of the library header which includes the library
source name (ICEA, NEC), rated voltage (0.6, 5, 15 kV), voltage class (100%, 133%), # of conductors
per cable (1/C, 3/C), conductor type (CU, AL), insulation type (Rubber, XLPE), installation type
(Magnetic/Non-Mag.), and cable size (350 kcmil, 180 mm2). The unit for cable sizes will be in
AWG/kcmil for English unit cables and mm2 for Metric unit cables.

Impedance (per conductor)
Positive and Zero Sequence Resistances (R & R0)
Enter positive and zero sequence resistances at the base temperature, in ohms or ohms per unit length, per
conductor. This is for each line or cable, not the total resistance per phase. PowerStation corrects these
resistances for different studies based on the specified temperature limits.
Positive and Zero Sequence Reactances (X & X0)
Enter positive and zero sequence reactances, in ohms or ohms per unit length, per conductor. This is for
each line or cable, not the total reactance per phase. These reactances must be entered at the system
operating frequency specified for this data file. When data is recalled from English (60 Hz) or Metric (50
Hz) libraries, PowerStation automatically corrects for the system operating frequency. After this value is
entered here, PowerStation will not make any adjustment to this value.
Base Temperature
Enter the conductor base temperature (in degrees Celsius) at which the cable resistances are entered.
Units
Select impedance units as ohms per unit length or ohms. With the selection of ohms per unit length, a
length should also be designated, including a unit from the list box. Units available are: feet, miles,
meters, and kilometers.
Action Buttons
PowerStation provides action buttons to facilitate data entry on the Schedule page. These options can be
used to copy, paste and erase rows on the Schedule page of the Panel Editor.
Copy
Copy the content of the selected row to clipboard. Circuit number, Phase, Pole, Load Name, Link and
State are not copied.
Paste
Paste the entire content (of the copied row) in the selected row. This will work when the Link Type is
other than space or unusable, and only for fields which are not blocked.
Erase
Blank out the contents of the entire selected row

Panel Systems Panel Editor Summary Page

29.5 Summary Page
The Summary page displays information pertaining to panel loading. The information is divided into two
sections. The first section on the left side shows the continuous and non-continuous load on each phase,
total continuous load, total non-continuous load, connected load on each phase, total connected load, code
demand load on each phase, total continuous code demand load, total non-continuous code demand load
and total code demand load.

The second section on the right side of the Summary page shows the operating load of the panel for all the
10 loading categories.

Connected Load
Connected load for a panel circuit is the rated load specified on the Rating Tab of the Schedule Page.
Continuous A / Continuous B / Continuous C
Displays the total connected VA, W, A and %PF for phase A / B / C for internal loads with Load Status
on the Description Tab of the Schedule page set to Continuous and for external loads connected to the
panel with Status on the Info page set to Continuous. Loads in OFF state are not included. These fields
are displayed for 3-Phase panels.
Continuous L1 / Continuous L2 / Continuous LL
Displays the total connected VA, W, A and %PF for phase L1 / L2 / LL for internal loads with Load
Status on the Description Tab of the Schedule page set to Continuous and for external loads connected to
the panel with Status on the Info page set to Continuous. Loads in OFF state are not included. These
fields are displayed for 1-Phase 3-Wire panels.

Total Continuous
Displays the total connected VA, W, A and %PF for continuous loads connected to all the phases. Loads
in OFF state are not included. This field is displayed for 1-Phase and 3-Phase panels.
Non-Continuous A / Non-Continuous B / Non-Continuous C
Displays the total connected VA, W, A and %PF for phase A / B / C for internal loads with Load Status
on the Description Tab of the Schedule page set to Non-Continuous and for external loads connected to
the panel with Status on the Info page set to Intermittent / Spare. Loads in OFF state are not included.
These fields are displayed for 3-Phase panels
Non-Continuous L1 / Non-Continuous L2 / Non-Continuous LL
Displays the total connected VA, W, A and %PF for phase L1 / L2 / LL for internal loads with Load
Status on the Description Tab of the Schedule page set to Non-Continuous and for external loads
connected to the panel with Status on the Info page set to Intermittent / Spare. Loads in OFF state are not
included. These fields are displayed for 1-Phase 3-Wire panels.
Total Non-Continuous
Displays the total connected VA, W, A and %PF for non-continuous loads connected to all the phases.
Loads in OFF state are not included. This field is displayed for 1-Phase and 3-Phase panels.
Connected A / Connected B / Connected C
Displays the total connected VA, W, A and %PF for all internal loads and external loads connected to
Phase A / B / C. Loads in OFF state are not included.
Connected L1 / Connected L2 / Connected LL
Displays the total connected VA, W, A and %PF for all internal loads and external loads connected to
Phase L1 / L2 / LL. Loads in OFF state are not included. These fields are displayed only for 1-Phase 3-
Wire panels.
Total Connected
Displays the total connected VA, W, A and %PF for loads connected to all the phases. Loads in OFF
state are not included.
Code Demand A / Code Demand B / Code Demand C
Displays the total code demand VA, W, A and %PF for all internal loads and external loads connected to
Phase A / B / C. Loads in OFF state are not included. These fields are displayed for 3-Phase panels.
Code Demand L1 / Code Demand L2 / Code Demand LL
Displays the total code demand VA, W, A and %PF for all internal loads and external loads connected to
Phase L1 / L2 / LL. Loads in OFF state are not included. These fields are displayed for 1-Phase 3-Wire
panels.
Total Code Demand Continuous
Displays the total connected VA, W, A and %PF for continuous loads connected to all the phases. Loads
in OFF state are not included.
Total Code Demand Non-Continuous
Displays the total connected VA, W, A and %PF for non-continuous loads connected to all the phases.
Loads in OFF state are not included.

Total Code Demand
Displays the total connected VA, W, A and %PF for loads connected to all the phases. Loads in OFF
state are not included.
Operating Load
For 3-Phase and 1-Phase 2-Wire panels this section displays the VA, W, A and %PF for all the ten
loading categories. For 1-Phase 3-Wire panels the operating load for phases L1, L2, and LL is displayed,
corresponding to each loading category.
Load Calculation
Load values displayed in the Summary page include both internal and external loads. The calculations
are performed based on the equations given below.
Connected Load
Total Continuous Load = (Internal ckt continuous VA load 3 QTY) + External ckt continuous VA load

Total Non-Continuous Load = (Internal ckt Non-continuous VA load 3 QTY) + External ckt Non-
continuous VA load

Total Connected Load = (Continuous VA + Non-Continuous VA)
Code Demand Load
Total Continuous Code Demand Loading = Continuous Load Multiplier 3 (Continuous Code Demand
Load)

Total Non-Continuous Code Demand Loading = Non-Continuous Load Multiplier 3 (Non-Continuous
Code Demand Load)

Code Demand Loading = (Total Continuous Code Demand Load) + (Total Non-Continuous Code
Demand Loading)
Operating Load
Operating Load (per loading category) = Connected VA 3 %Loading (per loading category)
Panel Systems Panel Editor Remarks Page

29.6 Remarks Page

User-Defined Info
UD Field A5
Panel Systems Panel Editor Remarks Page

UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchase Date

Panel Systems Panel Editor Comment Page

29.7 Comment Page

Panel Systems Panel Calculations

29.8 Panel Calculations
This section discusses the assumptions made in panel calculations, method used to calculate the panel
loading per phase, panel connected load, panel code demand load and the panel model used in
PowerStation Study modules.
29.8.1 Assumptions
Following are the assumptions made in panel calculation methods:

The rated voltage of an internal load connected to the panel is equal to the rated panel voltage. Note
that if a 1-Phase load is connected to a 3-Phase panel circuit, the rated voltage of the panel circuit is
(1/3) times the rated panel voltage.
The voltage of L1 or L2 phase in a 1-Phase 3-Wire panel is (1/2) times the rated voltage of the panel.
There are no losses in the feeders connecting a load to the panel.
Static loads are calculated based on their rated voltage.
29.8.2 Loading Per Phase
3-Phase 4-Wire or 3-Phase 3-Wire Panels
3-Phase Load
In case of a 3-phase load connected to a panel circuit, the load per phase is calculated based on load
rating, rated voltage, and rated power factor, loading percent. The rated VA, Watts, Amps, and power
factor for each phase of a 3-Phase load are displayed on the Rating Tab of the Schedule page.
1-Phase Load (Line-to-Neutral)
For a 1-Phase load connected between one of the phases of a three 3-Phase system and the neutral wire,
the load per phase is same as the values specified on the rating page. The rated VA, Watts, Amps and
power factor for a 1-Phase are displayed on the Rating Tab of the Schedule page.
1-Phase Load (Line-to-Line)
In case of a 1-Phase load (load connected between two phases of a 3-Phase system) connected to a panel
circuit, the method used to calculate the per phase load, is described below. Note that for a 1-Phase load
(with Pole = 2) the total rated VA, Watts, Amps and power factor, instead of per phase values, are
displayed on the Rating Tab of the Schedule Page.

Consider a case when a panel circuit feeds a 2-Phase load (that is a load connected between two phases of
a 3-Phase system). Assume that the load is connected between phases B and C as shown in the below
figure.
A

C
B

I
BC

Load

However, in the Summary page, this load needs to be spilt into phases B and C in order to be added to
individual phase loads. PowerStation splits the load in such a way that under the rated current phase load
current and the total load power are the same as the original load. Considering the following circuit, let

I
C
= -I
BC

C
LoadC
LoadB
B
A

I
B
= I
BC

The line voltage between phases B and C = V
BC

Phase A voltage = VA
Phase B voltage = VB
Phase C voltage = VC
Load current = IBC

Note that the current flowing into the load connected to phase B = I
B
= I
BC

And the current flowing into the load connected to phase C = I
C
= -I
BC

Angle by which load current I
BC
lags the load voltage =

Therefore, for load connected between phases B and C:

S
BC
= V
BC
.I
BC

P
BC
= V
BC
.I
BC
.cos
Q
BC
= V
BC
.I
BC
.sin

We can represent this case by the phasor diagram shown in the below figure. The phasor diagram shows
that the load current I
B
leads the phase B voltage V
B
by an angle of ( - 30). Also the phase current I
C

lags the phase C voltage V
C
by an angle of ( + 30).

Therefore, for load connected to phase B

SB = VB.IB
PB = VB.IB.cos ( - 30)
QB = VB.IB.sin ( - 30)

And, for load connected to phase C

SC = VC.IC
PC = VC.IC.cos ( + 30)
QC = VC.IC.sin ( + 30)

V
C

30
( + 30)
( - 30)
I
B
= I
BC
V
B
I
C
= -I
BC

V
A

V
BC

Similar calculations are made for loads connected between phase A and phase B, phase C and phase A or
any two phases.
1-Phase Load (Line-to-Neutral)
For a 1-Phase load connected between one of the phases of a three 3-Phase system and the neutral wire,
the load per phase is same as the values specified on the rating page

The rated VA, Watts, Amps and power factor for a 1-Phase are displayed on the Rating Tab of the
Schedule page.
A typical 1-Phase 3-Wire system in PowerStation is shown in the below diagram.

Load1-2
Load2
Load1
V
LL
= 240V
V
L2
= 120 V
V
L1
= 120 V
L2
L1


Line-to-Center Load
An example of a line-to-neutral load, in a 1-Phase 3-Wire panel is Load1 shown in the above figure. For
a load connected between line L1 or line L2 and the neutral wire, the voltage applied on the load is equal
to half of the Line-to-Line voltage.

The rated VA, Watts, Amps, and power factor for a load connected to L1 phase are displayed on the
Rating Tab of the Schedule page.
Line-to-Line Load
An example of a line-to-line load, in a 1-Phase 3-Wire panel is Load1-2 shown in the above figure. The
rated VA, Watts, Amps, and power factor for a load connected to LL phase are displayed on the Rating
Tab of the Schedule page.
29.8.3 Connected Load
This section describes the method used to calculate the total connected load, connected continuous load
and connected non-continuous load (VA, Watts, Amps and power factor) on the Summary Page of a panel
editor.

The connected load is calculated as the sum of all connected loads, both internal and external ones, which
have the ON State. The load rating values are used in calculating Connected Load, such as VA, W, and
PF for internal loads and rated KVA and PF for external loads. The Amp values are calculated based on
the nominal kV of panel terminal bus.

When calculating connected continuous load, either individual phases or the total load, it excludes:

Internal loads with Status set to Non-Continuous
External loads with Status set to Intermittent or Spare.

When calculating connected non-continuous load P
A
, P
B
and P
C
will exclude:

Internal loads and external loads with Status set to Continuous

The connected load is sum of the connected continuous load and connected non-continuous load.
29.8.4 Operating Load
The operating load for the panel is calculated for each of ten loading categories. It summarizes total load
power, current, and power factor, including both internal and external loads for all phases. Loads with
OFF State are not included in the operating load.

The operating load is calculated similar to that for the connected load. In additional to the factors used in
calculating the connected load, load percent for each individual load is considered, and for external loads
the demand factor is also considered. The Amp value is calculated based on the panel terminal bus
nominal kV. For a three-phase panel, this current is an average value.

29.8.5 Code Demand Load
This section describes the method used to calculate the total connected continuous code demand load,
connected non-continuous code demand load and total connected code demand load parameters (VA,
Watts, Amps and power factor) on the Summary Page of a panel editor.
Panel Code Factors
Code demand load depends on Panel Code Factors that are specified on the Panel Code Factor Editor.
The Panel Code Factor Editor can be invoked using the command Settings -> Panel Code in the
PowerStation Project menu. It is shown below:

Continuous Load Multiplier
This is used for code load calculation for all continuous designated panel loads. The default value is 1.25.
Non-Continuous Load Multiplier
This is used for code load calculation for all non-continuous designated panel loads. The default value is
1.25.
Load Type
Each panel circuit load has a load type. The load types are based on NEC 1999. The first 14 load types
are defined per NEC 1999 and cannot be changed. The remaining 10 load type fields are by default User
Defined 1 through User Defined 10. These load types can be changed. The Load Types are displayed
under the Description Tab of the Schedule Page under Load Type column for each panel circuit.


Notes:
NDU = Non Dwelling Unit
DU = Dwelling Unit
Ltg = Lighting
HCF = Health Care Facility
Units
Select from following options.

Volt-Amps
Largest Unit
# of Units

The first fourteen have fixed formats per NEC 1999.
Limit & Code Factors (CF)
The limit columns represent the VA limit, largest unit limit, or number of unit limit for a specified load
type based on selected format. There are five limit columns (Limit 1 through Limit 5). Corresponding to
each of the five limits there are five Code Factors. The sixth Code Factor is used for values exceeding the
fifth limit.
VA
Enter typical VA for the load type. This value appears as default value on the VA column of the Rating
Tab in the Schedule Page of the Panel editor whenever that particular load type is selected.
%PF
Enter typical power factor for the specified load type. This value appears as default value on the %PF
column of the Rating Tab in the Schedule Page of the Panel editor.
Calculation Procedure
This section lists the steps used to calculate the code demand load for a panel. In the following discussion
a panel load is a panel circuit with Link Type set to Internal or Ext.# and in ON state.

In calculating code demand load for internal loads, code factors as well as multiplication factors are
applied. However, for external loads, only multiplication factors are applied, which means that the code
factor for all external loads is assumed equal to 1.

Because PowerStation allows you to define different code factors for various types of internal loads.
Code demand load calculation for internal loads are done for each types of load separately and then
summed up. A given load type can be associated with one of three different code factor units: Volt-amps,
Largest Unit, and # of Unit. Each of the three code factor units has a special way of applying the code
factors, as described below.

Rules for Code Demand Load with Volt-Amps Units
The limits set for Volt-Amps load type are in VA. The following rules are applied to this type of loads.

For load VA up to Limit 1, multiply the load VA by CF1.
If Limit 2 is greater than zero, then for load VA greater than Limit 1 and less than Limit 2, multiply
the load VA by CF2; otherwise for multiply load VA greater than Limit 1 by CF2 and stop.
the load VA by CF3; otherwise multiply load VA greater than Limit 2 by CF3 and stop.
For load VA greater than Limit 5 multiply the load VA by CF6.
If for the given load type the status is Continuous, multiply the resulting total load VA by
Continuous Load Multiplier else multiply the resulting total load VA by Non-Continuous Load
Multiplier.

For example, let
Load Type = Generic
Load Status = Continuous
Continuous Load Multiplier (CLM) = 1.25

Load VA = 120,000
Limit 1 = 30000 CF1 = 1.0
Limit 2 = 50000 CF2 = 0.5
Limit 3 = 0 CF3 = 0.3
Limit 4 = 0 CF4 = 0
Limit 5 = 0 CF5 = 0
CF6 = 0

Therefore

Code Demand Load = (Limit 1 3 CF1 + Limit 2 3 CF2 + (Load VA Limit 1 Limit 2) 3 CF3) 3 CLM
= (30000 3 1 + 50000 3 0.5 + (120,000 50000 30000) 3 0.3) 3 1.25
= 83750


Rules for Code Demand Load with Largest Unit
The limits set for Largest Unit loads are in number of units. In calculation, all loads are first sorted in
descending order of rated VA and then multiply by a code factor according to the limits. Let

Limit 1 = N1
Limit 2 = N2
Limit 3 = N3
Limit 4 = N4
Limit 5 = N5

The following rules apply in the calculation:

Starting from the first panel load, if N1 > 0 then up to N1 panel loads multiply each panel load VA by
CF1; otherwise multiply each panel load by CF1 and stop.
Starting from the (N1 + 1) panel load, if N2 > 0 then up to N2 panel loads multiply each panel load
VA by CF2; otherwise multiply each remaining panel load by CF2 and stop.
VA by CF3; otherwise multiply each remaining panel load by CF3 and stop.
VA by CF4; otherwise multiply each remaining panel load by CF4 and stop
VA by CF5; otherwise multiply each remaining panel load by CF5 and stop
Starting from (N5 + 1) panel load, multiply each panel load by CF6 and stop.
If for the given load type the status is Continuous, multiply the resulting total load VA by
Continuous Load Multiplier; otherwise multiply the resulting total load VA by Non-Continuous Load
Multiplier.

For example, let
Load Type = Motor (for all loads below)

Load Name VA Quantity
Load 1 3000 2
Load 2 5000 1
Load 3 3400 1
Load 4 2500 1
Load 5 6200 1
Load 6 2000 1
Load 7 1900 1
Load 8 2200 1
Load 9 3300 1
Load 10 4300 1

Load Status for Load Type Motor = Continuous
Limits and Code Factor for Load Type Motor are

Limit 1 = 3 CF1 = 1.25
Limit 2 = 2 CF2 = 1.05
Limit 3 = 1 CF3 = 0.75
Limit 4 = 0 CF4 = 0.5
Limit 5 = 0 CF5 = 0
CF6 = 0

Sort the loads in descending order by VA, as shown below

Load Name VA
Load 5 6200
Load 2 5000
Load 10 4300
Load 3 3400
Load 9 3300
Load 1 - 1 3000
Load 1 - 2 3000
Load 4 2500
Load 8 2200
Load 6 2000
Load 7 1900

For simplicity, assume that the power factor is 100% for all the loads, PowerStation will perform complex
addition while adding up the load VA, that is it will take into account the power factor of individual loads
while adding the VA of loads.

Load with Code Factors = 1.25 3 (6200 + 5000 + 4300) +
1.05 3 (3400 + 3300) +
0.75 3 (3000) +
0.5 3 (3000 + 2500 + 2200 + 2000 + 1900)
= 7750 + 7035 + 2250 + 5800
= 22835

Code Demand Load = Load with Code Factors 3 CLM
= 21335 3 1.25
= 28543.75


Rules for Code Demand Load with # of Units
Similar to the Largest Unit loads, the limits for # of Units are also in number of load units. However,
in calculation, total load VA is multiplied by a coded factor according to total number of internal load
circuits connected. Let

Limit 1 = N1
Limit 2 = N2
Limit 3 = N3
Limit 4 = N4
Limit 5 = N5
and
N = Number of panel loads for the load type
Total_VA = Sum of all panel loads for the load type

The following rules apply in calculation:

If N1 > zero and N <= N1 then multiply Total_VA by CF1 and stop.
If N2 > 0 and N > N1 and N <= N2 then multiply Total_VA by CF2 and stop.
If N5 > 0 and N > N5 then multiply Total_VA by CF6 and stop.

If for the given load type the status is Continuous, multiply the resulting total load VA by Continuous
Load Multiplier or else multiply the resulting total load VA by Non-Continuous Load Multiplier.

One special case for # of Units load is that if the load type is Kitchen NDU, the code factor load
calculated as described above is compared to the sum of first two largest loads. If the sum of the first two
largest loads is larger than the calculated code factor load, then this load sum will be used in place of the
code factor load to be multiplied by the applicable Load Multiplier.

For example, let
Load Type = Motor (for all loads below)

Load Name Load Type VA Quantity
Load 1 Motor 3000 2
Load 2 Motor 5000 1
Load 3 Motor 3400 1
Load 4 Motor 2500 1
Load 5 Motor 6200 1
Load 6 Motor 2000 1
Load 7 Generic 1900 3
Load 8 Generic 2200 2

Load Status for Load Type Motor = Continuous
Load Status for Load Type Generic = Non-Continuous

Non-Continuous Load Multiplier (NCLM) = 0.75

Limits and Code Factor for Load Type Motor are

Limit 1 = 2 CF1 = 1.25
Limit 2 = 3 CF2 = 1.05
Limit 3 = 5 CF3 = 0.75
Limit 4 = 0 CF4 = 0.5
Limit 5 = 0 CF5 = 0
CF6 = 0

Limits and Code Factor for Load Type Generic are

Limit 1 = 4 CF1 = 1.5
Limit 2 = 5 CF2 = 1.25
Limit 3 = 7 CF3 = 1.15
Limit 4 = 0 CF4 = 0.5
Limit 5 = 0 CF5 = 0
CF6 = 0

For simplicity, assume that the power factor is 100% for all the loads, PowerStation will perform complex
addition while adding up the load VA, that is it will take into account the power factor of individual loads
while adding the VA of loads.

For Load Type = Motor
Number of loads, N = 7

For Load Type = Generic
Number of loads, N = 4

Motor Load
As N = 7, we will use CF3 = 0.75
Load with Code Factors = 0.75 (2 3 3000 + 5000 + 3400 + 2500 + 6200 + 2000)
= 18825
Code Demand Load = Load with Code Factors 3 CLM
= 18825 3 1.25
= 23531.25
Generic Load
As N = 5, we will use CF2
Load with Code Factors = 1.25 (1900 3 3 + 2200 3 2)
= 12625
Code Demand Load = Load with Code Factors X NCLM
= 18825 3 0.75

Panel Systems Panels in System Studies

29.9 Panels in System Studies
This section describes how the panel loads are considered in system studies. In the current version of
PowerStation, the downstream elements from a top panel are not considered in details in a system study.
Instead, all the loads connected downstream from the top panel are summed up to the top panel. A top
panel must be one that is connected to a three-phase bus and is not powered from another upstream panel.
29.9.1 Load Flow Type System Studies And Reliability Study
The load flow type system studies are the ones that require to perform load flow calculations, including
load flow, motor starting, harmonic load flow, transient stability, optimal power flow. In these studies as
well as reliability study, the downstream loads connected to a top panel are aggregated to get the total
panel load. And this top panel is considered as a single load in the system studies.
Radial System
In order to sum up load for a top panel, in the current version of PowerStation, It is required that the
system powered by a top panel must be a radial system. It is not allowed for downstream elements from a
top panel to form any loops. Furthermore, the top panel must be the only source for all the downstream
elements. Before carrying out a system study, PowerStation checks if loops are involved in any top
panels. If a loop is detected, an error message will be displayed and the calculation is stopped.
Top Panel Load
The load aggregated to a top panel includes panel internal loads as well as all the connected external
loads. Since external connections to a panel may involve any elements except three-winding
transformers, utilities, and generators, it can form a full radial system. In summing up the load for the top
panel, PowerStation considers all the loads connected. Because no load flow calculations are conducted,
the load summation does not include losses on the branches and equipment cables.

The aggregated load values are displayed in the Summary Page of the Panel Editor. Depending on the
study case options, appropriate load diversity factors can also be applied.
29.9.2 Short-Circuit Type System Studies
Because panels are mostly involved in low voltage power equipment, in the current version of
PowerStation, it is assumed that top panels do not make any short-circuit contributions to any fault
occurred in the system.

Panel Systems Panel Reports

29.10 Panel Reports
The Panel load schedule and load summary are reported, both, in the panel editor and in Crystal Reports
format.

The Crystal Reports format provides a summary of the panel information. The Panel Schedule Report
Manager helps you to view the output report.
29.10.1 Report Manager
To access the Report Manager, open the panel editor and click on the Print button located on the Schedule
page. The Report Manager allows you to select different sections of the report and view it via Crystal
Reports.

The header of the Report Manager displays the type of panel connection for which the report is being
generated.

Type of connection

There are several fields and buttons available on this page, as described below.
Panel Schedule
This page allows you to select different formats for viewing load data. They include Loading Schedule
and Loading Summary


Output Report Name
This field displays the name of the output report you want to view. This name will be the same as the
project file name.
Project File Name
This field displays the name of the project file from which the report is being generated, along with the
Help
OK / Cancel
Sample Panel Loading Schedule - 3 Phase 3 Wire


Report Header
The report header contains information about PowerStation Version, Project Name, Location of
Company, Contract Number, Engineer Name, File Name, Page Number, Date, Revision, and
Configuration. This information can be changed by going to the Project Menu and clicking on
Information.

Panel Rating
This section contains the rating information for the panel including the Main Disconnect used for the
panel. This information can be changed by opening the panel editor and navigating to the rating page.


Panel Rating Table
The panel rating table is prepared from the Schedule page Rating tab and is only a summary of the
actual table in the panel editor. The values entered in the Watts column are the rating of the connected
load and do not take quantity into consideration. The columns displayed are Load Name, Watts (shown
per phase), FDR Size, Number of Poles, CB Amp Rating, and Circuit Number. The table below the
rating table lists the Total Watts, Total Continuous Watts, and Total Non-Continuous Watts per phase.

Total Watts / phase = Total Continuous Watts / phase + Total Non-Continuous Watts / phase

Sample reports for 3 Phase 3 Wire and 1 Phase 3 Wire panel systems are shown below:

Sample Panel Loading Schedule - 1 Phase 3 Wire

For 1 Phase 3 Wire systems the Line-Neutral and Line-Line Ratings are displayed in the output report as
shown below.


Sample Panel Loading Summary - 3 Phase 3 Wire
The loading summary contains the same header and rating information as in the loading schedule. The
other data displayed is connected, continuous and non-continuous Volt-Amps, Watts, Amps, and %PF, all
displayed per phase as well as totals.


Loading Category
The loading category page is included in the Loading Summary page and displays Volt-Amps, Watts,
Amps (avg), and %PF for the ten user-defined loading categories.


Sample Panel Loading Summary - 1 Phase 3 Wire
The loading summary contains the same header and rating information as in the loading schedule. The
other data displayed is connected, continuous and non-continuous Volt-Amps, Watts, Amps, and %PF, all
displayed as Line-Neutral or Line-Line depending upon the load connection.


Loading Category
The loading category page is included in the Loading Summary page and displays Volt-Amps, Watts,
Amps (avg) and %PF for the ten user-defined loading categories based on Line-Neutral or Line-Line load
connections.


Etap PowerStation® 4.0-User Guide-Dr Tarek Nagla

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Etap PowerStation® 4.0-User Guide-Dr Tarek Nagla

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

December 2001

Operation Technology, Inc.

(Open Database Connectivity)

, Microsoft SQL Server

Open Services Architecture

2000 Professional or XP Professional

ODBC Driver for Oracle

(version 2.00.006325), or Microsoft

5.0% settings available, with

5.0% settings available, with two steps above

Fire Coating Type

Fire Coating Library

Fire Stop Library

Fire Wrap Library

Overload Heater Model

for Single1 model

. When you save the control block diagram

will automatically generate a scripting file XYZ.mdl, which we refer to as the

, which are recognized by ETAP PowerStation application

must be saved under the following

served customer of number Total

You might also like